Ford - Escape 4wd - Workshop Manual - 2008 - 2008

Factory Workshop Manual Make Ford Model Escape 4wd Engine and year V6-3.0L (2008) Please navigate through the PDF using the options provided by OnlyManuals.com on the sidebar. This manual was submitted by Anonymous Date 1st January 2018 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 8 Accessory Delay Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Communications Control Module: > 10-2-8 > Feb > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode' Communications Control Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode' TSB 10-2-8 02/15/10 SYNC SYSTEM DEFAULTS TO OR STAYS IN PRIVACY MODE, MULTIPLE VEHICLE LINES FORD: 2008-2009 Taurus X 2008-2010 Focus, Fusion, Mustang, Taurus, Edge, Escape, Expedition, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer, F-150, F-250, F-350, F-450 2009-2010 Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2010 MKZ 2009-2010 MKS 2008 Mark LT 2008-2010 MKX, Navigator 2010 MKT MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan, Mariner, Mountaineer ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2010 SYNC-equipped vehicles may express concern with their SYNC paired device defaulting, switching or staying on privacy mode. The customer may not be able to accept the call through the SYNC system or must answer the call manually on their personal device. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Set the Privacy mode to Off on the device and recheck Sync operation. 2. If necessary, test the device on another vehicle with the same version SYNC. If the concern is still present, the device is the concern. Continue with normal WSM Diagnostics. NOTE PRIVACY MODE MEANS THAT THE PHONE IS CONTROLLING THE AUDIO. SYNC ONLY MAKES REQUESTS TO THE PHONE TO TRANSFER THIS RESPONSIBILITY OR AUDIO TO SYNC. IF THE PHONE DOES NOT ACCEPT THIS REQUEST OR THERE IS A PROBLEM IN THE COMMUNICATION TO MAKE THIS HAPPEN, YOU ARE BY DEFAULT IN PRIVACY MODE. WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10-2-8 > Feb > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode' Communications Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode' TSB 10-2-8 02/15/10 SYNC SYSTEM DEFAULTS TO OR STAYS IN PRIVACY MODE, MULTIPLE VEHICLE LINES FORD: 2008-2009 Taurus X 2008-2010 Focus, Fusion, Mustang, Taurus, Edge, Escape, Expedition, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer, F-150, F-250, F-350, F-450 2009-2010 Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2010 MKZ 2009-2010 MKS 2008 Mark LT 2008-2010 MKX, Navigator 2010 MKT MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan, Mariner, Mountaineer ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2010 SYNC-equipped vehicles may express concern with their SYNC paired device defaulting, switching or staying on privacy mode. The customer may not be able to accept the call through the SYNC system or must answer the call manually on their personal device. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Set the Privacy mode to Off on the device and recheck Sync operation. 2. If necessary, test the device on another vehicle with the same version SYNC. If the concern is still present, the device is the concern. Continue with normal WSM Diagnostics. NOTE PRIVACY MODE MEANS THAT THE PHONE IS CONTROLLING THE AUDIO. SYNC ONLY MAKES REQUESTS TO THE PHONE TO TRANSFER THIS RESPONSIBILITY OR AUDIO TO SYNC. IF THE PHONE DOES NOT ACCEPT THIS REQUEST OR THERE IS A PROBLEM IN THE COMMUNICATION TO MAKE THIS HAPPEN, YOU ARE BY DEFAULT IN PRIVACY MODE. WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations View 151-25 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 25 C4014 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 26 Parking Assist Control Module: Service and Repair PARKING AID MODULE Removal and Installation 1. Remove the RH rear quarter trim panel. 2. Disconnect the electrical connectors. 3. Remove the 2 screws and the parking aid module. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Locations > Heated Seats Relay View 151-16 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Locations > Heated Seats Relay > Page 32 View 151-17 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Relay, Driver C3250 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Relay, Driver > Page 35 C3251 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heated Seat Relay, Driver Seat Heater Relay: Testing and Inspection Heated Seat Relay, Driver Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heated Seat Relay, Driver > Page 38 Seat Heater Relay: Testing and Inspection Heated Seat Relay, Passenger Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations View 151-1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 43 Electronic Brake Control Module: Diagrams C155 (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 44 C155 (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 45 Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module Material Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 46 Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. The anti-lock brake system (ABS) module can be damaged if exposed to these charges. NOTE: Do not swap ABS modules between vehicles, the ABS module and the hydraulic control unit (HCU) are calibrated as an assembly. 1. Remove the HCU. 2. Remove the jumper tube assembly bracket nut. ^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-inch). 3. Disconnect the jumper tubes fittings from the HCU and remove the jumper tube assembly. ^ To install, tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). 4. Remove the 4 ABS module screws and the ABS module. ^ To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-inch). 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 6. Configure the ABS module. 7. NOTE: Vehicle must be on level ground and at a complete stand still during calibration. Calibrate the ABS module. Follow the instructions on the scan tool. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay > Page 52 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay > Page 53 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Cooling Fan High Speed Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay > Page 56 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Cooling Fan Low Speed Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay > Page 57 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Cooling Fan Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 62 Blower Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 66 Compressor Clutch Relay: Description and Operation AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) CLUTCH RELAY (A/CCR) NOTE: The PCM PIDs WAC and wide open throttle air conditioning cutoff fault (WACF) are used to monitor the A/CCR output. The A/CCR is wired normally open. There is no direct electrical connection between the A/C switch or electronic automatic temperature control (EATC) module and the A/C clutch. The PCM receives a signal indicating that A/C is requested. For some applications, this message is sent through the communications network. When A/C is requested, the PCM checks other A/C related inputs that are available, such as A/C pressure switch and A/C cycling switch. If these inputs indicate A/C operation is OK, and the engine conditions are OK (coolant temperature, engine RPM, throttle position), the PCM grounds the A/CCR output, closing the relay contacts and sending voltage to the A/CCR. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 67 Compressor Clutch Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) Module View 151-13 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) Module > Page 72 View 151-13 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) Module Control Module HVAC: Diagrams Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) Module C2356A Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) Module > Page 75 C2356B Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) Module > Page 76 Control Module HVAC: Diagrams Electronic Manual Temperature Control (EMTC) Module C2357A Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) Module > Page 77 C2357B Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 08-23-12 > Nov > 08 > Temperature Display - Toggles From Fahrenheit To Celsius Instrument Panel Control Module: Customer Interest Temperature Display - Toggles From Fahrenheit To Celsius TSB 08-23-12 11/24/08 FRONT DISPLAY INTERFACE MODULE (FDIM) - OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY TOGGLES BETWEEN FAHRENHEIT/CELSIUS FORD: 2008-2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit an outside temperature display in the FDIM that toggles between Fahrenheit and Celsius. ACTION Reprogram the Instrument Cluster module to the latest calibration using IDS release 57.9 and higher with patch 13 or 58.2 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2008.11 DVD. Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 082312A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The Instrument Cluster, Authorization Decal Not Required.(Do Not Use With 12650D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 10849 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 08-19-2 > Sep > 08 > Instruments - Incorrect Autolock/Autounlock Status Instrument Panel Control Module: Customer Interest Instruments - Incorrect Autolock/Autounlock Status TSB 08-19-2 09/29/08 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER / MESSAGE CENTER - AUTOLOCK / AUTOUNLOCK / AUTOLAMP DISPLAY INCORRECT STATUS / MISSING FORD: 2008 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2008 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner This article supersedes TSB 08-15-5 to update the Issue Statement and Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2008 Escape, Mariner and Escape/Mariner Hybrid vehicles built, on or before 6/17/2008 and equipped with a message center instrument cluster may exhibit Autolock / Autounlock / Autolamp exit delay time features that falsely display "Off" regardless of actual feature On/Off status. Any one of these features changed individually may cause the remaining untouched features to default to actual "Off' status. In some vehicles the Autolock / Autounlock feature may not display at all in the message center. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. If the Autolock or Autounlock feature is not displayed in the message center when toggling through the setup, it will need to be enabled using the IDS. If the Autolock or Autounlock features are displayed in the message center skip to Step 2. a. Connect the Ford Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) service tool to the data link connector (DLC). b. ID the vehicle. c. Select the toolbox. d. Select Module Programming. e. Select Programmable Parameters. f. Select Power Door Locks. g. Select Enable for each Autolock / Autounlock selection. 2. Reprogram the instrument cluster to the latest calibration using IDS release B56.8 and higher or IDS release B57.1 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2008.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 081902A 2008 Escape, Escape 0.3 Hr. Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The Instrument Cluster, Authorization Decal Not Required. Includes Time To Enable Autolock Display. (Do Not Use With 12650D, 12651D, 12651D4) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 08-19-2 > Sep > 08 > Instruments - Incorrect Autolock/Autounlock Status > Page 91 DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 10849 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 08-23-12 > Nov > 08 > Temperature Display - Toggles From Fahrenheit To Celsius Instrument Panel Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Temperature Display - Toggles From Fahrenheit To Celsius TSB 08-23-12 11/24/08 FRONT DISPLAY INTERFACE MODULE (FDIM) - OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY TOGGLES BETWEEN FAHRENHEIT/CELSIUS FORD: 2008-2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit an outside temperature display in the FDIM that toggles between Fahrenheit and Celsius. ACTION Reprogram the Instrument Cluster module to the latest calibration using IDS release 57.9 and higher with patch 13 or 58.2 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2008.11 DVD. Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 082312A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The Instrument Cluster, Authorization Decal Not Required.(Do Not Use With 12650D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 10849 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 08-19-2 > Sep > 08 > Instruments - Incorrect Autolock/Autounlock Status Instrument Panel Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Incorrect Autolock/Autounlock Status TSB 08-19-2 09/29/08 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER / MESSAGE CENTER - AUTOLOCK / AUTOUNLOCK / AUTOLAMP DISPLAY INCORRECT STATUS / MISSING FORD: 2008 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2008 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner This article supersedes TSB 08-15-5 to update the Issue Statement and Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2008 Escape, Mariner and Escape/Mariner Hybrid vehicles built, on or before 6/17/2008 and equipped with a message center instrument cluster may exhibit Autolock / Autounlock / Autolamp exit delay time features that falsely display "Off" regardless of actual feature On/Off status. Any one of these features changed individually may cause the remaining untouched features to default to actual "Off' status. In some vehicles the Autolock / Autounlock feature may not display at all in the message center. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. If the Autolock or Autounlock feature is not displayed in the message center when toggling through the setup, it will need to be enabled using the IDS. If the Autolock or Autounlock features are displayed in the message center skip to Step 2. a. Connect the Ford Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) service tool to the data link connector (DLC). b. ID the vehicle. c. Select the toolbox. d. Select Module Programming. e. Select Programmable Parameters. f. Select Power Door Locks. g. Select Enable for each Autolock / Autounlock selection. 2. Reprogram the instrument cluster to the latest calibration using IDS release B56.8 and higher or IDS release B57.1 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2008.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 081902A 2008 Escape, Escape 0.3 Hr. Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The Instrument Cluster, Authorization Decal Not Required. Includes Time To Enable Autolock Display. (Do Not Use With 12650D, 12651D, 12651D4) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 08-19-2 > Sep > 08 > Instruments - Incorrect Autolock/Autounlock Status > Page 101 DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 10849 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 106 Backup Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 110 Parking Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations > Left Turn Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations > Left Turn Relay > Page 115 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Left Turn Relay Turn Signal Relay: Testing and Inspection Left Turn Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Left Turn Relay > Page 118 Turn Signal Relay: Testing and Inspection Right Turn Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Micro ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Mini ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair SMART JUNCTION BOX (SJB) Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Removal CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges, damage may result. NOTE: Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 129 - The smart junction box (SJB) is also known as the generic electronic module (GEM). - Prior to the replacement of the module, it is necessary to upload the module configuration information to the appropriate scan tool. This information must be downloaded into the new module after installation. - The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) functionality is integral to the SJB/GEM. - The steps included in the SJB/GEM removal and installation procedure are critical to restoring the vehicle security and tire pressure monitoring systems to normal operation. A new SJB/GEM is delivered in a manufacturing mode with 7 pre-set DTCs related to the TPMS. To clear the DTCs, successful configuration of the SJB/GEM must occur, followed by successful TPMS sensor training, and a successful self-test, including clearing of the DTCs. The DTCs are as follows: B106D (Tire Pressure Monitor System [TPMS] Initiators Not Configured) - B2477 (Module Configuration Failure) - B2868 (Left Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - B2869 (Right Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - B2870 (Right Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - B2871 (Left Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - C2780 (ECU in Manufacturer Sub-State) 1. NOTE: This step is necessary only if the SJB/GEM is being replaced. Upload the module configuration information from the SJB/GEM. 2. Remove the floor console SJB/GEM cover. 3. Remove the transmission selector lever bezel from the floor console finish panel. 4. Apply the parking brake. 5. Remove the parking brake lever boot from the floor console finish panel. 6. Remove the floor console finish panel. 7. Disconnect the 7 electrical connectors. 8. Remove the 2 bolts and the SJB/GEM. Installation 1. Install the SJB/GEM. - Install the 2 bolts. - Connect the 7 electrical connectors. 2. Install the floor console finish panel. 3. Install the parking brake lever boot into the floor console finish panel. 4. Release the parking brake. 5. Install the transmission selector lever bezel into the floor console finish panel. 6. NOTE: If the SJB/GEM was not replaced, this is the last step that is necessary. Install the floor console SJB/GEM cover. 7. NOTE: - When successful, this step provides the calibration necessary for the SJB/GEM operation and clears DTCs B2477 and B106D. The clearing of these DTCs indicates the calibration data has been successfully downloaded to the new SJB/GEM. - When successful, this step also programs the remote transmitter portion of the integrated keyhead transmitter (IKT) keys into the new SJB. In the event the IKTs (remote transmitter portion only) do not program to the new SJB, cycle each IKT key to the ON position for a minimum of 6 seconds. This action will program the remote transmitter portion of the IKT key into the new SJB. Download the SJB/GEM configuration information from the scan tool. 8. NOTE: When successful, this step clears DTCs B2868, B2869, B2870 and B2871. The clearing of these DTCs indicates the SJB/GEM has recognized the tire pressure sensors during the training procedure. Train the tire pressure sensors. 9. NOTE: DTC C2780 will not clear if any other DTCs are present in the SJB/GEM. When successful, this step will clear the DTC C2780. Carry out the SJB/GEM on-demand self-test by clearing DTCs, and then retrieving DTCs to confirm all DTCs have been cleared. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box Relay Box: Locations Smart Junction Box Note: The fuse panel is located on the right-hand side of the center console, by the instrument panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuse cover. Press the tabs on the top and bottom of the fuse cover to remove. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 134 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 135 Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 136 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box (BJB) C1035A C1035B Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 139 C1035C Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 140 Relay Box: Diagrams Smart Junction Box (SJB) C2280A Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 141 C2280B (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 142 C2280B (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 143 C2280C Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 144 C2280D Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 145 C2280E Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 146 C2280F Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 147 C2280G Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box Relay Box: Application and ID Smart Junction Box Note: The fuse panel is located on the right-hand side of the center console, by the instrument panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuse cover. Press the tabs on the top and bottom of the fuse cover to remove. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 150 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 151 Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 152 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Control Module: Description and Operation TORQUE BASED ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL (ETC) Overview The torque based ETC is a hardware and software strategy that delivers an engine output torque (via throttle angle) based on driver demand (pedal position). It uses an electronic throttle body, the powertrain control module (PCM), and an accelerator pedal assembly to control the throttle opening and engine torque. Torque based ETC enables aggressive automatic transmission shift schedules (earlier upshifts and later downshifts). This is possible by adjusting the throttle angle to achieve the same wheel torque during shifts, and by calculating this desired torque, the system prevents engine lugging (low RPM and low manifold vacuum) while still delivering the performance and torque requested by the driver. It also enables many fuel economy/emission improvement technologies such as variable camshaft timing (VCT) (deliver same torque during transitions). Torque based ETC also results in less intrusive vehicle and engine speed limiting, along with smoother traction control. Other benefits of ETC are: eliminate cruise control actuators - eliminate idle air control (IAC) valve - better airflow range - packaging (no cable) - more responsive powertrain at altitude and improved shift quality The ETC system illuminates a powertrain malfunction indicator (wrench) on the instrument cluster when a concern is present. Concerns are accompanied by diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and may also illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) The ETB has the following characteristics: - The throttle actuator control (TAC) motor is a DC motor controlled by the PCM (requires 2-wires). - There are 2 designs: parallel and in-line. The parallel design has the motor under the bore parallel to the plate shaft. The motor housing is integrated into the main housing. The in-line design has a separate motor housing. - An internal spring is used in both designs to return the throttle plate to a default position. The default position is typically a throttle angle of 7 to 8 degrees from the hard stop angle. - The closed throttle plate hard stop is used to prevent the throttle from binding in the bore (approximately 0.75 degree). This hard stop setting is not adjustable and is set to result in less airflow than the minimum engine airflow required at idle. - The required idle airflow is provided by the plate angle in the throttle body assembly. This plate angle controls idle, idle quality, and eliminates the need for an IAC valve. - There is 1 reference voltage and 1 signal return circuit between the PCM and the ETB. The reference voltage circuit and the signal return circuit is shared with the reference voltage circuits and signal return circuits used by the APP sensor. There are also 2 TP signal circuits for redundancy. The redundant TP signals are required for increased monitoring reasons. The first TP signal (TP1) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the second signal (TP2) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). The TP2 signal reaches a limit of approximately 4.5 volts at approximately 45 degrees of throttle angle. Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Depending on the application either a 2-track or 3-track APP sensor is used. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) System Strategy ETC System With A 3-Track APP Sensor Failure Mode And Effects Management (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 158 ETC System With A 3-Track APP Sensor Failure Mode And Effects Management (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 159 ETC System With A 2-Track APP Sensor Failure Mode And Effects Management Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 160 The torque based ETC strategy was developed to improve fuel economy and to accommodate variable camshaft timing (VCT). This is possible by not coupling the throttle angle to the driver pedal position. Uncoupling the throttle angle (produce engine torque) from the pedal position (driver demand) allows the powertrain control strategy to optimize fuel control and transmission shift schedules while delivering the requested wheel torque. The ETC monitor system is distributed across 2 processors within the PCM: the main powertrain control processor unit (CPU) and a separate monitoring processor. The primary monitoring function is carried out by the independent plausibility check (IPC) software, which resides on the main processor. It is responsible for determining the driver-demanded torque and comparing it to an estimate of the actual torque delivered. If the generated torque exceeds driver demand by a specified amount, appropriate corrective action is taken. APP and TP Sensor Inputs Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Check Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Check Electronic Throttle Actuator Control (TAC) Output Electronic TAC Operation Check Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations Engine Control Module: Locations View 151-4 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 164 View 151-5 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 165 View 151-6 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 166 View 151-9 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 167 Engine Control Module: Diagrams C175B (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 168 C175B (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 169 C175E (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 170 C175E (Part 2) C175E (Part 3) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 171 C175T (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 172 C175T (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Engine Control Module: Procedures FLASH ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY (EEPROM) Description The EEPROM is contained in an integrated circuit internal to the powertrain control module (PCM). The EEPROM contains the vehicle strategy including calibration information specific to the vehicle, and is capable of being programmed or flashed repeatedly. As part of the calibration there is an area referred to as the vehicle identification (VID) block. The VID block is programmed when installing a new PCM as described under Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM. Failure to carry out this procedure may generate DTCs PI635 or P1639. The VID block in an existing PCM can also be tailored to accommodate various hardware or parameter changes made to the vehicle since production. Failure to carry out this procedure properly may generate DTC P1635, Tire/Axle Ratio out of Acceptable Range. An incorrect tire/axle ratio is one of the main causes for DTC P1639. This is described under Making Changes to the VID Block and also under Making Changes to the PCM Calibration. The VID block contains many items used by the strategy for a variety of functions. Some of these items include the vehicle identification number (VIN), octane adjust, fuel octane, fuel type, vehicle speed limit, tire size, axle ratio, the presence of speed control, and 4-wheel drive electronic shift-on-the-fly (ESOF) versus manual shift-on-the-fly (MSOF). Only items applicable to the vehicle hardware and supported by the VID block is displayed on the scan tool. When changing items in the VID block, the strategy places range limits on certain items such as tire and axle ratio. The number of times the VID block may be reconfigured is limited. When this limit is reached, the scan tool displays a message indicating the need to flash the PCM again to reset the VID block. Programming can be carried out by a local Ford dealer or any non-Ford facility. Refer to the scan tool manufacturer's instruction manual for details. Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM A new PCM contains the latest strategy and calibration level for a particular vehicle. However, the VID block is blank and needs programming. There are 2 procedures available. The first is an automatic data transfer from the old PCM to the new PCM, and the second is manual data entry into the new PCM. Automatic data transfer is carried out if the old PCM is capable of communicating. This is done by using a scan tool to retrieve data from the old PCM before removing it from the vehicle. The stored data can then be downloaded to the new PCM after it has been installed. Carry out manual data entry if the old module is damaged or incapable of communicating. Remove and install a new PCM. Using a compatible scan tool, select and carry out the module/parameter programming, referring to the scan tool manufacturer's instruction manual. Make certain that all parameters are included. Failure to properly program tire size in revolutions per mile, (rev/mile equals 63,360 divided by the tire circumference in inches), axle ratio, 4x4/4x2, and/or MSOF/ESOF may result in DTCs P1635 and P1639. You may be instructed to contact the As-Built Data Center for the information needed to manually update the VID block with the scan tool. Contact the center only if the old PCM cannot be used or the data is corrupt. For Ford and Lincoln Mercury technicians, contact your National Hotline or the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website for As-Built data listed under the Service Publications Index. Non-Ford technicians use the Motorcraft(R) website at www.motorcraft.com. From the Motorcraft(R) homepage, use the search function to find the Module Programming or As-Built Data. For Ford and Lincoln Mercury technicians, check the Programmable Module Installation link on the PTS website for quick Programmable Module data information by vehicle. Making Changes to the VID Block A PCM which is programmed may require changes to be made to certain VID information to accommodate the vehicle hardware. Refer to Module Reprogramming on the scan tool. Making Changes to the PCM Calibration At certain times, the entire EEPROM needs to be completely reprogrammed. This is due to changes made to the strategy or calibration after production, or the need to reset the VID block because it has reached its limit. Refer to Module Reprogramming on the scan tool. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 175 Engine Control Module: Removal and Replacement POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) Removal 1. NOTE: Any PCM replacement will require that ALL customer keys are available to be programmed at the time of installation. PCM replacement DOES NOT require new keys. Retrieve the module configuration. Carry out the module configuration retrieval steps of the Programmable Module Installation procedure. 2. Remove the 2 PCM stud bolt nuts and position the wiring harness and the manifold absolute pressure sensor aside. 3. Disconnect the 3 PCM electrical connectors. 4. Remove the 2 stud bolts and the PCM. Installation 1. Install the PCM and the 2 stud bolts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 2. Connect the 3 PCM electrical connectors. 3. Position the manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor and the wiring harness and install the 2 PCM stud bolt nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 4. Restore the module configuration. Carry out the module configuration restore steps of the Programmable Module Installation procedure. 5. Reprogram the passive anti-theft system (PATS). Carry out the Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 179 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations View 151-27 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 184 C4033 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 188 Fuel Pump Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 192 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations Air Bag Control Module: Locations View 151-13 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 197 View 151-22 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 198 Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams C2041A Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 199 C2041B (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 200 C2041B (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 201 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) Removal WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the safety canopy and cause serious personal injury or death. - If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in a crash. - To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges, damage can result. - When installing a new restraints control module (RCM), it is necessary to carry out programmable module installation (PMI). Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraint control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - When installing a new RCM, always make sure the correct RCM is being installed. If an incorrect RCM is installed, erroneous DTCs will result. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. 1. If installing a new RCM, carry out the steps necessary to prepare for programmable module installation (PMI). 2. Depower the SRS. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 202 3. Remove the center console. 4. Remove the lower LH center instrument panel finish panel. - Remove the pin-type retainer. - Release the 2 retainer hooks from the instrument panel brace. 5. Position back the carpet on the LH and RH tunnel to access the RCM. 6. Disconnect the small RCM electrical connector. 7. Disconnect the large RCM electrical connector. 1 Pinch the thumb tab and pivot the connector position assurance lever all the way back until it stops. 2 Pull out and disconnect the RCM electrical connector. 8. Remove the 3 bolts and RCM. Installation 1. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque. Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of personal injury or death in a crash. Install the RCM and 3 bolts. Tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft). 2. Make sure the connector position assurance lever is in the full release position before attempting to connect the connector. 3. CAUTION: Putting the large restraints control module (RCM) electrical connector into the RCM on an angle can cause bad electrical connections and damage components. Position the large RCM electrical connector into the RCM. - CAUTION: Do not push the connector to the point where the lever pivots and seats itself. Light pressure is needed to get the Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 203 connector into position on the restraints control module (RCM) before using the lever to fully seat the connector. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure. With the large RCM electrical connector uniformly aligned to the RCM, lightly push in until a subtle audible click is heard and slight resistance is felt. 4. Connect the RCM electrical connector. - Pivot the connector position assurance lever toward the RCM, drawing the connector in to the RCM. Make sure the thumb tab is engaged to the retainer on the RCM and locked in place. 5. Connect the small RCM electrical connector. 6. Position back the carpet on the LH and RH tunnel to its original position. 7. Install the lower LH center instrument panel finish panel. - Attach the 2 retainer hooks to the instrument panel brace. - Install the pin-type retainer. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 204 8. Install the center console. 9. Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. 10. When installing a new RCM, carry out the steps necessary to complete PMI. 11. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition switch from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition switch back to ON and visually monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn OFF. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will: fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured). The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Locations View 151-17 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 208 C3285 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 213 Starter Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations Steering Control Module: Locations View 151-1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 219 View 151-13 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 220 Steering Control Module: Diagrams C1463A Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 221 C1463B Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations View 151-22 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 227 C3184 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 228 Control Module: Service and Repair Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Control Module Removal and Installation 1. Remove the floor console. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. Lift upward on the module to release the fasteners from the shifter base. Remove the four wheel drive (4WD) control module. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Relays and Modules > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 233 Heated Glass Element Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-27 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left C4009 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 241 C4011 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 242 C4010 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 243 C4012 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 244 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Service and Repair PARKING AID SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. NOTE: The rear bumper cover removal is only necessary for access to the outer parking aid sensors. The inner parking aid sensors do not require rear bumper cover removal for access. Remove the rear bumper cover. 3. Press the retaining tabs and remove the parking aid sensor. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Parking Assist Switch: Service and Repair PARKING AID SWITCH Removal and Installation 1. Remove the lower instrument panel center finish panel. 2. Press the retaining tabs and remove the parking aid switch. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Driver Side View 151-18 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Driver Side > Page 253 View 151-19 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Side C505 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Side > Page 256 C605 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 257 Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 258 Power Door Lock Switch: Service and Repair DOOR LOCK CONTROL SWITCH Removal and Installation 1. Remove the front door trim panel. 2. Release the tabs and remove the door lock control switch. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-18 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 262 C527 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 263 Power Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 264 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 265 Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair EXTERIOR MIRROR CONTROL SWITCH Removal and Installation 1. Remove the LH sail panel. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. Remove the exterior mirror control switch. - Press the 2 retaining tabs. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-16 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 269 C352 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 270 Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams C4039 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair SEAT CONTROL SWITCH Exploded View Seat Backrest - Front (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 277 Seat Backrest - Front (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 278 Seat Cushion - Driver (Part 1) Seat Cushion - Driver (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 279 Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 280 Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger (Part 2) Removal and Installation 1. Remove the recliner handle cover. 2. Remove the seat control switch knob. 3. Remove the 3 screws and the outboard front seat side cushion shield. - Disconnect the seat control switch electrical connector. 4. Remove the seat control switch. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-26 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 284 C912 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 285 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-21 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 289 C478 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Switch: > 10-5-1 > Mar > 10 > Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Customer Interest Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening TSB 10-5-1 03/29/10 LIFTGATE OPENING UN-COMMANDED OR NOT OPENING WHEN COMMANDED WHEN PARKED - INTERMITTENT FORD: 2008-2009 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/31/2008 may exhibit the liftgate opening un-commanded, or not opening when commanded while vehicle is parked. This may be due to water intrusion into the switch connector causing corrosion at the liftgate rear switch. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics. 1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05. 2. Remove the four (4) liftgate trim bezel nuts and remove the bezel from the liftgate. 3. Closely inspect the liftgate release switch and harness connector pins for signs of water intrusion and/or corrosion. Is any evidence of water intrusion or corrosion present? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Refer to WSM, Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics. b. Yes - Replace the liftgate release switch per WSM, Section 501-14, and install new Pigtail Wiring Kit per Wiring Diagram, Section 5-1. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Switch: > 10-5-1 > Mar > 10 > Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening > Page 298 100S01A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Liftgate Release Switch And The Wiring Pigtail (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 13412 12 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Switch: > 10-5-1 > Mar > 10 > Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening Trunk / Liftgate Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening TSB 10-5-1 03/29/10 LIFTGATE OPENING UN-COMMANDED OR NOT OPENING WHEN COMMANDED WHEN PARKED - INTERMITTENT FORD: 2008-2009 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/31/2008 may exhibit the liftgate opening un-commanded, or not opening when commanded while vehicle is parked. This may be due to water intrusion into the switch connector causing corrosion at the liftgate rear switch. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics. 1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05. 2. Remove the four (4) liftgate trim bezel nuts and remove the bezel from the liftgate. 3. Closely inspect the liftgate release switch and harness connector pins for signs of water intrusion and/or corrosion. Is any evidence of water intrusion or corrosion present? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Refer to WSM, Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics. b. Yes - Replace the liftgate release switch per WSM, Section 501-14, and install new Pigtail Wiring Kit per Wiring Diagram, Section 5-1. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Switch: > 10-5-1 > Mar > 10 > Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening > Page 304 100S01A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Liftgate Release Switch And The Wiring Pigtail (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 13412 12 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 305 View 151-21 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 306 C456 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Release Switch Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Service and Repair Liftgate Release Switch LIFTGATE RELEASE SWITCH Removal and Installation 1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. 2. Remove the 4 liftgate trim bezel nuts and remove the bezel from the liftgate. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). - Disconnect the electrical connector. - Using the appropriate tool, press the tabs and remove the liftgate release switch. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Release Switch > Page 309 Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Service and Repair Liftgate Release Switch - Liftgate Window LIFTGATE RELEASE SWITCH - LIFTGATE WINDOW Removal and Installation 1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. 2. Remove the 4 liftgate trim bezel nuts and remove the bezel from the liftgate. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). - Disconnect the liftgate window release switch electrical connector. - Using the appropriate tool, press the tabs and remove the liftgate window release switch. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > ABS Sensor Block > Component Information > Locations View 151-22 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > ABS Sensor Block > Component Information > Locations > Page 314 C3296 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > ABS Sensor Block > Component Information > Locations > Page 315 ABS Sensor Block: Service and Repair Stability Control Sensor Cluster Stability Control Sensor Cluster Removal and Installation WARNING: Wear high-voltage insulated safety gloves and a face shield when working with high-voltage batteries or cables. The high-voltage insulated safety gloves should be of the appropriate safety and protection rating. Inspect the gloves before use and always wear them with the leather outer glove. Any hole in the rubber insulating glove is a potential entry point for high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death. 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the floor console. 3. NOTE: When installing the sensor cluster the electrical connector must face the passenger seat. Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. Remove the 2 sensor cluster bolts. ^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-inch). 5. Remove the stability control sensor cluster. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 319 C124 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Lateral Accelerometer > Component Information > Service and Repair Lateral Accelerometer: Service and Repair Stability Control Sensor Cluster Stability Control Sensor Cluster Removal and Installation WARNING: Wear high-voltage insulated safety gloves and a face shield when working with high-voltage batteries or cables. The high-voltage insulated safety gloves should be of the appropriate safety and protection rating. Inspect the gloves before use and always wear them with the leather outer glove. Any hole in the rubber insulating glove is a potential entry point for high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death. 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the floor console. 3. NOTE: When installing the sensor cluster the electrical connector must face the passenger seat. Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. Remove the 2 sensor cluster bolts. ^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-inch). 5. Remove the stability control sensor cluster. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-22 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 326 C2015 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 327 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the parking brake release handle bolt. ^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-inch). 2. Disconnect the warning indicator switch electrical connector. 3. Remove the bolt and warning indicator switch. ^ To install, tighten bolt to 10 Nm (89 lb-inch). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-13 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 331 C2114 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 332 Traction Control Switch: Service and Repair Stability/Traction Control Switch Removal and Installation Removal and Installation 1. Remove the lower instrument cluster center finish panel. ^ Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. Depress the 4 tabs and remove the stability/traction control switch assembly. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Right Front View 151-2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Right Front > Page 337 View 151-24 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Right Front > Page 338 View 151-25 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Right Front > Page 339 View 151-2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front C150 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 342 C440 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 343 C160 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 344 C426 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor - Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Front Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. NOTE: The electrical connector is located in the engine compartment. Disconnect the electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 347 3. CAUTION: Care must be taken during the removal of the grommet to prevent damage. If the grommet is damaged, a new sensor may need to be installed, even though the sensor is functional in all other aspects. Remove the grommet from the body. ^ When removing the body grommet, rotate the grommet into a position which allows the use of a small screwdriver to release the tabs on the underside of the body grommet. These 2 tabs are located at right angles to the sensor wire. 4. Remove the front wheel speed sensor harness from the retainer. 5. Remove the front wheel speed sensor harness-to-body bolt. ^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-inch). 6. Remove the front wheel speed sensor harness-to-strut bracket bolt. ^ To install, tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). 7. Remove the front wheel speed sensor bolt from the wheel knuckle. ^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-inch). 8. NOTE: Clean off any foreign material that may have collected around the sensor before removal. Remove the front wheel speed sensor. 9. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 348 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor - Rear Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. CAUTION: Care must be taken during the removal of the grommet to prevent damage. If the grommet is damaged, a new sensor may need to be installed, even though the sensor is functional in all other aspects. Remove the grommet from the body. ^ When removing the body grommet, rotate the grommet into a position which allows the use of a small screwdriver to release the tabs on the underside of the grommet. These 2 tabs are located at right angles to the sensor wire. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 349 3. Disconnect the rear wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 4. Remove the rear wheel speed sensor harness from the harness retainer. 5. Remove the 3 rear wheel speed sensor harness bolts. ^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-inch). 6. NOTE: Clean off any debris that may have collected around the sensor before removal. Remove the rear wheel speed sensor bolt from the wheel knuckle. ^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-inch). 7. Remove the rear wheel speed sensor. 8. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 350 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Front Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Front Removal and Installation 1. The front wheel speed sensor ring is integral to the front halfshaft and cannot be repaired separately. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 351 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Rear Removal and Installation Front wheel drive (FWD) vehicles 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the rear wheel hub nut. ^ To install, tighten to 290 Nm (214 lb-ft). 3. Remove the sensor ring from the wheel hub. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. All wheel drive (AWD) vehicles 5. The rear wheel speed sensor ring is integral to the rear axle halfshaft and cannot be repaired separately. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair Yaw Rate Sensor: Service and Repair Stability Control Sensor Cluster Stability Control Sensor Cluster Removal and Installation WARNING: Wear high-voltage insulated safety gloves and a face shield when working with high-voltage batteries or cables. The high-voltage insulated safety gloves should be of the appropriate safety and protection rating. Inspect the gloves before use and always wear them with the leather outer glove. Any hole in the rubber insulating glove is a potential entry point for high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death. 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the floor console. 3. NOTE: When installing the sensor cluster the electrical connector must face the passenger seat. Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. Remove the 2 sensor cluster bolts. ^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-inch). 5. Remove the stability control sensor cluster. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Radiator Cooling Fan Speed Sensor: Description and Operation FAN SPEED SENSOR (FSS) Cooling Fan Clutch With FSS The FSS is a Hall-effect sensor that measures the cooling fan clutch speed by generating a waveform with a frequency proportional to the fan speed. If the cooling fan clutch is moving at a relatively low speed, the sensor produces a signal with a low frequency. As the cooling fan clutch speed increases, the sensor generates a signal with a higher frequency. The PCM uses the frequency signal generated by the FSS as a feedback for closed loop control of the cooling fan clutch. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations View 151-6 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 363 C1064 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 364 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR Typical Thread Type ECT Sensor The ECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The PCM uses the ECT input for fuel control and for cooling fan control. There are 3 types of ECT sensors, threaded, push-in, and twist-lock. The ECT sensor is located in an engine coolant passage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 365 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Drain the cooling system. 2. Disconnect the engine coolant temperature sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the ECT sensor. - Pull upward on the locking tab. - Rotate the sensor counterclockwise and remove. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-9 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 369 C1164 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 370 Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE (CHT) SENSOR Typical CHT Sensor The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with the temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. The CHT sensor is installed in the cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT sensor can provide complete engine temperature information and can be used to infer coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM initiates a fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system concern such as low coolant or coolant loss could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations > Deactivator Switch View 151-22 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations > Deactivator Switch > Page 376 View 151-22 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Diagrams > Deactivator Switch C277 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Diagrams > Deactivator Switch > Page 379 C278 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 380 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch Typical BPP Switch The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal to the PCM indicating that the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and is mounted on the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as follows: to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake pedal is applied. - to the antilock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM. - to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ABS module interprets the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Brake Pedal Switch (BPS)/Brake Deactivator Switch The BPS, also called the brake deactivator switch, is for vehicle speed control deactivation. A normally closed switch supplies battery positive voltage (B+) to the PCM when the brake pedal is not applied. When the brake pedal is applied, the normally closed switch opens and power is removed from the PCM. On some applications the normally closed BPS, along with the normally open BPP switch, are used for a brake rationality test within the PCM. The PCM misfire monitor profile learn function may be disabled if a brake switch concern occurs. If one or both brake pedal inputs to the PCM is not changing states when they were expected to, a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is set by the PCM strategy. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 381 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Service and Repair SPEED CONTROL DEACTIVATOR SWITCH Removal and Installation CAUTION: Do not service the brake pedal, brake booster, or master cylinder without first removing the speed control deactivator switch. Do not press or pull on the brake pedal when installing or removing the speed control deactivator switch otherwise misadjustment or damage to the switch may occur. Do not install the speed control deactivator switch without the brake pedal arm secured to the brake booster push rod. 1. Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. Rotate the speed control deactivator switch 45 degrees counterclockwise to disengage it from the bracket. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Description and Operation Clutch Switch: Description and Operation CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION (CPP) SWITCH Typical Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch The CPP switch is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch pedal position. The PCM provides a low current voltage on the CPP circuit. When the CPP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low through the SIG RTN circuit. The CPP input to the PCM is used to detect a reduction in engine load. The PCM uses the load information for mass air flow and fuel calculations. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Speed Control Actuator Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Speed Control Actuator SPEED CONTROL ACTUATOR Removal 1. Press the locking tab and rotate the speed control cable cap to remove. 2. Disconnect the speed control cable from the speed control actuator pulley. 1 Gently push the retaining spring. 2 Disconnect the speed control cable slug from the speed control actuator pulley. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Speed Control Actuator > Page 389 3. Remove the 3 speed control actuator screws and the speed control actuator. - Disconnect the electrical connector. Installation CAUTION: A new speed control cable must be installed. 1. Install the speed control actuator and the 3 speed control actuator screws. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). - Connect the electrical connector. 2. Insert the speed control cable slug into the speed control actuator pulley slot. 1 Gently push the retaining spring. 2 Insert the speed control cable slug completely into the speed control actuator pulley slot. 3. CAUTION: - It is necessary to squarely seat the speed control cable cap and seal around the speed control actuator pulley. - Incorrect wrapping of the speed control cable around the speed control actuator pulley may result in high idle conditions. NOTE: Make sure the rubber seal is fully seated onto the speed control cable cap. Align the speed control cable cap tabs with the slots in the speed control actuator housing. 4. Rotate the speed control cable cap until the locking tab engages. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Speed Control Actuator > Page 390 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Speed Control Actuator > Page 391 Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Speed Control Switch SPEED CONTROL SWITCH Escape and Mariner Shown, Hybrid Similar Removal and Installation 1. Remove the speed control switch by pulling the switch toward the rear of the vehicle. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations Oil Pressure Sender: Locations View 151-6 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 396 View 151-8 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 397 C103 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 398 Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch Material Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 399 Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the pin-type retainer, 5 bolts and the RH lower splash shield. ^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 3. NOTE: Lubricate the engine oil filter gasket with clean engine oil prior to installing. Remove the engine oil filter. ^ To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in) and then rotate an additional 180 degrees. 4. Disconnect the engine oil pressure (EOP) switch electrical connector. 5. Remove the EOP switch. ^ To install, tighten to 14 Nm (10 lb-ft). 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Apply Thread Sealant with PTFE to the EOP switch threads. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch, Engine > Component Information > Description and Operation Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE (EOT) SENSOR Typical EOT Sensor The EOT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The EOT sensor measures the temperature of the engine oil. The sensor is typically threaded into the engine oil lubrication system. The PCM can use the EOT sensor input to determine the following: - On variable camshaft timing (VCT) applications the EOT input is used to adjust the VCT control gains and logic for camshaft timing. - The PCM can use EOT sensor input in conjunction with other PCM inputs to determine oil degradation. - The PCM can use EOT sensor input to initiate a soft engine shutdown. To prevent engine damage from occurring as a result of high oil temperatures, the PCM has the ability to initiate a soft engine shutdown. Whenever engine RPM exceeds a calibrated level for a certain period of time, the PCM begins reducing power by disabling engine cylinders. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations View 151-2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 407 C132 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 408 Temperature Sensor - Ambient Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 409 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Service and Repair AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Detach the ambient air temperature sensor electrical connector from the bumper. 2. Disconnect and remove the ambient air temperature sensor. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Blower Motor Switch: > 07-26-5 > Dec > 07 > A/C - Blower Motor Inoperative or Stuck on High Blower Motor Switch: Customer Interest A/C - Blower Motor Inoperative or Stuck on High TSB 07-26-5 12/24/07 BLOWER MOTOR INOPERATIVE OR STUCK ON HIGH FORD: 2008 Escape Hybrid, Escape, F-Super Duty ISSUE Some 2008 F-Super Duty vehicles built before 12/14/2007, Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built before 12/17/2007 and equipped with electronic automatic temperature control (EATC) may exhibit an inoperative blower motor or a blower motor that may also shift to and remain at high, low or off speed. Cycling the ignition may return normal operation. The concern may also occur when using the electrical power point. ACTION Replace the Blower Motor Speed Control per Workshop Manual, Section 412-01. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. MERCURY: 2008 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner Parts Block OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 072605A 2008 F-Super 0.3 Hr. Duty/Escape/Escape Hybrid/Mariner/Mariner Hybrid With EATC: Replace The Blower Motor Speed Control (Do Not Use With 19700D, 19700D8) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19E624 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Blower Motor Switch: > 07-26-5 > Dec > 07 > A/C - Blower Motor Inoperative or Stuck on High Blower Motor Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Blower Motor Inoperative or Stuck on High TSB 07-26-5 12/24/07 BLOWER MOTOR INOPERATIVE OR STUCK ON HIGH FORD: 2008 Escape Hybrid, Escape, F-Super Duty ISSUE Some 2008 F-Super Duty vehicles built before 12/14/2007, Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built before 12/17/2007 and equipped with electronic automatic temperature control (EATC) may exhibit an inoperative blower motor or a blower motor that may also shift to and remain at high, low or off speed. Cycling the ignition may return normal operation. The concern may also occur when using the electrical power point. ACTION Replace the Blower Motor Speed Control per Workshop Manual, Section 412-01. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. MERCURY: 2008 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner Parts Block OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 072605A 2008 F-Super 0.3 Hr. Duty/Escape/Escape Hybrid/Mariner/Mariner Hybrid With EATC: Replace The Blower Motor Speed Control (Do Not Use With 19700D, 19700D8) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19E624 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 423 View 151-23 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 424 C297 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 425 Blower Motor Switch: Service and Repair BLOWER MOTOR SPEED CONTROL Removal and Installation 1. Lower the glove compartment. 2. Disconnect the blower motor speed control electrical connector. 3. Remove the 2 blower motor speed control screws. - To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 4. Remove the blower motor speed control. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-13 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 429 C233 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 430 Temperature Sensor - In-Vehicle Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 431 Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair IN-VEHICLE TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. CAUTION: Only position the instrument cluster finish panel away from the instrument panel enough to detach the in-vehicle temperature sensor without stressing the attached components. If the instrument cluster finish panel is positioned too far away from the instrument panel, damage to the wire harness or instrument cluster finish panel could result. Detach the instrument cluster finish panel and position it away from the instrument panel to allow access to the in-vehicle temperature sensor. 2. Release the 2 clips and detach the in-vehicle temperature sensor or in-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor. 3. Disconnect the in-vehicle temperature sensor or in-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor electrical connector. 4. Detach the aspirator hose from the venturi at the heater core and evaporator core housing. 5. Detach the aspirator hose from the instrument panel. 6. Remove the in-vehicle temperature sensor or in-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor. 7. NOTE: The venturi must be aligned correctly with the heater core and evaporator core housing for installation. When installing the venturi, it must be pressed into the heater core and evaporator core housing until an audible click is heard to indicated that it is correctly attached. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 432 Remove the venturi (if needed). 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation EVAPORATOR DISCHARGE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR NOTE: A second (auxiliary) evaporator discharge air temperature sensor is used for the auxiliary evaporator core on hybrid vehicles. For information concerning the auxiliary evaporator discharge air temperature sensor, refer to Heating and Air Conditioning. The evaporator discharge air temperature sensor contains a thermistor. The resistance of this thermistor varies by a specific amount based on the evaporator discharge air temperature. The dual-zone EATC or EMTC module measures a voltage ratio between the reference voltage it supplies to the sensor and the sensor return voltage to determine this resistance and the associated discharge air temperature. The evaporator discharge air temperature sensor maintains evaporator core temperature and prevents icing of the evaporator core. It does this by signaling the HVAC module to switch off the A/C request signal to the instrument cluster on 2.3L or 3.0L (4V) vehicles, or signaling the PCM to cycle the A/C compressor off when the evaporator discharge air temperature sensor reading falls below acceptable levels. The A/C request or A/C compressor will be switched back on when the evaporator temperature rises above acceptable levels. On hybrid vehicles, the A/C compressor will continue to run and the passenger zone valve will be closed by the PCM if the evaporator discharge air temperature sensor is reading a temperature below acceptable levels, but the TBCM is requesting A/C operation for HVTB cooling. This allows continued refrigerant flow to the auxiliary evaporator core while allowing the front (main) evaporator core to warm to acceptable levels. The evaporator discharge air temperature sensor is located on the heater core and evaporator core housing behind the glove compartment. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-23 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 439 C296 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 440 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation AIR CONDITIONING EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE (ACET) SENSOR A/C Evaporator Temperature (ACET) Sensor Voltage And Resistance The ACET sensor measures the evaporator air discharge temperature. The ACET sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The PCM sources a low current 5 volts on the ACET circuit. With SIG RTN also connected to the ACET sensor, the varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals. As A/C evaporator air temperature changes, the varying resistance of the ACET sensor changes the voltage the PCM detects. The ACET sensor is used to more accurately control A/C clutch cycling, improve defrost/demist performance, and reduce A/C clutch cycling. NOTE: These values can vary 15% due to sensor and VREF variations. Voltage values were calculated for VREF equals 5.0 volts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 441 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) EVAPORATOR DISCHARGE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Lower the glove compartment. 2. Detach the instrument panel wire harness pin-type retainer and position the wire harness away from the evaporator discharge air temperature sensor. 3. Disconnect the A/C evaporator discharge air temperature sensor electrical connector. 4. Gently pry upward and remove the A/C evaporator discharge air temperature sensor. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Dual Pressure Switch View 151-1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Dual Pressure Switch > Page 446 View 151-1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Dual Pressure Switch C1062 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Dual Pressure Switch > Page 449 C130 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch The A/C cycling switch may be wired to either the ACCS or ACPSW PCM input. When the A/C cycling switch opens, the PCM turns off the A/C clutch. For information on the specific function of the A/C cycling switch, refer to Heating and Air Conditioning, Climate Control System Air Conditioning System Overview. Also, refer to the applicable Vehicle/Diagrams for vehicle specific wiring. If the ACCS signal is not received by the PCM, the PCM circuit will not allow the A/C to operate. Some applications do not have a dedicated (separate) input to the PCM indicating that A/C is requested. This information is received by the PCM through the communication link. Air Conditioning (A/C) High Pressure Switch The A/C high pressure switch is used for additional A/C system pressure control. The A/C high pressure switch is either dual function for multiple speed, relay controlled electric fan applications, or single function for all others. For refrigerant containment control, the normally closed high pressure contacts open at a predetermined A/C pressure. This results in the A/C turning off, preventing the A/C pressure from rising to a level that would open the A/C high pressure relief valve. For fan control, the normally open medium pressure contacts close at a predetermined A/C pressure. This grounds the ACPSW circuit input to the PCM. The PCM then turns on the high speed fan to help reduce the pressure. For additional information, refer to Heating and Air Conditioning, Climate Control System, Air Conditioning System Overview or Vehicle/Diagrams. Air Conditioning Pressure (ACP) Transducer Sensor A/C Pressure Transducer Sensor Output Voltage Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch > Page 452 Typical ACP Transducer Sensor The ACP transducer sensor is located in the high pressure (discharge) side of the A/C system. The ACP transducer sensor provides a voltage signal to the PCM that is proportional to the A/C pressure. The PCM uses this information for A/C clutch control, fan control and idle speed control. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch > Page 453 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Dual-Function Pressure Switch Dual-Function Pressure Switch The dual-function pressure switch is located on the receiver drier and includes 2 separate sets of contacts that are opened at 2 different pressures. The first set of contacts in the dual-function pressure switch is used to interrupt A/C compressor operation in the event of excessively high discharge pressure in the high-pressure side of the refrigerant system. The PCM monitors the first set of contacts in the dual-function pressure switch in-series with the low-charge protection switch. When the contacts are open, the PCM will disengage the A/C compressor clutch. The second set of contacts in the dual-function pressure switch is used by the PCM to engage the high-speed cooling fan. The PCM monitors the second set of contacts through the A/C pressure (ACP) circuit. When the A/C pressure rises above a preset level, the second set of contacts will close and the high-speed cooling fan will be engaged. The dual-function pressure switch is installed on a Schrader-type valve core fitting on the receiver/drier. It is not necessary to recover the refrigerant to remove the dual-function pressure switch. Low-Charge Protection Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch > Page 454 The low-charge protection switch is installed on the evaporator outlet line to cycle the A/C compressor off in the event of a low refrigerant charge. The PCM monitors the low-charge protection switch in-series with the dual-function pressure switch. When the low-side pressure drops below acceptable levels, the low-charge protection switch contacts open. When the low-charge protection switch contacts are open, the PCM will disengage the A/C compressor clutch. The low-charge protection switch is installed on a Schrader-type valve core fitting on the evaporator outlet line. It is not necessary to recover the refrigerant to remove the low-charge protection switch. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations View 151-13 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 458 C286 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-21 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 463 C479 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation Fuel Pump (FP) Module Typical Electronic Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module Typical Mechanical Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 467 The FP module is a device that contains the fuel pump and sender assembly. The fuel pump is located inside the FP module reservoir and supplies fuel through the FP module manifold to the engine and FP module jet pump. The jet pump continuously refills the reservoir with fuel, and a check valve located in the manifold outlet maintains system pressure when the fuel pump is not energized. A flapper valve located in the bottom of the reservoir allows fuel to enter the reservoir and prime the fuel pump during the initial fill. Fuel Pump (FP) Module and Reservoir The FP module is mounted inside the fuel tank in a reservoir. The pump has a discharge check valve that maintains the system pressure after the key has been turned off to minimize starting concerns. The reservoir prevents fuel flow interruptions during extreme vehicle maneuvers with low tank fill levels. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 468 Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair FUEL PUMP MODULE Exploded View Part 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 469 Part 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 470 Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 471 Removal and Installation WARNING: - Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. - Remove the fuel filler cap slowly. The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 472 sound, wait until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may spray out. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. 1. Release the fuel system pressure. 2. Release the fuel tank filler cap and position aside. 3. Insert the special tool into the fuel tank filler pipe until it opens the fuel tank level shutoff valve located at the inlet of the fuel tank. 4. NOTE: Due to the internal design of the fuel tank components, slow fuel drainage may occur. Using the special tools, drain as much fuel as possible from the fuel tank and filler pipe, lowering the fuel level below the fuel pump (FP) mounting flange. 5. Remove the 4 screws and the FP module access cover. 6. NOTE: Clean the FP module connection, couplings, mounting flange and the immediate surrounding area of any dirt or foreign material. Disconnect the FP module electrical connector. 7. NOTE: Place absorbent toweling in the immediate surrounding area in case of fuel spills. Disconnect the fuel supply tube and fuel vapor recirculation tube-to-FP module quick connect couplings. 8. CAUTION: The fuel pump (FP) module must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the float arm and the filter. NOTE: Carefully remove the FP module lock ring and verify that enough fuel has been drained to avoid spillage. - Drain any residual in the FP module into a suitable container. Using a suitable FP module lock ring remover, rotate the lock ring counterclockwise and remove the FP module. 9. NOTE: Inspect the surfaces of the FP module flange and fuel tank seal contact surfaces. Do not polish or adjust the seal contact area of the FP module flange or fuel tank. Install a new FP module or fuel tank if the seal contact area is bent, scratched or corroded. Remove and discard the FP module O-ring seal. 10. NOTE: Apply clean engine oil to the FP module O-ring seal. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-22 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 476 C2015 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 477 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the parking brake release handle bolt. ^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-inch). 2. Disconnect the warning indicator switch electrical connector. 3. Remove the bolt and warning indicator switch. ^ To install, tighten bolt to 10 Nm (89 lb-inch). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Autolamp Sensor View 151-13 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Autolamp Sensor > Page 483 View 151-13 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Autolamp Sensor C287 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Autolamp Sensor > Page 486 C286 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 487 Ambient Light Sensor: Service and Repair LIGHT SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Remove the sensor from the instrument panel. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Backup Lamp Switch: Locations Transmission Range (TR) Sensor View 151-10 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Transmission Range (TR) Sensor > Page 492 View 151-11 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Transmission Range (TR) Sensor > Page 493 View 151-12 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Transmission Range (TR) Sensor C167 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Transmission Range (TR) Sensor > Page 496 C169 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 497 Backup Lamp Switch: Service and Repair REVERSING LAMP SWITCH Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the reversing lamp switch electrical connector. 2. Remove the reversing lamp switch. - To install, tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-22 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 501 C278 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 502 Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation BRAKE PEDAL POSITION (BPP) SWITCH Typical BPP Switch The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal to the PCM indicating that the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and is mounted on the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as follows: - to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake pedal is applied. - to the antilock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM. - to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ABS module interprets the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 503 Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair STOPLAMP SWITCH Removal and Installation CAUTION: Do not service the brake pedal, brake booster, or master cylinder without first removing the stoplamp switch. Do not install the stoplamp switch without the brake pedal arm secured to the brake booster push rod. Do not press or pull on brake pedal when installing or removing the stoplamp switch otherwise misadjustment or damage to the stoplamp switch could occur. 1. NOTE: Rotate the stoplamp switch clockwise approximately 1/8 turn to remove. Remove the stoplamp switch. Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-21 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 507 C479 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Locations View 151-13 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 511 View 151-28 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Multifunction Switch C202 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Multifunction Switch > Page 514 C2065 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 515 Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 516 Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair Steering column Multifunction Switch Steering Column Multifunctional Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the steering column opening trim. 2. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws. 3. Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds. 4. Remove the 2 multi-function switch screws. 5. Disconnect the multi-function switch electrical connector and remove the switch. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 517 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-13 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 521 C205 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 522 Headlamp Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 523 Headlamp Switch: Service and Repair HEADLAMP SWITCH Removal and Installation 1. Remove the instrument panel side finish panel. 2. NOTE: The headlamp switch is removed by pushing from behind. Release the tabs and remove the headlamp switch. Disconnect the electrical connectors. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-28 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations Turn Signal Switch: Locations View 151-13 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 530 View 151-28 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 531 C202 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 532 Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair Steering column Multifunction Switch Steering Column Multifunctional Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the steering column opening trim. 2. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws. 3. Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds. 4. Remove the 2 multi-function switch screws. 5. Disconnect the multi-function switch electrical connector and remove the switch. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 533 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR The APP sensor is an input to the powertrain control module (PCM) and is used to determine the amount of torque requested by the operator. Depending on the application either a 2-track or 3-track APP sensor is used. 2-Track APP Sensor 2-Track APP Sensor There are 2 pedal position signals in the sensor. Both signals, APP1 and APP2, have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage), but are offset and increase at different rates. The 2 pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other input is used. There are 2 reference voltage circuits, 2 signal return circuits, and 2 signal circuits (a total of 6 circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. The reference voltage circuits and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage circuit and signal return circuit used by the electronic throttle body (ETB) throttle position sensor. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. 3-Track APP Sensor Typical 3-Track APP Sensor There are 3 pedal position signals in the sensor. Signal 1, APP1, has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and signals 2 and 3, APP2 and APP3, both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation APP1 is used as the indication of pedal position by the strategy. The 3 pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other inputs are used. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. There are 2 reference voltage circuits, 2 signal return circuits, and 3 signal circuits (a total of 7 circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. The reference voltage circuits and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage circuit and signal return circuit used by the electronic throttle body (ETB) throttle position sensor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations View 151-4 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 542 View 151-5 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 543 C128 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 544 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot And Cold Wire (and IAT Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 545 Typical Drop-in Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F) above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the mass air flow. The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC), shift and torque converter clutch scheduling. The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner assembly. Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology with an integrated intake air temperature (IAT) sensor. The hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced as an assembly. Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 546 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the 2 screws and the MAF sensor. - To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations View 151-7 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 550 View 151-8 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 551 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams C180 C1180 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 552 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR Typical Synchronizer Hall-Effect CMP Sensor Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor The CMP sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston number 1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the PCM and used for synchronizing the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. Coil on plug (COP) ignition applications use the CMP signal to select the correct ignition coil to fire. Vehicles with 2 CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). They use the second sensor to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2 as an input to the PCM. There are 2 types of CMP sensors: the 3-pin connector Hall-effect type sensor and the 2-pin connector variable reluctance type sensor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 553 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the camshaft position sensor (CMP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolt and the CMP. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). - Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary. 3. NOTE: Lubricate the CMP O-ring seal with clean engine oil. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation Clutch Switch: Description and Operation CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION (CPP) SWITCH Typical Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch The CPP switch is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch pedal position. The PCM provides a low current voltage on the CPP circuit. When the CPP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low through the SIG RTN circuit. The CPP input to the PCM is used to detect a reduction in engine load. The PCM uses the load information for mass air flow and fuel calculations. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations View 151-6 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 560 C1064 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 561 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR Typical Thread Type ECT Sensor The ECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The PCM uses the ECT input for fuel control and for cooling fan control. There are 3 types of ECT sensors, threaded, push-in, and twist-lock. The ECT sensor is located in an engine coolant passage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 562 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Drain the cooling system. 2. Disconnect the engine coolant temperature sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the ECT sensor. - Pull upward on the locking tab. - Rotate the sensor counterclockwise and remove. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations View 151-7 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 566 View 151-9 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 567 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams C101 C1120 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 568 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR Typical Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor The CKP sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM. The pulse wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L 10-cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the pulse wheel, the CKP sensor signal indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP sensor is also able to identify piston travel in order to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the crankshaft relative to a fixed reference for the CKP sensor configuration. The PCM also uses the CKP signal to determine if a misfire has occurred by measuring rapid decelerations between teeth. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 569 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the 5 bolts and the RH splash shield. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 3. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor electrical connector. 4. Remove the bolt and the CKP. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). - Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary. 5. NOTE: Lubricate the CKP O-ring seal with clean engine oil. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-9 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 573 C1164 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 574 Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE (CHT) SENSOR Typical CHT Sensor The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with the temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. The CHT sensor is installed in the cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT sensor can provide complete engine temperature information and can be used to infer coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM initiates a fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system concern such as low coolant or coolant loss could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation FUEL LEVEL INPUT (FLI) The FLI is a communications network message. Most vehicle applications use a potentiometer type FLI sensor connected to a float in the FP module to determine fuel level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 578 Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair FUEL PUMP MODULE Exploded View Part 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 579 Part 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 580 Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 581 Removal and Installation WARNING: - Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. - Remove the fuel filler cap slowly. The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 582 sound, wait until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may spray out. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. 1. Release the fuel system pressure. 2. Release the fuel tank filler cap and position aside. 3. Insert the special tool into the fuel tank filler pipe until it opens the fuel tank level shutoff valve located at the inlet of the fuel tank. 4. NOTE: Due to the internal design of the fuel tank components, slow fuel drainage may occur. Using the special tools, drain as much fuel as possible from the fuel tank and filler pipe, lowering the fuel level below the fuel pump (FP) mounting flange. 5. Remove the 4 screws and the FP module access cover. 6. NOTE: Clean the FP module connection, couplings, mounting flange and the immediate surrounding area of any dirt or foreign material. Disconnect the FP module electrical connector. 7. NOTE: Place absorbent toweling in the immediate surrounding area in case of fuel spills. Disconnect the fuel supply tube and fuel vapor recirculation tube-to-FP module quick connect couplings. 8. CAUTION: The fuel pump (FP) module must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the float arm and the filter. NOTE: Carefully remove the FP module lock ring and verify that enough fuel has been drained to avoid spillage. - Drain any residual in the FP module into a suitable container. Using a suitable FP module lock ring remover, rotate the lock ring counterclockwise and remove the FP module. 9. NOTE: Inspect the surfaces of the FP module flange and fuel tank seal contact surfaces. Do not polish or adjust the seal contact area of the FP module flange or fuel tank. Install a new FP module or fuel tank if the seal contact area is bent, scratched or corroded. Remove and discard the FP module O-ring seal. 10. NOTE: Apply clean engine oil to the FP module O-ring seal. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-27 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 586 C435 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 587 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation FUEL TANK PRESSURE (FTP) SENSOR Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor In-Line Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor The FTP sensor or in-line FTP sensor is used to measure the fuel tank pressure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations View 151-4 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 591 View 151-5 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 592 C128 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 593 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Typical Stand-Alone/Non-Integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensors Typical Integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Incorporated Into A Drop-in Or Flange-type MAF Sensor The IAT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The IAT provides air temperature information to the PCM. The PCM uses the air temperature information as a correction factor in the calculation of Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 594 fuel, spark, and air flow. The IAT sensor provides a quicker temperature change response time than the ECT or CHT sensor. Currently there are 2 design types of IAT sensors used, a stand-alone/non-integrated type and a integrated type. Both types function the same, however the integrated type is incorporated into the mass air flow (MAF) sensor instead of being a stand alone sensor. Supercharged vehicles use 2 IAT sensors. Both sensors are thermistor type devices and operate as described above. One is located before the supercharger at the air cleaner for standard OBD/cold weather input, while a second sensor (IAT2) is located after the supercharger in the intake manifold. The IAT2 sensor located after the supercharger provides air temperature information to the PCM to control spark and to help determine charge air cooler (CAC) efficiency. Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot And Cold Wire (and IAT Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 595 Typical Drop-in Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F) above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the mass air flow. The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC), shift and torque converter clutch scheduling. The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner assembly. Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology with an integrated intake air temperature (IAT) sensor. The hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced as an assembly. Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-8 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 599 C109 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 600 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Knock Sensor (KS) Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS) The KS is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark timing. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations View 151-6 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 604 View 151-8 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 605 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Diagrams C1087 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 606 C1140 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 607 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR Typical Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor The MAP sensor measures intake manifold absolute pressure. The PCM uses information from the MAP sensor to measure how much exhaust gas is introduced into the intake manifold. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM: Description and Operation ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE (EOT) SENSOR Typical EOT Sensor The EOT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The EOT sensor measures the temperature of the engine oil. The sensor is typically threaded into the engine oil lubrication system. The PCM can use the EOT sensor input to determine the following: - On variable camshaft timing (VCT) applications the EOT input is used to adjust the VCT control gains and logic for camshaft timing. - The PCM can use EOT sensor input in conjunction with other PCM inputs to determine oil degradation. - The PCM can use EOT sensor input to initiate a soft engine shutdown. To prevent engine damage from occurring as a result of high oil temperatures, the PCM has the ability to initiate a soft engine shutdown. Whenever engine RPM exceeds a calibrated level for a certain period of time, the PCM begins reducing power by disabling engine cylinders. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 View 151-7 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 615 View 151-9 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 616 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #12 View 151-7 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 617 View 151-9 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 618 View 151-10 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 619 View 151-10 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 C141 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 622 C142 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 623 C171 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 624 C172 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 625 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) The HO2S detects the presence of oxygen in the exhaust and produces a variable voltage according to the amount of oxygen detected. A high concentration of oxygen (lean air/fuel ratio) in the exhaust produces a voltage signal less than 0.4 volt. A low concentration of oxygen (rich air/fuel ratio) produces a voltage signal greater than 0.6 volt. The HO2S provides feedback to the PCM indicating air/fuel ratio in order to achieve a near stoichiometric air/fuel ratio of 14.7:1 during closed loop engine operation. The HO2S generates a voltage between 0.0 and 1.1 volts. Embedded with the sensing element is the HO2S heater. The heating element heats the sensor to a temperature of 800°C (1,472°F). At approximately 300°C (572°F) the engine can enter closed loop operation. The VPWR circuit supplies voltage to the heater. The PCM turns the heater on by providing the ground when the correct conditions occur. The heater allows the engine to enter closed loop operation sooner. The use of this heater requires the HO2S heater control to be duty cycled, to prevent damage to the heater. Universal HO2S The universal HO2S, sometimes referred to as a wideband oxygen sensor, uses the typical HO2S combined with a current controller in the PCM to infer an air/fuel ratio relative to the stoichiometric air/fuel ratio. This is accomplished by balancing the amount of oxygen ions pumped in or out of a measurement chamber within the sensor. The typical HO2S within the universal HO2S is used to detect the oxygen content of the exhaust gas in the measurement chamber. The oxygen content inside the measurement chamber is maintained at the stoichiometric air/fuel ratio by pumping oxygen ions in and out of the measurement chamber. As the exhaust gasses get richer or leaner, the amount of oxygen that must be pumped in or out to maintain a stoichiometric air/fuel ratio in the measurement chamber varies in proportion to the air/fuel ratio. The amount of current required to pump the oxygen ions in or out of the measurement chamber is used to measure the air/fuel ratio. The measured air/fuel ratio is actually the output from the current controller in the PCM and not a signal that comes directly from the sensor. The universal HO2S also uses a self-contained reference chamber to make sure an oxygen differential is always present. The oxygen for the reference chamber is supplied by pumping small amounts of oxygen ions from the measurement chamber into the reference chamber. The universal HO2S does not need access to outside air. Part to part variance is compensated for by placing a resistor in the connector. This resistor is used to trim the current measured by the current controller in the PCM. Embedded with the sensing element is the universal H02S heater. The heater allows the engine to enter closed loop operation sooner. The heating element heats the sensor to a temperature of 780°C (1,436°F). The VPWR circuit supplies voltage to the heater. The PCM controls the heater on and off by providing the ground to maintain the sensor at the correct temperature for maximum accuracy. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) Exploded View Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the 7 bolts (5 shown) and the LH splash shield. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 628 3. Disconnect the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) electrical connector. 4. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in removal. Using the special tool, remove the HO2S. - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 5. NOTE: Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the HO2S. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 629 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Catalyst Monitor Sensor CATALYST MONITOR SENSOR Exploded View Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the 7 bolts (5 shown) and the LH splash shield. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 630 3. Disconnect the catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector and detach the wiring retainer(s). 4. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in removal. Using the special tool, remove the catalyst monitor sensor. - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 5. NOTE: Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the catalyst monitor sensor. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor The PSP sensor monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP sensor voltage input to the PCM changes as the hydraulic pressure changes. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the PCM to adjust the transmission electronic pressure control (EPC) pressure during increased engine load, for example, during parking maneuvers. Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The PSP switch monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP switch is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic pressure increases. The PCM provides a low current voltage on the PSP circuit. When the PSP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low through the SIG RTN circuit. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust the transmission electronic pressure control (EPC) pressure during increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations View 151-6 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams > Differential Pressure EGR Vacuum Regulator C1083 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams > Differential Pressure EGR Vacuum Regulator > Page 639 C1068 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 640 Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor receives this signal through 2 hoses referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor housing for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback. Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 641 The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is identical in operation as the larger plastic differential pressure feedback EGR sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the side of the sensor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 642 Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Service and Repair DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SENSOR Exploded View Part 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 643 Part 2 Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor electrical connector and detach the wiring harness retainer. 2. Carefully detach the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor from the EGR valve tube. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Throttle Position Sensor: Locations View 151-6 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 647 View 151-8 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 648 Throttle Position Sensor: Diagrams C189 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 649 C1189 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 650 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor The ETB throttle position sensor has 2 signal circuits in the sensor for redundancy. The redundant ETB throttle position signals are required for increased monitoring. The first ETB throttle position sensor signal (TP1) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the second signal (TP2) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). The 2 ETB throttle position sensor signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. There is 1 reference voltage circuit and 1 signal return circuit for the sensor. The reference voltage circuit and the signal return circuit is shared with the reference voltage circuits and signal return circuits used by the APP sensor. Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Typical TP Sensor The TP sensor is a rotary potentiometer sensor that provides a signal to the PCM that is linearly proportional to the throttle plate/shaft position. The sensor housing has a 3-blade electrical connector that may be gold plated. The gold plating increases the corrosion resistance on the terminals and increases the connector durability. The TP sensor is mounted on the throttle body. As the TP sensor is rotated by the throttle shaft, 4 operating conditions are determined by the PCM from the TP. The operating conditions are: closed throttle (includes idle or deceleration) - part throttle (includes cruise or moderate acceleration) - wide open throttle (includes maximum acceleration or de-choke on crank) - throttle angle rate Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 651 Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the throttle position (TP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the 2 screws and the TP sensor. - To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations View 151-10 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 655 View 151-11 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 656 C167 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 657 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Adjustment Special Tool(s) 1. Remove the battery and tray. 2. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position. Loosen the transmission range (TR) sensor bolts. 3. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft). 4. Install the battery and tray. 5. Check for correct operation. The engine should start only in PARK or NEUTRAL. The reverse lamps should illuminate in the REVERSE position. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 658 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Special Tool(s) Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the battery and tray. 3. Remove the transmission range (TR) sensor. 1 Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector. 2 Remove the TR sensor retaining bolts. 3 Remove the TR sensor. Installation 1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position. Install the TR sensor and loosely install the bolts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 659 2. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft). 3. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 4. Install the battery and tray. 5. Check the correct operation. The engine should start only in PARK or NEUTRAL. The reverse lamps should illuminate in the REVERSE position. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-12 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 663 C1088 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 664 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor The OSS sensor provides the PCM with information about the rotational speed of an output shaft. The PCM uses the information to control and diagnose powertrain behavior. In some applications, the sensor is also used as the source of vehicle speed. The sensor may be physically located in different places on the vehicle, depending upon the specific application. The design of each speed sensor is unique and depends on which powertrain control feature uses the information that is generated. Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Typical Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) The VSS is a variable reluctance or Hall-effect sensor that generates a waveform with a frequency that is proportional to the speed of the vehicle. If the vehicle is moving at a relatively low velocity, the sensor produces a signal with a low frequency. As the vehicle velocity increases, the sensor generates a signal with a higher frequency. The PCM uses the frequency signal generated by the VSS (and other inputs) to control such parameters as fuel injection, ignition control, transmission/transaxle shift scheduling, and torque converter clutch scheduling. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations View 151-6 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams > Differential Pressure EGR Vacuum Regulator C1083 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams > Differential Pressure EGR Vacuum Regulator > Page 671 C1068 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 672 Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor receives this signal through 2 hoses referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor housing for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback. Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 673 The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is identical in operation as the larger plastic differential pressure feedback EGR sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the side of the sensor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 674 Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Service and Repair DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SENSOR Exploded View Part 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 675 Part 2 Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor electrical connector and detach the wiring harness retainer. 2. Carefully detach the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor from the EGR valve tube. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR The APP sensor is an input to the powertrain control module (PCM) and is used to determine the amount of torque requested by the operator. Depending on the application either a 2-track or 3-track APP sensor is used. 2-Track APP Sensor 2-Track APP Sensor There are 2 pedal position signals in the sensor. Both signals, APP1 and APP2, have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage), but are offset and increase at different rates. The 2 pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other input is used. There are 2 reference voltage circuits, 2 signal return circuits, and 2 signal circuits (a total of 6 circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. The reference voltage circuits and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage circuit and signal return circuit used by the electronic throttle body (ETB) throttle position sensor. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. 3-Track APP Sensor Typical 3-Track APP Sensor There are 3 pedal position signals in the sensor. Signal 1, APP1, has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and signals 2 and 3, APP2 and APP3, both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation APP1 is used as the indication of pedal position by the strategy. The 3 pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other inputs are used. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. There are 2 reference voltage circuits, 2 signal return circuits, and 3 signal circuits (a total of 7 circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. The reference voltage circuits and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage circuit and signal return circuit used by the electronic throttle body (ETB) throttle position sensor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations View 151-4 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 683 View 151-5 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 684 C128 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 685 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot And Cold Wire (and IAT Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 686 Typical Drop-in Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F) above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the mass air flow. The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC), shift and torque converter clutch scheduling. The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner assembly. Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology with an integrated intake air temperature (IAT) sensor. The hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced as an assembly. Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 687 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the 2 screws and the MAF sensor. - To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations View 151-6 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 691 View 151-8 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 692 C173 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 693 Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation FUEL RAIL PRESSURE TEMPERATURE (FRPT) SENSOR Typical Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor The FRPT sensor measures the pressure and temperature of the fuel in the fuel rail and sends these signals to the PCM. The sensor uses the intake manifold vacuum as a reference to determine the pressure difference between the fuel rail and the intake manifold. The relationship between fuel pressure and fuel temperature is used to determine the possible presence of fuel vapor in the fuel rail. The temperature sensing portion of the FRPT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Both the pressure and temperature signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The speed of the fuel pump sustains fuel rail pressure which preserves fuel in its liquid state. The dynamic range of the fuel injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the injector pulse width to decrease. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 694 Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair FUEL RAIL PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE SENSOR Removal and Installation WARNING: - Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. 1. Release the fuel system pressure. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Disconnect the fuel rail pressure and temperature sensor electrical connector and vacuum tube. 4. Remove the 2 bolts and the fuel rail pressure and temperature sensor. - To install, tighten to 4 Nm (35 lb-in). - Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary. 5. NOTE: Lubricate the fuel rail pressure and temperature sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations Fuel Temperature Sensor: Locations View 151-6 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 698 View 151-8 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 699 C173 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 700 Fuel Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation FUEL RAIL PRESSURE TEMPERATURE (FRPT) SENSOR Typical Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor The FRPT sensor measures the pressure and temperature of the fuel in the fuel rail and sends these signals to the PCM. The sensor uses the intake manifold vacuum as a reference to determine the pressure difference between the fuel rail and the intake manifold. The relationship between fuel pressure and fuel temperature is used to determine the possible presence of fuel vapor in the fuel rail. The temperature sensing portion of the FRPT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Both the pressure and temperature signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The speed of the fuel pump sustains fuel rail pressure which preserves fuel in its liquid state. The dynamic range of the fuel injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the injector pulse width to decrease. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 701 Fuel Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair FUEL RAIL PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE SENSOR Removal and Installation WARNING: - Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. 1. Release the fuel system pressure. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Disconnect the fuel rail pressure and temperature sensor electrical connector and vacuum tube. 4. Remove the 2 bolts and the fuel rail pressure and temperature sensor. - To install, tighten to 4 Nm (35 lb-in). - Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary. 5. NOTE: Lubricate the fuel rail pressure and temperature sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-23 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 705 C392 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 706 Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Description and Operation INERTIA FUEL SHUTOFF (IFS) SWITCH Typical Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch The IFS switch is used in conjunction with the electric fuel pump. The purpose of the IFS switch is to shutoff the fuel pump if a collision occurs. It consists of a steel ball held in place by a magnet. When a sharp impact occurs, the ball breaks loose from the magnet, rolls up a conical ramp and strikes a target plate which opens the electrical contacts of the switch and shuts off the electric fuel pump. Once the switch is open, it must be manually reset before restarting the vehicle. Refer to the Owner's Literature, Roadside Emergencies for the location of the IFS switch. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 707 Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Service and Repair INERTIA FUEL SHUTOFF (IFS) SWITCH Removal and Installation 1. Remove the RH lower A-pillar trim panel. 2. Disconnect the inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch electrical connector. 3. Remove the 2 bolts and the IFS switch. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Throttle Position Sensor: Locations View 151-6 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 711 View 151-8 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 712 Throttle Position Sensor: Diagrams C189 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 713 C1189 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 714 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor The ETB throttle position sensor has 2 signal circuits in the sensor for redundancy. The redundant ETB throttle position signals are required for increased monitoring. The first ETB throttle position sensor signal (TP1) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the second signal (TP2) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). The 2 ETB throttle position sensor signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. There is 1 reference voltage circuit and 1 signal return circuit for the sensor. The reference voltage circuit and the signal return circuit is shared with the reference voltage circuits and signal return circuits used by the APP sensor. Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Typical TP Sensor The TP sensor is a rotary potentiometer sensor that provides a signal to the PCM that is linearly proportional to the throttle plate/shaft position. The sensor housing has a 3-blade electrical connector that may be gold plated. The gold plating increases the corrosion resistance on the terminals and increases the connector durability. The TP sensor is mounted on the throttle body. As the TP sensor is rotated by the throttle shaft, 4 operating conditions are determined by the PCM from the TP. The operating conditions are: closed throttle (includes idle or deceleration) - part throttle (includes cruise or moderate acceleration) - wide open throttle (includes maximum acceleration or de-choke on crank) - throttle angle rate Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 715 Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the throttle position (TP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the 2 screws and the TP sensor. - To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations View 151-7 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 720 View 151-8 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 721 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams C180 C1180 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 722 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR Typical Synchronizer Hall-Effect CMP Sensor Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor The CMP sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston number 1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the PCM and used for synchronizing the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. Coil on plug (COP) ignition applications use the CMP signal to select the correct ignition coil to fire. Vehicles with 2 CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). They use the second sensor to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2 as an input to the PCM. There are 2 types of CMP sensors: the 3-pin connector Hall-effect type sensor and the 2-pin connector variable reluctance type sensor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 723 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the camshaft position sensor (CMP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolt and the CMP. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). - Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary. 3. NOTE: Lubricate the CMP O-ring seal with clean engine oil. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations View 151-7 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 727 View 151-9 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 728 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams C101 C1120 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 729 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR Typical Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor The CKP sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM. The pulse wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L 10-cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the pulse wheel, the CKP sensor signal indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP sensor is also able to identify piston travel in order to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the crankshaft relative to a fixed reference for the CKP sensor configuration. The PCM also uses the CKP signal to determine if a misfire has occurred by measuring rapid decelerations between teeth. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 730 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the 5 bolts and the RH splash shield. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 3. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor electrical connector. 4. Remove the bolt and the CKP. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). - Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary. 5. NOTE: Lubricate the CKP O-ring seal with clean engine oil. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Customer Interest Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder TSB 09-19-15 10/05/09 IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift interlock is not affected. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern. a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove ignition key. b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction. c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction? (1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics (2) No - Proceed to step 2. 2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs. The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 740 Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3511 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder TSB 09-19-15 10/05/09 IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift interlock is not affected. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern. a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove ignition key. b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction. c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction? (1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics (2) No - Proceed to step 2. 2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs. The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 746 Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3511 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Lock Cylinder - Functional Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Ignition Lock Cylinder - Functional IGNITION LOCK CYLINDER - FUNCTIONAL Removal and Installation 1. Remove the passive anti-theft system (PATS) transceiver. 2. NOTE: The ignition lock cylinder must be in the RUN position. Using a suitable tool, press the release pin and remove the ignition lock cylinder. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Verify the ignition lock cylinder operation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Lock Cylinder - Functional > Page 749 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Ignition Lock Cylinder - Non Functional IGNITION LOCK CYLINDER - NON FUNCTIONAL Removal and Installation 1. Remove the passive anti-theft system (PATS) transceiver. 2. Remove the ignition lock cylinder. - Use a 1/8-inch diameter drill bit to drill out the lock cylinder retaining pin. - Use a 3/8-inch diameter drill to drill down the middle of the ignition lock key slot until the ignition lock cylinder breaks loose. - Remove and discard the ignition lock cylinder and drill shavings from the steering column. 3. Remove the bearing retainer. 4. Remove the steering column lock housing bearing and steering column lock gear. 5. Thoroughly clean all drill shavings from the steering column and inspect it for damage. 6. Install a new ignition lock cylinder. - Verify the ignition lock cylinder operation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-8 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 753 C109 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 754 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Knock Sensor (KS) Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS) The KS is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark timing. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch > Component Information > Diagrams C2286 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor View 151-2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 763 Impact Sensor: Locations Side Impact Sensor View 151-24 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 764 View 151-24 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 765 View 151-25 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 766 View 151-25 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Forward Crash Sensor C177 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 769 Impact Sensor: Diagrams Side Impact Sensor C3209 C3210 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 770 C3211 C3212 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 771 Impact Sensor: Testing and Inspection SENSORS WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in a crash. For this vehicle line, the supplemental restraint system (SRS) uses 5 satellite sensors in addition to the restraints control module (RCM). The RCM is mounted to the center tunnel beneath the console. All vehicles have one front impact severity sensor located in the front-center area of the vehicle, behind the grille mounted on the lower radiator support. The first row impact sensors are mounted behind the trim panel near the floor on the B-pillar, the second row sensors are located on each C-pillar. The front and side impact sensor are not interchangeable. Mounting orientation is critical for correct operation of all impact sensors. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Front Impact Severity Sensor FRONT IMPACT SEVERITY SENSOR Removal and Installation WARNING: - If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in a crash. - To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. NOTE: - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. 1. Depower the SRS. 2. Disconnect the front impact severity sensor electrical connector. 3. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque. Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of personal injury or death in a crash. NOTE: Make sure the radiator support and front impact severity sensor mating surfaces are clean and free of foreign material. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 774 - Note the position of the locator tab on the front impact severity sensor for installation. Remove the nut and the front impact severity sensor. To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 5. Repower the SRS. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 775 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor - First Row, B-Pillar SIDE IMPACT SENSOR - FIRST ROW, B-PILLAR Removal and Installation WARNING: - If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in a crash. - To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. NOTE: - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a SRS fault. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. - RH shown, LH similar. 1. Depower the SRS. 2. Remove the B-pillar trim panel. 3. Disconnect the side impact sensor electrical connector. 4. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque. Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of personal injury or death in a crash. NOTE: Make sure the B-pillar and side impact severity sensor mating surfaces are clean and free of foreign material. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 776 - Note position of the locator tab on the front impact severity sensor for installation. Remove the bolt and the side impact sensor. Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 6. Repower the SRS. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 777 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor - Second Row, C-Pillar SIDE IMPACT SENSOR - SECOND ROW, C-PILLAR Removal and Installation WARNING: - If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in a crash. - To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. NOTE: - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. - RH shown, LH similar. 1. Depower the SRS. 2. Remove the C-pillar trim panel. 3. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque. Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of personal injury or death in a crash. NOTE: Make sure the C-pillar and side impact sensor mating surfaces are clean and free of foreign material. - Note position of the locator tab on the front impact severity sensor for installation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 778 Remove the side impact sensor bolt. Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 4. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the side impact sensor. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 6. Repower the SRS. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Passenger View 151-17 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Passenger > Page 783 View 151-16 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Driver C3065 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Driver > Page 786 C3066 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Tension Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Seat Belt Tension Sensor: Description and Operation BELT TENSION SENSOR (BTS) The safety belt tension sensor (BTS) is part of the passenger front outboard safety belt and retractor assembly. The BTS is located at the safety belt anchor point and is used in conjunction with the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system. Refer to Air Bag Systems. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-17 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 793 C3042 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 794 Seat Occupant Sensor: Description and Operation OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SENSOR (OCS) CAUTION: It is necessary to carry out the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system reset when a front passenger seat cushion is disassembled, a new trim cover is installed or an OCS system service kit is installed. A scan tool is used to carry out the OCS system reset command. Failure to follow this instruction may result in system failure and the incorrect operation of the OCS system. NOTE: - Occupant classification sensor (OCS) system components (seat wiring harness, seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor and occupant classification system module [OCSM]) are calibrated to each other and are serviced as an assembly. The OCS system components are not to be installed separately. If a new OCS system, OCS system component or seat cushion foam pad are needed, an OCS system service kit (seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor, seat wiring harness and OCSM) must be installed as an assembly. - To identify between a production OCS system and a OCS system service kit, inspect the OCSM electrical connector. A production OCS system allows the disconnection of the OCSM electrical connector. An OCS system service kit has the electrical connector glued to the module. It cannot and should not be disconnected or altered. The OCS system is standard equipment on all front outboard passenger seats. For information on diagnosing or servicing the OCS system, refer to Air Bag Systems. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SENSOR - ORIGINAL EQUIPMENT Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 797 Removal WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. - Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete assembly. Never install only part of the kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. CAUTION: It is necessary to carry out the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system reset when a front passenger seat backrest is separated from the seat cushion, the seat cushion is disassembled, a new trim cover is installed or an OCS service kit is installed. A scan tool is used to trigger the active command to carry out the OCS system reset. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may cause system failure. NOTE: The heated seat element on the front passenger seat cushion is not serviceable separately. If a new heated seat element is needed on the front passenger seat cushion, a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) service kit equipped with a heated seat element must be installed. - Occupant classification sensor (OCS) system components, seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor and electronic control unit (ECU), are calibrated to each other and are serviced as an assembly. The OCS system components are not to be installed separately. If a new OCS system, OCS system component or seat cushion foam pad are needed, a new OCS system service kit (seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 798 and ECU) must be installed as an assembly. - To identify between a production occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and a service OCS system (OCS service kit), inspect the electronic control unit (ECU) electrical connector. A production OCS system allows the disconnect of the ECU electrical connector. A service OCS system (OCS service kit) has the ECU electrical connector glued to the ECU. It cannot and should not be disconnected or altered. - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again. 1. Depower the SRS. 2. Remove the front passenger seat. 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors and detach the wiring clips. 1 Disconnect the occupant classification sensor (OCS) electronic control unit (ECU) electrical connector. 2 Disconnect the pressure sensor electrical connector. 3 Release the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness from the seat cushion pan. 4 If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the heated seat relay electrical connector, release the wiring clip on the wiring harness from the seat cushion pan, and disconnect the 2 seat cushion element electrical connectors. 4. Remove the 4 seat cushion bolts retaining the seat cushion to the seat track. 5. CAUTION: While positioning the seat cushion pan and occupant classification sensor (OCS) assembly, be careful not to damage any of the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may cause system failure. Remove the seat cushion and pan assembly. To aid in removal, recline the seat. 6. CAUTION: Use care when separating the seat upholstery from the hook-and-loop strip, or the hook-and-loop strip can be torn from the seat cushion foam pad. Detach the seat cushion trim cover J-clips from the seat cushion pan and remove the seat cushion trim cover. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 799 7. Remove the seat cushion foam pad. 8. Bend the retaining tab away from the pressure sensor, then slide the pressure sensor off the bracket. 9. CAUTION: Care must be taken to prevent damage to the seat cushion pan when removing the rivets. Remove the 2 rivets and the OCS ECU. 10. Remove the 2 pin-type retainers from the OCS bladder and seat cushion pan. 11. Feed the OCS hose and pressure sensor through the seat cushion pan opening and remove as an assembly with the bladder. Installation NOTE: If installing an OCS service kit, refer to Occupant Classification Sensor - Service Kit. 1. Bend the retaining tab back on the pressure sensor component bracket. 2. CAUTION: - Inspect the occupant classification sensor (OCS) bladder, seat cushion pan and support assembly for any foreign objects before installing the OCS to the seat cushion pan. If any foreign objects are found, remove them. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may cause system failure. - Route the seat occupant classification sensor (OCS) components through the correct seat cushion support opening. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure. - While positioning the seat cushion pan and occupant classification sensor (OCS) assembly, be careful not to damage any of the components. Feed the OCS components (pressure sensor and hose) through the seat cushion pan opening. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 800 3. Align the OCS bladder to the seat cushion pan. 4. Install the 2 pin-type retainers to the OCS bladder and seat cushion pan. 5. NOTE: Make sure the pressure sensor hose is not kinked during installation. Install the pressure sensor onto the seat cushion pan bracket, making sure the retaining tab is completely engaged. When installed correctly, an audible click will be heard and the pressure sensor will not be able to be removed from its bracket without disengaging the retaining tab. 6. Slide the OCS ECU into the seat cushion pan bracket and install the rivets. - The OCS ECU must be correctly positioned and securely fastened in place. Failure to do so can set a DTC in the RCM. 7. Position the foam pad to the seat cushion pan. 8. CAUTION: Inspect the seat cushion pad and seat cushion trim cover for any foreign material, before installing the seat cushion trim cover to the seat cushion pad. If any foreign material is found, remove it. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may cause system failure. Install the seat cushion trim cover to the seat cushion foam pad and attach the J-clips. 9. CAUTION: While positioning the seat cushion pan and occupant classification sensor (OCS) assembly, be careful not to damage any of the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may cause system failure. Position the seat cushion and pan assembly to the seat track. To aid in installation, recline the seat. 10. Install the 4 seat cushion bolts retaining the seat cushion to the seat track. - Tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). 11. Connect the electrical connectors and wiring clips. 1 Connect the OCS ECU electrical connector. 2 Connect the pressure sensor electrical connector. 3 Install the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness to the seat cushion pan. 4 If equipped with heated seats, connect the heated seat relay electrical connector, install the wiring clip on the wiring harness to the seat cushion pan, and connect the 2 seat cushion element electrical connectors. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 801 12. Install the front passenger seat into the vehicle. 13. Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the system at this time. 14. WARNING: Make sure the front passenger seat repair is complete, the seat and all attached components (head restraint, seat side shield, etc.) are correctly assembled, and the seat is correctly installed to the vehicle before carrying out the System Reset. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. CAUTION: Make sure the seat is completely assembled before carrying out the occupant classification sensor (OCS) System Reset active command. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may cause system failure. - The following precautions must be taken before carrying out the occupant classification sensor (OCS) System Reset. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may cause system failure. Make sure the OCS system components are connected and no faults are present. - Make sure the OCS system is not at a temperature below 0°C (32°F) or above 45°C (113°F) when initiating the OCS system reset process. If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or hot temperatures, the vehicle must be exposed and kept at a temperature within the limits, 0°C to 45°C (32°F to 113°F) for a minimum of 30 minutes. - Make sure nothing is present on the passenger seat before carrying out the OCS system reset and nothing is placed on the seat during the process. - Make sure a minimum 8-second time period has passed after cycling the ignition switch ON before the carrying out the OCS system reset process. NOTE: For best results in carrying out the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system reset process, the OCS system should be at or near room temperature, 10°C to 29°C (50°F to 85°F). - If the first attempt to carry out the OCS system reset is unsuccessful and DTC C1941 is reported, a second attempt must be made. If on the second attempt to carry out the OCS system reset is unsuccessful and DTC C1941 is reported a second time, a new OCS system service kit must be installed. Carry out the OCS system reset. With the front passenger seat empty, use a scan tool to trigger the active command. 15. NOTE: The ignition switch must be cycled after the OCS system reset is successful. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will: fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 802 The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all RCM and OCS module DTCs using a scan tool. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 803 Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Occupant Classification Sensor - Service Kit OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SENSOR - SERVICE KIT Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 804 Removal WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. - Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete assembly. Never install only part of the kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. CAUTION: It is necessary to carry out the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system reset when a front passenger seat backrest is separated from the seat cushion, the seat cushion is disassembled, a new trim cover is installed or an OCS service kit is installed. A scan tool is used to trigger the active command to carry out rezeroing of the OCS system. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may cause system failure. NOTE: The heated seat element on the front passenger seat cushion is not serviceable separately. If a new heated seat element is needed on the front passenger seat cushion, a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) service kit equipped with a heated seat element must be installed. - OCS system components (seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor and electronic control unit) are calibrated to each other and are serviced as an assembly. The OCS system components are not to be installed separately. If a new OCS system, OCS system component or seat cushion foam pad are needed, a new OCS system service kit (seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor and electronic control unit) must be installed as an assembly. - To identify between a production occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and a service OCS system (OCS service kit) inspect the electronic control unit (ECU) electrical connector. A production OCS system allows the disconnect of the ECU electrical connector. A service OCS system (OCS service kit) has the ECU electrical connector glued to the ECU. It cannot and should not be disconnected or altered. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 805 - If removing an original equipment manufacturer (OEM) occupant classification sensor (OCS), refer to the appropriate procedure. - The seat wiring harness will be reused. The OCS service kit connector connects to the seat wiring harness electronic control unit ECU connector. The pressure sensor seat wiring harness connector will be left unplugged and secured by a tie strap. - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. 1. Depower the SRS. 2. Remove the passenger seat. 3. NOTE: The seat wiring harness will be reused. Disconnect the electrical connector(s) and wiring clips. 1 Disconnect the seat wire harness OCS electrical connector from the service part OCS electrical connector. 2 Release the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness from the seat cushion pan. 3 If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the heated seat module electrical connector, release the wiring clip on the wiring harness from the seat cushion pan, and disconnect the 2 seat cushion element electrical connectors. 4. Remove the 4 seat cushion bolts retaining the seat cushion to the seat track. 5. CAUTION: While positioning the seat cushion pan and occupant classification sensor (OCS) assembly, be careful not to damage any of the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may cause system failure. Remove the seat cushion and pan assembly. To aid in removal, recline the seat. 6. CAUTION: Use care when separating the seat upholstery from the hook-and-loop strip, or the hook-and-loop strip can be torn from the seat cushion foam pad. Detach the seat cushion trim cover J-clips from the seat cushion pan and remove the seat cushion trim cover. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 806 7. Bend the retaining tab away from the pressure sensor, then slide the pressure sensor off the bracket. 8. CAUTION: Care must be taken to prevent damage to the seat cushion pan when removing the rivets. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure. Remove the 2 rivets and detach the OCS ECU from the seat cushion pan. 9. Remove the OCS. - Pull all the OCS components (hose, pressure sensor, wire harness, ECU and connectors) through the seat cushion pan opening. Installation 1. Bend the retaining tab back on the pressure sensor component bracket. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 807 2. CAUTION: - Inspect the occupant classification sensor (OCS) assembly, seat cushion pan and support assembly for any foreign material before installing the OCS assembly to the seat cushion pan. If any foreign material is found, remove it. Failure to do so may result in personal injury, in the event of an air bag deployment. - Route the seat occupant classification sensor (OCS) components through the correct seat cushion support opening. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure. - While positioning the seat cushion pan and occupant classification sensor (OCS) assembly, be careful not to damage any of the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure. Feed the OCS service kit components (hose, pressure sensor, ECU, wire harness and connectors) through the seat cushion pan opening. 3. NOTE: - When installing a service part OCS, the seat wire harness pressure sensor electrical connector is not used. - Make sure the pressure sensor hose is not kinked during installation. Install the OCS components to the seat cushion pan. 1 Install the pressure sensor onto the seat cushion pan bracket, making sure the retaining tab is completely engaged. When installed correctly, an audible click will be heard and the pressure sensor will not be able to be removed from its bracket without disengaging the retaining tab. 2 Slide the ECU into the seat cushion pan bracket. The ECU must be correctly positioned and securely fastened in place. Failure to do so can set a DTC in the restraints control module (RCM). 3 Install the rivets. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 808 4. Attach the seat cushion trim cover J-clips to the seat cushion pan. 5. CAUTION: While positioning the seat cushion pan and occupant classification sensor (OCS) assembly, be careful not to damage any of the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure. Position the seat cushion and pan assembly to the seat track. To aid in installation, recline the seat. 6. Install the 4 seat cushion bolts retaining the seat cushion to the seat track. - Tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). 7. NOTE: - Do not tie strap any wiring to the OCS bladder and pressure sensor hose. - The seat wiring harness will be reused. Connect the electrical connector(s) and wiring clips. 1 Connect the seat wire harness OCS electrical connector to the service part OCS electrical connector. 2 Install the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness to the cushion pan. 3 If equipped with heated seats, connect the heated seat module electrical connector, install the wiring clip on the wiring harness to the cushion pan, and connect the 2 cushion element electrical connectors. 4 Tie strap the unused seat wire harness pressure sensor electrical connector safely aside. 5 Tie strap all loose wire harnesses and electrical connectors safely aside. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 809 8. Install the front passenger seat into the vehicle. 9. Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the system at this time. 10. WARNING: Make sure the front passenger seat repair is complete, the seat and all attached components (head restraint, seat side shield, etc.) are correctly assembled, and the seat is correctly installed to the vehicle before carrying out the System Reset. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. CAUTION: Make sure the seat is completely assembled before carrying out the occupant classification sensor (OCS) System Reset active command. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may cause system failure. - The following precautions must be taken before carrying out the occupant classification sensor (OCS) System Reset. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may cause system failure. Make sure the OCS system components are connected and no faults are present. - Make sure the OCS system is not at a temperature below 0°C (32°F) or above 45°C (113°F) when initiating the OCS system reset process. If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or hot temperatures, the vehicle must be exposed and kept at a temperature within the limits, 0°C to 45°C (32°F to 113°F) for a minimum of 30 minutes. - Make sure nothing is present on the passenger seat before carrying out the OCS system reset and nothing is placed on the seat during the process. - Make sure a minimum 8-second time period has passed after cycling the ignition switch ON before the carrying out the OCS system reset process. NOTE: For best results in carrying out the OCS system reset process, the OCS system should be at or near room temperature, 10°C to 29°C (50°F to 85°F). - If the first attempt to carry out the OCS system reset is unsuccessful and DTC C1941 is reported, a second attempt must be made. If on the second attempt to carry out the OCS system reset is unsuccessful and DTC C1941 is reported a second time, a new OCS system service kit must be installed. Carry out the OCS system reset. With the front passenger seat empty, use a scan tool to trigger the active command. 11. NOTE: The ignition switch must be cycled after the OCS system reset. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will: fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 810 The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all RCM and OCS module DTCs using a scan tool. 12. NOTE: When installing a new OCS, a prepaid return postcard is provided with the new OCS. The serial number for the new part and the vehicle identification number (VIN) must be recorded and sent to Ford Motor Company. Fill out the necessary information on the OCS traceability card and return it along with the complete inoperative OCS to Ford Motor Company. When returning the inoperative OCS, include the following: seat cushion foam pad, bladder, electronic control unit, pressure sensor (transducer), hose, electrical connectors and wire harness (service part OCS only). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-16 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 814 C356 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 815 Seat Position Sensor: Service and Repair SEAT POSITION SENSOR Removal and Installation WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. NOTE: - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a SRS fault. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. 1. Raise the driver seat and position it in the middle of the track. 2. Depower the SRS. 3. Remove the driver seat. 4. Disconnect the seat position sensor electrical connector. 5. Push apart the 2 tabs, then push inward to release the seat position sensor locking clip. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 816 6. Slide the seat position sensor forward to release the 2 hooks from the bracket. Then remove the seat position sensor. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 8. Repower the SRS. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch View 151-3 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 822 View 151-3 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Clutch Cut Off Switch C2072 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 825 C2070 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Customer Interest Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder TSB 09-19-15 10/05/09 IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift interlock is not affected. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern. a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove ignition key. b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction. c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction? (1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics (2) No - Proceed to step 2. 2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs. The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 835 Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3511 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder TSB 09-19-15 10/05/09 IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift interlock is not affected. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern. a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove ignition key. b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction. c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction? (1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics (2) No - Proceed to step 2. 2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs. The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 841 Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3511 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Lock Cylinder - Functional Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Ignition Lock Cylinder - Functional IGNITION LOCK CYLINDER - FUNCTIONAL Removal and Installation 1. Remove the passive anti-theft system (PATS) transceiver. 2. NOTE: The ignition lock cylinder must be in the RUN position. Using a suitable tool, press the release pin and remove the ignition lock cylinder. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Verify the ignition lock cylinder operation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Lock Cylinder - Functional > Page 844 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Ignition Lock Cylinder - Non Functional IGNITION LOCK CYLINDER - NON FUNCTIONAL Removal and Installation 1. Remove the passive anti-theft system (PATS) transceiver. 2. Remove the ignition lock cylinder. - Use a 1/8-inch diameter drill bit to drill out the lock cylinder retaining pin. - Use a 3/8-inch diameter drill to drill down the middle of the ignition lock key slot until the ignition lock cylinder breaks loose. - Remove and discard the ignition lock cylinder and drill shavings from the steering column. 3. Remove the bearing retainer. 4. Remove the steering column lock housing bearing and steering column lock gear. 5. Thoroughly clean all drill shavings from the steering column and inspect it for damage. 6. Install a new ignition lock cylinder. - Verify the ignition lock cylinder operation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations Neutral Safety Switch: Locations View 151-10 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 848 View 151-11 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 849 C167 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor The PSP sensor monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP sensor voltage input to the PCM changes as the hydraulic pressure changes. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the PCM to adjust the transmission electronic pressure control (EPC) pressure during increased engine load, for example, during parking maneuvers. Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The PSP switch monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP switch is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic pressure increases. The PCM provides a low current voltage on the PSP circuit. When the PSP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low through the SIG RTN circuit. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust the transmission electronic pressure control (EPC) pressure during increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training Special Tool(s) NOTE: If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, the sensors will go into a "sleep mode" to conserve battery power. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information to the smart junction box (SJB). For additional information, refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation. NOTE: The tire pressure sensor training procedure must be done on a single vehicle, in an area without radio frequency noise and at least 1 m (3 ft) away from other vehicles equipped with tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS). Radio frequency noise is generated by electrical motors and appliance operation, cellular telephones, remote transmitters, power inverters and portable entertainment equipment. NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the activation tool, attempt to activate the same sensor with the activation tool. If the sensor still does not respond, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least 1/4 of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. NOTE: The SJB has a 2-minute time limit between sensor responses. If the SJB does not recognize any 1 of the 4 tire pressure sensors during this time limit, the horn will sound twice and the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE NOT TRAINED REPEAT and the entire procedure must be repeated. NOTE: For vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures (such as the E-Series and certain F-Series), the tire pressure sensors must be trained following a tire rotation. Failure to train the sensors will cause the TPMS indicator to illuminate. For vehicles with the same tire pressure for front and rear tires, tire rotation will not affect the system. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then press and release the brake pedal. 2. Cycle the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN position. 3. Press and release the brake pedal. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 5. Turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN position. ^ The horn will sound once and the TPMS indicator will flash if the training mode has been entered successfully. If equipped, the message center will display TRAIN LF TIRE. 6. NOTE: It may take up to 6 seconds to activate a tire pressure sensor. During this time, the activation tool must remain in place 180 degrees from the valve stem. Place the activation tool on the LF tire sidewall opposite (180 degrees) from the valve stem. Press and release the test button on the special tool. The horn will sound briefly to indicate that the tire pressure sensor has been recognized by the SJB. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page 860 7. Within 2 minutes of the horn sounding, place the activation tool on the RF tire sidewall opposite (180 degrees) from the valve stem and press and release the test button to train the RF tire pressure sensor. 8. NOTE: Do not wait more than 2 minutes between training each sensor or the SJB will time out and the entire procedure must be repeated. Repeat Step 7 for the RR and LR tires. The procedure is completed after the last tire has been trained. When the training procedure is complete, the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE TRAINING COMPLETE. For vehicles not equipped with a message center, successful completion of the training procedure will be verified by turning the ignition switch to the OFF position without the horn sounding. If the horn sounds twice when the switch is turned to the OFF position, the training procedure was not successful. 9. Using the scan tool, locate the updated TPMS sensor IDs trained to the SJB and document them on the applicable warranty claim. 10. NOTE: This step is required to clear DTC C2780, cause the SJB to exit the manufacturing mode and to make sure there are no other concerns with a newly programmed SJB. If the sensors are being trained due to the installation of a new SJB, clear any DTCs and perform the SJB on-demand self test. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page 861 Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation Special Tool(s) NOTE: The tire pressure sensors will go into a 14 sleep mode" after 30 minutes of inactivity to conserve battery power. The sensors do not transmit information while in sleep mode, it will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Position the tire pressure monitor activation tool against the LF tire sidewall 180 degrees from the tire valve stem. 3. NOTE: The activation tool will provide feedback in the form of a flashing green light and a beep sound for each successful response from a tire pressure sensor. Press the test button on the activation tool to activate the sensor, activate the sensor at least 2 times. 4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the remaining tires. 5. If the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) indicator remains illuminated after adjusting and activating each sensor, refer to the Symptom Chart in Diagnosis and Testing. See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Disassembly WARNING: The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) sensor battery may release hazardous chemicals if exposed to extreme mechanical damage. If these chemicals contact the skin or eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention. If any part of the battery is swallowed, contact a physician immediately. When disposing of TPMS sensors, follow the correct procedures for hazardous material disposal. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTE: Tire pressure sensors are equipped with Lithium-ion batteries and must be disposed of accordingly. NOTE: Tire pressure sensors are manufactured in multiple colors based on their application. When installing a new sensor, make sure the color of the sensor being installed matches the color of the sensor that was removed. The different colored sensors are not interchangeable. NOTE: The sensor can be removed and installed without removing the strap or the cradle. 1. CAUTION: The sensor, cradle and strap may be damaged by incorrect tire mounting or dismounting. Dismount the tire only as instructed. Remove the tire from the wheel. 2. CAUTION: Do not use a large screwdriver. Apply minimum force during removal or damage to the sensor locking clip may occur. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 864 Using a pocket screwdriver or similar tool, remove the sensor locking clip. 3. CAUTION: Do not use a large screwdriver. Apply minimum force during removal or damage to the sensor may occur. Using a pocket screwdriver or similar tool, detach the sensor from the cradle. Assembly 1. CAUTION: Damage to the sensor may occur if excessive force is applied during sensor installation. NOTE: Make sure the sensor is fully seated into the cradle. The sensor will make a "click" noise when correctly seated. Position the sensor into the cradle by inserting the fringe end of the sensor into the hook end of the cradle and pushing the opposite end of the sensor down onto the cradle. 2. NOTE: The locking clip can only be fully seated when installed in the correct orientation. If the sensor locking clip cannot be fully inserted, then the sensor may not be fully seated on the cradle or the locking clip may be inserted backward. Insert a new locking clip into the sensor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 865 3. CAUTION: The sensor, cradle and strap may be damaged by incorrect tire mounting or dismounting. Mount the tire only as instructed. Install the tire onto the wheel. 4. NOTE: A new tire pressure sensor is shipped in an off mode (or battery saver mode) and must be turned on before it can be trained. To turn the sensor on, install it on a wheel, mount the tire and inflate the tire to the recommended inflation pressure. Wait at least 2 minutes, then continue with the sensor training procedure. Train the tire pressure sensor(s). For additional information, refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 866 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Strap and Cradle Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Strap and Cradle Material Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 867 Disassembly WARNING: The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) sensor battery may release hazardous chemicals if exposed to extreme mechanical damage. If these chemicals contact the skin or eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention. If any part of the battery is swallowed, contact a physician immediately. When disposing of TPMS sensors, follow the correct procedures for hazardous material disposal. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTE: Tire pressure sensors are equipped with Lithium-ion batteries and must be disposed of accordingly. NOTE: Tire pressure sensors are manufactured in multiple colors based on their application. When installing a new sensor, make sure the color of the sensor being installed matches the color of the sensor that was removed. The different colored sensors are not interchangeable. NOTE: The sensor is available separately, the cradle and strap are available as a strap kit. There are several different strap kits available based on wheel diameter but all strap kits share the same base part number. 1. Remove the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) sensor. For additional information, refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor. 2. WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Wear protective gloves when handling components or parts that have pointed or sharp edges. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. Remove a factory installed strap in the following sequence: 1 Locate the strap buckle and secure the strap to the wheel using duct tape or a similar item, on both sides of the buckle approximately 25 mm (0.98 in) from the buckle. 2 Using a large screwdriver and a twisting motion, unbuckle the strap. 3 Discard the strap. 3. To remove a dealer installed strap, turn the worm gear screw until the strap is fully released from the worm gear. ^ Discard the strap. 4. NOTE: To aid assembly, mark the location of the cradle prior to disassembly. Using a screwdriver, or similar tool, remove the cradle by inserting the screwdriver under the cradle and prying up. Assembly 1. NOTE: Make sure the sensor is fully seated into the new cradle. The sensor will make a "click" noise when fully seated. Position the sensor into the new cradle by inserting the fringe end of the sensor into the hook end of the cradle and pushing the opposite end of the sensor down onto the cradle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 868 2. CAUTION: Metal scrapers may damage the wheel. Use only plastic or non-metallic scrapers to remove the cradle adhesive strip residue. NOTE: The sensor and cradle must be installed in the drop well of the wheel, 180 degrees from the valve stem. Clean the area where the sensor and cradle are to be installed. 3. NOTE: The sensor and cradle must be positioned with the hinge side of the sensor on the RH side when viewed from the curb side (beauty side) of the wheel. NOTE: The sensor has raised markings indicating how to position the sensor. Remove the adhesive tape liner from the cradle and position the sensor and cradle into the wheel drop well 180 degrees from the valve stem. 4. Install the tapered end of the strap through the opening of the cradle on the hinge side of the sensor. This will position the worm gear on the locking clip side of the sensor. 5. CAUTION: Steel wheels have a "high spot" along their circumference. Make sure the strap and sensor are mounted at the lowest spot possible to avoid damaging the sensor during wheel and tire disassembly and assembly. NOTE: Keep the strap parallel with the wheel flange while tightening the worm gear. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 869 Position the worm gear 13-26 mm (0.5-1.0 in) away from the sensor and tighten the worm gear. ^ Tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 6. CAUTION: The sensor, cradle and strap may be damaged by incorrect tire mounting or dismounting. Mount the tire only as instructed. Install the tire onto the wheel. 7. NOTE: A new tire pressure sensor is shipped in an off mode (or battery saver mode) and must be turned on before it can be trained. To turn the sensor on, install it on a wheel, mount the tire and inflate the tire to the recommended inflation pressure. Wait at least 2 minutes, then continue with the sensor training procedure. Train the tire pressure sensor(s). For additional information, refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Description and Operation Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation BRAKE PEDAL POSITION (BPP) SWITCH Typical BPP Switch The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal to the PCM indicating that the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and is mounted on the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as follows: - to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake pedal is applied. - to the antilock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM. - to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ABS module interprets the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH (TCS) Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS) Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS) The TCS signals the PCM with VPWR whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature, the transmission control indicator lamp (TCIL) illuminates when the TCS is cycled to disengage overdrive. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 878 Transmission Mode Switch: Testing and Inspection Electrical Connectors Selector Lever Harness Connector C2096 (vehicle harness side) (Part 1) Selector Lever Harness Connector C2096 (vehicle harness side) (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 879 Selector Lever Harness Connector C2096 (component side) (Part 1) Selector Lever Harness Connector C2096 (component side) (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations View 151-10 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 883 View 151-11 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 884 C167 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 885 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Adjustment Special Tool(s) 1. Remove the battery and tray. 2. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position. Loosen the transmission range (TR) sensor bolts. 3. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft). 4. Install the battery and tray. 5. Check for correct operation. The engine should start only in PARK or NEUTRAL. The reverse lamps should illuminate in the REVERSE position. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 886 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Special Tool(s) Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the battery and tray. 3. Remove the transmission range (TR) sensor. 1 Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector. 2 Remove the TR sensor retaining bolts. 3 Remove the TR sensor. Installation 1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position. Install the TR sensor and loosely install the bolts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 887 2. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft). 3. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 4. Install the battery and tray. 5. Check the correct operation. The engine should start only in PARK or NEUTRAL. The reverse lamps should illuminate in the REVERSE position. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor View 151-10 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 892 View 151-11 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 893 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor View 151-10 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 894 View 151-11 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor C193 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 897 C143 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Material Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the 7 retainers and the LH splash shield. ^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 3. Remove the turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor 1 Disconnect the TSS electrical connector. 2 Remove the TSS sensor bolt. 3 Remove the TSS sensor. ^ To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 900 4. NOTE: When installing the sensor, lubricate the O-ring seal with clean transmission fluid. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new O-ring seal as necessary. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 901 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Material Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the 7 retainers and the LH splash shield. ^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 3. Remove the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor 1 Disconnect the OSS electrical connector. 2 Remove the OSS sensor bolt. 3 Remove the OSS sensor. ^ To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 902 4. NOTE: When installing the sensor, lubricate the O-ring seal with clean transmission fluid. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new O-ring seal as necessary. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. NOTE: The electrical connector and the vehicle speed sensor (VSS) are accessed from the top of the transaxle. Remove the VSS bolt. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the VSS. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Window Adjust Switch Power Window Switch: Locations Window Adjust Switch View 151-20 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Window Adjust Switch > Page 912 View 151-20 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Window Adjust Switch > Page 913 View 151-19 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Window Adjust Switch > Page 914 View 151-18 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Adjust Switch Power Window Switch: Diagrams Master Window Adjust Switch C504A Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Adjust Switch > Page 917 C504B Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Adjust Switch > Page 918 Power Window Switch: Diagrams Window Adjust Switch C604 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Adjust Switch > Page 919 C701 C801 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Adjust Switch Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Window Adjust Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Adjust Switch > Page 922 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Adjust Switch > Page 923 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Window Adjust Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Adjust Switch > Page 924 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 925 Power Window Switch: Service and Repair WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH Removal and Installation NOTE: - LH front window control switch shown, all others similar. - The removal and installation procedures for all window control switches are similar. 1. Remove the front door trim panel or the rear door trim panel. 2. Release the window control switch bezel from the door trim panel. 3. Release the locking tabs and remove the window control switch from the bezel. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations Windshield Washer Switch: Locations View 151-13 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 930 View 151-28 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 931 C202 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 932 Windshield Washer Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations Wiper Switch: Locations View 151-13 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 936 View 151-28 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 937 C202 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Sensors and Switches > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 938 Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Alignment Specifications Alignment: Specifications Alignment Specifications Alignment Specifications Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Alignment Specifications > Page 944 Alignment: Specifications General Specifications General Specifications General Specifications (Part 1) General Specifications (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Alignment Specifications > Page 945 Alignment: Specifications Torque Specifications Torque Specifications Torque Specifications Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Page 946 Alignment: Description and Operation Wheel Alignment Angles Camber Negative And Positive Camber Camber is the vertical tilt of the wheel when viewed from the front. Camber can be positive or negative and has a direct effect on tire wear. Caster Caster is the deviation from vertical of an imaginary line drawn through the pivot points (top of strut and lower ball joint), when viewed from the side. The caster specifications will give the vehicle the best directional stability characteristics when loaded and driven. The caster setting is not related to tire wear. The caster setting is not adjustable. A backward tilt is positive (+) and a forward tilt is negative (-). Front caster adjustment is not a separate procedure on this vehicle. Front caster should fall within specification when the front camber is adjusted. Toe Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Page 947 Positive Toe (Toe In) Positive Toe (Toe Out) The vehicle toe setting: ^ affects tire wear and directional stability. Incorrect Thrust Angle (Dogtracking) Incorrect Thrust Angle (Dogtracking) Incorrect thrust angle (also known as dogtracking) is the condition in which the rear axle is not square to the chassis. Heavily crowned roads can give the illusion of dogtracking. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Page 948 Wander Wander is the tendency of the vehicle to require frequent, random left and right steering wheel corrections to maintain a straight path down a level road. Shimmy Shimmy, as experienced by the driver, is large, consistent, rotational oscillations of the steering wheel resulting from large, side-to-side (lateral) tire/wheel movements. Shimmy is usually experienced near 64 km/h (40 mph), and can begin or be amplified when the tire contacts pot holes or irregularities in the road surface. Nibble Sometimes confused with shimmy, nibble is a condition resulting from tire interaction with various road surfaces and experienced by the driver as small rotational oscillations of the steering wheel. Poor Returnability/Sticky Steering Poor returnability and sticky steering are used to describe the poor return of the steering wheel to center after a turn or steering correction. Drift/Pull Pull is a tugging sensation felt by the hands on the steering wheel that must be overcome to keep the vehicle going straight. Drift describes what a vehicle with this condition does with the hands off the steering wheel. ^ A vehicle-related drift/pull on a flat road causes a consistent deviation from the straight-ahead path and requires constant steering input in the opposite direction to counteract the effect. ^ Drift/pull may be induced by conditions external to the vehicle (wind or road crown). Poor Groove Feel Poor groove feel is characterized by little or no buildup of turning effort felt in the steering wheel as the wheel is rocked slowly left and right within very small turns around center or straight-ahead (under 20 degrees of steering wheel turn). Effort may be said to be "flat on-center." ^ Under 20 degrees of turn, most of the turning effort that builds up comes from the mesh of the gear teeth in the steering gear. In this range, the steering wheel is not yet turned enough to feel the effort from the self-aligning forces at the road wheel or tire patch. ^ In the diagnosis of a driveability problem, it is important to understand the difference between wander and poor groove feel. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment Alignment: Service and Repair Camber and Caster Adjustment Camber and Caster Adjustment Front Camber and Caster Adjustment 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the 4 front strut upper mounting bracket nuts. 3. Push the front strut mounting bracket downward and turn it to the desired position to set the camber and caster. Both camber and caster for the front suspension are adjustable. For additional information, refer to Steps 4 and 5. 4. NOTE: Notice the position of the strut rod in each position. Use the following table for LH side camber and or caster adjustment. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 951 Difference From Standard Position (LH Side) 5. NOTE: Notice the position of the strut rod in each position. Use the following table for the RH side camber and or caster adjustment. Difference From Standard Position (RH Side) (Part 1) Difference From Standard Position (RH Side) (Part 2) 6. Install the 4 front strut upper mounting bracket nuts. ^ Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 952 7. Recalibrate the steering wheel position sensor. For additional information, refer to Diagnosis and Testing for steering wheel position sensor calibration. See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Steering Wheel Position Sensor Calibration Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 953 Alignment: Service and Repair Front Toe Adjustment Front Toe Adjustment 1. Start the engine and center the steering wheel. 2. Turn the engine off. Hold the steering wheel in the straight-ahead position using a suitable holding device. 3. Check the toe settings following the equipment manufacturer's instructions. 4. NOTE: Do not allow the steering gear bellows to twist when the front wheel spindle tie rod is rotated. Remove the steering gear bellows clamp(s). 5. Loosen the tie-rod end jam nut(s). ^ Clean and lubricate the nut(s) and front wheel spindle tie-rod threads. 6. Rotate the front wheel spindle tie rods to increase or decrease the front toe. 7. CAUTION: Hold the tie-rod end stationary with a wrench while tightening the nut, or damage to the boot can occur. NOTE: Do not disturb the toe settings while tightening the nut(s). Tighten the tie-rod end jam nut(s) to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 954 8. Install the steering gear bellows clamp(s). 9. Check the toe settings. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. 10. Calibrate the steering wheel position sensor. For additional information, refer to Steering Wheel Position Sensor Calibration in Diagnosis and Testing. See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Steering Wheel Position Sensor Calibration Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 955 Alignment: Service and Repair Ride Height Measurement Ride Height Measurement Front Ride Height Measurement Front Ride Height Measurement NOTE: Make sure that the vehicle is positioned on a flat, level surface and the tires are inflated to the correct pressure. Vehicle should have a full tank of fuel. 1. Position a suitable surface gauge (such as Starrett 57D Surface Gauge), on a flat, level surface and adjust the gauge's arm until the scriber point is located in the center of the lower ball joint bolt. ^ Lock the surface gauge in this position. 2. With the surface gauge positioned on a flat, level surface, record the measurement of the surface gauge position (measurement A). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 956 3. Position the surface gauge on the same flat, level surface as used in Step 1, adjust the gauge's arm until the scriber point is located in the center of the forward lower arm bolt. ^ Lock the surface gauge in this position. 4. With the surface gauge positioned on a flat, level surface, record the measurement of the surface gauge position (measurement B). 5. Subtract measurement A from measurement B to obtain the front ride height (C). ^ Refer to Specifications. Rear Ride Height Measurement Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 957 Rear Ride Height Measurement NOTE: Make sure that the vehicle is positioned on a flat, level surface and the tires are inflated to the correct pressure. Vehicle should have a full tank of fuel. 1. Measure the distance between the flat level surface and the center of the shock absorber lower bolt (measurement A). 2. Measure the distance between the flat level surface and the center of the lower arm inner bolt (measurement B). 3. Subtract measurement B from measurement A to obtain the rear ride height (C). ^ Refer to Specifications. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 958 Alignment: Service and Repair Rear Toe Adjustment Rear Toe Adjustment 1. CAUTION: The cam nut and cam bolt area must be free of foreign material to make sure of correct clamping. NOTE: Clean the general area of the joint to prevent foreign material from entering the joint. Clean the area using only mild liquids. NOTE: Jounce the vehicle to make sure that the suspension is in its normal, at-rest position. Check the toe setting using suitable wheel alignment equipment. 2. NOTE: Do not remove the rear knuckle cam nut and wheel knuckle bolts. If removed, clean the serrations in the bushing sleeve with a wire brush and install a new wheel knuckle bolt and cam nut. Loosen the LH and RH rear wheel knuckle bolts. 3. Turn the LH and RH adjusting cams simultaneously until the toe is within specification. 4. Tighten the LH and RH rear wheel knuckle bolts. ^ Using a suitable tool, hold the adjustment cam nut stationary while tightening the rear wheel knuckle bolt. ^ Tighten to 150 Nm (111 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 959 5. Calibrate the steering wheel position sensor. For additional information, refer to Steering Wheel Position Sensor Calibration in Diagnosis and Testing. See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Steering Wheel Position Sensor Calibration Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications Item....................................................................................................................................................... ..............................................................Specification Engine idling......................................................................................................................................... ..........................................................269 kPa (39 psi) Fuel pump output volume per 10 seconds...... .................................................................................................................................................125 cc (4.32 oz) Key on, engine off................................................................................................................. ..........................................................................269 kPa (39 psi) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 964 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE TEST Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) WARNING: - Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. All vehicles 1. Release the fuel system pressure. Vehicles with 2.3L engine 2. Disconnect the fuel tube-to-fuel rail quick connect coupling. 3. Install the special tool between the fuel tube and the fuel rail. Vehicles with 3.0L engine 4. Remove the air cleaner outlet pipe. 5. Disconnect the fuel tube-to-fuel rail quick connect coupling. 6. NOTE: Use a commercially available fuel test adapter (such as OTC 18527). Install the special tool and fuel test adapter between the fuel tube and the fuel rail. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 965 7. NOTE: The air cleaner outlet pipe must be installed prior to completing the fuel system pressure test. Install the air cleaner outlet pipe. All vehicles 8. NOTE: The fuel pump (FP) driver module electrical connector that was disconnected to release the fuel system pressure must be reconnected to test the fuel system pressure. Connect the FP driver module electrical connector. 9. NOTE: It may take more than one key cycle to pressurize the fuel system. Cycle the ignition key and wait 3 seconds to pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before starting the engine. 10. NOTE: Upon completion of the fuel system pressure test, open the drain valve on the special tool and release fuel system pressure and drain any residual fuel into a suitable container prior to removing the tool Test the fuel system pressure to make sure it is within the specified range. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications Measured/PID Values Hot Idle ................................................................................................................................................ ........................................................ 705-820 RPM Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair AIR CLEANER INTAKE PIPE Exploded View Removal and Installation 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Remove the bolt and the air cleaner intake pipe. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 3. NOTE: Make sure that the front sponge seal of the intake pipe is seated on the shroud panel. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE RELEASE WARNING: - Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the fuel pump (FP) driver module electrical connector. 3. Start the engine and allow it to idle until it stalls. 4. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately 5 seconds to make sure the fuel injection supply manifold pressure has been released. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 6. When fuel system service is complete, connect the FP driver module electrical connector. 7. NOTE: It may take more than one key cycle to pressurize the fuel system. Cycle the ignition key and wait 3 seconds to pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before starting the engine. 8. Start the vehicle and check the fuel system for leaks. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications Firing Order: Specifications Item....................................................................................................................................................... ..............................................................Specification Firing order........................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................1-4-2-5-3-6 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > General Specifications Spark Plug: Specifications General Specifications Item....................................................................................................................................................... ..............................................................Specification Spark plug gap..................................................................................................................................... ....................................1.32-1.42 mm (0.052-0.056 in) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > General Specifications > Page 984 Torque Specifications Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 985 Spark Plug: Application and ID Item....................................................................................................................................................... ..............................................................Specification Spark plug............................................................................................................................................ ...................................................................AGSF-32N Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 986 Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection Spark Plug Inspection 1. Inspect the spark plug for a bridged gap. ^ Check for deposit build-up closing the gap between the electrodes. Deposits are caused by oil or carbon fouling. ^ Clean the spark plug. 2. Check for oil fouling. ^ Check for wet, black deposits on the insulator shell bore electrodes, caused by excessive oil entering the combustion chamber through worn rings and pistons, excessive valve-to-guide clearance or worn or loose bearings. ^ Correct the oil leak concern. ^ Install a new spark plug. 3. Inspect for carbon fouling. Look for black, dry, fluffy carbon deposits on the insulator tips, exposed shell surfaces and electrodes, caused by a spark plug with an incorrect heat range, dirty air cleaner, too rich a fuel mixture or excessive idling. ^ Install new spark plugs. 4. Inspect for normal burning. ^ Check for light tan or gray deposits on the firing tip. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 987 5. Inspect for pre-ignition, identified by melted electrodes and a possibly damaged insulator. Metallic deposits on the insulator indicate engine damage. This may be caused by incorrect ignition timing, wrong type of fuel or the unauthorized installation of a Heli-Coil(R) insert in place of the spark plug threads. ^ Install a new spark plug. 6. Inspect for overheating, identified by white or light gray spots and with a bluish-burnt appearance of electrodes. This is caused by engine overheating, wrong type of fuel, loose spark plugs, spark plugs with an incorrect heat range, low fuel pump pressure or incorrect ignition timing. ^ Install a new spark plug. 7. Inspect for fused deposits, identified by melted or spotty deposits resembling bubbles or blisters. These are caused by sudden acceleration. ^ Install new spark plugs. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 988 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 989 Spark Plug: Service and Repair SPARK PLUGS Exploded View Engine Ignition - RH Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 990 Engine Ignition - LH Removal RH side 1. NOTE: The upper intake manifold must be removed to access the RH spark plugs only. Remove the upper intake manifold. Both sides 2. Disconnect the ignition coil electrical connectors. 3. NOTE: When removing the ignition coil-on-plugs, a slight twisting motion will break the seal and ease removal. Remove the bolts and the ignition coils. 4. CAUTION: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spark plugs, or damage can occur to the cylinder head or spark plug. NOTE: Use compressed air to remove any foreign material in the spark plug well before removing the spark plugs. Remove the spark plugs. Installation Both sides 1. Inspect the spark plugs. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 991 2. Adjust the spark plug gap as necessary. 3. CAUTION: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spark plugs, or damage can occur to the cylinder head or spark plug. Install the spark plugs. Tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). 4. NOTE: Apply a small amount of dielectric grease to the inside of the ignition coil boots before attaching to the spark plugs. Install the ignition coils and bolts. Tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 992 5. Connect the ignition coil electrical connectors. RH side 6. Install the upper intake manifold. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Compression Check: Specifications Compression Test - Test Results The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading cylinder is at least 75% of the highest reading. Refer to the Compression Pressure Limit Chart. Compression Pressure Limit Chart Compression Pressure Limit Chart (Part 1) Compression Pressure Limit Chart (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > System Diagnosis > Compression Test Compression Check: Testing and Inspection Compression Test Compression Test - All Vehicles Except Hybrid 1. Make sure the oil in the crankcase is of the correct viscosity and at the correct level and that the battery is correctly charged. Operate the vehicle until the engine is at normal operating temperature. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then remove all the spark plugs. 2. Set the throttle plates in the wide-open position. 3. Install a compression gauge such as the Compression Tester in the No. 1 cylinder. 4. Install an auxiliary starter switch in the starting circuit. With the ignition switch in the OFF position, and using the auxiliary starter switch, crank the engine a minimum of 5 compression strokes and record the highest reading. Note the approximate number of compression strokes necessary to obtain the highest reading. 5. Repeat the test on each cylinder, cranking the engine approximately the same number of compression strokes. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > System Diagnosis > Compression Test > Page 998 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection Compression Test - Test Results Compression Test - Test Results The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading cylinder is at least 75% of the highest reading. Refer to the Compression Pressure Limit Chart. Compression Pressure Limit Chart Compression Pressure Limit Chart (Part 1) Compression Pressure Limit Chart (Part 2) If one or more cylinders reads low, squirt approximately one tablespoon of engine oil meeting Ford specification on top of the pistons in the low-reading cylinders. Repeat the compression pressure check on these cylinders. Compression Test - Interpreting Compression Readings 1. If compression improves considerably, piston rings are worn or damaged. 2. If compression does not improve, valves are sticking or not seating correctly. 3. If 2 adjacent cylinders indicate low compression pressures and squirting oil on each piston does not increase compression, the head gasket may be leaking between cylinders. Engine oil or coolant in cylinders could result from this condition. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > System Diagnosis > Compression Test > Page 999 Use the Compression Pressure Limit Chart when checking cylinder compression so that the lowest reading is within 75% of the highest reading. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications Valve Clearance: Specifications Valve Clearance This engine is equipped with hydraulic lash adjusters. No adjustment is required. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Drive Belt: > 09-21-2 > Nov > 09 > Engine - FEAD Belt Whining/Bearing Type Noise Drive Belt: Customer Interest Engine - FEAD Belt Whining/Bearing Type Noise TSB 09-21-2 11/02/09 3.0L FRONT END ACCESSORY DRIVE RIGHT HAND IDLER PULLEY BEARING NOISE FORD: 2008 Escape MERCURY: 2008 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 09-14-6 to update the Service Procedure and Part List. ISSUE Some 2008 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with 3.0L engine may exhibit front end accessory drive (FEAD) whining/bearing type noise. The noise may be coming from the right hand (RH) FEAD idler pulley that is in front of the right bank cylinder head. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Using a stethoscope, place end on the bolt that holds the right hand idler pulley on. a. If the noise is coming from the bolt/pulley, then go to Step 2 and replace the idler pulley. b. If the noise is not coming from the bolt/pulley, follow Work Shop Manual (WSM), Section 303-05B to diagnose. 2. Remove bolt that holds the pulley and bearing assembly on to the bracket. Refer to WSM Section 303-05B. 3. Remove pulley. 4. Install new pulley and torque pulley bolt to 18 lb-ft (25 N.m). 5. Loosen the pulley and bracket assembly. Torque bolts to 18 lb-ft (25 N.m) following the torque sequence. (Figure 1) NOTE IF BOLTS ARE NOT TORQUED IN SEQUENCE AS ILLUSTRATED, THEN PREMATURE BEARING FAILURE MAY OCCUR. Parts Block Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Drive Belt: > 09-21-2 > Nov > 09 > Engine - FEAD Belt Whining/Bearing Type Noise > Page 1011 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092102A 2008 Escape, Mariner 0.6 Hr. 3.0L: Replace The Idler Pulley And Bracket Assembly Includes Time To Diagnose Concern (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19A216 69 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Belt: > 09-21-2 > Nov > 09 > Engine - FEAD Belt Whining/Bearing Type Noise Drive Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - FEAD Belt Whining/Bearing Type Noise TSB 09-21-2 11/02/09 3.0L FRONT END ACCESSORY DRIVE RIGHT HAND IDLER PULLEY BEARING NOISE FORD: 2008 Escape MERCURY: 2008 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 09-14-6 to update the Service Procedure and Part List. ISSUE Some 2008 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with 3.0L engine may exhibit front end accessory drive (FEAD) whining/bearing type noise. The noise may be coming from the right hand (RH) FEAD idler pulley that is in front of the right bank cylinder head. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Using a stethoscope, place end on the bolt that holds the right hand idler pulley on. a. If the noise is coming from the bolt/pulley, then go to Step 2 and replace the idler pulley. b. If the noise is not coming from the bolt/pulley, follow Work Shop Manual (WSM), Section 303-05B to diagnose. 2. Remove bolt that holds the pulley and bearing assembly on to the bracket. Refer to WSM Section 303-05B. 3. Remove pulley. 4. Install new pulley and torque pulley bolt to 18 lb-ft (25 N.m). 5. Loosen the pulley and bracket assembly. Torque bolts to 18 lb-ft (25 N.m) following the torque sequence. (Figure 1) NOTE IF BOLTS ARE NOT TORQUED IN SEQUENCE AS ILLUSTRATED, THEN PREMATURE BEARING FAILURE MAY OCCUR. Parts Block Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Belt: > 09-21-2 > Nov > 09 > Engine - FEAD Belt Whining/Bearing Type Noise > Page 1017 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092102A 2008 Escape, Mariner 0.6 Hr. 3.0L: Replace The Idler Pulley And Bracket Assembly Includes Time To Diagnose Concern (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19A216 69 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views Drive Belt: Exploded Views Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 1020 Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 1021 Drive Belt: Mechanical Diagrams Accessory Drive Belt Accessory Drive Belt (Part 1) Accessory Drive Belt (Part 2) Coolant Pump Drive Belt Coolant Pump Drive Belt Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 1022 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Drive Belt: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Inspection and Verification CAUTION: Under no circumstances should the accessory drive belt, tensioner or pulleys have any fluids or belt dressing applied to them as damage to the belt material and tensioner damping mechanism may occur. 1. Verify the customer concern by operating the system. 2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical damage. Visual Inspection Chart Visual Inspection Chart Belt Tensioner With Belt Length Indicator NOTE: Modular engine (without A/C) belt tensioner shown, others similar. NOTE: Belt tensioner is shown in the free-state position against the arm travel stops. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 1025 Belt Tensioner With Belt Length Indicator 3. Check that the belt length indicator, if equipped, on the belt tensioner is in the acceptable belt installation and wear range. If the indicator is in the belt replacement range, either an incorrect belt is installed or the belt is worn beyond the service limit. Install a new belt as necessary. 4. Eliminate all other non-belt related noises that could cause belt misdiagnosis, such as A/C compressor engagement chirp, A/C slugging noise, power steering cavitations at low temperatures, variable camshaft timing (VCT) tick or generator whine. 5. If a concern is found, correct the condition before proceeding to the next step. V-Ribbed Serpentine Drive Belt With Cracks Across Ribs Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 1026 V-Ribbed Serpentine Drive Belt With Cracks Across Ribs 6. Check the belt for cracks. Up to 15 cracks in a rib over a distance of 100 mm (4.0 in) can be considered acceptable. If cracks exceed this standard, install a new belt. V-Ribbed Serpentine Belt With Piling NOTE: Piling is an excessive buildup in the V-grooves of the belt. V-Ribbed Serpentine Belt With Piling 7. The condition of the V-ribbed drive belt should be compared against the illustration and appropriate action taken. 1. Small scattered deposits of rubber material. This is not a concern, therefore, installation of a new belt is not required. 2. Longer deposit areas building up to 50% of the rib height. This is not considered a concern but it can result in excessive noise. If noise is apparent, install a new belt. 3. Heavy deposits building up along the grooves resulting in a possible noise and belt stability concern. If heavy deposits are apparent, install a new belt. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 1027 V-Ribbed Serpentine Belt With Chunks of Rib Missing V-Ribbed Serpentine Belt With Chunks of Rib Missing 8. There should be no chunks missing from the belt ribs. If the belt shows any evidence of this, install a new accessory drive belt. 9. If the concern is not visually evident, verify the symptom and GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 1028 Drive Belt: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Symptom Chart Symptom Chart (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 1029 Symptom Chart (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 1030 Drive Belt: Component Tests and General Diagnostics Drive Belt - Noise/Flutter CAUTION: Under no circumstances should the accessory drive belt, tensioner or pulleys have any fluids or belt dressing applied to them as damage to the belt material and tensioner damping mechanism may occur. Drive belt chirp occurs due to pulley misalignment or excessive pulley runout. It can be the result of a damaged or incorrectly aligned grooved pulley. To correct, determine the area where the noise comes from. Check each of the pulleys in that area with a straightedge to the crankshaft pulley. Look for accessory pulleys out of position in the fore/aft direction or at an angle to the straightedge. Drive belt squeal may be an intermittent or constant noise that occurs when the drive belt slips on an accessory pulley under certain conditions. A short intermittent squeal may occur during engine start-up and shut down or during very rapid engine acceleration and decelerations, such as: ^ wide open throttle (WOT) 1-2 and 2-3 shifts or 2-3 and 3-4 back out shifts on automatic transmissions. ^ WOT 1-2 and 2-3 shifts and any combination of rapid downshifting on manual transmissions. These special short-term transient events are expected, and are due to the higher system inertias required to meet the electrical and cooling demands on today's vehicle systems. Constant or reoccurring drive belt squeal can occur: ^ if the A/C discharge pressure goes above specifications: the A/C system is overcharged. - the A/C condenser core airflow is blocked. ^ if the A/C off equalized pressure (the common discharged and suction pressure that occurs after several minutes) exceeds specifications. ^ if any of the accessories or idler pulley(s) are damaged or have a worn or damaged bearing. All accessories should be rotatable by hand in the unloaded condition. If not, inspect the accessory. ^ if there is evidence of fluid contamination on the accessory drive belt. When the drive belt has been exposed to fluid contamination during vehicle operation, such as leaks from the power steering system, A/C system or cooling system, clean all pulleys with soap and water, rinse with clean water and install a new accessory drive belt. If the drive belt has been exposed to fluids in a localized area during routine vehicle service, such as replacement of hoses or fluids, the drive belt and pulleys should be washed with soap and water immediately (prior to starting the engine), and rinsed with clean water. ^ if the accessory drive belt is too long. A drive belt that is too long will allow the accessory drive belt tensioner arm to go all the way to the arm travel stop under certain load conditions, which will release tension to the drive belt. If the accessory drive belt tensioner indicator is outside the normal installation wear range window, install a new accessory drive belt. ^ NOTE: The accessory drive belt tensioner arm should rotate freely without binding. Install a new accessory drive belt tensioner if the drive belt tensioner is worn or damaged. Drive Belt - Incorrect Installation CAUTION: Incorrect accessory drive belt installation will cause excessive drive belt wear and may cause the drive belt to come off the pulleys. Non-standard accessory drive belts can track differently or incorrectly. If an accessory drive belt tracks incorrectly, install a new accessory drive belt to avoid performance failure or loss of the drive belt. Incorrect Installation Incorrect Installation Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 1031 Correct Installation Correct Installation With the engine running, check accessory drive belt tracking on all pulleys. If the edge of the accessory drive belt rides beyond the edge of the pulleys, noise and premature wear will occur. Make sure the accessory drive belt rides correctly on the pulley. If an accessory drive belt tracking condition exists, proceed with the following: ^ Visually check the accessory drive belt tensioner for damage and wear, especially the mounting pad surface and arm alignment. If the accessory drive belt tensioner is not installed correctly, the mounting surface pad will be out of position. If the tensioner arm is worn, the arm will be out of alignment. Either of these conditions will result in chirp and squeal noises. ^ With the engine running, visually observe the grooves in the pulleys (not the pulley flanges or the pulley forward faces) for excessive wobble. Install new components as necessary. ^ Check all accessories, mounting brackets and the accessory drive belt tensioner for any interference that would prevent the component from mounting correctly. Correct any interference condition and recheck the accessory drive belt tracking. ^ Tighten all accessories, mounting brackets and accessory drive belt tensioner retaining hardware to specification. Recheck the accessory drive belt tracking. Belt Tensioner - Mechanical The only mechanical check that needs to be made is a check for tensioner stick, grab or bind. 1. With the engine off, check routing of the accessory drive belt. Refer to the illustrations under Description and Operation. 2. NOTE: The accessory drive belt tensioner spring is very strong and requires substantial force to release. Using a suitable, commercially available serpentine belt tensioner release tool, release the tension on the belt and detach the accessory drive belt from the tensioner. Carry out the following tests: ^ Using the release tool, move the tensioner from its relaxed position, through its full stroke and back to the relaxed position to make sure there is no stick, grab or bind, and to make sure that there is tension on the tensioner spring. ^ Rotate the tensioner pulley by hand and check for a binding, contaminated or seized condition. ^ Inspect the area surrounding the accessory drive belt tensioner for oil leaks or contamination and repair any leaks. 3. If the accessory drive belt tensioner does not meet the criteria in the previous step, install a new tensioner. If the accessory drive belt tensioner meets the criteria in the previous step, proceed to testing the tensioner dynamically. Belt Tensioner - Dynamics The accessory drive belt tensioner can be checked dynamically as follows: 1. With the engine running, observe the accessory drive belt tensioner movement. The accessory drive tensioner should move (respond) when the A/C clutch cycles (if equipped), or when the engine is accelerated rapidly. If the accessory drive belt tensioner movement is excessive without A/C clutch cycling or engine acceleration, check belt rideout. Excessive belt rideout (uneven depth of grooves in the belt) can cause excessive accessory drive belt tensioner movement. Check rideout condition by installing a new belt. If excessive accessory drive belt tensioner movement still exists, install a new accessory drive belt tensioner. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Accessory Drive Belt Drive Belt: Service and Repair Accessory Drive Belt Accessory Drive Belt Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Accessory Drive Belt > Page 1034 Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View (Part 2) Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the pin-type retainer, 5 bolts and the RH lower splash shield. ^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 3. Using a suitable belt tensioner release tool, rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner counterclockwise and remove the accessory drive belt. 4. NOTE: Refer to the illustration for correct drive belt routing. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Accessory Drive Belt > Page 1035 Drive Belt: Service and Repair Coolant Pump Belt Coolant Pump Belt Coolant Pump Belt Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Cut and remove the coolant pump belt. ^ Discard the belt. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Drive Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Accessory Drive Belt > Page 1036 Installation 1. Install the coolant pump belt on the coolant pump pulley and position it on the camshaft pulley. 2. Remove the pin-type retainer, 5 bolts and the RH lower splash shield. 3. CAUTION: Do not use any screwdrivers, pliers or other metal objects that could cause damage to the belt or camshaft pulley while installing the belt. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise to seat the coolant pump belt on the camshaft pulley. 4. Install the RH lower splash shield, pin-type retainer and 5 bolts. ^ Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair AIR CLEANER INTAKE PIPE Exploded View Removal and Installation 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Remove the bolt and the air cleaner intake pipe. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 3. NOTE: Make sure that the front sponge seal of the intake pipe is seated on the shroud panel. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Locations Cabin Air Filter: Locations CABIN AIR FILTER Removal and Installation 1. Remove the RH cowl panel grille. 2. Remove the 2 water shield screws and the water shield. 3. Remove the cabin air filter. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Locations > Page 1045 Cabin Air Filter: Description and Operation Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Locations > Page 1046 Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair CABIN AIR FILTER Removal and Installation 1. Remove the RH cowl panel grille. 2. Remove the 2 water shield screws and the water shield. 3. Remove the cabin air filter. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Evaporative Canister Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair Evaporative Canister Filter: Service and Repair DUST SEPARATOR Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the fuel tank filler pipe vent tube from the dust separator. 3. Depress the retainer tab and remove the dust separator from the fuel vapor tube and the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister bracket 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Filters > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE RELEASE WARNING: - Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the fuel pump (FP) driver module electrical connector. 3. Start the engine and allow it to idle until it stalls. 4. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately 5 seconds to make sure the fuel injection supply manifold pressure has been released. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 6. When fuel system service is complete, connect the FP driver module electrical connector. 7. NOTE: It may take more than one key cycle to pressurize the fuel system. Cycle the ignition key and wait 3 seconds to pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before starting the engine. 8. Start the vehicle and check the fuel system for leaks. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line COMPRESSOR TO CONDENSER DISCHARGE LINE Removal and Installation NOTE: Installation of a new receiver/drier is not required when repairing the air conditioning system except when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the receiver/drier. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Recover refrigerant. 3. Remove the RH lower engine splash shield. 4. Remove the front bumper cover. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line > Page 1059 5. Remove the condenser inlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). 6. Remove the A/C compressor discharge fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the O-ring and gasket seals. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). 7. Remove the compressor-to-condenser discharge line. 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Install new gasket seals and O-ring seals. - Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. 9. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line > Page 1060 Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Condenser to Receiver Drier Line CONDENSER TO RECEIVER DRIER LINE Part 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line > Page 1061 Part 2 Removal and Installation NOTE: Installation of a new receiver/drier is not required when repairing the air conditioning system, except when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the receiver/drier. 1. Recover the refrigerant. 2. Remove the DC/DC converter. 3. Remove the front bumper cover. 4. Remove the compressor manifold and tube bracket nut. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 5. Remove the condenser outlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the O-ring seal. 6. Remove the evaporator outlet line fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). 7. Remove the auxiliary evaporator outlet line fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seals. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). 8. Remove the receiver/drier inlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). 9. Remove the condenser-to-receiver/drier line. 10. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Install new gasket seal and O-ring seal. - Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. 11. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line > Page 1062 Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Evaporator Inlet Line EVAPORATOR INLET LINE Removal and Installation NOTE: Installation of a new receiver/drier is not required when repairing the air conditioning system, except when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the receiver/drier. 1. Recover the refrigerant. 2. Remove the evaporator inlet line bracket nut. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 3. Remove the receiver/drier outlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). 4. Remove the thermostatic expansion valve (TXV) fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the gasket seals. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). 5. Remove the evaporator inlet line. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line > Page 1063 - Install new gasket seals and O-ring seals. - Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. 7. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line > Page 1064 Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Evaporator Outlet Line EVAPORATOR OUTLET LINE Removal and Installation NOTE: Installation of a new receiver/drier is not required when repairing the air conditioning system, except when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the receiver/drier. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Recover the refrigerant. 3. Remove the RH lower engine splash shield. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Hoses > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line > Page 1065 4. Remove the A/C compressor suction fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). 5. Detach the wire harness clip from the evaporator outlet line. 6. Remove the thermostatic expansion valve (TXV) fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the gasket seals. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). 7. Disconnect the low-charge protection switch electrical connector. 8. Detach the evaporator outlet line from the receiver/drier bracket. 9. Remove the evaporator outlet line. 10. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Install new gasket seals and a new O-ring seal. - Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. 11. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Specifications Brake Fluid: Specifications BRAKE FLUID Motorcraft High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid Ford P/N .............................................................................................................................................. .................................................................. PM-1-C Ford Specification ............................................... ..................................................................................................................................... WSS-M6C62-A Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Clutch Fluid > Component Information > Specifications Clutch Fluid: Specifications HYDRAULIC CLUTCH FLUID Motorcraft High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid Ford P/N .............................................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... PM-1 Ford Specification ...................................................................................................................................................... ESA-M6C25-A or WSS-M6C62-A Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Coolant: Capacity Specifications Engine Coolant Capacity Coolant ................................................................................................................................................ ........................................... 10.6 Quarts ( 10.0 L ) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1077 Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications ENGINE COOLANT AND M/E COOLANT Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant (yellow-colored) Ford P/N .............................................................................................................................................. .................................................................. VC-7-B Ford Specification ................................................................................................................................ ................................................ WSS-M97B51-A1 NOTE: Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications Fluid Capacity....................................................................................................................................... ..........................................................9.5L (10 quarts) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1082 Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications Ford Part Name - Mercon V Automatic Transmission Fluid Ford Part Number - XT-5-QM - XT-5-QMC (US) - CXT-5-LM12 (Canada) Ford Specification - MERCON V Note: Using any transmission fluid other than those that meet the recommended specification may cause internal transmission damage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill Material Draining 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. NOTE: If an internal problem is suspected, drain the fluid through a paper filter. A small amount of metal or friction particles may be found from normal wear. If an excessive amount of metal or friction material is present the transaxle will need to be overhauled. Remove the transaxle drain plug. Refill 1. Using a small amount of thread sealant on the threads, install the transaxle drain plug. ^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 2. Fill the transaxle with clean automatic transmission fluid. 3. Start the engine and run through all the gears and check fluid level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill > Page 1085 Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning Transmission Fluid Combo Cooler Without Cooler Bypass Valve Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill > Page 1086 Transmission Fluid Combo Cooler With Cooler Bypass Valve 1. Remove the radiator grille. 2. CAUTION: Do not exceed 276 kPa (40 psi) of air pressure when flushing the cooler or damage to the internal cooler fins will occur. CAUTION: Flush with clean transmission fluid only. Do not use solvents, mineral spirits or water-based cleaners. NOTE: Rubber hoses must be attached to the ends of the fluid cooler tubes, to aid in connecting them to the cleaner. Backflush any contaminants from the oil-to-air cooler by connecting the flushing machine pressure line to the transmission fluid cooler outlet tube and the return line to the transmission fluid cooler inlet tube. After 5 minutes, stop the machine, reverse the hoses and repeat the flushing. 3. CAUTION: Do not exceed 276 kPa (40 psi) of air pressure when flushing the cooler. Damage to the cooler will occur. NOTE: Some vehicles are equipped with a cold weather bypass valve which cannot by cleaned or flushed. A new valve should be installed as part of an overhaul or prior to the installation of a remanufactured transaxle. Using compressed air, blow through the coolers until all fluid is removed. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - M/T: Capacity Specifications Manual Transmission Capacity ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... 2.4 Quarts (2.3 liters) Note: Approximate refill. Service refill capacity is determined by filling the transmission to the bottom of the filler hole with the vehicle on a level surface. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1091 Fluid - M/T: Fluid Type Specifications Manual Transmission Fluid Type Type ..................................................................................................................................................... .................. Motorcraft SAE 75W-90 Gear Oil GL-4 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1092 Fluid - M/T: Service and Repair Transaxle Draining and Filling Material 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the drain plug and drain the fluid. Manual Transaxle Drain Plug 3. NOTE: Use a new gasket and apply sealant on the drain plug. Install the drain plug. ^ Tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft). Fill Level Inspection Plug 4. Remove the fill level inspection plug. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1093 Manual Transaxle Fill Level Inspection Plug 5. Remove the transaxle fill plug. Manual Transaxle Fill Plug 6. Fill the transmission with gear oil until level with the fill level inspection plug hole. 7. NOTE: Use a new gasket and apply sealant on the fill plug. Install the transaxle fill plug. ^ Tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft). 8. NOTE: Use a new gasket and apply sealant on the fill level inspection plug. Install the fill level inspection plug. ^ Tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1094 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - Differential: Capacity Specifications Differential Oil Capacity Rear Axle ............................................................................................................................................. ................................................... 2.4 Pints ( 1.15 L ) Note: Fill to 1/4 inch to 9/16 inch ( 6 mm to 14 mm ) below of fill hole. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1099 Fluid - Differential: Fluid Type Specifications Differential Fluid Type REAR AXLE Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant Ford P/N .................................................................................................................................................. XY-80W90-QL(US) / CXY-80W90-1L (Canada) Ford Specification .................................................... .................................................................................................................................. WSP-M2C197-A NOTE: Vehicles exposed for prolonged periods to temperatures less than 40 Celsius (-40 Fahrenheit) should change out the rear axle fluid to Motorcraft SAE 75W-140 High Performance Rear Axle Lubricant, Ford part number XY-75W140-QL meeting Ford specification WSL-M2C192-A. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fluid - Transfer Case: > 09-4-4 > Mar > 09 > Drivetrain - Fluid leak From PTU Vent Fluid - Transfer Case: Customer Interest Drivetrain - Fluid leak From PTU Vent TSB 09-4-4 03/09/09 PTU VENT BOLT LEAK - MISDIAGNOSED AS PTU SHAFT SEAL LEAK FORD: 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2005-2009 Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid ISSUE Some 2005-2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a leak from the power transfer unit (PTU) vent tube bolt. This may be misdiagnosed as a PTU link shaft seal leak. Please verify leak origin and tighten PTU vent tube bolt, before replacing parts. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the PTU fill plug and check fluid level per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 308-07B. NOTE THE FLUID LEVEL MUST BE EVEN WITH THE BOTTOM OF THE FILLER HOLE WITH THE VEHICLE ON FLAT, LEVEL GROUND. 2. Inspect PTU vent tube bolt for leak. (Figure 1) a. If PTU vent tube bolt leaking - clean bolt contact sur[aces and torque bolt to 120 +/- 19 lb-in (13.5 +/- 2.1 N.m). b. If PTU vent tube bolt not leaking - continue with normal WSM, Section 308-07B diagnosis. NOTE THIS BOLT DOES NOT REQUIRE A WASHER FOR THIS APPLICATION. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fluid - Transfer Case: > 09-4-4 > Mar > 09 > Drivetrain - Fluid leak From PTU Vent > Page 1108 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 090404A 2005-2009 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner, Escape Hybrid, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Clean Bolt Contact Surfaces, Includes Time To Check And Adjust PTU Fluid Level DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7034 24 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid - Transfer Case: > 09-4-4 > Mar > 09 > Drivetrain - Fluid leak From PTU Vent Fluid - Transfer Case: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Fluid leak From PTU Vent TSB 09-4-4 03/09/09 PTU VENT BOLT LEAK - MISDIAGNOSED AS PTU SHAFT SEAL LEAK FORD: 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2005-2009 Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid ISSUE Some 2005-2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a leak from the power transfer unit (PTU) vent tube bolt. This may be misdiagnosed as a PTU link shaft seal leak. Please verify leak origin and tighten PTU vent tube bolt, before replacing parts. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the PTU fill plug and check fluid level per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 308-07B. NOTE THE FLUID LEVEL MUST BE EVEN WITH THE BOTTOM OF THE FILLER HOLE WITH THE VEHICLE ON FLAT, LEVEL GROUND. 2. Inspect PTU vent tube bolt for leak. (Figure 1) a. If PTU vent tube bolt leaking - clean bolt contact sur[aces and torque bolt to 120 +/- 19 lb-in (13.5 +/- 2.1 N.m). b. If PTU vent tube bolt not leaking - continue with normal WSM, Section 308-07B diagnosis. NOTE THIS BOLT DOES NOT REQUIRE A WASHER FOR THIS APPLICATION. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid - Transfer Case: > 09-4-4 > Mar > 09 > Drivetrain - Fluid leak From PTU Vent > Page 1114 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 090404A 2005-2009 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner, Escape Hybrid, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Clean Bolt Contact Surfaces, Includes Time To Check And Adjust PTU Fluid Level DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7034 24 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - Transfer Case: Capacity Specifications Transfer Case Capacity Power Transfer Unit ............................................................................................................................. ............................................ 12.0 ounces (0.35 liters) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1117 Fluid - Transfer Case: Fluid Type Specifications Transfer Case - Power Transfer Unit (PTU) Type...............................................................................................................................................Mot orcraft SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant Part Number......................................................................................................................................... ..XY-75W140-QL(US) / CXY-75W140-1L (Canada) Specification......................................................................................................................................... .........................................................WSL-M2C192-A Type..................................................................................................................................................M otorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant Part Number......................................................................................................................................... ......XY80W90-QL(US) / CXY-80W190-1L (Canada) Specification......................................................................................................................................... .........................................................WSP-M2C197-A NOTE: The PTU on an AUTOMATIC transaxle uses Motorcraft SAE 75W-140 Synthetic lubricant. The PTU on a MANUAL transaxle uses Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 lubricant. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Transfer Unit (PTU) Draining and Filling - Automatic Transaxle Fluid - Transfer Case: Service and Repair Power Transfer Unit (PTU) Draining and Filling Automatic Transaxle Power Transfer Unit (PTU) Draining and Filling - Automatic Transaxle Material CAUTION: New power transfer unit (PTU) lubricant must be added any time the PTU has been submerged in water. NOTE: The power transfer unit (PTU) is lubricated for life and is not to be checked unless a leak is suspected or a repair is necessary. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the drain plug and drain the fluid. 3. Apply silicone sealant to the drain plug threads and install the drain plug. ^ Tighten to 14 Nm (10 lb-ft). 4. NOTE: The fluid level must be even with the bottom of the filler hole with the vehicle on flat, level ground. Remove the fill plug and fill the PTU with specified lubricant. 5. Apply silicone sealant to the fill plug and install the plug. ^ Tighten to 34 Nm (25 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Transfer Unit (PTU) Draining and Filling - Automatic Transaxle > Page 1120 Fluid - Transfer Case: Service and Repair Power Transfer Unit (PTU) Draining and Filling - Manual Transaxle Power Transfer Unit (PTU) Draining and Filling - Manual Transaxle Material CAUTION: New power transfer unit (PTU) lubricant must be installed any time the PTU has been submerged in water. NOTE: The power transfer unit (PTU) is lubricated for life and is not to be checked unless a leak is suspected. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. NOTE: The fluid level must be even with the bottom of the filler hole with the vehicle on flat, level ground. Remove the fill plug and fill the PTU with rear axle lubricant. 3. Install the fill plug and gasket. ^ Tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications Engine Oil With Filter ............................................................................................................................................ ............................................................ 5.7L (6.0 Qt) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1125 Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications Engine Oil Ford Part Name ....................................................................................................................................... Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Ford Part Number ................................................................... ...................................................................................................................... XO-5W20-QSP Ford Specification ......................................................................................................................................... WSS-M2C930-A with API Certification Mark Note: Use of synthetic or synthetic blend motor oil is not mandatory. Engine oil need only meet the requirements of Ford specification WSS-M2C930-A and the API Certification mark. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications Power Steering Fluid: Specifications Power Steering Fluid This vehicle is equipped with an Electric Power-Assisted Steering (EPAS) System. There is no fluid reservoir to check or fill. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1133 Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications R-134a Refrigerant YN-19 (US); CYN-16-P or CYN-16-R (Canada) WSH-M17B19-A (Specification) Non-hybrid ........................................................................................................................................... ........................................... 0.71kg (25 oz) (1.57 lb) Hybrid ................................................................ ............................................................................................................................ 1.08 kg (38 oz) (2.38 lb) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems) YN-12-D WSH-M1C231-B (Specification) Non-hybrid ........................................................................................................................................... ........................................................ 148 ml (5 fl oz) Hybrid ................................................................ ........................................................................................................................................ 325 ml (11 fl oz) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fluids > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1138 Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems) YN-12-D WSH-M1C231-B (Specification) Non-hybrid ........................................................................................................................................... ........................................................ 148 ml (5 fl oz) Hybrid ................................................................ ........................................................................................................................................ 325 ml (11 fl oz) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component Bleeding Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Component Bleeding Component Bleeding Material Master Cylinder Priming WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. CAUTION: Bleeding the master cylinder on Hybrid vehicles requires a full system pressure bleed. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with clean, specified brake fluid. Never reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system or damage to the brake system components may occur. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. NOTE: When the brake master cylinder has been replaced or the system has been emptied, or partially emptied, it should be primed to prevent air from entering the system. 1. Disconnect the brake tubes from the master cylinder. 2. Install short brake tubes with the ends submerged in the brake master cylinder reservoir and fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid. 3. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal until clear fluid flows from both brake tubes, without air bubbles. 4. Remove the short brake tubes and install the brake outlet tubes. 5. Bleed each brake tube at the brake master cylinder as follows: 1. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal at least 2 times and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 2. Loosen the rearmost brake tube fitting until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the brake tube fitting. 3. Repeat this operation until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out. 4. Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary. Repeat the bleeding operation at the front brake tube. 5. Tighten the brake tube fittings to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). 6. Bleed the brake system. Brake Caliper CAUTION: Bleeding the brake caliper on Hybrid vehicles requires a full system pressure bleed. NOTE: It is not necessary to do a complete brake system bleed if only the brake caliper was disconnected or installed new. 1. Remove the bleeder screw cap and place a box end wrench on the brake caliper bleeder screw. Attach a rubber drain hose to the brake caliper bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid. 2. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal at least 2 times and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 3. Loosen the brake caliper bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the bleeder screw. ^ Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out. ^ Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary. 4. Tighten the bleeder screw and install the bleeder screw cap. ^ Tighten to 16 Nm (12 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 1143 Wheel Cylinder NOTE: It is not necessary to do a complete brake system bleed if only the wheel cylinder was disconnected or installed new. 1. Remove the bleeder screw cap and place a box end wrench on the wheel cylinder bleeder screw. Attach a rubber drain hose to the disc brake caliper bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid. 2. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal at least 2 times and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 3. Loosen the wheel cylinder bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the bleeder screw. ^ Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out. ^ Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary. 4. Tighten the bleeder screw and install the bleeder screw cap. ^ Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-inch). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 1144 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Brake System Bleeding Brake System Bleeding Special Tool(s) Material Material Manual Bleeding Method WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with clean, specified brake fluid. Never reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system. Damage to the brake system components may occur. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or replacement, air can enter the system and cause spongy brake pedal action. This requires bleeding of the hydraulic system after the repair is finished or after the new component is installed. The hydraulic system can be bled manually or with pressure bleeding equipment. 1. Clean all dirt from and remove the brake master cylinder filler cap and fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid. 2. Remove the bleeder screw cap and place a box end wrench on the RH rear bleeder screw. Attach a rubber drain hose to the RH rear bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid. 3. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal at least 3 times and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 4. Loosen the RH rear bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the RH rear bleeder screw. ^ Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out. ^ Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary. 5. Tighten the RH rear bleeder screw and install the bleeder screw cap. ^ Tighten to 16 Nm (12 lb-ft). 6. Repeat Steps 2 through 5 for the LH rear, RH front and LH front bleeder screws in this order. ^ Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary. Pressure Bleeding Method WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 1145 has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with clean, specified brake fluid. Never reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system. Damage to the brake system components may occur CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or replacement, air can enter the system and cause spongy brake pedal action. This requires bleeding of the hydraulic system after the repair is finished or after the new component is installed. The hydraulic system can be bled manually or with pressure bleeding equipment. 1. Clean all dirt from and remove the brake master cylinder filler cap and fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid. 2. NOTE: Master cylinder pressure bleeder adapter tools are available from various manufacturers of pressure bleeding equipment. Follow the instructions of the equipment manufacturer when installing the adapter. Install the bleeder adapter to the brake master cylinder reservoir and attach the bleeder tank hose to the fitting on the adapter. 3. NOTE: Bleed the longest line first. Make sure the bleeder tank contains enough clean, specified brake fluid to complete the bleeding operation. Remove the bleeder screw cap and place a box end wrench on the RH rear bleeder screw. Attach a rubber drain hose to the RH rear bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid. 4. Open the valve on the bleeder tank. 5. Loosen the RH rear bleeder screw. Leave open until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows, then tighten the RH rear bleeder screw and remove the rubber hose and install the bleeder screw cap. ^ Tighten to 16 Nm (12 lb-ft). 6. Continue bleeding the system, going in order from the LH rear bleeder screw to the RH front disc brake caliper bleeder screw ending with the LH front disc brake caliper bleeder screw. 7. Close the bleeder tank valve. Remove the tank hose from the adapter and remove the adapter from the brake fluid reservoir. Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Bleeding WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with clean, specified brake fluid. Never reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system. Damage to the brake system components may occur CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or replacement, air can enter the system and cause spongy brake pedal action. This requires bleeding of the hydraulic system after the repair is finished or after the new component is installed. The hydraulic system can be bled manually or with pressure bleeding equipment. NOTE: Bleeding the hydraulic control unit (HCU) is required only when removing or installing the HCU, master cylinder, or opening the tubes and hoses to the HCU. 1. NOTE: Carrying out the System Bleed function drives trapped air from the HCU. Subsequent bleeding removes the air from the brake hydraulic system through the bleeder screws. NOTE: Adequate battery voltage is required during the anti-lock control portion of the system bleed. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 1146 Connect the scan tool. 2. Access the SYSTEM BLEED FUNCTION and follow the directions on the scan tool. 3. Manually bleed the brake hydraulic system. 4. Repeat the procedure carrying out a total of 2 scan tool cycles and 2 manual bleed cycles. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) DEPOWERING AND REPOWERING Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Depowering Procedure WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. - Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the safety canopy and cause serious personal injury or death. - To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 3. At the smart power distribution junction box (SPDJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover and the restraints control module (RCM) fuse 32 (10A) from the SPDJB. 4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Air Bag Systems for location of the RCM and impact sensor(s). To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least 1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an accidental deployment. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Repowering Procedure 1. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON. 2. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SPDJB and install the cover. 3. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Connect the battery ground cable. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1151 4. Prove out the supplemental restraint system (SRS) as follows: Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag indicator will: fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) from the restraints control module using a scan tool. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1152 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) DEACTIVATION AND REACTIVATION Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Deactivation WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. - To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 3. At the smart power distribution junction box (SPDJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover and the RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SPDJB. 4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition OFF. 6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Air Bag Systems for location of the RCM and impact sensor(s). To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least 1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an accidental deployment. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 7. Using a 3-mm Allen wrench or a suitable tool, place it in the driver air bag module release hole on the underside of the steering wheel. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1153 8. CAUTION: During driver air bag module removal, make sure all 3 driver air bag module hooks are released from the steering wheel wire clip. Failure to do so may cause damage to the driver air bag module and or the steering wheel. NOTE: The driver air bag module is removed for clarity. Position the 3-mm Allen wrench or suitable tool against the wire clip and push inward disengaging the wire clip from the 3 driver air bag module hooks. 9. Disconnect the horn electrical connector. Then disconnect the 2 driver air bag module electrical connectors and remove the driver air bag module. 10. Open and lower the glove compartment door. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1154 11. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts. 12. CAUTION: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure. NOTE: Use care when removing the passenger air bag module from the instrument panel (I/P). The passenger air bag module can drop down during removal and the passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the I/P. Through the glove compartment opening, release the passenger air bag module deployment door clips while pushing the passenger air bag module out of the I/P. 13. Remove the passenger air bag module. 1 Disconnect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors. 2 Detach the wire harness routing clip and remove the passenger air bag module. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1155 14. From under the rear of the passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector. 15. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. 1 Separate the weatherstrip. 2 Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel. 3 Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel. 16. Disconnect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector. 17. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel. 1 Separate the weatherstrip. 2 Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel. 3 Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1156 18. Disconnect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector. 19. From under the rear of the driver seat, slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector. 20. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SPDJB. 21. Connect the battery ground cable. Reactivation 1. Remove RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SPDJB. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 3. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip. 4. Connect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1157 5. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel. 1 Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel. 2 Install the D-pillar trim panel. 3 Install the weatherstrip. 6. Connect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector. 7. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. 1 Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel. 2 Install the D-pillar trim panel. 3 Install the weatherstrip. 8. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1158 clip. 9. CAUTION: - During passenger air bag module installation, make sure the passenger air bag module wire harness routing clip is attached to the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness damage. - The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component and/or connector damage. Install the passenger air bag module. 1 Connect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors. 2 Attach the wire harness routing clip. 10. CAUTION: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure. NOTE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door clips are fully seated into the instrument panel. - Use care when installing the passenger air bag module in the instrument panel (I/P). The passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the I/P. Position the passenger air bag module and seat the passenger air bag module deployment door clips into the I/P. 11. Install the 2 passenger air bag module bolts. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 1159 12. Close the glove compartment door. 13. CAUTION: The driver air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the driver air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the driver air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the driver air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in component damage and/or connector damage. Install the driver air bag module electrical connectors fully into the driver air bag module. Then connect the horn electrical connector. 14. NOTE: - Make sure the driver air bag module wiring harness is routed down and away from the driver air bag module hooks during installation. - Audible clicks will be heard when the 3 wire clips are seated in the 3 driver air bag module hooks. Align the driver air bag module hooks to the steering wheel and, while pushing inward, seat the 3 driver air bag module hooks to the steering wheel wire clip. When the 3 driver air bag module hooks are seated in place, gently pull outward at the corners of the driver air bag module to make sure that the 3 hooks are fully seated. There should also be an even gap between the driver air bag module trim cover and the steering wheel. Check the driver air bag module and trim cover for correct movement when applying the horn. 15. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON. 16. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SPDJB and install the cover. 17. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Connect the battery ground cable. 18. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will: fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous DTCs from the restraints control module using a scan tool. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box Fuse: Locations Smart Junction Box Note: The fuse panel is located on the right-hand side of the center console, by the instrument panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuse cover. Press the tabs on the top and bottom of the fuse cover to remove. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 1165 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 1166 Fuse: Locations Battery Junction Box Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 1167 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box Fuse: Application and ID Smart Junction Box Note: The fuse panel is located on the right-hand side of the center console, by the instrument panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuse cover. Press the tabs on the top and bottom of the fuse cover to remove. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 1170 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 1171 Fuse: Application and ID Battery Junction Box Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 1172 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box Fuse Block: Locations Smart Junction Box Note: The fuse panel is located on the right-hand side of the center console, by the instrument panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuse cover. Press the tabs on the top and bottom of the fuse cover to remove. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 1177 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 1178 Fuse Block: Locations Battery Junction Box Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 1179 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuse Block: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1182 Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4 "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and relays are identified. Fuse and Relay Numbering and Naming. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Power Distribution Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1183 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information C904 Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1184 disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location Charts. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery set. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing lose clothing. Symbols Symbols (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1185 Symbols (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1186 Symbols (Part 3) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1187 Symbols (Part 4) Symbols (Part 5) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1188 Fuse Block: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1189 Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1190 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1191 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. 3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1192 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1193 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1194 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1195 Fuse Block: Connector Views C1035A C1035B Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1196 C1035C Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1197 C2280A Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1198 C2280B (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1199 C2280B (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1200 C2280C Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1201 C2280D Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1202 C2280E Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1203 C2280F Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1204 C2280G Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box Fuse Block: Application and ID Smart Junction Box Note: The fuse panel is located on the right-hand side of the center console, by the instrument panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuse cover. Press the tabs on the top and bottom of the fuse cover to remove. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 1207 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 1208 Fuse Block: Application and ID Battery Junction Box Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 1209 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box Relay Box: Locations Smart Junction Box Note: The fuse panel is located on the right-hand side of the center console, by the instrument panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuse cover. Press the tabs on the top and bottom of the fuse cover to remove. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 1214 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 1215 Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 1216 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box (BJB) C1035A C1035B Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1219 C1035C Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1220 Relay Box: Diagrams Smart Junction Box (SJB) C2280A Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1221 C2280B (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1222 C2280B (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1223 C2280C Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1224 C2280D Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1225 C2280E Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1226 C2280F Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 1227 C2280G Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box Relay Box: Application and ID Smart Junction Box Note: The fuse panel is located on the right-hand side of the center console, by the instrument panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuse cover. Press the tabs on the top and bottom of the fuse cover to remove. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 1230 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 1231 Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Fuses and Circuit Breakers > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 1232 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Indicator and Message Center Messages The TPMS indicator and vehicle message center (if equipped) sometimes displays faults that cannot be resolved by the customer. Treat these messages as TPMS faults that must be serviced. Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Indicator Illuminates Continuously NOTE: If the spare tire is in use, the damaged road tire must be repaired and installed on the vehicle to restore complete TPMS functionality before carrying out any diagnosis. NOTE: For vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures (such as E-Series and certain F-Series), the tire pressure sensors must be trained following a tire rotation. Failure to train the sensors will result in a false low tire pressure event, which will cause the TPMS indicator to illuminate. 1. The TPMS indicator remains on continuously for the following condition: ^ Low Tire Pressure - The TPMS indicator is illuminated solid and the message center displays LOW TIRE PRESSURE (if equipped). This is displayed when any of the tire pressures are low. When this condition exists, the tire pressure must be adjusted to the recommended cold pressure as indicated on the vehicle certification label. 2. NOTE: The TPMS sensors do not transmit when the vehicle is stationary. If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, it will be necessary to wake up the sensors so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information to the SJB. If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, carry out the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation procedure. Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Indicator Flashes The TPMS indicator flashes for 70 seconds, then remains ON solid when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, for the following conditions: 1. Tire Pressure Sensor Fault - If equipped, the message center will display TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR FAULT when a tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning. GO to Symptom Chart. See: Wheels and Tires/Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures 2. No communication with the SJB (TPMS is integral to the SJB) - The TPMS indicator is illuminated when the instrument cluster has not received any signals from the SJB for more than 5 seconds. If equipped, the message center displays TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT. GO to Symptom Chart. See: Wheels and Tires/Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures 3. Tire Pressure Monitor Fault - If equipped, the message center will display TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT when the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning or communication with the instrument cluster has been lost. GO to Symptom Chart. See: Wheels and Tires/Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Message Center Configuration Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Service and Repair Message Center Configuration MESSAGE CENTER CONFIGURATION Oil Life Reset NOTE: The oil life calculation is set at a maximum of approximately 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 180 days. - The XXX's in the steps below represent a numeric value and will display the correct number in percent. For example; OIL LIFE = XXX% may display OIL LIFE = 45%. 1. Press and release the SETUP button until the message center displays OIL LIFE = XXX% HOLD RESET = NEW. 2. Press and hold the RESET button for 2 seconds and release to reset the oil life to 100%. 3. The message center displays OIL LIFE SET TO 100%. Oil Life Start Value NOTE: The oil life start value is used to reset the oil life value back to the maximum of approximately 12,000 km (7,500 miles) if the value was previously changed or to lower the value by 10% increments down to 10%. 1. Press and release the SETUP button until the message center displays OIL LIFE = XXX% HOLD RESET = NEW. 2. Press and hold the RESET button for 2 seconds and release to adjust new oil life %. 3. NOTE: Once the percent has been lowered to 10%, the next button press starts the sequence over again beginning at 100%. Press and release the RESET button to lower the start value percent until the message center displays the newly desired percent. 4. Press and release the SETUP button to return to the setup menu. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) Check Engine, Service Engine Soon, Or ISO Standard Engine Symbol The MIL notifies the driver that the powertrain control module (PCM) has detected an on board diagnostic (OBD) emission-related component or system concern. When this occurs, an OBD diagnostic trouble code (DTC) sets. - The MIL is located in the instrument cluster and is labeled CHECK ENGINE, SERVICE ENGINE SOON or the international standards organization (ISO) standard engine symbol. - The MIL is illuminated during the instrument cluster prove out for approximately 4 seconds. - The MIL remains illuminated after instrument cluster prove out if: an emission-related concern and DTC exists. - the PCM does not send a control message to the instrument cluster (applications with the MIL controlled through the communication link). - the PCM is operating in the hardware limited operation strategy (HLOS). - The MIL remains off during the instrument cluster prove out if an indicator or instrument cluster concern is present. - To turn off the MIL after a repair, a reset command from the scan tool must be sent, or 3 consecutive drive cycles must be completed without a concern. - For all MIL concerns, go to Symptom Charts. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures - If the MIL flashes at a steady rate, a severe misfire condition may exist. - If the MIL flashes erratically, the PCM can reset while cranking if the battery voltage is low. - The MIL flashes after a period of time with the key in the RUN position (engine not running) if DTC P1000 is set. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Service Reminder Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Service and Repair Oil Life An oil change is required whenever indicated by the message center. USE ONLY RECOMMENDED ENGINE OILS. To reset the oil monitoring system to 100% after each oil change ( approximately 7,500 miles ( 12,000 km ) or 12 months ) perform the following: 1. Press and release the SETUP control to display "OIL LIFE = XXX% HOLD RESET = NEW". 2. Press and hold the RESET control for 2 seconds and release. Oil life is set to 100% and "OIL LIFE SET TO 100%" is displayed. 3. While "OIL LIFE SET TO 100%" is displayed, if a lower oil life is start value is desired , press and release the RESET control to reduce the start value. Each press of the RESET control reduces the value by 10 percent. Note: Oil life start value of 100% equals 7,500 miles ( 12,000 km ) or 12 months. For example, setting oil life start value to 60% sets the oil life start value to 4,500 miles ( 7,200 km ) and 108 days. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Description and Operation Vehicle Lifting: Description and Operation JACKING AND LIFTING WARNING: - When jacking or lifting the vehicle, block all wheels remaining on the ground. Set the parking brake if the rear wheels will remain on the ground. These actions help prevent unintended vehicle movement. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Never get underneath a vehicle that is supported only by a jack. The jack could unintentionally lower. Always support vehicle with floor stands. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Only raise the vehicle when positioned on a hard, level surface. Attempting to raise the vehicle on an uneven or soft surface may result in vehicle slipping or falling from the jack or jackstand. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. - Vehicle may have multiple drive wheels. Do not use engine to power the driveline unless all drive wheels are elevated off the ground. Drive wheels in contact with ground could cause unexpected vehicle movement. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. CAUTION: - The jack provided with the vehicle is intended to be used in an emergency for changing a deflated tire. To avoid damage to the vehicle, never use the jack to hoist the vehicle for any other purpose. - Under no circumstances should the vehicle ever be lifted by the front or rear control arms, halfshafts or front wheel constant velocity (CV) joints. Severe damage to the vehicle could result. - To prevent possible damage to the underbody, do not drive the vehicle onto the drive-on lift without first checking for possible interference. - Damage to the suspension, exhaust or steering linkage components may occur if care is not exercised when positioning the hoist adapters prior to lifting the vehicle. Front and Rear - Jacking and Lifting Points Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training Special Tool(s) NOTE: If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, the sensors will go into a "sleep mode" to conserve battery power. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information to the smart junction box (SJB). For additional information, refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation. NOTE: The tire pressure sensor training procedure must be done on a single vehicle, in an area without radio frequency noise and at least 1 m (3 ft) away from other vehicles equipped with tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS). Radio frequency noise is generated by electrical motors and appliance operation, cellular telephones, remote transmitters, power inverters and portable entertainment equipment. NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the activation tool, attempt to activate the same sensor with the activation tool. If the sensor still does not respond, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least 1/4 of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. NOTE: The SJB has a 2-minute time limit between sensor responses. If the SJB does not recognize any 1 of the 4 tire pressure sensors during this time limit, the horn will sound twice and the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE NOT TRAINED REPEAT and the entire procedure must be repeated. NOTE: For vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures (such as the E-Series and certain F-Series), the tire pressure sensors must be trained following a tire rotation. Failure to train the sensors will cause the TPMS indicator to illuminate. For vehicles with the same tire pressure for front and rear tires, tire rotation will not affect the system. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then press and release the brake pedal. 2. Cycle the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN position. 3. Press and release the brake pedal. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 5. Turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN position. ^ The horn will sound once and the TPMS indicator will flash if the training mode has been entered successfully. If equipped, the message center will display TRAIN LF TIRE. 6. NOTE: It may take up to 6 seconds to activate a tire pressure sensor. During this time, the activation tool must remain in place 180 degrees from the valve stem. Place the activation tool on the LF tire sidewall opposite (180 degrees) from the valve stem. Press and release the test button on the special tool. The horn will sound briefly to indicate that the tire pressure sensor has been recognized by the SJB. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page 1256 7. Within 2 minutes of the horn sounding, place the activation tool on the RF tire sidewall opposite (180 degrees) from the valve stem and press and release the test button to train the RF tire pressure sensor. 8. NOTE: Do not wait more than 2 minutes between training each sensor or the SJB will time out and the entire procedure must be repeated. Repeat Step 7 for the RR and LR tires. The procedure is completed after the last tire has been trained. When the training procedure is complete, the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE TRAINING COMPLETE. For vehicles not equipped with a message center, successful completion of the training procedure will be verified by turning the ignition switch to the OFF position without the horn sounding. If the horn sounds twice when the switch is turned to the OFF position, the training procedure was not successful. 9. Using the scan tool, locate the updated TPMS sensor IDs trained to the SJB and document them on the applicable warranty claim. 10. NOTE: This step is required to clear DTC C2780, cause the SJB to exit the manufacturing mode and to make sure there are no other concerns with a newly programmed SJB. If the sensors are being trained due to the installation of a new SJB, clear any DTCs and perform the SJB on-demand self test. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page 1257 Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation Special Tool(s) NOTE: The tire pressure sensors will go into a 14 sleep mode" after 30 minutes of inactivity to conserve battery power. The sensors do not transmit information while in sleep mode, it will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Position the tire pressure monitor activation tool against the LF tire sidewall 180 degrees from the tire valve stem. 3. NOTE: The activation tool will provide feedback in the form of a flashing green light and a beep sound for each successful response from a tire pressure sensor. Press the test button on the activation tool to activate the sensor, activate the sensor at least 2 times. 4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the remaining tires. 5. If the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) indicator remains illuminated after adjusting and activating each sensor, refer to the Symptom Chart in Diagnosis and Testing. See: Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Disassembly WARNING: The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) sensor battery may release hazardous chemicals if exposed to extreme mechanical damage. If these chemicals contact the skin or eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention. If any part of the battery is swallowed, contact a physician immediately. When disposing of TPMS sensors, follow the correct procedures for hazardous material disposal. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTE: Tire pressure sensors are equipped with Lithium-ion batteries and must be disposed of accordingly. NOTE: Tire pressure sensors are manufactured in multiple colors based on their application. When installing a new sensor, make sure the color of the sensor being installed matches the color of the sensor that was removed. The different colored sensors are not interchangeable. NOTE: The sensor can be removed and installed without removing the strap or the cradle. 1. CAUTION: The sensor, cradle and strap may be damaged by incorrect tire mounting or dismounting. Dismount the tire only as instructed. Remove the tire from the wheel. 2. CAUTION: Do not use a large screwdriver. Apply minimum force during removal or damage to the sensor locking clip may occur. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 1260 Using a pocket screwdriver or similar tool, remove the sensor locking clip. 3. CAUTION: Do not use a large screwdriver. Apply minimum force during removal or damage to the sensor may occur. Using a pocket screwdriver or similar tool, detach the sensor from the cradle. Assembly 1. CAUTION: Damage to the sensor may occur if excessive force is applied during sensor installation. NOTE: Make sure the sensor is fully seated into the cradle. The sensor will make a "click" noise when correctly seated. Position the sensor into the cradle by inserting the fringe end of the sensor into the hook end of the cradle and pushing the opposite end of the sensor down onto the cradle. 2. NOTE: The locking clip can only be fully seated when installed in the correct orientation. If the sensor locking clip cannot be fully inserted, then the sensor may not be fully seated on the cradle or the locking clip may be inserted backward. Insert a new locking clip into the sensor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 1261 3. CAUTION: The sensor, cradle and strap may be damaged by incorrect tire mounting or dismounting. Mount the tire only as instructed. Install the tire onto the wheel. 4. NOTE: A new tire pressure sensor is shipped in an off mode (or battery saver mode) and must be turned on before it can be trained. To turn the sensor on, install it on a wheel, mount the tire and inflate the tire to the recommended inflation pressure. Wait at least 2 minutes, then continue with the sensor training procedure. Train the tire pressure sensor(s). For additional information, refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 1262 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Strap and Cradle Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Strap and Cradle Material Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 1263 Disassembly WARNING: The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) sensor battery may release hazardous chemicals if exposed to extreme mechanical damage. If these chemicals contact the skin or eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention. If any part of the battery is swallowed, contact a physician immediately. When disposing of TPMS sensors, follow the correct procedures for hazardous material disposal. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTE: Tire pressure sensors are equipped with Lithium-ion batteries and must be disposed of accordingly. NOTE: Tire pressure sensors are manufactured in multiple colors based on their application. When installing a new sensor, make sure the color of the sensor being installed matches the color of the sensor that was removed. The different colored sensors are not interchangeable. NOTE: The sensor is available separately, the cradle and strap are available as a strap kit. There are several different strap kits available based on wheel diameter but all strap kits share the same base part number. 1. Remove the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) sensor. For additional information, refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor. 2. WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Wear protective gloves when handling components or parts that have pointed or sharp edges. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. Remove a factory installed strap in the following sequence: 1 Locate the strap buckle and secure the strap to the wheel using duct tape or a similar item, on both sides of the buckle approximately 25 mm (0.98 in) from the buckle. 2 Using a large screwdriver and a twisting motion, unbuckle the strap. 3 Discard the strap. 3. To remove a dealer installed strap, turn the worm gear screw until the strap is fully released from the worm gear. ^ Discard the strap. 4. NOTE: To aid assembly, mark the location of the cradle prior to disassembly. Using a screwdriver, or similar tool, remove the cradle by inserting the screwdriver under the cradle and prying up. Assembly 1. NOTE: Make sure the sensor is fully seated into the new cradle. The sensor will make a "click" noise when fully seated. Position the sensor into the new cradle by inserting the fringe end of the sensor into the hook end of the cradle and pushing the opposite end of the sensor down onto the cradle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 1264 2. CAUTION: Metal scrapers may damage the wheel. Use only plastic or non-metallic scrapers to remove the cradle adhesive strip residue. NOTE: The sensor and cradle must be installed in the drop well of the wheel, 180 degrees from the valve stem. Clean the area where the sensor and cradle are to be installed. 3. NOTE: The sensor and cradle must be positioned with the hinge side of the sensor on the RH side when viewed from the curb side (beauty side) of the wheel. NOTE: The sensor has raised markings indicating how to position the sensor. Remove the adhesive tape liner from the cradle and position the sensor and cradle into the wheel drop well 180 degrees from the valve stem. 4. Install the tapered end of the strap through the opening of the cradle on the hinge side of the sensor. This will position the worm gear on the locking clip side of the sensor. 5. CAUTION: Steel wheels have a "high spot" along their circumference. Make sure the strap and sensor are mounted at the lowest spot possible to avoid damaging the sensor during wheel and tire disassembly and assembly. NOTE: Keep the strap parallel with the wheel flange while tightening the worm gear. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 1265 Position the worm gear 13-26 mm (0.5-1.0 in) away from the sensor and tighten the worm gear. ^ Tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 6. CAUTION: The sensor, cradle and strap may be damaged by incorrect tire mounting or dismounting. Mount the tire only as instructed. Install the tire onto the wheel. 7. NOTE: A new tire pressure sensor is shipped in an off mode (or battery saver mode) and must be turned on before it can be trained. To turn the sensor on, install it on a wheel, mount the tire and inflate the tire to the recommended inflation pressure. Wait at least 2 minutes, then continue with the sensor training procedure. Train the tire pressure sensor(s). For additional information, refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Indicator and Message Center Messages The TPMS indicator and vehicle message center (if equipped) sometimes displays faults that cannot be resolved by the customer. Treat these messages as TPMS faults that must be serviced. Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Indicator Illuminates Continuously NOTE: If the spare tire is in use, the damaged road tire must be repaired and installed on the vehicle to restore complete TPMS functionality before carrying out any diagnosis. NOTE: For vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures (such as E-Series and certain F-Series), the tire pressure sensors must be trained following a tire rotation. Failure to train the sensors will result in a false low tire pressure event, which will cause the TPMS indicator to illuminate. 1. The TPMS indicator remains on continuously for the following condition: ^ Low Tire Pressure - The TPMS indicator is illuminated solid and the message center displays LOW TIRE PRESSURE (if equipped). This is displayed when any of the tire pressures are low. When this condition exists, the tire pressure must be adjusted to the recommended cold pressure as indicated on the vehicle certification label. 2. NOTE: The TPMS sensors do not transmit when the vehicle is stationary. If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, it will be necessary to wake up the sensors so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information to the SJB. If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, carry out the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation procedure. Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Indicator Flashes The TPMS indicator flashes for 70 seconds, then remains ON solid when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, for the following conditions: 1. Tire Pressure Sensor Fault - If equipped, the message center will display TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR FAULT when a tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning. GO to Symptom Chart. See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures 2. No communication with the SJB (TPMS is integral to the SJB) - The TPMS indicator is illuminated when the instrument cluster has not received any signals from the SJB for more than 5 seconds. If equipped, the message center displays TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT. GO to Symptom Chart. See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures 3. Tire Pressure Monitor Fault - If equipped, the message center will display TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT when the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning or communication with the instrument cluster has been lost. GO to Symptom Chart. See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training Special Tool(s) NOTE: If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, the sensors will go into a "sleep mode" to conserve battery power. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information to the smart junction box (SJB). For additional information, refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation. NOTE: The tire pressure sensor training procedure must be done on a single vehicle, in an area without radio frequency noise and at least 1 m (3 ft) away from other vehicles equipped with tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS). Radio frequency noise is generated by electrical motors and appliance operation, cellular telephones, remote transmitters, power inverters and portable entertainment equipment. NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the activation tool, attempt to activate the same sensor with the activation tool. If the sensor still does not respond, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least 1/4 of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. NOTE: The SJB has a 2-minute time limit between sensor responses. If the SJB does not recognize any 1 of the 4 tire pressure sensors during this time limit, the horn will sound twice and the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE NOT TRAINED REPEAT and the entire procedure must be repeated. NOTE: For vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures (such as the E-Series and certain F-Series), the tire pressure sensors must be trained following a tire rotation. Failure to train the sensors will cause the TPMS indicator to illuminate. For vehicles with the same tire pressure for front and rear tires, tire rotation will not affect the system. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then press and release the brake pedal. 2. Cycle the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN position. 3. Press and release the brake pedal. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 5. Turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN position. ^ The horn will sound once and the TPMS indicator will flash if the training mode has been entered successfully. If equipped, the message center will display TRAIN LF TIRE. 6. NOTE: It may take up to 6 seconds to activate a tire pressure sensor. During this time, the activation tool must remain in place 180 degrees from the valve stem. Place the activation tool on the LF tire sidewall opposite (180 degrees) from the valve stem. Press and release the test button on the special tool. The horn will sound briefly to indicate that the tire pressure sensor has been recognized by the SJB. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page 1274 7. Within 2 minutes of the horn sounding, place the activation tool on the RF tire sidewall opposite (180 degrees) from the valve stem and press and release the test button to train the RF tire pressure sensor. 8. NOTE: Do not wait more than 2 minutes between training each sensor or the SJB will time out and the entire procedure must be repeated. Repeat Step 7 for the RR and LR tires. The procedure is completed after the last tire has been trained. When the training procedure is complete, the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE TRAINING COMPLETE. For vehicles not equipped with a message center, successful completion of the training procedure will be verified by turning the ignition switch to the OFF position without the horn sounding. If the horn sounds twice when the switch is turned to the OFF position, the training procedure was not successful. 9. Using the scan tool, locate the updated TPMS sensor IDs trained to the SJB and document them on the applicable warranty claim. 10. NOTE: This step is required to clear DTC C2780, cause the SJB to exit the manufacturing mode and to make sure there are no other concerns with a newly programmed SJB. If the sensors are being trained due to the installation of a new SJB, clear any DTCs and perform the SJB on-demand self test. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page 1275 Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation Special Tool(s) NOTE: The tire pressure sensors will go into a 14 sleep mode" after 30 minutes of inactivity to conserve battery power. The sensors do not transmit information while in sleep mode, it will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Position the tire pressure monitor activation tool against the LF tire sidewall 180 degrees from the tire valve stem. 3. NOTE: The activation tool will provide feedback in the form of a flashing green light and a beep sound for each successful response from a tire pressure sensor. Press the test button on the activation tool to activate the sensor, activate the sensor at least 2 times. 4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the remaining tires. 5. If the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) indicator remains illuminated after adjusting and activating each sensor, refer to the Symptom Chart in Diagnosis and Testing. See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Disassembly WARNING: The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) sensor battery may release hazardous chemicals if exposed to extreme mechanical damage. If these chemicals contact the skin or eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention. If any part of the battery is swallowed, contact a physician immediately. When disposing of TPMS sensors, follow the correct procedures for hazardous material disposal. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTE: Tire pressure sensors are equipped with Lithium-ion batteries and must be disposed of accordingly. NOTE: Tire pressure sensors are manufactured in multiple colors based on their application. When installing a new sensor, make sure the color of the sensor being installed matches the color of the sensor that was removed. The different colored sensors are not interchangeable. NOTE: The sensor can be removed and installed without removing the strap or the cradle. 1. CAUTION: The sensor, cradle and strap may be damaged by incorrect tire mounting or dismounting. Dismount the tire only as instructed. Remove the tire from the wheel. 2. CAUTION: Do not use a large screwdriver. Apply minimum force during removal or damage to the sensor locking clip may occur. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 1278 Using a pocket screwdriver or similar tool, remove the sensor locking clip. 3. CAUTION: Do not use a large screwdriver. Apply minimum force during removal or damage to the sensor may occur. Using a pocket screwdriver or similar tool, detach the sensor from the cradle. Assembly 1. CAUTION: Damage to the sensor may occur if excessive force is applied during sensor installation. NOTE: Make sure the sensor is fully seated into the cradle. The sensor will make a "click" noise when correctly seated. Position the sensor into the cradle by inserting the fringe end of the sensor into the hook end of the cradle and pushing the opposite end of the sensor down onto the cradle. 2. NOTE: The locking clip can only be fully seated when installed in the correct orientation. If the sensor locking clip cannot be fully inserted, then the sensor may not be fully seated on the cradle or the locking clip may be inserted backward. Insert a new locking clip into the sensor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 1279 3. CAUTION: The sensor, cradle and strap may be damaged by incorrect tire mounting or dismounting. Mount the tire only as instructed. Install the tire onto the wheel. 4. NOTE: A new tire pressure sensor is shipped in an off mode (or battery saver mode) and must be turned on before it can be trained. To turn the sensor on, install it on a wheel, mount the tire and inflate the tire to the recommended inflation pressure. Wait at least 2 minutes, then continue with the sensor training procedure. Train the tire pressure sensor(s). For additional information, refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 1280 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Strap and Cradle Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Strap and Cradle Material Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 1281 Disassembly WARNING: The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) sensor battery may release hazardous chemicals if exposed to extreme mechanical damage. If these chemicals contact the skin or eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention. If any part of the battery is swallowed, contact a physician immediately. When disposing of TPMS sensors, follow the correct procedures for hazardous material disposal. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTE: Tire pressure sensors are equipped with Lithium-ion batteries and must be disposed of accordingly. NOTE: Tire pressure sensors are manufactured in multiple colors based on their application. When installing a new sensor, make sure the color of the sensor being installed matches the color of the sensor that was removed. The different colored sensors are not interchangeable. NOTE: The sensor is available separately, the cradle and strap are available as a strap kit. There are several different strap kits available based on wheel diameter but all strap kits share the same base part number. 1. Remove the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) sensor. For additional information, refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor. 2. WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Wear protective gloves when handling components or parts that have pointed or sharp edges. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. Remove a factory installed strap in the following sequence: 1 Locate the strap buckle and secure the strap to the wheel using duct tape or a similar item, on both sides of the buckle approximately 25 mm (0.98 in) from the buckle. 2 Using a large screwdriver and a twisting motion, unbuckle the strap. 3 Discard the strap. 3. To remove a dealer installed strap, turn the worm gear screw until the strap is fully released from the worm gear. ^ Discard the strap. 4. NOTE: To aid assembly, mark the location of the cradle prior to disassembly. Using a screwdriver, or similar tool, remove the cradle by inserting the screwdriver under the cradle and prying up. Assembly 1. NOTE: Make sure the sensor is fully seated into the new cradle. The sensor will make a "click" noise when fully seated. Position the sensor into the new cradle by inserting the fringe end of the sensor into the hook end of the cradle and pushing the opposite end of the sensor down onto the cradle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 1282 2. CAUTION: Metal scrapers may damage the wheel. Use only plastic or non-metallic scrapers to remove the cradle adhesive strip residue. NOTE: The sensor and cradle must be installed in the drop well of the wheel, 180 degrees from the valve stem. Clean the area where the sensor and cradle are to be installed. 3. NOTE: The sensor and cradle must be positioned with the hinge side of the sensor on the RH side when viewed from the curb side (beauty side) of the wheel. NOTE: The sensor has raised markings indicating how to position the sensor. Remove the adhesive tape liner from the cradle and position the sensor and cradle into the wheel drop well 180 degrees from the valve stem. 4. Install the tapered end of the strap through the opening of the cradle on the hinge side of the sensor. This will position the worm gear on the locking clip side of the sensor. 5. CAUTION: Steel wheels have a "high spot" along their circumference. Make sure the strap and sensor are mounted at the lowest spot possible to avoid damaging the sensor during wheel and tire disassembly and assembly. NOTE: Keep the strap parallel with the wheel flange while tightening the worm gear. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 1283 Position the worm gear 13-26 mm (0.5-1.0 in) away from the sensor and tighten the worm gear. ^ Tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 6. CAUTION: The sensor, cradle and strap may be damaged by incorrect tire mounting or dismounting. Mount the tire only as instructed. Install the tire onto the wheel. 7. NOTE: A new tire pressure sensor is shipped in an off mode (or battery saver mode) and must be turned on before it can be trained. To turn the sensor on, install it on a wheel, mount the tire and inflate the tire to the recommended inflation pressure. Wait at least 2 minutes, then continue with the sensor training procedure. Train the tire pressure sensor(s). For additional information, refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheels: > 09-5-8 > Mar > 09 > Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises Wheels: Customer Interest Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises TSB 09-5-8 03/23/09 ROTATIONAL CLICKING NOISE FROM 17 INCH CHROME WHEEL CLADDING - BUILT BEFORE 211/2009 - EXCLUDES HYBRID FORD: 2008-2009 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles (excludes Hybrid), built before 2/01/2009 and equipped with 17 inch chrome clad wheels, may exhibit rotational clicking noise from the chrome cladding (attached to rim) during slow speed parking lot type maneuvers. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE FRONT WHEELS MAY EXHIBIT NOISE MORE THAN REAR WHEELS DUE TO WEIGHT OF THE POWERTRAIN. 1. Verify noise is coming from the chrome cladding on wheel(s) by driving slow parking lot type maneuvers at speeds less than 10 MPH (16 km/h). 2. Mark wheel(s) exhibiting noise, rotate rear wheels to the front, evaluate unmarked wheels for noise, and mark any additional wheel(s) exhibiting noise. 3. Replace marked wheel(s) exhibiting noise with updated service parts per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-04. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 090508A 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.0 Hr. 4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace One (1) Wheel. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer Tire Pressure Monitor Sensor (TPMS) And Balance Assembly (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D) 090508B 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.4 Hrs. 4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Two (2) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheels: > 09-5-8 > Mar > 09 > Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises > Page 1292 Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D) 090508C 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.8 Hrs. 4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Three (3) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D) 090508D 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 2.1 Hrs. 4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Four (4) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 1007 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-5-8 > Mar > 09 > Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises TSB 09-5-8 03/23/09 ROTATIONAL CLICKING NOISE FROM 17 INCH CHROME WHEEL CLADDING - BUILT BEFORE 211/2009 - EXCLUDES HYBRID FORD: 2008-2009 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles (excludes Hybrid), built before 2/01/2009 and equipped with 17 inch chrome clad wheels, may exhibit rotational clicking noise from the chrome cladding (attached to rim) during slow speed parking lot type maneuvers. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE FRONT WHEELS MAY EXHIBIT NOISE MORE THAN REAR WHEELS DUE TO WEIGHT OF THE POWERTRAIN. 1. Verify noise is coming from the chrome cladding on wheel(s) by driving slow parking lot type maneuvers at speeds less than 10 MPH (16 km/h). 2. Mark wheel(s) exhibiting noise, rotate rear wheels to the front, evaluate unmarked wheels for noise, and mark any additional wheel(s) exhibiting noise. 3. Replace marked wheel(s) exhibiting noise with updated service parts per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-04. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 090508A 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.0 Hr. 4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace One (1) Wheel. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer Tire Pressure Monitor Sensor (TPMS) And Balance Assembly (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D) 090508B 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.4 Hrs. 4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Two (2) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-5-8 > Mar > 09 > Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises > Page 1298 Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D) 090508C 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.8 Hrs. 4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Three (3) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D) 090508D 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 2.1 Hrs. 4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Four (4) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 1007 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Diagrams Wheel Bearing: Diagrams Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub - Exploded View Wheel Bearing And Wheel Hub - Exploded View Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub Special Tool(s) (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 1304 Special Tool(s) (Part 2) Removal NOTE: If removing the wheel hub, a new wheel bearing must be installed. 1. Remove the wheel knuckle. 2. Using the special tool, press the wheel hub from the wheel bearing. 3. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel knuckle after removing the wheel hub. Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub. 4. Remove the snap ring. 5. Using the special tools, press the outer wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle. Installation 1. Position the wheel knuckle in a vise. 2. NOTE: Special tool 205-278 is not seen in place. It is located behind the wheel knuckle. Using the special tools, install the wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 1305 3. Install the snap ring. 4. Using the special tool, press the wheel hub into the wheel bearing. 5. Install the wheel knuckle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 1306 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Wheel Bearing Special Tool(s) (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 1307 Special Tool(s) (Part 1) Removal NOTE: LH shown, RH similar. All wheel drive (AWD) vehicles 1. Remove the wheel knuckle. Front wheel drive (FWD) vehicles 2. Remove and discard the wheel hub nut. 3. Remove the ABS wheel speed sensor ring. All vehicles 4. Using the special tools, remove the wheel hub. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 1308 5. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel knuckle after removing the wheel hub. Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub. 6. Remove the wheel bearing snap ring from the wheel knuckle. FWD vehicles 7. Using the special tools, remove the wheel bearing from the wheel knuckle. AWD vehicles 8. Using the special tools, press the wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 1309 Installation All vehicles 1. Using the special tools, install a new wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle. 2. Install the wheel bearing snap ring. 3. Using the special tools, install the wheel hub into the wheel bearing. FWD vehicles 4. Install the ABS wheel speed sensor ring. 5. Install the wheel hub nut. ^ Tighten to 290 Nm (214 lb-ft). AWD vehicles 6. Install the wheel knuckle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications > Front Axle Nut: Specifications Front Front wheel hub nut ............................................................................................................................. .................................................... 300 Nm (222 lb-ft) Install a new front wheel hub nut. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications > Front > Page 1315 Axle Nut: Specifications Rear Rear wheel hub nut ............................................................................................................................. ..................................................... 290 Nm (214 lb-ft) Install a new rear wheel hub nut. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Specifications Wheel Fastener: Specifications Wheel lug nuts ..................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... 133 Nm (98 lb-ft) Tighten the wheel nuts in a star pattern Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Front Wheel Studs Removal and Installation 1. Remove the wheel bearing and hub. 2. Using a suitable press, remove the wheel stud from the wheel hub. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 1321 Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Rear Wheel Studs Removal and Installation 1. Remove the wheel bearing and hub. 2. Using a suitable press, remove the wheel studs from the wheel hub. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Maintenance > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Description and Operation Vehicle Lifting: Description and Operation JACKING AND LIFTING WARNING: - When jacking or lifting the vehicle, block all wheels remaining on the ground. Set the parking brake if the rear wheels will remain on the ground. These actions help prevent unintended vehicle movement. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Never get underneath a vehicle that is supported only by a jack. The jack could unintentionally lower. Always support vehicle with floor stands. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Only raise the vehicle when positioned on a hard, level surface. Attempting to raise the vehicle on an uneven or soft surface may result in vehicle slipping or falling from the jack or jackstand. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. - Vehicle may have multiple drive wheels. Do not use engine to power the driveline unless all drive wheels are elevated off the ground. Drive wheels in contact with ground could cause unexpected vehicle movement. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. CAUTION: - The jack provided with the vehicle is intended to be used in an emergency for changing a deflated tire. To avoid damage to the vehicle, never use the jack to hoist the vehicle for any other purpose. - Under no circumstances should the vehicle ever be lifted by the front or rear control arms, halfshafts or front wheel constant velocity (CV) joints. Severe damage to the vehicle could result. - To prevent possible damage to the underbody, do not drive the vehicle onto the drive-on lift without first checking for possible interference. - Damage to the suspension, exhaust or steering linkage components may occur if care is not exercised when positioning the hoist adapters prior to lifting the vehicle. Front and Rear - Jacking and Lifting Points Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation VARIABLE CAMSHAFT TIMING (VCT) SYSTEM Overview The VCT enables rotation of the camshaft(s) relative to the crankshaft rotation as a function of engine operating conditions. There are 4 types of VCT systems. - Exhaust phase shifting (EPS) system - the exhaust cam is the active cam being retarded. - Intake phase shifting (IPS) system - the intake cam is the active cam being advanced. - Dual equal phase shifting (DEPS) system - both intake and exhaust cams are phase shifted and equally advanced or retarded. - Dual independent phase shifting (DIPS) system - where both the intake and exhaust cams are shifted independently. All systems have 4 operational modes: idle, part throttle, wide open throttle (WOT), and default mode. At idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the powertrain control module (PCM) determines the phase angle based on air flow, engine oil temperature and engine coolant temperature. At part and wide open throttle the PCM determines the phase angle based on engine RPM, load, and throttle position. VCT systems provide reduced emissions and enhanced engine power, fuel economy and idle quality. IPS systems also have the added benefit of improved torque. In addition, some VCT system applications can eliminate the need for an external exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system. The elimination of the EGR system is accomplished by controlling the overlap time between the intake valve opening and exhaust valve closing. Currently, both the IPS and DEPS systems are used. Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) System VCT System The VCT system consists of an electric hydraulic positioning control solenoid, a camshaft position (CMP) sensor, and a trigger wheel. The CMP trigger wheel has a number of equally spaced teeth equal to the number (n) of cylinders on a bank plus one extra tooth (n+1). Four cylinder and V8 engines use a CMP 4+1 tooth trigger wheel. V6 engines use a CMP 3+1 tooth trigger wheel. The extra tooth placed between the equally spaced teeth represents the CMP signal for that bank. A crankshaft position (CKP) sensor provides the PCM with crankshaft positioning information in 10 degree increments. 1. The PCM receives input signals from the intake air temperature (IAT) sensor, engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor, engine oil temperature (EOT) sensor, CMP, throttle position (TP) sensor, mass air flow (MAF) sensor, and CKP to determine the operating conditions of the engine. At idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the PCM controls the camshaft position based on ECT, EOT, IAT, and MAF. During part and wide open throttle, the camshaft position is determined by engine RPM, load and throttle position. The VCT system does not operate until the engine is at normal operating temperature. 2. The VCT system is enabled by the PCM when the correct conditions are met. 3. The CKP signal is used as a reference for CMP positioning. 4. The VCT solenoid valve is an integral part of the VCT system. The solenoid valve controls the flow of engine oil in the VCT actuator assembly. As the PCM controls the duty cycle of the solenoid valve, oil pressure/flow advances or retards the cam timing. Duty cycles near 0% or 100% represent rapid movement of the camshaft. Retaining a fixed camshaft position is accomplished by dithering (oscillating) the solenoid valve duty cycle. The PCM calculates and determines the desired camshaft position. It continually updates the VCT solenoid duty cycle until the desired position is achieved. A difference between the desired and actual camshaft position represents a position error in the PCM VCT control loop. The PCM Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Actuators and Solenoids - Engine > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1331 disables the VCT and places the camshaft in a default position if a concern is detected. A related DTC is also set when the concern is detected. 5. When the VCT solenoid is energized, engine oil is allowed to flow to the VCT actuator assembly which advances or retards the camshaft timing. One half of the VCT actuator is coupled to the camshaft and the other half is connected to the timing chain. Oil chambers between the 2 halves couple the camshaft to the timing chain. When the flow of oil is shifted from one side of the chamber to the other, the differential change in oil pressure forces the camshaft to rotate in either an advance or retard position depending on the oil flow. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Compression Check: Specifications Compression Test - Test Results The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading cylinder is at least 75% of the highest reading. Refer to the Compression Pressure Limit Chart. Compression Pressure Limit Chart Compression Pressure Limit Chart (Part 1) Compression Pressure Limit Chart (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Compression Check > System Information > System Diagnosis > Compression Test Compression Check: Testing and Inspection Compression Test Compression Test - All Vehicles Except Hybrid 1. Make sure the oil in the crankcase is of the correct viscosity and at the correct level and that the battery is correctly charged. Operate the vehicle until the engine is at normal operating temperature. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then remove all the spark plugs. 2. Set the throttle plates in the wide-open position. 3. Install a compression gauge such as the Compression Tester in the No. 1 cylinder. 4. Install an auxiliary starter switch in the starting circuit. With the ignition switch in the OFF position, and using the auxiliary starter switch, crank the engine a minimum of 5 compression strokes and record the highest reading. Note the approximate number of compression strokes necessary to obtain the highest reading. 5. Repeat the test on each cylinder, cranking the engine approximately the same number of compression strokes. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Compression Check > System Information > System Diagnosis > Compression Test > Page 1337 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection Compression Test - Test Results Compression Test - Test Results The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading cylinder is at least 75% of the highest reading. Refer to the Compression Pressure Limit Chart. Compression Pressure Limit Chart Compression Pressure Limit Chart (Part 1) Compression Pressure Limit Chart (Part 2) If one or more cylinders reads low, squirt approximately one tablespoon of engine oil meeting Ford specification on top of the pistons in the low-reading cylinders. Repeat the compression pressure check on these cylinders. Compression Test - Interpreting Compression Readings 1. If compression improves considerably, piston rings are worn or damaged. 2. If compression does not improve, valves are sticking or not seating correctly. 3. If 2 adjacent cylinders indicate low compression pressures and squirting oil on each piston does not increase compression, the head gasket may be leaking between cylinders. Engine oil or coolant in cylinders could result from this condition. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Compression Check > System Information > System Diagnosis > Compression Test > Page 1338 Use the Compression Pressure Limit Chart when checking cylinder compression so that the lowest reading is within 75% of the highest reading. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft Bearing > Component Information > Specifications Camshaft Bearing: Specifications Camshaft Bearing Cap Bolts ............................................................................................................... .................................................... 10 Nm (89 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Diagrams > Valve Train Components - LH Camshaft: Diagrams Valve Train Components - LH Valve Train Components - Exploded View Valve Train Components - LH (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Diagrams > Valve Train Components - LH > Page 1347 Valve Train Components - LH (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Diagrams > Valve Train Components - LH > Page 1348 Camshaft: Diagrams Valve Train Components - RH Valve Train Components - Exploded View Valve Train Components - RH Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Camshaft: Procedures Camshaft Bearing Journal Diameter NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Specifications. 1. Measure each camshaft journal diameter in 2 directions. Camshaft Journal to Bearing Clearance - OHC Engines NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Specifications. 1. NOTE: The camshaft journals must meet specifications before checking camshaft journal clearance. Measure each camshaft bearing in 2 directions. ^ Subtract the camshaft journal diameter from the camshaft bearing diameter. Camshaft End Play - OHC Engines Special Tool(s) NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Specifications. 1. Using the special tool, measure the camshaft end play. 2. Position the camshaft to the rear of the cylinder head. 3. Zero the indicator. 4. Move the camshaft to the front of the cylinder head. Note and record the camshaft end play. ^ If camshaft end play exceeds specifications, install a new camshaft and recheck end play. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1351 ^ If camshaft end play exceeds specification after camshaft installation, install a new cylinder head. Camshaft Surface Inspection 1. Inspect camshaft lobes for pitting or damage in the contact area. Minor pitting is acceptable outside the contact area. Camshaft Lobe Lift Special Tool(s) NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Specifications. 1. Use an indicator gauge to measure camshaft intake/exhaust lobe lift. ^ Rotate the camshaft and subtract the lowest indicator reading from the highest indicator reading to figure the camshaft lobe lift. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1352 Camshaft Runout Special Tool(s) NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Specifications. 1. NOTE: Camshaft journals must be within specifications before checking runout. Using the special tool, measure the camshaft runout. ^ Rotate the camshaft and subtract the lowest indicator reading from the highest indicator reading. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1353 Camshaft: Removal and Replacement Camshafts - LH Camshafts - LH Valve Train Components - LH (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1354 Valve Train Components - LH (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1355 Special Tool(s) Material Removal 1. Remove the coolant pump belt. 2. Remove the timing drive components. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1356 3. NOTE: The OEM pulley is pressed on flush to the end of the camshaft. The service pulley is pressed on flush to the end of the camshaft. Using the special tools, remove and discard the coolant pump pulley. 4. CAUTION: Do not scratch the camshaft sealing surface while removing the camshaft oil seal. If scratched, camshaft oil seal leakage may occur. Using the special tools, remove and discard the camshaft oil seal. 5. Remove the 2 bolts and the camshaft oil seal retainer. ^ Discard the press-in-place gasket. 6. CAUTION: Cylinder head camshaft bearing caps must be assembled in their original positions. Some engines have factory markings on the camshaft bearing caps (as shown in illustration). Engines that do not have the factory markings must be marked for correct position and orientation prior to removal. Failure to install the camshaft bearing caps in their original position may result in severe engine damage. If necessary, mark the camshaft bearing cap position and orientation as shown in the illustration. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1357 7. CAUTION: After loosening all of the camshaft bearing cap bolts, remove the camshaft bearing thrust caps (1L and 6L) first, or damage to the thrust caps may occur. NOTE: Make sure the camshaft bearing caps are marked as instructed in the previous step. Loosen the bolts evenly in the sequence shown. 1. Remove the camshaft bearing thrust caps (1L and 6L). 2. Remove the remaining camshaft bearing caps. 3. Remove the camshafts from the cylinder head. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1358 Installation 1. Lubricate the camshafts with clean engine oil and carefully position the camshafts into the cylinder head. ^ Align the camshafts as shown. 2. CAUTION: The camshaft caps must be installed in their original positions or damage to the engine may occur. CAUTION: Do not install the camshaft journal thrust caps until all of the camshaft bearing caps have been installed, or damage to the thrust caps may occur. Lubricate the bearing surfaces of the camshaft bearing caps with clean engine oil and install the bearing caps. ^ Loosely install the bolts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1359 3. Lubricate the bearing surfaces of the camshaft bearing thrust caps with clean engine oil and install the bearing thrust caps. ^ Loosely install the bolts. 4. Install the bolts. ^ Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1360 5. NOTE: Clean the sealing surfaces with metal surface cleaner before installing a new press-in-place gasket. Install the camshaft oil seal retainer and the 2 bolts. ^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 6. NOTE: Lubricate the camshaft oil seal with clean engine oil. Using the special tools, install the camshaft oil seal. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1361 7. NOTE: The OEM pulley is pressed on flush to the end of the camshaft. The service pulley is pressed on flush to the end of the camshaft. Using the special tools, install a new service coolant pump pulley. 8. Install the timing drive components. 9. Install the coolant pump belt. Camshafts - RH Camshafts - RH Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1362 Valve Train Components - RH Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1363 Material Removal 1. Remove the timing drive components. 2. CAUTION: Cylinder head camshaft bearing caps must be assembled in their original positions. Some engines have factory markings on the camshaft bearing caps (as shown in illustration). Engines that do not have the factory markings must be marked for correct position and orientation prior to removal. Failure to install the camshaft bearing caps in their original position may result in severe engine damage. If necessary, mark the camshaft bearing cap position and orientation as shown in the illustration. 3. CAUTION: After loosening all of the camshaft bearing cap bolts, remove the camshaft bearing thrust caps (5R and 1R) first, or damage to the thrust caps may occur. NOTE: Make sure the camshaft bearing caps are marked as instructed in the previous step. Loosen the bolts evenly in the sequence shown. 1. Remove the camshaft bearing thrust caps (5R and 1R). 2. Remove the remaining camshaft bearing caps. 3. Remove the camshafts from the cylinder head. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1364 Installation 1. Lubricate the camshafts with clean engine oil and carefully position the camshafts into the cylinder head. ^ Align the camshafts as shown. 2. CAUTION: The camshaft caps must be installed in their original positions or damage to the engine may occur. CAUTION: Do not install the camshaft bearing thrust caps until all of the camshaft bearing caps have been installed, or damage to the thrust caps may occur. Lubricate the bearing surfaces of the camshaft bearing caps with clean engine oil and install the bearing caps. ^ Loosely install the bolts. 3. Lubricate the bearing surfaces of the camshaft bearing thrust caps with clean engine oil and install the bearing thrust caps. ^ Loosely install the bolts. 4. Install the bolts. ^ Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Camshaft, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1365 5. Install the timing drive components. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Valve Train Components - LH Lifter / Lash Adjuster: Diagrams Valve Train Components - LH Valve Train Components - Exploded View Valve Train Components - LH (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Valve Train Components - LH > Page 1370 Valve Train Components - LH (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Valve Train Components - LH > Page 1371 Lifter / Lash Adjuster: Diagrams Valve Train Components - RH Valve Train Components - Exploded View Valve Train Components - RH Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Hydraulic Lash Adjuster Inspection Lifter / Lash Adjuster: Testing and Inspection Hydraulic Lash Adjuster Inspection Hydraulic Lash Adjuster Inspection 1. Inspect the hydraulic lash adjuster and roller follower for damage. If any damage is found, inspect the camshaft lobes and valves for damage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Hydraulic Lash Adjuster Inspection > Page 1374 Lifter / Lash Adjuster: Testing and Inspection Valve Tappet Inspection Valve Tappet Inspection 1. Inspect the valve tappet for damage, especially in the indicated areas. If any damage is evident, inspect the camshaft lobes and valves for damage. Install new components as necessary. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1375 Lifter / Lash Adjuster: Service and Repair Hydraulic Lash Adjuster Valve Train Components - LH (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1376 Valve Train Components - LH (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1377 Valve Train Components - RH Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Lifter / Lash Adjuster, Valve > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1378 Material Removal and Installation 1. Remove the camshaft roller followers. 2. NOTE: Mark the positions of the hydraulic lash adjusters to make sure they are assembled in their original positions. Remove the hydraulic lash adjusters. 3. NOTE: Inspect the hydraulic lash adjusters for scoring marks and uneven wear in the bore. Install new lash adjusters if necessary. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Lubricate the hydraulic lash adjusters with clean engine oil. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Diagrams > Valve Train Components - LH Rocker Arm Assembly: Diagrams Valve Train Components - LH Valve Train Components - Exploded View Valve Train Components - LH (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Diagrams > Valve Train Components - LH > Page 1383 Valve Train Components - LH (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Diagrams > Valve Train Components - LH > Page 1384 Rocker Arm Assembly: Diagrams Valve Train Components - RH Valve Train Components - Exploded View Valve Train Components - RH Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1385 Rocker Arm Assembly: Testing and Inspection Roller Follower Inspection 1. Inspect the roller follower for flat spots or scoring. If any damage is found, inspect the camshaft lobes and hydraulic lash adjuster for damage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1386 Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Camshaft Roller Follower Valve Train Components - LH (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1387 Valve Train Components - LH (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1388 Valve Train Components - RH Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1389 Special Tool(s) Material Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the LH and RH valve covers. 3. CAUTION: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spark plugs or damage may occur to the cylinder head or spark plug. Remove the 6 spark plugs. ^ To install, tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). 4. Remove the RH splash shield. ^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 5. Rotate the crankshaft until the camshaft lobe is pointing directly away from the roller follower. 6. Using the special tool, remove the roller followers. 7. NOTE: Lubricate the camshaft followers with clean engine oil. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation VARIABLE CAMSHAFT TIMING (VCT) SYSTEM Overview The VCT enables rotation of the camshaft(s) relative to the crankshaft rotation as a function of engine operating conditions. There are 4 types of VCT systems. - Exhaust phase shifting (EPS) system - the exhaust cam is the active cam being retarded. - Intake phase shifting (IPS) system - the intake cam is the active cam being advanced. - Dual equal phase shifting (DEPS) system - both intake and exhaust cams are phase shifted and equally advanced or retarded. - Dual independent phase shifting (DIPS) system - where both the intake and exhaust cams are shifted independently. All systems have 4 operational modes: idle, part throttle, wide open throttle (WOT), and default mode. At idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the powertrain control module (PCM) determines the phase angle based on air flow, engine oil temperature and engine coolant temperature. At part and wide open throttle the PCM determines the phase angle based on engine RPM, load, and throttle position. VCT systems provide reduced emissions and enhanced engine power, fuel economy and idle quality. IPS systems also have the added benefit of improved torque. In addition, some VCT system applications can eliminate the need for an external exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system. The elimination of the EGR system is accomplished by controlling the overlap time between the intake valve opening and exhaust valve closing. Currently, both the IPS and DEPS systems are used. Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) System VCT System The VCT system consists of an electric hydraulic positioning control solenoid, a camshaft position (CMP) sensor, and a trigger wheel. The CMP trigger wheel has a number of equally spaced teeth equal to the number (n) of cylinders on a bank plus one extra tooth (n+1). Four cylinder and V8 engines use a CMP 4+1 tooth trigger wheel. V6 engines use a CMP 3+1 tooth trigger wheel. The extra tooth placed between the equally spaced teeth represents the CMP signal for that bank. A crankshaft position (CKP) sensor provides the PCM with crankshaft positioning information in 10 degree increments. 1. The PCM receives input signals from the intake air temperature (IAT) sensor, engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor, engine oil temperature (EOT) sensor, CMP, throttle position (TP) sensor, mass air flow (MAF) sensor, and CKP to determine the operating conditions of the engine. At idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the PCM controls the camshaft position based on ECT, EOT, IAT, and MAF. During part and wide open throttle, the camshaft position is determined by engine RPM, load and throttle position. The VCT system does not operate until the engine is at normal operating temperature. 2. The VCT system is enabled by the PCM when the correct conditions are met. 3. The CKP signal is used as a reference for CMP positioning. 4. The VCT solenoid valve is an integral part of the VCT system. The solenoid valve controls the flow of engine oil in the VCT actuator assembly. As the PCM controls the duty cycle of the solenoid valve, oil pressure/flow advances or retards the cam timing. Duty cycles near 0% or 100% represent rapid movement of the camshaft. Retaining a fixed camshaft position is accomplished by dithering (oscillating) the solenoid valve duty cycle. The PCM calculates and determines the desired camshaft position. It continually updates the VCT solenoid duty cycle until the desired position is achieved. A difference between the desired and actual camshaft position represents a position error in the PCM VCT control loop. The PCM Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1393 disables the VCT and places the camshaft in a default position if a concern is detected. A related DTC is also set when the concern is detected. 5. When the VCT solenoid is energized, engine oil is allowed to flow to the VCT actuator assembly which advances or retards the camshaft timing. One half of the VCT actuator is coupled to the camshaft and the other half is connected to the timing chain. Oil chambers between the 2 halves couple the camshaft to the timing chain. When the flow of oil is shifted from one side of the chamber to the other, the differential change in oil pressure forces the camshaft to rotate in either an advance or retard position depending on the oil flow. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod Bearing > Component Information > Specifications Connecting Rod Bearing: Specifications Connecting Rod Bearing bore diameter ........................................................................................................................................... 53.015-53.035 mm (2.0872-2.0879 in) Bearing-to-crankshaft clearance .................................................................................................................................. 0.028-0.066 mm (0.001-0.0025 in) Side clearance ............................................................................................................................................................. 0.100-0.30 mm (0.0039-0.0118 in) Clearance-to-pin Service limit ......................................................................................................................................... ..................................... 0.035 mm (0.0013 in) Standard ..................................................................... ........................................................................................... 0.004-0.02 mm (0.0001-0.0007 in) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Connecting Rod, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Connecting Rod: Specifications Connecting Rod Bearing bore diameter ........................................................................................................................................... 53.015-53.035 mm (2.0872-2.0879 in) Bearing-to-crankshaft clearance .................................................................................................................................. 0.028-0.066 mm (0.001-0.0025 in) Length (center-to-center) ............................................................................................................................................ 138.06-138.14 mm (5.435-5.38 in) Maximum allowed bend ....................................................................................................................................... 0.038 mm per 25 (0.0014 per 0.984 in) Maximum allowed twist ....................................................................................................................................... 0.050 mm per 25 (0.0019 per 0.984 in) Pin bore diameter ...................................................................................................................................................... 21.017-21.031 mm (0.827-0.828 in) Side clearance ............................................................................................................................................................. 0.100-0.30 mm (0.0039-0.0118 in) Clearance-to-pin Service limit ......................................................................................................................................... ..................................... 0.035 mm (0.0013 in) Standard ..................................................................... ........................................................................................... 0.004-0.02 mm (0.0001-0.0007 in) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Specifications Crankshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications Crankshaft Pulley Bolt First pass ............................................................................................................................................. .................................................. 120 Nm (89 lb-ft). Second pass ........................................................ ..................................................................................................................... Loosen one full turn (360°) Third pass ................................................................................................................................. .............................................................. 50 Nm (37 lb-ft). Final pass .................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. 90 Nm (66 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft Main Bearing > Component Information > Specifications Crankshaft Main Bearing: Specifications Crankshaft Connecting rod journal Diameter ............................................................................................................................................................. 49.969-49.991 mm (1.967-1.968 in) Maximum out-of-round ............................................................................................................................................................. 0.006 mm (0.0002 in) Maximum taper ................................................................................................. ........................................................................ 0.008 mm (0.0003 in) Maximum end play ....................................................................................................................................................... 0.135-0.255 mm (0.005-0.010 in) Main bearing journal Diameter ............................................................................................................................................................. 62.968-62.992 mm (2.467-2.479 in) Maximum out-of-round ............................................................................................................................................................. 0.006 mm (0.0002 in) Maximum taper ................................................................................................. ........................................................................ 0.008 mm (0.0003 in) Clearance-to-cylinder block ................................................................................................................................. 0.024-0.072 mm (0.0009-0.003 in) Main bearing bore inside diameter .......................................................................................................................... 67.998-68.022 mm (2.677-2.6780 in) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Crankshaft: Specifications Crankshaft Connecting rod journal Diameter ............................................................................................................................................................. 49.969-49.991 mm (1.967-1.968 in) Maximum out-of-round ............................................................................................................................................................. 0.006 mm (0.0002 in) Maximum taper ................................................................................................. ........................................................................ 0.008 mm (0.0003 in) Maximum end play ....................................................................................................................................................... 0.135-0.255 mm (0.005-0.010 in) Main bearing journal Diameter ............................................................................................................................................................. 62.968-62.992 mm (2.467-2.479 in) Maximum out-of-round ............................................................................................................................................................. 0.006 mm (0.0002 in) Maximum taper ................................................................................................. ........................................................................ 0.008 mm (0.0003 in) Clearance-to-cylinder block ................................................................................................................................. 0.024-0.072 mm (0.0009-0.003 in) Main bearing bore inside diameter .......................................................................................................................... 67.998-68.022 mm (2.677-2.6780 in) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Crankshaft, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1410 Crankshaft: Service and Repair Crankshaft End Play Special Tool(s) NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Specifications. 1. Using the Dial Indicator Gauge, measure the crankshaft end play. 2. Position the crankshaft to the rear of the cylinder block. 3. Zero the indicator. 4. Move the crankshaft to the front of the cylinder block. Note and record the crankshaft end play. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Engine Block Heater > Component Information > Service and Repair Engine Block Heater: Service and Repair Block Heater Block Heater Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Drain the cooling system. 3. CAUTION: Make sure that the block heater wiring is routed and secured away from rotating or hot components, or damage to the wiring can occur. Disconnect the block heater electrical connector. 4. Remove the block heater. ^ To install, tighten to 21 Nm (15 lb-ft). 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 6. Fill and bleed the cooling system. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Specifications Crankshaft Pulley Bolt First pass ............................................................................................................................................. .................................................. 120 Nm (89 lb-ft). Second pass ........................................................ ..................................................................................................................... Loosen one full turn (360°) Third pass ................................................................................................................................. .............................................................. 50 Nm (37 lb-ft). Final pass .................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. 90 Nm (66 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1417 Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Service and Repair Crankshaft Pulley Crankshaft Pulley and Front Seal Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1418 Special Tool(s) Material Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the accessory drive belt. 3. Use the special tool to hold the crankshaft pulley and remove the crankshaft pulley bolt. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1419 4. Using the special tool, remove the crankshaft pulley. Installation 1. Lubricate the crankshaft front seal inner lip with clean engine oil. 2. NOTE: Clean the keyway and slot using metal surface cleaner before applying silicone gasket and sealer. NOTE: The crankshaft pulley must be installed and the bolt tightened within 4 minutes of applying the silicone gasket and sealer. Apply silicone gasket and sealant to the end of the keyway slot. 3. NOTE: Lubricate the outside diameter sealing surface with clean engine oil. Using the special tool, install the crankshaft pulley. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Harmonic Balancer Crankshaft Pulley > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1420 4. Install the bolt and washer. Using the special tool to hold the crankshaft pulley, tighten the bolt in 4 stages: ^ Stage 1: Tighten to 120 Nm (89 lb-ft). ^ Stage 2: Loosen one full turn. ^ Stage 3: Tighten to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft). ^ Stage 4: Tighten an additional 90 degrees. 5. Install the accessory drive belt. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Piston: Specifications Piston Diameter Coated Grade 1 ..................................................................................................................................................... 88.990-89.010 mm (3.5035-3.5043 in) Grade 2 ..................................................................................................................................................... 88.998-89.022 mm (3.5039-3.5048 in) Grade 3 ..................................................................................................................................................... 89.010-89.030 mm (3.5043-3.5051 in) Uncoated Grade 1 ................................................................................................................................................. 88.970-88.980 mm (3.50275-3.50314 in) Grade 2 ................................................................................................................................................. 88.978-88.992 mm (3.50306-3.50362 in) Grade 3 ................................................................................................................................................. 89.010-89.030 mm (3.50432-3.50511 in) Pin bore diameter .................................................................................................................................................. 21.008-21.012 mm (0.8270-0.8272 in) Pin Diameter ......................................................................................................................................................... 21.011-21.013 mm (0.8271-0.8273 in) Length .................................................................................... ................................................................................. 60.51-60.08 mm (2.382-2.365 in) Ring end gap Compression Bottom (gauge diameter) .................................................................................................................................. 0.27-0.42 mm (0.0106-0.0165 in) Bottom (service limit) .................................................................................................................................................... 0.65 mm (0.0255 in) max Top (gauge diameter) (a) .............................................................................................................................. 0.100-0.250 mm (0.0039-0.0098 in) Top (service limit) ......................................................................................................................................................... 0.50 mm (0.0196 in) max Oil ring (Steel rail, gauge diameter) ............................................................................................................................... 0.15-0.65 mm (0.0059-0.0255 in) (Steel rail, service limit) ................................................................................................................................................. 0.90 mm (0.0354 in) max Ring groove width Compression Bottom .......................................................................................................................................................... 1.530-1.545 mm (0.0602-0.0608 in) Top ............................................................................................. ................................................................... 1.230-1.245 mm (0.0484-0.0490 in) Oil ring .......................................................................................................................................................... 3.030-3.055 mm (0.1192-0.0120 in) Pin-to-piston fit ................................................................................................................................................... 0.002 to 0.009 mm (0.00007-0.0003 in) Clearance-to-cylinder bore .................................................................................................................................... 0.012 to 0.022 mm (0.0005-0.0009 in) (a) Specification 82.4 mm (3.2441 in) diameter gauge Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Block Assembly > Piston Ring, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Piston Ring: Specifications Piston Rings Ring end gap Compression Bottom (gauge diameter) .................................................................................................................................. 0.27-0.42 mm (0.0106-0.0165 in) Bottom (service limit) .................................................................................................................................................... 0.65 mm (0.0255 in) max Top (gauge diameter) (a) .............................................................................................................................. 0.100-0.250 mm (0.0039-0.0098 in) Top (service limit) ......................................................................................................................................................... 0.50 mm (0.0196 in) max Oil ring (Steel rail, gauge diameter) ............................................................................................................................... 0.15-0.65 mm (0.0059-0.0255 in) (Steel rail, service limit) ................................................................................................................................................. 0.90 mm (0.0354 in) max Ring groove width Compression Bottom .......................................................................................................................................................... 1.530-1.545 mm (0.0602-0.0608 in) Top ............................................................................................. ................................................................... 1.230-1.245 mm (0.0484-0.0490 in) Oil ring .......................................................................................................................................................... 3.030-3.055 mm (0.1192-0.0120 in) (a) Specification 82.4 mm (3.2441 in) diameter gauge Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications Valve Clearance: Specifications Valve Clearance This engine is equipped with hydraulic lash adjusters. No adjustment is required. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE RELEASE WARNING: - Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the fuel pump (FP) driver module electrical connector. 3. Start the engine and allow it to idle until it stalls. 4. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately 5 seconds to make sure the fuel injection supply manifold pressure has been released. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 6. When fuel system service is complete, connect the FP driver module electrical connector. 7. NOTE: It may take more than one key cycle to pressurize the fuel system. Cycle the ignition key and wait 3 seconds to pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before starting the engine. 8. Start the vehicle and check the fuel system for leaks. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Diagrams > Valve Train Components - LH Rocker Arm Assembly: Diagrams Valve Train Components - LH Valve Train Components - Exploded View Valve Train Components - LH (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Diagrams > Valve Train Components - LH > Page 1438 Valve Train Components - LH (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Diagrams > Valve Train Components - LH > Page 1439 Rocker Arm Assembly: Diagrams Valve Train Components - RH Valve Train Components - Exploded View Valve Train Components - RH Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1440 Rocker Arm Assembly: Testing and Inspection Roller Follower Inspection 1. Inspect the roller follower for flat spots or scoring. If any damage is found, inspect the camshaft lobes and hydraulic lash adjuster for damage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1441 Rocker Arm Assembly: Service and Repair Camshaft Roller Follower Valve Train Components - LH (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1442 Valve Train Components - LH (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1443 Valve Train Components - RH Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Rocker Arm Assembly > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1444 Special Tool(s) Material Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the LH and RH valve covers. 3. CAUTION: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spark plugs or damage may occur to the cylinder head or spark plug. Remove the 6 spark plugs. ^ To install, tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). 4. Remove the RH splash shield. ^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 5. Rotate the crankshaft until the camshaft lobe is pointing directly away from the roller follower. 6. Using the special tool, remove the roller followers. 7. NOTE: Lubricate the camshaft followers with clean engine oil. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Cover - LH Valve Cover: Service and Repair Valve Cover - LH Valve Cover - LH Material Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Cover - LH > Page 1449 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Cover - LH > Page 1450 Removal CAUTION: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign material (including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces) that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan may cause engine failure. 1. Remove the LH ignition coil-on-plugs. 2. If equipped, remove the bolt and the engine lift bracket. 3. Remove the 2 bolts and the accelerator cable snow shield. 4. CAUTION: Do not disconnect the crankcase ventilation tube from the valve cover or damage to the ventilation tube may occur. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Cover - LH > Page 1451 Disconnect the crankcase ventilation tube from the air cleaner outlet pipe. 5. Detach the upper radiator hose from the 2 retainers on the cooling fan shroud and position the hose aside. 6. Detach the 4 wiring retainers from the valve cover stud bolts. 7. Detach the 3 wiring retainers from the valve cover stud bolts and position the B+ cable aside. 8. NOTE: Inspect the crankcase ventilation tube and valve cover sealing area. If either a new valve cover or crankcase ventilation tube is required, both components must be installed new. Remove the 5 bolts, 8 stud bolts and the valve cover. ^ Remove and discard the gasket. Installation 1. Clean the valve cover, cylinder head and front cover sealing surfaces with metal surface cleaner and install a new valve cover gasket. 2. NOTE: The valve cover must be installed and the bolts and stud bolts tightened within 4 minutes of sealant application. Apply a 5 mm (0.19 in) dot of silicone gasket sealant to the front cover-to-cylinder head joints. 3. Position the valve cover and install the bolts and stud bolts. ^ Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 4. Attach the 3 wiring (B+ cable) retainers onto the valve cover stud bolts. 5. Attach the 4 wiring retainers to the valve cover stud bolts. 6. Attach the upper radiator hose to the 2 retainers on the cooling fan shroud. 7. Attach the crankcase ventilation tube to the air cleaner outlet pipe. 8. Install the accelerator cable snow shield and the 2 bolts. ^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 9. If equipped, install the engine lift bracket and the bolt. ^ Tighten to 118 Nm (87 lb-ft). 10. Install the LH ignition coil-on-plugs. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Cover - LH > Page 1452 Valve Cover: Service and Repair Valve Cover - RH Valve Cover - RH Material Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Cover - LH > Page 1453 Removal CAUTION: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign material (including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces) that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan may cause engine failure. 1. Remove the RH ignition coil-on-plugs. 2. Remove the PCV tube. 3. Disconnect the radio ignition interference capacitor electrical connector and detach the 5 wiring retainers from the stud bolts. 4. Remove the nut and the radio ignition interference capacitor. 5. Remove the 2 nuts and position the engine control wiring harness shield aside. 6. Remove the 3 bolts, 10 stud bolts and the valve cover. ^ Remove and discard the gasket. Installation 1. Clean the valve cover, cylinder head and front cover sealing surfaces with metal surface cleaner and install a new valve cover gasket. 2. NOTE: The valve cover must be installed and the bolts and stud bolts tightened within 4 minutes of sealant application. Apply a 5 mm (0.19 in) dot of silicone gasket sealant to the front cover-to-cylinder head joints. 3. Position the valve cover and install the 3 bolts and 10 stud bolts. ^ Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 4. Position the engine control wiring harness shield and install the 2 nuts. ^ Tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 5. Install the radio ignition interference capacitor and the nut. ^ Tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 6. Attach the wiring retainers to the stud bolts and connect the radio ignition interference capacitor electrical connector. 7. Install the PCV tube. 8. Install the RH ignition coil-on-plugs. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Guide > Component Information > Service and Repair Valve Guide: Service and Repair Valve Guide Inner Diameter NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Specifications. 1. NOTE: Valve guides tend to wear in an hourglass pattern. The ball gauge can be inserted into the combustion chamber side of the valve guide if necessary. Use a ball gauge to determine the inner diameter of the valve guides in 2 directions at the top, middle and bottom of the valve guide. 2. Measure the ball gauge with a micrometer. 3. If the valve guide is not within specifications, install a new cylinder head assembly. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Seat > Component Information > Service and Repair Valve Seat: Service and Repair Valve Seat Inspection Valve and Seat Refacing Measurements NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Specifications. NOTE: After grinding valves or valve seats, check valve clearance. 1. Check the valve head and seat. ^ Check valve angles. ^ Check margin width. ^ Be sure margin width is within specification. 2. Inspect for abnormalities on the valve face and seat. Install a new cylinder head assembly if abnormalities are found. Valve Seat Width NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Specifications. 1. Measure the valve seat width. If necessary, grind the valve seat to specification. ^ Measure the intake valve seat width. ^ Measure the exhaust valve seat width. ^ Recheck the valve spring installed length after the seats have been ground, and shim the valve springs as necessary to achieve the correct installed spring length. Valve Seat Runout NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Specifications. 1. Use a valve seat runout gauge to check valve seat runout. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Seat > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1460 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Diagrams > Valve Train Components - LH Valve Spring: Diagrams Valve Train Components - LH Valve Train Components - Exploded View Valve Train Components - LH (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Diagrams > Valve Train Components - LH > Page 1465 Valve Train Components - LH (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Diagrams > Valve Train Components - LH > Page 1466 Valve Spring: Diagrams Valve Train Components - RH Valve Train Components - Exploded View Valve Train Components - RH Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Valve Spring: Procedures Valve Spring Installed Length NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Specifications. 1. Measure the installed length of each valve spring. Valve Spring Free Length NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Specifications. 1. Measure the free length of each valve spring. Valve Spring Squareness 1. Measure the out-of-square on each valve spring. ^ Turn the valve spring and observe the space between the top of the valve spring and the square. Valve Spring Strength Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1469 Special Tool(s) NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Specifications. 1. Use the special tool to check the valve spring for correct strength at the specified valve spring length. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1470 Valve Spring: Removal and Replacement Valve Spring, Retainer, and Seal Valve Train Components - LH (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1471 Valve Train Components - LH (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1472 Valve Train Components - RH Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1473 Special Tool(s) Material Removal 1. Remove the camshaft roller followers. 2. NOTE: If air pressure has forced the piston to the bottom of the cylinder, any loss of air pressure will allow the valve(s) to fall into the cylinder. A rubber band, tape or string wrapped around the end of the valve stem will prevent this from happening. Pressurize the cylinder using compressed air. 3. Using the special tool, remove the key, retainer and the valve spring. 4. NOTE: Camshaft removed for clarity. Remove the valve seal. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve Spring > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1474 Installation 1. NOTE: Lubricate the valve guide with clean engine oil. Using the special tool, install the valve seal. 2. Using the special tool, install the valve spring, retainer and key. 3. Install the camshaft roller followers. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Stem Diameter Valve: Service and Repair Valve Stem Diameter Valve Stem Diameter NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Specifications. 1. Measure the diameter of each intake and exhaust valve stem at the points shown. Verify the diameter is within specification. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Stem Diameter > Page 1479 Valve: Service and Repair Valve Inspection Valve Inspection 1. Inspect the following valve areas: 1. The end of the stem for grooves or scoring. 2. The valve face and the edge for pits, grooves or scores. 3. The valve head for signs of burning, erosion, warpage and cracking. 4. The valve margin for wear. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Cylinder Head Assembly > Valve, Intake/Exhaust > Component Information > Service and Repair > Valve Stem Diameter > Page 1480 Valve: Service and Repair Valve Stem to Valve Guide Clearance Valve Stem to Valve Guide Clearance Special Tool(s) NOTE: Refer to the appropriate Specifications. NOTE: The valve stem diameter must be within specifications before checking valve stem-to-valve guide clearance. 1. NOTE: If necessary, use a magnetic base. Install a Valve Guide Clearance Gauge on the valve stem and install a Dial Indicator Gauge with Holding Fixture. Lower the valve until the clearance gauge contacts the upper surface of the valve guide. 2. Move the clearance gauge toward the indicator and zero the indicator. Move the clearance gauge away from the indicator and note the reading. The reading will be DOUBLE the valve stem-to-valve guide clearance. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Drive Belt: > 09-21-2 > Nov > 09 > Engine - FEAD Belt Whining/Bearing Type Noise Drive Belt: Customer Interest Engine - FEAD Belt Whining/Bearing Type Noise TSB 09-21-2 11/02/09 3.0L FRONT END ACCESSORY DRIVE RIGHT HAND IDLER PULLEY BEARING NOISE FORD: 2008 Escape MERCURY: 2008 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 09-14-6 to update the Service Procedure and Part List. ISSUE Some 2008 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with 3.0L engine may exhibit front end accessory drive (FEAD) whining/bearing type noise. The noise may be coming from the right hand (RH) FEAD idler pulley that is in front of the right bank cylinder head. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Using a stethoscope, place end on the bolt that holds the right hand idler pulley on. a. If the noise is coming from the bolt/pulley, then go to Step 2 and replace the idler pulley. b. If the noise is not coming from the bolt/pulley, follow Work Shop Manual (WSM), Section 303-05B to diagnose. 2. Remove bolt that holds the pulley and bearing assembly on to the bracket. Refer to WSM Section 303-05B. 3. Remove pulley. 4. Install new pulley and torque pulley bolt to 18 lb-ft (25 N.m). 5. Loosen the pulley and bracket assembly. Torque bolts to 18 lb-ft (25 N.m) following the torque sequence. (Figure 1) NOTE IF BOLTS ARE NOT TORQUED IN SEQUENCE AS ILLUSTRATED, THEN PREMATURE BEARING FAILURE MAY OCCUR. Parts Block Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Drive Belt: > 09-21-2 > Nov > 09 > Engine - FEAD Belt Whining/Bearing Type Noise > Page 1490 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092102A 2008 Escape, Mariner 0.6 Hr. 3.0L: Replace The Idler Pulley And Bracket Assembly Includes Time To Diagnose Concern (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19A216 69 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Belt: > 09-21-2 > Nov > 09 > Engine - FEAD Belt Whining/Bearing Type Noise Drive Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - FEAD Belt Whining/Bearing Type Noise TSB 09-21-2 11/02/09 3.0L FRONT END ACCESSORY DRIVE RIGHT HAND IDLER PULLEY BEARING NOISE FORD: 2008 Escape MERCURY: 2008 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 09-14-6 to update the Service Procedure and Part List. ISSUE Some 2008 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with 3.0L engine may exhibit front end accessory drive (FEAD) whining/bearing type noise. The noise may be coming from the right hand (RH) FEAD idler pulley that is in front of the right bank cylinder head. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Using a stethoscope, place end on the bolt that holds the right hand idler pulley on. a. If the noise is coming from the bolt/pulley, then go to Step 2 and replace the idler pulley. b. If the noise is not coming from the bolt/pulley, follow Work Shop Manual (WSM), Section 303-05B to diagnose. 2. Remove bolt that holds the pulley and bearing assembly on to the bracket. Refer to WSM Section 303-05B. 3. Remove pulley. 4. Install new pulley and torque pulley bolt to 18 lb-ft (25 N.m). 5. Loosen the pulley and bracket assembly. Torque bolts to 18 lb-ft (25 N.m) following the torque sequence. (Figure 1) NOTE IF BOLTS ARE NOT TORQUED IN SEQUENCE AS ILLUSTRATED, THEN PREMATURE BEARING FAILURE MAY OCCUR. Parts Block Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Drive Belt: > 09-21-2 > Nov > 09 > Engine - FEAD Belt Whining/Bearing Type Noise > Page 1496 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092102A 2008 Escape, Mariner 0.6 Hr. 3.0L: Replace The Idler Pulley And Bracket Assembly Includes Time To Diagnose Concern (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19A216 69 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views Drive Belt: Exploded Views Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 1499 Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 1500 Drive Belt: Mechanical Diagrams Accessory Drive Belt Accessory Drive Belt (Part 1) Accessory Drive Belt (Part 2) Coolant Pump Drive Belt Coolant Pump Drive Belt Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Diagrams > Exploded Views > Page 1501 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Drive Belt: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Inspection and Verification CAUTION: Under no circumstances should the accessory drive belt, tensioner or pulleys have any fluids or belt dressing applied to them as damage to the belt material and tensioner damping mechanism may occur. 1. Verify the customer concern by operating the system. 2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical damage. Visual Inspection Chart Visual Inspection Chart Belt Tensioner With Belt Length Indicator NOTE: Modular engine (without A/C) belt tensioner shown, others similar. NOTE: Belt tensioner is shown in the free-state position against the arm travel stops. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 1504 Belt Tensioner With Belt Length Indicator 3. Check that the belt length indicator, if equipped, on the belt tensioner is in the acceptable belt installation and wear range. If the indicator is in the belt replacement range, either an incorrect belt is installed or the belt is worn beyond the service limit. Install a new belt as necessary. 4. Eliminate all other non-belt related noises that could cause belt misdiagnosis, such as A/C compressor engagement chirp, A/C slugging noise, power steering cavitations at low temperatures, variable camshaft timing (VCT) tick or generator whine. 5. If a concern is found, correct the condition before proceeding to the next step. V-Ribbed Serpentine Drive Belt With Cracks Across Ribs Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 1505 V-Ribbed Serpentine Drive Belt With Cracks Across Ribs 6. Check the belt for cracks. Up to 15 cracks in a rib over a distance of 100 mm (4.0 in) can be considered acceptable. If cracks exceed this standard, install a new belt. V-Ribbed Serpentine Belt With Piling NOTE: Piling is an excessive buildup in the V-grooves of the belt. V-Ribbed Serpentine Belt With Piling 7. The condition of the V-ribbed drive belt should be compared against the illustration and appropriate action taken. 1. Small scattered deposits of rubber material. This is not a concern, therefore, installation of a new belt is not required. 2. Longer deposit areas building up to 50% of the rib height. This is not considered a concern but it can result in excessive noise. If noise is apparent, install a new belt. 3. Heavy deposits building up along the grooves resulting in a possible noise and belt stability concern. If heavy deposits are apparent, install a new belt. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 1506 V-Ribbed Serpentine Belt With Chunks of Rib Missing V-Ribbed Serpentine Belt With Chunks of Rib Missing 8. There should be no chunks missing from the belt ribs. If the belt shows any evidence of this, install a new accessory drive belt. 9. If the concern is not visually evident, verify the symptom and GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 1507 Drive Belt: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Symptom Chart Symptom Chart (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 1508 Symptom Chart (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 1509 Drive Belt: Component Tests and General Diagnostics Drive Belt - Noise/Flutter CAUTION: Under no circumstances should the accessory drive belt, tensioner or pulleys have any fluids or belt dressing applied to them as damage to the belt material and tensioner damping mechanism may occur. Drive belt chirp occurs due to pulley misalignment or excessive pulley runout. It can be the result of a damaged or incorrectly aligned grooved pulley. To correct, determine the area where the noise comes from. Check each of the pulleys in that area with a straightedge to the crankshaft pulley. Look for accessory pulleys out of position in the fore/aft direction or at an angle to the straightedge. Drive belt squeal may be an intermittent or constant noise that occurs when the drive belt slips on an accessory pulley under certain conditions. A short intermittent squeal may occur during engine start-up and shut down or during very rapid engine acceleration and decelerations, such as: ^ wide open throttle (WOT) 1-2 and 2-3 shifts or 2-3 and 3-4 back out shifts on automatic transmissions. ^ WOT 1-2 and 2-3 shifts and any combination of rapid downshifting on manual transmissions. These special short-term transient events are expected, and are due to the higher system inertias required to meet the electrical and cooling demands on today's vehicle systems. Constant or reoccurring drive belt squeal can occur: ^ if the A/C discharge pressure goes above specifications: the A/C system is overcharged. - the A/C condenser core airflow is blocked. ^ if the A/C off equalized pressure (the common discharged and suction pressure that occurs after several minutes) exceeds specifications. ^ if any of the accessories or idler pulley(s) are damaged or have a worn or damaged bearing. All accessories should be rotatable by hand in the unloaded condition. If not, inspect the accessory. ^ if there is evidence of fluid contamination on the accessory drive belt. When the drive belt has been exposed to fluid contamination during vehicle operation, such as leaks from the power steering system, A/C system or cooling system, clean all pulleys with soap and water, rinse with clean water and install a new accessory drive belt. If the drive belt has been exposed to fluids in a localized area during routine vehicle service, such as replacement of hoses or fluids, the drive belt and pulleys should be washed with soap and water immediately (prior to starting the engine), and rinsed with clean water. ^ if the accessory drive belt is too long. A drive belt that is too long will allow the accessory drive belt tensioner arm to go all the way to the arm travel stop under certain load conditions, which will release tension to the drive belt. If the accessory drive belt tensioner indicator is outside the normal installation wear range window, install a new accessory drive belt. ^ NOTE: The accessory drive belt tensioner arm should rotate freely without binding. Install a new accessory drive belt tensioner if the drive belt tensioner is worn or damaged. Drive Belt - Incorrect Installation CAUTION: Incorrect accessory drive belt installation will cause excessive drive belt wear and may cause the drive belt to come off the pulleys. Non-standard accessory drive belts can track differently or incorrectly. If an accessory drive belt tracks incorrectly, install a new accessory drive belt to avoid performance failure or loss of the drive belt. Incorrect Installation Incorrect Installation Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 1510 Correct Installation Correct Installation With the engine running, check accessory drive belt tracking on all pulleys. If the edge of the accessory drive belt rides beyond the edge of the pulleys, noise and premature wear will occur. Make sure the accessory drive belt rides correctly on the pulley. If an accessory drive belt tracking condition exists, proceed with the following: ^ Visually check the accessory drive belt tensioner for damage and wear, especially the mounting pad surface and arm alignment. If the accessory drive belt tensioner is not installed correctly, the mounting surface pad will be out of position. If the tensioner arm is worn, the arm will be out of alignment. Either of these conditions will result in chirp and squeal noises. ^ With the engine running, visually observe the grooves in the pulleys (not the pulley flanges or the pulley forward faces) for excessive wobble. Install new components as necessary. ^ Check all accessories, mounting brackets and the accessory drive belt tensioner for any interference that would prevent the component from mounting correctly. Correct any interference condition and recheck the accessory drive belt tracking. ^ Tighten all accessories, mounting brackets and accessory drive belt tensioner retaining hardware to specification. Recheck the accessory drive belt tracking. Belt Tensioner - Mechanical The only mechanical check that needs to be made is a check for tensioner stick, grab or bind. 1. With the engine off, check routing of the accessory drive belt. Refer to the illustrations under Description and Operation. 2. NOTE: The accessory drive belt tensioner spring is very strong and requires substantial force to release. Using a suitable, commercially available serpentine belt tensioner release tool, release the tension on the belt and detach the accessory drive belt from the tensioner. Carry out the following tests: ^ Using the release tool, move the tensioner from its relaxed position, through its full stroke and back to the relaxed position to make sure there is no stick, grab or bind, and to make sure that there is tension on the tensioner spring. ^ Rotate the tensioner pulley by hand and check for a binding, contaminated or seized condition. ^ Inspect the area surrounding the accessory drive belt tensioner for oil leaks or contamination and repair any leaks. 3. If the accessory drive belt tensioner does not meet the criteria in the previous step, install a new tensioner. If the accessory drive belt tensioner meets the criteria in the previous step, proceed to testing the tensioner dynamically. Belt Tensioner - Dynamics The accessory drive belt tensioner can be checked dynamically as follows: 1. With the engine running, observe the accessory drive belt tensioner movement. The accessory drive tensioner should move (respond) when the A/C clutch cycles (if equipped), or when the engine is accelerated rapidly. If the accessory drive belt tensioner movement is excessive without A/C clutch cycling or engine acceleration, check belt rideout. Excessive belt rideout (uneven depth of grooves in the belt) can cause excessive accessory drive belt tensioner movement. Check rideout condition by installing a new belt. If excessive accessory drive belt tensioner movement still exists, install a new accessory drive belt tensioner. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Accessory Drive Belt Drive Belt: Service and Repair Accessory Drive Belt Accessory Drive Belt Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Accessory Drive Belt > Page 1513 Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View (Part 2) Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the pin-type retainer, 5 bolts and the RH lower splash shield. ^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 3. Using a suitable belt tensioner release tool, rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner counterclockwise and remove the accessory drive belt. 4. NOTE: Refer to the illustration for correct drive belt routing. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Accessory Drive Belt > Page 1514 Drive Belt: Service and Repair Coolant Pump Belt Coolant Pump Belt Coolant Pump Belt Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Cut and remove the coolant pump belt. ^ Discard the belt. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt > Component Information > Service and Repair > Accessory Drive Belt > Page 1515 Installation 1. Install the coolant pump belt on the coolant pump pulley and position it on the camshaft pulley. 2. Remove the pin-type retainer, 5 bolts and the RH lower splash shield. 3. CAUTION: Do not use any screwdrivers, pliers or other metal objects that could cause damage to the belt or camshaft pulley while installing the belt. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise to seat the coolant pump belt on the camshaft pulley. 4. Install the RH lower splash shield, pin-type retainer and 5 bolts. ^ Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair Drive Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair Accessory Drive Belt Tensioner Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Drive Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1519 Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View (Part 2) Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the pin-type retainer, 5 bolts and the RH lower splash shield. ^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 3. Using a suitable belt tensioner release tool, rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner counterclockwise and remove the accessory drive belt. 4. Remove the bolt and the accessory drive belt tensioner. ^ To install, tighten to 45 Nm (33 lb-ft). 5. NOTE: Refer to the illustration for correct drive belt routing. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Engine Mount: Procedures Powertrain/Drivetrain Mount Neutralizing NOTE: Refer to the appropriate procedure for special instructions on loosening and tightening mount fasteners. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Loosen, but do not remove, the powertrain/drivetrain mount fasteners. 3. Lower the vehicle. 4. CAUTION: Do not twist or strain the powertrain/drivetrain mounts or damage to the mounts may occur. Move the vehicle in forward and reverse 0.6-1.2 m (2-4 ft). 5. Raise and support the vehicle. 6. Tighten the powertrain/drivetrain mount fasteners. 7. Lower the vehicle. 8. Test the system for normal operation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1524 Engine Mount: Removal and Replacement Engine Support Insulators Special Tool(s) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1525 Removal and Installation 1. Remove the lower intake manifold. 2. Remove the engine support insulator bracket bolt. ^ To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft). 3. Install the special tools. 1. Position the 2 universal adapter brackets on top of the cylinder block. 2. Install 2 M8 x 1.25 x 36 mm (1.41 in) bolts and tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 3. Position the universal lifting bracket onto the 2 universal adapter brackets. 4. Fasten the universal lifting bracket to the 2 universal adapter brackets with a suitable nut and bolt. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1526 4. Using the special tools, lift the engine 12 mm (0.47 in). 5. Remove the nut and ground wire eyelet from the engine support insulator bracket stud. ^ To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 6. Remove the 3 nuts and the engine support insulator bracket. ^ To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft). 7. Remove the 3 bolts and the engine support insulator. ^ To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Engine Mount > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1527 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Idler Pulley > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Idler Pulley: > 09-21-2 > Nov > 09 > Engine - FEAD Belt Whining/Bearing Type Noise Idler Pulley: Customer Interest Engine - FEAD Belt Whining/Bearing Type Noise TSB 09-21-2 11/02/09 3.0L FRONT END ACCESSORY DRIVE RIGHT HAND IDLER PULLEY BEARING NOISE FORD: 2008 Escape MERCURY: 2008 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 09-14-6 to update the Service Procedure and Part List. ISSUE Some 2008 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with 3.0L engine may exhibit front end accessory drive (FEAD) whining/bearing type noise. The noise may be coming from the right hand (RH) FEAD idler pulley that is in front of the right bank cylinder head. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Using a stethoscope, place end on the bolt that holds the right hand idler pulley on. a. If the noise is coming from the bolt/pulley, then go to Step 2 and replace the idler pulley. b. If the noise is not coming from the bolt/pulley, follow Work Shop Manual (WSM), Section 303-05B to diagnose. 2. Remove bolt that holds the pulley and bearing assembly on to the bracket. Refer to WSM Section 303-05B. 3. Remove pulley. 4. Install new pulley and torque pulley bolt to 18 lb-ft (25 N.m). 5. Loosen the pulley and bracket assembly. Torque bolts to 18 lb-ft (25 N.m) following the torque sequence. (Figure 1) NOTE IF BOLTS ARE NOT TORQUED IN SEQUENCE AS ILLUSTRATED, THEN PREMATURE BEARING FAILURE MAY OCCUR. Parts Block Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Idler Pulley > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Idler Pulley: > 09-21-2 > Nov > 09 > Engine - FEAD Belt Whining/Bearing Type Noise > Page 1536 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092102A 2008 Escape, Mariner 0.6 Hr. 3.0L: Replace The Idler Pulley And Bracket Assembly Includes Time To Diagnose Concern (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19A216 69 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Idler Pulley > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Idler Pulley: > 09-21-2 > Nov > 09 > Engine - FEAD Belt Whining/Bearing Type Noise Idler Pulley: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - FEAD Belt Whining/Bearing Type Noise TSB 09-21-2 11/02/09 3.0L FRONT END ACCESSORY DRIVE RIGHT HAND IDLER PULLEY BEARING NOISE FORD: 2008 Escape MERCURY: 2008 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 09-14-6 to update the Service Procedure and Part List. ISSUE Some 2008 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with 3.0L engine may exhibit front end accessory drive (FEAD) whining/bearing type noise. The noise may be coming from the right hand (RH) FEAD idler pulley that is in front of the right bank cylinder head. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Using a stethoscope, place end on the bolt that holds the right hand idler pulley on. a. If the noise is coming from the bolt/pulley, then go to Step 2 and replace the idler pulley. b. If the noise is not coming from the bolt/pulley, follow Work Shop Manual (WSM), Section 303-05B to diagnose. 2. Remove bolt that holds the pulley and bearing assembly on to the bracket. Refer to WSM Section 303-05B. 3. Remove pulley. 4. Install new pulley and torque pulley bolt to 18 lb-ft (25 N.m). 5. Loosen the pulley and bracket assembly. Torque bolts to 18 lb-ft (25 N.m) following the torque sequence. (Figure 1) NOTE IF BOLTS ARE NOT TORQUED IN SEQUENCE AS ILLUSTRATED, THEN PREMATURE BEARING FAILURE MAY OCCUR. Parts Block Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Idler Pulley > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Idler Pulley: > 09-21-2 > Nov > 09 > Engine - FEAD Belt Whining/Bearing Type Noise > Page 1542 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092102A 2008 Escape, Mariner 0.6 Hr. 3.0L: Replace The Idler Pulley And Bracket Assembly Includes Time To Diagnose Concern (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19A216 69 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Idler Pulley > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1543 Idler Pulley: Diagrams Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Idler Pulley > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1544 Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Idler Pulley > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1545 Idler Pulley: Service and Repair Accessory Drive Belt Idler Pulley Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories > Idler Pulley > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1546 Front End Accessory Drive (FEAD) - Exploded View (Part 2) Removal and Installation All accessory drive belt idler pulleys 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the pin-type retainer, 5 bolts and the RH lower splash shield. ^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 3. Using a suitable belt tensioner release tool, rotate the accessory drive belt tensioner counterclockwise and remove the accessory drive belt. LH accessory drive belt idler pulley 4. Remove the bolt and the LH accessory drive belt idler pulley. ^ To install, tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft). Center accessory drive belt idler pulley 5. Remove the bolt and the center accessory drive belt idler pulley. ^ To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). RH accessory drive belt idler pulley and bracket 6. Remove the 3 RH accessory drive belt idler pulley and bracket bolts. Then detach the wiring harness retainer and remove the idler pulley and bracket assembly. ^ To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). All accessory drive belt idler pulleys 7. NOTE: Refer to the illustration for correct drive belt routing. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications Oil Pressure (Minimum at 1,500 rpm with engine warmed up after 10 minutes of idling) ........................................................................... 76 kPa (11 psi) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1551 Engine Oil Pressure: Testing and Inspection Oil Pressure Test 1. Disconnect and remove the oil pressure sensor from the engine. 2. Connect the Engine Oil Pressure Gauge to the oil pressure sender oil galley port. 3. Run the engine until normal operating temperature is reached. 4. Run the engine at the specified rpm and record the gauge reading. 5. The oil pressure should be within specifications. 6. If the pressure is not within specification, check the following possible sources: ^ Insufficient oil ^ Oil leakage ^ Worn or damaged oil pump ^ Oil pump screen cover and tube ^ Excessive main bearing clearance ^ Excessive connecting rod bearing clearance ^ Chain tensioner leak Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube: > 08-2-2 > Feb > 08 > Engine - Oil Leaks From Dipstick Tube/Crank Seals Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube: Customer Interest Engine - Oil Leaks From Dipstick Tube/Crank Seals TSB 08-2-2 02/04/08 3.0L DURATEC ENGINE - OIL LEAK (LOW AMBIENT TEMPERATURE) - DIPSTICK OR CRANKSHAFT SEAL FORD: 2008 Escape MERCURY: 2008 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit engine oil leaking from the dipstick tube or the front or rear crankshaft seals. This condition is likely due to positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) freezing when the ambient temperature is below -30 °C (-20 °F), allowing engine crankcase pressure to build up. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Perform oil leak diagnostics as outlined in Workshop Manual, Section 303-00. With a blacklight, inspect for leaks at the oil dipstick tube and at the front and rear crank seals. 2. If leaks are verified, order and install heated PCV kit. Replace PCV components as directed per the instruction sheet included in the kit. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 080202A 2008 Escape/Mariner 3.0L: 0.8 Hr. Install Heated PCV Kit, Includes Time To Diagnose (Do Not Use With 6007D, 6666A) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 6A666 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube: > 08-2-2 > Feb > 08 > Engine - Oil Leaks From Dipstick Tube/Crank Seals Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Oil Leaks From Dipstick Tube/Crank Seals TSB 08-2-2 02/04/08 3.0L DURATEC ENGINE - OIL LEAK (LOW AMBIENT TEMPERATURE) - DIPSTICK OR CRANKSHAFT SEAL FORD: 2008 Escape MERCURY: 2008 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit engine oil leaking from the dipstick tube or the front or rear crankshaft seals. This condition is likely due to positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) freezing when the ambient temperature is below -30 °C (-20 °F), allowing engine crankcase pressure to build up. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Perform oil leak diagnostics as outlined in Workshop Manual, Section 303-00. With a blacklight, inspect for leaks at the oil dipstick tube and at the front and rear crank seals. 2. If leaks are verified, order and install heated PCV kit. Replace PCV components as directed per the instruction sheet included in the kit. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 080202A 2008 Escape/Mariner 3.0L: 0.8 Hr. Install Heated PCV Kit, Includes Time To Diagnose (Do Not Use With 6007D, 6666A) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 6A666 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1565 Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube: Service and Repair Oil Level Indicator and Tube Material Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil Dip Stick - Dip Stick Tube > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1566 Removal and Installation 1. Detach the upper radiator hose from the 2 retaining clips on the cooling fan shroud. ^ Position the hose aside. 2. Remove the 4 upper radiator support bracket bolts. ^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 3. Remove the oil level indicator. 4. Remove the stud bolt and then remove the oil level indicator tube by guiding it between the radiator support and the cooling fan. ^ Remove and discard the O-ring seal. ^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. NOTE: Install a new O-ring seal and lubricate with clean engine oil. NOTE: Installation of the oil level indicator may require the assistance of a second technician to align the tube with the orifice. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications Engine Oil With Filter ............................................................................................................................................ ............................................................ 5.7L (6.0 Qt) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Engine Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1571 Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications Engine Oil Ford Part Name ....................................................................................................................................... Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Ford Part Number ................................................................... ...................................................................................................................... XO-5W20-QSP Ford Specification ......................................................................................................................................... WSS-M2C930-A with API Certification Mark Note: Use of synthetic or synthetic blend motor oil is not mandatory. Engine oil need only meet the requirements of Ford specification WSS-M2C930-A and the API Certification mark. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Specifications Oil Pan: Specifications Oil Pan Bolts ........................................................................................................................................ ...................................................... 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1575 Oil Pan: Diagrams Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube and Oil Pan Baffle (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1576 Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube and Oil Pan Baffle (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Oil Pan Oil Pan: Service and Repair Oil Pan Oil Pan Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube and Oil Pan Baffle (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Oil Pan > Page 1579 Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube and Oil Pan Baffle (Part 2) Material Removal CAUTION: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign material (including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces) that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan may cause engine failure. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the exhaust Y-pipe. 3. Drain the engine oil and install the drain plug. ^ Tighten to 26 Nm (19 lb-ft). 4. Remove and discard the oil filter. 5. Remove the 2 oil pan-to-transaxle bolts. 6. NOTE: For reference during installation, mark the location of the stud bolts. Remove the 10 bolts, 5 stud bolts and the oil pan. ^ Remove and discard the oil pan gasket. Installation 1. CAUTION: Do not use metal scrapers, wire brushes, power abrasive discs or other abrasive means to clean the sealing surfaces. These tools cause scratches and gouges which make leak paths. Use a plastic scraping tool to remove all traces of the oil pan gasket. ^ Clean all sealing surfaces with metal surface cleaner and install a new oil pan gasket. 2. NOTE: The oil pan must be installed and the bolts tightened within 4 minutes of sealant application. Apply a 10 mm (0.40 in) diameter dot of silicone sealant to the areas indicated. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Oil Pan > Page 1580 3. Position the oil pan and loosely install the bolts and stud bolts. 4. Install the 2 oil pan-to-transaxle bolts. ^ Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 5. Tighten the oil pan-to-engine bolts and stud bolts in the sequence shown to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 6. NOTE: Lubricate the engine oil filter gasket with clean engine oil prior to installing. Install a new oil filter. ^ Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in) and then rotate an additional 180 degrees. 7. Install the exhaust Y-pipe. 8. Fill the engine with clean engine oil. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Oil Pan > Page 1581 Oil Pan: Service and Repair Oil Pan Baffle Oil Pan Baffle Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube and Oil Pan Baffle (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pan, Engine > Component Information > Service and Repair > Oil Pan > Page 1582 Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube and Oil Pan Baffle (Part 2) Removal and Installation CAUTION: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign material, including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan, may cause engine failure. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the oil pump screen and pickup tube. 3. Remove the 7 nuts and the oil pan baffle. ^ To install tighten the oil pan baffle nuts in 2 stages. Stage 1: Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). - Stage 2: Tighten an additional 45 degrees. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations Oil Pressure Sender: Locations View 151-6 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 1586 View 151-8 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 1587 C103 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 1588 Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch Material Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 1589 Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the pin-type retainer, 5 bolts and the RH lower splash shield. ^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 3. NOTE: Lubricate the engine oil filter gasket with clean engine oil prior to installing. Remove the engine oil filter. ^ To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in) and then rotate an additional 180 degrees. 4. Disconnect the engine oil pressure (EOP) switch electrical connector. 5. Remove the EOP switch. ^ To install, tighten to 14 Nm (10 lb-ft). 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Apply Thread Sealant with PTFE to the EOP switch threads. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pick Up/Strainer > Component Information > Diagrams Oil Pick Up/Strainer: Diagrams Engine Lubrication Components - Exploded View Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube and Oil Pan Baffle (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pick Up/Strainer > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1593 Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube and Oil Pan Baffle (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pick Up/Strainer > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1594 Oil Pick Up/Strainer: Service and Repair Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube and Oil Pan Baffle (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pick Up/Strainer > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1595 Oil Pan, Oil Pump Screen and Pickup Tube and Oil Pan Baffle (Part 2) Material Removal CAUTION: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign material, including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan, may cause engine failure. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the oil pan. 3. Remove the bolts, nut and the oil pump screen and pickup tube. ^ Remove and discard the O-ring seal. Installation 1. Install a new O-ring seal on the oil pump screen and pickup tube. ^ Lubricate the O-ring seal with clean engine oil. 2. Install the oil pump screen and pickup tube. 1. Position the oil pump screen and pickup tube. 2. Install the bolts and tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 3. Install the nut and tighten in 2 stages. - Stage 1: Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). - Stage 2: Tighten 45 degrees. 3. Install the oil pan. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pump, Engine > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications Engine Oil Pressure: Specifications Oil Pressure (Minimum at 1,500 rpm with engine warmed up after 10 minutes of idling) ........................................................................... 76 kPa (11 psi) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Pump, Engine > Engine Oil Pressure > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1600 Engine Oil Pressure: Testing and Inspection Oil Pressure Test 1. Disconnect and remove the oil pressure sensor from the engine. 2. Connect the Engine Oil Pressure Gauge to the oil pressure sender oil galley port. 3. Run the engine until normal operating temperature is reached. 4. Run the engine at the specified rpm and record the gauge reading. 5. The oil pressure should be within specifications. 6. If the pressure is not within specification, check the following possible sources: ^ Insufficient oil ^ Oil leakage ^ Worn or damaged oil pump ^ Oil pump screen cover and tube ^ Excessive main bearing clearance ^ Excessive connecting rod bearing clearance ^ Chain tensioner leak Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Engine Lubrication > Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch, Engine > Component Information > Description and Operation Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE (EOT) SENSOR Typical EOT Sensor The EOT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The EOT sensor measures the temperature of the engine oil. The sensor is typically threaded into the engine oil lubrication system. The PCM can use the EOT sensor input to determine the following: - On variable camshaft timing (VCT) applications the EOT input is used to adjust the VCT control gains and logic for camshaft timing. - The PCM can use EOT sensor input in conjunction with other PCM inputs to determine oil degradation. - The PCM can use EOT sensor input to initiate a soft engine shutdown. To prevent engine damage from occurring as a result of high oil temperatures, the PCM has the ability to initiate a soft engine shutdown. Whenever engine RPM exceeds a calibrated level for a certain period of time, the PCM begins reducing power by disabling engine cylinders. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Specifications Intake Manifold: Specifications Lower Intake Manifold Bolts ................................................................................................................ .................................................. 10 Nm (89 lb-in). Upper Intake Manifold Bolts ................................................................................................................ .................................................. 10 Nm (89 lb-in). Throttle body bolts and stud bolt.......................................................................................................... .......................................................10 Nm, 89 lb-in Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Upper Intake Manifold Intake Manifold: Service and Repair Upper Intake Manifold Upper Intake Manifold Upper Intake Manifold Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Upper Intake Manifold > Page 1609 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Upper Intake Manifold > Page 1610 Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the air cleaner outlet pipe. 3. Remove the 2 bolts and the accelerator cable snow shield. 4. Detach the speed control and accelerator cables from the throttle body. 5. Remove the 3 accelerator/speed control cable bracket bolts. ^ Position the cables and brackets aside. 6. Remove the EGR tube fitting from the EGR valve. 7. Detach the transaxle vent tube pin-type retainer from the throttle body. 8. Disconnect the throttle position (TP) sensor electrical connector and detach the wiring retainer. 9. Disconnect the vacuum harness tube fittings from the EGR valve and the EGR vacuum regulator. 10. Disconnect the evaporative emissions (EVAP) tube from the upper intake manifold. 11. Disconnect the idle air control (IAC) valve electrical connector. 12. Disconnect the EGR vacuum regulator electrical connector. 13. Remove the nut from the EGR vacuum regulator stud bolt and detach the wiring retainer. 14. Disconnect the PCV, brake booster and vacuum harness tubes from the upper intake manifold. 15. Detach the 2 main engine control wiring harness electrical connectors from the upper intake manifold. 16. Disconnect and plug the 2 throttle body coolant hoses. 17. Remove the 8 bolts and the upper intake manifold. ^ Remove and discard the gaskets. Installation 1. NOTE: Clean and inspect all sealing surfaces. Install new gaskets. Position the upper intake manifold and install the bolts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Upper Intake Manifold > Page 1611 ^ Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. Connect the 2 throttle body coolant hoses. 3. Attach the 2 main engine control wiring harness electrical connectors to the upper intake manifold. 4. Connect the PCV, brake booster and vacuum harness tubes to the upper intake manifold. 5. Attach the wiring retainer to the EGR vacuum regulator stud bolt and install the nut. ^ Tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 6. Connect the EGR vacuum regulator electrical connector. 7. Connect the IAC valve electrical connector and wiring harness retainer. 8. Connect the EVAP tube to the upper intake manifold. 9. Connect the vacuum harness tube fittings to the EGR valve and the EGR vacuum regulator. 10. Connect the TP sensor electrical connector and attach the wiring retainer. 11. Attach the transaxle vent tube pin-type retainer to the throttle body. 12. Install the EGR tube fitting to the EGR valve. ^ Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 13. Position the accelerator/speed control cables and brackets and install the 3 bolts. ^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 14. Attach the speed control and accelerator cables to the throttle body. 15. Install the accelerator cable snow shield and the 2 bolts. ^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 16. Install the air cleaner outlet pipe. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Upper Intake Manifold > Page 1612 Intake Manifold: Service and Repair Lower Intake Manifold Lower Intake Manifold Lower Intake Manifold (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Intake Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Upper Intake Manifold > Page 1613 Lower Intake Manifold (Part 2) Removal WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. 1. Release the fuel system pressure. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Remove the upper intake manifold. 4. Disconnect the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor electrical connector. 5. Disconnect the fuel supply tube quick connect coupling at the fuel rail. 6. Disconnect the fuel rail pressure and temperature sensor electrical connector and vacuum tube. 7. Disconnect the 6 fuel injector electrical connectors and the 2 wire shield pin-type retainers. 8. Remove the 8 lower intake manifold bolts and the lower intake manifold. ^ Remove and discard the gaskets. Installation 1. NOTE: Clean and inspect all sealing surfaces. Install new gaskets. Position the lower intake manifold and install the bolts. ^ Tighten in the sequence shown to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2. Connect the 6 fuel injector electrical connectors and the 2 wire shield pin-type retainers. 3. Connect the fuel rail pressure and temperature sensor electrical connector and vacuum tube. 4. Connect the fuel supply tube quick connect coupling at the fuel rail. 5. Connect the ECT sensor electrical connector. 6. Install the upper intake manifold. 7. Connect the battery ground cable. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Diagrams Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: Diagrams Lower End Components - Exploded View Flexplate and Rear Seal Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1618 Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: Service and Repair Crankshaft Rear Seal Flexplate and Rear Seal Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1619 Special Tool(s) Material Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the flexplate. 3. Using the special tools, remove and discard the crankshaft rear oil seal. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1620 Installation 1. NOTE: Clean all sealing surfaces with metal surface cleaner. NOTE: Apply clean engine oil to the seal lip and seal bore before installing the seal. Using the special tools, install the crankshaft rear oil seal. 2. Install the flexplate. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Exhaust Manifold Gasket > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Exhaust Manifold Gasket: > 10-24-13 > Dec > 10 > Exhaust System - Excessive Exhaust Noise/Exhaust odors Exhaust Manifold Gasket: Customer Interest Exhaust System - Excessive Exhaust Noise/Exhaust odors TSB 10-24-13 3.0L ENGINE - EXCESSIVE ENGINE/EXHAUST NOISE OR EXHAUST ODOR DUE TO EXHAUST FLANGE LEAK FORD: 2007-2008 Escape MERCURY: 2007-2008 Mariner ISSUE Some 2007-2008 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine may exhibit excessive engine and/or exhaust noise, or exhaust odor due to an exhaust leak at the joint between the catalytic converter manifold flange and cylinder head joint. The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) will not be illuminated, and no related diagnostic trouble codes (DTC) will be present. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE This procedure only applies if no related DTCs are present. 1. Remove affected catalytic converter manifold assembly. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 309-00. 2. Clean both engine and manifold sur[aces. Refer to WSM, Section 303-00 for Exhaust Manifold Cleaning and Inspection procedures. 3. Replace exhaust manifold gasket, exhaust manifold studs and nuts, and reinstall the original catalytic converter manifold. Refer to WSM, Section 309-00. a. It is very important the two stage manifold nut torque sequence is followed. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102413A 2007 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.4 Hrs. DOHC: Replace The Left Exhaust Manifold Gasket, Studs And Nuts Includes Time To Remove And Install Exhaust Manifold, Generator, Intermediate Shaft And Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102413A 2008 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.4 Hrs. DOHC: Replace The Left Exhaust Manifold Gasket, Studs And Nuts Includes Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Exhaust Manifold Gasket > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Exhaust Manifold Gasket: > 10-24-13 > Dec > 10 > Exhaust System - Excessive Exhaust Noise/Exhaust odors > Page 1629 Time To Remove And Install Exhaust Manifold, Generator, Intermediate Shaft, And Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102413B 2008 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.7 Hrs. DOHC: Replace The Right Exhaust Manifold Gasket, Studs And Nuts Includes Time To Remove And Install Exhaust Manifold, Generator, Intermediate Shaft, And Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102413B 2007 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 3.0 Hrs. DOHC: Replace The Right Exhaust Manifold Gasket, Studs And Nuts Includes Time To Remove And Install Exhaust Manifold, Generator, Intermediate Shaft, And Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102413C 2007 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 3.7 Hrs. DOHC: Replace Both Left And Right Exhaust Manifold Gaskets, Studs And Nuts Includes Time To Remove And Install Exhaust Manifold, Generator, Intermediate Shaft, And Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102413C 2008 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 2.5 Hrs. DOHC: Replace Both Left And Right Exhaust Manifold Gaskets, Studs And Nuts Includes Time To Remove And Install Exhaust Manifold, Generator, Intermediate Shaft, And Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5G232 24 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Exhaust Manifold Gasket > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Exhaust Manifold Gasket: > 10-24-13 > Dec > 10 > Exhaust System - Excessive Exhaust Noise/Exhaust odors Exhaust Manifold Gasket: All Technical Service Bulletins Exhaust System - Excessive Exhaust Noise/Exhaust odors TSB 10-24-13 3.0L ENGINE - EXCESSIVE ENGINE/EXHAUST NOISE OR EXHAUST ODOR DUE TO EXHAUST FLANGE LEAK FORD: 2007-2008 Escape MERCURY: 2007-2008 Mariner ISSUE Some 2007-2008 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine may exhibit excessive engine and/or exhaust noise, or exhaust odor due to an exhaust leak at the joint between the catalytic converter manifold flange and cylinder head joint. The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) will not be illuminated, and no related diagnostic trouble codes (DTC) will be present. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE This procedure only applies if no related DTCs are present. 1. Remove affected catalytic converter manifold assembly. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 309-00. 2. Clean both engine and manifold sur[aces. Refer to WSM, Section 303-00 for Exhaust Manifold Cleaning and Inspection procedures. 3. Replace exhaust manifold gasket, exhaust manifold studs and nuts, and reinstall the original catalytic converter manifold. Refer to WSM, Section 309-00. a. It is very important the two stage manifold nut torque sequence is followed. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102413A 2007 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.4 Hrs. DOHC: Replace The Left Exhaust Manifold Gasket, Studs And Nuts Includes Time To Remove And Install Exhaust Manifold, Generator, Intermediate Shaft And Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102413A 2008 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.4 Hrs. DOHC: Replace The Left Exhaust Manifold Gasket, Studs And Nuts Includes Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Exhaust Manifold Gasket > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Exhaust Manifold Gasket: > 10-24-13 > Dec > 10 > Exhaust System - Excessive Exhaust Noise/Exhaust odors > Page 1635 Time To Remove And Install Exhaust Manifold, Generator, Intermediate Shaft, And Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102413B 2008 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.7 Hrs. DOHC: Replace The Right Exhaust Manifold Gasket, Studs And Nuts Includes Time To Remove And Install Exhaust Manifold, Generator, Intermediate Shaft, And Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102413B 2007 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 3.0 Hrs. DOHC: Replace The Right Exhaust Manifold Gasket, Studs And Nuts Includes Time To Remove And Install Exhaust Manifold, Generator, Intermediate Shaft, And Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102413C 2007 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 3.7 Hrs. DOHC: Replace Both Left And Right Exhaust Manifold Gaskets, Studs And Nuts Includes Time To Remove And Install Exhaust Manifold, Generator, Intermediate Shaft, And Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102413C 2008 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 2.5 Hrs. DOHC: Replace Both Left And Right Exhaust Manifold Gaskets, Studs And Nuts Includes Time To Remove And Install Exhaust Manifold, Generator, Intermediate Shaft, And Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5G232 24 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Diagrams Front Crankshaft Seal: Diagrams Lower End Components - Exploded View Crankshaft Pulley and Front Seal Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1639 Front Crankshaft Seal: Service and Repair Crankshaft Front Seal Crankshaft Pulley and Front Seal Special Tool(s) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Seals and Gaskets, Engine > Front Crankshaft Seal > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1640 Material Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the crankshaft pulley. 3. Using the special tool, remove and discard the crankshaft front seal. Installation 1. NOTE: Clean all sealing surfaces with metal surface cleaner. Apply clean engine oil to the seal lip and seal bore before installing the seal. 2. Using the special tools, install a new crankshaft front seal. 3. Install the crankshaft pulley. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations Oil Pressure Sender: Locations View 151-6 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 1645 View 151-8 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 1646 C103 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 1647 Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch Material Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 1648 Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the pin-type retainer, 5 bolts and the RH lower splash shield. ^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 3. NOTE: Lubricate the engine oil filter gasket with clean engine oil prior to installing. Remove the engine oil filter. ^ To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in) and then rotate an additional 180 degrees. 4. Disconnect the engine oil pressure (EOP) switch electrical connector. 5. Remove the EOP switch. ^ To install, tighten to 14 Nm (10 lb-ft). 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Apply Thread Sealant with PTFE to the EOP switch threads. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Sensors and Switches - Engine > Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch, Engine > Component Information > Description and Operation Oil Temperature Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE (EOT) SENSOR Typical EOT Sensor The EOT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The EOT sensor measures the temperature of the engine oil. The sensor is typically threaded into the engine oil lubrication system. The PCM can use the EOT sensor input to determine the following: - On variable camshaft timing (VCT) applications the EOT input is used to adjust the VCT control gains and logic for camshaft timing. - The PCM can use EOT sensor input in conjunction with other PCM inputs to determine oil degradation. - The PCM can use EOT sensor input to initiate a soft engine shutdown. To prevent engine damage from occurring as a result of high oil temperatures, the PCM has the ability to initiate a soft engine shutdown. Whenever engine RPM exceeds a calibrated level for a certain period of time, the PCM begins reducing power by disabling engine cylinders. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Crankshaft Gear/Sprocket > Component Information > Specifications Crankshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications Crankshaft Pulley Bolt First pass ............................................................................................................................................. .................................................. 120 Nm (89 lb-ft). Second pass ........................................................ ..................................................................................................................... Loosen one full turn (360°) Third pass ................................................................................................................................. .............................................................. 50 Nm (37 lb-ft). Final pass .................................................. .............................................................................................................................................. 90 Nm (66 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Chain Tensioner > Component Information > Specifications Timing Chain Tensioner: Specifications Timing Chain Tensioner Bolts ............................................................................................................. .................................................... 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Specifications Timing Cover: Specifications Timing Cover Fasteners ...................................................................................................................... ..................................................... 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1662 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1663 Timing Cover: Service and Repair Engine Front Cover Material Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1664 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1665 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1666 Removal CAUTION: During engine repair procedures, cleanliness is extremely important. Any foreign material (including any material created while cleaning gasket surfaces) that enters the oil passages, coolant passages or the oil pan can cause engine failure. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Release the fuel system pressure. 3. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 4. Remove the crankshaft front seal. 5. Remove the generator bolt and the 2 nuts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1667 6. Remove the stud and position the generator away from the engine. 7. Remove the bolt and the accessory drive belt tensioner. 8. Remove the bolt and the LH accessory drive belt idler pulley. 9. Remove the bolt and the center accessory drive belt idler pulley. 10. Remove the 3 RH accessory drive belt idler pulley and bracket bolts. ^ Detach the wiring harness retainer and remove the idler pulley assembly. 11. Detach the wiring harness retainer, remove the nut and the catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector bracket. 12. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor electrical connector. 13. Disconnect the camshaft position (CMP) sensor electrical connector. 14. Remove the LH and RH valve covers. 15. Remove the engine support insulator. 16. Disconnect the A/C pressure switch electrical connector. 17. Detach the 2 wire harness retainers from the speed control actuator mounting studs. 18. Remove the 3 nuts and position the speed control actuator aside. 19. Remove the 2 oil pan-to-front cover bolts. 20. Remove the 14 bolts, 2 stud bolts and the engine front cover. ^ Remove and discard the gaskets. Installation Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1668 1. CAUTION: Do not use metal scrapers, wire brushes, power abrasive discs or other abrasive means to clean the sealing surfaces. These tools cause scratches and gouges which make leak paths. CAUTION: Do not damage the oil pan gasket while cleaning the sealant from the lower cylinder block-to-oil pan joint. Use a plastic scraping tool to remove all traces of sealant. ^ Clean all sealing surfaces with metal surface cleaner and install new gaskets. 2. NOTE: The engine front cover must be installed and the bolts tightened within 4 minutes of applying sealant. Apply a 6 mm (0.23 in) diameter dot of silicone gasket and sealer to the cylinder block, lower cylinder block, cylinder head and oil pan mating surfaces. 3. Position the engine front cover and install the bolts. Tighten in the sequence shown to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1669 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1670 4. Install the 2 oil pan-to-front cover bolts. ^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 5. Remove the oil pan drain plug and drain the engine oil. ^ Install the plug and tighten to 26 Nm (19 lb-ft). 6. Install the speed control actuator and 3 nuts. ^ Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 7. Attach the 2 wire harness retainers to the speed control actuator mounting studs. 8. Connect the A/C pressure switch electrical connector. 9. Install the engine support insulator. 10. Install the LH and RH valve covers. 11. Connect the CMP electrical connector. 12. Connect the CKP electrical connector. 13. Install the catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector bracket and the nut. ^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). ^ Attach the wiring harness retainer. 14. Position the RH accessory drive belt idler pulley and bracket and attach the wiring harness retainer. ^ Install the 3 bolts and tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 15. Install the center accessory drive belt idler pulley. ^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 16. Install the LH accessory drive belt idler pulley. ^ Tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft). 17. Install the accessory drive belt tensioner and the bolt. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Timing Cover > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1671 ^ Tighten to 45 Nm (33 lb-ft). 18. Position the generator and install the stud. ^ Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 19. Install the generator bolt and 2 nuts. ^ Tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft). 20. Install the crankshaft front seal. 21. Fill the engine with clean engine oil. 22. Connect the battery ground cable. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation VARIABLE CAMSHAFT TIMING (VCT) SYSTEM Overview The VCT enables rotation of the camshaft(s) relative to the crankshaft rotation as a function of engine operating conditions. There are 4 types of VCT systems. - Exhaust phase shifting (EPS) system - the exhaust cam is the active cam being retarded. - Intake phase shifting (IPS) system - the intake cam is the active cam being advanced. - Dual equal phase shifting (DEPS) system - both intake and exhaust cams are phase shifted and equally advanced or retarded. - Dual independent phase shifting (DIPS) system - where both the intake and exhaust cams are shifted independently. All systems have 4 operational modes: idle, part throttle, wide open throttle (WOT), and default mode. At idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the powertrain control module (PCM) determines the phase angle based on air flow, engine oil temperature and engine coolant temperature. At part and wide open throttle the PCM determines the phase angle based on engine RPM, load, and throttle position. VCT systems provide reduced emissions and enhanced engine power, fuel economy and idle quality. IPS systems also have the added benefit of improved torque. In addition, some VCT system applications can eliminate the need for an external exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system. The elimination of the EGR system is accomplished by controlling the overlap time between the intake valve opening and exhaust valve closing. Currently, both the IPS and DEPS systems are used. Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) System VCT System The VCT system consists of an electric hydraulic positioning control solenoid, a camshaft position (CMP) sensor, and a trigger wheel. The CMP trigger wheel has a number of equally spaced teeth equal to the number (n) of cylinders on a bank plus one extra tooth (n+1). Four cylinder and V8 engines use a CMP 4+1 tooth trigger wheel. V6 engines use a CMP 3+1 tooth trigger wheel. The extra tooth placed between the equally spaced teeth represents the CMP signal for that bank. A crankshaft position (CKP) sensor provides the PCM with crankshaft positioning information in 10 degree increments. 1. The PCM receives input signals from the intake air temperature (IAT) sensor, engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor, engine oil temperature (EOT) sensor, CMP, throttle position (TP) sensor, mass air flow (MAF) sensor, and CKP to determine the operating conditions of the engine. At idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the PCM controls the camshaft position based on ECT, EOT, IAT, and MAF. During part and wide open throttle, the camshaft position is determined by engine RPM, load and throttle position. The VCT system does not operate until the engine is at normal operating temperature. 2. The VCT system is enabled by the PCM when the correct conditions are met. 3. The CKP signal is used as a reference for CMP positioning. 4. The VCT solenoid valve is an integral part of the VCT system. The solenoid valve controls the flow of engine oil in the VCT actuator assembly. As the PCM controls the duty cycle of the solenoid valve, oil pressure/flow advances or retards the cam timing. Duty cycles near 0% or 100% represent rapid movement of the camshaft. Retaining a fixed camshaft position is accomplished by dithering (oscillating) the solenoid valve duty cycle. The PCM calculates and determines the desired camshaft position. It continually updates the VCT solenoid duty cycle until the desired position is achieved. A difference between the desired and actual camshaft position represents a position error in the PCM VCT control loop. The PCM Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Timing Components > Variable Valve Timing > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1676 disables the VCT and places the camshaft in a default position if a concern is detected. A related DTC is also set when the concern is detected. 5. When the VCT solenoid is energized, engine oil is allowed to flow to the VCT actuator assembly which advances or retards the camshaft timing. One half of the VCT actuator is coupled to the camshaft and the other half is connected to the timing chain. Oil chambers between the 2 halves couple the camshaft to the timing chain. When the flow of oil is shifted from one side of the chamber to the other, the differential change in oil pressure forces the camshaft to rotate in either an advance or retard position depending on the oil flow. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications Item....................................................................................................................................................... ..............................................................Specification Engine idling......................................................................................................................................... ..........................................................269 kPa (39 psi) Fuel pump output volume per 10 seconds...... .................................................................................................................................................125 cc (4.32 oz) Key on, engine off................................................................................................................. ..........................................................................269 kPa (39 psi) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 1681 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE TEST Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) WARNING: - Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. All vehicles 1. Release the fuel system pressure. Vehicles with 2.3L engine 2. Disconnect the fuel tube-to-fuel rail quick connect coupling. 3. Install the special tool between the fuel tube and the fuel rail. Vehicles with 3.0L engine 4. Remove the air cleaner outlet pipe. 5. Disconnect the fuel tube-to-fuel rail quick connect coupling. 6. NOTE: Use a commercially available fuel test adapter (such as OTC 18527). Install the special tool and fuel test adapter between the fuel tube and the fuel rail. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 1682 7. NOTE: The air cleaner outlet pipe must be installed prior to completing the fuel system pressure test. Install the air cleaner outlet pipe. All vehicles 8. NOTE: The fuel pump (FP) driver module electrical connector that was disconnected to release the fuel system pressure must be reconnected to test the fuel system pressure. Connect the FP driver module electrical connector. 9. NOTE: It may take more than one key cycle to pressurize the fuel system. Cycle the ignition key and wait 3 seconds to pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before starting the engine. 10. NOTE: Upon completion of the fuel system pressure test, open the drain valve on the special tool and release fuel system pressure and drain any residual fuel into a suitable container prior to removing the tool Test the fuel system pressure to make sure it is within the specified range. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications Measured/PID Values Hot Idle ................................................................................................................................................ ........................................................ 705-820 RPM Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair AIR CLEANER INTAKE PIPE Exploded View Removal and Installation 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Remove the bolt and the air cleaner intake pipe. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 3. NOTE: Make sure that the front sponge seal of the intake pipe is seated on the shroud panel. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE RELEASE WARNING: - Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the fuel pump (FP) driver module electrical connector. 3. Start the engine and allow it to idle until it stalls. 4. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately 5 seconds to make sure the fuel injection supply manifold pressure has been released. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 6. When fuel system service is complete, connect the FP driver module electrical connector. 7. NOTE: It may take more than one key cycle to pressurize the fuel system. Cycle the ignition key and wait 3 seconds to pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before starting the engine. 8. Start the vehicle and check the fuel system for leaks. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications Firing Order: Specifications Item....................................................................................................................................................... ..............................................................Specification Firing order........................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................1-4-2-5-3-6 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > General Specifications Spark Plug: Specifications General Specifications Item....................................................................................................................................................... ..............................................................Specification Spark plug gap..................................................................................................................................... ....................................1.32-1.42 mm (0.052-0.056 in) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > General Specifications > Page 1701 Torque Specifications Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1702 Spark Plug: Application and ID Item....................................................................................................................................................... ..............................................................Specification Spark plug............................................................................................................................................ ...................................................................AGSF-32N Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1703 Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection Spark Plug Inspection 1. Inspect the spark plug for a bridged gap. ^ Check for deposit build-up closing the gap between the electrodes. Deposits are caused by oil or carbon fouling. ^ Clean the spark plug. 2. Check for oil fouling. ^ Check for wet, black deposits on the insulator shell bore electrodes, caused by excessive oil entering the combustion chamber through worn rings and pistons, excessive valve-to-guide clearance or worn or loose bearings. ^ Correct the oil leak concern. ^ Install a new spark plug. 3. Inspect for carbon fouling. Look for black, dry, fluffy carbon deposits on the insulator tips, exposed shell surfaces and electrodes, caused by a spark plug with an incorrect heat range, dirty air cleaner, too rich a fuel mixture or excessive idling. ^ Install new spark plugs. 4. Inspect for normal burning. ^ Check for light tan or gray deposits on the firing tip. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1704 5. Inspect for pre-ignition, identified by melted electrodes and a possibly damaged insulator. Metallic deposits on the insulator indicate engine damage. This may be caused by incorrect ignition timing, wrong type of fuel or the unauthorized installation of a Heli-Coil(R) insert in place of the spark plug threads. ^ Install a new spark plug. 6. Inspect for overheating, identified by white or light gray spots and with a bluish-burnt appearance of electrodes. This is caused by engine overheating, wrong type of fuel, loose spark plugs, spark plugs with an incorrect heat range, low fuel pump pressure or incorrect ignition timing. ^ Install a new spark plug. 7. Inspect for fused deposits, identified by melted or spotty deposits resembling bubbles or blisters. These are caused by sudden acceleration. ^ Install new spark plugs. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1705 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1706 Spark Plug: Service and Repair SPARK PLUGS Exploded View Engine Ignition - RH Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1707 Engine Ignition - LH Removal RH side 1. NOTE: The upper intake manifold must be removed to access the RH spark plugs only. Remove the upper intake manifold. Both sides 2. Disconnect the ignition coil electrical connectors. 3. NOTE: When removing the ignition coil-on-plugs, a slight twisting motion will break the seal and ease removal. Remove the bolts and the ignition coils. 4. CAUTION: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spark plugs, or damage can occur to the cylinder head or spark plug. NOTE: Use compressed air to remove any foreign material in the spark plug well before removing the spark plugs. Remove the spark plugs. Installation Both sides 1. Inspect the spark plugs. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1708 2. Adjust the spark plug gap as necessary. 3. CAUTION: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spark plugs, or damage can occur to the cylinder head or spark plug. Install the spark plugs. Tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). 4. NOTE: Apply a small amount of dielectric grease to the inside of the ignition coil boots before attaching to the spark plugs. Install the ignition coils and bolts. Tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1709 5. Connect the ignition coil electrical connectors. RH side 6. Install the upper intake manifold. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Compression Check: Specifications Compression Test - Test Results The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading cylinder is at least 75% of the highest reading. Refer to the Compression Pressure Limit Chart. Compression Pressure Limit Chart Compression Pressure Limit Chart (Part 1) Compression Pressure Limit Chart (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > System Diagnosis > Compression Test Compression Check: Testing and Inspection Compression Test Compression Test - All Vehicles Except Hybrid 1. Make sure the oil in the crankcase is of the correct viscosity and at the correct level and that the battery is correctly charged. Operate the vehicle until the engine is at normal operating temperature. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then remove all the spark plugs. 2. Set the throttle plates in the wide-open position. 3. Install a compression gauge such as the Compression Tester in the No. 1 cylinder. 4. Install an auxiliary starter switch in the starting circuit. With the ignition switch in the OFF position, and using the auxiliary starter switch, crank the engine a minimum of 5 compression strokes and record the highest reading. Note the approximate number of compression strokes necessary to obtain the highest reading. 5. Repeat the test on each cylinder, cranking the engine approximately the same number of compression strokes. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > System Diagnosis > Compression Test > Page 1715 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection Compression Test - Test Results Compression Test - Test Results The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading cylinder is at least 75% of the highest reading. Refer to the Compression Pressure Limit Chart. Compression Pressure Limit Chart Compression Pressure Limit Chart (Part 1) Compression Pressure Limit Chart (Part 2) If one or more cylinders reads low, squirt approximately one tablespoon of engine oil meeting Ford specification on top of the pistons in the low-reading cylinders. Repeat the compression pressure check on these cylinders. Compression Test - Interpreting Compression Readings 1. If compression improves considerably, piston rings are worn or damaged. 2. If compression does not improve, valves are sticking or not seating correctly. 3. If 2 adjacent cylinders indicate low compression pressures and squirting oil on each piston does not increase compression, the head gasket may be leaking between cylinders. Engine oil or coolant in cylinders could result from this condition. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > System Diagnosis > Compression Test > Page 1716 Use the Compression Pressure Limit Chart when checking cylinder compression so that the lowest reading is within 75% of the highest reading. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications Valve Clearance: Specifications Valve Clearance This engine is equipped with hydraulic lash adjusters. No adjustment is required. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications Water Pump: Specifications Coolant Pump Bolts First pass ............................................................................................................................................. ................................................... 10 Nm (89 lb-in). Final pass ............................................................ ....................................................................................................................... Tighten an additional 90° Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1723 Water Pump: Service and Repair Coolant Pump - 3.0L (4V) Special Tool(s) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1724 Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Drain the cooling system. 3. Disconnect the crankcase vent tube and position it aside. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1725 4. Remove the coolant pump belt. 5. Using the special tool, remove the coolant pump drive pulley. 6. Disconnect the heater hose from the coolant pump. 7. Disconnect the coolant pump-to-engine hose and position aside. 8. Remove the 3 bolts from the coolant pump assembly. 9. Reposition the coolant pump-to-thermostat housing hose clamp and remove the coolant pump and hose as an assembly. Installation 1. Connect the coolant pump-to-thermostat housing hose and reposition the clamp. 2. Position the coolant pump assembly and install the 3 bolts. ^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). ^ Tighten the 3 bolts an additional 90 degrees. 3. Connect the coolant pump-to-engine hose and the heater hose. 4. NOTE: Install the coolant pump drive pulley flush with the end of the camshaft. Using the special tool, install the coolant pump drive pulley. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Engine > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1726 5. Install the coolant pump belt. 6. Connect the crankcase vent tube. 7. Fill and bleed the cooling system. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Auxiliary Water Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair Auxiliary Water Pump: Service and Repair AUXILIARY COOLANT FLOW PUMP Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Drain the engine coolant. 3. Remove the LH lower engine splash shield. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Auxiliary Water Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1731 4. Release the clamp and disconnect the auxiliary coolant pump-to-thermostat hose. 5. Release the clamp and disconnect the heater outlet hose. 6. Disconnect the auxiliary coolant flow pump electrical connector. 7. Remove the 2 auxiliary coolant flow pump bolts. - To install, tighten to 4 Nm (35 lb-in). 8. Remove the auxiliary coolant flow pump and rubber bracket assembly. 9. NOTE: Lubricate the coolant hoses with plain water only if needed. Do not use soap or other detergents. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Fill the engine cooling system. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat Bypass Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair Thermostat Bypass Hose: Service and Repair Bypass Tube - 3.0L (4V) Material Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Drain the cooling system. 3. Remove the thermostat housing. 4. Remove the bypass tube-to-thermostat housing hose. 5. Disconnect the engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor electrical connector. 6. Remove the bolt, stud bolt and bypass tube. ^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat Bypass Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1735 7. Remove and inspect the O-ring seals, install new seals if necessary. 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Lubricate the O-ring seals with clean engine coolant. 9. Fill and bleed the cooling system. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Coolant: Capacity Specifications Engine Coolant Capacity Coolant ................................................................................................................................................ ........................................... 10.6 Quarts ( 10.0 L ) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 1740 Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications ENGINE COOLANT AND M/E COOLANT Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant (yellow-colored) Ford P/N .............................................................................................................................................. .................................................................. VC-7-B Ford Specification ................................................................................................................................ ................................................ WSS-M97B51-A1 NOTE: Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Coolant Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair Coolant Reservoir: Service and Repair Degas Bottle Degas Bottle Removal and Installation 1. WARNING: Always allow the engine to cool before opening the cooling system. Do not unscrew the coolant pressure relief cap when the engine is operating or the cooling system is hot. The cooling system is under pressure; steam and hot liquid can come out forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. Release the pressure in the cooling system by slowly turning the pressure relief cap one half turn counterclockwise. When the pressure is released, remove the pressure relief cap. 2. Using hose clamp pliers, clamp the degas bottle-to-radiator hose. 3. Using a suitable suction device, siphon the coolant from the degas bottle. 4. Disconnect the radiator-to-degas bottle hose from the degas bottle. 5. Remove the 2 degas bottle nuts. ^ To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 6. Lift the degas bottle up and disconnect the degas bottle-to-radiator hose. ^ Remove the degas bottle. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 8. Fill the degas bottle. Refer to Cooling System Draining, Filling and Bleeding for the recommended coolant mixture and fill level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Locations > Engine Cooling Fan Motor 1 View 151-1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Locations > Engine Cooling Fan Motor 1 > Page 1749 View 151-1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1752 Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4 "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and relays are identified. Fuse and Relay Numbering and Naming. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Power Distribution Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1753 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information C904 Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1754 disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location Charts. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery set. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing lose clothing. Symbols Symbols (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1755 Symbols (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1756 Symbols (Part 3) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1757 Symbols (Part 4) Symbols (Part 5) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1758 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1759 Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1760 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1761 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. 3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1762 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1763 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1764 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1765 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Connector Views C1074 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 1766 C1077 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1767 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Description and Operation FAN CONTROL The PCM monitors certain parameters (such as engine coolant temperature, vehicle speed, A/C on/off status, A/C pressure) to determine engine cooling fan needs. For variable speed electric fan(s): Edge/MKX, Taurus/Taurus X/Sable, Fusion/Milan/MKZ, Crown Victoria/Grand Marquis, Town Car: FCV Duty Cycle Output From PCM (Negative Duty Cycle) The PCM controls the fan speed and operation using a duty cycle output on the fan control variable (FCV) circuit. The fan controller (located at or integral to the engine cooling fan assembly) receives the FCV command and operates the cooling fan at the speed requested (by varying the power applied to the fan motor). For relay controlled fans: 2.0L Focus (With A/C): PCM FC Output State For Cooling Fan Speeds 2.3L Escape: PCM FC Output State For Cooling Fan Speeds The PCM controls the fan operation through the fan control (FC) (single speed fan applications), low fan control (LFC), medium fan control (MFC), and high fan control (HFC) outputs. Some applications will have the xFC circuit wired-to 2 separate-relays. For 3-speed fans, although the PCM output circuits are called low, medium, and high fan control (FC), cooling fan speed is controlled by a combination of these outputs. Refer to the table. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1768 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Service and Repair Cooling Fan Motor and Shroud Cooling Fan Motor and Shroud (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1769 Cooling Fan Motor and Shroud (Part 2) Removal and Installation All vehicles 1. With vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2.3L vehicles only 2. Drain the cooling system. All vehicles 3. Remove the front bumper cover. 4. Remove the front impact severity sensor. 5. Remove the 2 pin-type retainers. 6. Remove the 4 bolts and the 2 radiator brackets. ^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 7. NOTE: Mark the hood latch position prior to removal of the bolts. Loosen the nut, remove the 2 bolts and position aside the hood latch. ^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 8. Remove the 2 wiring harness retainers from the front bumper bracket. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 1770 9. Remove the center support bolt. ^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2.3L vehicles only 10. Disconnect the cooling fan resistor electrical connector. 11. Disconnect the coolant recovery hose from the radiator and position it aside. 3.0L vehicles only 12. Detach the lower degas bottle hose from the cooling fan motor and shroud. All vehicles 13. Disconnect the cooling fan electrical connectors. 14. Remove the 2 cooling fan bolts and the cooling fan motor and shroud. ^ To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 15. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 2.3L vehicles only 16. Fill and bleed the cooling system. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay > Page 1775 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay > Page 1776 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Cooling Fan High Speed Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay > Page 1779 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Cooling Fan Low Speed Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay > Page 1780 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Cooling Fan Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Resistor > Component Information > Diagrams C1027 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Radiator Cooling Fan Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Radiator Cooling Fan Speed Sensor: Description and Operation FAN SPEED SENSOR (FSS) Cooling Fan Clutch With FSS The FSS is a Hall-effect sensor that measures the cooling fan clutch speed by generating a waveform with a frequency proportional to the fan speed. If the cooling fan clutch is moving at a relatively low speed, the sensor produces a signal with a low frequency. As the cooling fan clutch speed increases, the sensor generates a signal with a higher frequency. The PCM uses the frequency signal generated by the FSS as a feedback for closed loop control of the cooling fan clutch. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Fan Clutch > Component Information > Description and Operation Fan Clutch: Description and Operation COOLING FAN CLUTCH Cooling Fan Clutch With Fan Speed Sensor (FSS) The cooling fan clutch is an electrically actuated viscous clutch that consists of 3 main elements: - a working chamber - a reservoir chamber - a cooling fan clutch actuator valve and a fan speed sensor (FSS) The cooling fan clutch actuator valve controls the fluid flow from the reservoir into the working chamber. Once viscous fluid is in the working chamber, shearing of the fluid results in fan rotation. The cooling fan clutch actuator valve is activated with a pulse width modulated (PWM) output signal from the PCM. By opening and closing the fluid port valve, the PCM can control the cooling fan clutch speed. The cooling fan clutch speed is measured by a Hall-effect sensor and is monitored by the PCM during closed loop operation. The PCM optimizes fan speed based on engine coolant temperature (ECT), engine oil temperature (EOT), transmission fluid temperature (TFT), intake air temperature (IAT), or air conditioning requirements. When an increased demand for fan speed is requested for vehicle cooling, the PCM monitors the fan speed through the Hall-effect sensor. If a fan speed increase is required, the PCM outputs the PWM signal to the fluid port, providing the required fan speed increase. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan > Fan Clutch > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1790 Fan Clutch: Tools and Equipment Fan Clutch Holding Tool AST tool# 8005 Allows the technician to hold the water pump pulleuy in place while loosening the radiator fan. 2009 Suggested user price: $41.20 Assenmacher Specialty Tools 1 800 525 2943 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations View 151-6 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1795 C1064 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1796 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR Typical Thread Type ECT Sensor The ECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The PCM uses the ECT input for fuel control and for cooling fan control. There are 3 types of ECT sensors, threaded, push-in, and twist-lock. The ECT sensor is located in an engine coolant passage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1797 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Drain the cooling system. 2. Disconnect the engine coolant temperature sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the ECT sensor. - Pull upward on the locking tab. - Rotate the sensor counterclockwise and remove. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-9 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1801 C1164 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1802 Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE (CHT) SENSOR Typical CHT Sensor The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with the temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. The CHT sensor is installed in the cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT sensor can provide complete engine temperature information and can be used to infer coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM initiates a fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system concern such as low coolant or coolant loss could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Fan Shroud > Component Information > Service and Repair Fan Shroud: Service and Repair Cooling Fan Motor and Shroud Cooling Fan Motor and Shroud (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Fan Shroud > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1806 Cooling Fan Motor and Shroud (Part 2) Removal and Installation All vehicles 1. With vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2.3L vehicles only 2. Drain the cooling system. All vehicles 3. Remove the front bumper cover. 4. Remove the front impact severity sensor. 5. Remove the 2 pin-type retainers. 6. Remove the 4 bolts and the 2 radiator brackets. ^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 7. NOTE: Mark the hood latch position prior to removal of the bolts. Loosen the nut, remove the 2 bolts and position aside the hood latch. ^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 8. Remove the 2 wiring harness retainers from the front bumper bracket. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Fan Shroud > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1807 9. Remove the center support bolt. ^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 2.3L vehicles only 10. Disconnect the cooling fan resistor electrical connector. 11. Disconnect the coolant recovery hose from the radiator and position it aside. 3.0L vehicles only 12. Detach the lower degas bottle hose from the cooling fan motor and shroud. All vehicles 13. Disconnect the cooling fan electrical connectors. 14. Remove the 2 cooling fan bolts and the cooling fan motor and shroud. ^ To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 15. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 2.3L vehicles only 16. Fill and bleed the cooling system. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Heater Core: Testing and Inspection HEATER CORE 1. NOTE: Testing of returned heater cores reveals that a large percentage of heater cores are good and did not require the installation of a new heater core. If a heater core leak is suspected, the heater core must be tested by following the plugged heater core component test before the heater core pressure test. Carry out a system inspection by checking the heater system thoroughly as follows: Inspect for evidence of coolant leakage at the heater hose to heater core attachments. A coolant leak in the heater hose could follow the heater core tube to the heater core and appear as a leak in the heater core. 2. NOTE: Spring-type clamps are installed as original equipment. Installation and overtightening of non-specified clamps can cause leakage at the heater hose connection and damage the heater core. Check the integrity of the heater hose clamps. Heater Core - Plugged 1. Check to see that the engine coolant is at the correct level. 2. Start the engine and turn on the heater. 3. When the engine coolant reaches operating temperature, check the heater core inlet and outlet hoses to see if they are hot. 4. If the outlet only is not hot: - the heater core may have an air pocket. - the heater core may be plugged. 5. If the inlet only is not hot, the thermostat may not be working correctly. Heater Core - Pressure Test Use the Pressure Test Kit to carry out the pressure test. 1. NOTE: Due to space limitations, a bench test may be necessary for pressure testing. Drain the coolant from the cooling system. 2. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater core. 3. Install a short piece of heater hose, approximately 101 mm (4 in) long on each heater core tube. 4. Fill the heater core and heater hoses with water and install plug BT-7422-B and adapter BT-7422-A from the Pressure Test Kit. Secure the heater hoses, plug and adapter with hose clamps. 5. Attach the pump and gauge assembly from the Pressure Test Kit to the adapter. 6. Close the bleed valve at the base of the gauge. Pump 138 kPa (20 psi) of air pressure into the heater core. 7. Observe the pressure gauge for a minimum of 3 minutes. 8. If the pressure drops, check the heater hose connections to the core tubes for leaks. If the heater hoses do not leak, remove the heater core from the vehicle. 9. Carry out the bench test. Heater Core - Bench Test 1. Remove the heater core from the vehicle. 2. Drain all of the coolant from the heater core. 3. Connect the 101 mm (4 in) test heater hoses with plug and adapter to the core tubes. Then connect the Pressure Test Kit to the adapter. 4. Apply 138 kPa (20 psi) of air pressure to the heater core. Submerge the heater core in water. 5. If a leak is observed, install a new heater core. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1811 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Heater Core > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 1812 Heater Core: Service and Repair HEATER CORE Removal and Installation NOTE: - If a heater core leak is suspected, the heater core must be leak tested before the heater core is removed. - Use only the approved coolant for this vehicle. 1. Remove the heater core and evaporator core housing. 2. Remove the dash panel seal. 3. Remove the heater core bracket screw and the heater core bracket. - To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 4. Remove the heater core. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Service and Repair Radiator: Service and Repair Radiator - 3.0L Radiator - 3.0L Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Radiator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 1816 Removal and Installation 1. With vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Drain the cooling system. 3. Remove the cooling fan motor and shroud. 4. Disconnect the radiator-to-degas bottle hose and upper radiator hose from the radiator. 5. Disconnect the lower degas bottle-to-radiator hose from the radiator. 6. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the radiator. 7. Remove the 2 A/C condenser-to-radiator bolts and position aside the A/C condenser from the radiator. ^ To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 8. Remove the radiator. 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 10. Fill and bleed the cooling system. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay > Page 1822 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay > Page 1823 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Cooling Fan High Speed Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay > Page 1826 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Cooling Fan Low Speed Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Relays and Modules - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Cooling Fan High Speed Relay > Page 1827 Radiator Cooling Fan Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Cooling Fan Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Radiator Cooling Fan Speed Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Radiator Cooling Fan Speed Sensor: Description and Operation FAN SPEED SENSOR (FSS) Cooling Fan Clutch With FSS The FSS is a Hall-effect sensor that measures the cooling fan clutch speed by generating a waveform with a frequency proportional to the fan speed. If the cooling fan clutch is moving at a relatively low speed, the sensor produces a signal with a low frequency. As the cooling fan clutch speed increases, the sensor generates a signal with a higher frequency. The PCM uses the frequency signal generated by the FSS as a feedback for closed loop control of the cooling fan clutch. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations View 151-6 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1836 C1064 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1837 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR Typical Thread Type ECT Sensor The ECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The PCM uses the ECT input for fuel control and for cooling fan control. There are 3 types of ECT sensors, threaded, push-in, and twist-lock. The ECT sensor is located in an engine coolant passage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1838 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Drain the cooling system. 2. Disconnect the engine coolant temperature sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the ECT sensor. - Pull upward on the locking tab. - Rotate the sensor counterclockwise and remove. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-9 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1842 C1164 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Sensors and Switches - Cooling System > Engine - Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1843 Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE (CHT) SENSOR Typical CHT Sensor The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with the temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. The CHT sensor is installed in the cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT sensor can provide complete engine temperature information and can be used to infer coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM initiates a fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system concern such as low coolant or coolant loss could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Specifications Thermostat: Specifications Thermostat Opening Temperatures Starts to open ...................................................................................................................................... ........................................... 84-88° C (183-190° F) Fully open ........................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... 98.9° C (210° F) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1847 Thermostat: Service and Repair Thermostat - 3.0L (4V) Material Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Drain the cooling system. 3. Remove the air cleaner outlet pipe. 4. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the thermostat housing. 5. NOTE: To install, lubricate the thermostat housing O-ring seal with clean engine coolant. Remove the 3 bolts, thermostat housing cover, O-ring seal and thermostat. ^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Clean and inspect the O-ring seal. Install a new seal if necessary. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1848 7. Fill and bleed the cooling system. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Thermostat Housing, Engine Cooling > Component Information > Service and Repair Thermostat Housing: Service and Repair Thermostat Housing - 3.0L (4V) Thermostat Housing - 3.0L (4V) Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Drain the cooling system. 3. Remove the air cleaner outlet pipe. 4. Disconnect the upper radiator hose from the thermostat housing. 5. Disconnect the lower radiator hose from the thermostat housing. 6. Disconnect the heater hose from the thermostat housing. 7. Reposition the 2 thermostat housing-to-engine clamps. ^ Remove the thermostat housing. 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 9. Fill and bleed the cooling system. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications Water Pump: Specifications Coolant Pump Bolts First pass ............................................................................................................................................. ................................................... 10 Nm (89 lb-in). Final pass ............................................................ ....................................................................................................................... Tighten an additional 90° Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1855 Water Pump: Service and Repair Coolant Pump - 3.0L (4V) Special Tool(s) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1856 Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Drain the cooling system. 3. Disconnect the crankcase vent tube and position it aside. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1857 4. Remove the coolant pump belt. 5. Using the special tool, remove the coolant pump drive pulley. 6. Disconnect the heater hose from the coolant pump. 7. Disconnect the coolant pump-to-engine hose and position aside. 8. Remove the 3 bolts from the coolant pump assembly. 9. Reposition the coolant pump-to-thermostat housing hose clamp and remove the coolant pump and hose as an assembly. Installation 1. Connect the coolant pump-to-thermostat housing hose and reposition the clamp. 2. Position the coolant pump assembly and install the 3 bolts. ^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). ^ Tighten the 3 bolts an additional 90 degrees. 3. Connect the coolant pump-to-engine hose and the heater hose. 4. NOTE: Install the coolant pump drive pulley flush with the end of the camshaft. Using the special tool, install the coolant pump drive pulley. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Cooling System > Water Pump > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1858 5. Install the coolant pump belt. 6. Connect the crankcase vent tube. 7. Fill and bleed the cooling system. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Specifications Catalytic Converter: Specifications Exhaust Manifold Studs ....................................................................................................................... ...................................................... 11 Nm (8 lb-ft). Discard the studs. Exhaust Manifold Nuts Discard the nuts. First pass ............................................................................................................................................. .................................................... 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). Final pass ............................................................ .................................................................................................................................... 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1863 Catalytic Converter: Description and Operation CATALYST AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS Overview V-Engines In-Line Engines The catalytic converter and exhaust systems work together to control the release of harmful engine exhaust emissions into the atmosphere. The engine exhaust gas consists mainly of nitrogen (N), carbon dioxide (CO2) and water vapor (H2O). However, it also contains carbon monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen (NOx), hydrogen (H), and various unburned hydrocarbons (HCs). The major air pollutants of CO, NOx,and HCs, and their emission into the atmosphere must be controlled. The exhaust system generally consists of an exhaust manifold, front exhaust pipe, front heated oxygen sensor (HO2S), rear exhaust pipe, catalyst HO2S, a muffler, and an exhaust tailpipe. The catalytic converter is typically installed between the front and rear exhaust pipes. On some vehicle applications, more than one catalyst is used between the front and rear exhaust pipes. Catalytic converter efficiency is monitored by the on board diagnostic (OBD) system strategy in the powertrain control module (PCM). For information on the OBD catalyst monitor, refer to the description for the Catalyst Efficiency Monitor. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Monitors, Trips, Drive Cycles and Readiness Codes/Catalyst Efficiency Monitor For most vehicles, only 2 HO2Ss are used in an exhaust stream. The front sensors (HO2S11/HO2S21) before the catalyst are used for primary fuel control while the ones after the catalyst (HO2S12/HO2S22) are used to monitor catalyst efficiency. However, some partial zero emission vehicles (PZEV) use 3 HO2Ss for each engine bank. The stream 1 sensors (HO2S11/HO2S21) located before the catalyst are used for primary fuel control, the stream 2 sensors (HO2S12/HO2S22) are used to monitor the light-off catalyst, and the stream 3 sensors (HO2S13/HO2S23) located after the catalyst are used for long term fuel trim control to optimize catalyst efficiency (fore aft oxygen sensor control). Catalytic Converter A catalyst is a material that remains unchanged when it initiates and increases the speed of a chemical reaction. A catalyst also enables a chemical reaction to occur at a lower temperature. The concentration of exhaust gas products released to the atmosphere must be controlled. The catalytic Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1864 converter assists in this task. It contains a catalyst in the form of a specially treated ceramic honeycomb structure saturated with catalytically active precious metals. As the exhaust gases come in contact with the catalyst, they are changed into mostly harmless products. The catalyst initiates and speeds up heat producing chemical reactions of the exhaust gas components so they are used up as much as possible. Light Off Catalyst As the catalyst heats up, converter efficiency rises rapidly. The point at which conversion efficiency exceeds 50% is called catalyst light off. For most catalysts this point occurs at 246°C to 302°C (475°F to 575°F). A fast light catalyst is a 3-way catalyst (TWC) that is located as close to the exhaust manifold as possible. Because the light off catalyst is located close to the exhaust manifold it lights off faster and reduces emissions more quickly than the catalyst located under the body. Once the catalyst lights off, the catalyst quickly reaches the maximum conversion efficiency for that catalyst. Three-Way Catalyst (TWC) Conversion Efficiency TWC Conversion Efficiency Chart A TWC requires a stoichiometric fuel ratio, 14.7 pounds of air to 1 pound of fuel (14.7:1), for high conversion efficiency. In order to achieve these high efficiencies, the air/fuel ratio must be tightly controlled with a narrow window of stoichiometry. Deviations outside of this window greatly decrease the conversion efficiency. For example a rich mixture decreases the HC and CO conversion efficiency while a lean mixture decreases the NOx conversion efficiency. Exhaust System Typical Bank 1 Catalyst 2 HO2S Configuration Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Specifications > Page 1865 Typical Bank 1 Catalyst 3 HO2S Configuration The purpose of the exhaust system is to convey engine emissions from the exhaust manifold to the atmosphere. Engine exhaust emissions are directed from the engine exhaust manifold to the catalytic converter through the front exhaust pipe. A HO2S is mounted on the front exhaust pipe before the catalyst. The catalytic converter reduces the concentration of CO, unburned HCs, and NOx in the exhaust emissions to an acceptable level. The reduced exhaust emissions are directed from the catalytic converter past another HO2S mounted in the rear exhaust pipe and then on into the muffler. Finally, the exhaust emissions are directed to the atmosphere through an exhaust tailpipe. On some PZEV, there is a total of 3 HO2S in the exhaust stream. One near the exhaust manifold (stream 1), one in the middle of the light-off catalyst (stream 2), and the third (stream 3) is mounted after the light-off catalyst. Underbody Catalyst The underbody catalyst is located after the light off catalyst. The underbody catalyst may be in line with the light off catalyst, or the underbody catalyst may be common to 2 light off catalysts, forming a Y pipe configuration. For an exact configuration of the catalyst and exhaust system for a specific vehicle, refer to Exhaust System for the exhaust system-exploded view. Three-Way Catalytic (TWC) Converter The TWC converter contains either platinum (Pt) and rhodium (Rh) or palladium (Pd) and rhodium (Rh). The TWC converter catalyzes the oxidation reactions of unburned HCs and CO and the reduction reaction of NOx. The 3-way conversion can be best accomplished by always operating the engine air fuel/ratio at or close to stoichiometry. Exhaust Manifold Runners The exhaust manifold runners collect exhaust gases from engine cylinders. The number of exhaust manifolds and exhaust manifold runners depends on the engine configuration and number of cylinders. Exhaust Pipes Exhaust pipes are usually treated during manufacturing with an anti-corrosive coating agent to increase the life of the product. The pipes serve as guides for the flow of exhaust gases from the engine exhaust manifold through the catalytic converter and the muffler. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) The HO2Ss provide the PCM with information related to the oxygen content of the exhaust gas. Muffler Mufflers are usually treated during manufacturing with an anti-corrosive coating agent to increase the life of the product. The muffler reduces the level of noise produced by the engine, and also reduces the noise produced by exhaust gases as they travel from the catalytic converter to the atmosphere. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Catalytic Converter Catalytic Converter Removal and Installation CAUTION: Do not use oil or grease-based lubricants on the insulators. They may cause deterioration of the rubber. CAUTION: Oil or grease-based lubricants on the insulators may cause the exhaust hanger insulator to separate from the exhaust hanger bracket during vehicle operation. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove and discard the 2 exhaust catalytic converter nuts. ^ To install, tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft). 3. Remove and discard the U-bolt clamp assembly from the muffler. ^ To install, tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft). 4. Remove and discard the 2 resonator nuts. ^ To install, tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft). 5. Remove and discard the catalytic converter exhaust hanger. 6. Remove the exhaust catalytic converter and the muffler from the vehicle as an assembly. ^ Discard the catalytic converter gasket. 7. Separate the converter from the muffler. 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Install new gaskets and nuts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter > Page 1868 Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Catalytic Converter - LH Manifold Catalytic Converter - 3.0L LH Manifold Special Tool(s) Material Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter > Page 1869 Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the 5 bolts and the passenger side splash shield. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter > Page 1870 3. Disconnect the LH heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) and the LH catalyst monitor sensor electrical connectors. 4. Using the special tool, remove the H02S. 5. CAUTION: Do not allow the exhaust Y-pipe to hang from the flexible end. Support the exhaust Y-pipe or damage to the exhaust system may occur. Remove and discard the 4 exhaust Y-pipe nuts and position the exhaust Y-pipe aside. ^ Discard the gasket. 6. Remove and discard the 6 LH catalytic converter manifold nuts. 7. Remove the LH catalytic converter from the vehicle. ^ Discard the LH catalytic converter manifold gasket. 8. Remove and discard the 6 LH catalytic converter manifold studs. 9. Clean and inspect the LH catalytic converter manifold. Installation 1. Install the 6 new LH catalytic converter manifold studs. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft). 2. Position a new LH catalytic converter manifold gasket. 3. CAUTION: Failure to tighten the catalytic converter nuts to specification before installing the converter bracket bolts will cause the converter to develop an exhaust leak. CAUTION: Failure to tighten the catalytic converter nuts to specification a second time will cause the converter to develop an exhaust leak. NOTE: Make sure to tighten the nuts in the sequence in 2 stages. Position the LH catalytic converter and tighten the 6 exhaust manifold nuts in 2 stages in the sequence shown. ^ Stage 1: Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). ^ Stage 2: Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter > Page 1871 4. Position the exhaust Y-pipe gasket. 5. Position the exhaust Y-pipe and install the 4 new exhaust Y-pipe nuts. ^ Tighten the nuts to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft). 6. NOTE: Make sure to apply anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the HO2S before installation Using the special tool, install the HO2S. ^ Tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft). 7. Install the passenger side splash shield and the 5 bolts. 8. Connect the LH HO2S and catalyst monitor sensor electrical connectors. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter > Page 1872 Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Catalytic Converter - RH Manifold Catalytic Converter - 3.0L RH Manifold Catalytic Converter - 3.0L RH Manifold Removal 1. Remove the exhaust Y-pipe. 2. Disconnect the RH heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) electrical connector. 3. Disconnect the EGR tube nut from the RH catalytic converter. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter > Page 1873 4. Remove and discard the 6 RH catalytic converter manifold nuts and remove the converter. ^ Discard the RH catalytic converter manifold gasket. 5. Remove and discard the 6 RH catalytic converter studs. 6. Clean and inspect the RH catalytic converter manifold. Installation 1. Install the 6 new RH catalytic converter manifold studs. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft). 2. Position a new RH catalytic converter manifold gasket. 3. CAUTION: Failure to tighten the catalytic converter nuts to specification before installing the converter bracket bolts will cause the converter to develop an exhaust leak. CAUTION: Failure to tighten the catalytic converter nuts to specification a second time will cause the converter to develop an exhaust leak. NOTE: Make sure to tighten the nuts in the sequence in 2 stages. Position the RH catalytic converter and tighten the 6 exhaust manifold nuts in 2 stages in the sequence shown. ^ Stage 1: Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). ^ Stage 2: Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 4. Connect the EGR tube nut to the RH catalytic converter. ^ Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 5. Connect the HO2S electrical connector. 6. Install the exhaust Y-pipe. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Exhaust Manifold: > 10-24-13 > Dec > 10 > Exhaust System - Excessive Exhaust Noise/Exhaust odors Exhaust Manifold: Customer Interest Exhaust System - Excessive Exhaust Noise/Exhaust odors TSB 10-24-13 3.0L ENGINE - EXCESSIVE ENGINE/EXHAUST NOISE OR EXHAUST ODOR DUE TO EXHAUST FLANGE LEAK FORD: 2007-2008 Escape MERCURY: 2007-2008 Mariner ISSUE Some 2007-2008 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine may exhibit excessive engine and/or exhaust noise, or exhaust odor due to an exhaust leak at the joint between the catalytic converter manifold flange and cylinder head joint. The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) will not be illuminated, and no related diagnostic trouble codes (DTC) will be present. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE This procedure only applies if no related DTCs are present. 1. Remove affected catalytic converter manifold assembly. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 309-00. 2. Clean both engine and manifold sur[aces. Refer to WSM, Section 303-00 for Exhaust Manifold Cleaning and Inspection procedures. 3. Replace exhaust manifold gasket, exhaust manifold studs and nuts, and reinstall the original catalytic converter manifold. Refer to WSM, Section 309-00. a. It is very important the two stage manifold nut torque sequence is followed. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102413A 2007 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.4 Hrs. DOHC: Replace The Left Exhaust Manifold Gasket, Studs And Nuts Includes Time To Remove And Install Exhaust Manifold, Generator, Intermediate Shaft And Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102413A 2008 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.4 Hrs. DOHC: Replace The Left Exhaust Manifold Gasket, Studs And Nuts Includes Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Exhaust Manifold: > 10-24-13 > Dec > 10 > Exhaust System - Excessive Exhaust Noise/Exhaust odors > Page 1882 Time To Remove And Install Exhaust Manifold, Generator, Intermediate Shaft, And Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102413B 2008 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.7 Hrs. DOHC: Replace The Right Exhaust Manifold Gasket, Studs And Nuts Includes Time To Remove And Install Exhaust Manifold, Generator, Intermediate Shaft, And Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102413B 2007 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 3.0 Hrs. DOHC: Replace The Right Exhaust Manifold Gasket, Studs And Nuts Includes Time To Remove And Install Exhaust Manifold, Generator, Intermediate Shaft, And Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102413C 2007 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 3.7 Hrs. DOHC: Replace Both Left And Right Exhaust Manifold Gaskets, Studs And Nuts Includes Time To Remove And Install Exhaust Manifold, Generator, Intermediate Shaft, And Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102413C 2008 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 2.5 Hrs. DOHC: Replace Both Left And Right Exhaust Manifold Gaskets, Studs And Nuts Includes Time To Remove And Install Exhaust Manifold, Generator, Intermediate Shaft, And Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5G232 24 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Exhaust Manifold: > 10-24-13 > Dec > 10 > Exhaust System - Excessive Exhaust Noise/Exhaust odors Exhaust Manifold: All Technical Service Bulletins Exhaust System - Excessive Exhaust Noise/Exhaust odors TSB 10-24-13 3.0L ENGINE - EXCESSIVE ENGINE/EXHAUST NOISE OR EXHAUST ODOR DUE TO EXHAUST FLANGE LEAK FORD: 2007-2008 Escape MERCURY: 2007-2008 Mariner ISSUE Some 2007-2008 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine may exhibit excessive engine and/or exhaust noise, or exhaust odor due to an exhaust leak at the joint between the catalytic converter manifold flange and cylinder head joint. The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) will not be illuminated, and no related diagnostic trouble codes (DTC) will be present. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE This procedure only applies if no related DTCs are present. 1. Remove affected catalytic converter manifold assembly. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 309-00. 2. Clean both engine and manifold sur[aces. Refer to WSM, Section 303-00 for Exhaust Manifold Cleaning and Inspection procedures. 3. Replace exhaust manifold gasket, exhaust manifold studs and nuts, and reinstall the original catalytic converter manifold. Refer to WSM, Section 309-00. a. It is very important the two stage manifold nut torque sequence is followed. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102413A 2007 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.4 Hrs. DOHC: Replace The Left Exhaust Manifold Gasket, Studs And Nuts Includes Time To Remove And Install Exhaust Manifold, Generator, Intermediate Shaft And Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102413A 2008 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.4 Hrs. DOHC: Replace The Left Exhaust Manifold Gasket, Studs And Nuts Includes Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Exhaust Manifold: > 10-24-13 > Dec > 10 > Exhaust System - Excessive Exhaust Noise/Exhaust odors > Page 1888 Time To Remove And Install Exhaust Manifold, Generator, Intermediate Shaft, And Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102413B 2008 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.7 Hrs. DOHC: Replace The Right Exhaust Manifold Gasket, Studs And Nuts Includes Time To Remove And Install Exhaust Manifold, Generator, Intermediate Shaft, And Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102413B 2007 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 3.0 Hrs. DOHC: Replace The Right Exhaust Manifold Gasket, Studs And Nuts Includes Time To Remove And Install Exhaust Manifold, Generator, Intermediate Shaft, And Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102413C 2007 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 3.7 Hrs. DOHC: Replace Both Left And Right Exhaust Manifold Gaskets, Studs And Nuts Includes Time To Remove And Install Exhaust Manifold, Generator, Intermediate Shaft, And Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102413C 2008 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 2.5 Hrs. DOHC: Replace Both Left And Right Exhaust Manifold Gaskets, Studs And Nuts Includes Time To Remove And Install Exhaust Manifold, Generator, Intermediate Shaft, And Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5G232 24 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1889 Exhaust Manifold: Specifications Exhaust Manifold Studs ....................................................................................................................... ...................................................... 11 Nm (8 lb-ft). Discard the studs. Exhaust Manifold Nuts Discard the nuts. First pass ............................................................................................................................................. .................................................... 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). Final pass ............................................................ .................................................................................................................................... 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 1890 Exhaust Manifold: Testing and Inspection Exhaust Manifold Cleaning and Inspection Special Tool(s) 1. Clean the exhaust manifold using a suitable solvent. Use a plastic scraping tool to clean the gasket sealing surfaces. 2. NOTE: New exhaust manifold gaskets, studs, nuts and/or bolts must be installed when an exhaust manifold is serviced. NOTE: Use a straightedge that is calibrated by the manufacturer to be flat within 0.005 mm (0.0002 inch) per running foot of length, such as Snap-On GA438A or equivalent. For example, if the straightedge is 61 cm (24 inch) long, the machined edge must be flat within 0.010 mm (0.0004 inch) from end to end. Using the precision straight edge and a feeler gauge, check the exhaust manifold sealing surface for warpage. If the warpage is greater than 0.76 mm (0.0299 inch), install a new exhaust manifold. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - LH Manifold Exhaust Manifold: Service and Repair Catalytic Converter - LH Manifold Catalytic Converter - 3.0L LH Manifold Special Tool(s) Material Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - LH Manifold > Page 1893 Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the 5 bolts and the passenger side splash shield. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - LH Manifold > Page 1894 3. Disconnect the LH heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) and the LH catalyst monitor sensor electrical connectors. 4. Using the special tool, remove the H02S. 5. CAUTION: Do not allow the exhaust Y-pipe to hang from the flexible end. Support the exhaust Y-pipe or damage to the exhaust system may occur. Remove and discard the 4 exhaust Y-pipe nuts and position the exhaust Y-pipe aside. ^ Discard the gasket. 6. Remove and discard the 6 LH catalytic converter manifold nuts. 7. Remove the LH catalytic converter from the vehicle. ^ Discard the LH catalytic converter manifold gasket. 8. Remove and discard the 6 LH catalytic converter manifold studs. 9. Clean and inspect the LH catalytic converter manifold. Installation 1. Install the 6 new LH catalytic converter manifold studs. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft). 2. Position a new LH catalytic converter manifold gasket. 3. CAUTION: Failure to tighten the catalytic converter nuts to specification before installing the converter bracket bolts will cause the converter to develop an exhaust leak. CAUTION: Failure to tighten the catalytic converter nuts to specification a second time will cause the converter to develop an exhaust leak. NOTE: Make sure to tighten the nuts in the sequence in 2 stages. Position the LH catalytic converter and tighten the 6 exhaust manifold nuts in 2 stages in the sequence shown. ^ Stage 1: Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). ^ Stage 2: Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - LH Manifold > Page 1895 4. Position the exhaust Y-pipe gasket. 5. Position the exhaust Y-pipe and install the 4 new exhaust Y-pipe nuts. ^ Tighten the nuts to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft). 6. NOTE: Make sure to apply anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the HO2S before installation Using the special tool, install the HO2S. ^ Tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft). 7. Install the passenger side splash shield and the 5 bolts. 8. Connect the LH HO2S and catalyst monitor sensor electrical connectors. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - LH Manifold > Page 1896 Exhaust Manifold: Service and Repair Catalytic Converter - RH Manifold Catalytic Converter - 3.0L RH Manifold Catalytic Converter - 3.0L RH Manifold Removal 1. Remove the exhaust Y-pipe. 2. Disconnect the RH heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) electrical connector. 3. Disconnect the EGR tube nut from the RH catalytic converter. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Manifold > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter - LH Manifold > Page 1897 4. Remove and discard the 6 RH catalytic converter manifold nuts and remove the converter. ^ Discard the RH catalytic converter manifold gasket. 5. Remove and discard the 6 RH catalytic converter studs. 6. Clean and inspect the RH catalytic converter manifold. Installation 1. Install the 6 new RH catalytic converter manifold studs. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft). 2. Position a new RH catalytic converter manifold gasket. 3. CAUTION: Failure to tighten the catalytic converter nuts to specification before installing the converter bracket bolts will cause the converter to develop an exhaust leak. CAUTION: Failure to tighten the catalytic converter nuts to specification a second time will cause the converter to develop an exhaust leak. NOTE: Make sure to tighten the nuts in the sequence in 2 stages. Position the RH catalytic converter and tighten the 6 exhaust manifold nuts in 2 stages in the sequence shown. ^ Stage 1: Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). ^ Stage 2: Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 4. Connect the EGR tube nut to the RH catalytic converter. ^ Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 5. Connect the HO2S electrical connector. 6. Install the exhaust Y-pipe. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust Flexible Pipe Exhaust Pipe: Service and Repair Exhaust Flexible Pipe Exhaust Flexible Pipe Exhaust Flexible Pipe Removal and Installation CAUTION: Do not use oil or grease-based lubricants on the insulators. They may cause deterioration of the rubber. CAUTION: Oil or grease-based lubricants on the insulators may cause the exhaust hanger insulator to separate from the exhaust hanger bracket during vehicle operation. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove and discard the 2 exhaust catalytic converter nuts. ^ To install, tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft). 3. Remove and discard the 3 exhaust flexible pipe nuts. ^ To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 4. Remove and discard the exhaust hanger and remove the exhaust flexible pipe. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Install new gaskets and nuts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust Flexible Pipe > Page 1902 Exhaust Pipe: Service and Repair Exhaust Y-Pipe Exhaust Y-Pipe - 3.0L Exhaust Y-Pipe - 3.0L Removal and Installation CAUTION: Do not use oil or grease-based lubricants on the insulators. They may cause deterioration of the rubber. CAUTION: Oil or grease-based lubricants on the insulators may cause the exhaust hanger insulator to separate from the exhaust hanger bracket during vehicle operation. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the RH catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector. ^ Detach the 2 wiring harness retainers. 3. CAUTION: Do not allow the exhaust Y-pipe to hang from the flexible end. Support the exhaust Y-pipe or damage to the exhaust system Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Pipe > Component Information > Service and Repair > Exhaust Flexible Pipe > Page 1903 may occur. Remove and discard the 2 exhaust catalytic converter nuts. ^ To install, tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft). 4. Remove and discard the exhaust hanger from the Y-pipe. 5. Remove and discard the 4 exhaust Y-pipe nuts and remove the Y-pipe. ^ To install, tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft). 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Install new exhaust Y-pipe gaskets and nuts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Muffler > Component Information > Service and Repair Muffler: Service and Repair Muffler Removal and Installation CAUTION: Do not use oil or grease-based lubricants on the insulators. They may cause deterioration of the rubber. CAUTION: Oil or grease-based lubricants on the insulators may cause the exhaust hanger insulator to separate from the exhaust hanger bracket during vehicle operation. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove and discard the 2 exhaust catalytic converter nuts. ^ To install, tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft). 3. Remove and discard the U-bolt clamp assembly from the muffler. ^ To install, tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft). 4. Remove and discard the 2 resonator nuts. ^ To install, tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft). 5. Remove and discard the catalytic converter exhaust hanger. 6. Remove the exhaust catalytic converter and the muffler from the vehicle as an assembly. ^ Discard the catalytic converter gasket. 7. Separate the muffler from the catalytic converter. 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Install new gaskets and nuts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Exhaust Resonator > Component Information > Service and Repair Exhaust Resonator: Service and Repair Resonator Removal and Installation CAUTION: Do not use oil or grease-based lubricants on the insulators. They may cause deterioration of the rubber. CAUTION: Oil or grease-based lubricants on the insulators may cause the exhaust hanger insulator to separate from the exhaust hanger bracket during vehicle operation. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove and discard the 2 resonator nuts. ^ To install, tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft). 3. Remove and discard the resonator exhaust hanger and remove the resonator. ^ Discard the gasket. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Install a new resonator gasket and nuts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Seals and Gaskets, Exhaust > Exhaust Manifold Gasket > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Exhaust Manifold Gasket: > 10-24-13 > Dec > 10 > Exhaust System - Excessive Exhaust Noise/Exhaust odors Exhaust Manifold Gasket: All Technical Service Bulletins Exhaust System - Excessive Exhaust Noise/Exhaust odors TSB 10-24-13 3.0L ENGINE - EXCESSIVE ENGINE/EXHAUST NOISE OR EXHAUST ODOR DUE TO EXHAUST FLANGE LEAK FORD: 2007-2008 Escape MERCURY: 2007-2008 Mariner ISSUE Some 2007-2008 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine may exhibit excessive engine and/or exhaust noise, or exhaust odor due to an exhaust leak at the joint between the catalytic converter manifold flange and cylinder head joint. The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) will not be illuminated, and no related diagnostic trouble codes (DTC) will be present. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE This procedure only applies if no related DTCs are present. 1. Remove affected catalytic converter manifold assembly. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 309-00. 2. Clean both engine and manifold sur[aces. Refer to WSM, Section 303-00 for Exhaust Manifold Cleaning and Inspection procedures. 3. Replace exhaust manifold gasket, exhaust manifold studs and nuts, and reinstall the original catalytic converter manifold. Refer to WSM, Section 309-00. a. It is very important the two stage manifold nut torque sequence is followed. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102413A 2007 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.4 Hrs. DOHC: Replace The Left Exhaust Manifold Gasket, Studs And Nuts Includes Time To Remove And Install Exhaust Manifold, Generator, Intermediate Shaft And Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102413A 2008 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.4 Hrs. DOHC: Replace The Left Exhaust Manifold Gasket, Studs And Nuts Includes Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Seals and Gaskets, Exhaust > Exhaust Manifold Gasket > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Exhaust Manifold Gasket: > 10-24-13 > Dec > 10 > Exhaust System - Excessive Exhaust Noise/Exhaust odors > Page 1919 Time To Remove And Install Exhaust Manifold, Generator, Intermediate Shaft, And Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102413B 2008 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.7 Hrs. DOHC: Replace The Right Exhaust Manifold Gasket, Studs And Nuts Includes Time To Remove And Install Exhaust Manifold, Generator, Intermediate Shaft, And Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102413B 2007 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 3.0 Hrs. DOHC: Replace The Right Exhaust Manifold Gasket, Studs And Nuts Includes Time To Remove And Install Exhaust Manifold, Generator, Intermediate Shaft, And Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102413C 2007 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 3.7 Hrs. DOHC: Replace Both Left And Right Exhaust Manifold Gaskets, Studs And Nuts Includes Time To Remove And Install Exhaust Manifold, Generator, Intermediate Shaft, And Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102413C 2008 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 2.5 Hrs. DOHC: Replace Both Left And Right Exhaust Manifold Gaskets, Studs And Nuts Includes Time To Remove And Install Exhaust Manifold, Generator, Intermediate Shaft, And Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5G232 24 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Seals and Gaskets, Exhaust > Exhaust Manifold Gasket > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Exhaust Manifold Gasket: > 10-24-13 > Dec > 10 > Exhaust System - Excessive Exhaust Noise/Exhaust odors Exhaust Manifold Gasket: Customer Interest Exhaust System - Excessive Exhaust Noise/Exhaust odors TSB 10-24-13 3.0L ENGINE - EXCESSIVE ENGINE/EXHAUST NOISE OR EXHAUST ODOR DUE TO EXHAUST FLANGE LEAK FORD: 2007-2008 Escape MERCURY: 2007-2008 Mariner ISSUE Some 2007-2008 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine may exhibit excessive engine and/or exhaust noise, or exhaust odor due to an exhaust leak at the joint between the catalytic converter manifold flange and cylinder head joint. The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) will not be illuminated, and no related diagnostic trouble codes (DTC) will be present. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE This procedure only applies if no related DTCs are present. 1. Remove affected catalytic converter manifold assembly. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 309-00. 2. Clean both engine and manifold sur[aces. Refer to WSM, Section 303-00 for Exhaust Manifold Cleaning and Inspection procedures. 3. Replace exhaust manifold gasket, exhaust manifold studs and nuts, and reinstall the original catalytic converter manifold. Refer to WSM, Section 309-00. a. It is very important the two stage manifold nut torque sequence is followed. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102413A 2007 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.4 Hrs. DOHC: Replace The Left Exhaust Manifold Gasket, Studs And Nuts Includes Time To Remove And Install Exhaust Manifold, Generator, Intermediate Shaft And Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102413A 2008 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.4 Hrs. DOHC: Replace The Left Exhaust Manifold Gasket, Studs And Nuts Includes Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Engine, Cooling and Exhaust > Exhaust System > Seals and Gaskets, Exhaust > Exhaust Manifold Gasket > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Exhaust Manifold Gasket: > 10-24-13 > Dec > 10 > Exhaust System - Excessive Exhaust Noise/Exhaust odors > Page 1925 Time To Remove And Install Exhaust Manifold, Generator, Intermediate Shaft, And Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102413B 2008 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 1.7 Hrs. DOHC: Replace The Right Exhaust Manifold Gasket, Studs And Nuts Includes Time To Remove And Install Exhaust Manifold, Generator, Intermediate Shaft, And Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102413B 2007 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 3.0 Hrs. DOHC: Replace The Right Exhaust Manifold Gasket, Studs And Nuts Includes Time To Remove And Install Exhaust Manifold, Generator, Intermediate Shaft, And Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102413C 2007 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 3.7 Hrs. DOHC: Replace Both Left And Right Exhaust Manifold Gaskets, Studs And Nuts Includes Time To Remove And Install Exhaust Manifold, Generator, Intermediate Shaft, And Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102413C 2008 Escape, Mariner 3.0L 2.5 Hrs. DOHC: Replace Both Left And Right Exhaust Manifold Gaskets, Studs And Nuts Includes Time To Remove And Install Exhaust Manifold, Generator, Intermediate Shaft, And Check DTCs (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5G232 24 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Control Module: Description and Operation TORQUE BASED ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL (ETC) Overview The torque based ETC is a hardware and software strategy that delivers an engine output torque (via throttle angle) based on driver demand (pedal position). It uses an electronic throttle body, the powertrain control module (PCM), and an accelerator pedal assembly to control the throttle opening and engine torque. Torque based ETC enables aggressive automatic transmission shift schedules (earlier upshifts and later downshifts). This is possible by adjusting the throttle angle to achieve the same wheel torque during shifts, and by calculating this desired torque, the system prevents engine lugging (low RPM and low manifold vacuum) while still delivering the performance and torque requested by the driver. It also enables many fuel economy/emission improvement technologies such as variable camshaft timing (VCT) (deliver same torque during transitions). Torque based ETC also results in less intrusive vehicle and engine speed limiting, along with smoother traction control. Other benefits of ETC are: eliminate cruise control actuators - eliminate idle air control (IAC) valve - better airflow range - packaging (no cable) - more responsive powertrain at altitude and improved shift quality The ETC system illuminates a powertrain malfunction indicator (wrench) on the instrument cluster when a concern is present. Concerns are accompanied by diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and may also illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) The ETB has the following characteristics: - The throttle actuator control (TAC) motor is a DC motor controlled by the PCM (requires 2-wires). - There are 2 designs: parallel and in-line. The parallel design has the motor under the bore parallel to the plate shaft. The motor housing is integrated into the main housing. The in-line design has a separate motor housing. - An internal spring is used in both designs to return the throttle plate to a default position. The default position is typically a throttle angle of 7 to 8 degrees from the hard stop angle. - The closed throttle plate hard stop is used to prevent the throttle from binding in the bore (approximately 0.75 degree). This hard stop setting is not adjustable and is set to result in less airflow than the minimum engine airflow required at idle. - The required idle airflow is provided by the plate angle in the throttle body assembly. This plate angle controls idle, idle quality, and eliminates the need for an IAC valve. - There is 1 reference voltage and 1 signal return circuit between the PCM and the ETB. The reference voltage circuit and the signal return circuit is shared with the reference voltage circuits and signal return circuits used by the APP sensor. There are also 2 TP signal circuits for redundancy. The redundant TP signals are required for increased monitoring reasons. The first TP signal (TP1) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the second signal (TP2) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). The TP2 signal reaches a limit of approximately 4.5 volts at approximately 45 degrees of throttle angle. Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Depending on the application either a 2-track or 3-track APP sensor is used. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) System Strategy ETC System With A 3-Track APP Sensor Failure Mode And Effects Management (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1932 ETC System With A 3-Track APP Sensor Failure Mode And Effects Management (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1933 ETC System With A 2-Track APP Sensor Failure Mode And Effects Management Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 1934 The torque based ETC strategy was developed to improve fuel economy and to accommodate variable camshaft timing (VCT). This is possible by not coupling the throttle angle to the driver pedal position. Uncoupling the throttle angle (produce engine torque) from the pedal position (driver demand) allows the powertrain control strategy to optimize fuel control and transmission shift schedules while delivering the requested wheel torque. The ETC monitor system is distributed across 2 processors within the PCM: the main powertrain control processor unit (CPU) and a separate monitoring processor. The primary monitoring function is carried out by the independent plausibility check (IPC) software, which resides on the main processor. It is responsible for determining the driver-demanded torque and comparing it to an estimate of the actual torque delivered. If the generated torque exceeds driver demand by a specified amount, appropriate corrective action is taken. APP and TP Sensor Inputs Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Check Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Check Electronic Throttle Actuator Control (TAC) Output Electronic TAC Operation Check Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations Engine Control Module: Locations View 151-4 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 1938 View 151-5 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 1939 View 151-6 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 1940 View 151-9 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 1941 Engine Control Module: Diagrams C175B (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 1942 C175B (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 1943 C175E (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 1944 C175E (Part 2) C175E (Part 3) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 1945 C175T (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 1946 C175T (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Engine Control Module: Procedures FLASH ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY (EEPROM) Description The EEPROM is contained in an integrated circuit internal to the powertrain control module (PCM). The EEPROM contains the vehicle strategy including calibration information specific to the vehicle, and is capable of being programmed or flashed repeatedly. As part of the calibration there is an area referred to as the vehicle identification (VID) block. The VID block is programmed when installing a new PCM as described under Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM. Failure to carry out this procedure may generate DTCs PI635 or P1639. The VID block in an existing PCM can also be tailored to accommodate various hardware or parameter changes made to the vehicle since production. Failure to carry out this procedure properly may generate DTC P1635, Tire/Axle Ratio out of Acceptable Range. An incorrect tire/axle ratio is one of the main causes for DTC P1639. This is described under Making Changes to the VID Block and also under Making Changes to the PCM Calibration. The VID block contains many items used by the strategy for a variety of functions. Some of these items include the vehicle identification number (VIN), octane adjust, fuel octane, fuel type, vehicle speed limit, tire size, axle ratio, the presence of speed control, and 4-wheel drive electronic shift-on-the-fly (ESOF) versus manual shift-on-the-fly (MSOF). Only items applicable to the vehicle hardware and supported by the VID block is displayed on the scan tool. When changing items in the VID block, the strategy places range limits on certain items such as tire and axle ratio. The number of times the VID block may be reconfigured is limited. When this limit is reached, the scan tool displays a message indicating the need to flash the PCM again to reset the VID block. Programming can be carried out by a local Ford dealer or any non-Ford facility. Refer to the scan tool manufacturer's instruction manual for details. Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM A new PCM contains the latest strategy and calibration level for a particular vehicle. However, the VID block is blank and needs programming. There are 2 procedures available. The first is an automatic data transfer from the old PCM to the new PCM, and the second is manual data entry into the new PCM. Automatic data transfer is carried out if the old PCM is capable of communicating. This is done by using a scan tool to retrieve data from the old PCM before removing it from the vehicle. The stored data can then be downloaded to the new PCM after it has been installed. Carry out manual data entry if the old module is damaged or incapable of communicating. Remove and install a new PCM. Using a compatible scan tool, select and carry out the module/parameter programming, referring to the scan tool manufacturer's instruction manual. Make certain that all parameters are included. Failure to properly program tire size in revolutions per mile, (rev/mile equals 63,360 divided by the tire circumference in inches), axle ratio, 4x4/4x2, and/or MSOF/ESOF may result in DTCs P1635 and P1639. You may be instructed to contact the As-Built Data Center for the information needed to manually update the VID block with the scan tool. Contact the center only if the old PCM cannot be used or the data is corrupt. For Ford and Lincoln Mercury technicians, contact your National Hotline or the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website for As-Built data listed under the Service Publications Index. Non-Ford technicians use the Motorcraft(R) website at www.motorcraft.com. From the Motorcraft(R) homepage, use the search function to find the Module Programming or As-Built Data. For Ford and Lincoln Mercury technicians, check the Programmable Module Installation link on the PTS website for quick Programmable Module data information by vehicle. Making Changes to the VID Block A PCM which is programmed may require changes to be made to certain VID information to accommodate the vehicle hardware. Refer to Module Reprogramming on the scan tool. Making Changes to the PCM Calibration At certain times, the entire EEPROM needs to be completely reprogrammed. This is due to changes made to the strategy or calibration after production, or the need to reset the VID block because it has reached its limit. Refer to Module Reprogramming on the scan tool. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 1949 Engine Control Module: Removal and Replacement POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) Removal 1. NOTE: Any PCM replacement will require that ALL customer keys are available to be programmed at the time of installation. PCM replacement DOES NOT require new keys. Retrieve the module configuration. Carry out the module configuration retrieval steps of the Programmable Module Installation procedure. 2. Remove the 2 PCM stud bolt nuts and position the wiring harness and the manifold absolute pressure sensor aside. 3. Disconnect the 3 PCM electrical connectors. 4. Remove the 2 stud bolts and the PCM. Installation 1. Install the PCM and the 2 stud bolts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 2. Connect the 3 PCM electrical connectors. 3. Position the manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor and the wiring harness and install the 2 PCM stud bolt nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 4. Restore the module configuration. Carry out the module configuration restore steps of the Programmable Module Installation procedure. 5. Reprogram the passive anti-theft system (PATS). Carry out the Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1953 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations View 151-27 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 1958 C4033 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 1962 Fuel Pump Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Powertrain Management > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1966 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR The APP sensor is an input to the powertrain control module (PCM) and is used to determine the amount of torque requested by the operator. Depending on the application either a 2-track or 3-track APP sensor is used. 2-Track APP Sensor 2-Track APP Sensor There are 2 pedal position signals in the sensor. Both signals, APP1 and APP2, have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage), but are offset and increase at different rates. The 2 pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other input is used. There are 2 reference voltage circuits, 2 signal return circuits, and 2 signal circuits (a total of 6 circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. The reference voltage circuits and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage circuit and signal return circuit used by the electronic throttle body (ETB) throttle position sensor. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. 3-Track APP Sensor Typical 3-Track APP Sensor There are 3 pedal position signals in the sensor. Signal 1, APP1, has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and signals 2 and 3, APP2 and APP3, both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation APP1 is used as the indication of pedal position by the strategy. The 3 pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other inputs are used. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. There are 2 reference voltage circuits, 2 signal return circuits, and 3 signal circuits (a total of 7 circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. The reference voltage circuits and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage circuit and signal return circuit used by the electronic throttle body (ETB) throttle position sensor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations View 151-4 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1975 View 151-5 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1976 C128 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1977 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot And Cold Wire (and IAT Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1978 Typical Drop-in Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F) above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the mass air flow. The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC), shift and torque converter clutch scheduling. The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner assembly. Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology with an integrated intake air temperature (IAT) sensor. The hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced as an assembly. Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1979 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the 2 screws and the MAF sensor. - To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations View 151-7 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1983 View 151-8 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1984 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams C180 C1180 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1985 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR Typical Synchronizer Hall-Effect CMP Sensor Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor The CMP sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston number 1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the PCM and used for synchronizing the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. Coil on plug (COP) ignition applications use the CMP signal to select the correct ignition coil to fire. Vehicles with 2 CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). They use the second sensor to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2 as an input to the PCM. There are 2 types of CMP sensors: the 3-pin connector Hall-effect type sensor and the 2-pin connector variable reluctance type sensor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1986 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the camshaft position sensor (CMP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolt and the CMP. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). - Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary. 3. NOTE: Lubricate the CMP O-ring seal with clean engine oil. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation Clutch Switch: Description and Operation CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION (CPP) SWITCH Typical Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch The CPP switch is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch pedal position. The PCM provides a low current voltage on the CPP circuit. When the CPP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low through the SIG RTN circuit. The CPP input to the PCM is used to detect a reduction in engine load. The PCM uses the load information for mass air flow and fuel calculations. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations View 151-6 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1993 C1064 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1994 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR Typical Thread Type ECT Sensor The ECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The PCM uses the ECT input for fuel control and for cooling fan control. There are 3 types of ECT sensors, threaded, push-in, and twist-lock. The ECT sensor is located in an engine coolant passage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 1995 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Drain the cooling system. 2. Disconnect the engine coolant temperature sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the ECT sensor. - Pull upward on the locking tab. - Rotate the sensor counterclockwise and remove. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations View 151-7 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 1999 View 151-9 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2000 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams C101 C1120 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2001 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR Typical Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor The CKP sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM. The pulse wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L 10-cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the pulse wheel, the CKP sensor signal indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP sensor is also able to identify piston travel in order to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the crankshaft relative to a fixed reference for the CKP sensor configuration. The PCM also uses the CKP signal to determine if a misfire has occurred by measuring rapid decelerations between teeth. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2002 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the 5 bolts and the RH splash shield. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 3. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor electrical connector. 4. Remove the bolt and the CKP. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). - Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary. 5. NOTE: Lubricate the CKP O-ring seal with clean engine oil. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-9 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2006 C1164 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2007 Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE (CHT) SENSOR Typical CHT Sensor The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with the temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. The CHT sensor is installed in the cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT sensor can provide complete engine temperature information and can be used to infer coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM initiates a fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system concern such as low coolant or coolant loss could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation FUEL LEVEL INPUT (FLI) The FLI is a communications network message. Most vehicle applications use a potentiometer type FLI sensor connected to a float in the FP module to determine fuel level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2011 Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair FUEL PUMP MODULE Exploded View Part 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2012 Part 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2013 Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2014 Removal and Installation WARNING: - Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. - Remove the fuel filler cap slowly. The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2015 sound, wait until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may spray out. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. 1. Release the fuel system pressure. 2. Release the fuel tank filler cap and position aside. 3. Insert the special tool into the fuel tank filler pipe until it opens the fuel tank level shutoff valve located at the inlet of the fuel tank. 4. NOTE: Due to the internal design of the fuel tank components, slow fuel drainage may occur. Using the special tools, drain as much fuel as possible from the fuel tank and filler pipe, lowering the fuel level below the fuel pump (FP) mounting flange. 5. Remove the 4 screws and the FP module access cover. 6. NOTE: Clean the FP module connection, couplings, mounting flange and the immediate surrounding area of any dirt or foreign material. Disconnect the FP module electrical connector. 7. NOTE: Place absorbent toweling in the immediate surrounding area in case of fuel spills. Disconnect the fuel supply tube and fuel vapor recirculation tube-to-FP module quick connect couplings. 8. CAUTION: The fuel pump (FP) module must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the float arm and the filter. NOTE: Carefully remove the FP module lock ring and verify that enough fuel has been drained to avoid spillage. - Drain any residual in the FP module into a suitable container. Using a suitable FP module lock ring remover, rotate the lock ring counterclockwise and remove the FP module. 9. NOTE: Inspect the surfaces of the FP module flange and fuel tank seal contact surfaces. Do not polish or adjust the seal contact area of the FP module flange or fuel tank. Install a new FP module or fuel tank if the seal contact area is bent, scratched or corroded. Remove and discard the FP module O-ring seal. 10. NOTE: Apply clean engine oil to the FP module O-ring seal. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-27 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2019 C435 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2020 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation FUEL TANK PRESSURE (FTP) SENSOR Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor In-Line Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor The FTP sensor or in-line FTP sensor is used to measure the fuel tank pressure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations View 151-4 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2024 View 151-5 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2025 C128 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2026 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Typical Stand-Alone/Non-Integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensors Typical Integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Incorporated Into A Drop-in Or Flange-type MAF Sensor The IAT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The IAT provides air temperature information to the PCM. The PCM uses the air temperature information as a correction factor in the calculation of Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2027 fuel, spark, and air flow. The IAT sensor provides a quicker temperature change response time than the ECT or CHT sensor. Currently there are 2 design types of IAT sensors used, a stand-alone/non-integrated type and a integrated type. Both types function the same, however the integrated type is incorporated into the mass air flow (MAF) sensor instead of being a stand alone sensor. Supercharged vehicles use 2 IAT sensors. Both sensors are thermistor type devices and operate as described above. One is located before the supercharger at the air cleaner for standard OBD/cold weather input, while a second sensor (IAT2) is located after the supercharger in the intake manifold. The IAT2 sensor located after the supercharger provides air temperature information to the PCM to control spark and to help determine charge air cooler (CAC) efficiency. Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot And Cold Wire (and IAT Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2028 Typical Drop-in Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F) above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the mass air flow. The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC), shift and torque converter clutch scheduling. The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner assembly. Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology with an integrated intake air temperature (IAT) sensor. The hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced as an assembly. Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-8 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2032 C109 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2033 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Knock Sensor (KS) Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS) The KS is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark timing. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations View 151-6 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2037 View 151-8 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2038 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Diagrams C1087 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2039 C1140 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2040 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR Typical Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor The MAP sensor measures intake manifold absolute pressure. The PCM uses information from the MAP sensor to measure how much exhaust gas is introduced into the intake manifold. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM: Description and Operation ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE (EOT) SENSOR Typical EOT Sensor The EOT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The EOT sensor measures the temperature of the engine oil. The sensor is typically threaded into the engine oil lubrication system. The PCM can use the EOT sensor input to determine the following: - On variable camshaft timing (VCT) applications the EOT input is used to adjust the VCT control gains and logic for camshaft timing. - The PCM can use EOT sensor input in conjunction with other PCM inputs to determine oil degradation. - The PCM can use EOT sensor input to initiate a soft engine shutdown. To prevent engine damage from occurring as a result of high oil temperatures, the PCM has the ability to initiate a soft engine shutdown. Whenever engine RPM exceeds a calibrated level for a certain period of time, the PCM begins reducing power by disabling engine cylinders. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 View 151-7 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 2048 View 151-9 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 2049 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #12 View 151-7 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 2050 View 151-9 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 2051 View 151-10 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 2052 View 151-10 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 C141 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 2055 C142 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 2056 C171 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 2057 C172 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2058 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) The HO2S detects the presence of oxygen in the exhaust and produces a variable voltage according to the amount of oxygen detected. A high concentration of oxygen (lean air/fuel ratio) in the exhaust produces a voltage signal less than 0.4 volt. A low concentration of oxygen (rich air/fuel ratio) produces a voltage signal greater than 0.6 volt. The HO2S provides feedback to the PCM indicating air/fuel ratio in order to achieve a near stoichiometric air/fuel ratio of 14.7:1 during closed loop engine operation. The HO2S generates a voltage between 0.0 and 1.1 volts. Embedded with the sensing element is the HO2S heater. The heating element heats the sensor to a temperature of 800°C (1,472°F). At approximately 300°C (572°F) the engine can enter closed loop operation. The VPWR circuit supplies voltage to the heater. The PCM turns the heater on by providing the ground when the correct conditions occur. The heater allows the engine to enter closed loop operation sooner. The use of this heater requires the HO2S heater control to be duty cycled, to prevent damage to the heater. Universal HO2S The universal HO2S, sometimes referred to as a wideband oxygen sensor, uses the typical HO2S combined with a current controller in the PCM to infer an air/fuel ratio relative to the stoichiometric air/fuel ratio. This is accomplished by balancing the amount of oxygen ions pumped in or out of a measurement chamber within the sensor. The typical HO2S within the universal HO2S is used to detect the oxygen content of the exhaust gas in the measurement chamber. The oxygen content inside the measurement chamber is maintained at the stoichiometric air/fuel ratio by pumping oxygen ions in and out of the measurement chamber. As the exhaust gasses get richer or leaner, the amount of oxygen that must be pumped in or out to maintain a stoichiometric air/fuel ratio in the measurement chamber varies in proportion to the air/fuel ratio. The amount of current required to pump the oxygen ions in or out of the measurement chamber is used to measure the air/fuel ratio. The measured air/fuel ratio is actually the output from the current controller in the PCM and not a signal that comes directly from the sensor. The universal HO2S also uses a self-contained reference chamber to make sure an oxygen differential is always present. The oxygen for the reference chamber is supplied by pumping small amounts of oxygen ions from the measurement chamber into the reference chamber. The universal HO2S does not need access to outside air. Part to part variance is compensated for by placing a resistor in the connector. This resistor is used to trim the current measured by the current controller in the PCM. Embedded with the sensing element is the universal H02S heater. The heater allows the engine to enter closed loop operation sooner. The heating element heats the sensor to a temperature of 780°C (1,436°F). The VPWR circuit supplies voltage to the heater. The PCM controls the heater on and off by providing the ground to maintain the sensor at the correct temperature for maximum accuracy. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) Exploded View Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the 7 bolts (5 shown) and the LH splash shield. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 2061 3. Disconnect the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) electrical connector. 4. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in removal. Using the special tool, remove the HO2S. - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 5. NOTE: Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the HO2S. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 2062 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Catalyst Monitor Sensor CATALYST MONITOR SENSOR Exploded View Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the 7 bolts (5 shown) and the LH splash shield. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 2063 3. Disconnect the catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector and detach the wiring retainer(s). 4. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in removal. Using the special tool, remove the catalyst monitor sensor. - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 5. NOTE: Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the catalyst monitor sensor. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor The PSP sensor monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP sensor voltage input to the PCM changes as the hydraulic pressure changes. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the PCM to adjust the transmission electronic pressure control (EPC) pressure during increased engine load, for example, during parking maneuvers. Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The PSP switch monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP switch is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic pressure increases. The PCM provides a low current voltage on the PSP circuit. When the PSP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low through the SIG RTN circuit. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust the transmission electronic pressure control (EPC) pressure during increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations View 151-6 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams > Differential Pressure EGR Vacuum Regulator C1083 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams > Differential Pressure EGR Vacuum Regulator > Page 2072 C1068 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2073 Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor receives this signal through 2 hoses referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor housing for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback. Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2074 The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is identical in operation as the larger plastic differential pressure feedback EGR sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the side of the sensor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2075 Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Service and Repair DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SENSOR Exploded View Part 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2076 Part 2 Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor electrical connector and detach the wiring harness retainer. 2. Carefully detach the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor from the EGR valve tube. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Throttle Position Sensor: Locations View 151-6 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2080 View 151-8 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2081 Throttle Position Sensor: Diagrams C189 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2082 C1189 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2083 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor The ETB throttle position sensor has 2 signal circuits in the sensor for redundancy. The redundant ETB throttle position signals are required for increased monitoring. The first ETB throttle position sensor signal (TP1) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the second signal (TP2) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). The 2 ETB throttle position sensor signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. There is 1 reference voltage circuit and 1 signal return circuit for the sensor. The reference voltage circuit and the signal return circuit is shared with the reference voltage circuits and signal return circuits used by the APP sensor. Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Typical TP Sensor The TP sensor is a rotary potentiometer sensor that provides a signal to the PCM that is linearly proportional to the throttle plate/shaft position. The sensor housing has a 3-blade electrical connector that may be gold plated. The gold plating increases the corrosion resistance on the terminals and increases the connector durability. The TP sensor is mounted on the throttle body. As the TP sensor is rotated by the throttle shaft, 4 operating conditions are determined by the PCM from the TP. The operating conditions are: closed throttle (includes idle or deceleration) - part throttle (includes cruise or moderate acceleration) - wide open throttle (includes maximum acceleration or de-choke on crank) - throttle angle rate Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2084 Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the throttle position (TP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the 2 screws and the TP sensor. - To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations View 151-10 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 2088 View 151-11 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 2089 C167 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 2090 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Adjustment Special Tool(s) 1. Remove the battery and tray. 2. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position. Loosen the transmission range (TR) sensor bolts. 3. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft). 4. Install the battery and tray. 5. Check for correct operation. The engine should start only in PARK or NEUTRAL. The reverse lamps should illuminate in the REVERSE position. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 2091 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Special Tool(s) Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the battery and tray. 3. Remove the transmission range (TR) sensor. 1 Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector. 2 Remove the TR sensor retaining bolts. 3 Remove the TR sensor. Installation 1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position. Install the TR sensor and loosely install the bolts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 2092 2. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft). 3. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 4. Install the battery and tray. 5. Check the correct operation. The engine should start only in PARK or NEUTRAL. The reverse lamps should illuminate in the REVERSE position. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-12 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2096 C1088 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2097 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor The OSS sensor provides the PCM with information about the rotational speed of an output shaft. The PCM uses the information to control and diagnose powertrain behavior. In some applications, the sensor is also used as the source of vehicle speed. The sensor may be physically located in different places on the vehicle, depending upon the specific application. The design of each speed sensor is unique and depends on which powertrain control feature uses the information that is generated. Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Typical Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) The VSS is a variable reluctance or Hall-effect sensor that generates a waveform with a frequency that is proportional to the speed of the vehicle. If the vehicle is moving at a relatively low velocity, the sensor produces a signal with a low frequency. As the vehicle velocity increases, the sensor generates a signal with a higher frequency. The PCM uses the frequency signal generated by the VSS (and other inputs) to control such parameters as fuel injection, ignition control, transmission/transaxle shift scheduling, and torque converter clutch scheduling. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations View 151-6 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams > Differential Pressure EGR Vacuum Regulator C1083 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams > Differential Pressure EGR Vacuum Regulator > Page 2104 C1068 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2105 Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor receives this signal through 2 hoses referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor housing for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback. Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2106 The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is identical in operation as the larger plastic differential pressure feedback EGR sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the side of the sensor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2107 Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Service and Repair DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SENSOR Exploded View Part 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2108 Part 2 Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor electrical connector and detach the wiring harness retainer. 2. Carefully detach the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor from the EGR valve tube. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR The APP sensor is an input to the powertrain control module (PCM) and is used to determine the amount of torque requested by the operator. Depending on the application either a 2-track or 3-track APP sensor is used. 2-Track APP Sensor 2-Track APP Sensor There are 2 pedal position signals in the sensor. Both signals, APP1 and APP2, have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage), but are offset and increase at different rates. The 2 pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other input is used. There are 2 reference voltage circuits, 2 signal return circuits, and 2 signal circuits (a total of 6 circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. The reference voltage circuits and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage circuit and signal return circuit used by the electronic throttle body (ETB) throttle position sensor. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. 3-Track APP Sensor Typical 3-Track APP Sensor There are 3 pedal position signals in the sensor. Signal 1, APP1, has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and signals 2 and 3, APP2 and APP3, both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation APP1 is used as the indication of pedal position by the strategy. The 3 pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other inputs are used. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. There are 2 reference voltage circuits, 2 signal return circuits, and 3 signal circuits (a total of 7 circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. The reference voltage circuits and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage circuit and signal return circuit used by the electronic throttle body (ETB) throttle position sensor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations View 151-4 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2116 View 151-5 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2117 C128 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2118 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot And Cold Wire (and IAT Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2119 Typical Drop-in Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F) above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the mass air flow. The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC), shift and torque converter clutch scheduling. The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner assembly. Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology with an integrated intake air temperature (IAT) sensor. The hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced as an assembly. Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2120 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the 2 screws and the MAF sensor. - To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations View 151-6 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2124 View 151-8 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2125 C173 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2126 Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation FUEL RAIL PRESSURE TEMPERATURE (FRPT) SENSOR Typical Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor The FRPT sensor measures the pressure and temperature of the fuel in the fuel rail and sends these signals to the PCM. The sensor uses the intake manifold vacuum as a reference to determine the pressure difference between the fuel rail and the intake manifold. The relationship between fuel pressure and fuel temperature is used to determine the possible presence of fuel vapor in the fuel rail. The temperature sensing portion of the FRPT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Both the pressure and temperature signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The speed of the fuel pump sustains fuel rail pressure which preserves fuel in its liquid state. The dynamic range of the fuel injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the injector pulse width to decrease. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2127 Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair FUEL RAIL PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE SENSOR Removal and Installation WARNING: - Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. 1. Release the fuel system pressure. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Disconnect the fuel rail pressure and temperature sensor electrical connector and vacuum tube. 4. Remove the 2 bolts and the fuel rail pressure and temperature sensor. - To install, tighten to 4 Nm (35 lb-in). - Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary. 5. NOTE: Lubricate the fuel rail pressure and temperature sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations Fuel Temperature Sensor: Locations View 151-6 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2131 View 151-8 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2132 C173 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2133 Fuel Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation FUEL RAIL PRESSURE TEMPERATURE (FRPT) SENSOR Typical Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor The FRPT sensor measures the pressure and temperature of the fuel in the fuel rail and sends these signals to the PCM. The sensor uses the intake manifold vacuum as a reference to determine the pressure difference between the fuel rail and the intake manifold. The relationship between fuel pressure and fuel temperature is used to determine the possible presence of fuel vapor in the fuel rail. The temperature sensing portion of the FRPT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Both the pressure and temperature signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The speed of the fuel pump sustains fuel rail pressure which preserves fuel in its liquid state. The dynamic range of the fuel injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the injector pulse width to decrease. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2134 Fuel Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair FUEL RAIL PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE SENSOR Removal and Installation WARNING: - Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. 1. Release the fuel system pressure. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Disconnect the fuel rail pressure and temperature sensor electrical connector and vacuum tube. 4. Remove the 2 bolts and the fuel rail pressure and temperature sensor. - To install, tighten to 4 Nm (35 lb-in). - Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary. 5. NOTE: Lubricate the fuel rail pressure and temperature sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-23 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2138 C392 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2139 Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Description and Operation INERTIA FUEL SHUTOFF (IFS) SWITCH Typical Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch The IFS switch is used in conjunction with the electric fuel pump. The purpose of the IFS switch is to shutoff the fuel pump if a collision occurs. It consists of a steel ball held in place by a magnet. When a sharp impact occurs, the ball breaks loose from the magnet, rolls up a conical ramp and strikes a target plate which opens the electrical contacts of the switch and shuts off the electric fuel pump. Once the switch is open, it must be manually reset before restarting the vehicle. Refer to the Owner's Literature, Roadside Emergencies for the location of the IFS switch. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2140 Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Service and Repair INERTIA FUEL SHUTOFF (IFS) SWITCH Removal and Installation 1. Remove the RH lower A-pillar trim panel. 2. Disconnect the inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch electrical connector. 3. Remove the 2 bolts and the IFS switch. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Throttle Position Sensor: Locations View 151-6 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2144 View 151-8 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2145 Throttle Position Sensor: Diagrams C189 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2146 C1189 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2147 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor The ETB throttle position sensor has 2 signal circuits in the sensor for redundancy. The redundant ETB throttle position signals are required for increased monitoring. The first ETB throttle position sensor signal (TP1) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the second signal (TP2) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). The 2 ETB throttle position sensor signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. There is 1 reference voltage circuit and 1 signal return circuit for the sensor. The reference voltage circuit and the signal return circuit is shared with the reference voltage circuits and signal return circuits used by the APP sensor. Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Typical TP Sensor The TP sensor is a rotary potentiometer sensor that provides a signal to the PCM that is linearly proportional to the throttle plate/shaft position. The sensor housing has a 3-blade electrical connector that may be gold plated. The gold plating increases the corrosion resistance on the terminals and increases the connector durability. The TP sensor is mounted on the throttle body. As the TP sensor is rotated by the throttle shaft, 4 operating conditions are determined by the PCM from the TP. The operating conditions are: closed throttle (includes idle or deceleration) - part throttle (includes cruise or moderate acceleration) - wide open throttle (includes maximum acceleration or de-choke on crank) - throttle angle rate Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2148 Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the throttle position (TP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the 2 screws and the TP sensor. - To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations View 151-7 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2153 View 151-8 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2154 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams C180 C1180 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2155 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR Typical Synchronizer Hall-Effect CMP Sensor Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor The CMP sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston number 1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the PCM and used for synchronizing the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. Coil on plug (COP) ignition applications use the CMP signal to select the correct ignition coil to fire. Vehicles with 2 CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). They use the second sensor to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2 as an input to the PCM. There are 2 types of CMP sensors: the 3-pin connector Hall-effect type sensor and the 2-pin connector variable reluctance type sensor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2156 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the camshaft position sensor (CMP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolt and the CMP. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). - Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary. 3. NOTE: Lubricate the CMP O-ring seal with clean engine oil. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations View 151-7 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2160 View 151-9 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2161 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams C101 C1120 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2162 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR Typical Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor The CKP sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM. The pulse wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L 10-cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the pulse wheel, the CKP sensor signal indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP sensor is also able to identify piston travel in order to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the crankshaft relative to a fixed reference for the CKP sensor configuration. The PCM also uses the CKP signal to determine if a misfire has occurred by measuring rapid decelerations between teeth. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2163 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the 5 bolts and the RH splash shield. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 3. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor electrical connector. 4. Remove the bolt and the CKP. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). - Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary. 5. NOTE: Lubricate the CKP O-ring seal with clean engine oil. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Customer Interest Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder TSB 09-19-15 10/05/09 IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift interlock is not affected. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern. a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove ignition key. b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction. c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction? (1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics (2) No - Proceed to step 2. 2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs. The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 2173 Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3511 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder TSB 09-19-15 10/05/09 IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift interlock is not affected. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern. a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove ignition key. b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction. c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction? (1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics (2) No - Proceed to step 2. 2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs. The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 2179 Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3511 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Lock Cylinder - Functional Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Ignition Lock Cylinder - Functional IGNITION LOCK CYLINDER - FUNCTIONAL Removal and Installation 1. Remove the passive anti-theft system (PATS) transceiver. 2. NOTE: The ignition lock cylinder must be in the RUN position. Using a suitable tool, press the release pin and remove the ignition lock cylinder. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Verify the ignition lock cylinder operation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Lock Cylinder - Functional > Page 2182 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Ignition Lock Cylinder - Non Functional IGNITION LOCK CYLINDER - NON FUNCTIONAL Removal and Installation 1. Remove the passive anti-theft system (PATS) transceiver. 2. Remove the ignition lock cylinder. - Use a 1/8-inch diameter drill bit to drill out the lock cylinder retaining pin. - Use a 3/8-inch diameter drill to drill down the middle of the ignition lock key slot until the ignition lock cylinder breaks loose. - Remove and discard the ignition lock cylinder and drill shavings from the steering column. 3. Remove the bearing retainer. 4. Remove the steering column lock housing bearing and steering column lock gear. 5. Thoroughly clean all drill shavings from the steering column and inspect it for damage. 6. Install a new ignition lock cylinder. - Verify the ignition lock cylinder operation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-8 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2186 C109 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Powertrain Management > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2187 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Knock Sensor (KS) Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS) The KS is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark timing. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications Item....................................................................................................................................................... ..............................................................Specification Engine idling......................................................................................................................................... ..........................................................269 kPa (39 psi) Fuel pump output volume per 10 seconds...... .................................................................................................................................................125 cc (4.32 oz) Key on, engine off................................................................................................................. ..........................................................................269 kPa (39 psi) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 2192 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE TEST Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) WARNING: - Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. All vehicles 1. Release the fuel system pressure. Vehicles with 2.3L engine 2. Disconnect the fuel tube-to-fuel rail quick connect coupling. 3. Install the special tool between the fuel tube and the fuel rail. Vehicles with 3.0L engine 4. Remove the air cleaner outlet pipe. 5. Disconnect the fuel tube-to-fuel rail quick connect coupling. 6. NOTE: Use a commercially available fuel test adapter (such as OTC 18527). Install the special tool and fuel test adapter between the fuel tube and the fuel rail. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 2193 7. NOTE: The air cleaner outlet pipe must be installed prior to completing the fuel system pressure test. Install the air cleaner outlet pipe. All vehicles 8. NOTE: The fuel pump (FP) driver module electrical connector that was disconnected to release the fuel system pressure must be reconnected to test the fuel system pressure. Connect the FP driver module electrical connector. 9. NOTE: It may take more than one key cycle to pressurize the fuel system. Cycle the ignition key and wait 3 seconds to pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before starting the engine. 10. NOTE: Upon completion of the fuel system pressure test, open the drain valve on the special tool and release fuel system pressure and drain any residual fuel into a suitable container prior to removing the tool Test the fuel system pressure to make sure it is within the specified range. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications Measured/PID Values Hot Idle ................................................................................................................................................ ........................................................ 705-820 RPM Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair AIR CLEANER INTAKE PIPE Exploded View Removal and Installation 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Remove the bolt and the air cleaner intake pipe. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 3. NOTE: Make sure that the front sponge seal of the intake pipe is seated on the shroud panel. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE RELEASE WARNING: - Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the fuel pump (FP) driver module electrical connector. 3. Start the engine and allow it to idle until it stalls. 4. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately 5 seconds to make sure the fuel injection supply manifold pressure has been released. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 6. When fuel system service is complete, connect the FP driver module electrical connector. 7. NOTE: It may take more than one key cycle to pressurize the fuel system. Cycle the ignition key and wait 3 seconds to pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before starting the engine. 8. Start the vehicle and check the fuel system for leaks. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications Firing Order: Specifications Item....................................................................................................................................................... ..............................................................Specification Firing order........................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................1-4-2-5-3-6 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > General Specifications Spark Plug: Specifications General Specifications Item....................................................................................................................................................... ..............................................................Specification Spark plug gap..................................................................................................................................... ....................................1.32-1.42 mm (0.052-0.056 in) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > General Specifications > Page 2212 Torque Specifications Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2213 Spark Plug: Application and ID Item....................................................................................................................................................... ..............................................................Specification Spark plug............................................................................................................................................ ...................................................................AGSF-32N Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2214 Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection Spark Plug Inspection 1. Inspect the spark plug for a bridged gap. ^ Check for deposit build-up closing the gap between the electrodes. Deposits are caused by oil or carbon fouling. ^ Clean the spark plug. 2. Check for oil fouling. ^ Check for wet, black deposits on the insulator shell bore electrodes, caused by excessive oil entering the combustion chamber through worn rings and pistons, excessive valve-to-guide clearance or worn or loose bearings. ^ Correct the oil leak concern. ^ Install a new spark plug. 3. Inspect for carbon fouling. Look for black, dry, fluffy carbon deposits on the insulator tips, exposed shell surfaces and electrodes, caused by a spark plug with an incorrect heat range, dirty air cleaner, too rich a fuel mixture or excessive idling. ^ Install new spark plugs. 4. Inspect for normal burning. ^ Check for light tan or gray deposits on the firing tip. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2215 5. Inspect for pre-ignition, identified by melted electrodes and a possibly damaged insulator. Metallic deposits on the insulator indicate engine damage. This may be caused by incorrect ignition timing, wrong type of fuel or the unauthorized installation of a Heli-Coil(R) insert in place of the spark plug threads. ^ Install a new spark plug. 6. Inspect for overheating, identified by white or light gray spots and with a bluish-burnt appearance of electrodes. This is caused by engine overheating, wrong type of fuel, loose spark plugs, spark plugs with an incorrect heat range, low fuel pump pressure or incorrect ignition timing. ^ Install a new spark plug. 7. Inspect for fused deposits, identified by melted or spotty deposits resembling bubbles or blisters. These are caused by sudden acceleration. ^ Install new spark plugs. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2216 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2217 Spark Plug: Service and Repair SPARK PLUGS Exploded View Engine Ignition - RH Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2218 Engine Ignition - LH Removal RH side 1. NOTE: The upper intake manifold must be removed to access the RH spark plugs only. Remove the upper intake manifold. Both sides 2. Disconnect the ignition coil electrical connectors. 3. NOTE: When removing the ignition coil-on-plugs, a slight twisting motion will break the seal and ease removal. Remove the bolts and the ignition coils. 4. CAUTION: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spark plugs, or damage can occur to the cylinder head or spark plug. NOTE: Use compressed air to remove any foreign material in the spark plug well before removing the spark plugs. Remove the spark plugs. Installation Both sides 1. Inspect the spark plugs. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2219 2. Adjust the spark plug gap as necessary. 3. CAUTION: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spark plugs, or damage can occur to the cylinder head or spark plug. Install the spark plugs. Tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). 4. NOTE: Apply a small amount of dielectric grease to the inside of the ignition coil boots before attaching to the spark plugs. Install the ignition coils and bolts. Tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2220 5. Connect the ignition coil electrical connectors. RH side 6. Install the upper intake manifold. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > Specifications Compression Check: Specifications Compression Test - Test Results The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading cylinder is at least 75% of the highest reading. Refer to the Compression Pressure Limit Chart. Compression Pressure Limit Chart Compression Pressure Limit Chart (Part 1) Compression Pressure Limit Chart (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > System Diagnosis > Compression Test Compression Check: Testing and Inspection Compression Test Compression Test - All Vehicles Except Hybrid 1. Make sure the oil in the crankcase is of the correct viscosity and at the correct level and that the battery is correctly charged. Operate the vehicle until the engine is at normal operating temperature. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then remove all the spark plugs. 2. Set the throttle plates in the wide-open position. 3. Install a compression gauge such as the Compression Tester in the No. 1 cylinder. 4. Install an auxiliary starter switch in the starting circuit. With the ignition switch in the OFF position, and using the auxiliary starter switch, crank the engine a minimum of 5 compression strokes and record the highest reading. Note the approximate number of compression strokes necessary to obtain the highest reading. 5. Repeat the test on each cylinder, cranking the engine approximately the same number of compression strokes. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > System Diagnosis > Compression Test > Page 2226 Compression Check: Testing and Inspection Compression Test - Test Results Compression Test - Test Results The indicated compression pressures are considered within specification if the lowest reading cylinder is at least 75% of the highest reading. Refer to the Compression Pressure Limit Chart. Compression Pressure Limit Chart Compression Pressure Limit Chart (Part 1) Compression Pressure Limit Chart (Part 2) If one or more cylinders reads low, squirt approximately one tablespoon of engine oil meeting Ford specification on top of the pistons in the low-reading cylinders. Repeat the compression pressure check on these cylinders. Compression Test - Interpreting Compression Readings 1. If compression improves considerably, piston rings are worn or damaged. 2. If compression does not improve, valves are sticking or not seating correctly. 3. If 2 adjacent cylinders indicate low compression pressures and squirting oil on each piston does not increase compression, the head gasket may be leaking between cylinders. Engine oil or coolant in cylinders could result from this condition. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Compression Check > System Information > System Diagnosis > Compression Test > Page 2227 Use the Compression Pressure Limit Chart when checking cylinder compression so that the lowest reading is within 75% of the highest reading. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks > Valve Clearance > System Information > Specifications Valve Clearance: Specifications Valve Clearance This engine is equipped with hydraulic lash adjusters. No adjustment is required. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR The APP sensor is an input to the powertrain control module (PCM) and is used to determine the amount of torque requested by the operator. Depending on the application either a 2-track or 3-track APP sensor is used. 2-Track APP Sensor 2-Track APP Sensor There are 2 pedal position signals in the sensor. Both signals, APP1 and APP2, have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage), but are offset and increase at different rates. The 2 pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other input is used. There are 2 reference voltage circuits, 2 signal return circuits, and 2 signal circuits (a total of 6 circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. The reference voltage circuits and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage circuit and signal return circuit used by the electronic throttle body (ETB) throttle position sensor. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. 3-Track APP Sensor Typical 3-Track APP Sensor There are 3 pedal position signals in the sensor. Signal 1, APP1, has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and signals 2 and 3, APP2 and APP3, both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation APP1 is used as the indication of pedal position by the strategy. The 3 pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other inputs are used. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. There are 2 reference voltage circuits, 2 signal return circuits, and 3 signal circuits (a total of 7 circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. The reference voltage circuits and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage circuit and signal return circuit used by the electronic throttle body (ETB) throttle position sensor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations View 151-4 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2238 View 151-5 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2239 C128 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2240 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot And Cold Wire (and IAT Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2241 Typical Drop-in Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F) above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the mass air flow. The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC), shift and torque converter clutch scheduling. The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner assembly. Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology with an integrated intake air temperature (IAT) sensor. The hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced as an assembly. Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2242 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the 2 screws and the MAF sensor. - To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations View 151-4 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2246 View 151-5 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2247 C128 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2248 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Typical Stand-Alone/Non-Integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensors Typical Integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Incorporated Into A Drop-in Or Flange-type MAF Sensor The IAT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The IAT provides air temperature information to the PCM. The PCM uses the air temperature information as a correction factor in the calculation of Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2249 fuel, spark, and air flow. The IAT sensor provides a quicker temperature change response time than the ECT or CHT sensor. Currently there are 2 design types of IAT sensors used, a stand-alone/non-integrated type and a integrated type. Both types function the same, however the integrated type is incorporated into the mass air flow (MAF) sensor instead of being a stand alone sensor. Supercharged vehicles use 2 IAT sensors. Both sensors are thermistor type devices and operate as described above. One is located before the supercharger at the air cleaner for standard OBD/cold weather input, while a second sensor (IAT2) is located after the supercharger in the intake manifold. The IAT2 sensor located after the supercharger provides air temperature information to the PCM to control spark and to help determine charge air cooler (CAC) efficiency. Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot And Cold Wire (and IAT Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2250 Typical Drop-in Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F) above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the mass air flow. The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC), shift and torque converter clutch scheduling. The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner assembly. Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology with an integrated intake air temperature (IAT) sensor. The hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced as an assembly. Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Brake Signal > Component Information > Locations View 151-22 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Brake Signal > Component Information > Locations > Page 2254 C278 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Brake Signal > Component Information > Locations > Page 2255 Brake Signal: Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch Typical BPP Switch The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal to the PCM indicating that the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and is mounted on the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as follows: to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake pedal is applied. - to the antilock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM. - to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ABS module interprets the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Brake Pedal Switch (BPS)/Brake Deactivator Switch The BPS, also called the brake deactivator switch, is for vehicle speed control deactivation. A normally closed switch supplies battery positive voltage (B+) to the PCM when the brake pedal is not applied. When the brake pedal is applied, the normally closed switch opens and power is removed from the PCM. On some applications the normally closed BPS, along with the normally open BPP switch, are used for a brake rationality test within the PCM. The PCM misfire monitor profile learn function may be disabled if a brake switch concern occurs. If one or both brake pedal inputs to the PCM is not changing states when they were expected to, a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is set by the PCM strategy. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations View 151-7 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2259 View 151-8 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2260 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams C180 C1180 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2261 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR Typical Synchronizer Hall-Effect CMP Sensor Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor The CMP sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston number 1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the PCM and used for synchronizing the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. Coil on plug (COP) ignition applications use the CMP signal to select the correct ignition coil to fire. Vehicles with 2 CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). They use the second sensor to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2 as an input to the PCM. There are 2 types of CMP sensors: the 3-pin connector Hall-effect type sensor and the 2-pin connector variable reluctance type sensor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2262 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the camshaft position sensor (CMP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolt and the CMP. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). - Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary. 3. NOTE: Lubricate the CMP O-ring seal with clean engine oil. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation Clutch Switch: Description and Operation CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION (CPP) SWITCH Typical Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch The CPP switch is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch pedal position. The PCM provides a low current voltage on the CPP circuit. When the CPP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low through the SIG RTN circuit. The CPP input to the PCM is used to detect a reduction in engine load. The PCM uses the load information for mass air flow and fuel calculations. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations View 151-6 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2269 C1064 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2270 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR Typical Thread Type ECT Sensor The ECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The PCM uses the ECT input for fuel control and for cooling fan control. There are 3 types of ECT sensors, threaded, push-in, and twist-lock. The ECT sensor is located in an engine coolant passage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2271 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Drain the cooling system. 2. Disconnect the engine coolant temperature sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the ECT sensor. - Pull upward on the locking tab. - Rotate the sensor counterclockwise and remove. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations View 151-7 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2275 View 151-9 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2276 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams C101 C1120 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2277 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR Typical Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor The CKP sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM. The pulse wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L 10-cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the pulse wheel, the CKP sensor signal indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP sensor is also able to identify piston travel in order to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the crankshaft relative to a fixed reference for the CKP sensor configuration. The PCM also uses the CKP signal to determine if a misfire has occurred by measuring rapid decelerations between teeth. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2278 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the 5 bolts and the RH splash shield. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 3. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor electrical connector. 4. Remove the bolt and the CKP. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). - Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary. 5. NOTE: Lubricate the CKP O-ring seal with clean engine oil. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Locations View 151-13 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Data Link Connector > Component Information > Locations > Page 2282 C251 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Actuator: Description and Operation ELECTRONIC THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL (TAC) Typical In-line TAC Design Typical Parallel TAC Design The electronic TAC is a DC motor controlled by the PCM (requires 2 wires). There are 2 designs for the TAC, parallel and in-line. The parallel design has the motor under the bore parallel to the plate shaft. The motor housing is integrated into the main housing. The in-line design has a separate motor housing. An internal spring is used in both designs to return the throttle plate to a default position. The default position is typically a throttle angle of 7 to 8 degrees from the hard stop angle. The closed throttle plate hard stop is used to prevent the throttle from binding in the bore (approximately 0.75 degree). This hard stop setting is not adjustable and is set to result in less airflow than the minimum engine airflow required at idle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Control Module: Description and Operation TORQUE BASED ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL (ETC) Overview The torque based ETC is a hardware and software strategy that delivers an engine output torque (via throttle angle) based on driver demand (pedal position). It uses an electronic throttle body, the powertrain control module (PCM), and an accelerator pedal assembly to control the throttle opening and engine torque. Torque based ETC enables aggressive automatic transmission shift schedules (earlier upshifts and later downshifts). This is possible by adjusting the throttle angle to achieve the same wheel torque during shifts, and by calculating this desired torque, the system prevents engine lugging (low RPM and low manifold vacuum) while still delivering the performance and torque requested by the driver. It also enables many fuel economy/emission improvement technologies such as variable camshaft timing (VCT) (deliver same torque during transitions). Torque based ETC also results in less intrusive vehicle and engine speed limiting, along with smoother traction control. Other benefits of ETC are: eliminate cruise control actuators - eliminate idle air control (IAC) valve - better airflow range - packaging (no cable) - more responsive powertrain at altitude and improved shift quality The ETC system illuminates a powertrain malfunction indicator (wrench) on the instrument cluster when a concern is present. Concerns are accompanied by diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and may also illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) The ETB has the following characteristics: - The throttle actuator control (TAC) motor is a DC motor controlled by the PCM (requires 2-wires). - There are 2 designs: parallel and in-line. The parallel design has the motor under the bore parallel to the plate shaft. The motor housing is integrated into the main housing. The in-line design has a separate motor housing. - An internal spring is used in both designs to return the throttle plate to a default position. The default position is typically a throttle angle of 7 to 8 degrees from the hard stop angle. - The closed throttle plate hard stop is used to prevent the throttle from binding in the bore (approximately 0.75 degree). This hard stop setting is not adjustable and is set to result in less airflow than the minimum engine airflow required at idle. - The required idle airflow is provided by the plate angle in the throttle body assembly. This plate angle controls idle, idle quality, and eliminates the need for an IAC valve. - There is 1 reference voltage and 1 signal return circuit between the PCM and the ETB. The reference voltage circuit and the signal return circuit is shared with the reference voltage circuits and signal return circuits used by the APP sensor. There are also 2 TP signal circuits for redundancy. The redundant TP signals are required for increased monitoring reasons. The first TP signal (TP1) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the second signal (TP2) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). The TP2 signal reaches a limit of approximately 4.5 volts at approximately 45 degrees of throttle angle. Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Depending on the application either a 2-track or 3-track APP sensor is used. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) System Strategy ETC System With A 3-Track APP Sensor Failure Mode And Effects Management (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2289 ETC System With A 3-Track APP Sensor Failure Mode And Effects Management (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2290 ETC System With A 2-Track APP Sensor Failure Mode And Effects Management Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2291 The torque based ETC strategy was developed to improve fuel economy and to accommodate variable camshaft timing (VCT). This is possible by not coupling the throttle angle to the driver pedal position. Uncoupling the throttle angle (produce engine torque) from the pedal position (driver demand) allows the powertrain control strategy to optimize fuel control and transmission shift schedules while delivering the requested wheel torque. The ETC monitor system is distributed across 2 processors within the PCM: the main powertrain control processor unit (CPU) and a separate monitoring processor. The primary monitoring function is carried out by the independent plausibility check (IPC) software, which resides on the main processor. It is responsible for determining the driver-demanded torque and comparing it to an estimate of the actual torque delivered. If the generated torque exceeds driver demand by a specified amount, appropriate corrective action is taken. APP and TP Sensor Inputs Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Check Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Check Electronic Throttle Actuator Control (TAC) Output Electronic TAC Operation Check Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations Engine Control Module: Locations View 151-4 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2295 View 151-5 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2296 View 151-6 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2297 View 151-9 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2298 Engine Control Module: Diagrams C175B (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2299 C175B (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2300 C175E (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2301 C175E (Part 2) C175E (Part 3) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2302 C175T (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2303 C175T (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Engine Control Module: Procedures FLASH ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY (EEPROM) Description The EEPROM is contained in an integrated circuit internal to the powertrain control module (PCM). The EEPROM contains the vehicle strategy including calibration information specific to the vehicle, and is capable of being programmed or flashed repeatedly. As part of the calibration there is an area referred to as the vehicle identification (VID) block. The VID block is programmed when installing a new PCM as described under Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM. Failure to carry out this procedure may generate DTCs PI635 or P1639. The VID block in an existing PCM can also be tailored to accommodate various hardware or parameter changes made to the vehicle since production. Failure to carry out this procedure properly may generate DTC P1635, Tire/Axle Ratio out of Acceptable Range. An incorrect tire/axle ratio is one of the main causes for DTC P1639. This is described under Making Changes to the VID Block and also under Making Changes to the PCM Calibration. The VID block contains many items used by the strategy for a variety of functions. Some of these items include the vehicle identification number (VIN), octane adjust, fuel octane, fuel type, vehicle speed limit, tire size, axle ratio, the presence of speed control, and 4-wheel drive electronic shift-on-the-fly (ESOF) versus manual shift-on-the-fly (MSOF). Only items applicable to the vehicle hardware and supported by the VID block is displayed on the scan tool. When changing items in the VID block, the strategy places range limits on certain items such as tire and axle ratio. The number of times the VID block may be reconfigured is limited. When this limit is reached, the scan tool displays a message indicating the need to flash the PCM again to reset the VID block. Programming can be carried out by a local Ford dealer or any non-Ford facility. Refer to the scan tool manufacturer's instruction manual for details. Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM A new PCM contains the latest strategy and calibration level for a particular vehicle. However, the VID block is blank and needs programming. There are 2 procedures available. The first is an automatic data transfer from the old PCM to the new PCM, and the second is manual data entry into the new PCM. Automatic data transfer is carried out if the old PCM is capable of communicating. This is done by using a scan tool to retrieve data from the old PCM before removing it from the vehicle. The stored data can then be downloaded to the new PCM after it has been installed. Carry out manual data entry if the old module is damaged or incapable of communicating. Remove and install a new PCM. Using a compatible scan tool, select and carry out the module/parameter programming, referring to the scan tool manufacturer's instruction manual. Make certain that all parameters are included. Failure to properly program tire size in revolutions per mile, (rev/mile equals 63,360 divided by the tire circumference in inches), axle ratio, 4x4/4x2, and/or MSOF/ESOF may result in DTCs P1635 and P1639. You may be instructed to contact the As-Built Data Center for the information needed to manually update the VID block with the scan tool. Contact the center only if the old PCM cannot be used or the data is corrupt. For Ford and Lincoln Mercury technicians, contact your National Hotline or the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website for As-Built data listed under the Service Publications Index. Non-Ford technicians use the Motorcraft(R) website at www.motorcraft.com. From the Motorcraft(R) homepage, use the search function to find the Module Programming or As-Built Data. For Ford and Lincoln Mercury technicians, check the Programmable Module Installation link on the PTS website for quick Programmable Module data information by vehicle. Making Changes to the VID Block A PCM which is programmed may require changes to be made to certain VID information to accommodate the vehicle hardware. Refer to Module Reprogramming on the scan tool. Making Changes to the PCM Calibration At certain times, the entire EEPROM needs to be completely reprogrammed. This is due to changes made to the strategy or calibration after production, or the need to reset the VID block because it has reached its limit. Refer to Module Reprogramming on the scan tool. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2306 Engine Control Module: Removal and Replacement POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) Removal 1. NOTE: Any PCM replacement will require that ALL customer keys are available to be programmed at the time of installation. PCM replacement DOES NOT require new keys. Retrieve the module configuration. Carry out the module configuration retrieval steps of the Programmable Module Installation procedure. 2. Remove the 2 PCM stud bolt nuts and position the wiring harness and the manifold absolute pressure sensor aside. 3. Disconnect the 3 PCM electrical connectors. 4. Remove the 2 stud bolts and the PCM. Installation 1. Install the PCM and the 2 stud bolts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 2. Connect the 3 PCM electrical connectors. 3. Position the manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor and the wiring harness and install the 2 PCM stud bolt nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 4. Restore the module configuration. Carry out the module configuration restore steps of the Programmable Module Installation procedure. 5. Reprogram the passive anti-theft system (PATS). Carry out the Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-9 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2310 C1164 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2311 Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE (CHT) SENSOR Typical CHT Sensor The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with the temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. The CHT sensor is installed in the cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT sensor can provide complete engine temperature information and can be used to infer coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM initiates a fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system concern such as low coolant or coolant loss could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation FUEL LEVEL INPUT (FLI) The FLI is a communications network message. Most vehicle applications use a potentiometer type FLI sensor connected to a float in the FP module to determine fuel level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2315 Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair FUEL PUMP MODULE Exploded View Part 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2316 Part 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2317 Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2318 Removal and Installation WARNING: - Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. - Remove the fuel filler cap slowly. The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2319 sound, wait until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may spray out. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. 1. Release the fuel system pressure. 2. Release the fuel tank filler cap and position aside. 3. Insert the special tool into the fuel tank filler pipe until it opens the fuel tank level shutoff valve located at the inlet of the fuel tank. 4. NOTE: Due to the internal design of the fuel tank components, slow fuel drainage may occur. Using the special tools, drain as much fuel as possible from the fuel tank and filler pipe, lowering the fuel level below the fuel pump (FP) mounting flange. 5. Remove the 4 screws and the FP module access cover. 6. NOTE: Clean the FP module connection, couplings, mounting flange and the immediate surrounding area of any dirt or foreign material. Disconnect the FP module electrical connector. 7. NOTE: Place absorbent toweling in the immediate surrounding area in case of fuel spills. Disconnect the fuel supply tube and fuel vapor recirculation tube-to-FP module quick connect couplings. 8. CAUTION: The fuel pump (FP) module must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the float arm and the filter. NOTE: Carefully remove the FP module lock ring and verify that enough fuel has been drained to avoid spillage. - Drain any residual in the FP module into a suitable container. Using a suitable FP module lock ring remover, rotate the lock ring counterclockwise and remove the FP module. 9. NOTE: Inspect the surfaces of the FP module flange and fuel tank seal contact surfaces. Do not polish or adjust the seal contact area of the FP module flange or fuel tank. Install a new FP module or fuel tank if the seal contact area is bent, scratched or corroded. Remove and discard the FP module O-ring seal. 10. NOTE: Apply clean engine oil to the FP module O-ring seal. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-27 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2323 C435 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2324 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation FUEL TANK PRESSURE (FTP) SENSOR Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor In-Line Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor The FTP sensor or in-line FTP sensor is used to measure the fuel tank pressure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams C1066 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2328 Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Description and Operation IDLE AIR CONTROL (IAC) VALVE NOTE: The IAC valve assembly is not adjustable and cannot be cleaned, also some IAC valves are normally open and others are normally closed. Some IAC valves require engine vacuum to operate. The IAC valve assembly controls the engine idle speed and provides a dashpot function. The IAC valve assembly meters intake air around the throttle plate through a bypass within the IAC valve assembly and throttle body. The PCM determines the desired idle speed or bypass air and signals the IAC valve assembly through a specified duty cycle. The IAC valve responds by positioning the IAC valve to control the amount of bypassed air. The PCM monitors engine RPM and increases or decreases the IAC duty cycle in order to achieve the desired RPM. The PCM uses the IAC valve assembly to control: - no touch start - cold engine fast idle for rapid warm-up - idle (corrects for engine load) - stumble or stalling on deceleration (provides a dashpot function) - over-temperature idle boost Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2329 Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Service and Repair IDLE AIR CONTROL (IAC) VALVE Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the idle air control (IAC) valve electrical connector. 2. Remove the 2 bolts and the IAC valve and discard the gasket. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). - Clean and inspect all sealing surfaces. Install new gasket. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Information Bus: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2334 Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4 "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and relays are identified. Fuse and Relay Numbering and Naming. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Power Distribution Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2335 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information C904 Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2336 disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location Charts. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery set. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing lose clothing. Symbols Symbols (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2337 Symbols (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2338 Symbols (Part 3) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2339 Symbols (Part 4) Symbols (Part 5) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2340 Information Bus: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2341 Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2342 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2343 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. 3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2344 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2345 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2346 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2347 Information Bus: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 14-1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 2348 14-2 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2349 Information Bus: Description and Operation COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK Vehicle communication utilizes both International Standards Organization (ISO) 9141 and controller area network (CAN) communications. ISO 9141 is used for diagnostic use only while CAN allows many modules to communicate with each other on a common network. CAN in-vehicle networking is a method for transferring data among distributed electronic modules via a serial data bus. Without serial networking, intermodule communication requires dedicated, point to point wiring resulting in bulky, expensive, complex, and difficult to install wiring harnesses. Applying a serial data network reduces the number of wires, combining the signals on a single network. Information is sent to the individual control modules that control each function. The vehicle has 3 module communication networks: - ISO 9141 - Medium speed (MS) CAN - High speed (HS) CAN All 3 networks are connected to the data link connector (DLC). This makes diagnosis and testing of these systems easier by allowing one scan tool to be able to diagnose and control any module on the 3 networks from one connector. The DLC can be found under the instrument panel between the steering column and the audio unit. Network Topology (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2350 Network Topology (Part 2) ISO 9141 Network Operation The ISO 9141 communications network is a single wire network, used for diagnostic purposes only. The ISO 9141 communications network is used for the following module: Parking aid module (PAM) MS-CAN Network Operation The MS-CAN network communicates using bussed messages. The MS-CAN has an unshielded twisted pair cable, data bus (+) and data bus (-) circuits. In addition to scan tool communication, this network allows sharing of information between all modules on the network. The MS-CAN is a medium speed communication network used for the following modules: Audio unit - Electronic automatic temperature control (EATC) or electronic manual temperature control (EMTC) module - Front control interface module (FCIM) - Front display interface module (FDIM) - Instrument cluster - Satellite radio receiver (SDARS) - Smart junction box (SJB) HS-CAN Network Operation The HS-CAN network communicates using bussed messages. The HS-CAN network uses an unshielded twisted pair cable, data bus (+) and data bus (-) circuits. In addition to scan tool communication, this network allows sharing of information between all modules on the network. The HS-CAN is a high speed communication network used for the following modules: ABS module - Four wheel drive (4WD) control module - Instrument cluster - Occupant classification sensor (OCS) module - Power steering control (PSC) module - PCM - Restraints control module (RCM) Network Termination The CAN network uses a network termination circuit to improve communication reliability. The network termination of the CAN bus takes place inside the termination modules by termination resistors. Termination modules are located at either end of the bus network. As network messages are broadcast, in the form of voltage signals, the network voltage signals are stabilized by the termination resistors. Each termination module has a 120 ohm resistor across the positive and negative bus connection in the termination module. With 2 termination modules on each network, and the 120 ohm resistors located in a parallel circuit configuration, the total network impedance, or total resistance, is 60 ohms. Network termination improves bus message reliability by: stabilizing bus voltage. - eliminating electrical interference. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2351 Gateway Module The instrument cluster is the gateway module, translating HS-CAN to MS-CAN and vice versa. This information allows a message to be distributed throughout both networks. The instrument cluster is the only module on this vehicle that has this ability. COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - HYBRID Vehicle communication utilizes both International Standards Organization (ISO) 9141 and controller area network (CAN) communications. ISO 9141 is used for diagnostic use only while CAN allows many modules to communicate with each other on a common network. CAN in-vehicle networking is a method for transferring data among distributed electronic modules via a serial data bus. Without serial networking, intermodule communication requires dedicated, point to point wiring resulting in bulky, expensive, complex, and difficult to install wiring harnesses. Applying a serial data network reduces the number of wires, combining the signals on a single network. Information is sent to the individual control modules that control each function. The vehicle has 3 module communication networks: - ISO 9141 - Medium speed (MS) CAN - High speed (HS) CAN All 3 networks are connected to the data link connector (DLC). This makes diagnosis and testing of these systems easier by allowing one scan tool to be able to diagnose and control any module on the 3 networks from one connector. The DLC can be found under the instrument panel between the steering column and the audio unit. Network Topology (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2352 Network Topology (Part 2) ISO 9141 Network Operation The ISO 9141 communications network is a single wire network, used for diagnostic purposes only. The ISO 9141 communications network is used for the following module: Parking aid module MS-CAN Network Operation The MS-CAN network communicates using bussed messages. The MS-CAN has an unshielded twisted pair cable, data bus (+) and data bus (-) circuits. In addition to scan tool communication, this network allows sharing of information between all modules on the network. The MS-CAN is a medium speed communication network used for the following modules: Audio unit - Electronic automatic temperature control (EATC) module - Front control interface module (FCIM) - Front display interface module (FDIM) - Instrument cluster - Satellite radio receiver (SDARS) - Smart junction box (SJB) HS-CAN Network Operation The HS-CAN network communicates using bussed messages. The HS-CAN network uses an unshielded twisted pair cable, data bus (+) and data bus (-) circuits. In addition to scan tool communication, this network allows sharing of information between all modules on the network. The HS-CAN is a high speed communication network used for the following modules: ABS module - Four wheel drive (4WD) control module - Instrument cluster - Occupant classification sensor (OCS) module - Power steering control (PSC) module - PCM - Restraints control module (RCM) - Traction battery control module (TBCM) - Transmission control module (TCM) Network Termination The CAN network uses a network termination circuit to improve communication reliability. The network termination of the CAN bus takes place inside the termination modules by termination resistors. Termination modules are located at either end of the bus network. As network messages are broadcast, in the form of voltage signals, the network voltage signals are stabilized by the termination resistors. Each termination module has a 120 ohm resistor across the positive and negative bus connection in the termination module. With 2 termination modules on each network, and the 120 ohm resistors located in a parallel circuit configuration, the total network impedance, or total resistance, is 60 ohms. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2353 Network termination improves bus message reliability by: stabilizing bus voltage. - eliminating electrical interference. Gateway Module The instrument cluster is the gateway module, translating HS-CAN to MS-CAN and vice versa. This information allows a message to be distributed throughout both networks. The instrument cluster is the only module on this vehicle that has this ability. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Information Bus: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Inspection and Verification INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION 1. Verify the customer concern. 2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage. VISUAL INSPECTION CHART Electrical Battery junction box (BJB) fuse(s): MIDI 80A (no communication with power steering control module) - 5 (10A) (no communication with PCM, traction battery control module [TBCM] [Hybrid only]) - 6 (5A) (no communication with ABS module [Hybrid only]) - 8 (5A) (no communication with transmission control module [TCM] [Hybrid only]) - 9 (50A) (no communication with ABS module [Hybrid only]) - 15 (50A) (no communication with TBCM [Hybrid only]) - 18 (20A) (no communication with ABS module [Escape and Mariner only]) - 18 (50A) (no communication with ABS module [Hybrid only]) - 23 (5A) (no communication with TBCM [Hybrid only]) - 27 (10A) (no communication with TCM [Hybrid only]) - 29 (15A) (no communication with PCM) - Smart junction box (SJB) fuse(s): 5 (10A) (no communication with the SJB) - 11 (10A) (no communication with four wheel [4WD] control module) - 14 (10A) (no communication with front control interface module [FCIM], front display interface module [FDIM], satellite radio receiver) - 15 (10A) (no communication with electronic automatic temperature control [EATC] or electronic manual temperature control [EMTC] module) - 20 (15A) (no power to scan tool) - 26 (10A) (no communication with TBCM [Hybrid only]) - 27 (10A) (no communication with TCM [Hybrid only]) - 29 (5A) (no communication with instrument cluster) - 32 (10A) (no communication with restraints control module [RCM]) - 34 (5A) (no communication with ABS module [Escape and Mariner only]) - 35 (10A) (no communication with parking aid module, 4WD control module) - 37 (10A) (no communication with EATC or EMTC module) - 39 (20A) (no communication with audio unit) - 43 (10A) (no communication with the instrument cluster) - Data link connector (DLC) - Wiring, terminals or connectors 3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding to the next step. 4. NOTE: Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release. If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the DLC. NOTE: The vehicle communication module (VCM) LED prove-out confirms power and ground from the DLC are provided to the VCM. If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM: Check the VCM connection to the vehicle. - Check the scan tool connection to the VCM. - GO to Pinpoint Test R, to diagnose no power to the scan tool. See: Pinpoint Tests/Test R: No Power To The Scan Tool 5. NOTE: During the network test, the scan tool will first attempt to communicate with the PCM, after establishing communication with the PCM, the scan tool will then attempt to communicate with all other modules on the vehicle. Carry out the network test. If the network test passes, retrieve and record the continuous memory diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and proceed to Step 6. - If the network test fails, GO to Symptom Chart to identify the module not communicating. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2356 6. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to DTC Charts. Follow the non-network DTC diagnostics (B-codes, C-codes, P-codes) prior to the network DTC diagnostics (U-codes). For all other DTCs, refer to Body Control Systems (Multifunction Electronic Control Module). See: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions/Module Communications Network 7. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Principles of Operation PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION Vehicle communication utilizes both International Standards Organization (ISO) 9141 and controller area network (CAN) communications. ISO 9141 is used for diagnostic use only, and CAN is a method for transferring data among distributed electronic modules via a serial data bus. The vehicle is equipped with 3 module communication networks: - ISO 9141 - Medium speed (MS) CAN - High speed (HS) CAN ISO 9141 Communications Network The ISO 9141 communications network is a single wire network. The ISO communications network does not permit intermodule communication and is only used for the parking aid module. When the scan tool communicates with the parking aid module, the scan tool must request all information, the module cannot initiate communications. The ISO network operates at a maximum data transfer speed of 10 Kbps for bus messages and is designed for scan tool to module diagnostic use only. The following fault chart describes the specific ISO 9141 network failures and their resulting symptom: ISO 9141 Network Communication Fault Chart MS-CAN The MS-CAN network uses an unshielded twisted pair cable of data (+) and data (-) circuits. The data (+) and the data (-) circuits are each regulated to approximately 2.5 volts during neutral or rested network traffic. As bus messages are sent on the data (+) circuit, voltage is increased by approximately 1.0 volt. Inversely, the data (-) circuit is reduced by approximately 1.0 volt when a bus message is sent. Multiple bus messages can be sent over the CAN circuits allowing multiple modules to communicate with each other. The MS-CAN is used for the instrument cluster, the front control interface module (FCIM), the front display interface module (FDIM), electronic automatic temperature control (EATC) or electronic manual temperature control (EMTC) module, the audio unit, the satellite radio receiver and the smart junction box (SJB) communications, and is designed for general information transfer. The MS-CAN network will not communicate while certain faults are present, but will operate with diminished performance with other faults present. The MS-CAN bus may remain operational when 1 of the 2 termination resistors are not present. The MS-CAN network operates at a maximum data transfer speed of 125 Kbps for bus messages and is designed for general information transfer. The network will remain operational, but at a degraded level when certain circuit faults are present. The following fault chart describes the specific MS-CAN network failures and their resulting symptom: Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2357 MS-CAN Network Communication Fault Chart HS-CAN The HS-CAN network uses an unshielded twisted pair cable of data (+) and data (-) circuits. The data (+) and the data (-) circuits are each regulated to approximately 2.5 volts during neutral or rested network traffic. As bus messages are sent on the data (+) circuit, voltage is increased by approximately 1.0 volt. Inversely, the data (-) circuit is reduced by approximately 1.0 volt when a bus message is sent. Multiple bus messages can be sent over the CAN circuits allowing multiple modules to communicate with each other. The HS-CAN is a high speed communication network used for the instrument cluster, the PCM, the ABS module, the occupant classification sensor (OCS), restraint control module (RCM), the traction battery control module (TBCM), the transmission control module (TCM), the power steering control module and the four wheel drive (4WD) control module communications, and designed for real time information transfer and control. The HS-CAN network will not communicate while certain faults are present, but will operate with diminished performance with other faults present.The HS-CAN bus may remain operational when 1 of the 2 termination resistors are not present. The HS-CAN network operates at a maximum data transfer speed of 500 Kbps and is designed for real time information transfer and control. The network will remain operational, but at a degraded level when certain circuit faults are present. The following fault chart describes the specific HS-CAN network failures and their resulting symptom: HS-CAN Network Communication Fault Chart The following chart describes the specific CAN network messages broadcast by each module, and the module(s) that receive the message: Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2358 CAN Network Module Communication Message Chart - Escape and Mariner (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2359 CAN Network Module Communication Message Chart - Escape and Mariner (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2360 CAN Network Module Communication Message Chart - Escape and Mariner (Part 3) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2361 CAN Network Module Communication Message Chart - Escape and Mariner (Part 4) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2362 CAN Network Module Communication Message Chart - Escape and Mariner (Part 5) CAN Network Module Communication Message Chart - Hybrid (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2363 CAN Network Module Communication Message Chart - Hybrid (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2364 CAN Network Module Communication Message Chart - Hybrid (Part 3) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2365 CAN Network Module Communication Message Chart - Hybrid (Part 4) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2366 CAN Network Module Communication Message Chart - Hybrid (Part 5) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2367 CAN Network Module Communication Message Chart - Hybrid (Part 6) Inspection and Verification INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION This provides step-by-step module configuration procedures. Carry out the programmable module installation (PMI) procedures when another Vehicle System directs to carry out configuration or when DTCs from the given list are present. See: Programming and Relearning Principles of Operation PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION Configurable modules accommodate a variety of vehicle options, eliminating the need for many unique modules for one vehicle line. These modules must be configured when replaced as part of a repair procedure. Configurable modules should not be exchanged between vehicles since the settings are unique to each vehicle. Failure to configure a new module may result in improper operation and/or any of the following DTCs setting: - B2477 and/or B2141 - sets when a body/chassis module is not configured or is configured incorrectly. - P0602, P0605 and/or P1639 - sets when the powertrain control module (PCM) vehicle identification (VID) block is not configured. - B2900 - sets when there is a VIN mismatch between the module with the B2900 and the PCM. The stored VIN in either module may be incorrect. - U0300 and/or U0301 - sets when the configuration between 2 or more modules do not match. - U2050 and/or U2051 - sets when a valid strategy/calibration is not present. The following are the 3 different methods of configuration: - Programmable module installation (PMI) - Module reprogramming ("flashing") - Programmable parameters Some modules do not support all 3 methods. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2368 Definition of Terms The following are definitions of configuration terms: Programmable Module Installation (PMI) PMI is a scan tool process which configures settings in a new module. Data used for the PMI process is automatically downloaded from the original module and stored when a scan tool session is started. If this data cannot be retrieved from the module being replaced, the scan tool may prompt for As-Built data entry or display a list of parameter values that need to be manually selected. Some modules are reprogrammed during PMI when a strategy/ calibration update is available. NOTE: It is important that the scan tool identifies the vehicle and obtains configuration data prior to removing any modules. The new module must be able to communicate with the scan tool in order to carry out PMI. See: Programming and Relearning To carry out PMI, refer to Programmable Module Installation. See: Programming and Relearning Module Reprogramming Module reprogramming (also referred to as "flashing") is a scan tool process which updates the strategy/calibration in a module. Module reprogramming is automatically carried out during PMI when a later strategy/calibration is available. Reprogramming a module with the same level of software will not improve module operation or repair a hardware failure. NOTE: Module reprogramming should be limited to circumstances where a published Technical Service Bulletin (TSB) procedure recommends doing so. - A module cannot communicate with other modules on the communication network while being reprogrammed. Clear any network communication DTCs which may have been set in other modules during reprogramming. Programmable Parameters Programmable parameters are customer preference items that may be modified by the dealer via scan tool or in some cases modified by the customer following a procedure listed in the vehicle Owner's Literature. While many configuration options may exist for a module, only a few of these options are programmable parameters. Adaptive Learning and Calibration Some modules require a separate learning procedure to be carried out if replaced as part of a repair procedure. For adaptive learning and calibration instructions, refer to the specific module removal and installation procedures. Vehicle Identification (VID) Block Some PCMs contain a memory area called a vehicle identification (VID) block. The PCM VID block commonly stores powertrain configuration items such as VIN, tire size, axle ratio, and whether or not the vehicle is equipped with speed control. As-Built Data As-Built data is a VIN specific module configuration record. During vehicle build, the configuration from all modules is downloaded and stored in the As-Built database. As-Built data will not reflect customer preference items that have been changed from the default state. These items will need to be changed using programmable parameters after the module is configured. NOTE: It is not necessary to obtain As-Built data unless directed to do so by the scan tool. This data may be accessed from the technician service publication website. The following chart lists module As-Built data addresses: Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2369 Module Addresses for As-Built Entry The following chart describes specific module programming information: Module Configuration and Parameter Index - Escape and Mariner (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2370 Module Configuration and Parameter Index - Escape and Mariner (Part 2) Module Configuration and Parameter Index - Hybrid (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2371 Module Configuration and Parameter Index - Hybrid (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2372 Information Bus: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions U0001-U0114 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2373 U0121-U0155 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2374 U0155-U0238 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2375 U0249-U2023 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2376 U261A-U2527 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2377 B2477-B2900 / P0602-P1639 / U0300 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2378 U2050-U2051 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2379 Information Bus: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Symptom Chart (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2380 Symptom Chart (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2381 Symptom Chart (Part 3) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2382 Information Bus: Pinpoint Tests Test A: The PCM Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool Or No High Speed Controller Area Network (HS-CAN) Communication PINPOINT TEST A: THE PCM DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL OR NO HIGH SPEED CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (HS-CAN) COMMUNICATION Normal Operation - Escape and Mariner The PCM communicates with the scan tool through the high speed controller area network (HS-CAN). Circuits VDB04 (WH/BU) (HS-CAN +) and VDB05 (WH) (HS-CAN -) provide the network connection to the PCM. The PCM shares the HS-CAN network with the ABS module, the four wheel drive (4WD) control module, restraints control module (RCM), occupant classification sensor module, power steering control module and the instrument cluster. Voltage for the PCM is provided by circuits CBB28 (GY/VT) and SBB05 (GY/RD). Circuit GD122 (BK) provides ground. Normal Operation - Hybrid The PCM communicates with the scan tool through the high speed controller area network (HS-CAN). Circuits VDB04 (WH/BU) (HS-CAN +) and VDB05 (WH) (HS-CAN -) provide the network connection to the PCM. The PCM shares the HS-CAN network with the ABS module, restraints control module (RCM), occupant classification sensor module, power steering control module, transmission control module, traction battery control module (TBCM) and the instrument cluster. Voltage for the PCM is provided by circuits CBB29 (WH/VT) and SBB05 (GY/RD). Circuit GD122 (BK) provides ground. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - ABS module - 4WD control module (if equipped) - Instrument cluster - PCM - RCM - Power steering control module - Occupant classification sensor module - TCM (Hybrid only) - TBCM (Hybrid only) A1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2383 A1-A2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2384 A3-A4 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2385 A5-A7 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2386 A7-A9 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2387 A9-A11 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2388 A11-A14 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2389 A14-A16 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2390 A16-A19 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2391 A19-A20 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2392 A20-A22 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2393 A22-A25 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2394 A25-A27 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2395 A27-A30 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2396 A30-A31 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2397 A31-A33 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2398 A34-A37 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2399 A38-A40 Test B: The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool PINPOINT TEST B: THE ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) MODULE DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL Normal Operation - Escape and Mariner The ABS module communicates with the scan tool through the high speed controller area network (HS-CAN). Circuits VDB04 (WH/BU) (HS-CAN +) and VDB05 (WH) (HS-CAN -) provide the network connection to the ABS module. The ABS module shares the HS-CAN network with the PCM, the four wheel drive (4WD) control module, the instrument cluster, the restraints control module (RCM), the power steering control module and the occupant classification sensor module. Voltage for the ABS module is provided by circuits CBP34 (VT/BN), SBB09 (RD) and SBB18 (YE/RD). Ground is provided by circuit GD120 (BK/GN). Normal Operation - Hybrid The ABS module communicates with the scan tool through the high speed controller area network (HS-CAN). Circuits VDB04 (WH/BU) (HS-CAN +) and VDB05 (WH) (HS-CAN -) provide the network connection to the ABS module. The ABS module shares the HS-CAN network with the PCM, the instrument cluster, the restraints control module (RCM), the power steering control module, the transmission control module, the traction battery control module (TBCM) and the occupant classification sensor module. Voltage for the ABS module is provided by circuits CBP34 (VT/BN), SBB06 (BN/RD), SBB09 (RD) and SBB18 (YE/RD). Ground is provided by circuit GD113 (BK/YE) and GD179 (BK/VT). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - ABS module Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2400 B1-B2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2401 B2-B3 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2402 B4-B5 Test C: The Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Control Module Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool PINPOINT TEST C: THE FOUR WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) CONTROL MODULE DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL Normal Operation The four wheel drive (4WD) control module communicates with the scan tool through the high speed controller area network (HS-CAN). Circuits VDB04 (WH/BU) (HS-CAN +) and VDB05 (WH) (HS-CAN -) provide the network connection to the 4WD control module. The 4WD control module shares the HS-CAN network with the PCM, the ABS module, the instrument cluster, the restraints control module (RCM), the power steering control module and the occupant classification sensor module. Voltage for the 4WD control module is provided by circuits CBP35 (YE/GY) and SBP11 (BU/RD). Ground is provided by circuit GD182 (BK/GY). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - 4WD control module Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2403 C1-C2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2404 C3-C4 Test D: The Instrument Cluster Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool PINPOINT TEST D: THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL Normal Operation The instrument cluster communicates with the scan tool through the high speed controller area network (HS-CAN). Circuits VDB04 (WH/BU) (HS-CAN +) and VDB05 (WH) (HS-CAN -) provide the HS-CAN network connection to the instrument cluster and circuits VDB06 (GY/OG) (MS-CAN +) and VDB07 (VT/OG) (MS-CAN -) provide the medium speed controller area network (MS-CAN) connection to the instrument cluster. The instrument cluster shares the HS-CAN network with the PCM, the ABS module, the four wheel drive (4WD) control module, the restraints control module (RCM), the power steering control module and the occupant classification sensor module. For Hybrid vehicles, the instrument cluster also shares the HS-CAN network with the transmission control module (TCM) and traction battery control module (TBCM). The instrument cluster shares the MS-CAN network with the smart junction box (SJB), the electronic automatic temperature control (EATC) or electronic manual temperature control (EMTC) module, the audio unit, the satellite radio receiver, the front control interface module (FCIM) and front display interface module. Voltage for the instrument cluster is provided by circuits CBP29 (WH/VT), and SBP26 (YE/RD). Circuits GD112 (BK/GN) and GD114 (BK/BU) provide ground. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Instrument cluster Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2405 D1-D3 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2406 D3-D4 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2407 D5 Test E: The Restraints Control Module (RCM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool PINPOINT TEST E: THE RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL Normal Operation The RCM communicates with the scan tool through the high speed controller area network (HS-CAN). Circuits VDB04 (WH/BU) (HS-CAN +) and VDB05 (WH) (HS-CAN -) provide the HS-CAN network connection to the RCM. The RCM shares the HS-CAN network with the PCM, the ABS module, the four wheel drive (4WD) control module, the instrument cluster, the power steering control module and the occupant classification sensor module. For Hybrid vehicles, the instrument cluster also shares the HS-CAN network with the transmission control module (TCM) and traction battery control module (TBCM). Voltage for the RCM is provided by circuits CBP32 (GN/VT) and the RCM is case grounded. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - RCM Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2408 E1-E3 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2409 E4-E5 Test F: The Occupant Classification Sensor Module Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool PINPOINT TEST F: THE OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SENSOR MODULE DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL Normal Operation The occupant classification sensor module communicates with the scan tool through the high speed controller area network (HS-CAN). Circuits VDB04 (WH/BU) (HS-CAN +) and VDB05 (WH) (HS-CAN -) provide the HS-CAN network connection to the occupant classification sensor module. The occupant classification sensor module shares the HS-CAN network with the PCM, the ABS module, the four wheel drive (4WD) control module, the instrument cluster, the power steering control module and the restraints control module (RCM). For Hybrid vehicles, the instrument cluster also shares the HS-CAN network with the transmission control module (TCM) and TBCM. Voltage for the occupant classification sensor module is provided by circuit CBP46 (WH/BU) and circuit GD183 (BK/WH) provides ground. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Occupant classification sensor module Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2410 F1-F2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2411 F2-F3 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2412 F4 Test G: The Power Steering Control Module Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool PINPOINT TEST G: THE POWER STEERING CONTROL MODULE DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL Normal Operation The power steering control module communicates with the scan tool through the high speed controller area network (HS-CAN). Circuits VDB04 (WH/BU) (HS-CAN +) and VDB05 (WH) (HS-CAN -) provide the HS-CAN network connection to the occupant classification sensor module. The occupant classification sensor module shares the HS-CAN network with the PCM, the ABS module, the four wheel drive (4WD) control module, the instrument cluster, the occupant classification sensor module and the restraints control module (RCM). For Hybrid vehicles, the instrument cluster also shares the HS-CAN network with the transmission control module (TCM) and traction battery control module (TBCM). Voltage for the power steering control module is provided by circuit CBP35 (YE/GY) and circuit GD116 (BK/VT) provides ground This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Power steering control module G1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2413 G1-G2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2414 G3-G4 Test H: The Transmission Control Module (TCM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool PINPOINT TEST H: THE TRANSMISSION CONTROL MODULE (TCM) DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL Normal Operation The transmission control module (TCM) is present on Hybrid vehicles only. The TCM communicates with the scan tool through the high speed controller area network (HS-CAN). Circuits VDB04 (WH/BU) (HS-CAN +) and VDB05 (WH) (HS-CAN -) provide the network connection to the TCM. The TCM shares the HS-CAN network with the PCM, the traction battery control module (TBCM), the ABS module, the power steering control module, restraints control module (RCM), occupant classification sensor module and the instrument cluster. Voltage for the TCM is provided by circuits CBB27 (GN/BN) and SBB08 (VT/RD). Ground is provided by circuit GD121 (BK/YE). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - TCM Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2415 H1-H3 H4 Test I: The Traction Battery Control Module (TBCM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2416 PINPOINT TEST I: THE TRACTION BATTERY CONTROL MODULE (TBCM) DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL Normal Operation The TBCM is present on Hybrid vehicles only. The TBCM communicates with the scan tool through the high speed controller area network (HS-CAN). Circuits VDB04 (WH/BU) (HS-CAN +) and VDB05 (WH) (HS-CAN -) provide the network connection to the TBCM. The TBCM shares the HS-CAN network with the PCM, the transmission control module (TCM), the ABS module, the power steering control module, restraints control module (RCM), occupant classification sensor module, and the instrument cluster. Voltage for the TBCM is provided by circuits CBB23 (BN/YE), SBB05 (GY/RD) and SBB15 (WH/RD). Ground is provided by circuits GD182 (BK/GY) and GD149 (BK/GY). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - TBCM Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2417 I1-I2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2418 I3-I4 Test J: The Smart Junction Box (SJB) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool PINPOINT TEST J: THE SMART JUNCTION BOX (SJB) DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL Normal Operation The smart junction box (SJB) communicates with the scan tool through the medium speed controller area network (MS-CAN). Circuits VDB06 (GY/OG) (MS-CAN +) and VDB07 (VT/OG) (MS-CAN -) provide the network connection to the SJB. The SJB shares the MS-CAN network with the instrument cluster, audio unit, electronic automatic temperature control (EATC) or electronic manual temperature control (EMTC) module, satellite radio receiver, front control interface module (FCIM) and front display interface module (FDIM). Voltage for the SJB is provided directly from the internal SJB busbar through SJB fuse 5 (10A). Ground is provided by circuit GD182 (BK/GY). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - SJB Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2419 J1-J2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2420 J3-J4 Test K: The Audio Unit Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool PINPOINT TEST K: THE AUDIO UNIT DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL Normal Operation The audio unit communicates with the scan tool through the medium speed controller area network (MS-CAN). Circuits VDB06 (GY/OG) (MS-CAN +) and VDB07 (VT/OG) (MS-CAN -) provide the network connection to the audio unit. The audio unit shares the MS-CAN network with the instrument cluster, smart junction box (SJB), electronic automatic temperature control (EATC) or electronic manual temperature control (EMTC) module, satellite radio receiver, front control interface module (FCIM) and front display interface module (FDIM). Voltage for the audio unit is provided by circuit SBP39 (WH/RD). Ground is provided by circuit GD115 (BK/GY). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Audio unit Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2421 K1-K2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2422 K2-K4 Test L: The Electronic Automatic Temperature Control (EATC) Module Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool PINPOINT TEST L: THE ELECTRONIC AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL (EATC) MODULE DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL Normal Operation The electronic automatic temperature control (EATC) module communicates with the scan tool through the medium speed controller area network (MS-CAN). Circuits VDB06 (GY/OG) (MS-CAN +) and VDB07 (VT/OG) (MS-CAN -) provide the network connection to the EATC module. The EATC module shares the MS-CAN network with the instrument cluster, smart junction box (SJB), audio unit, satellite radio receiver, front control interface module (FCIM) and front display interface module (FDIM). Voltage to the EATC module is provided by circuit SBP15 (WH/RD) and circuit CBP37 (WH). Ground is provided by circuit GD114 (BK/BU). NOTE: The electronic manual temperature control (EMTC) module does not communicate with the scan tool. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2423 This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - EATC module L1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2424 L2-L3 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2425 L4 Test M: The Satellite Radio Receiver Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool PINPOINT TEST M: THE SATELLITE RADIO RECEIVER DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL Normal Operation The satellite radio receiver communicates with the scan tool through the medium speed controller area network (MS-CAN). Circuits VDB06 (GY/OG) (MS-CAN +) and VDB07 (VT/OG) (MS-CAN -) provide the network connection to the satellite radio receiver. The satellite radio receiver shares the MS-CAN network with the instrument cluster, smart junction box (SJB), electronic automatic temperature control (EATC) module, audio unit, front control interface module (FCIM) and front display interface module (FDIM). Voltage to the satellite radio receiver is provided by circuit SBP14 (BN/RD). Ground is provided by circuit GD115 (BK/GY). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Satellite radio receiver M1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2426 M1-M2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2427 M3-M4 Test N: The Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool PINPOINT TEST N: THE FRONT DISPLAY INTERFACE MODULE (FDIM) DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL Normal Operation The front display interface module (FDIM) communicates with the scan tool through the medium speed controller area network (MS-CAN). Circuits VDB06 (GY/OG) (MS-CAN +) and VDB07 (VT/OG) (MS-CAN -) provide the network connection to the front display interface module. The FDIM shares the MS-CAN network with the instrument cluster, smart junction box (SJB), electronic automatic temperature control (EATC) or electronic manual temperature control (EMTC) module, audio unit, front control interface module (FCIM) and satellite radio receiver. Voltage to the front display interface module is provided by circuit SBP14 (BN/RD). Ground is provided by circuit GD114 (BK/BU). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - FDIM Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2428 N1-N2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2429 N2-N4 Test O: The Front Control Interface Module (FCIM) Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool PINPOINT TEST O: THE FRONT CONTROL INTERFACE MODULE (FCIM) DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL Normal Operation The front control interface module (FCIM) communicates with the scan tool through the medium speed controller area network (MS-CAN). Circuits VDB06 (GY/OG) (MS-CAN +) and VDB07 (VT/OG) (MS-CAN -) provide the network connection to the FCIM. The FCIM shares the MS-CAN network with the instrument cluster, smart junction box (SJB), electronic automatic temperature control (EATC) or electronic manual temperature control (EMTC) module, audio unit, front display interface module (FDIM) and satellite radio receiver. Voltage to the FCIM is provided by circuit SBP14 (BN/RD). Ground is provided by circuit GD115 (BK/GY). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - FCIM Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2430 O1-O2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2431 O2-O4 Test P: The Parking Aid Module Does Not Respond To The Scan Tool Or No International Standards Organization (ISO) 9141 Network PINPOINT TEST P: THE PARKING AID MODULE DOES NOT RESPOND TO THE SCAN TOOL OR NO INTERNATIONAL STANDARDS ORGANIZATION (ISO) 9141 NETWORK COMMUNICATION Normal Operation The parking aid module communicates with the scan tool through the ISO 9141 communications network, circuit VDB10 (GY). The parking aid module is the only module which communicates on the ISO 9141. Voltage for the parking aid module is provided by circuit CBP35 (YE/GY). Ground is provided by circuit GD182 (BK/GY). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2432 - Parking aid module P1-P2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2433 P2-P4 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2434 P5-P7 Test Q: No Medium Speed Controller Area Network (MS-CAN) Communication, All Modules Are Not Responding PINPOINT TEST Q: NO MEDIUM SPEED CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (MS-CAN) COMMUNICATION, ALL MODULES ARE NOT RESPONDING Normal Operation The medium speed controller area network (MS-CAN) uses an unshielded twisted pair cable, circuits VDB06 (GY/OG) and VDB07 (VT/OG). The smart junction box (SJB), audio unit, electronic automatic temperature control (EATC) or electronic manual temperature control (EMTC) module, satellite radio receiver, front display interface module (FDIM) and front control interface module (FCIM) communicate with the scan tool using the MS-CAN network. The instrument cluster, while on the MS-CAN network, communicates with the scan tool only on the HS-CAN network. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Wiring, terminals or connectors Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2435 - Instrument cluster - SJB - Audio unit - FCIM (if equipped) - Electronic automatic temperature control (EATC) module (if equipped) - Electronic manual temperature control (EMTC) module (if equipped) - Satellite radio receiver (if equipped) - FDIM Q1-Q2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2436 Q2-Q4 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2437 Q5-Q7 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2438 Q7-Q8 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2439 Q9-Q11 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2440 Q11-Q14 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2441 Q14-Q16 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2442 Q16-Q18 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2443 Q18-Q21 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2444 Q21-Q23 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2445 Q23-Q26 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2446 Q27-Q30 Test R: No Power To The Scan Tool PINPOINT TEST R: NO POWER TO THE SCAN TOOL Normal Operation The scan tool is connected to the data link connector (DLC) to communicate with the high speed controller area network (HS-CAN), medium speed controller area network (MS-CAN), and International Standards Organization (ISO) 9141 communications network. Voltage for the scan tool is provided by circuit SBP20 (GN/RD). Ground is provided by circuits GD112 (BK/GN) and GD114 (BK/BU). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - DLC Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2447 R1-R2 R3 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2448 Information Bus: Programming and Relearning PROGRAMMABLE MODULE INSTALLATION Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Programmable Module Installation (PMI) Using The Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) When The Original Module Is Available NOTE: Following module installation, some modules require a separate learning procedure be carried out. For instructions, refer to the specific module removal and installation procedures. 1. Connect the IDS and identify the vehicle as normal. 2. From the Toolbox icon, select Module Programming and press the check mark. 3. Select Programmable Module Installation. 4. Select the module that is being replaced. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the OFF position, and press the check mark. 6. Install the new module and press the check mark. 7. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the ON position, and press the check mark. 8. The IDS downloads the data into the new module and displays Module Configuration Complete. 9. Test module for correct operation. Programmable Module Installation (PMI) Using The Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) When The Original Module Is Not Available NOTE: Following module installation, some modules require a separate learning procedure be carried out. For adaptive learning and calibration instructions, refer to the specific module removal and installation procedures. 1. Install the new module. 2. Connect the IDS and identify the vehicle as normal. 3. From the Toolbox icon, select Module Programming and press the check mark. 4. Select Programmable Module Installation. 5. Select the module that was replaced. 6. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the OFF position, and press the check mark. 7. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the ON position, and press the check mark. 8. If the data is not available, the IDS displays a screen stating to contact the As-Built Data Center. Retrieve the data from the technician service publication website at this time and press the check mark. 9. Enter the module data and press the check mark. 10. The IDS downloads the data into the new module and displays Module Configuration Complete. 11. Test module for correct operation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 2449 Information Bus: Service and Repair PROGRAMMABLE MODULE INSTALLATION Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Programmable Module Installation (PMI) Using The Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) When The Original Module Is Available NOTE: Following module installation, some modules require a separate learning procedure be carried out. For instructions, refer to the specific module removal and installation procedures. 1. Connect the IDS and identify the vehicle as normal. 2. From the Toolbox icon, select Module Programming and press the check mark. 3. Select Programmable Module Installation. 4. Select the module that is being replaced. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the OFF position, and press the check mark. 6. Install the new module and press the check mark. 7. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the ON position, and press the check mark. 8. The IDS downloads the data into the new module and displays Module Configuration Complete. 9. Test module for correct operation. Programmable Module Installation (PMI) Using The Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) When The Original Module Is Not Available NOTE: Following module installation, some modules require a separate learning procedure be carried out. For adaptive learning and calibration instructions, refer to the specific module removal and installation procedures. 1. Install the new module. 2. Connect the IDS and identify the vehicle as normal. 3. From the Toolbox icon, select Module Programming and press the check mark. 4. Select Programmable Module Installation. 5. Select the module that was replaced. 6. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the OFF position, and press the check mark. 7. Follow the on-screen instructions, turn the ignition key to the ON position, and press the check mark. 8. If the data is not available, the IDS displays a screen stating to contact the As-Built Data Center. Retrieve the data from the technician service publication website at this time and press the check mark. 9. Enter the module data and press the check mark. 10. The IDS downloads the data into the new module and displays Module Configuration Complete. 11. Test module for correct operation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Tools and Equipment > Module Communications Network Special Tool(s) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Information Bus > Component Information > Tools and Equipment > Module Communications Network > Page 2452 Special Tool(s) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-8 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2456 C109 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2457 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Knock Sensor (KS) Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS) The KS is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark timing. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2461 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) Check Engine, Service Engine Soon, Or ISO Standard Engine Symbol The MIL notifies the driver that the powertrain control module (PCM) has detected an on board diagnostic (OBD) emission-related component or system concern. When this occurs, an OBD diagnostic trouble code (DTC) sets. - The MIL is located in the instrument cluster and is labeled CHECK ENGINE, SERVICE ENGINE SOON or the international standards organization (ISO) standard engine symbol. - The MIL is illuminated during the instrument cluster prove out for approximately 4 seconds. - The MIL remains illuminated after instrument cluster prove out if: an emission-related concern and DTC exists. - the PCM does not send a control message to the instrument cluster (applications with the MIL controlled through the communication link). - the PCM is operating in the hardware limited operation strategy (HLOS). - The MIL remains off during the instrument cluster prove out if an indicator or instrument cluster concern is present. - To turn off the MIL after a repair, a reset command from the scan tool must be sent, or 3 consecutive drive cycles must be completed without a concern. - For all MIL concerns, go to Symptom Charts. See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures - If the MIL flashes at a steady rate, a severe misfire condition may exist. - If the MIL flashes erratically, the PCM can reset while cranking if the battery voltage is low. - The MIL flashes after a period of time with the key in the RUN position (engine not running) if DTC P1000 is set. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations View 151-6 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2468 View 151-8 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2469 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Diagrams C1087 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2470 C1140 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2471 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR Typical Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor The MAP sensor measures intake manifold absolute pressure. The PCM uses information from the MAP sensor to measure how much exhaust gas is introduced into the intake manifold. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM: Description and Operation ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE (EOT) SENSOR Typical EOT Sensor The EOT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The EOT sensor measures the temperature of the engine oil. The sensor is typically threaded into the engine oil lubrication system. The PCM can use the EOT sensor input to determine the following: - On variable camshaft timing (VCT) applications the EOT input is used to adjust the VCT control gains and logic for camshaft timing. - The PCM can use EOT sensor input in conjunction with other PCM inputs to determine oil degradation. - The PCM can use EOT sensor input to initiate a soft engine shutdown. To prevent engine damage from occurring as a result of high oil temperatures, the PCM has the ability to initiate a soft engine shutdown. Whenever engine RPM exceeds a calibrated level for a certain period of time, the PCM begins reducing power by disabling engine cylinders. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 View 151-7 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 2479 View 151-9 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 2480 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #12 View 151-7 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 2481 View 151-9 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 2482 View 151-10 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 2483 View 151-10 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 C141 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 2486 C142 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 2487 C171 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 2488 C172 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2489 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) The HO2S detects the presence of oxygen in the exhaust and produces a variable voltage according to the amount of oxygen detected. A high concentration of oxygen (lean air/fuel ratio) in the exhaust produces a voltage signal less than 0.4 volt. A low concentration of oxygen (rich air/fuel ratio) produces a voltage signal greater than 0.6 volt. The HO2S provides feedback to the PCM indicating air/fuel ratio in order to achieve a near stoichiometric air/fuel ratio of 14.7:1 during closed loop engine operation. The HO2S generates a voltage between 0.0 and 1.1 volts. Embedded with the sensing element is the HO2S heater. The heating element heats the sensor to a temperature of 800°C (1,472°F). At approximately 300°C (572°F) the engine can enter closed loop operation. The VPWR circuit supplies voltage to the heater. The PCM turns the heater on by providing the ground when the correct conditions occur. The heater allows the engine to enter closed loop operation sooner. The use of this heater requires the HO2S heater control to be duty cycled, to prevent damage to the heater. Universal HO2S The universal HO2S, sometimes referred to as a wideband oxygen sensor, uses the typical HO2S combined with a current controller in the PCM to infer an air/fuel ratio relative to the stoichiometric air/fuel ratio. This is accomplished by balancing the amount of oxygen ions pumped in or out of a measurement chamber within the sensor. The typical HO2S within the universal HO2S is used to detect the oxygen content of the exhaust gas in the measurement chamber. The oxygen content inside the measurement chamber is maintained at the stoichiometric air/fuel ratio by pumping oxygen ions in and out of the measurement chamber. As the exhaust gasses get richer or leaner, the amount of oxygen that must be pumped in or out to maintain a stoichiometric air/fuel ratio in the measurement chamber varies in proportion to the air/fuel ratio. The amount of current required to pump the oxygen ions in or out of the measurement chamber is used to measure the air/fuel ratio. The measured air/fuel ratio is actually the output from the current controller in the PCM and not a signal that comes directly from the sensor. The universal HO2S also uses a self-contained reference chamber to make sure an oxygen differential is always present. The oxygen for the reference chamber is supplied by pumping small amounts of oxygen ions from the measurement chamber into the reference chamber. The universal HO2S does not need access to outside air. Part to part variance is compensated for by placing a resistor in the connector. This resistor is used to trim the current measured by the current controller in the PCM. Embedded with the sensing element is the universal H02S heater. The heater allows the engine to enter closed loop operation sooner. The heating element heats the sensor to a temperature of 780°C (1,436°F). The VPWR circuit supplies voltage to the heater. The PCM controls the heater on and off by providing the ground to maintain the sensor at the correct temperature for maximum accuracy. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) Exploded View Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the 7 bolts (5 shown) and the LH splash shield. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 2492 3. Disconnect the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) electrical connector. 4. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in removal. Using the special tool, remove the HO2S. - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 5. NOTE: Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the HO2S. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 2493 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Catalyst Monitor Sensor CATALYST MONITOR SENSOR Exploded View Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the 7 bolts (5 shown) and the LH splash shield. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 2494 3. Disconnect the catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector and detach the wiring retainer(s). 4. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in removal. Using the special tool, remove the catalyst monitor sensor. - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 5. NOTE: Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the catalyst monitor sensor. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor The PSP sensor monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP sensor voltage input to the PCM changes as the hydraulic pressure changes. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the PCM to adjust the transmission electronic pressure control (EPC) pressure during increased engine load, for example, during parking maneuvers. Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The PSP switch monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP switch is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic pressure increases. The PCM provides a low current voltage on the PSP circuit. When the PSP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low through the SIG RTN circuit. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust the transmission electronic pressure control (EPC) pressure during increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations View 151-6 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams > Differential Pressure EGR Vacuum Regulator C1083 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams > Differential Pressure EGR Vacuum Regulator > Page 2503 C1068 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2504 Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor receives this signal through 2 hoses referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor housing for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback. Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2505 The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is identical in operation as the larger plastic differential pressure feedback EGR sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the side of the sensor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2506 Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Service and Repair DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SENSOR Exploded View Part 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2507 Part 2 Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor electrical connector and detach the wiring harness retainer. 2. Carefully detach the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor from the EGR valve tube. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Control Module: Description and Operation TORQUE BASED ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL (ETC) Overview The torque based ETC is a hardware and software strategy that delivers an engine output torque (via throttle angle) based on driver demand (pedal position). It uses an electronic throttle body, the powertrain control module (PCM), and an accelerator pedal assembly to control the throttle opening and engine torque. Torque based ETC enables aggressive automatic transmission shift schedules (earlier upshifts and later downshifts). This is possible by adjusting the throttle angle to achieve the same wheel torque during shifts, and by calculating this desired torque, the system prevents engine lugging (low RPM and low manifold vacuum) while still delivering the performance and torque requested by the driver. It also enables many fuel economy/emission improvement technologies such as variable camshaft timing (VCT) (deliver same torque during transitions). Torque based ETC also results in less intrusive vehicle and engine speed limiting, along with smoother traction control. Other benefits of ETC are: eliminate cruise control actuators - eliminate idle air control (IAC) valve - better airflow range - packaging (no cable) - more responsive powertrain at altitude and improved shift quality The ETC system illuminates a powertrain malfunction indicator (wrench) on the instrument cluster when a concern is present. Concerns are accompanied by diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) and may also illuminate the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) The ETB has the following characteristics: - The throttle actuator control (TAC) motor is a DC motor controlled by the PCM (requires 2-wires). - There are 2 designs: parallel and in-line. The parallel design has the motor under the bore parallel to the plate shaft. The motor housing is integrated into the main housing. The in-line design has a separate motor housing. - An internal spring is used in both designs to return the throttle plate to a default position. The default position is typically a throttle angle of 7 to 8 degrees from the hard stop angle. - The closed throttle plate hard stop is used to prevent the throttle from binding in the bore (approximately 0.75 degree). This hard stop setting is not adjustable and is set to result in less airflow than the minimum engine airflow required at idle. - The required idle airflow is provided by the plate angle in the throttle body assembly. This plate angle controls idle, idle quality, and eliminates the need for an IAC valve. - There is 1 reference voltage and 1 signal return circuit between the PCM and the ETB. The reference voltage circuit and the signal return circuit is shared with the reference voltage circuits and signal return circuits used by the APP sensor. There are also 2 TP signal circuits for redundancy. The redundant TP signals are required for increased monitoring reasons. The first TP signal (TP1) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the second signal (TP2) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). The TP2 signal reaches a limit of approximately 4.5 volts at approximately 45 degrees of throttle angle. Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Depending on the application either a 2-track or 3-track APP sensor is used. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) System Strategy ETC System With A 3-Track APP Sensor Failure Mode And Effects Management (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2512 ETC System With A 3-Track APP Sensor Failure Mode And Effects Management (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2513 ETC System With A 2-Track APP Sensor Failure Mode And Effects Management Electronic Throttle Monitor Operation Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Electronic Throttle Control Module > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2514 The torque based ETC strategy was developed to improve fuel economy and to accommodate variable camshaft timing (VCT). This is possible by not coupling the throttle angle to the driver pedal position. Uncoupling the throttle angle (produce engine torque) from the pedal position (driver demand) allows the powertrain control strategy to optimize fuel control and transmission shift schedules while delivering the requested wheel torque. The ETC monitor system is distributed across 2 processors within the PCM: the main powertrain control processor unit (CPU) and a separate monitoring processor. The primary monitoring function is carried out by the independent plausibility check (IPC) software, which resides on the main processor. It is responsible for determining the driver-demanded torque and comparing it to an estimate of the actual torque delivered. If the generated torque exceeds driver demand by a specified amount, appropriate corrective action is taken. APP and TP Sensor Inputs Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor Check Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Check Electronic Throttle Actuator Control (TAC) Output Electronic TAC Operation Check Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations Engine Control Module: Locations View 151-4 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2518 View 151-5 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2519 View 151-6 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2520 View 151-9 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2521 Engine Control Module: Diagrams C175B (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2522 C175B (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2523 C175E (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2524 C175E (Part 2) C175E (Part 3) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2525 C175T (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 2526 C175T (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Engine Control Module: Procedures FLASH ELECTRICALLY ERASABLE PROGRAMMABLE READ ONLY MEMORY (EEPROM) Description The EEPROM is contained in an integrated circuit internal to the powertrain control module (PCM). The EEPROM contains the vehicle strategy including calibration information specific to the vehicle, and is capable of being programmed or flashed repeatedly. As part of the calibration there is an area referred to as the vehicle identification (VID) block. The VID block is programmed when installing a new PCM as described under Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM. Failure to carry out this procedure may generate DTCs PI635 or P1639. The VID block in an existing PCM can also be tailored to accommodate various hardware or parameter changes made to the vehicle since production. Failure to carry out this procedure properly may generate DTC P1635, Tire/Axle Ratio out of Acceptable Range. An incorrect tire/axle ratio is one of the main causes for DTC P1639. This is described under Making Changes to the VID Block and also under Making Changes to the PCM Calibration. The VID block contains many items used by the strategy for a variety of functions. Some of these items include the vehicle identification number (VIN), octane adjust, fuel octane, fuel type, vehicle speed limit, tire size, axle ratio, the presence of speed control, and 4-wheel drive electronic shift-on-the-fly (ESOF) versus manual shift-on-the-fly (MSOF). Only items applicable to the vehicle hardware and supported by the VID block is displayed on the scan tool. When changing items in the VID block, the strategy places range limits on certain items such as tire and axle ratio. The number of times the VID block may be reconfigured is limited. When this limit is reached, the scan tool displays a message indicating the need to flash the PCM again to reset the VID block. Programming can be carried out by a local Ford dealer or any non-Ford facility. Refer to the scan tool manufacturer's instruction manual for details. Programming the VID Block for a Replacement PCM A new PCM contains the latest strategy and calibration level for a particular vehicle. However, the VID block is blank and needs programming. There are 2 procedures available. The first is an automatic data transfer from the old PCM to the new PCM, and the second is manual data entry into the new PCM. Automatic data transfer is carried out if the old PCM is capable of communicating. This is done by using a scan tool to retrieve data from the old PCM before removing it from the vehicle. The stored data can then be downloaded to the new PCM after it has been installed. Carry out manual data entry if the old module is damaged or incapable of communicating. Remove and install a new PCM. Using a compatible scan tool, select and carry out the module/parameter programming, referring to the scan tool manufacturer's instruction manual. Make certain that all parameters are included. Failure to properly program tire size in revolutions per mile, (rev/mile equals 63,360 divided by the tire circumference in inches), axle ratio, 4x4/4x2, and/or MSOF/ESOF may result in DTCs P1635 and P1639. You may be instructed to contact the As-Built Data Center for the information needed to manually update the VID block with the scan tool. Contact the center only if the old PCM cannot be used or the data is corrupt. For Ford and Lincoln Mercury technicians, contact your National Hotline or the Professional Technician Society (PTS) website for As-Built data listed under the Service Publications Index. Non-Ford technicians use the Motorcraft(R) website at www.motorcraft.com. From the Motorcraft(R) homepage, use the search function to find the Module Programming or As-Built Data. For Ford and Lincoln Mercury technicians, check the Programmable Module Installation link on the PTS website for quick Programmable Module data information by vehicle. Making Changes to the VID Block A PCM which is programmed may require changes to be made to certain VID information to accommodate the vehicle hardware. Refer to Module Reprogramming on the scan tool. Making Changes to the PCM Calibration At certain times, the entire EEPROM needs to be completely reprogrammed. This is due to changes made to the strategy or calibration after production, or the need to reset the VID block because it has reached its limit. Refer to Module Reprogramming on the scan tool. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Engine Control Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 2529 Engine Control Module: Removal and Replacement POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM) Removal 1. NOTE: Any PCM replacement will require that ALL customer keys are available to be programmed at the time of installation. PCM replacement DOES NOT require new keys. Retrieve the module configuration. Carry out the module configuration retrieval steps of the Programmable Module Installation procedure. 2. Remove the 2 PCM stud bolt nuts and position the wiring harness and the manifold absolute pressure sensor aside. 3. Disconnect the 3 PCM electrical connectors. 4. Remove the 2 stud bolts and the PCM. Installation 1. Install the PCM and the 2 stud bolts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 2. Connect the 3 PCM electrical connectors. 3. Position the manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor and the wiring harness and install the 2 PCM stud bolt nuts. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 4. Restore the module configuration. Carry out the module configuration restore steps of the Programmable Module Installation procedure. 5. Reprogram the passive anti-theft system (PATS). Carry out the Key Programming Using Two Programmed Keys procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Computers and Control Systems > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2533 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR The APP sensor is an input to the powertrain control module (PCM) and is used to determine the amount of torque requested by the operator. Depending on the application either a 2-track or 3-track APP sensor is used. 2-Track APP Sensor 2-Track APP Sensor There are 2 pedal position signals in the sensor. Both signals, APP1 and APP2, have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage), but are offset and increase at different rates. The 2 pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other input is used. There are 2 reference voltage circuits, 2 signal return circuits, and 2 signal circuits (a total of 6 circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. The reference voltage circuits and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage circuit and signal return circuit used by the electronic throttle body (ETB) throttle position sensor. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. 3-Track APP Sensor Typical 3-Track APP Sensor There are 3 pedal position signals in the sensor. Signal 1, APP1, has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and signals 2 and 3, APP2 and APP3, both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation APP1 is used as the indication of pedal position by the strategy. The 3 pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other inputs are used. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. There are 2 reference voltage circuits, 2 signal return circuits, and 3 signal circuits (a total of 7 circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. The reference voltage circuits and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage circuit and signal return circuit used by the electronic throttle body (ETB) throttle position sensor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations View 151-4 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2541 View 151-5 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2542 C128 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2543 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot And Cold Wire (and IAT Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2544 Typical Drop-in Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F) above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the mass air flow. The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC), shift and torque converter clutch scheduling. The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner assembly. Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology with an integrated intake air temperature (IAT) sensor. The hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced as an assembly. Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2545 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the 2 screws and the MAF sensor. - To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations View 151-7 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2549 View 151-8 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2550 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams C180 C1180 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2551 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR Typical Synchronizer Hall-Effect CMP Sensor Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor The CMP sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston number 1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the PCM and used for synchronizing the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. Coil on plug (COP) ignition applications use the CMP signal to select the correct ignition coil to fire. Vehicles with 2 CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). They use the second sensor to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2 as an input to the PCM. There are 2 types of CMP sensors: the 3-pin connector Hall-effect type sensor and the 2-pin connector variable reluctance type sensor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2552 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the camshaft position sensor (CMP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolt and the CMP. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). - Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary. 3. NOTE: Lubricate the CMP O-ring seal with clean engine oil. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Clutch Switch, ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation Clutch Switch: Description and Operation CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION (CPP) SWITCH Typical Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch The CPP switch is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch pedal position. The PCM provides a low current voltage on the CPP circuit. When the CPP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low through the SIG RTN circuit. The CPP input to the PCM is used to detect a reduction in engine load. The PCM uses the load information for mass air flow and fuel calculations. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations View 151-6 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2559 C1064 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2560 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR Typical Thread Type ECT Sensor The ECT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The ECT measures the temperature of the engine coolant. The PCM uses the ECT input for fuel control and for cooling fan control. There are 3 types of ECT sensors, threaded, push-in, and twist-lock. The ECT sensor is located in an engine coolant passage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2561 Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Service and Repair ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Drain the cooling system. 2. Disconnect the engine coolant temperature sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the ECT sensor. - Pull upward on the locking tab. - Rotate the sensor counterclockwise and remove. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations View 151-7 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2565 View 151-9 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2566 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams C101 C1120 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2567 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR Typical Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor The CKP sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM. The pulse wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L 10-cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the pulse wheel, the CKP sensor signal indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP sensor is also able to identify piston travel in order to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the crankshaft relative to a fixed reference for the CKP sensor configuration. The PCM also uses the CKP signal to determine if a misfire has occurred by measuring rapid decelerations between teeth. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2568 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the 5 bolts and the RH splash shield. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 3. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor electrical connector. 4. Remove the bolt and the CKP. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). - Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary. 5. NOTE: Lubricate the CKP O-ring seal with clean engine oil. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-9 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2572 C1164 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Engine Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2573 Engine Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation CYLINDER HEAD TEMPERATURE (CHT) SENSOR Typical CHT Sensor The CHT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with the temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. The CHT sensor is installed in the cylinder head and measures the metal temperature. The CHT sensor can provide complete engine temperature information and can be used to infer coolant temperature. If the CHT sensor conveys an overheating condition to the PCM, the PCM initiates a fail-safe cooling strategy based on information from the CHT sensor. A cooling system concern such as low coolant or coolant loss could cause an overheating condition. As a result, damage to major engine components could occur. Using both the CHT sensor and fail-safe cooling strategy, the PCM prevents damage by allowing air cooling of the engine and limp home capability. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation FUEL LEVEL INPUT (FLI) The FLI is a communications network message. Most vehicle applications use a potentiometer type FLI sensor connected to a float in the FP module to determine fuel level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2577 Fuel Level Sensor: Service and Repair FUEL PUMP MODULE Exploded View Part 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2578 Part 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2579 Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2580 Removal and Installation WARNING: - Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. - Remove the fuel filler cap slowly. The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Level Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2581 sound, wait until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may spray out. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. 1. Release the fuel system pressure. 2. Release the fuel tank filler cap and position aside. 3. Insert the special tool into the fuel tank filler pipe until it opens the fuel tank level shutoff valve located at the inlet of the fuel tank. 4. NOTE: Due to the internal design of the fuel tank components, slow fuel drainage may occur. Using the special tools, drain as much fuel as possible from the fuel tank and filler pipe, lowering the fuel level below the fuel pump (FP) mounting flange. 5. Remove the 4 screws and the FP module access cover. 6. NOTE: Clean the FP module connection, couplings, mounting flange and the immediate surrounding area of any dirt or foreign material. Disconnect the FP module electrical connector. 7. NOTE: Place absorbent toweling in the immediate surrounding area in case of fuel spills. Disconnect the fuel supply tube and fuel vapor recirculation tube-to-FP module quick connect couplings. 8. CAUTION: The fuel pump (FP) module must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the float arm and the filter. NOTE: Carefully remove the FP module lock ring and verify that enough fuel has been drained to avoid spillage. - Drain any residual in the FP module into a suitable container. Using a suitable FP module lock ring remover, rotate the lock ring counterclockwise and remove the FP module. 9. NOTE: Inspect the surfaces of the FP module flange and fuel tank seal contact surfaces. Do not polish or adjust the seal contact area of the FP module flange or fuel tank. Install a new FP module or fuel tank if the seal contact area is bent, scratched or corroded. Remove and discard the FP module O-ring seal. 10. NOTE: Apply clean engine oil to the FP module O-ring seal. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-27 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2585 C435 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2586 Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation FUEL TANK PRESSURE (FTP) SENSOR Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor In-Line Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor The FTP sensor or in-line FTP sensor is used to measure the fuel tank pressure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations View 151-4 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2590 View 151-5 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2591 C128 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2592 Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Typical Stand-Alone/Non-Integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensors Typical Integrated Intake Air Temperature (IAT) Sensor Incorporated Into A Drop-in Or Flange-type MAF Sensor The IAT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance affects the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The IAT provides air temperature information to the PCM. The PCM uses the air temperature information as a correction factor in the calculation of Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2593 fuel, spark, and air flow. The IAT sensor provides a quicker temperature change response time than the ECT or CHT sensor. Currently there are 2 design types of IAT sensors used, a stand-alone/non-integrated type and a integrated type. Both types function the same, however the integrated type is incorporated into the mass air flow (MAF) sensor instead of being a stand alone sensor. Supercharged vehicles use 2 IAT sensors. Both sensors are thermistor type devices and operate as described above. One is located before the supercharger at the air cleaner for standard OBD/cold weather input, while a second sensor (IAT2) is located after the supercharger in the intake manifold. The IAT2 sensor located after the supercharger provides air temperature information to the PCM to control spark and to help determine charge air cooler (CAC) efficiency. Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot And Cold Wire (and IAT Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Intake Air Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2594 Typical Drop-in Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F) above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the mass air flow. The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC), shift and torque converter clutch scheduling. The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner assembly. Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology with an integrated intake air temperature (IAT) sensor. The hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced as an assembly. Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-8 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2598 C109 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2599 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Knock Sensor (KS) Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS) The KS is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark timing. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Locations View 151-6 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2603 View 151-8 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2604 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Diagrams C1087 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2605 C1140 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2606 Manifold Pressure/Vacuum Sensor: Description and Operation MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR Typical Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor The MAP sensor measures intake manifold absolute pressure. The PCM uses information from the MAP sensor to measure how much exhaust gas is introduced into the intake manifold. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM > Component Information > Description and Operation Oil Temperature Sensor For ECM: Description and Operation ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE (EOT) SENSOR Typical EOT Sensor The EOT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Thermistor-type sensors are considered passive sensors. A passive sensor is connected to a voltage divider network so that varying the resistance of the passive sensor causes a variation in total current flow. Voltage that is dropped across a fixed resistor in a series with the sensor resistor determines the voltage signal at the PCM. This voltage signal is equal to the reference voltage minus the voltage drop across the fixed resistor. The EOT sensor measures the temperature of the engine oil. The sensor is typically threaded into the engine oil lubrication system. The PCM can use the EOT sensor input to determine the following: - On variable camshaft timing (VCT) applications the EOT input is used to adjust the VCT control gains and logic for camshaft timing. - The PCM can use EOT sensor input in conjunction with other PCM inputs to determine oil degradation. - The PCM can use EOT sensor input to initiate a soft engine shutdown. To prevent engine damage from occurring as a result of high oil temperatures, the PCM has the ability to initiate a soft engine shutdown. Whenever engine RPM exceeds a calibrated level for a certain period of time, the PCM begins reducing power by disabling engine cylinders. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 View 151-7 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 2614 View 151-9 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 2615 Oxygen Sensor: Locations Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #12 View 151-7 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 2616 View 151-9 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 2617 View 151-10 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #11 > Page 2618 View 151-10 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 C141 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 2621 C142 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 2622 C171 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) #22 > Page 2623 C172 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2624 Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) The HO2S detects the presence of oxygen in the exhaust and produces a variable voltage according to the amount of oxygen detected. A high concentration of oxygen (lean air/fuel ratio) in the exhaust produces a voltage signal less than 0.4 volt. A low concentration of oxygen (rich air/fuel ratio) produces a voltage signal greater than 0.6 volt. The HO2S provides feedback to the PCM indicating air/fuel ratio in order to achieve a near stoichiometric air/fuel ratio of 14.7:1 during closed loop engine operation. The HO2S generates a voltage between 0.0 and 1.1 volts. Embedded with the sensing element is the HO2S heater. The heating element heats the sensor to a temperature of 800°C (1,472°F). At approximately 300°C (572°F) the engine can enter closed loop operation. The VPWR circuit supplies voltage to the heater. The PCM turns the heater on by providing the ground when the correct conditions occur. The heater allows the engine to enter closed loop operation sooner. The use of this heater requires the HO2S heater control to be duty cycled, to prevent damage to the heater. Universal HO2S The universal HO2S, sometimes referred to as a wideband oxygen sensor, uses the typical HO2S combined with a current controller in the PCM to infer an air/fuel ratio relative to the stoichiometric air/fuel ratio. This is accomplished by balancing the amount of oxygen ions pumped in or out of a measurement chamber within the sensor. The typical HO2S within the universal HO2S is used to detect the oxygen content of the exhaust gas in the measurement chamber. The oxygen content inside the measurement chamber is maintained at the stoichiometric air/fuel ratio by pumping oxygen ions in and out of the measurement chamber. As the exhaust gasses get richer or leaner, the amount of oxygen that must be pumped in or out to maintain a stoichiometric air/fuel ratio in the measurement chamber varies in proportion to the air/fuel ratio. The amount of current required to pump the oxygen ions in or out of the measurement chamber is used to measure the air/fuel ratio. The measured air/fuel ratio is actually the output from the current controller in the PCM and not a signal that comes directly from the sensor. The universal HO2S also uses a self-contained reference chamber to make sure an oxygen differential is always present. The oxygen for the reference chamber is supplied by pumping small amounts of oxygen ions from the measurement chamber into the reference chamber. The universal HO2S does not need access to outside air. Part to part variance is compensated for by placing a resistor in the connector. This resistor is used to trim the current measured by the current controller in the PCM. Embedded with the sensing element is the universal H02S heater. The heater allows the engine to enter closed loop operation sooner. The heating element heats the sensor to a temperature of 780°C (1,436°F). The VPWR circuit supplies voltage to the heater. The PCM controls the heater on and off by providing the ground to maintain the sensor at the correct temperature for maximum accuracy. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) Exploded View Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the 7 bolts (5 shown) and the LH splash shield. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 2627 3. Disconnect the heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) electrical connector. 4. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in removal. Using the special tool, remove the HO2S. - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 5. NOTE: Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the HO2S. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 2628 Oxygen Sensor: Service and Repair Catalyst Monitor Sensor CATALYST MONITOR SENSOR Exploded View Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the 7 bolts (5 shown) and the LH splash shield. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Oxygen Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) > Page 2629 3. Disconnect the catalyst monitor sensor electrical connector and detach the wiring retainer(s). 4. NOTE: If necessary, lubricate the sensor threads with penetrating and lock lubricant to assist in removal. Using the special tool, remove the catalyst monitor sensor. - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 5. NOTE: Apply a light coat of anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the catalyst monitor sensor. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor The PSP sensor monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP sensor voltage input to the PCM changes as the hydraulic pressure changes. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the PCM to adjust the transmission electronic pressure control (EPC) pressure during increased engine load, for example, during parking maneuvers. Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The PSP switch monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP switch is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic pressure increases. The PCM provides a low current voltage on the PSP circuit. When the PSP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low through the SIG RTN circuit. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust the transmission electronic pressure control (EPC) pressure during increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations View 151-6 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams > Differential Pressure EGR Vacuum Regulator C1083 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams > Differential Pressure EGR Vacuum Regulator > Page 2638 C1068 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2639 Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor receives this signal through 2 hoses referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor housing for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback. Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2640 The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is identical in operation as the larger plastic differential pressure feedback EGR sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the side of the sensor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2641 Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Service and Repair DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SENSOR Exploded View Part 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2642 Part 2 Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor electrical connector and detach the wiring harness retainer. 2. Carefully detach the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor from the EGR valve tube. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Throttle Position Sensor: Locations View 151-6 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2646 View 151-8 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2647 Throttle Position Sensor: Diagrams C189 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2648 C1189 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2649 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor The ETB throttle position sensor has 2 signal circuits in the sensor for redundancy. The redundant ETB throttle position signals are required for increased monitoring. The first ETB throttle position sensor signal (TP1) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the second signal (TP2) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). The 2 ETB throttle position sensor signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. There is 1 reference voltage circuit and 1 signal return circuit for the sensor. The reference voltage circuit and the signal return circuit is shared with the reference voltage circuits and signal return circuits used by the APP sensor. Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Typical TP Sensor The TP sensor is a rotary potentiometer sensor that provides a signal to the PCM that is linearly proportional to the throttle plate/shaft position. The sensor housing has a 3-blade electrical connector that may be gold plated. The gold plating increases the corrosion resistance on the terminals and increases the connector durability. The TP sensor is mounted on the throttle body. As the TP sensor is rotated by the throttle shaft, 4 operating conditions are determined by the PCM from the TP. The operating conditions are: closed throttle (includes idle or deceleration) - part throttle (includes cruise or moderate acceleration) - wide open throttle (includes maximum acceleration or de-choke on crank) - throttle angle rate Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2650 Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the throttle position (TP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the 2 screws and the TP sensor. - To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations View 151-10 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 2654 View 151-11 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 2655 C167 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 2656 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Adjustment Special Tool(s) 1. Remove the battery and tray. 2. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position. Loosen the transmission range (TR) sensor bolts. 3. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft). 4. Install the battery and tray. 5. Check for correct operation. The engine should start only in PARK or NEUTRAL. The reverse lamps should illuminate in the REVERSE position. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 2657 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Special Tool(s) Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the battery and tray. 3. Remove the transmission range (TR) sensor. 1 Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector. 2 Remove the TR sensor retaining bolts. 3 Remove the TR sensor. Installation 1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position. Install the TR sensor and loosely install the bolts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 2658 2. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft). 3. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 4. Install the battery and tray. 5. Check the correct operation. The engine should start only in PARK or NEUTRAL. The reverse lamps should illuminate in the REVERSE position. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-12 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2662 C1088 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2663 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor The OSS sensor provides the PCM with information about the rotational speed of an output shaft. The PCM uses the information to control and diagnose powertrain behavior. In some applications, the sensor is also used as the source of vehicle speed. The sensor may be physically located in different places on the vehicle, depending upon the specific application. The design of each speed sensor is unique and depends on which powertrain control feature uses the information that is generated. Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Typical Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) The VSS is a variable reluctance or Hall-effect sensor that generates a waveform with a frequency that is proportional to the speed of the vehicle. If the vehicle is moving at a relatively low velocity, the sensor produces a signal with a low frequency. As the vehicle velocity increases, the sensor generates a signal with a higher frequency. The PCM uses the frequency signal generated by the VSS (and other inputs) to control such parameters as fuel injection, ignition control, transmission/transaxle shift scheduling, and torque converter clutch scheduling. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Throttle Position Sensor: Locations View 151-6 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2667 View 151-8 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2668 Throttle Position Sensor: Diagrams C189 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2669 C1189 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2670 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor The ETB throttle position sensor has 2 signal circuits in the sensor for redundancy. The redundant ETB throttle position signals are required for increased monitoring. The first ETB throttle position sensor signal (TP1) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the second signal (TP2) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). The 2 ETB throttle position sensor signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. There is 1 reference voltage circuit and 1 signal return circuit for the sensor. The reference voltage circuit and the signal return circuit is shared with the reference voltage circuits and signal return circuits used by the APP sensor. Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Typical TP Sensor The TP sensor is a rotary potentiometer sensor that provides a signal to the PCM that is linearly proportional to the throttle plate/shaft position. The sensor housing has a 3-blade electrical connector that may be gold plated. The gold plating increases the corrosion resistance on the terminals and increases the connector durability. The TP sensor is mounted on the throttle body. As the TP sensor is rotated by the throttle shaft, 4 operating conditions are determined by the PCM from the TP. The operating conditions are: closed throttle (includes idle or deceleration) - part throttle (includes cruise or moderate acceleration) - wide open throttle (includes maximum acceleration or de-choke on crank) - throttle angle rate Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2671 Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the throttle position (TP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the 2 screws and the TP sensor. - To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations View 151-10 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 2675 View 151-11 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 2676 C167 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 2677 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Adjustment Special Tool(s) 1. Remove the battery and tray. 2. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position. Loosen the transmission range (TR) sensor bolts. 3. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft). 4. Install the battery and tray. 5. Check for correct operation. The engine should start only in PARK or NEUTRAL. The reverse lamps should illuminate in the REVERSE position. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 2678 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Special Tool(s) Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the battery and tray. 3. Remove the transmission range (TR) sensor. 1 Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector. 2 Remove the TR sensor retaining bolts. 3 Remove the TR sensor. Installation 1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position. Install the TR sensor and loosely install the bolts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 2679 2. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft). 3. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 4. Install the battery and tray. 5. Check the correct operation. The engine should start only in PARK or NEUTRAL. The reverse lamps should illuminate in the REVERSE position. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Description and Operation VARIABLE CAMSHAFT TIMING (VCT) SYSTEM Overview The VCT enables rotation of the camshaft(s) relative to the crankshaft rotation as a function of engine operating conditions. There are 4 types of VCT systems. - Exhaust phase shifting (EPS) system - the exhaust cam is the active cam being retarded. - Intake phase shifting (IPS) system - the intake cam is the active cam being advanced. - Dual equal phase shifting (DEPS) system - both intake and exhaust cams are phase shifted and equally advanced or retarded. - Dual independent phase shifting (DIPS) system - where both the intake and exhaust cams are shifted independently. All systems have 4 operational modes: idle, part throttle, wide open throttle (WOT), and default mode. At idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the powertrain control module (PCM) determines the phase angle based on air flow, engine oil temperature and engine coolant temperature. At part and wide open throttle the PCM determines the phase angle based on engine RPM, load, and throttle position. VCT systems provide reduced emissions and enhanced engine power, fuel economy and idle quality. IPS systems also have the added benefit of improved torque. In addition, some VCT system applications can eliminate the need for an external exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) system. The elimination of the EGR system is accomplished by controlling the overlap time between the intake valve opening and exhaust valve closing. Currently, both the IPS and DEPS systems are used. Variable Camshaft Timing (VCT) System VCT System The VCT system consists of an electric hydraulic positioning control solenoid, a camshaft position (CMP) sensor, and a trigger wheel. The CMP trigger wheel has a number of equally spaced teeth equal to the number (n) of cylinders on a bank plus one extra tooth (n+1). Four cylinder and V8 engines use a CMP 4+1 tooth trigger wheel. V6 engines use a CMP 3+1 tooth trigger wheel. The extra tooth placed between the equally spaced teeth represents the CMP signal for that bank. A crankshaft position (CKP) sensor provides the PCM with crankshaft positioning information in 10 degree increments. 1. The PCM receives input signals from the intake air temperature (IAT) sensor, engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor, engine oil temperature (EOT) sensor, CMP, throttle position (TP) sensor, mass air flow (MAF) sensor, and CKP to determine the operating conditions of the engine. At idle and low engine speeds with closed throttle, the PCM controls the camshaft position based on ECT, EOT, IAT, and MAF. During part and wide open throttle, the camshaft position is determined by engine RPM, load and throttle position. The VCT system does not operate until the engine is at normal operating temperature. 2. The VCT system is enabled by the PCM when the correct conditions are met. 3. The CKP signal is used as a reference for CMP positioning. 4. The VCT solenoid valve is an integral part of the VCT system. The solenoid valve controls the flow of engine oil in the VCT actuator assembly. As the PCM controls the duty cycle of the solenoid valve, oil pressure/flow advances or retards the cam timing. Duty cycles near 0% or 100% represent rapid movement of the camshaft. Retaining a fixed camshaft position is accomplished by dithering (oscillating) the solenoid valve duty cycle. The PCM calculates and determines the desired camshaft position. It continually updates the VCT solenoid duty cycle until the desired position is achieved. A difference between the desired and actual camshaft position represents a position error in the PCM VCT control loop. The PCM Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Variable Valve Timing Actuator > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2683 disables the VCT and places the camshaft in a default position if a concern is detected. A related DTC is also set when the concern is detected. 5. When the VCT solenoid is energized, engine oil is allowed to flow to the VCT actuator assembly which advances or retards the camshaft timing. One half of the VCT actuator is coupled to the camshaft and the other half is connected to the timing chain. Oil chambers between the 2 halves couple the camshaft to the timing chain. When the flow of oil is shifted from one side of the chamber to the other, the differential change in oil pressure forces the camshaft to rotate in either an advance or retard position depending on the oil flow. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-12 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2687 C1088 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Computers and Control Systems > Vehicle Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2688 Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor The OSS sensor provides the PCM with information about the rotational speed of an output shaft. The PCM uses the information to control and diagnose powertrain behavior. In some applications, the sensor is also used as the source of vehicle speed. The sensor may be physically located in different places on the vehicle, depending upon the specific application. The design of each speed sensor is unique and depends on which powertrain control feature uses the information that is generated. Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Typical Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) The VSS is a variable reluctance or Hall-effect sensor that generates a waveform with a frequency that is proportional to the speed of the vehicle. If the vehicle is moving at a relatively low velocity, the sensor produces a signal with a low frequency. As the vehicle velocity increases, the sensor generates a signal with a higher frequency. The PCM uses the frequency signal generated by the VSS (and other inputs) to control such parameters as fuel injection, ignition control, transmission/transaxle shift scheduling, and torque converter clutch scheduling. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Air Injection > Air Diverter Solenoid > Component Information > Description and Operation Air Diverter Solenoid: Description and Operation SECONDARY AIR INJECTION (AIR) BYPASS SOLENOID Secondary AIR Bypass Solenoid The secondary AIR bypass solenoid is used by the PCM to control vacuum to the secondary air injection diverter (AIR diverter) valve. The secondary AIR bypass solenoid is a normally closed solenoid. The secondary AIR bypass solenoid also has a filtered vent feature to permit vacuum release. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Air Injection > Air Diverter Valve > Component Information > Description and Operation Air Diverter Valve: Description and Operation SECONDARY AIR DIVERTER VALVE Secondary AIR Diverter Valve The secondary AIR diverter valve is used with the secondary AIR pump to provide on/off control of air to the exhaust manifold and catalytic converter. When the secondary AIR pump is on and vacuum is supplied to the AIR diverter valve, air passes the integral check valve disk. When the secondary AIR pump is off, and vacuum is removed from the AIR diverter valve, the integral check valve disk is held on the seat and stops air from being drawn into the exhaust system and prevents the back flow of the exhaust into the secondary AIR system. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Air Injection > Air Injection Pump > Component Information > Description and Operation Air Injection Pump: Description and Operation SECONDARY AIR PUMP Secondary Air Pump The secondary AIR pump provides pressurized air to the secondary AIR system. The secondary AIR pump functions independently of RPM and is controlled by the PCM. The secondary AIR pump is only used for short periods of time. Delivery of air is dependent on the amount of system backpressure and system voltage. The secondary AIR pump draws dry filtered air from the intake air system downstream of the MAF/IAT sensor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Specifications Catalytic Converter: Specifications Exhaust Manifold Studs ....................................................................................................................... ...................................................... 11 Nm (8 lb-ft). Discard the studs. Exhaust Manifold Nuts Discard the nuts. First pass ............................................................................................................................................. .................................................... 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). Final pass ............................................................ .................................................................................................................................... 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2703 Catalytic Converter: Description and Operation CATALYST AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS Overview V-Engines In-Line Engines The catalytic converter and exhaust systems work together to control the release of harmful engine exhaust emissions into the atmosphere. The engine exhaust gas consists mainly of nitrogen (N), carbon dioxide (CO2) and water vapor (H2O). However, it also contains carbon monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen (NOx), hydrogen (H), and various unburned hydrocarbons (HCs). The major air pollutants of CO, NOx,and HCs, and their emission into the atmosphere must be controlled. The exhaust system generally consists of an exhaust manifold, front exhaust pipe, front heated oxygen sensor (HO2S), rear exhaust pipe, catalyst HO2S, a muffler, and an exhaust tailpipe. The catalytic converter is typically installed between the front and rear exhaust pipes. On some vehicle applications, more than one catalyst is used between the front and rear exhaust pipes. Catalytic converter efficiency is monitored by the on board diagnostic (OBD) system strategy in the powertrain control module (PCM). For information on the OBD catalyst monitor, refer to the description for the Catalyst Efficiency Monitor. See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Monitors, Trips, Drive Cycles and Readiness Codes/Catalyst Efficiency Monitor For most vehicles, only 2 HO2Ss are used in an exhaust stream. The front sensors (HO2S11/HO2S21) before the catalyst are used for primary fuel control while the ones after the catalyst (HO2S12/HO2S22) are used to monitor catalyst efficiency. However, some partial zero emission vehicles (PZEV) use 3 HO2Ss for each engine bank. The stream 1 sensors (HO2S11/HO2S21) located before the catalyst are used for primary fuel control, the stream 2 sensors (HO2S12/HO2S22) are used to monitor the light-off catalyst, and the stream 3 sensors (HO2S13/HO2S23) located after the catalyst are used for long term fuel trim control to optimize catalyst efficiency (fore aft oxygen sensor control). Catalytic Converter A catalyst is a material that remains unchanged when it initiates and increases the speed of a chemical reaction. A catalyst also enables a chemical reaction to occur at a lower temperature. The concentration of exhaust gas products released to the atmosphere must be controlled. The catalytic Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2704 converter assists in this task. It contains a catalyst in the form of a specially treated ceramic honeycomb structure saturated with catalytically active precious metals. As the exhaust gases come in contact with the catalyst, they are changed into mostly harmless products. The catalyst initiates and speeds up heat producing chemical reactions of the exhaust gas components so they are used up as much as possible. Light Off Catalyst As the catalyst heats up, converter efficiency rises rapidly. The point at which conversion efficiency exceeds 50% is called catalyst light off. For most catalysts this point occurs at 246°C to 302°C (475°F to 575°F). A fast light catalyst is a 3-way catalyst (TWC) that is located as close to the exhaust manifold as possible. Because the light off catalyst is located close to the exhaust manifold it lights off faster and reduces emissions more quickly than the catalyst located under the body. Once the catalyst lights off, the catalyst quickly reaches the maximum conversion efficiency for that catalyst. Three-Way Catalyst (TWC) Conversion Efficiency TWC Conversion Efficiency Chart A TWC requires a stoichiometric fuel ratio, 14.7 pounds of air to 1 pound of fuel (14.7:1), for high conversion efficiency. In order to achieve these high efficiencies, the air/fuel ratio must be tightly controlled with a narrow window of stoichiometry. Deviations outside of this window greatly decrease the conversion efficiency. For example a rich mixture decreases the HC and CO conversion efficiency while a lean mixture decreases the NOx conversion efficiency. Exhaust System Typical Bank 1 Catalyst 2 HO2S Configuration Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Specifications > Page 2705 Typical Bank 1 Catalyst 3 HO2S Configuration The purpose of the exhaust system is to convey engine emissions from the exhaust manifold to the atmosphere. Engine exhaust emissions are directed from the engine exhaust manifold to the catalytic converter through the front exhaust pipe. A HO2S is mounted on the front exhaust pipe before the catalyst. The catalytic converter reduces the concentration of CO, unburned HCs, and NOx in the exhaust emissions to an acceptable level. The reduced exhaust emissions are directed from the catalytic converter past another HO2S mounted in the rear exhaust pipe and then on into the muffler. Finally, the exhaust emissions are directed to the atmosphere through an exhaust tailpipe. On some PZEV, there is a total of 3 HO2S in the exhaust stream. One near the exhaust manifold (stream 1), one in the middle of the light-off catalyst (stream 2), and the third (stream 3) is mounted after the light-off catalyst. Underbody Catalyst The underbody catalyst is located after the light off catalyst. The underbody catalyst may be in line with the light off catalyst, or the underbody catalyst may be common to 2 light off catalysts, forming a Y pipe configuration. For an exact configuration of the catalyst and exhaust system for a specific vehicle, refer to Exhaust System for the exhaust system-exploded view. Three-Way Catalytic (TWC) Converter The TWC converter contains either platinum (Pt) and rhodium (Rh) or palladium (Pd) and rhodium (Rh). The TWC converter catalyzes the oxidation reactions of unburned HCs and CO and the reduction reaction of NOx. The 3-way conversion can be best accomplished by always operating the engine air fuel/ratio at or close to stoichiometry. Exhaust Manifold Runners The exhaust manifold runners collect exhaust gases from engine cylinders. The number of exhaust manifolds and exhaust manifold runners depends on the engine configuration and number of cylinders. Exhaust Pipes Exhaust pipes are usually treated during manufacturing with an anti-corrosive coating agent to increase the life of the product. The pipes serve as guides for the flow of exhaust gases from the engine exhaust manifold through the catalytic converter and the muffler. Heated Oxygen Sensor (HO2S) The HO2Ss provide the PCM with information related to the oxygen content of the exhaust gas. Muffler Mufflers are usually treated during manufacturing with an anti-corrosive coating agent to increase the life of the product. The muffler reduces the level of noise produced by the engine, and also reduces the noise produced by exhaust gases as they travel from the catalytic converter to the atmosphere. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Catalytic Converter Catalytic Converter Removal and Installation CAUTION: Do not use oil or grease-based lubricants on the insulators. They may cause deterioration of the rubber. CAUTION: Oil or grease-based lubricants on the insulators may cause the exhaust hanger insulator to separate from the exhaust hanger bracket during vehicle operation. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove and discard the 2 exhaust catalytic converter nuts. ^ To install, tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft). 3. Remove and discard the U-bolt clamp assembly from the muffler. ^ To install, tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft). 4. Remove and discard the 2 resonator nuts. ^ To install, tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft). 5. Remove and discard the catalytic converter exhaust hanger. 6. Remove the exhaust catalytic converter and the muffler from the vehicle as an assembly. ^ Discard the catalytic converter gasket. 7. Separate the converter from the muffler. 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Install new gaskets and nuts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter > Page 2708 Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Catalytic Converter - LH Manifold Catalytic Converter - 3.0L LH Manifold Special Tool(s) Material Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter > Page 2709 Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the 5 bolts and the passenger side splash shield. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter > Page 2710 3. Disconnect the LH heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) and the LH catalyst monitor sensor electrical connectors. 4. Using the special tool, remove the H02S. 5. CAUTION: Do not allow the exhaust Y-pipe to hang from the flexible end. Support the exhaust Y-pipe or damage to the exhaust system may occur. Remove and discard the 4 exhaust Y-pipe nuts and position the exhaust Y-pipe aside. ^ Discard the gasket. 6. Remove and discard the 6 LH catalytic converter manifold nuts. 7. Remove the LH catalytic converter from the vehicle. ^ Discard the LH catalytic converter manifold gasket. 8. Remove and discard the 6 LH catalytic converter manifold studs. 9. Clean and inspect the LH catalytic converter manifold. Installation 1. Install the 6 new LH catalytic converter manifold studs. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft). 2. Position a new LH catalytic converter manifold gasket. 3. CAUTION: Failure to tighten the catalytic converter nuts to specification before installing the converter bracket bolts will cause the converter to develop an exhaust leak. CAUTION: Failure to tighten the catalytic converter nuts to specification a second time will cause the converter to develop an exhaust leak. NOTE: Make sure to tighten the nuts in the sequence in 2 stages. Position the LH catalytic converter and tighten the 6 exhaust manifold nuts in 2 stages in the sequence shown. ^ Stage 1: Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). ^ Stage 2: Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter > Page 2711 4. Position the exhaust Y-pipe gasket. 5. Position the exhaust Y-pipe and install the 4 new exhaust Y-pipe nuts. ^ Tighten the nuts to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft). 6. NOTE: Make sure to apply anti-seize lubricant to the threads of the HO2S before installation Using the special tool, install the HO2S. ^ Tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft). 7. Install the passenger side splash shield and the 5 bolts. 8. Connect the LH HO2S and catalyst monitor sensor electrical connectors. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter > Page 2712 Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Catalytic Converter - RH Manifold Catalytic Converter - 3.0L RH Manifold Catalytic Converter - 3.0L RH Manifold Removal 1. Remove the exhaust Y-pipe. 2. Disconnect the RH heated oxygen sensor (HO2S) electrical connector. 3. Disconnect the EGR tube nut from the RH catalytic converter. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Catalytic Converter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Catalytic Converter > Page 2713 4. Remove and discard the 6 RH catalytic converter manifold nuts and remove the converter. ^ Discard the RH catalytic converter manifold gasket. 5. Remove and discard the 6 RH catalytic converter studs. 6. Clean and inspect the RH catalytic converter manifold. Installation 1. Install the 6 new RH catalytic converter manifold studs. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft). 2. Position a new RH catalytic converter manifold gasket. 3. CAUTION: Failure to tighten the catalytic converter nuts to specification before installing the converter bracket bolts will cause the converter to develop an exhaust leak. CAUTION: Failure to tighten the catalytic converter nuts to specification a second time will cause the converter to develop an exhaust leak. NOTE: Make sure to tighten the nuts in the sequence in 2 stages. Position the RH catalytic converter and tighten the 6 exhaust manifold nuts in 2 stages in the sequence shown. ^ Stage 1: Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). ^ Stage 2: Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 4. Connect the EGR tube nut to the RH catalytic converter. ^ Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 5. Connect the HO2S electrical connector. 6. Install the exhaust Y-pipe. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Diagrams C123 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2718 Canister Purge Control Valve: Description and Operation EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER PURGE VALVE Typical EVAP Canister Purge Valve NOTE: The EVAP canister purge valve may also be referred to as a vapor management valve (VMV). The EVAP canister purge valve is part of the enhanced EVAP system that is controlled by the PCM. This valve controls the flow of vapors (purging) from the EVAP canister to the intake manifold during various engine operating modes. The EVAP canister purge valve is a normally closed valve. The EVAP canister purge valve controls the flow of vapors by way of a solenoid, eliminating the need for an electronic vacuum regulator and vacuum diaphragm. The PCM outputs a signal between 0 mA and 1,000 mA to control the EVAP canister purge valve. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Canister Purge Control Valve > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2719 Canister Purge Control Valve: Service and Repair EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CANISTER PURGE VALVE Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the evaporative emissions (EVAP) canister purge valve electrical connector. 2. Disconnect the 2 fuel vapor tube-to-EVAP canister purge valve quick connect couplings. 3. Depress the tab and remove the EVAP canister purge valve from the bracket. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Carry out the evaporative emission system leak test. See: Testing and Inspection - Carry out the evaporative emissions repair verification drive cycle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Canister Filter > Component Information > Service and Repair Evaporative Canister Filter: Service and Repair DUST SEPARATOR Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the fuel tank filler pipe vent tube from the dust separator. 3. Depress the retainer tab and remove the dust separator from the fuel vapor tube and the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister bracket 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Service and Repair Evaporative Emission Control Canister: Service and Repair EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CANISTER Part 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emission Control Canister > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2726 Part 2 Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister vent solenoid electrical connector. 3. Disconnect the fuel tank filler pipe vent tube from the dust separator. 4. Release the fuel vapor tube assembly-to-EVAP canister quick connect coupling. 5. Remove the 2 nuts, 3 bolts and the EVAP canister assembly. - To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Carry out the evaporative emission system leak test. See: Testing and Inspection - Carry out evaporative emission repair verification drive cycle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair Evaporative Emissions Hose: Service and Repair FUEL VAPOR TUBE ASSEMBLY Part 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Evaporative Emissions Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2730 Part 2 Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Position a suitable lifting device under the fuel tank. 3. Remove the LH fuel tank bolt and position aside the strap. - To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft). 4. Partially lower the LH side of the fuel tank enough to access the fuel vapor tube assembly. 5. Disconnect the fuel pump (FP) module and fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor electrical connectors 6. Disconnect the fuel vapor tube assembly-to-fuel tank quick connect coupling. 7. Disconnect the fuel vapor tube assembly-to-evaporative emission (EVAP) canister quick connect coupling. 8. Disconnect the fuel vapor tube-to-fuel vapor tube assembly nipple quick connect coupling. 9. Release the retainer clip and remove the fuel vapor tube assembly. 10. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Carry out the evaporative emission system leak test. See: Testing and Inspection - Carry out the evaporative emission repair verification drive cycle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak Detection Solenoid, Evaporative System > Component Information > Description and Operation Leak Detection Solenoid: Description and Operation CANISTER VENT (CV) SOLENOID Typical Canister Vent (CV) Solenoid During the evaporative emissions (EVAP) leak check monitor, the CV solenoid seals the EVAP canister from the atmospheric pressure. This allows the EVAP canister purge valve to obtain the target vacuum in the fuel tank during the EVAP leak check monitor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak Detection Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations View 151-27 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak Detection Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations > Page 2737 C377 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Evaporative Emissions System > Leak Detection Valve, Evaporative System > Component Information > Locations > Page 2738 Leak Detection Valve: Service and Repair EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CANISTER VENT SOLENOID Removal and Installation 1. Remove the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister assembly. 2. Disconnect the fuel vapor tube from the EVAP canister vent solenoid. 3. Remove the EVAP canister vent solenoid from the EVAP canister carbon canister. - Apply clean oil to the EVAP canister vent solenoid O-ring seal prior to installation. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Carry out the evaporative emission system leak test. See: Testing and Inspection - Carry out the evaporative emission repair verification drive cycle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Electronic Vacuum Regulator Solenoid > Component Information > Description and Operation EGR Electronic Vacuum Regulator Solenoid: Description and Operation EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) VACUUM REGULATOR SOLENOID EGR Vacuum Regulator Solenoid Vacuum Output (IN-HG) EGR Vacuum Regulator Solenoid Data The EGR vacuum regulator solenoid is an electromagnetic device used to regulate the vacuum supply to the EGR valve. The solenoid contains a coil which magnetically controls the position of a disc to regulate the vacuum. As the duty cycle to the coil increases, the vacuum signal passed through the solenoid to the EGR valve also increases. Vacuum not directed to the EGR valve is vented through the solenoid vent to atmosphere. Note that at 0% duty cycle (no electrical signal applied), the EGR vacuum regulator solenoid allows some vacuum to pass, but not enough to open the EGR valve. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Electronic Vacuum Regulator Solenoid > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2743 EGR Electronic Vacuum Regulator Solenoid: Service and Repair EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) VACUUM REGULATOR VALVE Exploded View Part 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Electronic Vacuum Regulator Solenoid > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2744 Part 2 Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the EGR vacuum regulator valve electrical connector. 2. Disconnect the EGR vacuum regulator valve vacuum tube fitting. 3. Remove the EGR vacuum regulator valve stud nut and detach the engine wiring harness bracket. - To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 4. Detach the wiring harness retainer from the EGR vacuum regulator valve stud. 5. Remove the 2 EGR vacuum regulator valve studs and the EGR vacuum regulator valve. - To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Tube > Component Information > Description and Operation EGR Tube: Description and Operation EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) ORIFICE TUBE ASSEMBLY EGR Orifice Tube Assembly The orifice tube assembly is a section of tubing connecting the exhaust system to the intake manifold. The assembly provides the flow path for the EGR to the intake manifold and also contains the metering orifice and 2 pressure pick-up tubes. The internal metering orifice creates a measurable pressure drop across it as the EGR valve opens and closes. This pressure differential across the orifice is picked up by the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor which provides feedback to the PCM. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Tube > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2748 EGR Tube: Service and Repair EXHAUST MANIFOLD TO EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) VALVE TUBE Exploded View Part 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Tube > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2749 Part 2 Removal and Installation 1. Carefully detach the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor from the EGR valve tube and position aside. 2. Disconnect the exhaust manifold-to-EGR valve tube fitting from the EGR valve. - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 3. Disconnect the exhaust manifold-to-EGR valve tube fitting from the RH catalytic convertor. - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 4. Remove the EGR valve tube. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Locations View 151-8 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Locations > Page 2753 C1160 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Locations > Page 2754 EGR Valve: Description and Operation Electric Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EEGR) Valve EEGR Motor/Valve Assembly Depending on the application, the EEGR valve is a water cooled or an air cooled motor/valve assembly. The motor is commanded to move in 52 discrete steps as it acts directly on the EEGR valve. The position of the valve determines the rate of EGR. The built-in spring works to close the valve (against the motor opening force). Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System Module (ESM) ESM Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Locations > Page 2755 The ESM is an integrated differential pressure feedback EGR system that functions in the same manner as a conventional differential pressure feedback EGR system. The various system components have been integrated into a single component called the ESM. The flange of the valve portion of the ESM bolts directly to the intake manifold with a metal gasket that forms the metering orifice. This arrangement increases system reliability, response time, and system precision. By relocating the EGR orifice from the exhaust to the intake side of the EGR valve, the downstream pressure signal measures manifold absolute pressure (MAP). This MAP signal is used for EGR correction and inferred barometric pressure (BARO) at key on. The system provides the powertrain control module (PCM) with a differential pressure feedback EGR signal, identical to a traditional differential pressure feedback EGR system. Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Valve Typical EGR Valve EGR Flowrate The EGR valve in the differential pressure feedback EGR system is a conventional, vacuum-actuated. The valve increases or decreases the flow of EGR. As vacuum applied to the EGR valve diaphragm overcomes the spring force, the valve begins to open. As the vacuum signal weakens, at 5.4 kPa (1.6 in-Hg) or less, the spring force closes the valve. The EGR valve is fully open at about 15 kPa (4.5 in-Hg). Since EGR flow requirement varies greatly, providing repair specifications on flow rate is impractical. The on board diagnostic (OBD) system monitors the EGR valve function and triggers a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) if the test criteria is not met. The EGR valve flow rate is not measured directly as part of the diagnostic procedures. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Locations > Page 2756 EGR Valve: Service and Repair EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) VALVE Exploded View Part 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > EGR Valve > Component Information > Locations > Page 2757 Part 2 Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the EGR valve tube-to-EGR valve upper fitting. - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 2. Disconnect the vacuum tube fitting from the EGR valve. 3. Remove the 2 bolts and the EGR valve. - To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 4. CAUTION: Do not use metal scrapers, wire brushes, power abrasive discs or other abrasive means to clean the sealing surfaces. These tools cause scratches and gouges that make leak paths. Use a plastic scraping tool to remove all traces of the exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) valve gasket. NOTE: If there is no residual gasket material present, metal surface prep can be used to clean and prepare the surfaces - Do not reuse the EGR valve gasket. Remove and discard the EGR valve gasket. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations View 151-6 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams > Differential Pressure EGR Vacuum Regulator C1083 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams > Differential Pressure EGR Vacuum Regulator > Page 2763 C1068 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2764 Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor receives this signal through 2 hoses referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor housing for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback. Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2765 The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is identical in operation as the larger plastic differential pressure feedback EGR sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the side of the sensor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2766 Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Service and Repair DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SENSOR Exploded View Part 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Exhaust Gas Recirculation > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2767 Part 2 Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor electrical connector and detach the wiring harness retainer. 2. Carefully detach the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor from the EGR valve tube. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Positive Crankcase Ventilation > Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair Positive Crankcase Ventilation Valve: Service and Repair POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION (PCV) VALVE Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the crankcase ventilation tube-to-PCV valve quick connect coupling. 2. CAUTION: A new positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) valve must be installed if removed from the valve cover. Damage will occur to the locking mechanism on the PCV valve upon removal. Rotate the PCV valve counterclockwise and remove it from the valve cover. Discard the PCV valve. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Locations View 151-6 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams > Differential Pressure EGR Vacuum Regulator C1083 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams > Differential Pressure EGR Vacuum Regulator > Page 2778 C1068 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2779 Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Description and Operation Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is a ceramic, capacitive-type pressure transducer that monitors the differential pressure across a metering orifice located in the orifice tube assembly. The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor receives this signal through 2 hoses referred to as the downstream pressure hose (REF SIGNAL) and upstream pressure hose (HI SIGNAL). The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor housing for identification (note that the HI signal uses a larger diameter hose). The differential pressure feedback EGR sensor outputs a voltage proportional to the pressure drop across the metering orifice and supplies it to the PCM as EGR flow rate feedback. Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted Differential Pressure Feedback Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Sensor - Tube Mounted Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2780 The tube mounted differential pressure feedback EGR sensor is identical in operation as the larger plastic differential pressure feedback EGR sensors and uses a 1.0 volt offset. The HI and REF hose connections are marked on the side of the sensor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2781 Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor: Service and Repair DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SENSOR Exploded View Part 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Emission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches - Emission Control Systems > Pressure Feedback Exhaust Sensor, EGR > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2782 Part 2 Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor electrical connector and detach the wiring harness retainer. 2. Carefully detach the differential pressure feedback EGR sensor from the EGR valve tube. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications Item....................................................................................................................................................... ..............................................................Specification Engine idling......................................................................................................................................... ..........................................................269 kPa (39 psi) Fuel pump output volume per 10 seconds...... .................................................................................................................................................125 cc (4.32 oz) Key on, engine off................................................................................................................. ..........................................................................269 kPa (39 psi) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 2787 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE TEST Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) WARNING: - Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. All vehicles 1. Release the fuel system pressure. Vehicles with 2.3L engine 2. Disconnect the fuel tube-to-fuel rail quick connect coupling. 3. Install the special tool between the fuel tube and the fuel rail. Vehicles with 3.0L engine 4. Remove the air cleaner outlet pipe. 5. Disconnect the fuel tube-to-fuel rail quick connect coupling. 6. NOTE: Use a commercially available fuel test adapter (such as OTC 18527). Install the special tool and fuel test adapter between the fuel tube and the fuel rail. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 2788 7. NOTE: The air cleaner outlet pipe must be installed prior to completing the fuel system pressure test. Install the air cleaner outlet pipe. All vehicles 8. NOTE: The fuel pump (FP) driver module electrical connector that was disconnected to release the fuel system pressure must be reconnected to test the fuel system pressure. Connect the FP driver module electrical connector. 9. NOTE: It may take more than one key cycle to pressurize the fuel system. Cycle the ignition key and wait 3 seconds to pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before starting the engine. 10. NOTE: Upon completion of the fuel system pressure test, open the drain valve on the special tool and release fuel system pressure and drain any residual fuel into a suitable container prior to removing the tool Test the fuel system pressure to make sure it is within the specified range. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE RELEASE WARNING: - Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the fuel pump (FP) driver module electrical connector. 3. Start the engine and allow it to idle until it stalls. 4. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately 5 seconds to make sure the fuel injection supply manifold pressure has been released. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 6. When fuel system service is complete, connect the FP driver module electrical connector. 7. NOTE: It may take more than one key cycle to pressurize the fuel system. Cycle the ignition key and wait 3 seconds to pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before starting the engine. 8. Start the vehicle and check the fuel system for leaks. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed > System Information > Specifications Idle Speed: Specifications Measured/PID Values Hot Idle ................................................................................................................................................ ........................................................ 705-820 RPM Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - Throttle Cable To Pedal Connector Kit Accelerator Pedal: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Throttle Cable To Pedal Connector Kit TSB 09-21-9 11/02/09 NEW SERVICE KIT AVAILABLE FOR ACCELERATOR CABLE TO PEDAL CONNECTION FORD: 2007-2008 Escape MERCURY: 2007-2008 Mariner ISSUE Some 2007-2008 Escape and Mariner (excluding Hybrid) may require the accelerator cable to accelerator pedal connection repaired. A new service clip has been released for use, in lieu of replacing the cable and/or pedal assemblies. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Position clip on top part of pedal. (Figure 1) 2. Snap bottom of clip onto pedal by pushing forward. (Figure 2) 3. Check to make sure clip is completely snapped in place. Move accelerator pedal from idle to wide open throttle and check that surrounding components do not come in contact with the pedal. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - Throttle Cable To Pedal Connector Kit > Page 2799 Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092109A 2007-2008 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner (Excludes Hybrid): Install Accelerator Cable To Pedal Service Kit DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9825 33 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 2800 Torque Specifications Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Accelerator Pedal: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION Verify the condition by operating the accelerator pedal and shaft from idle to wide open-throttle and back again. Check for any resistance in forward travel of the accelerator pedal and shaft or hesitation on return. If a concern exists, visually inspect all components of the accelerator pedal and shaft. Look for damage or binding of the accelerator cable. Look for obstructions at the throttle body and accelerator pedal and shaft. For vehicles equipped with speed control, examine the speed control cable. Refer to Cruise Control. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 2803 Symptom Chart Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 2804 Accelerator Pedal: Service and Repair ACCELERATOR PEDAL AND SHAFT Removal and Installation WARNING: Keep the sliding inner cable of the accelerator cable, the accelerator pedal and the pedal shaft free of contact with surrounding components such as wiring, hoses, sound insulation and floor carpeting. Contact in these areas may prevent movement of the accelerator cable, reducing the ability to decelerate the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury to the vehicle occupant(s). NOTE: The accelerator pedal and shaft should travel smoothly from idle to wide-open throttle positions. Hesitation on return or prevention of return to the idle position must not occur. 1. Remove the accelerator cable from the accelerator pedal. 2. Remove the 2 bolts and the accelerator pedal and shaft assembly. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR The APP sensor is an input to the powertrain control module (PCM) and is used to determine the amount of torque requested by the operator. Depending on the application either a 2-track or 3-track APP sensor is used. 2-Track APP Sensor 2-Track APP Sensor There are 2 pedal position signals in the sensor. Both signals, APP1 and APP2, have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage), but are offset and increase at different rates. The 2 pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other input is used. There are 2 reference voltage circuits, 2 signal return circuits, and 2 signal circuits (a total of 6 circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. The reference voltage circuits and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage circuit and signal return circuit used by the electronic throttle body (ETB) throttle position sensor. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. 3-Track APP Sensor Typical 3-Track APP Sensor There are 3 pedal position signals in the sensor. Signal 1, APP1, has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and signals 2 and 3, APP2 and APP3, both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation APP1 is used as the indication of pedal position by the strategy. The 3 pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other inputs are used. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. There are 2 reference voltage circuits, 2 signal return circuits, and 3 signal circuits (a total of 7 circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. The reference voltage circuits and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage circuit and signal return circuit used by the electronic throttle body (ETB) throttle position sensor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Cleaner Housing > Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair AIR CLEANER INTAKE PIPE Exploded View Removal and Installation 1. Remove the battery tray. 2. Remove the bolt and the air cleaner intake pipe. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 3. NOTE: Make sure that the front sponge seal of the intake pipe is seated on the shroud panel. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations View 151-4 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2815 View 151-5 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2816 C128 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2817 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot And Cold Wire (and IAT Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2818 Typical Drop-in Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F) above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the mass air flow. The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC), shift and torque converter clutch scheduling. The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner assembly. Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology with an integrated intake air temperature (IAT) sensor. The hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced as an assembly. Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2819 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the 2 screws and the MAF sensor. - To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filler Cap Warning Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Filler Cap Warning Indicator: Description and Operation CHECK FUEL CAP INDICATOR The check fuel cap indicator is a communications network message sent by the PCM. The PCM sends the message to illuminate the lamp when the strategy determines there is a concern in the EVAP system due to the fuel filler cap or capless fuel tank filler pipe not being sealed correctly. This would be detected by the inability to pull vacuum in the fuel tank, after a fueling event. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Filter > Fuel Pressure Release > System Information > Service and Repair Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE RELEASE WARNING: - Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Disconnect the fuel pump (FP) driver module electrical connector. 3. Start the engine and allow it to idle until it stalls. 4. After the engine stalls, crank the engine for approximately 5 seconds to make sure the fuel injection supply manifold pressure has been released. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 6. When fuel system service is complete, connect the FP driver module electrical connector. 7. NOTE: It may take more than one key cycle to pressurize the fuel system. Cycle the ignition key and wait 3 seconds to pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before starting the engine. 8. Start the vehicle and check the fuel system for leaks. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications Fuel Injector: Electrical Specifications Fuel Injector Resistance ...................................................................................................................... ............................................................. 11 - 18 Ohms Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 2831 Fuel Injector: Pressure, Vacuum and Temperature Specifications Fuel Injector Flow and Leakage ............................................................... Refer to Pinpoint Test HC12 through HC14 at Computers and Control Systems. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Fuel Injector 1 C181 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Fuel Injector 1 > Page 2834 C182 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Fuel Injector 1 > Page 2835 C183 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Fuel Injector 1 > Page 2836 C184 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Fuel Injector 1 > Page 2837 Fuel Injector: Diagrams C181 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Fuel Injector 1 > Page 2838 C182 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Fuel Injector 1 > Page 2839 C183 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Fuel Injector 1 > Page 2840 C184 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Fuel Injector 1 > Page 2841 C185 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Fuel Injector 1 > Page 2842 C186 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2843 Fuel Injector: Description and Operation FUEL INJECTORS Typical Fuel Injector CAUTION: Do not apply battery positive voltage (B+) directly to the fuel injector electrical connector terminals. The solenoids may be damaged internally in a matter of seconds. The fuel injector is a solenoid-operated valve that meters fuel flow to the engine. The fuel injector is opened and closed a constant number of times per crankshaft revolution. The amount of fuel is controlled by the length of time the fuel injector is held open. The fuel injector is normally closed, and is operated by a 12-volt source from either the electronic engine control (EEC) power relay or fuel pump relay. The ground signal is controlled by the PCM. The injector is the deposit resistant injector (DRI) type and does not have to be cleaned. However, it can be flow checked and, if found outside of specification, a new fuel injector should be installed. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2844 Fuel Injector: Service and Repair FUEL RAIL Exploded View Removal WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. 1. Release the fuel system pressure. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Remove the upper intake manifold. 4. Disconnect the fuel supply tube quick connect coupling at the fuel rail. 5. Disconnect the fuel rail pressure and temperature sensor vacuum tube and electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the 6 fuel injector electrical connectors. 7. Remove the 4 fuel rail bolts. 8. Detach the fuel charging wiring harness retainers from the fuel rail and remove the fuel rail and injectors as an assembly. 9. Remove the 6 fuel injectors. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Injector > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2845 - Remove and discard the 12 fuel injector O-ring seals. Installation 1. CAUTION: Use O-ring seals that are made of special fuel-resistant material. Use of ordinary O-rings can cause the fuel system to leak. Do not reuse the O-ring seals. NOTE: Install new fuel injector O-ring seals and lubricate them with clean engine oil. Install the fuel injectors. 2. Position the fuel rail and install the bolts. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 3. Attach the fuel charging wiring harness retainers to the fuel rail. 4. Connect the 6 fuel injector electrical connectors. 5. Connect the fuel rail pressure and temperature sensor vacuum tube and electrical connector. 6. Connect the fuel supply tube quick connect coupling at the fuel rail. 7. Install the upper intake manifold. 8. Connect the battery ground cable. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Couplings Fuel Line Coupler: Service and Repair Spring Lock Couplings SPRING LOCK COUPLINGS Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Disconnect WARNING: - Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. 1. Release the fuel system pressure. 2. Remove the safety clip from the spring lock coupling. 3. Insert the special tool onto the fuel tube and into the spring lock coupling. 4. Separate the spring lock coupling from the fuel tube. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Couplings > Page 2850 Connect 1. Clean and inspect the fuel tube and spring lock coupling. - Lubricate the end of the fuel tube with clean engine oil. 2. Install the spring lock coupling onto the fuel tube until fully seated. 3. Pull on the spring lock coupling to make sure it is correctly locked onto the fuel tube. 4. Install the safety clip onto the spring lock coupling. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Couplings > Page 2851 Fuel Line Coupler: Service and Repair Quick Connect Coupling QUICK CONNECT COUPLING Disconnect - Type I WARNING: - Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. 1. If servicing a liquid fuel tube quick connect coupling, release the fuel system pressure. 2. NOTE: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use compressed air to remove any foreign material from the connector retaining clip area before separating from the tube. Disconnect the quick connect coupling from the tube. Press the quick connect coupling release button and separate the quick connect coupling from the tube. Connect - Type I 1. NOTE: - Apply clean engine oil to the end of the tube and the quick connect coupling O-ring seals. - Make sure the tube clicks into place when installing into the quick connect coupling. To make sure that the tube is fully seated, pull on the tube. Install the quick connect coupling onto the tube until fully seated. Disconnect - Type II WARNING: - Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Couplings > Page 2852 fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. 1. Rotate the lock tab on the quick connect coupling. 2. NOTE: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use compressed air to remove any foreign material from the connector retaining clip area before separating from the tube. Disconnect the quick connect coupling from the fitting. Pull on the quick connect coupling and separate from the fitting. Connect - Type II 1. NOTE: Apply clean engine oil to the end of the tube and the quick connect coupling O-ring seals. Rotate the lock tab and install the quick connect coupling onto the fitting. 2. NOTE: Make sure the fuel tube clicks into place when installing the tube. To make sure that the fuel tube is fully seated, pull on the tube. Release the lock tab into the latched position. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Couplings > Page 2853 Disconnect - Type III WARNING: - Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. 1. If servicing a liquid fuel tube quick connect coupling, release the fuel system pressure. 2. NOTE: Carefully release the lock tab to avoid breakage. Release the quick connect coupling primary lock tab. 3. Rotate the primary lock tab to the fully un-locked position and squeeze the secondary lock tabs to release the locking mechanism. 4. NOTE: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use compressed air to remove any foreign material from the connector retaining clip area before separating from the tube. Disconnect the quick connect coupling from the tube. Push the locking mechanism outward and separate the quick connect coupling from the tube. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Couplings > Page 2854 Connect - Type III 1. NOTE: - Apply clean engine oil to the end of the tube and the quick connect coupling O-ring seals. - Make sure the tube clicks into place when installing it into the quick connect coupling. To make sure the tube is fully seated, pull on the tube. Install the quick connect coupling onto the tube until fully seated. 2. NOTE: Make sure the retainer clip clicks into place when installing. Depress the retainer clip until it is flush with the quick connect coupling housing. 3. NOTE: To make sure the tube is fully seated, pull on the quick connect coupling. Rotate the primary locking tab to the closed position. Disconnect - Type IV WARNING: - Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Line Coupler > Component Information > Service and Repair > Spring Lock Couplings > Page 2855 instruction may result in serious personal injury. 1. If servicing a liquid fuel tube quick connect coupling, release the fuel system pressure. 2. Squeeze the quick connect coupling retainer clip tabs to release the locking mechanism. 3. NOTE: When reusing liquid or vapor tube connectors, make sure to use compressed air to remove any foreign material from the connector retaining clip area before separating from the tube. Disconnect the quick connect coupling from the tube. Push the locking mechanism outward to release the quick connect coupling. - Pull on the quick connect coupling and separate it from the tube. Connect - Type IV 1. NOTE: - Apply clean engine oil to the end of the tube and the quick connect coupling O-ring seals. - Make sure the tube clicks into place when installing into the quick connect coupling. To make sure that the tube is fully seated, pull on the tube. Connect the quick connect coupling to the tube. 1 Install the quick connect coupling onto the tube until it is fully seated. 2 Depress the locking tab until it is flush with the quick connect coupling housing. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations View 151-6 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2859 View 151-8 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2860 C173 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2861 Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation FUEL RAIL PRESSURE TEMPERATURE (FRPT) SENSOR Typical Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor The FRPT sensor measures the pressure and temperature of the fuel in the fuel rail and sends these signals to the PCM. The sensor uses the intake manifold vacuum as a reference to determine the pressure difference between the fuel rail and the intake manifold. The relationship between fuel pressure and fuel temperature is used to determine the possible presence of fuel vapor in the fuel rail. The temperature sensing portion of the FRPT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Both the pressure and temperature signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The speed of the fuel pump sustains fuel rail pressure which preserves fuel in its liquid state. The dynamic range of the fuel injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the injector pulse width to decrease. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2862 Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair FUEL RAIL PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE SENSOR Removal and Installation WARNING: - Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. 1. Release the fuel system pressure. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Disconnect the fuel rail pressure and temperature sensor electrical connector and vacuum tube. 4. Remove the 2 bolts and the fuel rail pressure and temperature sensor. - To install, tighten to 4 Nm (35 lb-in). - Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary. 5. NOTE: Lubricate the fuel rail pressure and temperature sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Pulsation Damper > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Pressure Pulsation Damper: Description and Operation FUEL RAIL PULSE DAMPER Typical Fuel Rail Pulse Damper The fuel rail pulse damper is located on the fuel rail and reduces the fuel system noise caused by the pulsing of the fuel injectors. The vacuum port located on the damper is connected to manifold vacuum to avoid fuel spillage if the pulse damper diaphragm ruptures. The fuel rail pulse damper should not be confused with a fuel pressure regulator; it does not regulate the fuel rail pressure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications Fuel Pressure: Specifications Item....................................................................................................................................................... ..............................................................Specification Engine idling......................................................................................................................................... ..........................................................269 kPa (39 psi) Fuel pump output volume per 10 seconds...... .................................................................................................................................................125 cc (4.32 oz) Key on, engine off................................................................................................................. ..........................................................................269 kPa (39 psi) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 2870 Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURE TEST Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) WARNING: - Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. All vehicles 1. Release the fuel system pressure. Vehicles with 2.3L engine 2. Disconnect the fuel tube-to-fuel rail quick connect coupling. 3. Install the special tool between the fuel tube and the fuel rail. Vehicles with 3.0L engine 4. Remove the air cleaner outlet pipe. 5. Disconnect the fuel tube-to-fuel rail quick connect coupling. 6. NOTE: Use a commercially available fuel test adapter (such as OTC 18527). Install the special tool and fuel test adapter between the fuel tube and the fuel rail. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pressure > System Information > Specifications > Page 2871 7. NOTE: The air cleaner outlet pipe must be installed prior to completing the fuel system pressure test. Install the air cleaner outlet pipe. All vehicles 8. NOTE: The fuel pump (FP) driver module electrical connector that was disconnected to release the fuel system pressure must be reconnected to test the fuel system pressure. Connect the FP driver module electrical connector. 9. NOTE: It may take more than one key cycle to pressurize the fuel system. Cycle the ignition key and wait 3 seconds to pressurize the fuel system. Check for leaks before starting the engine. 10. NOTE: Upon completion of the fuel system pressure test, open the drain valve on the special tool and release fuel system pressure and drain any residual fuel into a suitable container prior to removing the tool Test the fuel system pressure to make sure it is within the specified range. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations View 151-27 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 2875 C4033 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 2879 Fuel Pump Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Service and Repair Fuel Rail: Service and Repair FUEL RAIL Exploded View Removal WARNING: Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. 1. Release the fuel system pressure. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Remove the upper intake manifold. 4. Disconnect the fuel supply tube quick connect coupling at the fuel rail. 5. Disconnect the fuel rail pressure and temperature sensor vacuum tube and electrical connector. 6. Disconnect the 6 fuel injector electrical connectors. 7. Remove the 4 fuel rail bolts. 8. Detach the fuel charging wiring harness retainers from the fuel rail and remove the fuel rail and injectors as an assembly. 9. Remove the 6 fuel injectors. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Rail > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2883 - Remove and discard the 12 fuel injector O-ring seals. Installation 1. CAUTION: Use O-ring seals that are made of special fuel-resistant material. Use of ordinary O-rings can cause the fuel system to leak. Do not reuse the O-ring seals. NOTE: Install new fuel injector O-ring seals and lubricate them with clean engine oil. Install the fuel injectors. 2. Position the fuel rail and install the bolts. - Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 3. Attach the fuel charging wiring harness retainers to the fuel rail. 4. Connect the 6 fuel injector electrical connectors. 5. Connect the fuel rail pressure and temperature sensor vacuum tube and electrical connector. 6. Connect the fuel supply tube quick connect coupling at the fuel rail. 7. Install the upper intake manifold. 8. Connect the battery ground cable. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Service and Repair Fuel Supply Line: Service and Repair FUEL LINES Exploded View Removal and Installation WARNING: - Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Supply Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2887 2. Release the fuel system pressure. 3. NOTE: Some residual fuel may remain in the fuel tubes after releasing the fuel system pressure. Upon disconnecting or removing any fuel tubes, carefully drain any residual fuel into a suitable container. Disconnect the fuel supply tube-to-fuel tube quick connect coupling. 4. Disconnect the fuel vapor tube-to-evaporative emission (EVAP) canister purge valve quick connect coupling. 5. Disconnect the fuel supply tube-to-fuel filter outlet spring lock coupling. 6. Disconnect the fuel vapor tube-to-fuel vapor tube assembly quick connect coupling. 7. Detach the fuel tube and the fuel vapor tube from the retainer clips and remove the tubes. 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair Fuel Filler Hose: Service and Repair FUEL TANK FILLER PIPE Exploded View Part 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2892 Part 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2893 Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2894 Removal and Installation WARNING: - Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. - Remove the fuel filler cap slowly. The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may spray out. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Release the fuel system pressure. 3. Release the fuel tank filler cap and position aside. 4. Insert the special tool into the fuel tank filler pipe until it opens the fuel tank level shutoff valve located at the inlet of the fuel tank. 5. NOTE: Due to the internal design of the fuel tank components, slow fuel drainage may occur. Using the special tools, drain as much fuel as possible from the fuel tank and filler pipe, lowering the fuel level below the inlet of the fuel tank. 6. Remove the 4 screws and the fuel pump (FP) module access cover. 7. NOTE: Clean the FP module connection, couplings, mounting flange and the immediate surrounding area of any dirt or foreign material. Disconnect the FP module electrical connector. 8. NOTE: Place absorbent toweling in the immediate surrounding area in case of fuel spills. Disconnect the fuel supply tube and fuel vapor tube-to-FP module quick connect couplings. 9. NOTE: Carefully remove the FP module lock ring and verify that enough fuel has been drained to avoid spillage. Using a suitable FP lock ring remover, rotate the lock ring counterclockwise and remove. 10. NOTE: A partial fuel tank drain is required to lower the fuel level below the fuel tank inlet and avoid fuel spillage upon removal of the fuel tank filler pipe hose and clamp. Position the FP module aside and, using the fuel storage tanker, drain enough fuel so the fuel level in the fuel tank is below the fuel tank inlet. 11. Remove the 2 fuel tank filler pipe flange screws and the dust cover. - To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 12. Remove the LH rear wheel and tire. 13. Remove the 3 rivets and the fuel tank filler pipe shield. 14. Remove the fuel tank filler pipe bracket bolt. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 15. Disconnect the fuel vapor tube-to-fuel tank filler pipe quick connect coupling. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Filler Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 2895 16. Detach the 2 fuel vapor tube retaining clips. 17. Disconnect the fuel tank filler pipe vent tube from the dust separator. 18. Release the clamp and remove the fuel tank filler pipe hose from the fuel tank. - To install, tighten to 4 Nm (35 lb-in). 19. Remove the fuel tank filler pipe. 20. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation Fuel Pump (FP) Module Typical Electronic Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module Typical Mechanical Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2899 The FP module is a device that contains the fuel pump and sender assembly. The fuel pump is located inside the FP module reservoir and supplies fuel through the FP module manifold to the engine and FP module jet pump. The jet pump continuously refills the reservoir with fuel, and a check valve located in the manifold outlet maintains system pressure when the fuel pump is not energized. A flapper valve located in the bottom of the reservoir allows fuel to enter the reservoir and prime the fuel pump during the initial fill. Fuel Pump (FP) Module and Reservoir The FP module is mounted inside the fuel tank in a reservoir. The pump has a discharge check valve that maintains the system pressure after the key has been turned off to minimize starting concerns. The reservoir prevents fuel flow interruptions during extreme vehicle maneuvers with low tank fill levels. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2900 Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair FUEL PUMP MODULE Exploded View Part 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2901 Part 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2902 Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2903 Removal and Installation WARNING: - Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. - Remove the fuel filler cap slowly. The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 2904 sound, wait until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may spray out. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. 1. Release the fuel system pressure. 2. Release the fuel tank filler cap and position aside. 3. Insert the special tool into the fuel tank filler pipe until it opens the fuel tank level shutoff valve located at the inlet of the fuel tank. 4. NOTE: Due to the internal design of the fuel tank components, slow fuel drainage may occur. Using the special tools, drain as much fuel as possible from the fuel tank and filler pipe, lowering the fuel level below the fuel pump (FP) mounting flange. 5. Remove the 4 screws and the FP module access cover. 6. NOTE: Clean the FP module connection, couplings, mounting flange and the immediate surrounding area of any dirt or foreign material. Disconnect the FP module electrical connector. 7. NOTE: Place absorbent toweling in the immediate surrounding area in case of fuel spills. Disconnect the fuel supply tube and fuel vapor recirculation tube-to-FP module quick connect couplings. 8. CAUTION: The fuel pump (FP) module must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the float arm and the filter. NOTE: Carefully remove the FP module lock ring and verify that enough fuel has been drained to avoid spillage. - Drain any residual in the FP module into a suitable container. Using a suitable FP module lock ring remover, rotate the lock ring counterclockwise and remove the FP module. 9. NOTE: Inspect the surfaces of the FP module flange and fuel tank seal contact surfaces. Do not polish or adjust the seal contact area of the FP module flange or fuel tank. Install a new FP module or fuel tank if the seal contact area is bent, scratched or corroded. Remove and discard the FP module O-ring seal. 10. NOTE: Apply clean engine oil to the FP module O-ring seal. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Tank Vent > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Tank Vent: > 08-5-5 > Mar > 08 > Fuel System - Slow Fuel Fill/MIL ON/DTC P0451 Fuel Tank Vent: Customer Interest Fuel System - Slow Fuel Fill/MIL ON/DTC P0451 TSB 08-5-5 03/17/08 SLOW FUEL FILL AND/OR DTC P0451 FORD: 2005-2008 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2005-2008 Mariner 2006-2008 Mariner Hybrid This article supersedes TSB 07-25-7 to update the Title and Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2005-2008 Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner and 2006-2008 Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a slow fuel fill concern or a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) P0451 present. The condition may be caused by water/moisture or other contamination entering the fuel filler vent line and then freezing and/or causing a blockage. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition by relocating the fuel filler vent line. SERVICE PROCEDURE When performing this procedure it is not necessary to: ^ Drain any fuel from the tank ^ Remove the stone shield from the filler pipe ^ Disconnect the filler pipe from the fuel tank NOTE ANY WATER/MOISTURE OR OBSTRUCTIONS IN THE EVAPORATIVE VENT SYSTEM MUST BE REMOVED. 1. With the vehicle in neutral, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the left rear wheel. 3. Remove the fuel filler cap. 4. Remove the two (2) upper filler pipe mounting screws. 5. Remove the single lower filler pipe mounting screw. 6. Carefully pull the upper end of the filler pipe away from the inner wheel well to gain access to the vent line. 7. Cut any tape or plastic straps holding the black plastic convoluted vent line to the filler pipe or underbody. 8. Pull the black plastic convoluted vent line underneath the vehicle. 9. Remove the vent line from the dust separator attached to the canister assembly and clear out the line using compressed air. 10. Inspect the dust separator for water/moisture or any obstruction. If water/moisture or obstructions are present follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 310-00 pinpoint test A. If no water/moisture or obstructions are present reattach vent line to dust separator and continue to next step. 11. Remove but do not discard the spider screen (vent cap) from the end of the vent line. 12. Measuring from the open end of the vent line, cut off and discard the last 13" (35 cm). 13. Reinstall the spider screen (vent cap) in the vent line. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Tank Vent > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fuel Tank Vent: > 08-5-5 > Mar > 08 > Fuel System - Slow Fuel Fill/MIL ON/DTC P0451 > Page 2913 14. Route the shortened vent line and spider screen (vent cap) as shown in Figure 1. 15. Push the spider screen (vent cap) at least 2" (50 mm) into the open subframe and body section alignment hole. 16. Secure the vent line to the fuel tank strap with a plastic tie strap. 17. Reposition the filler pipe into its original position. 18. Install the lower filler pipe mounting screw and tighten to 89 lb-in (10 N.m). 19. Install the two (2) upper filler pipe mounting screws and tighten to 27 lb-in (3 N.m). 20. Install the fuel filler cap. 21. Reinstall the wheel and tighten to 98 lb-ft (133 N.m). 22. Lower the vehicle from the hoist. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 080505A 2005-2008 Escape, 0.7 Hr. Escape Hybrid And Mariner, 2006-2008 Mariner Hybrid: Relocate Fuel Filler Vent Hose. Includes Time to Remove Left Rear Wheel, Fuel Cap And Partially Remove The Fuel Filler Pipe And Shield (Do Not Use With 9030A) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9A089 55 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Tank Vent > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Tank Vent: > 08-5-5 > Mar > 08 > Fuel System - Slow Fuel Fill/MIL ON/DTC P0451 Fuel Tank Vent: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Slow Fuel Fill/MIL ON/DTC P0451 TSB 08-5-5 03/17/08 SLOW FUEL FILL AND/OR DTC P0451 FORD: 2005-2008 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2005-2008 Mariner 2006-2008 Mariner Hybrid This article supersedes TSB 07-25-7 to update the Title and Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2005-2008 Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner and 2006-2008 Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a slow fuel fill concern or a malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on with diagnostic trouble code (DTC) P0451 present. The condition may be caused by water/moisture or other contamination entering the fuel filler vent line and then freezing and/or causing a blockage. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition by relocating the fuel filler vent line. SERVICE PROCEDURE When performing this procedure it is not necessary to: ^ Drain any fuel from the tank ^ Remove the stone shield from the filler pipe ^ Disconnect the filler pipe from the fuel tank NOTE ANY WATER/MOISTURE OR OBSTRUCTIONS IN THE EVAPORATIVE VENT SYSTEM MUST BE REMOVED. 1. With the vehicle in neutral, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the left rear wheel. 3. Remove the fuel filler cap. 4. Remove the two (2) upper filler pipe mounting screws. 5. Remove the single lower filler pipe mounting screw. 6. Carefully pull the upper end of the filler pipe away from the inner wheel well to gain access to the vent line. 7. Cut any tape or plastic straps holding the black plastic convoluted vent line to the filler pipe or underbody. 8. Pull the black plastic convoluted vent line underneath the vehicle. 9. Remove the vent line from the dust separator attached to the canister assembly and clear out the line using compressed air. 10. Inspect the dust separator for water/moisture or any obstruction. If water/moisture or obstructions are present follow Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 310-00 pinpoint test A. If no water/moisture or obstructions are present reattach vent line to dust separator and continue to next step. 11. Remove but do not discard the spider screen (vent cap) from the end of the vent line. 12. Measuring from the open end of the vent line, cut off and discard the last 13" (35 cm). 13. Reinstall the spider screen (vent cap) in the vent line. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank > Fuel Tank Vent > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fuel Tank Vent: > 08-5-5 > Mar > 08 > Fuel System - Slow Fuel Fill/MIL ON/DTC P0451 > Page 2919 14. Route the shortened vent line and spider screen (vent cap) as shown in Figure 1. 15. Push the spider screen (vent cap) at least 2" (50 mm) into the open subframe and body section alignment hole. 16. Secure the vent line to the fuel tank strap with a plastic tie strap. 17. Reposition the filler pipe into its original position. 18. Install the lower filler pipe mounting screw and tighten to 89 lb-in (10 N.m). 19. Install the two (2) upper filler pipe mounting screws and tighten to 27 lb-in (3 N.m). 20. Install the fuel filler cap. 21. Reinstall the wheel and tighten to 98 lb-ft (133 N.m). 22. Lower the vehicle from the hoist. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 080505A 2005-2008 Escape, 0.7 Hr. Escape Hybrid And Mariner, 2006-2008 Mariner Hybrid: Relocate Fuel Filler Vent Hose. Includes Time to Remove Left Rear Wheel, Fuel Cap And Partially Remove The Fuel Filler Pipe And Shield (Do Not Use With 9030A) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9A089 55 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams C433 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2923 Fuel Tank Unit: Description and Operation Fuel Pump (FP) Module Typical Electronic Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module Typical Mechanical Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Tank Unit > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2924 The FP module is a device that contains the fuel pump and sender assembly. The fuel pump is located inside the FP module reservoir and supplies fuel through the FP module manifold to the engine and FP module jet pump. The jet pump continuously refills the reservoir with fuel, and a check valve located in the manifold outlet maintains system pressure when the fuel pump is not energized. A flapper valve located in the bottom of the reservoir allows fuel to enter the reservoir and prime the fuel pump during the initial fill. Fuel Pump (FP) Module and Reservoir The FP module is mounted inside the fuel tank in a reservoir. The pump has a discharge check valve that maintains the system pressure after the key has been turned off to minimize starting concerns. The reservoir prevents fuel flow interruptions during extreme vehicle maneuvers with low tank fill levels. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations Fuel Temperature Sensor: Locations View 151-6 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2928 View 151-8 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2929 C173 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2930 Fuel Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation FUEL RAIL PRESSURE TEMPERATURE (FRPT) SENSOR Typical Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor The FRPT sensor measures the pressure and temperature of the fuel in the fuel rail and sends these signals to the PCM. The sensor uses the intake manifold vacuum as a reference to determine the pressure difference between the fuel rail and the intake manifold. The relationship between fuel pressure and fuel temperature is used to determine the possible presence of fuel vapor in the fuel rail. The temperature sensing portion of the FRPT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Both the pressure and temperature signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The speed of the fuel pump sustains fuel rail pressure which preserves fuel in its liquid state. The dynamic range of the fuel injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the injector pulse width to decrease. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2931 Fuel Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair FUEL RAIL PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE SENSOR Removal and Installation WARNING: - Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. 1. Release the fuel system pressure. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Disconnect the fuel rail pressure and temperature sensor electrical connector and vacuum tube. 4. Remove the 2 bolts and the fuel rail pressure and temperature sensor. - To install, tighten to 4 Nm (35 lb-in). - Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary. 5. NOTE: Lubricate the fuel rail pressure and temperature sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams C1066 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2935 Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Description and Operation IDLE AIR CONTROL (IAC) VALVE NOTE: The IAC valve assembly is not adjustable and cannot be cleaned, also some IAC valves are normally open and others are normally closed. Some IAC valves require engine vacuum to operate. The IAC valve assembly controls the engine idle speed and provides a dashpot function. The IAC valve assembly meters intake air around the throttle plate through a bypass within the IAC valve assembly and throttle body. The PCM determines the desired idle speed or bypass air and signals the IAC valve assembly through a specified duty cycle. The IAC valve responds by positioning the IAC valve to control the amount of bypassed air. The PCM monitors engine RPM and increases or decreases the IAC duty cycle in order to achieve the desired RPM. The PCM uses the IAC valve assembly to control: - no touch start - cold engine fast idle for rapid warm-up - idle (corrects for engine load) - stumble or stalling on deceleration (provides a dashpot function) - over-temperature idle boost Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator Electronic > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 2936 Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Service and Repair IDLE AIR CONTROL (IAC) VALVE Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the idle air control (IAC) valve electrical connector. 2. Remove the 2 bolts and the IAC valve and discard the gasket. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). - Clean and inspect all sealing surfaces. Install new gasket. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-23 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2940 C392 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2941 Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Description and Operation INERTIA FUEL SHUTOFF (IFS) SWITCH Typical Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch The IFS switch is used in conjunction with the electric fuel pump. The purpose of the IFS switch is to shutoff the fuel pump if a collision occurs. It consists of a steel ball held in place by a magnet. When a sharp impact occurs, the ball breaks loose from the magnet, rolls up a conical ramp and strikes a target plate which opens the electrical contacts of the switch and shuts off the electric fuel pump. Once the switch is open, it must be manually reset before restarting the vehicle. Refer to the Owner's Literature, Roadside Emergencies for the location of the IFS switch. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2942 Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Service and Repair INERTIA FUEL SHUTOFF (IFS) SWITCH Removal and Installation 1. Remove the RH lower A-pillar trim panel. 2. Disconnect the inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch electrical connector. 3. Remove the 2 bolts and the IFS switch. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Intake Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair Intake Air Duct: Service and Repair AIR CLEANER OUTLET PIPE Exploded View Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the crankcase vent tube from the air cleaner outlet pipe. 2. Loosen the 2 clamps and remove the air cleaner outlet pipe. - To install, tighten to 4 Nm (35 lb-in). 3. NOTE: The air cleaner outlet pipe should be securely sealed to prevent unmetered air from entering the engine. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2949 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations View 151-27 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Control Unit > Component Information > Locations > Page 2954 C4033 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pump Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 2958 Fuel Pump Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Relays and Modules - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System) > Component Information > Locations > Page 2962 Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION (APP) SENSOR The APP sensor is an input to the powertrain control module (PCM) and is used to determine the amount of torque requested by the operator. Depending on the application either a 2-track or 3-track APP sensor is used. 2-Track APP Sensor 2-Track APP Sensor There are 2 pedal position signals in the sensor. Both signals, APP1 and APP2, have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage), but are offset and increase at different rates. The 2 pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other input is used. There are 2 reference voltage circuits, 2 signal return circuits, and 2 signal circuits (a total of 6 circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. The reference voltage circuits and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage circuit and signal return circuit used by the electronic throttle body (ETB) throttle position sensor. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. 3-Track APP Sensor Typical 3-Track APP Sensor There are 3 pedal position signals in the sensor. Signal 1, APP1, has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and signals 2 and 3, APP2 and APP3, both have a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). During normal operation APP1 is used as the indication of pedal position by the strategy. The 3 pedal position signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. The PCM determines if a signal is incorrect by calculating where it should be, inferred from the other signals. If a concern is present with one of the circuits the other inputs are used. The pedal position signal is converted to pedal travel degrees (rotary angle) by the PCM. The software then converts these degrees to counts, which is the input to the torque based strategy. There are 2 reference voltage circuits, 2 signal return circuits, and 3 signal circuits (a total of 7 circuits and pins) between the PCM and the APP sensor assembly. The reference voltage circuits and the signal return circuits are shared with the reference voltage circuit and signal return circuit used by the electronic throttle body (ETB) throttle position sensor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations View 151-4 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2970 View 151-5 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2971 C128 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2972 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR Diagram Of Air Flow Through Throttle Body Contacting MAF Sensor Hot And Cold Wire (and IAT Sensor Wire Where Applicable) Terminals Typical Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2973 Typical Drop-in Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor The MAF sensor uses a hot wire sensing element to measure the amount of air entering the engine. Air passing over the hot wire causes it to cool. This hot wire is maintained at 200°C (392°F) above the ambient temperature as measured by a constant cold wire. The current required to maintain the temperature of the hot wire is proportional to the mass air flow. The MAF sensor then outputs an analog voltage signal to the PCM proportional to the intake air mass. The PCM calculates the required fuel injector pulse width in order to provide the desired air/fuel ratio. This input is also used in determining transmission electronic pressure control (EPC), shift and torque converter clutch scheduling. The MAF sensor is located between the air cleaner and the throttle body or inside the air cleaner assembly. Most MAF sensors have integrated bypass technology with an integrated intake air temperature (IAT) sensor. The hot wire electronic sensing element must be replaced as an assembly. Replacing only the element may change the air flow calibration. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Air Flow Meter/Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2974 Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the mass air flow (MAF) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the 2 screws and the MAF sensor. - To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Locations View 151-6 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2978 View 151-8 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2979 C173 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2980 Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Description and Operation FUEL RAIL PRESSURE TEMPERATURE (FRPT) SENSOR Typical Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor The FRPT sensor measures the pressure and temperature of the fuel in the fuel rail and sends these signals to the PCM. The sensor uses the intake manifold vacuum as a reference to determine the pressure difference between the fuel rail and the intake manifold. The relationship between fuel pressure and fuel temperature is used to determine the possible presence of fuel vapor in the fuel rail. The temperature sensing portion of the FRPT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Both the pressure and temperature signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The speed of the fuel pump sustains fuel rail pressure which preserves fuel in its liquid state. The dynamic range of the fuel injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the injector pulse width to decrease. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2981 Fuel Pressure Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair FUEL RAIL PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE SENSOR Removal and Installation WARNING: - Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. 1. Release the fuel system pressure. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Disconnect the fuel rail pressure and temperature sensor electrical connector and vacuum tube. 4. Remove the 2 bolts and the fuel rail pressure and temperature sensor. - To install, tighten to 4 Nm (35 lb-in). - Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary. 5. NOTE: Lubricate the fuel rail pressure and temperature sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations Fuel Temperature Sensor: Locations View 151-6 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2985 View 151-8 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2986 C173 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2987 Fuel Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation FUEL RAIL PRESSURE TEMPERATURE (FRPT) SENSOR Typical Fuel Rail Pressure Temperature (FRPT) Sensor The FRPT sensor measures the pressure and temperature of the fuel in the fuel rail and sends these signals to the PCM. The sensor uses the intake manifold vacuum as a reference to determine the pressure difference between the fuel rail and the intake manifold. The relationship between fuel pressure and fuel temperature is used to determine the possible presence of fuel vapor in the fuel rail. The temperature sensing portion of the FRPT sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals and provides electrical signals to the PCM corresponding to temperature. Both the pressure and temperature signals are used to control the speed of the fuel pump. The speed of the fuel pump sustains fuel rail pressure which preserves fuel in its liquid state. The dynamic range of the fuel injectors increase because of the higher rail pressure, which allows the injector pulse width to decrease. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Fuel Temperature Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2988 Fuel Temperature Sensor: Service and Repair FUEL RAIL PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE SENSOR Removal and Installation WARNING: - Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. 1. Release the fuel system pressure. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 3. Disconnect the fuel rail pressure and temperature sensor electrical connector and vacuum tube. 4. Remove the 2 bolts and the fuel rail pressure and temperature sensor. - To install, tighten to 4 Nm (35 lb-in). - Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary. 5. NOTE: Lubricate the fuel rail pressure and temperature sensor O-ring seal with clean engine oil. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-23 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2992 C392 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2993 Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Description and Operation INERTIA FUEL SHUTOFF (IFS) SWITCH Typical Inertia Fuel Shutoff (IFS) Switch The IFS switch is used in conjunction with the electric fuel pump. The purpose of the IFS switch is to shutoff the fuel pump if a collision occurs. It consists of a steel ball held in place by a magnet. When a sharp impact occurs, the ball breaks loose from the magnet, rolls up a conical ramp and strikes a target plate which opens the electrical contacts of the switch and shuts off the electric fuel pump. Once the switch is open, it must be manually reset before restarting the vehicle. Refer to the Owner's Literature, Roadside Emergencies for the location of the IFS switch. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 2994 Inertia Fuel Shutoff Switch: Service and Repair INERTIA FUEL SHUTOFF (IFS) SWITCH Removal and Installation 1. Remove the RH lower A-pillar trim panel. 2. Disconnect the inertia fuel shutoff (IFS) switch electrical connector. 3. Remove the 2 bolts and the IFS switch. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Throttle Position Sensor: Locations View 151-6 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2998 View 151-8 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 2999 Throttle Position Sensor: Diagrams C189 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3000 C1189 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3001 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor The ETB throttle position sensor has 2 signal circuits in the sensor for redundancy. The redundant ETB throttle position signals are required for increased monitoring. The first ETB throttle position sensor signal (TP1) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the second signal (TP2) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). The 2 ETB throttle position sensor signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. There is 1 reference voltage circuit and 1 signal return circuit for the sensor. The reference voltage circuit and the signal return circuit is shared with the reference voltage circuits and signal return circuits used by the APP sensor. Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Typical TP Sensor The TP sensor is a rotary potentiometer sensor that provides a signal to the PCM that is linearly proportional to the throttle plate/shaft position. The sensor housing has a 3-blade electrical connector that may be gold plated. The gold plating increases the corrosion resistance on the terminals and increases the connector durability. The TP sensor is mounted on the throttle body. As the TP sensor is rotated by the throttle shaft, 4 operating conditions are determined by the PCM from the TP. The operating conditions are: closed throttle (includes idle or deceleration) - part throttle (includes cruise or moderate acceleration) - wide open throttle (includes maximum acceleration or de-choke on crank) - throttle angle rate Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Sensors and Switches - Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3002 Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the throttle position (TP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the 2 screws and the TP sensor. - To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Service and Repair Throttle Body: Service and Repair THROTTLE BODY Removal and Installation CAUTION: Throttle body bore and plate area have a special coating and cannot be cleaned, or possible damage to the throttle body can occur. 1. Remove the air cleaner outlet pipe. 2. Remove the 2 bolts and the accelerator cable snow shield. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 3. Disconnect the speed control and accelerator cables from the throttle body. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Body > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3006 4. Disconnect the throttle position (TP) sensor electrical connector and detach the wiring retainer from the stud bolt. 5. Detach the transaxle vent tube pin-type retainer from the throttle body. 6. Disconnect and plug the 2 throttle body coolant hoses. 7. NOTE: Clean and inspect all sealing surfaces. Remove the 3 bolts, the stud bolt and the throttle body. Discard the gasket. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Install a new throttle body gasket. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - Throttle Cable To Pedal Connector Kit Throttle Cable/Linkage: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Throttle Cable To Pedal Connector Kit TSB 09-21-9 11/02/09 NEW SERVICE KIT AVAILABLE FOR ACCELERATOR CABLE TO PEDAL CONNECTION FORD: 2007-2008 Escape MERCURY: 2007-2008 Mariner ISSUE Some 2007-2008 Escape and Mariner (excluding Hybrid) may require the accelerator cable to accelerator pedal connection repaired. A new service clip has been released for use, in lieu of replacing the cable and/or pedal assemblies. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Position clip on top part of pedal. (Figure 1) 2. Snap bottom of clip onto pedal by pushing forward. (Figure 2) 3. Check to make sure clip is completely snapped in place. Move accelerator pedal from idle to wide open throttle and check that surrounding components do not come in contact with the pedal. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Fuel System - Throttle Cable To Pedal Connector Kit > Page 3011 Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092109A 2007-2008 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner (Excludes Hybrid): Install Accelerator Cable To Pedal Service Kit DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 9825 33 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Throttle Cable/Linkage: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION Verify the condition by operating the accelerator pedal and shaft from idle to wide open-throttle and back again. Check for any resistance in forward travel of the accelerator pedal and shaft or hesitation on return. If a concern exists, visually inspect all components of the accelerator pedal and shaft. Look for damage or binding of the accelerator cable. Look for obstructions at the throttle body and accelerator pedal and shaft. For vehicles equipped with speed control, examine the speed control cable. Refer to Cruise Control. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 3014 Symptom Chart Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3015 Throttle Cable/Linkage: Service and Repair ACCELERATOR CABLE Part 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Cable/Linkage > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3016 Part 2 Removal and Installation WARNING: Keep the sliding inner cable of the accelerator cable, the accelerator pedal and the pedal shaft free of contact with surrounding components such as wiring, hoses, sound insulation and floor carpeting. Contact in these areas may prevent movement of the accelerator cable, reducing the ability to decelerate the vehicle. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury to the vehicle occupant(s). NOTE: - The accelerator pedal and shaft should travel smoothly from idle to wide-open throttle positions. Hesitation on return or prevention of return to the idle position must not occur. - The sliding inner member of the accelerator cable should not be lubricated and is not repairable. 1. Remove the cable from the accelerator pedal. 2. Remove the accelerator cable grommet from the dash panel. 3. Remove the bolt and the accelerator cable bracket. - Detach the speed control cable pin-type retainer from the accelerator cable bracket. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 4. Remove the 2 bolts and the accelerator control cover shield. - To install, tighten to 4 Nm (35 lb-in). 5. Disconnect the accelerator cable from the throttle body. 6. Squeeze the tabs and remove the accelerator cable from the bracket. 7. Detach the accelerator cable retainer. 8. Remove the accelerator cable. 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Throttle Position Sensor: Locations View 151-6 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3020 View 151-8 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3021 Throttle Position Sensor: Diagrams C189 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3022 C1189 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3023 Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation Electronic Throttle Body (ETB) Throttle Position Sensor The ETB throttle position sensor has 2 signal circuits in the sensor for redundancy. The redundant ETB throttle position signals are required for increased monitoring. The first ETB throttle position sensor signal (TP1) has a negative slope (increasing angle, decreasing voltage) and the second signal (TP2) has a positive slope (increasing angle, increasing voltage). The 2 ETB throttle position sensor signals make sure the PCM receives a correct input even if 1 signal has a concern. There is 1 reference voltage circuit and 1 signal return circuit for the sensor. The reference voltage circuit and the signal return circuit is shared with the reference voltage circuits and signal return circuits used by the APP sensor. Throttle Position (TP) Sensor Typical TP Sensor The TP sensor is a rotary potentiometer sensor that provides a signal to the PCM that is linearly proportional to the throttle plate/shaft position. The sensor housing has a 3-blade electrical connector that may be gold plated. The gold plating increases the corrosion resistance on the terminals and increases the connector durability. The TP sensor is mounted on the throttle body. As the TP sensor is rotated by the throttle shaft, 4 operating conditions are determined by the PCM from the TP. The operating conditions are: closed throttle (includes idle or deceleration) - part throttle (includes cruise or moderate acceleration) - wide open throttle (includes maximum acceleration or de-choke on crank) - throttle angle rate Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Throttle Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3024 Throttle Position Sensor: Service and Repair THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the throttle position (TP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the 2 screws and the TP sensor. - To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Variable Induction System > Variable Induction Control Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams C191 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Fuel Delivery and Air Induction > Variable Induction System > Variable Induction Control Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3029 Variable Induction Control Actuator: Description and Operation INTAKE MANIFOLD TUNING VALVE (IMTV) WARNING: Substantial opening and closing torque is applied by this system. To prevent injury, be careful to keep fingers away from lever mechanisms when actuated. The IMTV is a motorized actuated unit mounted directly to the intake manifold. The IMTV actuator controls a shutter device attached to the actuator shaft. There is no monitor input to the PCM with this system to indicate shutter position. The motorized IMTV unit is not energized below approximately 2,600 RPM. The shutter is in the closed position not allowing airflow blend to occur in the intake manifold. The motorized unit is energized above approximately 2,600 RPM. The motorized unit is commanded on by the PCM initially at a 100 percent duty cycle to move the shutter to the open position, and then falling to approximately 50 percent to continue to hold the shutter open. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Firing Order > Component Information > Specifications Firing Order: Specifications Item....................................................................................................................................................... ..............................................................Specification Firing order........................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................1-4-2-5-3-6 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations View 151-7 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3037 View 151-8 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3038 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams C180 C1180 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3039 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR Typical Synchronizer Hall-Effect CMP Sensor Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor The CMP sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston number 1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the PCM and used for synchronizing the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. Coil on plug (COP) ignition applications use the CMP signal to select the correct ignition coil to fire. Vehicles with 2 CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). They use the second sensor to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2 as an input to the PCM. There are 2 types of CMP sensors: the 3-pin connector Hall-effect type sensor and the 2-pin connector variable reluctance type sensor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3040 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the camshaft position sensor (CMP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolt and the CMP. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). - Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary. 3. NOTE: Lubricate the CMP O-ring seal with clean engine oil. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations View 151-7 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3044 View 151-9 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3045 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams C101 C1120 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3046 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR Typical Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor The CKP sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM. The pulse wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L 10-cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the pulse wheel, the CKP sensor signal indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP sensor is also able to identify piston travel in order to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the crankshaft relative to a fixed reference for the CKP sensor configuration. The PCM also uses the CKP signal to determine if a misfire has occurred by measuring rapid decelerations between teeth. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3047 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the 5 bolts and the RH splash shield. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 3. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor electrical connector. 4. Remove the bolt and the CKP. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). - Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary. 5. NOTE: Lubricate the CKP O-ring seal with clean engine oil. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Specifications Torque Specifications Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil On Plug (COP) 1 C111 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil On Plug (COP) 1 > Page 3053 C112 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil On Plug (COP) 1 > Page 3054 C113 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil On Plug (COP) 1 > Page 3055 C114 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil On Plug (COP) 1 > Page 3056 Ignition Coil: Diagrams C111 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil On Plug (COP) 1 > Page 3057 C112 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil On Plug (COP) 1 > Page 3058 C113 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil On Plug (COP) 1 > Page 3059 C114 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil On Plug (COP) 1 > Page 3060 C115 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil On Plug (COP) 1 > Page 3061 C116 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Coil On Plug (COP) 1 > Page 3062 C174 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3063 Ignition Coil: Description and Operation Coil On Plug (COP) Typical Coil On Plug (COP) The COP ignition operates similar to a standard coil pack ignition except each plug has one coil per plug. The COP has 3 different modes of operation: engine crank, engine running, and CMP failure mode effects management (FMEM). Coil Pack Typical Four-Tower Coil Pack Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3064 Typical Six-Tower Coil Pack The PCM provides a grounding switch for the coil primary circuit. When the switch is closed, voltage is applied to the coil primary circuit. This creates a magnetic field around the primary coil. The PCM opens the switch, causing the magnetic field to collapse, inducing the high voltage in the secondary coil windings and firing the spark plug. The spark plugs are paired so that as one spark plug fires on the compression stroke, the other spark plug fires on the exhaust stroke. The next time the coil is fired the order is reversed. The next pair of spark plugs fire according to the engine firing order. Coil packs come in 4-tower, 6-tower horizontal and series 5 6-tower models. Two adjacent coil towers share a common coil and are called a matched pair. For 6-tower coil pack (6 cylinder) applications, the matched pairs are 1 and 5, 2 and 6, and 3 and 4. For 4-tower coil pack (4 cylinder) applications, the matched pairs are 1 and 4, and 2 and 3. When the coil is fired by the PCM, spark is delivered through the matched pair towers to their respective spark plugs. The spark plugs are fired simultaneously and are paired so that as one fires on the compression stroke, the other spark plug fires on the exhaust stroke. The next time the coil is fired, the situation is reversed. The next pair of spark plugs fire according to the engine firing order. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3065 Ignition Coil: Service and Repair IGNITION COIL-ON-PLUG Exploded View Engine Ignition - RH Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Ignition Coil > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3066 Engine Ignition - LH Removal and Installation RH side 1. NOTE: The upper intake manifold must be removed to access the RH ignition coils only. Remove the upper intake manifold. Both sides 2. Disconnect the ignition coil electrical connectors. 3. NOTE: When removing the ignition coil-on-plugs, a slight twisting motion will break the seal and ease removal. Remove the bolts and the ignition coils. To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Apply a small amount of dielectric grease to the inside of the ignition coil boots before attaching to the spark plugs. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-8 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3070 C109 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3071 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Knock Sensor (KS) Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS) The KS is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark timing. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations View 151-7 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3076 View 151-8 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3077 Camshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams C180 C1180 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3078 Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR Typical Synchronizer Hall-Effect CMP Sensor Typical Variable Reluctance CMP Sensor The CMP sensor detects the position of the camshaft. The CMP sensor identifies when piston number 1 is on its compression stroke. A signal is then sent to the PCM and used for synchronizing the sequential firing of the fuel injectors. Coil on plug (COP) ignition applications use the CMP signal to select the correct ignition coil to fire. Vehicles with 2 CMP sensors are equipped with variable camshaft timing (VCT). They use the second sensor to identify the position of the camshaft on bank 2 as an input to the PCM. There are 2 types of CMP sensors: the 3-pin connector Hall-effect type sensor and the 2-pin connector variable reluctance type sensor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Camshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3079 Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the camshaft position sensor (CMP) sensor electrical connector. 2. Remove the bolt and the CMP. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). - Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary. 3. NOTE: Lubricate the CMP O-ring seal with clean engine oil. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations View 151-7 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3083 View 151-9 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3084 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Diagrams C101 C1120 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3085 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR Typical Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor The CKP sensor is a magnetic transducer mounted on the engine block adjacent to a pulse wheel located on the crankshaft. By monitoring the crankshaft mounted pulse wheel, the CKP is the primary sensor for ignition information to the PCM. The pulse wheel has a total of 35 teeth spaced 10 degrees apart with one empty space for a missing tooth. The 6.8L 10-cylinder pulse wheel has 39 teeth spaced 9 degrees apart and one 9 degree empty space for a missing tooth. By monitoring the pulse wheel, the CKP sensor signal indicates crankshaft position and speed information to the PCM. By monitoring the missing tooth, the CKP sensor is also able to identify piston travel in order to synchronize the ignition system and provide a way of tracking the angular position of the crankshaft relative to a fixed reference for the CKP sensor configuration. The PCM also uses the CKP signal to determine if a misfire has occurred by measuring rapid decelerations between teeth. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Crankshaft Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3086 Crankshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the 5 bolts and the RH splash shield. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 3. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor electrical connector. 4. Remove the bolt and the CKP. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). - Inspect the O-ring seal and install new as necessary. 5. NOTE: Lubricate the CKP O-ring seal with clean engine oil. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Customer Interest Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder TSB 09-19-15 10/05/09 IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift interlock is not affected. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern. a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove ignition key. b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction. c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction? (1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics (2) No - Proceed to step 2. 2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs. The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 3096 Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3511 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder TSB 09-19-15 10/05/09 IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift interlock is not affected. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern. a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove ignition key. b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction. c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction? (1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics (2) No - Proceed to step 2. 2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs. The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 3102 Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3511 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Lock Cylinder - Functional Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Ignition Lock Cylinder - Functional IGNITION LOCK CYLINDER - FUNCTIONAL Removal and Installation 1. Remove the passive anti-theft system (PATS) transceiver. 2. NOTE: The ignition lock cylinder must be in the RUN position. Using a suitable tool, press the release pin and remove the ignition lock cylinder. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Verify the ignition lock cylinder operation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Lock Cylinder - Functional > Page 3105 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Ignition Lock Cylinder - Non Functional IGNITION LOCK CYLINDER - NON FUNCTIONAL Removal and Installation 1. Remove the passive anti-theft system (PATS) transceiver. 2. Remove the ignition lock cylinder. - Use a 1/8-inch diameter drill bit to drill out the lock cylinder retaining pin. - Use a 3/8-inch diameter drill to drill down the middle of the ignition lock key slot until the ignition lock cylinder breaks loose. - Remove and discard the ignition lock cylinder and drill shavings from the steering column. 3. Remove the bearing retainer. 4. Remove the steering column lock housing bearing and steering column lock gear. 5. Thoroughly clean all drill shavings from the steering column and inspect it for damage. 6. Install a new ignition lock cylinder. - Verify the ignition lock cylinder operation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-8 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3109 C109 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Sensors and Switches - Ignition System > Knock Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 3110 Knock Sensor: Description and Operation Knock Sensor (KS) Two Types Of Knock Sensor (KS) The KS is a tuned accelerometer on the engine which converts engine vibration to an electrical signal. The PCM uses this signal to determine the presence of engine knock and to retard spark timing. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > General Specifications Spark Plug: Specifications General Specifications Item....................................................................................................................................................... ..............................................................Specification Spark plug gap..................................................................................................................................... ....................................1.32-1.42 mm (0.052-0.056 in) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > General Specifications > Page 3115 Torque Specifications Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3116 Spark Plug: Application and ID Item....................................................................................................................................................... ..............................................................Specification Spark plug............................................................................................................................................ ...................................................................AGSF-32N Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3117 Spark Plug: Testing and Inspection Spark Plug Inspection 1. Inspect the spark plug for a bridged gap. ^ Check for deposit build-up closing the gap between the electrodes. Deposits are caused by oil or carbon fouling. ^ Clean the spark plug. 2. Check for oil fouling. ^ Check for wet, black deposits on the insulator shell bore electrodes, caused by excessive oil entering the combustion chamber through worn rings and pistons, excessive valve-to-guide clearance or worn or loose bearings. ^ Correct the oil leak concern. ^ Install a new spark plug. 3. Inspect for carbon fouling. Look for black, dry, fluffy carbon deposits on the insulator tips, exposed shell surfaces and electrodes, caused by a spark plug with an incorrect heat range, dirty air cleaner, too rich a fuel mixture or excessive idling. ^ Install new spark plugs. 4. Inspect for normal burning. ^ Check for light tan or gray deposits on the firing tip. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3118 5. Inspect for pre-ignition, identified by melted electrodes and a possibly damaged insulator. Metallic deposits on the insulator indicate engine damage. This may be caused by incorrect ignition timing, wrong type of fuel or the unauthorized installation of a Heli-Coil(R) insert in place of the spark plug threads. ^ Install a new spark plug. 6. Inspect for overheating, identified by white or light gray spots and with a bluish-burnt appearance of electrodes. This is caused by engine overheating, wrong type of fuel, loose spark plugs, spark plugs with an incorrect heat range, low fuel pump pressure or incorrect ignition timing. ^ Install a new spark plug. 7. Inspect for fused deposits, identified by melted or spotty deposits resembling bubbles or blisters. These are caused by sudden acceleration. ^ Install new spark plugs. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3119 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3120 Spark Plug: Service and Repair SPARK PLUGS Exploded View Engine Ignition - RH Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3121 Engine Ignition - LH Removal RH side 1. NOTE: The upper intake manifold must be removed to access the RH spark plugs only. Remove the upper intake manifold. Both sides 2. Disconnect the ignition coil electrical connectors. 3. NOTE: When removing the ignition coil-on-plugs, a slight twisting motion will break the seal and ease removal. Remove the bolts and the ignition coils. 4. CAUTION: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spark plugs, or damage can occur to the cylinder head or spark plug. NOTE: Use compressed air to remove any foreign material in the spark plug well before removing the spark plugs. Remove the spark plugs. Installation Both sides 1. Inspect the spark plugs. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3122 2. Adjust the spark plug gap as necessary. 3. CAUTION: Only use hand tools when removing or installing the spark plugs, or damage can occur to the cylinder head or spark plug. Install the spark plugs. Tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). 4. NOTE: Apply a small amount of dielectric grease to the inside of the ignition coil boots before attaching to the spark plugs. Install the ignition coils and bolts. Tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Ignition System > Spark Plug > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3123 5. Connect the ignition coil electrical connectors. RH side 6. Install the upper intake manifold. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Pinpoint Tests - Non OSC Equipped Vehicle Special Tool(s) Solenoid Operation Chart Solenoid Operation Chart Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Always OFF" Failed OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns, and/or solenoid electrically stuck off, and/or hydraulically or mechanically stuck off. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3130 Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Always ON" Failed ON due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns, and/or solenoid electrically stuck on, and/or hydraulically or mechanically stuck on. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3131 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams C199 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3135 Shift Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Pinpoint Tests - Non OSC Equipped Vehicle Special Tool(s) Solenoid Operation Chart Solenoid Operation Chart Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Always OFF" Failed OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns, and/or solenoid electrically stuck off, and/or hydraulically or mechanically stuck off. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3136 Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Always ON" Failed ON due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns, and/or solenoid electrically stuck on, and/or hydraulically or mechanically stuck on. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3137 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Pinpoint Tests - Non OSC Equipped Vehicle Special Tool(s) Solenoid Operation Chart Solenoid Operation Chart Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Always OFF" Failed OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns, and/or solenoid electrically stuck off, and/or hydraulically or mechanically stuck off. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3141 Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Always ON" Failed ON due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns, and/or solenoid electrically stuck on, and/or hydraulically or mechanically stuck on. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3142 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations View 151-27 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 3147 C4347 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Adjustments Shift Indicator: Adjustments Selector Lever Cable Adjustment 1. Place the floor shift selector lever in the (D) position. 2. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual lever. 3. Place the manual lever in the (D) position. 1 Rotate the manual lever counterclockwise to the PARK position. 2 Rotate the manual lever clockwise 3 detents to the (D) position. 4. Release the selector lever cable adjuster lock. 1 Pull out on the adjuster lock tabs. 2 Slide the lock over to unlock the selector lever cable. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 3153 5. Align the selector lever cable end to the manual lever ball stud and install it with the adjuster unlocked. 6. Slide the adjuster tab in place to lock the selector lever cable. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation TRANSMISSION CONTROL INDICATOR LAMP (TCIL) The TCIL is an output signal from the PCM that controls the lamp on/off function depending on the engagement or disengagement of overdrive. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations View 151-22 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 3162 C3184 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 3163 Control Module: Service and Repair Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Control Module Removal and Installation 1. Remove the floor console. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. Lift upward on the module to release the fasteners from the shifter base. Remove the four wheel drive (4WD) control module. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Description and Operation Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation BRAKE PEDAL POSITION (BPP) SWITCH Typical BPP Switch The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal to the PCM indicating that the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and is mounted on the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as follows: - to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake pedal is applied. - to the antilock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM. - to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ABS module interprets the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH (TCS) Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS) Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS) The TCS signals the PCM with VPWR whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature, the transmission control indicator lamp (TCIL) illuminates when the TCS is cycled to disengage overdrive. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3172 Transmission Mode Switch: Testing and Inspection Electrical Connectors Selector Lever Harness Connector C2096 (vehicle harness side) (Part 1) Selector Lever Harness Connector C2096 (vehicle harness side) (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3173 Selector Lever Harness Connector C2096 (component side) (Part 1) Selector Lever Harness Connector C2096 (component side) (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations View 151-10 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3177 View 151-11 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3178 C167 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3179 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Adjustment Special Tool(s) 1. Remove the battery and tray. 2. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position. Loosen the transmission range (TR) sensor bolts. 3. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft). 4. Install the battery and tray. 5. Check for correct operation. The engine should start only in PARK or NEUTRAL. The reverse lamps should illuminate in the REVERSE position. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3180 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Special Tool(s) Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the battery and tray. 3. Remove the transmission range (TR) sensor. 1 Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector. 2 Remove the TR sensor retaining bolts. 3 Remove the TR sensor. Installation 1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position. Install the TR sensor and loosely install the bolts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3181 2. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft). 3. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 4. Install the battery and tray. 5. Check the correct operation. The engine should start only in PARK or NEUTRAL. The reverse lamps should illuminate in the REVERSE position. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor View 151-10 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 3186 View 151-11 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 3187 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor View 151-10 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 3188 View 151-11 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor C193 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 3191 C143 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Material Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the 7 retainers and the LH splash shield. ^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 3. Remove the turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor 1 Disconnect the TSS electrical connector. 2 Remove the TSS sensor bolt. 3 Remove the TSS sensor. ^ To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 3194 4. NOTE: When installing the sensor, lubricate the O-ring seal with clean transmission fluid. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new O-ring seal as necessary. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 3195 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Material Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the 7 retainers and the LH splash shield. ^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 3. Remove the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor 1 Disconnect the OSS electrical connector. 2 Remove the OSS sensor bolt. 3 Remove the OSS sensor. ^ To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 3196 4. NOTE: When installing the sensor, lubricate the O-ring seal with clean transmission fluid. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new O-ring seal as necessary. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Powertrain Management > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. NOTE: The electrical connector and the vehicle speed sensor (VSS) are accessed from the top of the transaxle. Remove the VSS bolt. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the VSS. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Pinpoint Tests - Non OSC Equipped Vehicle Special Tool(s) Solenoid Operation Chart Solenoid Operation Chart Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Always OFF" Failed OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns, and/or solenoid electrically stuck off, and/or hydraulically or mechanically stuck off. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3207 Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Always ON" Failed ON due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns, and/or solenoid electrically stuck on, and/or hydraulically or mechanically stuck on. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3208 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams C199 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3212 Shift Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Pinpoint Tests - Non OSC Equipped Vehicle Special Tool(s) Solenoid Operation Chart Solenoid Operation Chart Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Always OFF" Failed OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns, and/or solenoid electrically stuck off, and/or hydraulically or mechanically stuck off. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3213 Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Always ON" Failed ON due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns, and/or solenoid electrically stuck on, and/or hydraulically or mechanically stuck on. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3214 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Pinpoint Tests - Non OSC Equipped Vehicle Special Tool(s) Solenoid Operation Chart Solenoid Operation Chart Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Always OFF" Failed OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns, and/or solenoid electrically stuck off, and/or hydraulically or mechanically stuck off. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3218 Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Always ON" Failed ON due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns, and/or solenoid electrically stuck on, and/or hydraulically or mechanically stuck on. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3219 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations View 151-27 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 3224 C4347 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Pinpoint Tests - Non OSC Equipped Vehicle Special Tool(s) Solenoid Operation Chart Solenoid Operation Chart Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Always OFF" Failed OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns, and/or solenoid electrically stuck off, and/or hydraulically or mechanically stuck off. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3230 Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Always ON" Failed ON due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns, and/or solenoid electrically stuck on, and/or hydraulically or mechanically stuck on. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3231 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams C199 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3235 Shift Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Pinpoint Tests - Non OSC Equipped Vehicle Special Tool(s) Solenoid Operation Chart Solenoid Operation Chart Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Always OFF" Failed OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns, and/or solenoid electrically stuck off, and/or hydraulically or mechanically stuck off. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3236 Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Always ON" Failed ON due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns, and/or solenoid electrically stuck on, and/or hydraulically or mechanically stuck on. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3237 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Pinpoint Tests - Non OSC Equipped Vehicle Special Tool(s) Solenoid Operation Chart Solenoid Operation Chart Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Always OFF" Failed OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns, and/or solenoid electrically stuck off, and/or hydraulically or mechanically stuck off. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3241 Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Always ON" Failed ON due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns, and/or solenoid electrically stuck on, and/or hydraulically or mechanically stuck on. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Actuators and Solenoids A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3242 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Band, A/T > Component Information > Application and ID > Band and Clutch Application Chart A Band: Application and ID Band and Clutch Application Chart A Band and Clutch Application Chart A Band And Clutch Application Chart A Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Band, A/T > Component Information > Application and ID > Band and Clutch Application Chart A > Page 3247 Band: Application and ID Band and Clutch Application Chart B Band and Clutch Application Chart B Band And Clutch Application Chart B (Part 1) Band And Clutch Application Chart B (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Description and Operation Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation BRAKE PEDAL POSITION (BPP) SWITCH Typical BPP Switch The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal to the PCM indicating that the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and is mounted on the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as follows: - to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake pedal is applied. - to the antilock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM. - to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ABS module interprets the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Application and ID > Band and Clutch Application Chart A Clutch: Application and ID Band and Clutch Application Chart A Band and Clutch Application Chart A Band And Clutch Application Chart A Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Clutch, A/T > Component Information > Application and ID > Band and Clutch Application Chart A > Page 3255 Clutch: Application and ID Band and Clutch Application Chart B Band and Clutch Application Chart B Band And Clutch Application Chart B (Part 1) Band And Clutch Application Chart B (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications Fluid Capacity....................................................................................................................................... ..........................................................9.5L (10 quarts) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 3260 Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications Ford Part Name - Mercon V Automatic Transmission Fluid Ford Part Number - XT-5-QM - XT-5-QMC (US) - CXT-5-LM12 (Canada) Ford Specification - MERCON V Note: Using any transmission fluid other than those that meet the recommended specification may cause internal transmission damage. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill Material Draining 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. NOTE: If an internal problem is suspected, drain the fluid through a paper filter. A small amount of metal or friction particles may be found from normal wear. If an excessive amount of metal or friction material is present the transaxle will need to be overhauled. Remove the transaxle drain plug. Refill 1. Using a small amount of thread sealant on the threads, install the transaxle drain plug. ^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 2. Fill the transaxle with clean automatic transmission fluid. 3. Start the engine and run through all the gears and check fluid level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill > Page 3263 Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning Transmission Fluid Combo Cooler Without Cooler Bypass Valve Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transmission Fluid Drain and Refill > Page 3264 Transmission Fluid Combo Cooler With Cooler Bypass Valve 1. Remove the radiator grille. 2. CAUTION: Do not exceed 276 kPa (40 psi) of air pressure when flushing the cooler or damage to the internal cooler fins will occur. CAUTION: Flush with clean transmission fluid only. Do not use solvents, mineral spirits or water-based cleaners. NOTE: Rubber hoses must be attached to the ends of the fluid cooler tubes, to aid in connecting them to the cleaner. Backflush any contaminants from the oil-to-air cooler by connecting the flushing machine pressure line to the transmission fluid cooler outlet tube and the return line to the transmission fluid cooler inlet tube. After 5 minutes, stop the machine, reverse the hoses and repeat the flushing. 3. CAUTION: Do not exceed 276 kPa (40 psi) of air pressure when flushing the cooler. Damage to the cooler will occur. NOTE: Some vehicles are equipped with a cold weather bypass valve which cannot by cleaned or flushed. A new valve should be installed as part of an overhaul or prior to the installation of a remanufactured transaxle. Using compressed air, blow through the coolers until all fluid is removed. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Fluid Line/Hose: Service and Repair Transmission Fluid Cooler Tubes Material Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the radiator grille. 3. Disconnect the transmission fluid cooler hoses from the transmission fluid combo cooler. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3268 4. Remove the retainer, the 5 bolts and the LH splash shield. 5. Disconnect the front transmission fluid cooler hose from the transaxle case. 6. Disconnect and remove the rear cooler tube fitting from the transaxle case. ^ To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 7. Disconnect and remove the fluid cooler tube bracket and bolt from the transaxle case. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Line/Hose, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3269 ^ To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft). 8. Remove the fluid cooler tubes from under the vehicle and install new as necessary. 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 10. Start the vehicle and check the transmission fluid level. ^ Fill the transaxle with clean automatic transmission fluid. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component Information > Specifications Fluid Pan: Specifications Main control cover bolts ....................................................................................................................... ....................................................... 13 Nm (10 lb-ft) Install studs in locations 3 and 11 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3273 Fluid Pan: Service and Repair Main Control Cover Material Removal All vehicles 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 3.0L engines 2. Drain the engine coolant. All vehicles 3. Remove the battery tray. 4. Disconnect the wiring harness from the battery tray bracket. 5. Remove the battery tray bracket. 6. Disconnect the vent hose from the main control cover. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3274 3.0L engines 7. Remove the lower radiator hose and position aside. 8. Remove the wire harness retainer from the front engine mount. All vehicles 9. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket bolt. 10. Remove the main control cover bolts, transmission fluid cooler bypass studs and the cover. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3275 11. NOTE: Do not discard the gasket. It is a reusable type. Inspect the gasket for damage. Install a new gasket as necessary. Remove the main control cover gasket. Installation All vehicles 1. NOTE: The main control cover gasket is a reusable type. Inspect the gasket for damage. Install a new gasket as necessary. Install the main control cover gasket. 2. NOTE: Install studs in locations 3 and 11. Install the main control cover. Tighten to 13 Nm (10 lb-ft), in the sequence shown. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3276 3. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 3.0L engines 4. Install the wire harness retainer to the front engine mount. 5. Install the lower radiator hose. All vehicles 6. Connect the vent hose to the main control cover. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid Pan, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3277 7. Install the battery tray bracket. ^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 8. Connect the wiring harness to the battery tray bracket. 9. Install the battery tray. 10. Fill the transaxle with clean transmission fluid. 3.0L engines 11. Fill the engine cooling system. All vehicles 12. Start the engine, run through all of the gears and check the transmission fluid level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Adjustments Shift Indicator: Adjustments Selector Lever Cable Adjustment 1. Place the floor shift selector lever in the (D) position. 2. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual lever. 3. Place the manual lever in the (D) position. 1 Rotate the manual lever counterclockwise to the PARK position. 2 Rotate the manual lever clockwise 3 detents to the (D) position. 4. Release the selector lever cable adjuster lock. 1 Pull out on the adjuster lock tabs. 2 Slide the lock over to unlock the selector lever cable. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 3282 5. Align the selector lever cable end to the manual lever ball stud and install it with the adjuster unlocked. 6. Slide the adjuster tab in place to lock the selector lever cable. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation TRANSMISSION CONTROL INDICATOR LAMP (TCIL) The TCIL is an output signal from the PCM that controls the lamp on/off function depending on the engagement or disengagement of overdrive. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Pinpoint Tests - Non OSC Equipped Vehicle Special Tool(s) Solenoid Operation Chart Solenoid Operation Chart Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Always OFF" Failed OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns, and/or solenoid electrically stuck off, and/or hydraulically or mechanically stuck off. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3289 Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Always ON" Failed ON due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns, and/or solenoid electrically stuck on, and/or hydraulically or mechanically stuck on. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3290 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Differential Seals - LH Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Differential Seals - LH Differential Seals - LH Special Tool(s) Material Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the transaxle drain plug and drain the fluid. 3. Remove the LH halfshaft. 4. Using the special tools, remove and discard the LH differential seal. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Differential Seals - LH > Page 3295 Installation 1. Using the special tool, install the LH differential seal. 2. Install the LH halfshaft. 3. Using a small amount of thread sealant on the threads, install the transaxle drain plug. ^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 4. Fill the transaxle with clean automatic transmission fluid. 5. Start the engine and run through all the gears and check fluid level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Differential Seals - LH > Page 3296 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Differential Seals - RH Differential Seals - RH Material Material Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the transaxle drain plug and drain the transmission fluid. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Differential Seals - LH > Page 3297 3. Remove the RH halfshaft and intermediate shaft. 4. If equipped, remove the power transfer unit (PTU). 5. If the vehicle is equipped with a PTU, use the special tools to remove the RH differential seal. 6. If the vehicle is not equipped with a PTU, use the special tools to remove the RH differential seal. Installation 1. If the vehicle is equipped with a PTU, use the special tools to install the RH differential seal. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, A/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Differential Seals - LH > Page 3298 2. If the vehicle is not equipped with a PTU, use the special tools to install the RH differential seal. 3. If equipped, install the PTU. 4. Install the RH halfshaft. 5. Using a small amount of thread sealant on the threads, install the transaxle drain plug. ^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 6. Fill the transaxle with clean automatic transmission fluid. 7. Start the engine and run through all the gears and check the fluid level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Description and Operation Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation BRAKE PEDAL POSITION (BPP) SWITCH Typical BPP Switch The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal to the PCM indicating that the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and is mounted on the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as follows: - to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake pedal is applied. - to the antilock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM. - to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ABS module interprets the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH (TCS) Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS) Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS) The TCS signals the PCM with VPWR whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature, the transmission control indicator lamp (TCIL) illuminates when the TCS is cycled to disengage overdrive. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3306 Transmission Mode Switch: Testing and Inspection Electrical Connectors Selector Lever Harness Connector C2096 (vehicle harness side) (Part 1) Selector Lever Harness Connector C2096 (vehicle harness side) (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3307 Selector Lever Harness Connector C2096 (component side) (Part 1) Selector Lever Harness Connector C2096 (component side) (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations View 151-10 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3311 View 151-11 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3312 C167 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3313 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Adjustment Special Tool(s) 1. Remove the battery and tray. 2. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position. Loosen the transmission range (TR) sensor bolts. 3. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft). 4. Install the battery and tray. 5. Check for correct operation. The engine should start only in PARK or NEUTRAL. The reverse lamps should illuminate in the REVERSE position. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3314 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Special Tool(s) Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the battery and tray. 3. Remove the transmission range (TR) sensor. 1 Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector. 2 Remove the TR sensor retaining bolts. 3 Remove the TR sensor. Installation 1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position. Install the TR sensor and loosely install the bolts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3315 2. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft). 3. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 4. Install the battery and tray. 5. Check the correct operation. The engine should start only in PARK or NEUTRAL. The reverse lamps should illuminate in the REVERSE position. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor View 151-10 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 3320 View 151-11 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 3321 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor View 151-10 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 3322 View 151-11 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor C193 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 3325 C143 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Material Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the 7 retainers and the LH splash shield. ^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 3. Remove the turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor 1 Disconnect the TSS electrical connector. 2 Remove the TSS sensor bolt. 3 Remove the TSS sensor. ^ To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 3328 4. NOTE: When installing the sensor, lubricate the O-ring seal with clean transmission fluid. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new O-ring seal as necessary. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 3329 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Material Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the 7 retainers and the LH splash shield. ^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 3. Remove the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor 1 Disconnect the OSS electrical connector. 2 Remove the OSS sensor bolt. 3 Remove the OSS sensor. ^ To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 3330 4. NOTE: When installing the sensor, lubricate the O-ring seal with clean transmission fluid. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new O-ring seal as necessary. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Shift Interlock: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3335 Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4 "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and relays are identified. Fuse and Relay Numbering and Naming. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Power Distribution Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3336 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information C904 Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3337 disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location Charts. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery set. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing lose clothing. Symbols Symbols (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3338 Symbols (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3339 Symbols (Part 3) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3340 Symbols (Part 4) Symbols (Part 5) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3341 Shift Interlock: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3342 Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3343 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3344 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. 3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3345 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3346 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3347 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3348 Shift Interlock: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 37-1 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3349 Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Interlock, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3350 Shift Interlock: Service and Repair Brake Shift Interlock Override NOTE: If it is necessary to use the override procedure to move the selector lever out of the PARK position, it is possible that a fuse has blown and the brake lights are not operational. Before driving the vehicle, verify that the brake lights are working. This vehicle is equipped with a brake shift interlock feature that prevents the selector lever from being moved out of PARK when the ignition is in the ON position unless the brake pedal is depressed. If the selector lever cannot be moved out of the PARK position when the ignition is in the ON position and the brake pedal is depressed: 1. Apply the parking brake and remove the ignition key. 2. NOTE: Relief located at the front of the access panel. Remove the access panel. 3. Using an suitable tool, depress the brake shift interlock override mechanism on the selector lever, apply the brake, depress the button on the selector lever and move the selector lever into NEUTRAL. 4. Start the vehicle. 5. To install, reverse the procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams C199 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3354 Shift Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Pinpoint Tests - Non OSC Equipped Vehicle Special Tool(s) Solenoid Operation Chart Solenoid Operation Chart Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Always OFF" Failed OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns, and/or solenoid electrically stuck off, and/or hydraulically or mechanically stuck off. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3355 Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Always ON" Failed ON due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns, and/or solenoid electrically stuck on, and/or hydraulically or mechanically stuck on. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3356 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Diagrams C2096 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3360 Shifter A/T: Service and Repair Selector Lever Selector Lever (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3361 Selector Lever (Part 2) Removal All vehicles 1. Place the selector lever in the (D) position. 2. Gently pry up to remove the upper selector lever trim ring. 3. Lift the center console lid and remove the center console compartment tray. 4. Remove the top finish panel. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3362 5. Remove the selector lever cable from the selector lever assembly. 1 Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the selector lever. 2 Remove the selector lever cable from the bracket. 6. Disconnect the wiring harness retainers from the selector lever. 7. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the selector lever. 1 Disconnect the selector lever electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3363 2 Remove the vehicle harness connector from the selector lever. All wheel drive (AWD) vehicles 8. Pull the all wheel drive (AWD) module straight back and remove it from the back of the selector lever. All vehicles 9. Remove the 2 screws from the center console. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3364 10. Remove the 4 bolts and remove the selector lever assembly. Installation All vehicles 1. Install the selector lever assembly and the 4 bolts. ^ Tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3365 2. Install the 2 center console screws. AWD vehicles 3. Install the AWD module on to the back of the selector lever. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3366 All vehicles 4. Connect the electrical connectors to the selector lever. 1 Install the vehicle harness connector on the selector lever. 2 Connect the selector lever electrical connector. 5. Connect the wiring harness retainers to the selector lever. 6. Install the selector lever cable on the selector lever assembly. 1 Install the selector lever cable on the bracket. 2 Connect the selector lever cable end. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3367 7. Install the top finish panel. 8. Install the center console compartment tray. 9. Install the upper selector lever trim ring. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3368 10. Adjust the shift cable. For additional information, refer to Selector Lever Cable Adjustment. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Shift Cable: Service and Repair Selector Lever Cable Selector Lever Cable Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Place the floor shift selector level in the (D) position. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3373 3. Gently pry up to remove the upper shift lever trim ring. 4. Lift the center console lid and remove the center console compartment tray. 5. Remove the top finish panel. 6. Remove the selector lever cable from the gearshift assembly. 1 Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the gearshift lever. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3374 2 Remove the selector lever cable from the bracket. 7. Remove the 2 grommet nuts for the selector lever cable. ^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 8. Remove the selector lever cable retainer from the transmission fluid filler tube. 9. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual lever. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, A/T > Shift Cable, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3375 10. Release the 2 tabs and remove the selector lever cable from the selector lever cable bracket. 11. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Adjust the selector lever cable after installation. For additional information, refer to Selector Lever Cable Adjustment. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Torque Converter: > 07-5-6 > Mar > 07 > A/T - Engine Stall Upon Gear Engagement Torque Converter: Customer Interest A/T - Engine Stall Upon Gear Engagement TSB 07-5-6 03/19/07 CD4E - ENGINE STALLING ON ENGAGEMENT/STOPPING FORD: 2005-2008 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2008 Mariner ISSUE Some 2005-2008 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a CD4E automatic transaxle and built from 8/1/2004 through 2/15/2007 may exhibit an engine stall when coming to a stop or when engaging the transmission into drive or reverse. This condition may be intermittent and often occurs after extended drives. There may be no diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) stored. This may be caused by internal wear in the torque converter which prevents it from unlocking. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Inspect and repair all non transaxle codes per Workshop Manual (WSM) and Powertrain Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) manuals. 2. Use the Integrated Diagnostic System equipment to monitor the PIDs (Parameter Identification) for TC_SLIPACT as the stall is occurring. a. If the slip is greater than 20 RPM, the stalling is not transaxle related. Repair following PC/ED procedures for engine stalling condition. b. If TC_SLIPACT is less than 20 RPM with the transmission in park or neutral, torque converter internal failure is the most likely cause, proceed to Step 3. 3. Remove the transaxle assembly and check the rotation of the torque converter in the bell housing. A failed converter will be difficult to rotate. 4. Remove the torque converter, drain the automatic transmission fluid (ATF) and refill the CD4E transmission assembly using MERCON(R) V ATF. 5. Install a new torque converter and reinstall the transaxle assembly. 6. Back flush the transmission cooler system as described in the WSM, Section 307-01A. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 070506A 2005-2008 Escape/Mariner 5.2 Hrs. 4X2 2.3L: Diagnose And Replace The Torque Converter, Includes Time To Remove And Install Transmission, Backflush The Cooler System (Do Not Use With 7000A, 7000A11, 7000A12, Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Torque Converter: > 07-5-6 > Mar > 07 > A/T - Engine Stall Upon Gear Engagement > Page 3384 12650D) 070506A 2005-2008 Escape/Mariner 5.8 Hrs. 4X4 2.3L: Diagnose And Replace The Torque Converter, Includes Time To Remove And Install Transmission, Backflush The Cooler System (Do Not Use With 7000A, 7000A11, 7000A12, 12650D) 070506A 2005-2008 Escape/Mariner 5.9 Hrs. 4X2 3.0L: Diagnose And Replace The Torque Converter, Includes Time To Remove And Install Transmission, Backflush The Cooler System (Do Not Use With 7000A, 7000A11, 7000A12, 12650D) 070506A 2005-2008 Escape/Mariner 7.5 Hrs. 4X4 3.0L: Diagnose And Replace The Torque Converter, Includes Time To Remove And Install Transmission, Backflush The Cooler System (Do Not Use With 7000A, 7000A11, 7000A12, 12650D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7902 30 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Torque Converter: > 07-5-6 > Mar > 07 > A/T - Engine Stall Upon Gear Engagement Torque Converter: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Engine Stall Upon Gear Engagement TSB 07-5-6 03/19/07 CD4E - ENGINE STALLING ON ENGAGEMENT/STOPPING FORD: 2005-2008 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2008 Mariner ISSUE Some 2005-2008 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a CD4E automatic transaxle and built from 8/1/2004 through 2/15/2007 may exhibit an engine stall when coming to a stop or when engaging the transmission into drive or reverse. This condition may be intermittent and often occurs after extended drives. There may be no diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) stored. This may be caused by internal wear in the torque converter which prevents it from unlocking. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Inspect and repair all non transaxle codes per Workshop Manual (WSM) and Powertrain Controls/Emissions Diagnosis (PC/ED) manuals. 2. Use the Integrated Diagnostic System equipment to monitor the PIDs (Parameter Identification) for TC_SLIPACT as the stall is occurring. a. If the slip is greater than 20 RPM, the stalling is not transaxle related. Repair following PC/ED procedures for engine stalling condition. b. If TC_SLIPACT is less than 20 RPM with the transmission in park or neutral, torque converter internal failure is the most likely cause, proceed to Step 3. 3. Remove the transaxle assembly and check the rotation of the torque converter in the bell housing. A failed converter will be difficult to rotate. 4. Remove the torque converter, drain the automatic transmission fluid (ATF) and refill the CD4E transmission assembly using MERCON(R) V ATF. 5. Install a new torque converter and reinstall the transaxle assembly. 6. Back flush the transmission cooler system as described in the WSM, Section 307-01A. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 070506A 2005-2008 Escape/Mariner 5.2 Hrs. 4X2 2.3L: Diagnose And Replace The Torque Converter, Includes Time To Remove And Install Transmission, Backflush The Cooler System (Do Not Use With 7000A, 7000A11, 7000A12, Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Torque Converter: > 07-5-6 > Mar > 07 > A/T - Engine Stall Upon Gear Engagement > Page 3390 12650D) 070506A 2005-2008 Escape/Mariner 5.8 Hrs. 4X4 2.3L: Diagnose And Replace The Torque Converter, Includes Time To Remove And Install Transmission, Backflush The Cooler System (Do Not Use With 7000A, 7000A11, 7000A12, 12650D) 070506A 2005-2008 Escape/Mariner 5.9 Hrs. 4X2 3.0L: Diagnose And Replace The Torque Converter, Includes Time To Remove And Install Transmission, Backflush The Cooler System (Do Not Use With 7000A, 7000A11, 7000A12, 12650D) 070506A 2005-2008 Escape/Mariner 7.5 Hrs. 4X4 3.0L: Diagnose And Replace The Torque Converter, Includes Time To Remove And Install Transmission, Backflush The Cooler System (Do Not Use With 7000A, 7000A11, 7000A12, 12650D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7902 30 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3391 Torque Converter: Description and Operation Torque Converter The torque converter is a 4 element assembly. The torque converter contains an impeller, a turbine, a reactor and a torque converter clutch (TCC) for increased fuel economy. It couples the engine to the turbine shaft assembly, provides torque multiplication and absorbs engine shock of gear shifting. The lock-up temperature for the torque converter is based upon initial transmission fluid temperature (TFT) at key on. If the TFT reads below 16°C (60° F), the converter will lock-up at 16°C (60°F). If the initial TFT reads 16°C (61°F), the converter will lock-up at 21°C (70°F). This warm-up phase continues until approximately 32°C (90°F), at which temperature the converter lock-up is available immediately. At high temperatures, the converter lock-up is delayed to avoid conditions which might cause shudder. Delayed converter lock-up begins at 80°C (175° F). Impeller and Cover The impeller and cover assembly drives the impeller blades and pump assembly. The impeller is primarily responsible for driving the turbine with hydraulic fluid by means of centrifugal force. The cover provides a mating surface for the torque converter clutch piston plate and dampener assembly. Turbine The turbine is driven by centrifugal fluid force from the impeller. The turbine transmits input torque to the drive chain and driven sprocket through the turbine shaft. Reactor The reactor redirects fluid flow from the turbine back to the impeller so that fluid rotates in the same direction as the impeller. This action also assists in torque multiplication. Torque Converter Clutch (TCC) The TCC provides a mechanical link or direct drive between the engine crankshaft and turbine shaft when applied. The application of the TCC is controlled by the PCM. Under certain conditions, the PCM sends the appropriate signal to the TCC solenoid, which allows fluid pressure within the torque converter to force the TCC piston plate and dampener assembly against the cover creating a mechanical link between the engine and transaxle called torque converter lock-up. Lock-up temperature for the torque converter is based on initial TFT with the key in the ON position. If the TFT reads below 16°C (60°F), the torque converter will lock at 16°C (60°F). If initial TFT is 17°C (63°F) the torque converter will lock at 21°C (70°F). This "warm-up" phase continues until the TFT is approximately 32°C (90°F), at which temperature converter lock-up is available immediately. At high temperatures, torque converter lock-up is delayed to avoid conditions which might cause a shudder. Delayed torque converter lock-up begins at 79°C (175°F). Turbine Shaft The turbine shaft connects the torque converter stator with the forward/coast/direct clutch cylinder. When applied, the forward/coast/direct clutch cylinder transmits input torque to the reverse/overdrive ring gear assembly, which also acts as the drive sprocket. This allows input torque to be transmitted from the torque converter to the drive chain and driven sprocket. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 3392 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Torque Converter Diagnosis Torque Converter: Testing and Inspection Torque Converter Diagnosis Torque Converter Diagnosis Prior to installing a new or remanufactured torque converter, all diagnostic procedures must be followed. This is to prevent the unnecessary installation of new or remanufactured torque converters. Only after a complete diagnostic evaluation can the decision be made to install a new or remanufactured torque converter. Begin with the normal diagnostic procedures as follows: 1. Preliminary Inspection. 2. Know and Understand the Customers Concern. 3. Verify the Concern - Carry out the Torque Converter Operation Test. 4. Carry out Diagnostic Procedures. ^ Carry out On-Board Diagnostics. Refer to Computers and Control Systems. Repair all non-transmission related DTCs first. - Repair all transmission DTCs. - Rerun on-board diagnostics to verify repair. ^ Carry out Line Pressure Test. Refer to Special Testing Procedures. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Line Pressure Test See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Special Testing Procedures ^ Carry out Stall Speed Test. Refer to Special Testing Procedures. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Special Testing Procedures ^ Carry out Diagnosis by Symptom Routines. Refer to Diagnosis By Symptom. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Diagnostic Routines See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Diagnosis By Symptom Use the index to locate the appropriate routine that best describes the symptom(s). The routine will list all possible components that may cause or contribute to the symptom. Check each component listed, diagnose and repair as required, before repairing the torque converter. Torque Converter Clutch Operation Test This test verifies that the torque converter clutch control system and the torque converter are operating correctly. Carry out the test as follows: 1. Carry out On-Board Diagnostic Test. Refer to Computers and Control Systems. 2. Connect a tachometer to the engine. 3. Bring engine to normal operating temperature by driving the vehicle at highway speeds for approximately 15 minutes in (D) position. 4. After normal operating temperatures are reached, maintain a constant vehicle speed of about 80 km/h (50 mph) and tap the brake pedal with the left foot. 5. Engine rpm should increase when the brake pedal is tapped, and should decrease about 5 seconds after the brake pedal is released. If this does not occur, see Torque Converter Operation Concerns. Refer to Diagnosis By Symptom. If the vehicle is at a stop and stalls in (D) at idle, move the transaxle range selector lever to the manual 1 position, see Torque Converter Operation Concerns. Refer to Diagnosis By Symptom. Repair as required. If the vehicle does not stall in manual 1, refer to Diagnosis By Symptom. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Diagnostic Routines/Torque Converter Concerns 240/340-242/342 See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures/Diagnosis By Symptom Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Torque Converter Diagnosis > Page 3395 Torque Converter: Testing and Inspection Torque Converter Torque Converter 1. A new or remanufactured torque converter must be installed if one or more of the following statements is true: ^ A torque converter malfunction has been determined based on complete diagnostic procedures. ^ Converter stud or studs, impeller hub or bushing are damaged. ^ Discoloration (due to overheating). ^ Evidence of transmission assembly or fluid contamination due to the following transmission or converter failure modes: Major metallic failure. - Multiple clutches or clutch plate failures. - Sufficient component wear which results in metallic contamination. - Internal torque converter contamination present. For additional information refer to Torque Converter Contamination Inspection. See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Torque Converter Contamination Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Torque Converter Diagnosis > Page 3396 Torque Converter: Testing and Inspection Torque Converter Contamination Inspection Torque Converter Contamination Inspection CAUTION: Do not use water-based cleaners or mineral spirits to clean or flush the torque converter or transmission damage will occur. Use only clean automatic transmission fluid designated for the transmission and converter being serviced. 1. If a new or remanufactured torque converter is not being installed, the following steps must be completed. 2. With the torque converter on a bench, pour a small amount of transmission fluid from the torque converter onto an absorbent white tissue or through a paper filter and examine the fluid. 3. Observe the color and odor of the fluid. The fluid should be red, not brown or black. Odor may indicate an overheating condition such as clutch disc or band failure. 4. Examine the stain on the tissue for evidence of particles (spec of any kind). Examine the fluid level indicator for signs of antifreeze (gum or varnish). If particles are present in the fluid or there is evidence of engine coolant or water, a new torque converter must be installed. 5. If there are no particles or contamination present, drain the remainder of the transmission fluid from the torque converter. 6. Add 1.9L (2 qt) of clean automatic transmission fluid into the converter and agitate by hand. 7. Thoroughly drain the fluid. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Pinpoint Tests - Non OSC Equipped Vehicle Special Tool(s) Solenoid Operation Chart Solenoid Operation Chart Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Always OFF" Failed OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns, and/or solenoid electrically stuck off, and/or hydraulically or mechanically stuck off. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3400 Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Always ON" Failed ON due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns, and/or solenoid electrically stuck on, and/or hydraulically or mechanically stuck on. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3401 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09B10S2 > Aug > 10 > Campaign - A/T Fluid Cooler Inspection/Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 09B10S2 Date: 100830 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09B10S2 > Aug > 10 > Campaign - A/T Fluid Cooler Inspection/Replacement > Page 3410 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes, OASIS will be activated on March 5, 2010. FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website by March 31, 2010. Owner names and addresses will be available by March 31, 2010. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this program is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this service action. STOCK VEHICLES Inspect / repair all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for inspection / repairs. ^ Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN lists but are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter and schedule a service date. ^ Inspect / repair other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09B10S2 > Aug > 10 > Campaign - A/T Fluid Cooler Inspection/Replacement > Page 3411 TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this program. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this service action performed on a timely basis. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME ^ If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the inspection / repair, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval after completion of the inspection / repair will not be granted. ^ If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the inspection / repair of the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center. OWNER REFUNDS ^ Ford Motor Company will only refund owner-paid repairs covered by this program if the repair was performed before the date of the Owner Notification Letter (or after the date of the letter if an emergency repair was made away from the servicing dealer). Non-covered repairs, or those judged by Ford to be excessive, will not be reimbursed. ^ Refunds will only be provided for the cost associated with the diagnosis and repair of a concern caused by a cracked transmission fluid cooler. ^ Multiple refunds should be submitted on one repair line and the invoice details for each repair should be detailed in the comments section of the claim. If a repair is performed on the same visit, the repair and refunds should be submitted on separate repair lines. ^ The refund period for repairs performed prior to the date of the Owner Notification Letter will expire on August 31, 2010. ^ Refund Claiming Information. (Submit on separate repair line.) - Program Code: 09B10 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN - Misc. Expense: REFUND - Misc. Expense: 0.2 Hrs. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Refunds or related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ PROGRAM TERMS: This program will be in effect through . There is no mileage limit for this program. ^ Claiming information for PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil - applies to Labor Operation 09B10C or 09B10F only (Submit on same repair line as repair.) - Program Code: 09B10 - Misc. Expense: OTHER - Misc. Expense: $5.76 Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09B10S2 > Aug > 10 > Campaign - A/T Fluid Cooler Inspection/Replacement > Page 3412 LABOR ALLOWANCES NEW! Parts Requirements / Ordering Information Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09B10S2 > Aug > 10 > Campaign - A/T Fluid Cooler Inspection/Replacement > Page 3413 DEALER PRICE For latest prices, refer to DOES II. PARTS RETENTION AND RETURN Affected transmission fluid coolers are subject to random selection for return to the Ford Warranty Parts Analysis Center (WPAC). Refer to your daily PEARS (Parts Entry and Return System) register for part disposition and return instructions. Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return Procedures." EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW In some of the affected vehicles, the transmission fluid cooler may develop a crack in the tube below the right hand (RH) mounting bracket from thermal and vibration fatigue. This may lead to a small transmission fluid leak and possible rough / harsh shifts Dealers are to inspect the transmission fluid cooler for a grommet and possible fluid leak below the RH mounting bracket Based on the results of the inspection, dealers will perform one of the following service actions: INSPECTION Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09B10S2 > Aug > 10 > Campaign - A/T Fluid Cooler Inspection/Replacement > Page 3414 1. Using a suitable light, look through the radiator grille and inspect the transmission fluid cooler mounting bracket for a grommet behind the mounting bolt. See Figure 1 and Figure 2. 2. If the grommet IS present NO further action is required and this procedure is complete See Figure 2. ESCAPE 3. If the grommet is NOT present remove the radiator grille. See Figure 3. ^ Remove the two upper grille bolts ^ Slightly tip the grille outward and remove the two lower inside grille bolts ^ Slightly tip the grille outward and remove the two lower grille speed nuts that attach the grille to the front bumper cover ^ Release the three lower grille retainers from the front bumper cover Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09B10S2 > Aug > 10 > Campaign - A/T Fluid Cooler Inspection/Replacement > Page 3415 ^ Remove the radiator grille MARINER 4. If the grommet is NOT present remove the front bumper cover For additional information, refer to the Workshop Manual (WSM) Section 501-19. ESCAPE AND MARINER 5. Using a clean white paper towel wipe the transmission fluid cooler tube below the RH mounting bracket and check for a fluid leak. See Figure 4. ^ If there is NO fluid leak proceed to SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. ^ If a fluid leak IS present proceed to SERVICE PROCEDURE 2. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1 - GROMMET NOT PRESENT AND TRANSMISSION FLUID COOLER NOT LEAKING ESCAPE AND MARINER If during the inspection there was NO fluid leak detected remove the existing RH transmission fluid cooler mounting bracket and install a new bracket 1. NOTE: It is NOT necessary to evacuate the A/C system or to drain any of the transmission fluid in the following Service Procedure steps Remove the RH and LH transmission fluid cooler mounting bracket bolts 2. NOTE: When using a wood spacer use NO larger than a 1 X 3, piece of wood for radiator protection Using a larger piece of wood may damage the radiator and/or the cooler. Place a wood spacer no larger than 1 X 3 between the cooler RH mounting bracket and the radiator at the bracket location. 3. NOTE: It is recommended to use a die grinder equipped with a small cutting wheel. Do not use a body reciprocating saw or a Sawzall(R) to remove the bracket. Using this type of cutting tool may cause damage to the radiator and/or the cooler. NOTE: Place a protective cover overthe front bumper cover to prevent any damage when removing the RH mounting bracket. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09B10S2 > Aug > 10 > Campaign - A/T Fluid Cooler Inspection/Replacement > Page 3416 Using a suitable tool, cut the existing RH mounting bracket off of the transmission fluid cooler tube and smooth any sharp edges using a Scotch-Brite(TM) pad or equivalent. See Figure 5. 4. Install the new mounting bracket. See Figure 6. ^ Install the new mounting bracket onto the A/C line upper block with the longer piece of the bracket flush with the radiator support. ^ Tighten the clamping bolt to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). ^ Using the same RH mounting location install and tighten the iso-mount bolt to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). ^ Reinstall and tighten the LH transmission fluid cooler mounting bracket bolt to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). ESCAPE 5. Install the radiator grille. See Figure 3. ^ Attach the three lower grille retainers to the front bumper cover by pushing the grille into the bumper cover. Make sure that all three grille Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09B10S2 > Aug > 10 > Campaign - A/T Fluid Cooler Inspection/Replacement > Page 3417 retainers make an audible click when attaching to the bumper cover. ^ Hand-Tighten the two lower grille speed nuts until the speed nuts are snug. ^ Hand-tighten the two lower inside grille bolts until the bolts are snug. ^ Tighten the two upper grille bolts to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). MARINER 6. Install the front bumper cover. For additional information refer to the WSM Section 501-19. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2 - GROMMET NOT PRESENT AND TRANSMISSION FLUID COOLER LEAKING ESCAPE AND MARINER 1. NOTE: On Escape it will be necessary to remove the remaining front bumper cover for the transmission fluid cooler replacement. If during the inspection there WAS a fluid leak replace the transmission fluid cooler. For additional information refer to the WSM Section 307-02A ESCAPE 2. Install the radiator grille onto the bumper cover. See Figure 3. ^ Attach the three lower grille retainers to the front bumper cover by pushing the grille into the bumper cover Make sure that all three grille retainers make an audible click when attaching to the bumper cover ^ Hand-tighten the two lower grille speed nuts until the speed nuts are snug ^ Hand-tighten the two lower inside grille bolts until the bolts are snug 3. Install the front bumper cover. For additional information refer to the WSM Section 501-19. ^ Tighten the two upper grille bolts to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). MARINER 4. Install the front bumper cover. For additional information, refer to the WSM, Section 501-19. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Recalls: > 09B10S2 > Aug > 10 > Campaign - A/T Fluid Cooler Inspection/Replacement > Page 3418 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-9-4 > May > 09 > A/T - CD4E Transmission Cooler Fluid Leak Transmission Cooler: Customer Interest A/T - CD4E Transmission Cooler Fluid Leak TSB 09-9-4 05/18/09 CD4E TRANSMISSION - FLUID LEAK TRANSMISSION FLUID COOLER (EXCLUDES HYBRIDS)-BUILT ON OR BEFORE 5/9/2008 FORD: 2008 Escape MERCURY: 2008 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 08-16-12 to change the production fix date. ISSUE Some 2008 Escape and Mariner vehicles (excluding Hybrids) built on or before 5/9/2008 and equipped with a CD4E transmission may exhibit a fluid leak from the transmission cooler. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Replace the transmission / A/C cooler with a new updated part following Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 412-01. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 090904A 2008 Escape/Mariner 1.1 Hrs. CD4E Transmission: Replace The Transmission Fluid Cooler, Includes Time To Remove And Install Bumper Cover, Evacuate And Charge Air Conditioning System, Top Off Transmission Fluid (Do Not Use With 19700A, 19700A7) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19712 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Cooler: > 09B10S2 > Aug > 10 > Campaign - A/T Fluid Cooler Inspection/Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 09B10S2 Date: 100830 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Cooler: > 09B10S2 > Aug > 10 > Campaign - A/T Fluid Cooler Inspection/Replacement > Page 3429 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes, OASIS will be activated on March 5, 2010. FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website by March 31, 2010. Owner names and addresses will be available by March 31, 2010. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this program is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this service action. STOCK VEHICLES Inspect / repair all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for inspection / repairs. ^ Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN lists but are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter and schedule a service date. ^ Inspect / repair other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Cooler: > 09B10S2 > Aug > 10 > Campaign - A/T Fluid Cooler Inspection/Replacement > Page 3430 TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this program. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this service action performed on a timely basis. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME ^ If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the inspection / repair, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval after completion of the inspection / repair will not be granted. ^ If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the inspection / repair of the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center. OWNER REFUNDS ^ Ford Motor Company will only refund owner-paid repairs covered by this program if the repair was performed before the date of the Owner Notification Letter (or after the date of the letter if an emergency repair was made away from the servicing dealer). Non-covered repairs, or those judged by Ford to be excessive, will not be reimbursed. ^ Refunds will only be provided for the cost associated with the diagnosis and repair of a concern caused by a cracked transmission fluid cooler. ^ Multiple refunds should be submitted on one repair line and the invoice details for each repair should be detailed in the comments section of the claim. If a repair is performed on the same visit, the repair and refunds should be submitted on separate repair lines. ^ The refund period for repairs performed prior to the date of the Owner Notification Letter will expire on August 31, 2010. ^ Refund Claiming Information. (Submit on separate repair line.) - Program Code: 09B10 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN - Misc. Expense: REFUND - Misc. Expense: 0.2 Hrs. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Refunds or related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ PROGRAM TERMS: This program will be in effect through . There is no mileage limit for this program. ^ Claiming information for PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil - applies to Labor Operation 09B10C or 09B10F only (Submit on same repair line as repair.) - Program Code: 09B10 - Misc. Expense: OTHER - Misc. Expense: $5.76 Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Cooler: > 09B10S2 > Aug > 10 > Campaign - A/T Fluid Cooler Inspection/Replacement > Page 3431 LABOR ALLOWANCES NEW! Parts Requirements / Ordering Information Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Cooler: > 09B10S2 > Aug > 10 > Campaign - A/T Fluid Cooler Inspection/Replacement > Page 3432 DEALER PRICE For latest prices, refer to DOES II. PARTS RETENTION AND RETURN Affected transmission fluid coolers are subject to random selection for return to the Ford Warranty Parts Analysis Center (WPAC). Refer to your daily PEARS (Parts Entry and Return System) register for part disposition and return instructions. Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return Procedures." EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW In some of the affected vehicles, the transmission fluid cooler may develop a crack in the tube below the right hand (RH) mounting bracket from thermal and vibration fatigue. This may lead to a small transmission fluid leak and possible rough / harsh shifts Dealers are to inspect the transmission fluid cooler for a grommet and possible fluid leak below the RH mounting bracket Based on the results of the inspection, dealers will perform one of the following service actions: INSPECTION Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Cooler: > 09B10S2 > Aug > 10 > Campaign - A/T Fluid Cooler Inspection/Replacement > Page 3433 1. Using a suitable light, look through the radiator grille and inspect the transmission fluid cooler mounting bracket for a grommet behind the mounting bolt. See Figure 1 and Figure 2. 2. If the grommet IS present NO further action is required and this procedure is complete See Figure 2. ESCAPE 3. If the grommet is NOT present remove the radiator grille. See Figure 3. ^ Remove the two upper grille bolts ^ Slightly tip the grille outward and remove the two lower inside grille bolts ^ Slightly tip the grille outward and remove the two lower grille speed nuts that attach the grille to the front bumper cover ^ Release the three lower grille retainers from the front bumper cover Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Cooler: > 09B10S2 > Aug > 10 > Campaign - A/T Fluid Cooler Inspection/Replacement > Page 3434 ^ Remove the radiator grille MARINER 4. If the grommet is NOT present remove the front bumper cover For additional information, refer to the Workshop Manual (WSM) Section 501-19. ESCAPE AND MARINER 5. Using a clean white paper towel wipe the transmission fluid cooler tube below the RH mounting bracket and check for a fluid leak. See Figure 4. ^ If there is NO fluid leak proceed to SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. ^ If a fluid leak IS present proceed to SERVICE PROCEDURE 2. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1 - GROMMET NOT PRESENT AND TRANSMISSION FLUID COOLER NOT LEAKING ESCAPE AND MARINER If during the inspection there was NO fluid leak detected remove the existing RH transmission fluid cooler mounting bracket and install a new bracket 1. NOTE: It is NOT necessary to evacuate the A/C system or to drain any of the transmission fluid in the following Service Procedure steps Remove the RH and LH transmission fluid cooler mounting bracket bolts 2. NOTE: When using a wood spacer use NO larger than a 1 X 3, piece of wood for radiator protection Using a larger piece of wood may damage the radiator and/or the cooler. Place a wood spacer no larger than 1 X 3 between the cooler RH mounting bracket and the radiator at the bracket location. 3. NOTE: It is recommended to use a die grinder equipped with a small cutting wheel. Do not use a body reciprocating saw or a Sawzall(R) to remove the bracket. Using this type of cutting tool may cause damage to the radiator and/or the cooler. NOTE: Place a protective cover overthe front bumper cover to prevent any damage when removing the RH mounting bracket. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Cooler: > 09B10S2 > Aug > 10 > Campaign - A/T Fluid Cooler Inspection/Replacement > Page 3435 Using a suitable tool, cut the existing RH mounting bracket off of the transmission fluid cooler tube and smooth any sharp edges using a Scotch-Brite(TM) pad or equivalent. See Figure 5. 4. Install the new mounting bracket. See Figure 6. ^ Install the new mounting bracket onto the A/C line upper block with the longer piece of the bracket flush with the radiator support. ^ Tighten the clamping bolt to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). ^ Using the same RH mounting location install and tighten the iso-mount bolt to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). ^ Reinstall and tighten the LH transmission fluid cooler mounting bracket bolt to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). ESCAPE 5. Install the radiator grille. See Figure 3. ^ Attach the three lower grille retainers to the front bumper cover by pushing the grille into the bumper cover. Make sure that all three grille Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Cooler: > 09B10S2 > Aug > 10 > Campaign - A/T Fluid Cooler Inspection/Replacement > Page 3436 retainers make an audible click when attaching to the bumper cover. ^ Hand-Tighten the two lower grille speed nuts until the speed nuts are snug. ^ Hand-tighten the two lower inside grille bolts until the bolts are snug. ^ Tighten the two upper grille bolts to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). MARINER 6. Install the front bumper cover. For additional information refer to the WSM Section 501-19. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2 - GROMMET NOT PRESENT AND TRANSMISSION FLUID COOLER LEAKING ESCAPE AND MARINER 1. NOTE: On Escape it will be necessary to remove the remaining front bumper cover for the transmission fluid cooler replacement. If during the inspection there WAS a fluid leak replace the transmission fluid cooler. For additional information refer to the WSM Section 307-02A ESCAPE 2. Install the radiator grille onto the bumper cover. See Figure 3. ^ Attach the three lower grille retainers to the front bumper cover by pushing the grille into the bumper cover Make sure that all three grille retainers make an audible click when attaching to the bumper cover ^ Hand-tighten the two lower grille speed nuts until the speed nuts are snug ^ Hand-tighten the two lower inside grille bolts until the bolts are snug 3. Install the front bumper cover. For additional information refer to the WSM Section 501-19. ^ Tighten the two upper grille bolts to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). MARINER 4. Install the front bumper cover. For additional information, refer to the WSM, Section 501-19. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Cooler: > 09B10S2 > Aug > 10 > Campaign - A/T Fluid Cooler Inspection/Replacement > Page 3437 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Cooler: > 09-25-4 > Dec > 09 > A/T CD4E - Cold Weather Transmission Failure Transmission Cooler: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T CD4E - Cold Weather Transmission Failure TSB 09-25-4 12/28/09 CD4E TRANSMISSION FAILURE - REPLACE OR INSTALL TRANSMISSION FLUID COOLER COLD WEATHER BYPASS KIT FORD: 2001-2008 Escape MERCURY: 2001-2008 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 4-14-1 to update the model year coverage, Part List and Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2001-2008 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a CD4E transmission may experience a transmission failure due to inadequate lube flow during warm up in cold weather. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Follow the Workshop Manual, Section 307-01 service procedure to repair the transmission. When overhauling or replacing a CD4E transmission, always install a new cold weather transmission fluid bypass kit, even if not previously equipped. Do not flush or back flush existing transmission cooler bypass valve system or cooler tube system. Follow instruction sheets included in the new Cold Weather Transmission Fluid Cooler Bypass Kit. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT092504 Claim Diagnosis And Labor Actual Performed As Actual Time Time DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7K177 55 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Transmission Cooler: > 09-9-4 > May > 09 > A/T - CD4E Transmission Cooler Fluid Leak Transmission Cooler: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - CD4E Transmission Cooler Fluid Leak TSB 09-9-4 05/18/09 CD4E TRANSMISSION - FLUID LEAK TRANSMISSION FLUID COOLER (EXCLUDES HYBRIDS)-BUILT ON OR BEFORE 5/9/2008 FORD: 2008 Escape MERCURY: 2008 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 08-16-12 to change the production fix date. ISSUE Some 2008 Escape and Mariner vehicles (excluding Hybrids) built on or before 5/9/2008 and equipped with a CD4E transmission may exhibit a fluid leak from the transmission cooler. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Replace the transmission / A/C cooler with a new updated part following Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 412-01. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 090904A 2008 Escape/Mariner 1.1 Hrs. CD4E Transmission: Replace The Transmission Fluid Cooler, Includes Time To Remove And Install Bumper Cover, Evacuate And Charge Air Conditioning System, Top Off Transmission Fluid (Do Not Use With 19700A, 19700A7) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19712 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Transmission Cooler: > 09-25-4 > Dec > 09 > A/T CD4E - Cold Weather Transmission Failure Transmission Cooler: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T CD4E - Cold Weather Transmission Failure TSB 09-25-4 12/28/09 CD4E TRANSMISSION FAILURE - REPLACE OR INSTALL TRANSMISSION FLUID COOLER COLD WEATHER BYPASS KIT FORD: 2001-2008 Escape MERCURY: 2001-2008 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 4-14-1 to update the model year coverage, Part List and Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2001-2008 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a CD4E transmission may experience a transmission failure due to inadequate lube flow during warm up in cold weather. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Follow the Workshop Manual, Section 307-01 service procedure to repair the transmission. When overhauling or replacing a CD4E transmission, always install a new cold weather transmission fluid bypass kit, even if not previously equipped. Do not flush or back flush existing transmission cooler bypass valve system or cooler tube system. Follow instruction sheets included in the new Cold Weather Transmission Fluid Cooler Bypass Kit. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT092504 Claim Diagnosis And Labor Actual Performed As Actual Time Time DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7K177 55 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Transmission Cooler: > 09-9-4 > May > 09 > A/T - CD4E Transmission Cooler Fluid Leak Transmission Cooler: All Technical Service Bulletins A/T - CD4E Transmission Cooler Fluid Leak TSB 09-9-4 05/18/09 CD4E TRANSMISSION - FLUID LEAK TRANSMISSION FLUID COOLER (EXCLUDES HYBRIDS)-BUILT ON OR BEFORE 5/9/2008 FORD: 2008 Escape MERCURY: 2008 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 08-16-12 to change the production fix date. ISSUE Some 2008 Escape and Mariner vehicles (excluding Hybrids) built on or before 5/9/2008 and equipped with a CD4E transmission may exhibit a fluid leak from the transmission cooler. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Replace the transmission / A/C cooler with a new updated part following Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 412-01. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 090904A 2008 Escape/Mariner 1.1 Hrs. CD4E Transmission: Replace The Transmission Fluid Cooler, Includes Time To Remove And Install Bumper Cover, Evacuate And Charge Air Conditioning System, Top Off Transmission Fluid (Do Not Use With 19700A, 19700A7) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19712 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Transmission Cooler: > 09B10S2 > Aug > 10 > Campaign - A/T Fluid Cooler Inspection/Replacement Technical Service Bulletin # 09B10S2 Date: 100830 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Transmission Cooler: > 09B10S2 > Aug > 10 > Campaign - A/T Fluid Cooler Inspection/Replacement > Page 3460 Attachment I - Administrative Information OASIS ACTIVATED? Yes, OASIS will be activated on March 5, 2010. FSA VIN LIST ACTIVATED? Yes, FSA VIN list will be available through the website by March 31, 2010. Owner names and addresses will be available by March 31, 2010. NOTE: Your FSA VIN list may contain owner names and addresses obtained from motor vehicle registration records. The use of such motor vehicle registration data for any purpose other than in connection with this program is a violation of law in several states, provinces, and countries. Accordingly, you must limit the use of this listing to the follow-up necessary to complete this service action. STOCK VEHICLES Inspect / repair all affected units in your new vehicle inventory before delivery. SOLD VEHICLES ^ Owners of affected vehicles will be directed to dealers for inspection / repairs. ^ Immediately contact any of your affected customers whose vehicles are not on your VIN lists but are identified in OASIS. Give the customer a copy of the Owner Notification Letter and schedule a service date. ^ Inspect / repair other affected vehicles identified in OASIS which are brought to your dealership. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Transmission Cooler: > 09B10S2 > Aug > 10 > Campaign - A/T Fluid Cooler Inspection/Replacement > Page 3461 TITLE BRANDED / SALVAGED VEHICLES Affected title branded and salvaged vehicles are eligible for this program. RELATED DAMAGE If a related damage condition exists that you believe to be caused by the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to the repair of any related damage. Requests for approval after completion of the repair will not be granted. Ford Motor Company reserves the right to deny coverage for related damage in cases where the vehicle owner has not had this service action performed on a timely basis. ADDITIONAL LABOR TIME ^ If a condition exists that requires additional labor to complete the inspection / repair, call the Special Service Support Center to request approval prior to performing any additional labor. Requests for approval after completion of the inspection / repair will not be granted. ^ If you encounter aftermarket equipment or modifications to the vehicle which might prevent the inspection / repair of the covered condition, call the Special Service Support Center. OWNER REFUNDS ^ Ford Motor Company will only refund owner-paid repairs covered by this program if the repair was performed before the date of the Owner Notification Letter (or after the date of the letter if an emergency repair was made away from the servicing dealer). Non-covered repairs, or those judged by Ford to be excessive, will not be reimbursed. ^ Refunds will only be provided for the cost associated with the diagnosis and repair of a concern caused by a cracked transmission fluid cooler. ^ Multiple refunds should be submitted on one repair line and the invoice details for each repair should be detailed in the comments section of the claim. If a repair is performed on the same visit, the repair and refunds should be submitted on separate repair lines. ^ The refund period for repairs performed prior to the date of the Owner Notification Letter will expire on August 31, 2010. ^ Refund Claiming Information. (Submit on separate repair line.) - Program Code: 09B10 - Misc. Expense: ADMIN - Misc. Expense: REFUND - Misc. Expense: 0.2 Hrs. RENTAL VEHICLES The use of rental vehicles is not authorized for this program. CLAIMS PREPARATION AND SUBMISSION ^ Enter claims using Direct Warranty Entry (DWE). ^ Refer to ACESII manual for claims preparation and submission information. ^ Refunds or related damage must be claimed on a repair line that is separate from the repair line on which the FSA is claimed. Related damage requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ "MT" labor should be submitted on a separate repair line with the related damage flag checked. "MT" labor requires prior approval from the Special Service Support Center. ^ PROGRAM TERMS: This program will be in effect through . There is no mileage limit for this program. ^ Claiming information for PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil - applies to Labor Operation 09B10C or 09B10F only (Submit on same repair line as repair.) - Program Code: 09B10 - Misc. Expense: OTHER - Misc. Expense: $5.76 Attachment II - Labor and Parts Information Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Transmission Cooler: > 09B10S2 > Aug > 10 > Campaign - A/T Fluid Cooler Inspection/Replacement > Page 3462 LABOR ALLOWANCES NEW! Parts Requirements / Ordering Information Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Transmission Cooler: > 09B10S2 > Aug > 10 > Campaign - A/T Fluid Cooler Inspection/Replacement > Page 3463 DEALER PRICE For latest prices, refer to DOES II. PARTS RETENTION AND RETURN Affected transmission fluid coolers are subject to random selection for return to the Ford Warranty Parts Analysis Center (WPAC). Refer to your daily PEARS (Parts Entry and Return System) register for part disposition and return instructions. Follow the provisions of the Warranty and Policy Manual for "Parts Retention and Return Procedures." EXCESS STOCK RETURN Excess stock returned for credit must have been purchased from Ford Customer Service Division in accordance with Policy Procedure Bulletin 4000. Attachment III - Technical Information OVERVIEW In some of the affected vehicles, the transmission fluid cooler may develop a crack in the tube below the right hand (RH) mounting bracket from thermal and vibration fatigue. This may lead to a small transmission fluid leak and possible rough / harsh shifts Dealers are to inspect the transmission fluid cooler for a grommet and possible fluid leak below the RH mounting bracket Based on the results of the inspection, dealers will perform one of the following service actions: INSPECTION Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Transmission Cooler: > 09B10S2 > Aug > 10 > Campaign - A/T Fluid Cooler Inspection/Replacement > Page 3464 1. Using a suitable light, look through the radiator grille and inspect the transmission fluid cooler mounting bracket for a grommet behind the mounting bolt. See Figure 1 and Figure 2. 2. If the grommet IS present NO further action is required and this procedure is complete See Figure 2. ESCAPE 3. If the grommet is NOT present remove the radiator grille. See Figure 3. ^ Remove the two upper grille bolts ^ Slightly tip the grille outward and remove the two lower inside grille bolts ^ Slightly tip the grille outward and remove the two lower grille speed nuts that attach the grille to the front bumper cover ^ Release the three lower grille retainers from the front bumper cover Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Transmission Cooler: > 09B10S2 > Aug > 10 > Campaign - A/T Fluid Cooler Inspection/Replacement > Page 3465 ^ Remove the radiator grille MARINER 4. If the grommet is NOT present remove the front bumper cover For additional information, refer to the Workshop Manual (WSM) Section 501-19. ESCAPE AND MARINER 5. Using a clean white paper towel wipe the transmission fluid cooler tube below the RH mounting bracket and check for a fluid leak. See Figure 4. ^ If there is NO fluid leak proceed to SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. ^ If a fluid leak IS present proceed to SERVICE PROCEDURE 2. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1 - GROMMET NOT PRESENT AND TRANSMISSION FLUID COOLER NOT LEAKING ESCAPE AND MARINER If during the inspection there was NO fluid leak detected remove the existing RH transmission fluid cooler mounting bracket and install a new bracket 1. NOTE: It is NOT necessary to evacuate the A/C system or to drain any of the transmission fluid in the following Service Procedure steps Remove the RH and LH transmission fluid cooler mounting bracket bolts 2. NOTE: When using a wood spacer use NO larger than a 1 X 3, piece of wood for radiator protection Using a larger piece of wood may damage the radiator and/or the cooler. Place a wood spacer no larger than 1 X 3 between the cooler RH mounting bracket and the radiator at the bracket location. 3. NOTE: It is recommended to use a die grinder equipped with a small cutting wheel. Do not use a body reciprocating saw or a Sawzall(R) to remove the bracket. Using this type of cutting tool may cause damage to the radiator and/or the cooler. NOTE: Place a protective cover overthe front bumper cover to prevent any damage when removing the RH mounting bracket. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Transmission Cooler: > 09B10S2 > Aug > 10 > Campaign - A/T Fluid Cooler Inspection/Replacement > Page 3466 Using a suitable tool, cut the existing RH mounting bracket off of the transmission fluid cooler tube and smooth any sharp edges using a Scotch-Brite(TM) pad or equivalent. See Figure 5. 4. Install the new mounting bracket. See Figure 6. ^ Install the new mounting bracket onto the A/C line upper block with the longer piece of the bracket flush with the radiator support. ^ Tighten the clamping bolt to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). ^ Using the same RH mounting location install and tighten the iso-mount bolt to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). ^ Reinstall and tighten the LH transmission fluid cooler mounting bracket bolt to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). ESCAPE 5. Install the radiator grille. See Figure 3. ^ Attach the three lower grille retainers to the front bumper cover by pushing the grille into the bumper cover. Make sure that all three grille Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Transmission Cooler: > 09B10S2 > Aug > 10 > Campaign - A/T Fluid Cooler Inspection/Replacement > Page 3467 retainers make an audible click when attaching to the bumper cover. ^ Hand-Tighten the two lower grille speed nuts until the speed nuts are snug. ^ Hand-tighten the two lower inside grille bolts until the bolts are snug. ^ Tighten the two upper grille bolts to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). MARINER 6. Install the front bumper cover. For additional information refer to the WSM Section 501-19. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2 - GROMMET NOT PRESENT AND TRANSMISSION FLUID COOLER LEAKING ESCAPE AND MARINER 1. NOTE: On Escape it will be necessary to remove the remaining front bumper cover for the transmission fluid cooler replacement. If during the inspection there WAS a fluid leak replace the transmission fluid cooler. For additional information refer to the WSM Section 307-02A ESCAPE 2. Install the radiator grille onto the bumper cover. See Figure 3. ^ Attach the three lower grille retainers to the front bumper cover by pushing the grille into the bumper cover Make sure that all three grille retainers make an audible click when attaching to the bumper cover ^ Hand-tighten the two lower grille speed nuts until the speed nuts are snug ^ Hand-tighten the two lower inside grille bolts until the bolts are snug 3. Install the front bumper cover. For additional information refer to the WSM Section 501-19. ^ Tighten the two upper grille bolts to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). MARINER 4. Install the front bumper cover. For additional information, refer to the WSM, Section 501-19. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Transmission Cooler: > 09B10S2 > Aug > 10 > Campaign - A/T Fluid Cooler Inspection/Replacement > Page 3468 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications Transmission Cooler: Mechanical Specifications Torque Specifications Torque Specifications (Part 1) Torque Specifications (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications > Page 3475 Transmission Cooler: Capacity Specifications Specifications Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Specifications > Mechanical Specifications > Page 3476 Transmission Cooler: Fluid Type Specifications Specifications Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Transmission Cooler: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Symptom Chart - Transaxle Cooling Symptom Chart - Transaxle Cooling Symptom Chart - Transaxle Cooling Symptom Chart - Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH) Symptom Chart - Noise, Vibration and Harshness (NVH) Symptom Chart - Noise/Vibration And Harshness (NVH) (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures > Page 3479 Transmission Cooler: Component Tests and General Diagnostics Transmission Fluid Cooler Material CAUTION: Whenever a transaxle has been disassembled to install new parts or because the valve body sticks from foreign material, the torque converter and transmission fluid cooler must be cleaned by using a suitable cleaner. Under no circumstances should an attempt be made to clean converters by hand agitation with solvent. When internal wear or damage has occurred in the transaxle, metal particles, clutch plate material or band material can be carried into the torque converter and transmission fluid cooler. These contaminants are a major cause of recurring transaxle concerns and must be removed from the system before the transaxle is returned for repair. Transmission Fluid Cooler Flow Test NOTE: The transaxle selector lever linkage adjustment, fluid level and line pressure must be within specification before carrying out this test. Refer to transaxle selector lever linkage adjustment procedure. For transmission fluid level checking procedures, refer to Preliminary Inspection. For transaxle line pressure testing, refer to Line Pressure Test. See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Initial Inspection/Preliminary Inspection See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Line Pressure Test 1. Check the transmission fluid level and fill as necessary. 2. Remove the transmission fluid level indicator from fluid filler tube and install a funnel in the fluid filler tube. 3. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. Refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. Inspect the transmission fluid cooler lines for damage. Install new transmission fluid cooler lines as needed. 4. Disconnect cooler return line (rear line) by separating the tubing from the cooler line rubber hose. 5. Plug the cooler line to avoid transmission fluid loss. 6. Connect one end of a hose to the cooler return line hose and route the other end of the hose up to a point where it can be inserted into the funnel at the fluid filler tube. 7. Start the engine and run at idle with transaxle in NEUTRAL range until the automatic transmission fluid is warm. Temperature is important to the flow rate measurement. ^ Option 1: Once fluid flow no longer has air bubbles in it, remove the rubber hose from the funnel and insert it into liter container. After 15 seconds, install the hose into the funnel and measure the amount of automatic transmission fluid in the container. The rate of flow should be approximately 0.83-1.0L (28-34 oz) in 15 seconds. ^ Option 2: Once fluid flow no longer has air bubbles in it, remove the rubber hose from the funnel and insert it into a liter container. As soon as 1L (1.06 qt) is dispensed into the container, install the hose into the funnel. One liter of automatic transmission fluid should flow through the cooling system in approximately 15-17 seconds. 8. Once adequate flow is determined, shut off the engine, remove the extension hose and reassemble the cooler line with the constant tension clamp. 9. If flow is not adequate, stop the engine. Disconnect the hose from the cooler return line and connect it to the converter-out line. If flow is now liberal, carry out backflushing and cleaning procedure. Refer to Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning. If flow is still not liberal, repair the pump or converter. 10. Check the transmission fluid level and adjust as required. Transmission Fluid Cooler Tube Replacement When fluid leakage is found at the transmission fluid cooler tubes or installation of new cooler tubes is necessary, refer to Transmission Cooler. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Transmission Cooler: Procedures Transmission Fluid Cooler Backflushing and Cleaning Transmission Fluid Combo Cooler Without Cooler Bypass Valve Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3482 Transmission Fluid Combo Cooler With Cooler Bypass Valve 1. Remove the radiator grille. 2. CAUTION: Do not exceed 276 kPa (40 psi) of air pressure when flushing the cooler or damage to the internal cooler fins will occur. CAUTION: Flush with clean transmission fluid only. Do not use solvents, mineral spirits or water-based cleaners. NOTE: Rubber hoses must be attached to the ends of the fluid cooler tubes, to aid in connecting them to the cleaner. Backflush any contaminants from the oil-to-air cooler by connecting the flushing machine pressure line to the transmission fluid cooler outlet tube and the return line to the transmission fluid cooler inlet tube. After 5 minutes, stop the machine, reverse the hoses and repeat the flushing. 3. CAUTION: Do not exceed 276 kPa (40 psi) of air pressure when flushing the cooler. Damage to the cooler will occur. NOTE: Some vehicles are equipped with a cold weather bypass valve which cannot by cleaned or flushed. A new valve should be installed as part of an overhaul or prior to the installation of a remanufactured transaxle. Using compressed air, blow through the coolers until all fluid is removed. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3483 Transmission Cooler: Removal and Replacement Cooler Bypass Valve Cooler Bypass Valve Material Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3484 Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the retainer, the 5 bolts and the LH splash shield. 3. Disconnect and remove the rear cooler tube fitting from the transaxle case. 4. Disconnect and remove the fluid cooler tube bracket and bolt from the transaxle case. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3485 5. Remove the radiator grille. 6. NOTE: Do not remove the steel tube from the converter housing. Disconnect the front transmission fluid cooler hose from the transaxle case. 7. Disconnect the transmission fluid cooler hoses from the transmission fluid combo cooler and discard the transmission fluid cooler tubes. 8. Remove the 2 bolts from the lower LH side of the main control cover. Installation CAUTION: The transmission fluid cooler bypass valve (CBV) is flow directional. The CBV must be installed with the end cap facing up. If not installed correctly, internal damage to the transaxle will result. NOTE: The transmission fluid cooler bypass valve (CBV) cannot be successfully cleaned by back flushing, flushing or disassembly. For vehicles that are equipped with this cold weather bypass valve, a new valve should be installed whenever the transaxle is being overhauled. 1. Install the 2 studs to the lower LH side of the main control cover. ^ Tighten to 13 Nm (10 lb-ft). 2. Position the cooler bypass valve (CBV) onto the studs and loosely install the 2 nuts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Cooler, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 3486 3. Install the transmission fluid cooler tube into the case fitting near the pump. ^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 4. Tighten the 2 CBV retaining nuts. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft). 5. Install the fluid cooler tube bracket onto the pump and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft). 6. Install the transmission fluid cooler hose onto the converter housing tube. Pull the red clip off the constant tension clamp to activate the clamp. 7. Install the fluid cooler hose on the CBV and install the clamp. 8. Install the transmission fluid cooler hose onto the combo fluid cooler lower fitting. Pull the red clip off the constant tension clamp to activate the clamp. 9. Install the transmission fluid cooler hose onto the upper fitting of the CBV. Install the other end of the hose to the upper combo cooler tube. Pull the red clip off the constant tension clamps to activate the clamp. 10. Start the vehicle and check the transmission fluid level. ^ Fill the transaxle with clean automatic transmission fluid. Transmission Fluid Cooler Transmission Fluid Cooler 1. NOTE: The transmission fluid cooler is part of the A/C condenser assembly and cannot be serviced separately. If installation of a new fluid cooler is required, refer to Heating and Air Conditioning. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation TRANSMISSION CONTROL INDICATOR LAMP (TCIL) The TCIL is an output signal from the PCM that controls the lamp on/off function depending on the engagement or disengagement of overdrive. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH (TCS) Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS) Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS) The TCS signals the PCM with VPWR whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature, the transmission control indicator lamp (TCIL) illuminates when the TCS is cycled to disengage overdrive. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3493 Transmission Mode Switch: Testing and Inspection Electrical Connectors Selector Lever Harness Connector C2096 (vehicle harness side) (Part 1) Selector Lever Harness Connector C2096 (vehicle harness side) (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3494 Selector Lever Harness Connector C2096 (component side) (Part 1) Selector Lever Harness Connector C2096 (component side) (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transaxle Support Insulator - LH Transaxle Support Insulator - LH Special Tool(s) Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAF) sensor. 2. Remove the intake tube and air cleaner cover. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH > Page 3499 3. Remove the air cleaner as an assembly. 4. Install the special tools. 5. Install the special tools. 6. Remove the upper transaxle mount through bolt. ^ To install, tighten to 103 Nm (76 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH > Page 3500 7. Remove the 4 upper transaxle mount bolts and remove the mount. ^ To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH > Page 3501 Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transaxle Support Insulator - Lower, Front Transaxle Support Insulator - Lower, Front Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the LH splash shield. 3. Remove the 7 retainers and the LH splash shield. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH > Page 3502 4. Remove the 4 bolts and the cross brace. 5. Remove the bolt for the mount and the 2 bolts for the brace. 6. Remove the rear bolt and remove the brace. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH > Page 3503 7. Remove the 2 bolts from the mount and remove the mount. Installation 1. Install a new mount onto the cross brace and install the bolts. ^ Tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). 2. Position the cross brace in place and install the nut. ^ Tighten to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft). 3. Install the 2 bolts for the cross brace. ^ Tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft). 4. Install the through bolt for the mount. ^ Tighten to 120 Nm (89 lb-ft). 5. Install the cross brace and the 4 bolts. ^ Tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH > Page 3504 6. Install the LH splash shield and the 7 retainers. ^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 7. Install the LH splash shield. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH > Page 3505 Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transaxle Support Insulator - Lower, Rear, DOHC Transaxle Support Insulator - Lower, Rear, 3.0L DOHC Transaxle Support Insulator - Lower, Rear, 3.0L DOHC Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the breather tube and mass air flow (MAF) sensor. 3. Remove the intake tube and air cleaner cover. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH > Page 3506 4. Remove the air cleaner assembly. 5. Remove the mount through bolt. ^ To install, tighten to 120 Nm (89 lb-ft). 6. Remove the retaining bolt and the 2 nuts for the mount and remove the mount. ^ To install, tighten to 80 Nm (59 lb-ft). 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations View 151-10 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3510 View 151-11 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3511 C167 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3512 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Adjustment Special Tool(s) 1. Remove the battery and tray. 2. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position. Loosen the transmission range (TR) sensor bolts. 3. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft). 4. Install the battery and tray. 5. Check for correct operation. The engine should start only in PARK or NEUTRAL. The reverse lamps should illuminate in the REVERSE position. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3513 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Special Tool(s) Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the battery and tray. 3. Remove the transmission range (TR) sensor. 1 Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector. 2 Remove the TR sensor retaining bolts. 3 Remove the TR sensor. Installation 1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position. Install the TR sensor and loosely install the bolts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3514 2. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft). 3. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 4. Install the battery and tray. 5. Check the correct operation. The engine should start only in PARK or NEUTRAL. The reverse lamps should illuminate in the REVERSE position. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Pressure Test Port, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Pressure Test Port: Locations Air Pressure Test Port Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor View 151-10 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 3522 View 151-11 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 3523 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor View 151-10 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 3524 View 151-11 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor C193 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 3527 C143 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Material Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the 7 retainers and the LH splash shield. ^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 3. Remove the turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor 1 Disconnect the TSS electrical connector. 2 Remove the TSS sensor bolt. 3 Remove the TSS sensor. ^ To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 3530 4. NOTE: When installing the sensor, lubricate the O-ring seal with clean transmission fluid. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new O-ring seal as necessary. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 3531 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Material Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the 7 retainers and the LH splash shield. ^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 3. Remove the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor 1 Disconnect the OSS electrical connector. 2 Remove the OSS sensor bolt. 3 Remove the OSS sensor. ^ To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 3532 4. NOTE: When installing the sensor, lubricate the O-ring seal with clean transmission fluid. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new O-ring seal as necessary. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams Valve Body: Diagrams Transaxle Case Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3536 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement Valve Body: Removal and Replacement Main Control Valve Body Material Removal All vehicles 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to maintenance/Service and Repair. 3.0L engine 2. Drain the engine coolant. For additional information, refer to Cooling System. All vehicles 3. Remove the battery and tray. 4. Disconnect the wiring harness from the battery tray bracket. 5. Remove the battery tray bracket. 6. Disconnect the transaxle wiring harness electrical connector and the transmission range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 3539 7. Disconnect the selector lever cable. 8. Remove the selector lever cable and bracket and position it aside. 9. Remove the vent tube hose from the main control cover. 3.0L engine 10. Remove the lower radiator hose and position aside. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 3540 11. Remove the wire harness retainer from the front engine mount. All vehicles 12. Remove the transmission fluid cooler tube bracket bolt. 13. Remove the main control cover bolts, studs and the cover. 14. NOTE: Do not discard the gasket. It is a reusable type. Inspect the gasket for damage. Install a new gasket as necessary. Remove the main control cover gasket. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 3541 15. Remove the main control valve body bolts. 16. NOTE: Do not damage the manual valve. Lift the main control valve body while disconnecting the manual valve link. 17. Depress the retaining tabs and push the solenoid valve body electrical connector down through the transaxle case. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 3542 18. Make sure the manual valve does not fall out of the main control valve body while removing from the vehicle. Installation All vehicles 1. Install the manual control lever in the main control valve body. 2. NOTE: Inspect the solenoid valve body harness connector O-ring seal for damage. If damaged, install a new O-ring seal, before installing the connector into the case. Depress the retaining tabs and push the solenoid valve body electrical connector up through the transaxle case. 3. Position the main control valve body in place while connecting the manual valve link. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 3543 4. Install the main control valve body assembly. Tighten the bolts in the sequence indicated. ^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. NOTE: The main control cover gasket is a reusable type. Inspect the gasket for damage. Install a new gasket as necessary. Install the main control cover gasket. 6. NOTE: Install the cooler bypass valve studs in locations 3 and 11. Install the main control cover. Tighten the bolts and studs in the indicated sequence. ^ Tighten to 13 Nm (10 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 3544 7. Position the transmission fluid cooler tube in place and install the bolt. ^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 3.0L engine 8. Install the wire harness retainer to the front engine mount. 9. Install the lower radiator hose. All vehicles Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 3545 10. Install the selector lever cable and bracket. ^ Tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). 11. Connect the selector lever cable end. 12. Connect the vent hose to the main control cover. 13. Connect the transaxle wiring harness electrical connector and the transmission range (TR) sensor electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 3546 14. Install the battery tray bracket. ^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 15. Connect the wiring harness to the battery tray bracket. 16. Install the battery tray. 17. Fill the transaxle with clean transmission fluid. 3.0L engine 18. Fill the engine coolant. For additional information, refer to Cooling System. All vehicles 19. Start the engine and run through all the gears and check transmission fluid level. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 3547 Valve Body: Overhaul Main Control Valve Body Special Tool(s) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 3548 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 3549 Disassembly 1. Remove the manual valve. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 3550 2. CAUTION: Do not attempt to remove the solenoid valve body wiring cover. Remove the 2 solenoid valve body bolts and the solenoid valve body. 3. Remove and discard the solenoid valve body gasket. 4. Remove the 3 pressure tap plate bolts and the pressure tap plate. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 3551 5. Remove and discard the pressure plate tap gasket. 6. Remove the control valve body to transfer plate bolts, and remove the manual valve detent spring assembly. 7. Remove the accumulator body-to-transfer plate bolts. 8. Separate the accumulator body from the main control valve body. 1 Remove the accumulator body assembly. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 3552 2 Remove and discard the accumulator body separator gasket. 3 Remove the accumulator body separator plate. 4 Remove and discard the accumulator body separator gasket. 5 Remove the main control valve body. 9. Separate the transfer plate from the main control valve body. 1 Remove the main control valve body. 2 Remove and discard the valve body separator plate gasket. 3 Remove the valve body separator plate. 4 Remove and discard the valve body separator plate gasket. 5 Remove the transfer plate. 10. Remove the intermediate and overdrive accumulator valve plug retaining plate from the accumulator body assembly. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 3553 11. Remove the intermediate and overdrive accumulator valve plug. 12. Remove and discard the intermediate and overdrive accumulator plug seal. 13. CAUTION: Remove, note location and clean one valve at a time to avoid incorrect installation. As necessary, disassemble the parts of the accumulator body and main control valve body assemblies. ^ Lubricate and reassemble the parts as soon as possible to avoid accidental damage or incorrect installation. Assembly 1. WARNING: When using compressed air, never let air pressure exceed 172 kPa (25 psi) and always wear safety glasses. Compressed air may cause foreign material or parts to become airborne. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. CAUTION: If the valve sticks in its bore and cannot be freed, install a new main control valve body. NOTE: Clean the main control valve body and accumulator body assembly of the main control in cleaning solvent. Blow dry with moisture-free regulated compressed air. The solenoid valve body should not be cleaned in cleaning solvent. It may be blown clean with compressed air or wiped clean with a lint-free cloth. Install a new intermediate and overdrive accumulator plug seal and coat with petroleum jelly. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 3554 2. CAUTION: Do not install the intermediate and overdrive accumulator valve plug and seal too far into the bore and damage the seal. Only push the intermediate and overdrive accumulator valve plug until it is flush with the accumulator body assembly. Install the intermediate and overdrive accumulator valve plug. 3. Install the intermediate and overdrive accumulator valve plug retaining plate. 4. Install the special tool. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 3555 5. Using the special tool, install the valve body separator plate gaskets and valve body separator plate. 1 Install a new valve body separator plate gasket. 2 Install the valve body separator plate. 3 Install a new valve body separator plate gasket. 6. Using the special tool, install the main control valve body. 7. Using the special tool, install the accumulator body separator plate and gaskets. 1 Install a new accumulator body separator plate gasket. 2 Install the accumulator body separator plate. 3 Install a new accumulator body separator plate gasket. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 3556 8. Using the special tool, install the accumulator body assembly. 9. Starting with the bolts in the middle and working outward, install the accumulator body transfer plate. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft). 10. Starting with the bolts in the middle and working outward, install the main control valve body to transfer plate and install the detent spring. ^ Tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 3557 11. Install a new pressure tap plate gasket. 12. Install the pressure tap plate and bolts. ^ Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 13. NOTE: Match the solenoid valve body gasket to passages. Install the solenoid valve body. 1 Install the solenoid valve body gasket. 2 Install the solenoid valve body. 3 Install the 2 solenoid valve body bolts. ^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 14. Install the manual valve. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Automatic Transmission/Transaxle > Valve Body, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 3558 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Clutch Disc Check Clutch Disc: Testing and Inspection Clutch Disc Check Clutch Disc Check Special Tool(s) 1. Check the clutch disc lining surface for hardening or the presence of oil. 2. Check for a worn clutch disc lining. Measure the minimum allowable depth to the rivet heads with a slide caliper. 3. Check for loose clutch disc lining rivets. 4. Using the special tool, check the maximum allowable runout of the clutch disc. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Clutch Disc Check > Page 3564 5. Use an emery cloth to remove minor imperfections in the clutch disc lining surface. 6. Check for wear or rust on the splines. If necessary, clean them with an emery cloth. 7. Check the clutch disc for cracking, scoring, discoloration or other surface marks. Install a new clutch disc if necessary. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Clutch Disc Check > Page 3565 Clutch Disc: Testing and Inspection Clutch Pressure Plate Check Clutch Pressure Plate Check 1. Check the clutch pressure plate surface for scoring, cracks or discoloration. Minor scratches or discoloration should be removed with a fine emery cloth. 2. Measure the flatness of the clutch pressure plate surface with a straightedge and a feeler gauge. 3. Check the diaphragm spring fingers for discoloration, scoring and bent or broken segments. 4. Measure the wear of the diaphragm spring fingers. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3566 Clutch Disc: Service and Repair Clutch Disc and Pressure Plate Special Tool(s) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3567 Removal 1. Remove the transaxle. 2. Using the special tool, lock the flywheel to the engine. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3568 3. Check the diaphragm spring fingers for discoloration, scoring, bent or broken segments and spring ends that are higher or lower than the rest. 4. WARNING: The clutch disc and clutch pressure plate are heavy and may fall if not held when the bolts are removed. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. CAUTION: Loosen the bolts evenly to prevent pressure plate damage. Remove the bolts, clutch pressure plate and clutch disc. 5. CAUTION: Do not use cleaners with a petroleum base and do not immerse the clutch pressure plate in solvent. Using a suitable commercial alcohol based solvent, clean the clutch pressure plate. 6. Inspect the clutch pressure plate surface for burn marks, scores, flatness or ridges. 7. CAUTION: If the clutch disc is saturated with oil, inspect the rear engine crankshaft seal for leakage. If leakage is found, install a new seal prior to clutch disc installation. NOTE: Use an emery cloth to remove minor imperfections in the clutch disc lining surface. NOTE: Install a new clutch disc if any of the following conditions are present. Inspect the clutch disc for: ^ oil or grease saturation ^ worn or loose facings ^ warpage or loose rivets at the hub ^ wear or rust on the splines 8. Check the clutch disc runout and wear. Installation 1. Using the special tool, position the clutch disc on the flywheel. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Disc, M/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3569 2. Position the clutch pressure plate on the flywheel and install the clutch pressure plate bolts. ^ Tighten to 29 Nm (21 lb-ft) in sequence. 3. Install the transaxle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Fluid > Component Information > Specifications Clutch Fluid: Specifications HYDRAULIC CLUTCH FLUID Motorcraft High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid Ford P/N .............................................................................................................................................. ...................................................................... PM-1 Ford Specification ...................................................................................................................................................... ESA-M6C25-A or WSS-M6C62-A Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair Clutch Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Clutch Master Cylinder Material Removal and Installation WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, wash it immediately with cold water. 1. Disconnect the clutch master cylinder hose from the brake master cylinder. ^ Plug the brake master cylinder. ^ Plug the clutch master cylinder hose. 2. Remove the 2 clutch master cylinder nuts. ^ To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). 3. Disconnect the clutch master cylinder push rod. 4. Disconnect the clutch hydraulic fluid tube fitting. ^ Plug the clutch hydraulic fluid tube. 5. Remove the clutch master cylinder. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Bleed the air from the system. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Clutch Slave Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair Clutch Slave Cylinder: Service and Repair Clutch Slave Cylinder Material Removal and Installation WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, wash it immediately with cold water. 1. Remove the transaxle. 2. Disconnect the clutch slave cylinder-to-clutch hydraulic fluid tube adapter. 3. Remove the 3 clutch slave cylinder bolts and the clutch slave cylinder. ^ To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Bleed the air from the system. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Hydraulic System > Hydraulic Hose, Clutch > Component Information > Service and Repair Hydraulic Hose: Service and Repair Clutch Hydraulic Fluid Tubes Material Removal and Installation WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, wash it immediately with cold water. 1. Remove the engine air cleaner. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 2. Disconnect the clutch hydraulic fluid tube fitting from the clutch master cylinder. ^ Plug the clutch master cylinder. ^ Plug the clutch hydraulic fluid tube. 3. Disconnect the clutch hydraulic fluid tube fitting from the clutch slave cylinder-to-clutch hydraulic fluid tube adapter. ^ To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 4. Remove the clutch hydraulic fluid tube. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Bleed the air from the system. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Pedal Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair Clutch Pedal Assembly: Service and Repair Clutch Pedal Clutch Pedal Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the master cylinder push rod. 2. Remove the 2 clutch master cylinder nuts. ^ To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). 3. Remove the clutch pedal and bracket assembly nut. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Pedal Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3586 ^ To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). 4. Remove the clutch pedal and bracket assembly. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch View 151-3 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 3591 View 151-3 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Clutch Cut Off Switch C2072 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 3594 C2070 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Specifications Pressure Plate: Specifications Clutch pressure plate bolts .................................................................................................................. ......................................................... 29 Nm (21 lb-ft) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3598 Pressure Plate: Service and Repair Clutch Disc and Pressure Plate Special Tool(s) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3599 Removal 1. Remove the transaxle. 2. Using the special tool, lock the flywheel to the engine. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3600 3. Check the diaphragm spring fingers for discoloration, scoring, bent or broken segments and spring ends that are higher or lower than the rest. 4. WARNING: The clutch disc and clutch pressure plate are heavy and may fall if not held when the bolts are removed. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. CAUTION: Loosen the bolts evenly to prevent pressure plate damage. Remove the bolts, clutch pressure plate and clutch disc. 5. CAUTION: Do not use cleaners with a petroleum base and do not immerse the clutch pressure plate in solvent. Using a suitable commercial alcohol based solvent, clean the clutch pressure plate. 6. Inspect the clutch pressure plate surface for burn marks, scores, flatness or ridges. 7. CAUTION: If the clutch disc is saturated with oil, inspect the rear engine crankshaft seal for leakage. If leakage is found, install a new seal prior to clutch disc installation. NOTE: Use an emery cloth to remove minor imperfections in the clutch disc lining surface. NOTE: Install a new clutch disc if any of the following conditions are present. Inspect the clutch disc for: ^ oil or grease saturation ^ worn or loose facings ^ warpage or loose rivets at the hub ^ wear or rust on the splines 8. Check the clutch disc runout and wear. Installation 1. Using the special tool, position the clutch disc on the flywheel. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Clutch, M/T > Pressure Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3601 2. Position the clutch pressure plate on the flywheel and install the clutch pressure plate bolts. ^ Tighten to 29 Nm (21 lb-ft) in sequence. 3. Install the transaxle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Shift Interlock: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3607 Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4 "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and relays are identified. Fuse and Relay Numbering and Naming. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Power Distribution Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3608 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information C904 Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3609 disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location Charts. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery set. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing lose clothing. Symbols Symbols (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3610 Symbols (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3611 Symbols (Part 3) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3612 Symbols (Part 4) Symbols (Part 5) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3613 Shift Interlock: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3614 Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3615 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3616 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. 3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3617 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3618 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3619 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3620 Shift Interlock: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 37-1 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 3621 Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shift Interlock, CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3622 Shift Interlock: Service and Repair Brake Shift Interlock Override NOTE: If it is necessary to use the override procedure to move the selector lever out of the PARK position, it is possible that a fuse has blown and the brake lights are not operational. Before driving the vehicle, verify that the brake lights are working. This vehicle is equipped with a brake shift interlock feature that prevents the selector lever from being moved out of PARK when the ignition is in the ON position unless the brake pedal is depressed. If the selector lever cannot be moved out of the PARK position when the ignition is in the ON position and the brake pedal is depressed: 1. Apply the parking brake and remove the ignition key. 2. NOTE: Relief located at the front of the access panel. Remove the access panel. 3. Using an suitable tool, depress the brake shift interlock override mechanism on the selector lever, apply the brake, depress the button on the selector lever and move the selector lever into NEUTRAL. 4. Start the vehicle. 5. To install, reverse the procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shifter CVT > Component Information > Diagrams C2096 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shifter CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3626 Shifter CVT: Service and Repair Selector Lever Selector Lever (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shifter CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3627 Selector Lever (Part 2) Removal All vehicles 1. Place the selector lever in the (D) position. 2. Gently pry up to remove the upper selector lever trim ring. 3. Lift the center console lid and remove the center console compartment tray. 4. Remove the top finish panel. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shifter CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3628 5. Remove the selector lever cable from the selector lever assembly. 1 Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the selector lever. 2 Remove the selector lever cable from the bracket. 6. Disconnect the wiring harness retainers from the selector lever. 7. Disconnect the electrical connectors from the selector lever. 1 Disconnect the selector lever electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shifter CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3629 2 Remove the vehicle harness connector from the selector lever. All wheel drive (AWD) vehicles 8. Pull the all wheel drive (AWD) module straight back and remove it from the back of the selector lever. All vehicles 9. Remove the 2 screws from the center console. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shifter CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3630 10. Remove the 4 bolts and remove the selector lever assembly. Installation All vehicles 1. Install the selector lever assembly and the 4 bolts. ^ Tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shifter CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3631 2. Install the 2 center console screws. AWD vehicles 3. Install the AWD module on to the back of the selector lever. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shifter CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3632 All vehicles 4. Connect the electrical connectors to the selector lever. 1 Install the vehicle harness connector on the selector lever. 2 Connect the selector lever electrical connector. 5. Connect the wiring harness retainers to the selector lever. 6. Install the selector lever cable on the selector lever assembly. 1 Install the selector lever cable on the bracket. 2 Connect the selector lever cable end. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shifter CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3633 7. Install the top finish panel. 8. Install the center console compartment tray. 9. Install the upper selector lever trim ring. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Continuously Variable Transmission/Transaxle, CVT > Shifter CVT > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3634 10. Adjust the shift cable. For additional information, refer to Selector Lever Cable Adjustment. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Differential Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair Differential Cover: Service and Repair Differential Housing Cover Material Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the 10 bolts and the rear differential cover. ^ Drain the differential fluid from the housing. Installation 1. NOTE: Make sure the machined surfaces on the rear axle housing and the differential housing cover are clean and free of oil before installing the new silicone sealant. The inside of the rear axle must be covered when cleaning the machined surface to prevent contamination. Clean the gasket mating surfaces of the differential housing and the differential housing cover. 2. NOTE: The differential housing cover must be installed within 15 minutes of application of the silicone, or new sealant must be applied. If possible, allow one hour before filling with lubricant to make sure the silicone sealant has correctly cured. Apply a new continuous bead of clear silicone rubber as shown in the illustration. 3. Install the differential housing cover and the 10 bolts. ^ Tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). 4. Fill the rear axle with 1.15L (2.43 pt) of rear axle lubricant, 3-5 mm (0.118-0.196 in) below the bottom of the filler hole and install the filler plug. ^ Tighten to 27 Nm (20 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - Differential: Capacity Specifications Differential Oil Capacity Rear Axle ............................................................................................................................................. ................................................... 2.4 Pints ( 1.15 L ) Note: Fill to 1/4 inch to 9/16 inch ( 6 mm to 14 mm ) below of fill hole. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Fluid - Differential > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 3643 Fluid - Differential: Fluid Type Specifications Differential Fluid Type REAR AXLE Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant Ford P/N .................................................................................................................................................. XY-80W90-QL(US) / CXY-80W90-1L (Canada) Ford Specification .................................................... .................................................................................................................................. WSP-M2C197-A NOTE: Vehicles exposed for prolonged periods to temperatures less than 40 Celsius (-40 Fahrenheit) should change out the rear axle fluid to Motorcraft SAE 75W-140 High Performance Rear Axle Lubricant, Ford part number XY-75W140-QL meeting Ford specification WSL-M2C192-A. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Output Shaft, Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair Output Shaft: Service and Repair Stub Shaft Pilot Bearing and Seal Special Tool(s) Material Removal 1. NOTE: There is no bearing for the stud shaft. There is a seal only. Remove the halfshaft assembly. 2. Use the special tool to remove the stub shaft seal. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Output Shaft, Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3647 Installation 1. NOTE: Lubricate the new stub shaft seal with grease. Using the special tools, install the stub shaft seal. 2. NOTE: Inspect the inboard constant velocity (CV) joint seal journal for rust or nicks/scratches prior to installing the halfshaft. If necessary, polish the seal journal with fine crocus cloth. Install the halfshaft assembly. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Flange, Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair Pinion Flange: Service and Repair Drive Pinion Seal Special Tool(s) Material Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Index-mark the driveshaft flange and the pinion flange. 3. NOTE: Support the driveshaft. Disconnect the rear driveshaft universal joint flange. ^ Remove and discard the 4 bolts. ^ Position aside the driveshaft and flange. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Flange, Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3651 4. Using the special tool, hold the pinion flange while removing the nut. ^ Remove and discard the pinion flange nut. 5. Index-mark the location of the pinion to the flange. 6. Using the special tool, remove the pinion flange. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Flange, Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3652 7. Using the special tool, remove the pinion seal. Installation 1. NOTE: Make sure that the mating surface is clean before installing the new seal. Using the special tool, install the pinion seal. 2. NOTE: Lubricate the pinion flange with Premium Long-Life Grease. Line up the index marks and position the pinion flange. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Pinion Flange, Differential > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3653 3. Using the special tool, install a new pinion nut. ^ Tighten to 244 Nm (180 lb-ft). 4. Line up the index marks and position the rear driveshaft and universal joint flange. ^ Install the 4 new bolts. ^ Tighten to 70 Nm (52 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Stub Shaft Pilot Bearing and Seal Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Stub Shaft Pilot Bearing and Seal Stub Shaft Pilot Bearing and Seal Special Tool(s) Material Removal 1. NOTE: There is no bearing for the stud shaft. There is a seal only. Remove the halfshaft assembly. 2. Use the special tool to remove the stub shaft seal. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Stub Shaft Pilot Bearing and Seal > Page 3658 Installation 1. NOTE: Lubricate the new stub shaft seal with grease. Using the special tools, install the stub shaft seal. 2. NOTE: Inspect the inboard constant velocity (CV) joint seal journal for rust or nicks/scratches prior to installing the halfshaft. If necessary, polish the seal journal with fine crocus cloth. Install the halfshaft assembly. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Stub Shaft Pilot Bearing and Seal > Page 3659 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Drive Pinion Seal Drive Pinion Seal Special Tool(s) Material Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Index-mark the driveshaft flange and the pinion flange. 3. NOTE: Support the driveshaft. Disconnect the rear driveshaft universal joint flange. ^ Remove and discard the 4 bolts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Stub Shaft Pilot Bearing and Seal > Page 3660 ^ Position aside the driveshaft and flange. 4. Using the special tool, hold the pinion flange while removing the nut. ^ Remove and discard the pinion flange nut. 5. Index-mark the location of the pinion to the flange. 6. Using the special tool, remove the pinion flange. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Stub Shaft Pilot Bearing and Seal > Page 3661 7. Using the special tool, remove the pinion seal. Installation 1. NOTE: Make sure that the mating surface is clean before installing the new seal. Using the special tool, install the pinion seal. 2. NOTE: Lubricate the pinion flange with Premium Long-Life Grease. Line up the index marks and position the pinion flange. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Differential Assembly > Seals and Gaskets, Differential > System Information > Service and Repair > Stub Shaft Pilot Bearing and Seal > Page 3662 3. Using the special tool, install a new pinion nut. ^ Tighten to 244 Nm (180 lb-ft). 4. Line up the index marks and position the rear driveshaft and universal joint flange. ^ Install the 4 new bolts. ^ Tighten to 70 Nm (52 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Specifications Axle Shaft Assembly: Specifications Torque Specifications Torque Specifications (Part 1) Torque Specifications (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3667 Axle Shaft Assembly: Description and Operation Rear Drive Halfshafts The rear drive halfshafts are driven by the differential side gears in the rear drive axle. The splined inner constant velocity (CV) joint housing transfers the torque to the connecting shaft through the flexible joint consisting of caged balls or 3 roller trunnion. This allows the connecting shaft to change both length and angle while the joint housing remains fixed. The CV joints are lubricated with a special high temperature grease that is contained by flexible rubber boots sealed to the joint housing and connecting shafts by clamps. The outer CV joint receives the rotational force from the connecting shaft and in turn, drives the rear wheel hub. ^ The inner and outer CV joints connect to a splined shaft. A circlip stopper holds the cross groove inner race assembly (inner CV joint) together. ^ The RH and LH halfshafts are the same length. ^ An axle circlip retains the splined inner CV joint to the differential side gear. ^ A rear axle wheel hub nut secures the side shaft assembly (interconnecting shaft and outer CV joint) to the rear hub. ^ The rear halfshafts are serviced as assemblies only. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Halfshafts Axle Shaft Assembly: Service and Repair Front Drive Halfshafts Halfshafts Halfshaft Special Tool(s) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Halfshafts > Page 3670 Front Drive Halfshaft Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the front tire and wheel. 3. Remove and discard the front wheel hub nut. 4. Remove the ABS wheel speed sensor bolt and position the sensor aside. 5. Remove the lower arm pinch bolt and nut from the lower arm. 6. Separate the lower arm from the front wheel knuckle. 7. Using the special tool, separate the front drive halfshaft from the front wheel hub. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Halfshafts > Page 3671 8. Using the special tools, remove the front drive halfshaft from the differential. Installation 1. Position the special tool over the halfshaft oil seal. 2. NOTE: When seated correctly, the front drive halfshaft bearing retainer circlip can be felt as it snaps into the differential side gear groove. Position the front drive halfshaft so the splines line up with the differential side gear splines. Push the front drive halfshaft into the differential side gear. 3. Using the special tool, install the front drive halfshaft into the front wheel hub. 4. Position the lower arm into the front wheel knuckle. 5. Install the lower arm pinch bolt and nut. ^ Tighten to 70 Nm (52 lb-ft). 6. Install the ABS wheel speed sensor and bolt. ^ Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 7. CAUTION: Do not tighten the front wheel hub nut with the vehicle on the ground. The nut must be tightened to specification before the vehicle is lowered onto the wheels. Wheel bearing damage will occur if the wheel bearing is loaded with the weight of the vehicle applied. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Halfshafts > Page 3672 NOTE: Apply the brake to keep the halfshaft from rotating. Install a new front wheel hub nut. ^ Tighten to 300 Nm (222 lb-ft). 8. Install the front tire and wheel. 9. Check and fill the transaxle fluid as necessary. Intermediate Shaft Intermediate Shaft Special Tool(s) Intermediate Shaft Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: If removing the intermediate shaft in order to repair a separate component, it should only be removed as an assembly with the RH front drive halfshaft. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Halfshafts > Page 3673 Remove the RH front drive halfshaft. 2. Remove the 2 intermediate shaft bearing retainer nuts. ^ To install, tighten to 27 Nm (20 lb-ft). 3. Remove the intermediate shaft. 4. CAUTION: Make sure to use the special tool when installing the intermediate shaft. Failure to use the special tool may result in transmission oil leaks. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Apply a thin coat of grease to the splines of the intermediate shaft. 5. Check and fill the transaxle fluid as necessary. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Halfshafts > Page 3674 Axle Shaft Assembly: Service and Repair Rear Drive Halfshafts Halfshaft Special Tool(s) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Halfshafts > Page 3675 Halfshaft Removal CAUTION: Never pick up or hold the halfshaft by only the inner or outer constant velocity (CV) joint. Damage to the CV joint will occur. CAUTION: Never use a hammer to remove or install the halfshafts. Damage to the halfshaft may occur. CAUTION: Never use the halfshaft assembly as a lever to position other components. Damage to the halfshaft or constant velocity (CV) joints may occur. CAUTION: Do not allow the boots to contact sharp edges or hot exhaust components. Damage to the halfshaft boots will occur. CAUTION: Do not drop assembled halfshafts. The impact may cut the boots from the inside without evidence of external damage. 1. Remove the rear coil spring. 2. Remove and discard the rear wheel hub nut. 3. Remove the anti-lock brake sensor harness-to-body retainer bolt. 4. NOTE: Support the wheel knuckle. Remove the nut and separate the lower ball joint. 5. CAUTION: Do not damage the oil seal when removing the axle halfshaft from the differential. NOTE: Support the halfshaft inner joint. Using the special tool, remove the halfshaft from the differential. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Halfshafts > Page 3676 6. Using the special tool, separate the halfshaft from the rear axle hub assembly. ^ Remove the halfshaft. Installation 1. Using the special tool, install the outer halfshaft end into the hub assembly. 2. CAUTION: Make sure that the oil seal protector is correctly aligned with the differential oil seal during installation. Using the special tool, install the halfshaft into the differential. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Axle Shaft Assembly > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Drive Halfshafts > Page 3677 3. If the axle is equipped with the oil seal protector, make sure the oil seal lip and seal protector are correctly aligned. 4. Position the lower ball joint and install the lower ball joint nut. ^ To install, tighten to 103 Nm (76 lb-ft). 5. Install the rear coil spring. 6. Install the anti-lock brake sensor harness-to-body bolt. ^ Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 7. CAUTION: Do not tighten the rear wheel hub nut with the vehicle on the ground. The nut must be tightened to specification before the vehicle is lowered onto the wheels. Wheel bearing damage will occur if the wheel bearing is loaded with the weight of the vehicle applied. NOTE: Apply the brake to keep the halfshaft from rotating. Install the rear wheel hub nut. ^ To install, tighten to 300 Nm (221 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Diagrams Wheel Bearing: Diagrams Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub - Exploded View Wheel Bearing And Wheel Hub - Exploded View Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub Special Tool(s) (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 3683 Special Tool(s) (Part 2) Removal NOTE: If removing the wheel hub, a new wheel bearing must be installed. 1. Remove the wheel knuckle. 2. Using the special tool, press the wheel hub from the wheel bearing. 3. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel knuckle after removing the wheel hub. Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub. 4. Remove the snap ring. 5. Using the special tools, press the outer wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle. Installation 1. Position the wheel knuckle in a vise. 2. NOTE: Special tool 205-278 is not seen in place. It is located behind the wheel knuckle. Using the special tools, install the wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 3684 3. Install the snap ring. 4. Using the special tool, press the wheel hub into the wheel bearing. 5. Install the wheel knuckle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 3685 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Wheel Bearing Special Tool(s) (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 3686 Special Tool(s) (Part 1) Removal NOTE: LH shown, RH similar. All wheel drive (AWD) vehicles 1. Remove the wheel knuckle. Front wheel drive (FWD) vehicles 2. Remove and discard the wheel hub nut. 3. Remove the ABS wheel speed sensor ring. All vehicles 4. Using the special tools, remove the wheel hub. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 3687 5. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel knuckle after removing the wheel hub. Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub. 6. Remove the wheel bearing snap ring from the wheel knuckle. FWD vehicles 7. Using the special tools, remove the wheel bearing from the wheel knuckle. AWD vehicles 8. Using the special tools, press the wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 3688 Installation All vehicles 1. Using the special tools, install a new wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle. 2. Install the wheel bearing snap ring. 3. Using the special tools, install the wheel hub into the wheel bearing. FWD vehicles 4. Install the ABS wheel speed sensor ring. 5. Install the wheel hub nut. ^ Tighten to 290 Nm (214 lb-ft). AWD vehicles 6. Install the wheel knuckle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications > Front Axle Nut: Specifications Front Front wheel hub nut ............................................................................................................................. .................................................... 300 Nm (222 lb-ft) Install a new front wheel hub nut. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications > Front > Page 3694 Axle Nut: Specifications Rear Rear wheel hub nut ............................................................................................................................. ..................................................... 290 Nm (214 lb-ft) Install a new rear wheel hub nut. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Center Support > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Center Support: Testing and Inspection Driveshaft Center Bearing With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. Refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. Rotate the driveshaft by hand. If the bearing shows signs of roughness or is noisy, install a new driveshaft assembly. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair Drive/Propeller Shaft: Service and Repair Driveshaft Driveshaft Removal and Installation NOTE: The Escape Hybrid driveshaft is longer than the driveshaft in the Escape/Mariner and is not interchangeable. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the ground strap bolt. ^ To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints > Drive/Propeller Shaft > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3702 3. CAUTION: Do not reuse the CV joint bolts and washers. Install new bolts and washers or damage to the vehicle may occur. Remove and discard the 6 front driveshaft-to-transfer case bolts and washers. ^ To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 4. Index-mark the front driveshaft to the center bearing. 5. CAUTION: Do not reuse the bolts and cap straps for the center U-joint. Install new bolts and cap straps or damage to the vehicle may occur. NOTE: There is a difference in the length of the head of the replacement cap strap bolts from the production bolts. The longer head pinion bolts can be used in either location. Remove and discard the 4 universal joint cap strap bolts and 2 cap straps and remove the front driveshaft. ^ To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). 6. Index-mark the pinion and yoke to the driveshaft. 7. NOTE: Do not reuse the bolts for the rear U-joint flange. Install new bolts. Remove and discard the 4 rear driveshaft-to-pinion flange bolts. ^ To install, tighten to 70 Nm (52 lb-ft). 8. With the help of an assistant, remove the center bearing support nuts and the driveshaft. ^ To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft). 9. NOTE: If a driveshaft is installed and driveshaft vibration is encountered after installation, index the driveshaft. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Specifications Flex Plate: Specifications Flexplate Bolts ..................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... 80 Nm (59 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3706 Flex Plate: Diagrams Lower End Components - Exploded View Flexplate and Rear Seal Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3707 Flex Plate: Testing and Inspection Flexplate Inspection 1. Inspect the flexplate for: 1. Any cracks. 2. Worn ring gear teeth. 3. Chipped or cracked ring gear teeth. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flex Plate > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3708 Flex Plate: Service and Repair Flexplate Flexplate and Rear Seal Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the transmission. 3. Remove the bolts and the flexplate. ^ To install, tighten to 80 Nm (59 lb-ft). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Flywheel Runout Check Flywheel: Testing and Inspection Flywheel Runout Check Flywheel Runout Check Special Tool(s) 1. Mount the special tool so that the indicator contact point rides on the straightedge which spans the clutch disc contact surface. 2. Rotate the flywheel and check the runout. If the runout exceeds the maximum allowance, install a new flywheel. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Flywheel > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Flywheel Runout Check > Page 3713 Flywheel: Testing and Inspection Flywheel Inspection Flywheel Inspection 1. NOTE: The flywheel cannot be resurfaced, it must be replaced. Inspect the flywheel for: 1. Any cracks. 2. Worn ring gear teeth. 3. Chipped or cracked ring gear teeth. 4. Scratches, nicks and discoloration. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Adjustments Shift Indicator: Adjustments Selector Lever Cable Adjustment 1. Place the floor shift selector lever in the (D) position. 2. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual lever. 3. Place the manual lever in the (D) position. 1 Rotate the manual lever counterclockwise to the PARK position. 2 Rotate the manual lever clockwise 3 detents to the (D) position. 4. Release the selector lever cable adjuster lock. 1 Pull out on the adjuster lock tabs. 2 Slide the lock over to unlock the selector lever cable. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 3719 5. Align the selector lever cable end to the manual lever ball stud and install it with the adjuster unlocked. 6. Slide the adjuster tab in place to lock the selector lever cable. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation TRANSMISSION CONTROL INDICATOR LAMP (TCIL) The TCIL is an output signal from the PCM that controls the lamp on/off function depending on the engagement or disengagement of overdrive. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - M/T: Capacity Specifications Manual Transmission Capacity ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................... 2.4 Quarts (2.3 liters) Note: Approximate refill. Service refill capacity is determined by filling the transmission to the bottom of the filler hole with the vehicle on a level surface. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 3728 Fluid - M/T: Fluid Type Specifications Manual Transmission Fluid Type Type ..................................................................................................................................................... .................. Motorcraft SAE 75W-90 Gear Oil GL-4 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3729 Fluid - M/T: Service and Repair Transaxle Draining and Filling Material 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the drain plug and drain the fluid. Manual Transaxle Drain Plug 3. NOTE: Use a new gasket and apply sealant on the drain plug. Install the drain plug. ^ Tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft). Fill Level Inspection Plug 4. Remove the fill level inspection plug. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3730 Manual Transaxle Fill Level Inspection Plug 5. Remove the transaxle fill plug. Manual Transaxle Fill Plug 6. Fill the transmission with gear oil until level with the fill level inspection plug hole. 7. NOTE: Use a new gasket and apply sealant on the fill plug. Install the transaxle fill plug. ^ Tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft). 8. NOTE: Use a new gasket and apply sealant on the fill level inspection plug. Install the fill level inspection plug. ^ Tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Fluid - M/T > Component Information > Specifications > Page 3731 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, M/T > System Information > Service and Repair Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Halfshaft Seal Special Tool(s) Removal and Installation CAUTION: New halfshaft oil seals should be installed anytime the halfshafts are removed. Failure to install new halfshafts seals may result Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Seals and Gaskets, M/T > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 3735 in transmission oil leak(s). NOTE: RH intermediate shaft oil seal shown, LH halfshaft oil seal similar. 1. Remove the RH intermediate shaft or LH halfshaft. 2. Using the special tools, remove the RH intermediate shaft oil seal or the LH halfshaft oil seal. Installation 1. Using the special tool, install the halfshaft oil seal. 2. CAUTION: Make sure to use the seal protector when installing the RH intermediate shaft and the LH halfshaft. Failure to use the seal protector may result in transmission oil leaks. Install the RH intermediate shaft or LH halfshaft. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. NOTE: The electrical connector and the vehicle speed sensor (VSS) are accessed from the top of the transaxle. Remove the VSS bolt. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the VSS. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Shifter M/T: Service and Repair Gearshift Lever Gearshift Lever Removal 1. Remove the gearshift lever knob and boot assembly. 2. Remove the floor console finish panel. 3. Remove the 2 gearshift cable clips. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3743 4. Carefully disconnect the gearshift cables from the gearshift lever. 5. Remove the 4 gearshift lever nuts. 6. Remove the gearshift lever. Installation 1. Position the gearshift lever. 2. Connect the gearshift cables to the gearshift lever. 3. CAUTION: Make sure the clips are set completely within the cable adapter groove and fully seated. Install the 2 gearshift cable clips. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shifter M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3744 4. Install the 4 gearshift lever nuts. ^ Tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 5. Adjust the gearshift cables. 6. Install the floor console finish panel. 7. Install the gearshift lever knob and boot assembly. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, M/T > Shift Boot, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Shift Boot: Service and Repair Gearshift Lever Boot Gearshift Lever Boot Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: The gearshift lever boot and gearshift lever knob are one assembly. Separate the gearshift lever boot from the floor console finish panel. 2. Rotate the gearshift lever knob counterclockwise. Remove the gearshift lever knob and gearshift lever boot assembly. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, M/T > Shift Cable, M/T > Component Information > Adjustments Shift Cable: Adjustments Gearshift Cable Adjustment 1. Separate the shift boot from the floor console finish panel. Rotate the gearshift knob counterclockwise and remove the knob and boot as an assembly. 2. Carefully pry the floor console finish panel from the floor console. 3. Disengage the secondary shift cable lock by sliding it away from the shifter ball stud. 4. NOTE: If the primary shift cable lock is difficult to slide out, disconnect the shift cable from the ball stud, push the primary lock from the rear, and reattach the shift cable to the ball stud. Disengage the primary shift cable lock by sliding it out away from the shift cable. 5. With the shifter and the transmission in NEUTRAL, engage the primary shift cable lock. 6. Engage the secondary shift cable lock by sliding it over the primary shift cable lock. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, M/T > Shift Cable, M/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 3752 7. Install the floor console finish panel. 8. Install the gearshift knob and the gearshift lever boot. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, M/T > Shift Cable, M/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 3753 Shift Cable: Service and Repair Gearshift Cables Gearshift Cables (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, M/T > Shift Cable, M/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 3754 Gearshift Cables (Part 2) Removal 1. NOTE: Carefully disconnect the spring clip from the cable end. It can become unfastened from the cable. Disconnect the gearshift cables from the transaxle gearshift control assembly. ^ Pull the spring clip out of the groove, lift upward and rotate the clip 90 degrees. 2. NOTE: Carefully pry the gearshift cables from the transaxle bracket. Disconnect the gearshift cables from the transaxle bracket. 3. Remove the floor console. 4. Remove the restraints control module (RCM). For additional information, refer to Air Bag Systems. 5. Disconnect the smart junction box (SJB) electrical connector and the 2 harness electrical connectors. 6. Disconnect the gearshift cables from the gearshift lever assembly. 7. Remove the 2 gearshift cable grommet nuts. 8. Remove the gearshift cables. ^ Pull the gearshift cables into the vehicle. Using an assistant, carefully lift the LH floor duct, pull the cables under the duct and remove from the vehicle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, M/T > Shift Cable, M/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 3755 Installation 1. CAUTION: When inserting the gearshift cables through the dash panel, make sure the arrow on the grommet is pointing down. Insert the gearshift cables through the dash panel. 2. Connect the selector cable. 3. Connect the shift cable. 4. Install the 2 gearshift cable grommet nuts. ^ Tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 5. CAUTION: Make sure the clips are set completely within the cable adapter groove and fully seated. Install the 2 gearshift cable clips. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Shift Linkage, M/T > Shift Cable, M/T > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 3756 6. Connect the gearshift cables to the transaxle gearshift control assembly. 7. Connect the SJB electrical connector and the 2 harness electrical connectors. 8. Adjust the gearshift cables. 9. Install the floor console. 10. Install the RCM. For additional information, refer to Air Bag Systems. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transaxle Support Insulator - LH Transaxle Support Insulator - LH Special Tool(s) Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the air cleaner. For additional information, refer to Fuel Delivery and Air Induction. 3. Using the special tool, support the engine. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH > Page 3761 4. Remove the 4 LH transaxle support insulator bolts. ^ To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 5. Remove the through bolt and the LH transaxle support insulator. ^ To install, tighten to 103 Nm (76 lb-ft). 6. Remove the 3 nuts and the LH transaxle support insulator bracket. ^ To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH > Page 3762 Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transaxle Front Support Insulator Transaxle Front Support Insulator Special Tool(s) Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Using the special tool, support the engine. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH > Page 3763 3. Remove the front-to-aft crossmember. 1 Remove the 2 transaxle front support insulator bolts. ^ To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft). 2 Remove the splash shield screw. 3 Remove the 2 front-to-aft crossmember bolts and the nut. ^ To install, tighten bolts to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft). ^ To install, tighten nut to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft). 4 Remove the crossmember. 4. Remove the through bolt and the transaxle front support insulator. ^ To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). 5. If necessary, remove the 3 bolts and the transaxle front support insulator bracket. ^ To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Mount, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Transaxle Support Insulator - LH > Page 3764 Transmission Mount: Service and Repair Transaxle Rear Support Insulator Transaxle Rear Support Insulator Transaxle Rear Support Insulator Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the transaxle rear support insulator bolt. ^ To install, tighten to 80 Nm (59 lb-ft). 3. Remove the 2 transaxle rear support insulator nuts. ^ To install, tighten to 80 Nm (59 lb-ft). 4. Remove the transaxle rear support insulator through-bolt and washer. ^ To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). 5. Remove the transaxle rear support insulator. 6. If necessary, remove the 3 bolts and the transaxle rear support insulator bracket. ^ To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Manual Transmission/Transaxle > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. NOTE: The electrical connector and the vehicle speed sensor (VSS) are accessed from the top of the transaxle. Remove the VSS bolt. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the VSS. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations View 151-22 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 3773 C3184 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 3774 Control Module: Service and Repair Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Control Module Removal and Installation 1. Remove the floor console. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. Lift upward on the module to release the fasteners from the shifter base. Remove the four wheel drive (4WD) control module. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Description and Operation Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation BRAKE PEDAL POSITION (BPP) SWITCH Typical BPP Switch The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal to the PCM indicating that the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and is mounted on the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as follows: - to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake pedal is applied. - to the antilock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM. - to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ABS module interprets the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH (TCS) Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS) Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS) The TCS signals the PCM with VPWR whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature, the transmission control indicator lamp (TCIL) illuminates when the TCS is cycled to disengage overdrive. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3783 Transmission Mode Switch: Testing and Inspection Electrical Connectors Selector Lever Harness Connector C2096 (vehicle harness side) (Part 1) Selector Lever Harness Connector C2096 (vehicle harness side) (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3784 Selector Lever Harness Connector C2096 (component side) (Part 1) Selector Lever Harness Connector C2096 (component side) (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations View 151-10 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3788 View 151-11 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3789 C167 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3790 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Adjustment Special Tool(s) 1. Remove the battery and tray. 2. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position. Loosen the transmission range (TR) sensor bolts. 3. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft). 4. Install the battery and tray. 5. Check for correct operation. The engine should start only in PARK or NEUTRAL. The reverse lamps should illuminate in the REVERSE position. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3791 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Special Tool(s) Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the battery and tray. 3. Remove the transmission range (TR) sensor. 1 Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector. 2 Remove the TR sensor retaining bolts. 3 Remove the TR sensor. Installation 1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position. Install the TR sensor and loosely install the bolts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3792 2. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft). 3. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 4. Install the battery and tray. 5. Check the correct operation. The engine should start only in PARK or NEUTRAL. The reverse lamps should illuminate in the REVERSE position. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor View 151-10 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 3797 View 151-11 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 3798 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor View 151-10 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 3799 View 151-11 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor C193 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 3802 C143 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Material Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the 7 retainers and the LH splash shield. ^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 3. Remove the turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor 1 Disconnect the TSS electrical connector. 2 Remove the TSS sensor bolt. 3 Remove the TSS sensor. ^ To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 3805 4. NOTE: When installing the sensor, lubricate the O-ring seal with clean transmission fluid. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new O-ring seal as necessary. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 3806 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Material Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the 7 retainers and the LH splash shield. ^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 3. Remove the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor 1 Disconnect the OSS electrical connector. 2 Remove the OSS sensor bolt. 3 Remove the OSS sensor. ^ To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 3807 4. NOTE: When installing the sensor, lubricate the O-ring seal with clean transmission fluid. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new O-ring seal as necessary. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. NOTE: The electrical connector and the vehicle speed sensor (VSS) are accessed from the top of the transaxle. Remove the VSS bolt. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the VSS. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations View 151-27 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 3817 C4347 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Case, Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Case: > 09-4-4 > Mar > 09 > Drivetrain - Fluid leak From PTU Vent Case: Customer Interest Drivetrain - Fluid leak From PTU Vent TSB 09-4-4 03/09/09 PTU VENT BOLT LEAK - MISDIAGNOSED AS PTU SHAFT SEAL LEAK FORD: 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2005-2009 Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid ISSUE Some 2005-2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a leak from the power transfer unit (PTU) vent tube bolt. This may be misdiagnosed as a PTU link shaft seal leak. Please verify leak origin and tighten PTU vent tube bolt, before replacing parts. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the PTU fill plug and check fluid level per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 308-07B. NOTE THE FLUID LEVEL MUST BE EVEN WITH THE BOTTOM OF THE FILLER HOLE WITH THE VEHICLE ON FLAT, LEVEL GROUND. 2. Inspect PTU vent tube bolt for leak. (Figure 1) a. If PTU vent tube bolt leaking - clean bolt contact sur[aces and torque bolt to 120 +/- 19 lb-in (13.5 +/- 2.1 N.m). b. If PTU vent tube bolt not leaking - continue with normal WSM, Section 308-07B diagnosis. NOTE THIS BOLT DOES NOT REQUIRE A WASHER FOR THIS APPLICATION. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Case, Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Case: > 09-4-4 > Mar > 09 > Drivetrain - Fluid leak From PTU Vent > Page 3826 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 090404A 2005-2009 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner, Escape Hybrid, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Clean Bolt Contact Surfaces, Includes Time To Check And Adjust PTU Fluid Level DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7034 24 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Case, Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Case: > 09-4-4 > Mar > 09 > Drivetrain - Fluid leak From PTU Vent Case: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Fluid leak From PTU Vent TSB 09-4-4 03/09/09 PTU VENT BOLT LEAK - MISDIAGNOSED AS PTU SHAFT SEAL LEAK FORD: 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2005-2009 Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid ISSUE Some 2005-2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a leak from the power transfer unit (PTU) vent tube bolt. This may be misdiagnosed as a PTU link shaft seal leak. Please verify leak origin and tighten PTU vent tube bolt, before replacing parts. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the PTU fill plug and check fluid level per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 308-07B. NOTE THE FLUID LEVEL MUST BE EVEN WITH THE BOTTOM OF THE FILLER HOLE WITH THE VEHICLE ON FLAT, LEVEL GROUND. 2. Inspect PTU vent tube bolt for leak. (Figure 1) a. If PTU vent tube bolt leaking - clean bolt contact sur[aces and torque bolt to 120 +/- 19 lb-in (13.5 +/- 2.1 N.m). b. If PTU vent tube bolt not leaking - continue with normal WSM, Section 308-07B diagnosis. NOTE THIS BOLT DOES NOT REQUIRE A WASHER FOR THIS APPLICATION. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Case, Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Case: > 09-4-4 > Mar > 09 > Drivetrain - Fluid leak From PTU Vent > Page 3832 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 090404A 2005-2009 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner, Escape Hybrid, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Clean Bolt Contact Surfaces, Includes Time To Check And Adjust PTU Fluid Level DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7034 24 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations View 151-22 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 3836 C3184 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 3837 Control Module: Service and Repair Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Control Module Removal and Installation 1. Remove the floor console. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. Lift upward on the module to release the fasteners from the shifter base. Remove the four wheel drive (4WD) control module. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fluid - Transfer Case: > 09-4-4 > Mar > 09 > Drivetrain - Fluid leak From PTU Vent Fluid - Transfer Case: Customer Interest Drivetrain - Fluid leak From PTU Vent TSB 09-4-4 03/09/09 PTU VENT BOLT LEAK - MISDIAGNOSED AS PTU SHAFT SEAL LEAK FORD: 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2005-2009 Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid ISSUE Some 2005-2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a leak from the power transfer unit (PTU) vent tube bolt. This may be misdiagnosed as a PTU link shaft seal leak. Please verify leak origin and tighten PTU vent tube bolt, before replacing parts. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the PTU fill plug and check fluid level per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 308-07B. NOTE THE FLUID LEVEL MUST BE EVEN WITH THE BOTTOM OF THE FILLER HOLE WITH THE VEHICLE ON FLAT, LEVEL GROUND. 2. Inspect PTU vent tube bolt for leak. (Figure 1) a. If PTU vent tube bolt leaking - clean bolt contact sur[aces and torque bolt to 120 +/- 19 lb-in (13.5 +/- 2.1 N.m). b. If PTU vent tube bolt not leaking - continue with normal WSM, Section 308-07B diagnosis. NOTE THIS BOLT DOES NOT REQUIRE A WASHER FOR THIS APPLICATION. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Fluid - Transfer Case: > 09-4-4 > Mar > 09 > Drivetrain - Fluid leak From PTU Vent > Page 3846 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 090404A 2005-2009 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner, Escape Hybrid, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Clean Bolt Contact Surfaces, Includes Time To Check And Adjust PTU Fluid Level DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7034 24 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid - Transfer Case: > 09-4-4 > Mar > 09 > Drivetrain Fluid leak From PTU Vent Fluid - Transfer Case: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Fluid leak From PTU Vent TSB 09-4-4 03/09/09 PTU VENT BOLT LEAK - MISDIAGNOSED AS PTU SHAFT SEAL LEAK FORD: 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2005-2009 Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid ISSUE Some 2005-2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a leak from the power transfer unit (PTU) vent tube bolt. This may be misdiagnosed as a PTU link shaft seal leak. Please verify leak origin and tighten PTU vent tube bolt, before replacing parts. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the PTU fill plug and check fluid level per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 308-07B. NOTE THE FLUID LEVEL MUST BE EVEN WITH THE BOTTOM OF THE FILLER HOLE WITH THE VEHICLE ON FLAT, LEVEL GROUND. 2. Inspect PTU vent tube bolt for leak. (Figure 1) a. If PTU vent tube bolt leaking - clean bolt contact sur[aces and torque bolt to 120 +/- 19 lb-in (13.5 +/- 2.1 N.m). b. If PTU vent tube bolt not leaking - continue with normal WSM, Section 308-07B diagnosis. NOTE THIS BOLT DOES NOT REQUIRE A WASHER FOR THIS APPLICATION. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Fluid - Transfer Case: > 09-4-4 > Mar > 09 > Drivetrain Fluid leak From PTU Vent > Page 3852 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 090404A 2005-2009 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner, Escape Hybrid, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Clean Bolt Contact Surfaces, Includes Time To Check And Adjust PTU Fluid Level DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7034 24 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Fluid - Transfer Case: Capacity Specifications Transfer Case Capacity Power Transfer Unit ............................................................................................................................. ............................................ 12.0 ounces (0.35 liters) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 3855 Fluid - Transfer Case: Fluid Type Specifications Transfer Case - Power Transfer Unit (PTU) Type...............................................................................................................................................Mot orcraft SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant Part Number......................................................................................................................................... ..XY-75W140-QL(US) / CXY-75W140-1L (Canada) Specification......................................................................................................................................... .........................................................WSL-M2C192-A Type..................................................................................................................................................M otorcraft SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant Part Number......................................................................................................................................... ......XY80W90-QL(US) / CXY-80W190-1L (Canada) Specification......................................................................................................................................... .........................................................WSP-M2C197-A NOTE: The PTU on an AUTOMATIC transaxle uses Motorcraft SAE 75W-140 Synthetic lubricant. The PTU on a MANUAL transaxle uses Motorcraft SAE 80W-90 lubricant. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Transfer Unit (PTU) Draining and Filling - Automatic Transaxle Fluid - Transfer Case: Service and Repair Power Transfer Unit (PTU) Draining and Filling Automatic Transaxle Power Transfer Unit (PTU) Draining and Filling - Automatic Transaxle Material CAUTION: New power transfer unit (PTU) lubricant must be added any time the PTU has been submerged in water. NOTE: The power transfer unit (PTU) is lubricated for life and is not to be checked unless a leak is suspected or a repair is necessary. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the drain plug and drain the fluid. 3. Apply silicone sealant to the drain plug threads and install the drain plug. ^ Tighten to 14 Nm (10 lb-ft). 4. NOTE: The fluid level must be even with the bottom of the filler hole with the vehicle on flat, level ground. Remove the fill plug and fill the PTU with specified lubricant. 5. Apply silicone sealant to the fill plug and install the plug. ^ Tighten to 34 Nm (25 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Fluid - Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > Power Transfer Unit (PTU) Draining and Filling - Automatic Transaxle > Page 3858 Fluid - Transfer Case: Service and Repair Power Transfer Unit (PTU) Draining and Filling - Manual Transaxle Power Transfer Unit (PTU) Draining and Filling - Manual Transaxle Material CAUTION: New power transfer unit (PTU) lubricant must be installed any time the PTU has been submerged in water. NOTE: The power transfer unit (PTU) is lubricated for life and is not to be checked unless a leak is suspected. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. NOTE: The fluid level must be even with the bottom of the filler hole with the vehicle on flat, level ground. Remove the fill plug and fill the PTU with rear axle lubricant. 3. Install the fill plug and gasket. ^ Tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Output Yoke/Flange, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair Output Yoke/Flange: Service and Repair Output Flange Special Tool(s) Removal NOTE: This procedure applies to vehicles equipped with automatic transaxles. 1. Remove the driveshaft. 2. CAUTION: Rotational torque of the power transfer unit (PTU) rear output shaft flange must be measured and recorded using a Nm (lb-in) torque wrench for correct pinion bearing preload when reassembled. Using the special tool to hold the flange, remove the pinion nut. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Output Yoke/Flange, Transfer Case > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3862 3. NOTE: Index-mark the power transfer unit (PTU) rear output shaft flange relative to the pinion spline. Using the special tool, remove the PTU rear output shaft flange. Installation 1. Install the PTU rear output shaft flange to engage the spline as previously marked. Install the PTU rear output shaft flange. 2. CAUTION: Do not overtighten the pinion nut. Refer to the rotational torque previously recorded with a Nm (in-lb) torque wrench. Overtightening the pinion nut will damage the collapsible spacer. CAUTION: If the rotational torque is less than specification, tighten the drive pinion nut in small increments until it is within specification. Do not tighten the drive pinion nut more than 3 Nm (27 lb-in) or the collapsible spacer will be damaged. If the rotation torque is higher than specification, the collapsible spacer has been compressed too far and a new collapsible spacer must be installed. Using the special tool, install the pinion nut. 3. Install the driveshaft. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations View 151-22 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 3867 C3184 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 3868 Control Module: Service and Repair Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Control Module Removal and Installation 1. Remove the floor console. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. Lift upward on the module to release the fasteners from the shifter base. Remove the four wheel drive (4WD) control module. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Seal Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Output Shaft Seal Output Shaft Seal Special Tool(s) Removal NOTE: This procedure applies to vehicles equipped with automatic transaxles. 1. Remove the power transfer unit (PTU) rear output shaft flange. 2. Remove the deflector. 3. Remove the PTU rear output shaft oil (pinion) seal. Installation 1. Using the special tool, install the PTU rear output shaft oil (pinion) seal. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Seal > Page 3873 2. Install the deflector. 3. Install the PTU rear output shaft flange. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Seal > Page 3874 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Removal Power Transfer Unit (PTU) Seal Special Tool(s) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Seal > Page 3875 1. Remove the output flange. 2. Remove the power transfer unit (PTU) from the vehicle. For additional information, refer to Power Transfer Unit (PTU) - Automatic Transaxle. 3. Using the special tools, remove the intermediate shaft seal. 4. Remove the dust cover and the pinion seal. 5. Remove the PTU vent tube. 6. Remove the 11 PTU cover bolts and the PTU cover, then remove the helical gears. 7. Remove the input seal. 8. Clean the PTU sealing surface. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Seal > Page 3876 Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Installation Power Transfer Unit (PTU) Seal Special Tool(s) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Seal > Page 3877 Special Tool(s) Material Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Seal > Page 3878 1. Using the special tools, install the inner input seal. 2. CAUTION: Make sure not to roll the inner input seal sealing lip when installing the drive gear. Install the gears. 1 Install the drive gear. Use a slight rotation to prevent damaging the inner input seal. 2 Install the idler gear. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Seal > Page 3879 3 Install the driven gear. 3. CAUTION: The power transfer unit (PTU) cover and case sealing surfaces must be free of oil before applying new sealant. Apply a 3 mm (0.11 in) bead of silicone sealant to the sealing surface of the power transfer unit (PTU) cover. Install the PTU cover and tighten the 11 PTU cover bolts in a star pattern. 4. Install the PTU vent tube and the 2 PTU vent tube bolts. ^ Tighten to 14 Nm (10 lb-ft). 5. Using the special tools, install the halfshaft seal. The seal is correctly installed if it is flush with the PTU case cover. 6. Install the halfshaft seal dust cover. ^ Press the dust shield firmly to snap into position. 7. Using the special tools, install the intermediate shaft seal. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Seals and Gaskets, Transfer Case > System Information > Service and Repair > Output Shaft Seal > Page 3880 8. Using the special tools, install the output seal. 9. Using the special tools, install the dust cover onto the output flange. 10. Install the output shaft flange. 11. Install the PTU in the vehicle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations View 151-27 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 3884 C4347 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Pressure Regulating Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Pinpoint Tests - Non OSC Equipped Vehicle Special Tool(s) Solenoid Operation Chart Solenoid Operation Chart Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Always OFF" Failed OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns, and/or solenoid electrically stuck off, and/or hydraulically or mechanically stuck off. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3891 Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Always ON" Failed ON due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns, and/or solenoid electrically stuck on, and/or hydraulically or mechanically stuck on. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Pressure Regulating Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3892 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams C199 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3896 Shift Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Pinpoint Tests - Non OSC Equipped Vehicle Special Tool(s) Solenoid Operation Chart Solenoid Operation Chart Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Always OFF" Failed OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns, and/or solenoid electrically stuck off, and/or hydraulically or mechanically stuck off. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3897 Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Always ON" Failed ON due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns, and/or solenoid electrically stuck on, and/or hydraulically or mechanically stuck on. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Shift Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 3898 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid: Testing and Inspection Pinpoint Tests - Non OSC Equipped Vehicle Special Tool(s) Solenoid Operation Chart Solenoid Operation Chart Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Always OFF" Failed OFF due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns, and/or solenoid electrically stuck off, and/or hydraulically or mechanically stuck off. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3902 Shift Solenoid Failure Mode Chart "Always ON" Failed ON due to PCM and/or vehicle wiring concerns, and/or solenoid electrically stuck on, and/or hydraulically or mechanically stuck on. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - A/T > Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid, A/T > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 3903 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations View 151-27 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Actuators and Solenoids Transmission and Drivetrain > Actuators and Solenoids - Transfer Case > Transfer Case Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 3908 C4347 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Adjustments Shift Indicator: Adjustments Selector Lever Cable Adjustment 1. Place the floor shift selector lever in the (D) position. 2. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual lever. 3. Place the manual lever in the (D) position. 1 Rotate the manual lever counterclockwise to the PARK position. 2 Rotate the manual lever clockwise 3 detents to the (D) position. 4. Release the selector lever cable adjuster lock. 1 Pull out on the adjuster lock tabs. 2 Slide the lock over to unlock the selector lever cable. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 3914 5. Align the selector lever cable end to the manual lever ball stud and install it with the adjuster unlocked. 6. Slide the adjuster tab in place to lock the selector lever cable. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Lamps and Indicators Transmission and Drivetrain > Lamps and Indicators - A/T > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation TRANSMISSION CONTROL INDICATOR LAMP (TCIL) The TCIL is an output signal from the PCM that controls the lamp on/off function depending on the engagement or disengagement of overdrive. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations View 151-22 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 3923 C3184 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Relays and Modules Transmission and Drivetrain > Relays and Modules - Transfer Case > Control Module, Transfer Case > Component Information > Locations > Page 3924 Control Module: Service and Repair Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Control Module Removal and Installation 1. Remove the floor console. 2. Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. Lift upward on the module to release the fasteners from the shifter base. Remove the four wheel drive (4WD) control module. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Brake Switch - TCC > Component Information > Description and Operation Brake Switch - TCC: Description and Operation BRAKE PEDAL POSITION (BPP) SWITCH Typical BPP Switch The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal to the PCM indicating that the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and is mounted on the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as follows: - to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake pedal is applied. - to the antilock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM. - to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ABS module interprets the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Transmission Mode Switch: Description and Operation TRANSMISSION CONTROL SWITCH (TCS) Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS) Typical Transmission Control Switch (TCS) The TCS signals the PCM with VPWR whenever the TCS is pressed. On vehicles with this feature, the transmission control indicator lamp (TCIL) illuminates when the TCS is cycled to disengage overdrive. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3933 Transmission Mode Switch: Testing and Inspection Electrical Connectors Selector Lever Harness Connector C2096 (vehicle harness side) (Part 1) Selector Lever Harness Connector C2096 (vehicle harness side) (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Mode Switch, A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 3934 Selector Lever Harness Connector C2096 (component side) (Part 1) Selector Lever Harness Connector C2096 (component side) (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Locations View 151-10 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3938 View 151-11 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3939 C167 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3940 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Adjustments Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Adjustment Special Tool(s) 1. Remove the battery and tray. 2. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position. Loosen the transmission range (TR) sensor bolts. 3. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft). 4. Install the battery and tray. 5. Check for correct operation. The engine should start only in PARK or NEUTRAL. The reverse lamps should illuminate in the REVERSE position. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3941 Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Service and Repair Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Special Tool(s) Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the battery and tray. 3. Remove the transmission range (TR) sensor. 1 Disconnect the TR sensor electrical connector. 2 Remove the TR sensor retaining bolts. 3 Remove the TR sensor. Installation 1. NOTE: Make sure the transaxle is in the NEUTRAL position. Install the TR sensor and loosely install the bolts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Position Switch/Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Page 3942 2. Using the special tool, align the TR sensor and tighten the bolts. ^ Tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft). 3. Connect the TR sensor electrical connector. 4. Install the battery and tray. 5. Check the correct operation. The engine should start only in PARK or NEUTRAL. The reverse lamps should illuminate in the REVERSE position. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor View 151-10 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 3947 View 151-11 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 3948 Transmission Speed Sensor: Locations Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor View 151-10 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Locations > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 3949 View 151-11 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor C193 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Diagrams > Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor > Page 3952 C143 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor Material Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the 7 retainers and the LH splash shield. ^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 3. Remove the turbine shaft speed (TSS) sensor 1 Disconnect the TSS electrical connector. 2 Remove the TSS sensor bolt. 3 Remove the TSS sensor. ^ To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 3955 4. NOTE: When installing the sensor, lubricate the O-ring seal with clean transmission fluid. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new O-ring seal as necessary. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 3956 Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Output Shaft Speed (OSS) Sensor Material Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the 7 retainers and the LH splash shield. ^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 3. Remove the output shaft speed (OSS) sensor 1 Disconnect the OSS electrical connector. 2 Remove the OSS sensor bolt. 3 Remove the OSS sensor. ^ To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - A/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, A/T > Component Information > Service and Repair > Turbine Shaft Speed (TSS) Sensor > Page 3957 4. NOTE: When installing the sensor, lubricate the O-ring seal with clean transmission fluid. Inspect the O-ring seal for nicks or cuts. Install a new O-ring seal as necessary. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Transmission and Drivetrain > Transmission Control Systems > Sensors and Switches Transmission and Drivetrain > Sensors and Switches - M/T > Transmission Speed Sensor, M/T > Component Information > Service and Repair Transmission Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Vehicle Speed Sensor (VSS) Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. NOTE: The electrical connector and the vehicle speed sensor (VSS) are accessed from the top of the transaxle. Remove the VSS bolt. 3. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the VSS. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > ABS Sensor Block > Component Information > Locations View 151-22 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > ABS Sensor Block > Component Information > Locations > Page 3967 C3296 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > ABS Sensor Block > Component Information > Locations > Page 3968 ABS Sensor Block: Service and Repair Stability Control Sensor Cluster Stability Control Sensor Cluster Removal and Installation WARNING: Wear high-voltage insulated safety gloves and a face shield when working with high-voltage batteries or cables. The high-voltage insulated safety gloves should be of the appropriate safety and protection rating. Inspect the gloves before use and always wear them with the leather outer glove. Any hole in the rubber insulating glove is a potential entry point for high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death. 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the floor console. 3. NOTE: When installing the sensor cluster the electrical connector must face the passenger seat. Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. Remove the 2 sensor cluster bolts. ^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-inch). 5. Remove the stability control sensor cluster. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Diagnostic Connector - ABS > Component Information > Diagrams C126 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations View 151-1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 3975 Electronic Brake Control Module: Diagrams C155 (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 3976 C155 (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 3977 Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module Material Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 3978 Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. The anti-lock brake system (ABS) module can be damaged if exposed to these charges. NOTE: Do not swap ABS modules between vehicles, the ABS module and the hydraulic control unit (HCU) are calibrated as an assembly. 1. Remove the HCU. 2. Remove the jumper tube assembly bracket nut. ^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-inch). 3. Disconnect the jumper tubes fittings from the HCU and remove the jumper tube assembly. ^ To install, tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). 4. Remove the 4 ABS module screws and the ABS module. ^ To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-inch). 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 6. Configure the ABS module. 7. NOTE: Vehicle must be on level ground and at a complete stand still during calibration. Calibrate the ABS module. Follow the instructions on the scan tool. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) Material Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 3982 CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. The anti-lock brake system (ABS) module can be damaged if exposed to these charges. NOTE: When installing a new ABS module/hydraulic control unit (HCU) assembly, it must be configured (either by download/upload or uploading the as-built data method). NOTE: On vehicles equipped with roll stability control (RSC), the ABS module is available separately from the HCU and should be serviced separately. However, if the RSC equipped vehicle requires a new HCU, then the ABS module and the HCU must be installed as an assembly. Make sure to use the most recently released service parts. All vehicles 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the air cleaner and the air cleaner outlet pipe. 3. Disconnect the master cylinder brake tube fittings from the hydraulic control unit (HCU). ^ To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). Vehicles with 3.0L engine 4. Disconnect the master cylinder brake tube fittings from the master cylinder and remove the brake tubes. ^ To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). All vehicles 5. NOTE: The brake tubes must be installed in the same location as removed. Disconnect the front brake tube fittings from the HCU. ^ To install, tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). 6. Disconnect the rear brake tube fittings from the jumper tubes. ^ To install, tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). 7. Disconnect the electrical connector by rotating the protective cover. 8. Remove the 3 HCU bracket-to-frame bolts and remove the HCU. ^ To install, tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft). 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Bleed the brake system. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Lateral Accelerometer > Component Information > Service and Repair Lateral Accelerometer: Service and Repair Stability Control Sensor Cluster Stability Control Sensor Cluster Removal and Installation WARNING: Wear high-voltage insulated safety gloves and a face shield when working with high-voltage batteries or cables. The high-voltage insulated safety gloves should be of the appropriate safety and protection rating. Inspect the gloves before use and always wear them with the leather outer glove. Any hole in the rubber insulating glove is a potential entry point for high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death. 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the floor console. 3. NOTE: When installing the sensor cluster the electrical connector must face the passenger seat. Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. Remove the 2 sensor cluster bolts. ^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-inch). 5. Remove the stability control sensor cluster. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-13 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3989 C2114 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 3990 Traction Control Switch: Service and Repair Stability/Traction Control Switch Removal and Installation Removal and Installation 1. Remove the lower instrument cluster center finish panel. ^ Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. Depress the 4 tabs and remove the stability/traction control switch assembly. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Right Front View 151-2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Right Front > Page 3995 View 151-24 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Right Front > Page 3996 View 151-25 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Right Front > Page 3997 View 151-2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front C150 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 4000 C440 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 4001 C160 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 4002 C426 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor - Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Front Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. NOTE: The electrical connector is located in the engine compartment. Disconnect the electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 4005 3. CAUTION: Care must be taken during the removal of the grommet to prevent damage. If the grommet is damaged, a new sensor may need to be installed, even though the sensor is functional in all other aspects. Remove the grommet from the body. ^ When removing the body grommet, rotate the grommet into a position which allows the use of a small screwdriver to release the tabs on the underside of the body grommet. These 2 tabs are located at right angles to the sensor wire. 4. Remove the front wheel speed sensor harness from the retainer. 5. Remove the front wheel speed sensor harness-to-body bolt. ^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-inch). 6. Remove the front wheel speed sensor harness-to-strut bracket bolt. ^ To install, tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). 7. Remove the front wheel speed sensor bolt from the wheel knuckle. ^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-inch). 8. NOTE: Clean off any foreign material that may have collected around the sensor before removal. Remove the front wheel speed sensor. 9. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 4006 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor - Rear Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. CAUTION: Care must be taken during the removal of the grommet to prevent damage. If the grommet is damaged, a new sensor may need to be installed, even though the sensor is functional in all other aspects. Remove the grommet from the body. ^ When removing the body grommet, rotate the grommet into a position which allows the use of a small screwdriver to release the tabs on the underside of the grommet. These 2 tabs are located at right angles to the sensor wire. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 4007 3. Disconnect the rear wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 4. Remove the rear wheel speed sensor harness from the harness retainer. 5. Remove the 3 rear wheel speed sensor harness bolts. ^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-inch). 6. NOTE: Clean off any debris that may have collected around the sensor before removal. Remove the rear wheel speed sensor bolt from the wheel knuckle. ^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-inch). 7. Remove the rear wheel speed sensor. 8. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 4008 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Front Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Front Removal and Installation 1. The front wheel speed sensor ring is integral to the front halfshaft and cannot be repaired separately. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 4009 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Rear Removal and Installation Front wheel drive (FWD) vehicles 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the rear wheel hub nut. ^ To install, tighten to 290 Nm (214 lb-ft). 3. Remove the sensor ring from the wheel hub. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. All wheel drive (AWD) vehicles 5. The rear wheel speed sensor ring is integral to the rear axle halfshaft and cannot be repaired separately. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair Yaw Rate Sensor: Service and Repair Stability Control Sensor Cluster Stability Control Sensor Cluster Removal and Installation WARNING: Wear high-voltage insulated safety gloves and a face shield when working with high-voltage batteries or cables. The high-voltage insulated safety gloves should be of the appropriate safety and protection rating. Inspect the gloves before use and always wear them with the leather outer glove. Any hole in the rubber insulating glove is a potential entry point for high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death. 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the floor console. 3. NOTE: When installing the sensor cluster the electrical connector must face the passenger seat. Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. Remove the 2 sensor cluster bolts. ^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-inch). 5. Remove the stability control sensor cluster. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component Bleeding Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Component Bleeding Component Bleeding Material Master Cylinder Priming WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. CAUTION: Bleeding the master cylinder on Hybrid vehicles requires a full system pressure bleed. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with clean, specified brake fluid. Never reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system or damage to the brake system components may occur. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. NOTE: When the brake master cylinder has been replaced or the system has been emptied, or partially emptied, it should be primed to prevent air from entering the system. 1. Disconnect the brake tubes from the master cylinder. 2. Install short brake tubes with the ends submerged in the brake master cylinder reservoir and fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid. 3. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal until clear fluid flows from both brake tubes, without air bubbles. 4. Remove the short brake tubes and install the brake outlet tubes. 5. Bleed each brake tube at the brake master cylinder as follows: 1. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal at least 2 times and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 2. Loosen the rearmost brake tube fitting until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the brake tube fitting. 3. Repeat this operation until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out. 4. Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary. Repeat the bleeding operation at the front brake tube. 5. Tighten the brake tube fittings to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). 6. Bleed the brake system. Brake Caliper CAUTION: Bleeding the brake caliper on Hybrid vehicles requires a full system pressure bleed. NOTE: It is not necessary to do a complete brake system bleed if only the brake caliper was disconnected or installed new. 1. Remove the bleeder screw cap and place a box end wrench on the brake caliper bleeder screw. Attach a rubber drain hose to the brake caliper bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid. 2. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal at least 2 times and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 3. Loosen the brake caliper bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the bleeder screw. ^ Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out. ^ Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary. 4. Tighten the bleeder screw and install the bleeder screw cap. ^ Tighten to 16 Nm (12 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 4017 Wheel Cylinder NOTE: It is not necessary to do a complete brake system bleed if only the wheel cylinder was disconnected or installed new. 1. Remove the bleeder screw cap and place a box end wrench on the wheel cylinder bleeder screw. Attach a rubber drain hose to the disc brake caliper bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid. 2. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal at least 2 times and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 3. Loosen the wheel cylinder bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the bleeder screw. ^ Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out. ^ Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary. 4. Tighten the bleeder screw and install the bleeder screw cap. ^ Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-inch). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 4018 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Brake System Bleeding Brake System Bleeding Special Tool(s) Material Material Manual Bleeding Method WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with clean, specified brake fluid. Never reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system. Damage to the brake system components may occur. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or replacement, air can enter the system and cause spongy brake pedal action. This requires bleeding of the hydraulic system after the repair is finished or after the new component is installed. The hydraulic system can be bled manually or with pressure bleeding equipment. 1. Clean all dirt from and remove the brake master cylinder filler cap and fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid. 2. Remove the bleeder screw cap and place a box end wrench on the RH rear bleeder screw. Attach a rubber drain hose to the RH rear bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid. 3. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal at least 3 times and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 4. Loosen the RH rear bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the RH rear bleeder screw. ^ Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out. ^ Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary. 5. Tighten the RH rear bleeder screw and install the bleeder screw cap. ^ Tighten to 16 Nm (12 lb-ft). 6. Repeat Steps 2 through 5 for the LH rear, RH front and LH front bleeder screws in this order. ^ Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary. Pressure Bleeding Method WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 4019 has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with clean, specified brake fluid. Never reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system. Damage to the brake system components may occur CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or replacement, air can enter the system and cause spongy brake pedal action. This requires bleeding of the hydraulic system after the repair is finished or after the new component is installed. The hydraulic system can be bled manually or with pressure bleeding equipment. 1. Clean all dirt from and remove the brake master cylinder filler cap and fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid. 2. NOTE: Master cylinder pressure bleeder adapter tools are available from various manufacturers of pressure bleeding equipment. Follow the instructions of the equipment manufacturer when installing the adapter. Install the bleeder adapter to the brake master cylinder reservoir and attach the bleeder tank hose to the fitting on the adapter. 3. NOTE: Bleed the longest line first. Make sure the bleeder tank contains enough clean, specified brake fluid to complete the bleeding operation. Remove the bleeder screw cap and place a box end wrench on the RH rear bleeder screw. Attach a rubber drain hose to the RH rear bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid. 4. Open the valve on the bleeder tank. 5. Loosen the RH rear bleeder screw. Leave open until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows, then tighten the RH rear bleeder screw and remove the rubber hose and install the bleeder screw cap. ^ Tighten to 16 Nm (12 lb-ft). 6. Continue bleeding the system, going in order from the LH rear bleeder screw to the RH front disc brake caliper bleeder screw ending with the LH front disc brake caliper bleeder screw. 7. Close the bleeder tank valve. Remove the tank hose from the adapter and remove the adapter from the brake fluid reservoir. Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Bleeding WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with clean, specified brake fluid. Never reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system. Damage to the brake system components may occur CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or replacement, air can enter the system and cause spongy brake pedal action. This requires bleeding of the hydraulic system after the repair is finished or after the new component is installed. The hydraulic system can be bled manually or with pressure bleeding equipment. NOTE: Bleeding the hydraulic control unit (HCU) is required only when removing or installing the HCU, master cylinder, or opening the tubes and hoses to the HCU. 1. NOTE: Carrying out the System Bleed function drives trapped air from the HCU. Subsequent bleeding removes the air from the brake hydraulic system through the bleeder screws. NOTE: Adequate battery voltage is required during the anti-lock control portion of the system bleed. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 4020 Connect the scan tool. 2. Access the SYSTEM BLEED FUNCTION and follow the directions on the scan tool. 3. Manually bleed the brake hydraulic system. 4. Repeat the procedure carrying out a total of 2 scan tool cycles and 2 manual bleed cycles. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Service and Repair Brake Pedal Assy: Service and Repair Brake Pedal and Bracket Brake Pedal and Bracket Removal and Installation 1. CAUTION: Do not service the brake pedal or brake booster without first removing the stoplamp switch and speed control deactivator switch. These switches must be removed with the brake pedal in the at-rest position. Switch plungers must be compressed for the switch to rotate in the bracket. Attempting to remove the switch when the plunger is extended (during pedal apply) will result in damage to the switch. Remove the stoplamp switch. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Pedal Assy > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4024 2. If equipped, remove the speed control deactivator switch. 3. NOTE: The booster push rod clevis locking pin is a one-time use only part. Anytime the booster push rod clevis locking pin is removed, a new booster push rod clevis locking pin should be used. NOTE: Remove the clevis locking pin by squeezing the locking tabs and pulling outward on the opposite end. Remove and discard the booster push rod clevis locking pin. 4. Remove the brake pedal bracket upper bolt. ^ To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). 5. Remove the brake pedal bracket upper nut. ^ To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). 6. Remove the 4 brake booster nuts. ^ To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). 7. Remove the brake pedal and bracket assembly. ^ Position the brake booster forward to allow the brake pedal and bracket assembly to clear the brake booster studs. 8. CAUTION: Do not press, pull or otherwise move the brake pedal while installing the stoplamp switch or the speed control deactivator switch. These switches must be installed with the booster push rod attached to the brake pedal and with the brake pedal in the at-rest position. Installing these switches with the brake pedal in any other position will result in incorrect adjustment and may damage the switches. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation, Front Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Caliper Removal and Installation, Front Brake Caliper Material Material Removal and Installation Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation, Front > Page 4030 Disc Brake System - Exploded View WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. 1. Remove the wheel and tire. 2. CAUTION: If the brake pad anti-rattle spring is to be removed, do not force the spring off the brake caliper or damage to the spring can occur. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation, Front > Page 4031 CAUTION: Do not use any tools to remove the spring, use hand force only. Do not use excessive force or damage to the spring can occur. NOTE: The LH side brake pad anti-rattle spring must be installed with the 2-tabbed end in the upper brake caliper cavity. For the LH brake caliper, release the lower portion of the brake pad anti-rattle spring. ^ Apply force to the center of the spring and pull outward at the bottom of the spring to remove it from the lower brake caliper cavity. 3. Rotate the spring upward and remove it from the brake caliper. 4. NOTE: The RH side brake pad anti-rattle spring must be installed with the 2-tabbed end in the lower brake caliper cavity. For the RH brake caliper, release the upper portion of the brake pad anti-rattle spring. ^ Apply force to the center of the spring and pull outward at the top of the spring to remove it from the upper brake caliper cavity. 5. Rotate the spring downward and remove it from the brake caliper. 6. Loosen the brake flexible hose at the brake caliper. 7. CAUTION: Do not allow the caliper to hang from the brake hose or damage to the hose can occur. Remove the 2 guide pin bushing caps and the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts, position the caliper aside. ^ Support the caliper using mechanic's wire. 8. Remove the brake flexible hose and remove the brake caliper. 9. Remove the 2 brake pads from the caliper. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation, Front > Page 4032 Installation 1. Install the brake pads onto the caliper and position the brake caliper onto the anchor plate. 2. Install the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts and the 2 bushing caps. ^ Tighten the bolts to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft). 3. NOTE: If present, the 2-tabbed end of the brake pad anti-rattle spring must be installed first. Install the brake pad anti-rattle spring using the following procedure: 1. Insert the tab of the spring into the brake caliper cavity. 2. Twist the tab into the cavity (LH side in the upper brake caliper cavity, RH side in the lower brake caliper cavity). 4. Rotate the brake pad anti-rattle spring and position the upper portion onto the anchor plate. 5. Position the lower portion of the brake pad anti-rattle spring onto the anchor plate. 6. Push down and inward until the upper and lower ends of the anchor housing spring are latched and seated in the brake caliper cavities. 7. NOTE: The latch MUST be positioned as shown. Verify that the brake pad anti-rattle spring is correctly latched by pulling on the spring. 8. NOTE: Make sure that the brake flexible hose is not twisted. Install the brake flexible hose to the brake caliper. ^ Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft). 9. Install the wheel and tire. 10. Bleed the brake system. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation, Front > Page 4033 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Caliper Removal and Installation, Rear Brake Caliper Material Removal and Installation Disc Brake System - Exploded View Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation, Front > Page 4034 WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. CAUTION: Do not allow brake fluid to overflow from the master cylinder reservoir. Brake fluid may damage the high-voltage components. NOTE: The rear brake pads will wear at approximately twice the rate of the front brake pads. 1. Remove the wheel and tire. 2. NOTE: The following steps must be followed to prevent the accumulator from charging and pressurizing the brake system. Disconnect the battery. ^ Remove the battery junction box (BJB) fuses 24 (50A) and 31 (50A). 3. Remove the brake flexible hose flow bolt and discard the 2 copper washers. ^ To install, tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft). 4. Remove the 2 brake caliper guide bolts. ^ To install, tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft). 5. Remove the brake caliper. 6. Remove the brake pads from the caliper. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Bleed the brake system. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation, Front > Page 4035 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Brake Caliper Anchor Plate, Front Brake Caliper Anchor Plate Removal and Installation Disc Brake System - Exploded View 1. Remove the wheel and tire. 2. CAUTION: Do not allow the caliper to hang from the brake hose or damage to the hose can occur. Remove the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts and position the caliper aside. ^ Support the caliper using mechanic's wire. 3. Remove the 2 brake caliper anchor plate bolts. ^ To install, tighten to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation, Front > Page 4036 4. Remove the brake caliper anchor plate. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Specifications Brake Pad: Specifications Front Brake Pads Maximum taper wear (in any direction) ................................................................................................................................................ 3.0 mm (0.118 in) Rear Brake Pads Maximum taper wear (in any direction) ................................................................................................................................................ 3.0 mm (0.118 in) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Brake Pad: Service and Repair Front Brake Pads Material Material Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 4042 Disc Brake System - Exploded View Removal WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. 1. If necessary, using a suitable suction device, remove the brake fluid from the master cylinder reservoir until it is half filled. 2. Remove the wheel and tire. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 4043 3. CAUTION: If the brake pad anti-rattle spring is to be removed, do not force the spring off the brake caliper or damage to the spring can occur. CAUTION: Do not use any tools to remove the spring, use hand force only. Do not use excessive force or damage to the spring can occur. NOTE: The LH side brake pad anti-rattle spring must be installed with the 2-tabbed end in the upper brake caliper cavity. For the LH brake caliper, release the lower portion of the brake pad anti-rattle spring. ^ Apply force to the center of the spring and pull outward at the bottom of the spring to remove it from the lower brake caliper cavity. 4. Rotate the spring upward and remove it from the brake caliper. 5. NOTE: The RH side brake pad anti-rattle spring must be installed with the 2-tabbed end in the lower brake caliper cavity. For the RH brake caliper, release the upper portion of the brake pad anti-rattle spring. ^ Apply force to the center of the spring and pull outward at the top of the spring to remove it from the upper brake caliper cavity. 6. Rotate the spring downward and remove it from the brake caliper. 7. CAUTION: Do not allow the caliper to hang from the brake hose or damage to the hose can occur. Remove the 2 guide pin bushing caps and the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts, position the caliper aside. ^ Support the caliper using mechanic's wire. 8. Remove the 2 brake pads from the caliper. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 4044 9. Inspect the brake pads for wear and contamination, install new pads as necessary. 10. NOTE: Use a suitable tool to protect the brake caliper piston boots. Compress the brake caliper piston into the brake caliper. 11. Inspect the brake disc and resurface or install new as necessary. Installation 1. Clean, dry and inspect the brake caliper anchor plate. Apply a light coat of specified lubricant to the 4 brake pad contact points on the anchor plate. 2. NOTE: Make sure that the brake flexible hose is not twisted. Install the brake pads onto the caliper and position the brake caliper onto the anchor plate. 3. Install the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts and the 2 bushing caps. ^ Tighten the bolts to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft). 4. NOTE: The 2-tabbed end of the brake pad anti-rattle spring must be installed first. Install the anchor housing spring using the following procedure: 1. Insert the tab of the spring into the brake caliper cavity. 2. Twist the tab into the cavity (LH side in the upper brake caliper cavity, RH side in the lower brake caliper cavity). 5. Rotate the brake pad anti-rattle spring and position the upper portion onto the anchor plate. 6. Position the lower portion of the brake pad anti-rattle spring onto the anchor plate. 7. Push down and inward until the upper and lower ends of the brake pad anti-rattle spring are latched and seated in the brake caliper cavities. 8. CAUTION: The latch MUST be positioned as shown, or damage to component may occur. Verify that the brake pad anti-rattle spring is correctly latched by pulling on the spring. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 4045 9. Fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid. 10. Install the wheel and tire. 11. Test the brakes for normal operation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 4046 Brake Pad: Service and Repair Rear Brake Pads Disc Brake System - Exploded View Removal and Installation CAUTION: Do not allow brake fluid to overflow from the master cylinder reservoir. Brake fluid may damage the high-voltage components. NOTE: The rear brake pads will wear at approximately twice the rate of the front brake pads. 1. Remove the wheel and tire. 2. NOTE: The following steps must be followed to prevent the accumulator from charging and pressurizing the brake system. Disconnect the battery. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Pad > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 4047 ^ Remove the battery junction box (BJB) fuses 24 (50A) and 31 (50A). 3. CAUTION: Do not allow the caliper to hang from the brake hose or damage to the hose can occur. Remove the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts and position the caliper aside. ^ To install, tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft). ^ Support the caliper using mechanic's wire. 4. Remove the brake pads from the brake caliper. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Specifications Brake Rotor/Disc: Specifications Brake Discs Hybrid Front Minimum thickness .............................................................................................................................. ...................................... 24 mm (0.944 in) Minimum thickness to machine ............................................................................................................................................... 24.6 mm (0.969 in) Rear Minimum thickness .............................................................................................................................. ................................... 11.0 mm (0.433 in) Minimum thickness to machine ............................................................................................................................................... 11.6 mm (0.456 in) Non-Hybrid Front Minimum thickness .............................................................................................................................. ...................................... 22 mm (0.866 in) Minimum thickness to machine ............................................................................................................................................... 22.6 mm (0.889 in) Rear Minimum thickness .............................................................................................................................. ................................... 11.0 mm (0.433 in) Minimum thickness to machine ............................................................................................................................................... 11.6 mm (0.456 in) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Brake Rotor/Disc: Procedures Brake Disc Machining Material All vehicles NOTE: Read the entire operating manual and/or view the video shipped with the lathe before installing, operating or repairing the lathe. NOTE: Is it not necessary to machine new brake discs. NOTE: Lateral runout and disc thickness variation measurements are not required because correct adjustment of the on-vehicle brake lathe makes sure that these dimensions are within specifications. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. Hybrid vehicles CAUTION: Do not allow brake fluid to overflow from the master cylinder reservoir. Brake fluid may damage the high-voltage components. 2. NOTE: The following steps must be followed to prevent the accumulator from charging and pressurizing the brake system. Disconnect the 12-volt battery. 3. Remove the battery junction box (BJB) fuses 9 (50 A) and 18 (50 A). All vehicles 4. NOTE: It is not necessary to disconnect the brake line from the brake caliper. Position the brake caliper and brake caliper anchor bracket (if equipped) aside. 5. Machine the brake disc using the on-vehicle brake lathe. 1. Install the hub adapter and silencer belt, if necessary. 2. Install the cutting lathe. 3. If the lathe is not self adjusting, adjust the lathe oscillation using a dial indicator. The total indicated reading (TIR) target is 0.000 mm (0.000 inch), and the maximum is 0.08 mm (0.003 inch). 4. Center the cutting head, adjust the cutting bits and install the chip deflector. 5. NOTE: The depth of cut should be between 0.10 and 0.20 mm (0.004 and 0.008 inch). Lighter cuts cause the bit to heat up and wear faster. Heavier cuts cause poor brake disc surface finish. Machine the brake disc. 6. Remove the lathe and, if installed, the silencer belt. 7. Remove the hub adapter. 6. Remove the metal shavings. 7. NOTE: It is not necessary to install new brake pads if the friction material properties are within specification. Install the brake caliper and brake caliper anchor bracket (if equipped). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4053 Brake Rotor/Disc: Removal and Replacement Disc Removal and Installation, Front Brake Disc Removal and Installation Disc Brake System - Exploded View 1. Remove the brake caliper anchor plate. 2. Remove the brake disc. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Disc Removal and Installation, Rear Brake Disc Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4054 Removal and Installation Disc Brake System - Exploded View CAUTION: Do not allow brake fluid to overflow from the master cylinder reservoir. Brake fluid may damage the high-voltage components. NOTE: The rear brake pads will wear at approximately twice the rate of the front brake pads. 1. Remove the wheel and tire. 2. NOTE: The following steps must be followed to prevent the accumulator from charging and pressurizing the brake system. Disconnect the battery. ^ Remove the battery junction box (BJB) fuses 24 (50A) and 31 (50A). 3. CAUTION: Do not allow the caliper and brake pad assembly to hang from the brake hose or damage to the hose can occur. Remove the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts and position the caliper and brake pad assembly aside. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Disc Brake System > Brake Rotor/Disc > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4055 ^ To install, tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft). ^ Support the caliper using mechanic's wire. 4. Remove the brake disc. 5. If the brake disc binds on the parking brake shoes, remove the adjustment hole access plug and retract the parking brake shoes by rotating the adjuster. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Adjust the parking brake shoes, if necessary. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Backing Plate > Component Information > Service and Repair Backing Plate: Service and Repair Brake Backing Plate Removal and Installation 1. Remove the rear wheel cylinder. 2. Remove the brake flexible hose bracket bolt. ^ To install, tighten to 17 Nm (13 lb-ft). 3. Compress the parking brake cable conduit locking tabs and pull the parking brake cable assembly through the backing plate. 4. Remove the rear wheel hub. 5. Remove the 4 backing plate bolts and the backing plate. ^ To install, tighten to 85 Nm (63 lb-ft). 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information > Service and Repair Brake Drum: Service and Repair Brake Drum Special Tool(s) Removal CAUTION: To reduce the possibility of uneven braking, always install new rear brake shoes at both ends of an axle. 1. Remove the wheel and tire. 2. CAUTION: Use of a brake drum puller or a torch is not recommended. Brake drum distortion can result. NOTE: If the brake drum is seized to the wheel hub pilot diameter, tap the center of the brake drum between the wheel studs. If the brake drum binds on the brake shoes, retract the brake shoes. 1. Move the brake shoe adjuster actuator lever away from the adjuster. 2. Rotate the brake shoe adjuster screw upward to retract the brake shoes. 3. Remove the brake drum. Installation 1. Using the special tool, measure the inside diameter of the brake drum. ^ Install a new brake drum if the inside diameter exceeds the specification stamped on the outside face of the brake drum. 2. Adjust the rear brakes, refer to Brake Shoe Adjustment. 3. Position the brake drum on the vehicle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Drum > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4063 4. Install the wheel and tire. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-20-11 > Oct > 08 > Brakes - Rear Brake Rotational Chirp Noise Brake Shoe: Customer Interest Brakes - Rear Brake Rotational Chirp Noise TSB 08-20-11 10/13/08 REAR BRAKE NOISE - ROTATIONAL CHIRP - (EXCLUDES HYBRID) FORD: 2008 Escape MERCURY: 2008 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 08-11-2 to update the Service procedure. ISSUE Some 2008 Escape and Mariner (Excludes Hybrid) vehicles may exhibit a noise from the rear brakes while coming to a stop. This condition does not affect brake performance. The noise is typically described as a cyclic, scraping, or rotational chirp noise. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE To better determine if this procedure is applicable, be advised of the following characteristics: ^ The noise this procedure addresses is unlike a typical brake squeak. ^ It is often described as a groan noise or scraping noise which is cyclic and follows wheel speed. ^ Vehicles will usually exhibit the noise at speeds under 20 MPH (32 Km/h). ^ This noise will only be present when the brakes are very warm or hot such as experienced in stop and go traffic. Vehicles built prior to 6/15/2007 follow both procedures A and B. Vehicles built after 6/15/2007 perform only procedure B. NOTE PERFORMING PROCEDURE B IS THE MOST CRITICAL PART OF THIS REPAIR. ADDING LUBRICANT TO THE WHEEL CYLINDER PISTONS WILL REDUCE FRICTION BETWEEN THE WHEEL CYLINDER PISTON AND ALUMINUM WHEEL CYLINDER WALL ELIMINATING NOISE SOURCE. PROCEDURE A 1. Replace the rear brake shoes. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 206-02. 2. Apply Motorcraft® Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound to the contact points between the shoe and the rear backing plate. Ensure grease will not contact brake lining surface. PROCEDURE B Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-20-11 > Oct > 08 > Brakes - Rear Brake Rotational Chirp Noise > Page 4072 1. Remove the rear brake shoe return springs brake shoes, and wheel cylinder dust boots. Using your hands, push one piston into the wheel cylinder until the opposite side piston is exposed. Be sure the wheel cylinder piston is extending out beyond the end of the wheel cylinder sufficient to allow complete coverage of the piston surface and piston seal. It is possible and recommended to have the piston cup seal slightly exposed when performing this operation (Figure 1). 2. Apply Motorcraft(R) Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound around the wheel cylinder pistons and then repeat procedure for opposite side wheel cylinder pistons. Be sure to pack the grease into the wheel cylinder bore to ensure grease gets back to the piston seal. (Figure 2) 3. Once both wheel cylinder pistons have been lubricated, shuttle the pistons side to side three (3) or more times to distribute the lubricant and ensure smooth movement. (Figure 3) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-20-11 > Oct > 08 > Brakes - Rear Brake Rotational Chirp Noise > Page 4073 Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 082011A 2008 Escape/Mariner: 1.0 Hrs. Remove The Rear Brake Shoes, Apply Motorcraft Silicone Brake Caliper Grease Following Service Procedure, Replace The Rear Brake Shoes If Necessary (Do Not Use With 2001BB, 2001B1B) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 2200 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 08-20-11 > Oct > 08 > Brakes - Rear Brake Rotational Chirp Noise Brake Shoe: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Rear Brake Rotational Chirp Noise TSB 08-20-11 10/13/08 REAR BRAKE NOISE - ROTATIONAL CHIRP - (EXCLUDES HYBRID) FORD: 2008 Escape MERCURY: 2008 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 08-11-2 to update the Service procedure. ISSUE Some 2008 Escape and Mariner (Excludes Hybrid) vehicles may exhibit a noise from the rear brakes while coming to a stop. This condition does not affect brake performance. The noise is typically described as a cyclic, scraping, or rotational chirp noise. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE To better determine if this procedure is applicable, be advised of the following characteristics: ^ The noise this procedure addresses is unlike a typical brake squeak. ^ It is often described as a groan noise or scraping noise which is cyclic and follows wheel speed. ^ Vehicles will usually exhibit the noise at speeds under 20 MPH (32 Km/h). ^ This noise will only be present when the brakes are very warm or hot such as experienced in stop and go traffic. Vehicles built prior to 6/15/2007 follow both procedures A and B. Vehicles built after 6/15/2007 perform only procedure B. NOTE PERFORMING PROCEDURE B IS THE MOST CRITICAL PART OF THIS REPAIR. ADDING LUBRICANT TO THE WHEEL CYLINDER PISTONS WILL REDUCE FRICTION BETWEEN THE WHEEL CYLINDER PISTON AND ALUMINUM WHEEL CYLINDER WALL ELIMINATING NOISE SOURCE. PROCEDURE A 1. Replace the rear brake shoes. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 206-02. 2. Apply Motorcraft® Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound to the contact points between the shoe and the rear backing plate. Ensure grease will not contact brake lining surface. PROCEDURE B Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 08-20-11 > Oct > 08 > Brakes - Rear Brake Rotational Chirp Noise > Page 4079 1. Remove the rear brake shoe return springs brake shoes, and wheel cylinder dust boots. Using your hands, push one piston into the wheel cylinder until the opposite side piston is exposed. Be sure the wheel cylinder piston is extending out beyond the end of the wheel cylinder sufficient to allow complete coverage of the piston surface and piston seal. It is possible and recommended to have the piston cup seal slightly exposed when performing this operation (Figure 1). 2. Apply Motorcraft(R) Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound around the wheel cylinder pistons and then repeat procedure for opposite side wheel cylinder pistons. Be sure to pack the grease into the wheel cylinder bore to ensure grease gets back to the piston seal. (Figure 2) 3. Once both wheel cylinder pistons have been lubricated, shuttle the pistons side to side three (3) or more times to distribute the lubricant and ensure smooth movement. (Figure 3) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 08-20-11 > Oct > 08 > Brakes - Rear Brake Rotational Chirp Noise > Page 4080 Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 082011A 2008 Escape/Mariner: 1.0 Hrs. Remove The Rear Brake Shoes, Apply Motorcraft Silicone Brake Caliper Grease Following Service Procedure, Replace The Rear Brake Shoes If Necessary (Do Not Use With 2001BB, 2001B1B) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 2200 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Brake Shoe: > 09-5-8 > Mar > 09 > Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises TSB 09-5-8 03/23/09 ROTATIONAL CLICKING NOISE FROM 17 INCH CHROME WHEEL CLADDING - BUILT BEFORE 211/2009 - EXCLUDES HYBRID FORD: 2008-2009 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles (excludes Hybrid), built before 2/01/2009 and equipped with 17 inch chrome clad wheels, may exhibit rotational clicking noise from the chrome cladding (attached to rim) during slow speed parking lot type maneuvers. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE FRONT WHEELS MAY EXHIBIT NOISE MORE THAN REAR WHEELS DUE TO WEIGHT OF THE POWERTRAIN. 1. Verify noise is coming from the chrome cladding on wheel(s) by driving slow parking lot type maneuvers at speeds less than 10 MPH (16 km/h). 2. Mark wheel(s) exhibiting noise, rotate rear wheels to the front, evaluate unmarked wheels for noise, and mark any additional wheel(s) exhibiting noise. 3. Replace marked wheel(s) exhibiting noise with updated service parts per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-04. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 090508A 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.0 Hr. 4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace One (1) Wheel. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer Tire Pressure Monitor Sensor (TPMS) And Balance Assembly (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D) 090508B 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.4 Hrs. 4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Two (2) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Brake Shoe: > 09-5-8 > Mar > 09 > Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises > Page 4086 Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D) 090508C 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.8 Hrs. 4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Three (3) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D) 090508D 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 2.1 Hrs. 4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Four (4) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 1007 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Brake Shoe: > 09-5-8 > Mar > 09 > Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises > Page 4092 Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D) 090508C 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.8 Hrs. 4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Three (3) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D) 090508D 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 2.1 Hrs. 4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Four (4) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 1007 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4093 Brake Shoe: Adjustments Brake Shoe Adjustment Special Tool(s) 1. Remove the brake drum. 2. Using the special tool, measure the inside diameter of the brake drum. 3. Position the special tool on the brake shoes and linings and adjust accordingly. 4. Install the brake drum. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Brake Shoe > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4094 Brake Shoe: Service and Repair Brake Shoes Material Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: If new rear brake shoes and linings are being installed, resurface the brake drums to remove glazing and to provide an equal friction surface from side-to-side. Resurfacing also corrects out-of-round and bell conditions. Remove the brake drum. 2. Remove the 2 brake shoe retaining springs and the 2 pins. 3. Remove the upper return spring. 4. Remove the self-adjuster and spring assembly. 5. Remove the lower return spring. 6. Remove the trailing brake shoe and parking brake actuator lever assembly. 7. Remove the leading brake shoe. ^ Clean and dry the brake shoe contact points on the backing plate. ^ Apply a thin coat of silicone grease to the brake shoe contact points on the backing plate. 8. NOTE: Adjust the self-adjuster to the full retracted position to ease the installation of the brake drum. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Adjust the rear brake shoes. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheel Cylinder: > 08-20-11 > Oct > 08 > Brakes - Rear Brake Rotational Chirp Noise Wheel Cylinder: Customer Interest Brakes - Rear Brake Rotational Chirp Noise TSB 08-20-11 10/13/08 REAR BRAKE NOISE - ROTATIONAL CHIRP - (EXCLUDES HYBRID) FORD: 2008 Escape MERCURY: 2008 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 08-11-2 to update the Service procedure. ISSUE Some 2008 Escape and Mariner (Excludes Hybrid) vehicles may exhibit a noise from the rear brakes while coming to a stop. This condition does not affect brake performance. The noise is typically described as a cyclic, scraping, or rotational chirp noise. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE To better determine if this procedure is applicable, be advised of the following characteristics: ^ The noise this procedure addresses is unlike a typical brake squeak. ^ It is often described as a groan noise or scraping noise which is cyclic and follows wheel speed. ^ Vehicles will usually exhibit the noise at speeds under 20 MPH (32 Km/h). ^ This noise will only be present when the brakes are very warm or hot such as experienced in stop and go traffic. Vehicles built prior to 6/15/2007 follow both procedures A and B. Vehicles built after 6/15/2007 perform only procedure B. NOTE PERFORMING PROCEDURE B IS THE MOST CRITICAL PART OF THIS REPAIR. ADDING LUBRICANT TO THE WHEEL CYLINDER PISTONS WILL REDUCE FRICTION BETWEEN THE WHEEL CYLINDER PISTON AND ALUMINUM WHEEL CYLINDER WALL ELIMINATING NOISE SOURCE. PROCEDURE A 1. Replace the rear brake shoes. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 206-02. 2. Apply Motorcraft® Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound to the contact points between the shoe and the rear backing plate. Ensure grease will not contact brake lining surface. PROCEDURE B Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheel Cylinder: > 08-20-11 > Oct > 08 > Brakes - Rear Brake Rotational Chirp Noise > Page 4103 1. Remove the rear brake shoe return springs brake shoes, and wheel cylinder dust boots. Using your hands, push one piston into the wheel cylinder until the opposite side piston is exposed. Be sure the wheel cylinder piston is extending out beyond the end of the wheel cylinder sufficient to allow complete coverage of the piston surface and piston seal. It is possible and recommended to have the piston cup seal slightly exposed when performing this operation (Figure 1). 2. Apply Motorcraft(R) Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound around the wheel cylinder pistons and then repeat procedure for opposite side wheel cylinder pistons. Be sure to pack the grease into the wheel cylinder bore to ensure grease gets back to the piston seal. (Figure 2) 3. Once both wheel cylinder pistons have been lubricated, shuttle the pistons side to side three (3) or more times to distribute the lubricant and ensure smooth movement. (Figure 3) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheel Cylinder: > 08-20-11 > Oct > 08 > Brakes - Rear Brake Rotational Chirp Noise > Page 4104 Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 082011A 2008 Escape/Mariner: 1.0 Hrs. Remove The Rear Brake Shoes, Apply Motorcraft Silicone Brake Caliper Grease Following Service Procedure, Replace The Rear Brake Shoes If Necessary (Do Not Use With 2001BB, 2001B1B) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 2200 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Cylinder: > 08-20-11 > Oct > 08 > Brakes - Rear Brake Rotational Chirp Noise Wheel Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Rear Brake Rotational Chirp Noise TSB 08-20-11 10/13/08 REAR BRAKE NOISE - ROTATIONAL CHIRP - (EXCLUDES HYBRID) FORD: 2008 Escape MERCURY: 2008 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 08-11-2 to update the Service procedure. ISSUE Some 2008 Escape and Mariner (Excludes Hybrid) vehicles may exhibit a noise from the rear brakes while coming to a stop. This condition does not affect brake performance. The noise is typically described as a cyclic, scraping, or rotational chirp noise. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE To better determine if this procedure is applicable, be advised of the following characteristics: ^ The noise this procedure addresses is unlike a typical brake squeak. ^ It is often described as a groan noise or scraping noise which is cyclic and follows wheel speed. ^ Vehicles will usually exhibit the noise at speeds under 20 MPH (32 Km/h). ^ This noise will only be present when the brakes are very warm or hot such as experienced in stop and go traffic. Vehicles built prior to 6/15/2007 follow both procedures A and B. Vehicles built after 6/15/2007 perform only procedure B. NOTE PERFORMING PROCEDURE B IS THE MOST CRITICAL PART OF THIS REPAIR. ADDING LUBRICANT TO THE WHEEL CYLINDER PISTONS WILL REDUCE FRICTION BETWEEN THE WHEEL CYLINDER PISTON AND ALUMINUM WHEEL CYLINDER WALL ELIMINATING NOISE SOURCE. PROCEDURE A 1. Replace the rear brake shoes. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 206-02. 2. Apply Motorcraft® Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound to the contact points between the shoe and the rear backing plate. Ensure grease will not contact brake lining surface. PROCEDURE B Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Cylinder: > 08-20-11 > Oct > 08 > Brakes - Rear Brake Rotational Chirp Noise > Page 4110 1. Remove the rear brake shoe return springs brake shoes, and wheel cylinder dust boots. Using your hands, push one piston into the wheel cylinder until the opposite side piston is exposed. Be sure the wheel cylinder piston is extending out beyond the end of the wheel cylinder sufficient to allow complete coverage of the piston surface and piston seal. It is possible and recommended to have the piston cup seal slightly exposed when performing this operation (Figure 1). 2. Apply Motorcraft(R) Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound around the wheel cylinder pistons and then repeat procedure for opposite side wheel cylinder pistons. Be sure to pack the grease into the wheel cylinder bore to ensure grease gets back to the piston seal. (Figure 2) 3. Once both wheel cylinder pistons have been lubricated, shuttle the pistons side to side three (3) or more times to distribute the lubricant and ensure smooth movement. (Figure 3) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheel Cylinder: > 08-20-11 > Oct > 08 > Brakes - Rear Brake Rotational Chirp Noise > Page 4111 Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 082011A 2008 Escape/Mariner: 1.0 Hrs. Remove The Rear Brake Shoes, Apply Motorcraft Silicone Brake Caliper Grease Following Service Procedure, Replace The Rear Brake Shoes If Necessary (Do Not Use With 2001BB, 2001B1B) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 2200 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement Wheel Cylinder: Removal and Replacement Wheel Cylinder Material Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. 1. Remove the brake shoes. 2. Disconnect the brake tube fitting. ^ To install, tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). 3. Remove the 2 wheel cylinder bolts and remove the wheel cylinder. ^ To install, tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Bleed the brake hydraulic system. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 4114 Wheel Cylinder: Overhaul Wheel Cylinder Material Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly and Assembly WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. 1. Remove the rear wheel cylinder. 2. Remove the bleeder screw cap. 3. Remove the bleeder screw. ^ To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-inch). 4. Remove the 2 dust boots. 5. Remove the 2 pistons. 6. Remove the 2 piston seals. ^ To install, lubricate the piston seals with clean brake fluid. 7. Remove the spring. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Drum Brake System > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 4115 8. NOTE: Inspect the wheel cylinder bore for excessive wear, corrosion or pitting. If any of these conditions exist, a new wheel cylinder must be installed. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component Bleeding Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Component Bleeding Component Bleeding Material Master Cylinder Priming WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. CAUTION: Bleeding the master cylinder on Hybrid vehicles requires a full system pressure bleed. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with clean, specified brake fluid. Never reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system or damage to the brake system components may occur. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. NOTE: When the brake master cylinder has been replaced or the system has been emptied, or partially emptied, it should be primed to prevent air from entering the system. 1. Disconnect the brake tubes from the master cylinder. 2. Install short brake tubes with the ends submerged in the brake master cylinder reservoir and fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid. 3. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal until clear fluid flows from both brake tubes, without air bubbles. 4. Remove the short brake tubes and install the brake outlet tubes. 5. Bleed each brake tube at the brake master cylinder as follows: 1. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal at least 2 times and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 2. Loosen the rearmost brake tube fitting until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the brake tube fitting. 3. Repeat this operation until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out. 4. Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary. Repeat the bleeding operation at the front brake tube. 5. Tighten the brake tube fittings to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). 6. Bleed the brake system. Brake Caliper CAUTION: Bleeding the brake caliper on Hybrid vehicles requires a full system pressure bleed. NOTE: It is not necessary to do a complete brake system bleed if only the brake caliper was disconnected or installed new. 1. Remove the bleeder screw cap and place a box end wrench on the brake caliper bleeder screw. Attach a rubber drain hose to the brake caliper bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid. 2. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal at least 2 times and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 3. Loosen the brake caliper bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the bleeder screw. ^ Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out. ^ Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary. 4. Tighten the bleeder screw and install the bleeder screw cap. ^ Tighten to 16 Nm (12 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 4121 Wheel Cylinder NOTE: It is not necessary to do a complete brake system bleed if only the wheel cylinder was disconnected or installed new. 1. Remove the bleeder screw cap and place a box end wrench on the wheel cylinder bleeder screw. Attach a rubber drain hose to the disc brake caliper bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid. 2. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal at least 2 times and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 3. Loosen the wheel cylinder bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the bleeder screw. ^ Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out. ^ Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary. 4. Tighten the bleeder screw and install the bleeder screw cap. ^ Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-inch). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 4122 Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair Brake System Bleeding Brake System Bleeding Special Tool(s) Material Material Manual Bleeding Method WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with clean, specified brake fluid. Never reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system. Damage to the brake system components may occur. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or replacement, air can enter the system and cause spongy brake pedal action. This requires bleeding of the hydraulic system after the repair is finished or after the new component is installed. The hydraulic system can be bled manually or with pressure bleeding equipment. 1. Clean all dirt from and remove the brake master cylinder filler cap and fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid. 2. Remove the bleeder screw cap and place a box end wrench on the RH rear bleeder screw. Attach a rubber drain hose to the RH rear bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid. 3. Have an assistant pump the brake pedal at least 3 times and then hold firm pressure on the brake pedal. 4. Loosen the RH rear bleeder screw until a stream of brake fluid comes out. While the assistant maintains pressure on the brake pedal, tighten the RH rear bleeder screw. ^ Repeat until clear, bubble-free fluid comes out. ^ Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary. 5. Tighten the RH rear bleeder screw and install the bleeder screw cap. ^ Tighten to 16 Nm (12 lb-ft). 6. Repeat Steps 2 through 5 for the LH rear, RH front and LH front bleeder screws in this order. ^ Refill the brake master cylinder reservoir as necessary. Pressure Bleeding Method WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 4123 has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with clean, specified brake fluid. Never reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system. Damage to the brake system components may occur CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or replacement, air can enter the system and cause spongy brake pedal action. This requires bleeding of the hydraulic system after the repair is finished or after the new component is installed. The hydraulic system can be bled manually or with pressure bleeding equipment. 1. Clean all dirt from and remove the brake master cylinder filler cap and fill the brake master cylinder reservoir with clean, specified brake fluid. 2. NOTE: Master cylinder pressure bleeder adapter tools are available from various manufacturers of pressure bleeding equipment. Follow the instructions of the equipment manufacturer when installing the adapter. Install the bleeder adapter to the brake master cylinder reservoir and attach the bleeder tank hose to the fitting on the adapter. 3. NOTE: Bleed the longest line first. Make sure the bleeder tank contains enough clean, specified brake fluid to complete the bleeding operation. Remove the bleeder screw cap and place a box end wrench on the RH rear bleeder screw. Attach a rubber drain hose to the RH rear bleeder screw and submerge the free end of the hose in a container partially filled with clean, specified brake fluid. 4. Open the valve on the bleeder tank. 5. Loosen the RH rear bleeder screw. Leave open until clear, bubble-free brake fluid flows, then tighten the RH rear bleeder screw and remove the rubber hose and install the bleeder screw cap. ^ Tighten to 16 Nm (12 lb-ft). 6. Continue bleeding the system, going in order from the LH rear bleeder screw to the RH front disc brake caliper bleeder screw ending with the LH front disc brake caliper bleeder screw. 7. Close the bleeder tank valve. Remove the tank hose from the adapter and remove the adapter from the brake fluid reservoir. Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Bleeding WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake master cylinder reservoir to run dry during the bleeding operation. Keep the brake master cylinder reservoir filled with clean, specified brake fluid. Never reuse the brake fluid that has been drained from the hydraulic system. Damage to the brake system components may occur CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. NOTE: When any part of the hydraulic system has been disconnected for repair or replacement, air can enter the system and cause spongy brake pedal action. This requires bleeding of the hydraulic system after the repair is finished or after the new component is installed. The hydraulic system can be bled manually or with pressure bleeding equipment. NOTE: Bleeding the hydraulic control unit (HCU) is required only when removing or installing the HCU, master cylinder, or opening the tubes and hoses to the HCU. 1. NOTE: Carrying out the System Bleed function drives trapped air from the HCU. Subsequent bleeding removes the air from the brake hydraulic system through the bleeder screws. NOTE: Adequate battery voltage is required during the anti-lock control portion of the system bleed. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Bleeding > System Information > Service and Repair > Component Bleeding > Page 4124 Connect the scan tool. 2. Access the SYSTEM BLEED FUNCTION and follow the directions on the scan tool. 3. Manually bleed the brake hydraulic system. 4. Repeat the procedure carrying out a total of 2 scan tool cycles and 2 manual bleed cycles. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation, Front Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Caliper Removal and Installation, Front Brake Caliper Material Material Removal and Installation Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation, Front > Page 4129 Disc Brake System - Exploded View WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. 1. Remove the wheel and tire. 2. CAUTION: If the brake pad anti-rattle spring is to be removed, do not force the spring off the brake caliper or damage to the spring can occur. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation, Front > Page 4130 CAUTION: Do not use any tools to remove the spring, use hand force only. Do not use excessive force or damage to the spring can occur. NOTE: The LH side brake pad anti-rattle spring must be installed with the 2-tabbed end in the upper brake caliper cavity. For the LH brake caliper, release the lower portion of the brake pad anti-rattle spring. ^ Apply force to the center of the spring and pull outward at the bottom of the spring to remove it from the lower brake caliper cavity. 3. Rotate the spring upward and remove it from the brake caliper. 4. NOTE: The RH side brake pad anti-rattle spring must be installed with the 2-tabbed end in the lower brake caliper cavity. For the RH brake caliper, release the upper portion of the brake pad anti-rattle spring. ^ Apply force to the center of the spring and pull outward at the top of the spring to remove it from the upper brake caliper cavity. 5. Rotate the spring downward and remove it from the brake caliper. 6. Loosen the brake flexible hose at the brake caliper. 7. CAUTION: Do not allow the caliper to hang from the brake hose or damage to the hose can occur. Remove the 2 guide pin bushing caps and the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts, position the caliper aside. ^ Support the caliper using mechanic's wire. 8. Remove the brake flexible hose and remove the brake caliper. 9. Remove the 2 brake pads from the caliper. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation, Front > Page 4131 Installation 1. Install the brake pads onto the caliper and position the brake caliper onto the anchor plate. 2. Install the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts and the 2 bushing caps. ^ Tighten the bolts to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft). 3. NOTE: If present, the 2-tabbed end of the brake pad anti-rattle spring must be installed first. Install the brake pad anti-rattle spring using the following procedure: 1. Insert the tab of the spring into the brake caliper cavity. 2. Twist the tab into the cavity (LH side in the upper brake caliper cavity, RH side in the lower brake caliper cavity). 4. Rotate the brake pad anti-rattle spring and position the upper portion onto the anchor plate. 5. Position the lower portion of the brake pad anti-rattle spring onto the anchor plate. 6. Push down and inward until the upper and lower ends of the anchor housing spring are latched and seated in the brake caliper cavities. 7. NOTE: The latch MUST be positioned as shown. Verify that the brake pad anti-rattle spring is correctly latched by pulling on the spring. 8. NOTE: Make sure that the brake flexible hose is not twisted. Install the brake flexible hose to the brake caliper. ^ Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft). 9. Install the wheel and tire. 10. Bleed the brake system. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation, Front > Page 4132 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Caliper Removal and Installation, Rear Brake Caliper Material Removal and Installation Disc Brake System - Exploded View Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation, Front > Page 4133 WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. CAUTION: Do not allow brake fluid to overflow from the master cylinder reservoir. Brake fluid may damage the high-voltage components. NOTE: The rear brake pads will wear at approximately twice the rate of the front brake pads. 1. Remove the wheel and tire. 2. NOTE: The following steps must be followed to prevent the accumulator from charging and pressurizing the brake system. Disconnect the battery. ^ Remove the battery junction box (BJB) fuses 24 (50A) and 31 (50A). 3. Remove the brake flexible hose flow bolt and discard the 2 copper washers. ^ To install, tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft). 4. Remove the 2 brake caliper guide bolts. ^ To install, tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft). 5. Remove the brake caliper. 6. Remove the brake pads from the caliper. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Bleed the brake system. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation, Front > Page 4134 Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Brake Caliper Anchor Plate, Front Brake Caliper Anchor Plate Removal and Installation Disc Brake System - Exploded View 1. Remove the wheel and tire. 2. CAUTION: Do not allow the caliper to hang from the brake hose or damage to the hose can occur. Remove the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts and position the caliper aside. ^ Support the caliper using mechanic's wire. 3. Remove the 2 brake caliper anchor plate bolts. ^ To install, tighten to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Caliper > Component Information > Service and Repair > Caliper Removal and Installation, Front > Page 4135 4. Remove the brake caliper anchor plate. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid > Component Information > Specifications Brake Fluid: Specifications BRAKE FLUID Motorcraft High Performance DOT 3 Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid Ford P/N .............................................................................................................................................. .................................................................. PM-1-C Ford Specification ............................................... ..................................................................................................................................... WSS-M6C62-A Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4142 C124 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Flexible Hose Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Brake Flexible Hose Brake Flexible Hose Material Material Removal and Installation Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Flexible Hose > Page 4147 Disc Brake System - Exploded View Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Flexible Hose > Page 4148 Disc Brake System - Exploded View WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. 1. Disconnect the brake flexible hose fitting from the wheel cylinder. ^ To install, tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). 2. Remove the brake flexible hose bracket bolt. ^ To install, tighten to 17 Nm (13 lb-ft). 3. Disconnect the brake tube fitting from the brake flexible hose. ^ To install, tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Flexible Hose > Page 4149 4. Remove the flexible hose clip and the brake hose. ^ To install, tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Bleed the brake system. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Flexible Hose > Page 4150 Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Front Brake Flexible Hose Material Removal and Installation Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Flexible Hose > Page 4151 Disc Brake System - Exploded View WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. Hybrid vehicles 1. NOTE: The following steps must be followed to prevent the accumulator from charging and pressurizing the brake system. Disconnect the battery. 2. Remove the battery junction box (BJB) fuses 24 (50A) and 31 (50A). All vehicles 3. Remove the wheel and tire. 4. Remove and discard the brake flexible hose retaining clip. 5. Disconnect the brake tube fitting from the brake flexible hose. ^ To install, tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). 6. Detach the brake flexible hose from the strut bracket. 7. Disconnect the brake flexible hose from the caliper. ^ To install, tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft). 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Bleed the brake caliper. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Flexible Hose > Page 4152 Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Rear Brake Flexible Hose Material Removal and Installation Disc Brake System - Exploded View Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Hose/Line > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Flexible Hose > Page 4153 WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. 1. Remove the wheel and tire. 2. Remove the brake caliper flow bolt and discard the 2 copper washers. ^ To install, tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft). 3. Remove and discard the brake flexible hose retaining clip. 4. Disconnect the brake tube fitting from the brake flexible hose. ^ To install, tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). 5. Remove the bracket bolt and the brake flexible hose. ^ To install, tighten to 17 Nm (13 lb-ft). 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Bleed the brake caliper. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair Hydraulic Control Unit (HCU) Material Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4157 CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. The anti-lock brake system (ABS) module can be damaged if exposed to these charges. NOTE: When installing a new ABS module/hydraulic control unit (HCU) assembly, it must be configured (either by download/upload or uploading the as-built data method). NOTE: On vehicles equipped with roll stability control (RSC), the ABS module is available separately from the HCU and should be serviced separately. However, if the RSC equipped vehicle requires a new HCU, then the ABS module and the HCU must be installed as an assembly. Make sure to use the most recently released service parts. All vehicles 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the air cleaner and the air cleaner outlet pipe. 3. Disconnect the master cylinder brake tube fittings from the hydraulic control unit (HCU). ^ To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). Vehicles with 3.0L engine 4. Disconnect the master cylinder brake tube fittings from the master cylinder and remove the brake tubes. ^ To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). All vehicles 5. NOTE: The brake tubes must be installed in the same location as removed. Disconnect the front brake tube fittings from the HCU. ^ To install, tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). 6. Disconnect the rear brake tube fittings from the jumper tubes. ^ To install, tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). 7. Disconnect the electrical connector by rotating the protective cover. 8. Remove the 3 HCU bracket-to-frame bolts and remove the HCU. ^ To install, tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft). 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Bleed the brake system. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Master Cylinder - Bypass Condition Brake Master Cylinder: Testing and Inspection Brake Master Cylinder - Bypass Condition Brake Master Cylinder - Bypass Condition 1. Disconnect the brake tubes from the master cylinder. 2. Plug the outlet ports of the master cylinder. 3. Apply the brakes. If brake pedal height cannot be maintained, the brake master cylinder has an internal leak and a new brake master cylinder must be installed. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Brake Master Cylinder - Bypass Condition > Page 4162 Brake Master Cylinder: Testing and Inspection Brake Master Cylinder - Compensator Port Brake Master Cylinder - Compensator Port The purpose of the compensator ports in the brake master cylinder is to: ^ supply additional brake fluid from the brake master cylinder reservoir needed by the brake system due to brake lining wear. ^ allow brake fluid to return to the brake master cylinder reservoir when the brakes are released. The returning brake fluid creates a slight turbulence in the brake master cylinder reservoir. This is a normal condition and indicates that the compensator ports are not clogged. Clogged compensator ports may cause the brakes to hang up or not fully release. If clogged compensator ports are suspected, proceed as follows: 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. With the brakes released, attempt to rotate each wheel and check for any brake drag. ^ If an excessive amount of brake drag exists at all 4 wheels, continue with the test. ^ If an excessive amount of brake drag exists at only 1 wheel, it indicates a possible seized brake caliper, brake wheel cylinder or parking brake component. Repair or install new components as necessary. 3. Check the brake stoplamp switch, speed control deactivator switch and the brake pedal free play to verify that the brake pedal is not partially applied. 4. NOTE: If the booster vacuum is not depleted, the seal between the booster and the master cylinder can be drawn into the booster when the 2 components are separated. Press the brake pedal several times to deplete the vacuum in the booster. 5. Loosen the brake master cylinder nuts and position the brake master cylinder away from the brake booster. 6. With the brakes released, attempt to rotate each wheel and check for any brake drag. ^ If the brake drag is no longer present, install a new brake booster. ^ If the brake drag is still present, install a new master cylinder. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder Brake Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Brake Master Cylinder Brake Master Cylinder Material Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder > Page 4165 1. Disconnect the brake fluid level warning switch electrical connector. 2. Using a suitable suction device, remove the brake fluid from the brake master cylinder reservoir. 3. If equipped with a manual transmission, disconnect the clutch master cylinder feed. ^ Plug the clutch master cylinder feed hose. 4. If installing a new brake master cylinder, remove the brake fluid reservoir. 5. Disconnect the 2 brake tube fittings and plug the brake tubes and the brake master cylinder ports. ^ To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). 6. NOTE: Install new brake master cylinder nuts. Remove and discard the 2 brake master cylinder nuts. ^ To install, tighten to 30 Nm (22 lb-ft). 7. Remove the brake master cylinder assembly. 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Bleed the master cylinder. ^ If equipped with a manual transmission, bleed the clutch master cylinder. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder > Page 4166 Brake Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Brake Fluid Reservoir Brake Fluid Reservoir Material Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Brake Master Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Brake Master Cylinder > Page 4167 1. Remove the reservoir cap. 2. Disconnect the brake fluid level warning switch electrical connector. 3. Using a suitable suction device, remove the brake fluid from the brake master cylinder reservoir. 4. If equipped with a manual transmission, disconnect the clutch master cylinder feed hose. ^ Plug the clutch master cylinder feed hose. 5. Remove the reservoir. ^ Release the retaining clips on the underside of the reservoir. ^ Pull the reservoir upwards. 6. Remove and discard the 2 seals. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Install new seals. Lubricate the seals with clean, specified brake fluid. ^ Bleed the brake system. ^ If equipped with a manual transmission, bleed the clutch master cylinder. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-20-11 > Oct > 08 > Brakes - Rear Brake Rotational Chirp Noise Wheel Cylinder: Customer Interest Brakes - Rear Brake Rotational Chirp Noise TSB 08-20-11 10/13/08 REAR BRAKE NOISE - ROTATIONAL CHIRP - (EXCLUDES HYBRID) FORD: 2008 Escape MERCURY: 2008 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 08-11-2 to update the Service procedure. ISSUE Some 2008 Escape and Mariner (Excludes Hybrid) vehicles may exhibit a noise from the rear brakes while coming to a stop. This condition does not affect brake performance. The noise is typically described as a cyclic, scraping, or rotational chirp noise. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE To better determine if this procedure is applicable, be advised of the following characteristics: ^ The noise this procedure addresses is unlike a typical brake squeak. ^ It is often described as a groan noise or scraping noise which is cyclic and follows wheel speed. ^ Vehicles will usually exhibit the noise at speeds under 20 MPH (32 Km/h). ^ This noise will only be present when the brakes are very warm or hot such as experienced in stop and go traffic. Vehicles built prior to 6/15/2007 follow both procedures A and B. Vehicles built after 6/15/2007 perform only procedure B. NOTE PERFORMING PROCEDURE B IS THE MOST CRITICAL PART OF THIS REPAIR. ADDING LUBRICANT TO THE WHEEL CYLINDER PISTONS WILL REDUCE FRICTION BETWEEN THE WHEEL CYLINDER PISTON AND ALUMINUM WHEEL CYLINDER WALL ELIMINATING NOISE SOURCE. PROCEDURE A 1. Replace the rear brake shoes. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 206-02. 2. Apply Motorcraft® Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound to the contact points between the shoe and the rear backing plate. Ensure grease will not contact brake lining surface. PROCEDURE B Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-20-11 > Oct > 08 > Brakes - Rear Brake Rotational Chirp Noise > Page 4176 1. Remove the rear brake shoe return springs brake shoes, and wheel cylinder dust boots. Using your hands, push one piston into the wheel cylinder until the opposite side piston is exposed. Be sure the wheel cylinder piston is extending out beyond the end of the wheel cylinder sufficient to allow complete coverage of the piston surface and piston seal. It is possible and recommended to have the piston cup seal slightly exposed when performing this operation (Figure 1). 2. Apply Motorcraft(R) Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound around the wheel cylinder pistons and then repeat procedure for opposite side wheel cylinder pistons. Be sure to pack the grease into the wheel cylinder bore to ensure grease gets back to the piston seal. (Figure 2) 3. Once both wheel cylinder pistons have been lubricated, shuttle the pistons side to side three (3) or more times to distribute the lubricant and ensure smooth movement. (Figure 3) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-20-11 > Oct > 08 > Brakes - Rear Brake Rotational Chirp Noise > Page 4177 Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 082011A 2008 Escape/Mariner: 1.0 Hrs. Remove The Rear Brake Shoes, Apply Motorcraft Silicone Brake Caliper Grease Following Service Procedure, Replace The Rear Brake Shoes If Necessary (Do Not Use With 2001BB, 2001B1B) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 2200 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 08-20-11 > Oct > 08 > Brakes - Rear Brake Rotational Chirp Noise Wheel Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Rear Brake Rotational Chirp Noise TSB 08-20-11 10/13/08 REAR BRAKE NOISE - ROTATIONAL CHIRP - (EXCLUDES HYBRID) FORD: 2008 Escape MERCURY: 2008 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 08-11-2 to update the Service procedure. ISSUE Some 2008 Escape and Mariner (Excludes Hybrid) vehicles may exhibit a noise from the rear brakes while coming to a stop. This condition does not affect brake performance. The noise is typically described as a cyclic, scraping, or rotational chirp noise. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE To better determine if this procedure is applicable, be advised of the following characteristics: ^ The noise this procedure addresses is unlike a typical brake squeak. ^ It is often described as a groan noise or scraping noise which is cyclic and follows wheel speed. ^ Vehicles will usually exhibit the noise at speeds under 20 MPH (32 Km/h). ^ This noise will only be present when the brakes are very warm or hot such as experienced in stop and go traffic. Vehicles built prior to 6/15/2007 follow both procedures A and B. Vehicles built after 6/15/2007 perform only procedure B. NOTE PERFORMING PROCEDURE B IS THE MOST CRITICAL PART OF THIS REPAIR. ADDING LUBRICANT TO THE WHEEL CYLINDER PISTONS WILL REDUCE FRICTION BETWEEN THE WHEEL CYLINDER PISTON AND ALUMINUM WHEEL CYLINDER WALL ELIMINATING NOISE SOURCE. PROCEDURE A 1. Replace the rear brake shoes. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 206-02. 2. Apply Motorcraft® Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound to the contact points between the shoe and the rear backing plate. Ensure grease will not contact brake lining surface. PROCEDURE B Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 08-20-11 > Oct > 08 > Brakes - Rear Brake Rotational Chirp Noise > Page 4183 1. Remove the rear brake shoe return springs brake shoes, and wheel cylinder dust boots. Using your hands, push one piston into the wheel cylinder until the opposite side piston is exposed. Be sure the wheel cylinder piston is extending out beyond the end of the wheel cylinder sufficient to allow complete coverage of the piston surface and piston seal. It is possible and recommended to have the piston cup seal slightly exposed when performing this operation (Figure 1). 2. Apply Motorcraft(R) Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound around the wheel cylinder pistons and then repeat procedure for opposite side wheel cylinder pistons. Be sure to pack the grease into the wheel cylinder bore to ensure grease gets back to the piston seal. (Figure 2) 3. Once both wheel cylinder pistons have been lubricated, shuttle the pistons side to side three (3) or more times to distribute the lubricant and ensure smooth movement. (Figure 3) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 08-20-11 > Oct > 08 > Brakes - Rear Brake Rotational Chirp Noise > Page 4184 Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 082011A 2008 Escape/Mariner: 1.0 Hrs. Remove The Rear Brake Shoes, Apply Motorcraft Silicone Brake Caliper Grease Following Service Procedure, Replace The Rear Brake Shoes If Necessary (Do Not Use With 2001BB, 2001B1B) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 2200 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheel Cylinder: > 09-21-2 > Nov > 09 > Engine FEAD Belt Whining/Bearing Type Noise Drive Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - FEAD Belt Whining/Bearing Type Noise TSB 09-21-2 11/02/09 3.0L FRONT END ACCESSORY DRIVE RIGHT HAND IDLER PULLEY BEARING NOISE FORD: 2008 Escape MERCURY: 2008 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 09-14-6 to update the Service Procedure and Part List. ISSUE Some 2008 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with 3.0L engine may exhibit front end accessory drive (FEAD) whining/bearing type noise. The noise may be coming from the right hand (RH) FEAD idler pulley that is in front of the right bank cylinder head. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Using a stethoscope, place end on the bolt that holds the right hand idler pulley on. a. If the noise is coming from the bolt/pulley, then go to Step 2 and replace the idler pulley. b. If the noise is not coming from the bolt/pulley, follow Work Shop Manual (WSM), Section 303-05B to diagnose. 2. Remove bolt that holds the pulley and bearing assembly on to the bracket. Refer to WSM Section 303-05B. 3. Remove pulley. 4. Install new pulley and torque pulley bolt to 18 lb-ft (25 N.m). 5. Loosen the pulley and bracket assembly. Torque bolts to 18 lb-ft (25 N.m) following the torque sequence. (Figure 1) NOTE IF BOLTS ARE NOT TORQUED IN SEQUENCE AS ILLUSTRATED, THEN PREMATURE BEARING FAILURE MAY OCCUR. Parts Block Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheel Cylinder: > 09-21-2 > Nov > 09 > Engine FEAD Belt Whining/Bearing Type Noise > Page 4190 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092102A 2008 Escape, Mariner 0.6 Hr. 3.0L: Replace The Idler Pulley And Bracket Assembly Includes Time To Diagnose Concern (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19A216 69 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Wheel Cylinder: > 09-21-2 > Nov > 09 > Engine FEAD Belt Whining/Bearing Type Noise > Page 4196 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092102A 2008 Escape, Mariner 0.6 Hr. 3.0L: Replace The Idler Pulley And Bracket Assembly Includes Time To Diagnose Concern (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19A216 69 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement Wheel Cylinder: Removal and Replacement Wheel Cylinder Material Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. 1. Remove the brake shoes. 2. Disconnect the brake tube fitting. ^ To install, tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). 3. Remove the 2 wheel cylinder bolts and remove the wheel cylinder. ^ To install, tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Bleed the brake hydraulic system. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 4199 Wheel Cylinder: Overhaul Wheel Cylinder Material Disassembly and Assembly Disassembly and Assembly WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. 1. Remove the rear wheel cylinder. 2. Remove the bleeder screw cap. 3. Remove the bleeder screw. ^ To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-inch). 4. Remove the 2 dust boots. 5. Remove the 2 pistons. 6. Remove the 2 piston seals. ^ To install, lubricate the piston seals with clean brake fluid. 7. Remove the spring. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Hydraulic System, Brakes > Wheel Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 4200 8. NOTE: Inspect the wheel cylinder bore for excessive wear, corrosion or pitting. If any of these conditions exist, a new wheel cylinder must be installed. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Parking Brake Cable: Procedures Parking Brake Cable Tension Release 1. Remove the LH cowl side trim panel. 2. With the help of an assistant, release the parking brake cable tension by pulling down on the front cable at the cable union, until the parking brake control drum track rotates to its stop and a 4 mm (0.15 inch) x 100 mm (3.93 inch) retainer pin can be inserted. 3. NOTE: Before removing the brake control retaining pin, make sure all cable connections are secure and the cable tension is reloaded slowly. To reload the tension on the parking brake cable, follow the release procedure in reverse. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4206 Parking Brake Cable: Removal and Replacement Parking Brake Cable - Rear, LH Parking Brake Cable - Rear, LH NOTE: Rear disc shown, rear drum similar. Parking Brake Cable - Rear, LH Removal and Installation All vehicles Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4207 1. Release the parking brake cable tension. Rear disc brake vehicles 2. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. Rear drum brake vehicles 3. Remove the rear brake shoes. All vehicles 4. Disconnect the parking brake cable from the cable connector and the equalizer bracket by compressing the cable conduit locking tabs. 5. Detach the cable-to-fuel tank strap pin type retainer. 6. Remove the 2 parking brake cable bracket bolts. ^ To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). Rear drum brake vehicles 7. Compress the rear parking brake cable conduit locking tabs and pull the cable assembly through the brake backing plate. Rear disc brake vehicles 8. NOTE: During installation, make sure parking brake cable is seated correctly as shown. Release the rear parking brake cable end from the parking brake actuator lever and compress the cable conduit locking tabs. All vehicles 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Parking Brake Cable - Rear, RH Parking Brake Cable - Rear, RH NOTE: Rear disc shown, rear drum similar. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4208 Parking Brake Cable - Rear, RH Removal and Installation All vehicles 1. Release the parking brake cable tension. Rear disc brake vehicles 2. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. Rear drum brake vehicles 3. Remove the rear brake shoes. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4209 All vehicles 4. Disconnect the parking brake cable from the cable connector and the equalizer bracket by compressing the cable conduit locking tabs. 5. Remove the 2 parking brake cable bracket bolts. ^ To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). Rear drum brake vehicles 6. Compress the rear parking brake cable conduit locking tabs and pull the cable assembly through the brake backing plate. Rear disc brake vehicles 7. NOTE: During installation, make sure parking brake cable is seated correctly as shown. Release the rear parking brake cable end from the parking brake actuator lever and compress the cable conduit locking tabs. All vehicles 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Parking Brake Cable - Front Parking Brake Cable - Front Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4210 Parking Brake Cable - Front Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the parking brake control. 3. Remove the driver side front seat. 4. Remove the 3 front parking brake cable bracket bolts. ^ To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). 5. Disconnect the front parking brake cable from the RR parking brake cable connector by releasing the locking tab. 6. Disconnect the front parking brake cable conduit from the LR parking brake cable. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 4211 7. Release the front parking brake cable pass-through grommet from the vehicle underbody. 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Control > Component Information > Service and Repair Parking Brake Control: Service and Repair Parking Brake Control Removal and Installation 1. Remove the front driver side door scuff plate and kick panel. 2. Release the parking brake cable tension. 3. Remove the parking brake release handle bolt. ^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-inch). 4. Disconnect the parking brake warning indicator switch electrical connector and detach the harness pin-type retainer from the parking brake control Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Control > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4215 cover. 5. Remove the 2 parking brake control bolts. ^ To install, tighten to 27 Nm (20 lb-ft). 6. Remove the 2 parking brake control nuts. ^ To install, tighten to 27 Nm (20 lb-ft). 7. Remove the parking brake control. ^ Disconnect the front parking brake cable. 8. NOTE: Make sure that the cable is in the groove on the control wheel prior to final tightening of fasteners. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Shoe > Component Information > Adjustments Parking Brake Shoe: Adjustments Parking Brake Shoe Adjustment Special Tool(s) 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. NOTE: Make sure the parking brake is fully released. Using the release handle, release the parking brake control. 3. Remove the rear brake disc. 4. Using the special tool, measure the inside diameter of the drum portion of the rear brake disc and set the locking screw. ^ Record the measurement. 5. Place the special tool over the widest diameter of the parking brake shoes. 6. Adjust the parking brake shoe clearance to 0.50 mm (0.01 inch) less than the inside diameter of the drum portion of the rear brake disc. ^ Rotate the parking brake shoe adjuster to achieve the correct parking brake shoe-to-brake disc clearance. 7. Install the rear brake disc. 8. Test the parking brake for normal operation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Shoe > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 4219 Parking Brake Shoe: Service and Repair Parking Brake Shoes Material Removal and Installation 1. Remove the rear brake disc. 2. Remove the parking brake shoe upper return spring. 3. Remove the 2 parking brake shoe retaining pins. 4. Remove the 2 parking brake shoe retaining springs. 5. Remove the parking brake shoe lower return spring. 6. Remove the parking brake shoe adjuster. 7. Remove the parking brake shoes. 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Shoe > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 4220 ^ Using the specified lubricant, lubricate the parking brake shoe contact points before installation of the rear parking brake shoes. ^ Lubricate the adjust screw threads with anti-seize lubricant. ^ Adjust the parking brake shoes. ^ Check the parking brake for normal operation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-22 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4224 C2015 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake System > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4225 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the parking brake release handle bolt. ^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-inch). 2. Disconnect the warning indicator switch electrical connector. 3. Remove the bolt and warning indicator switch. ^ To install, tighten bolt to 10 Nm (89 lb-inch). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Specifications Vacuum Brake Booster: Specifications Torque Specifications Torque Specifications (Part 1) Torque Specifications (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4230 Vacuum Brake Booster: Description and Operation Brake Booster The power brake actuation system consists of the following components: ^ Brake booster assembly ^ Brake booster vacuum fitting Pedal pressure is amplified by the brake booster. The brake booster uses engine vacuum from the intake manifold. The low pressure in the intake manifold is applied to a rubber diaphragm on the vacuum side of the brake booster chamber, which then pulls the piston rod in when the brakes are applied to supply a power assist. The piston rod is connected to the brake pedal. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4231 Vacuum Brake Booster: Testing and Inspection Brake Booster 1. Disconnect the check valve from the brake booster. 2. Apply the parking brake, start the engine and place the transmission in NEUTRAL. 3. Verify that manifold vacuum is available at the check valve with the engine at idle speed and the transmission in NEUTRAL. ^ If manifold vacuum is available, stop the engine, connect the check valve and continue with Step 5. ^ If manifold vacuum is not available, continue with Step 4. 4. Disconnect the check valve from the vacuum hose and verify that manifold vacuum is available at the hose with the engine at idle speed and the transmission in NEUTRAL. ^ If manifold vacuum is available, stop the engine, install a new check valve and continue with Step 5. ^ If manifold vacuum is not available, stop the engine, connect the vacuum hose to the check valve and refer to Engine System to diagnose the no vacuum condition. 5. Apply the brake pedal several times to exhaust all vacuum from the system. 6. Apply the brake pedal and hold it in the applied position. Start the engine and verify that the brake pedal moves downward after the engine starts. ^ If the brake pedal moves, the brake booster is operating correctly ^ If the brake pedal does not move, install a new brake booster. 7. Operate the engine a minimum of 10 seconds at fast idle. Stop the engine, and let the vehicle stand for 10 minutes. Then apply the brake pedal with approximately 89 N (20 lb) of force. The brake pedal feel should be the same as that noted with the engine operating. If the brake pedal feels hard (no power assist), install a new brake booster check valve and retest. If the brake pedal feels spongy, bleed the hydraulic system to remove air. Refer to Brake System Bleeding. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4232 Vacuum Brake Booster: Service and Repair Brake Booster Brake Booster Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the vacuum hose/check valve assembly from the brake booster. 2. Remove and discard the 2 master cylinder nuts. ^ To install, tighten to 30 Nm (22 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4233 3. NOTE: It is not necessary to disconnect the brake tube fittings. Carefully position the brake master cylinder assembly forward. 4. CAUTION: Do not service the brake pedal or brake booster without first removing the stoplamp switch and speed control deactivator switch. These switches must be removed with the brake pedal in the at-rest position. Switch plungers must be compressed for the switch to rotate in the bracket. Attempting to remove the switch when the plunger is extended (during pedal apply) will result in damage to the switch. Remove the stoplamp switch. 5. If equipped, remove the speed control deactivator switch. 6. NOTE: The booster push rod clevis-locking pin is a one-time use only part. Anytime the booster push rod clevis-locking pin is removed, a new booster push rod clevis-locking pin should be used. NOTE: Remove the clevis-locking pin by squeezing the locking tabs and pulling outward on the opposite end. Remove and discard the booster push rod clevis-locking pin. 7. Remove the 4 nuts and the brake booster. ^ To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). 8. CAUTION: Do not press, pull or otherwise move the brake pedal while installing the stoplamp switch or the speed control deactivator switch. These switches must be installed with the booster push rod attached to the brake pedal and with the brake pedal in the at-rest position. Installing these switches with the brake pedal in any other position will result in incorrect adjustment and may damage the switches. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Power Brake Assist > Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve: Testing and Inspection Brake Booster Check Valve The function of the brake booster check valve is to allow manifold vacuum to enter the brake booster and prevent the escape of vacuum in case manifold vacuum is lost during sustained full throttle operation. 1. Disconnect the vacuum booster hose from the check valve. 2. Apply the parking brake, start the engine and place the transmission in NEUTRAL. 3. Verify that manifold vacuum is available at the check valve end of the vacuum hose with the engine at idle speed and the transmission in NEUTRAL. ^ If manifold vacuum is available, stop the engine, connect the vacuum hose to the check valve and continue this test. ^ If manifold vacuum is not available, stop the engine, connect the vacuum hose to the check valve and refer to Engine System to diagnose the no vacuum condition. 4. Connect the vacuum hose to the check valve and run the engine for at least 10 seconds. 5. Operate the brake pedal to check for power assist. ^ If power assist is present, continue with this test. ^ If power assist is not present, refer to Brake Booster Component Test. 6. NOTE: Do not remove the brake booster check valve from the brake booster in this step. Stop the engine and disconnect the vacuum booster hose from the brake booster check valve. 7. Apply the brake and verify that there is enough vacuum retained in the brake booster for at least one power-assisted brake application. ^ If there is enough vacuum for at least one power-assisted brake application, the check valve is functioning correctly. ^ If there is not enough vacuum for at least one power-assisted brake application, continue with this test. 8. Inspect the brake booster for any signs of damage that could cause a leak. ^ If any damage is found, install a new brake booster and repeat this test. ^ If no damage is found, install a new check valve. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations View 151-1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 4241 Electronic Brake Control Module: Diagrams C155 (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 4242 C155 (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 4243 Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Module Material Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Relays and Modules - Brakes and Traction Control > Electronic Brake Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 4244 Removal and Installation WARNING: Do not use any fluid other than clean brake fluid meeting manufacturer's specification. Additionally, do not use brake fluid that has been previously drained. Following these instructions will help prevent system contamination, brake component damage and the risk of serious personal injury. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. In the USA or Canada on Ford/Motorcraft products call: 1-800-959-3673. For additional information, consult the product Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) if available. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. CAUTION: Brake fluid is harmful to painted and plastic surfaces. If brake fluid is spilled onto a painted or plastic surface, immediately wash it with water. CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. The anti-lock brake system (ABS) module can be damaged if exposed to these charges. NOTE: Do not swap ABS modules between vehicles, the ABS module and the hydraulic control unit (HCU) are calibrated as an assembly. 1. Remove the HCU. 2. Remove the jumper tube assembly bracket nut. ^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-inch). 3. Disconnect the jumper tubes fittings from the HCU and remove the jumper tube assembly. ^ To install, tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). 4. Remove the 4 ABS module screws and the ABS module. ^ To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-inch). 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 6. Configure the ABS module. 7. NOTE: Vehicle must be on level ground and at a complete stand still during calibration. Calibrate the ABS module. Follow the instructions on the scan tool. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > ABS Sensor Block > Component Information > Locations View 151-22 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > ABS Sensor Block > Component Information > Locations > Page 4249 C3296 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > ABS Sensor Block > Component Information > Locations > Page 4250 ABS Sensor Block: Service and Repair Stability Control Sensor Cluster Stability Control Sensor Cluster Removal and Installation WARNING: Wear high-voltage insulated safety gloves and a face shield when working with high-voltage batteries or cables. The high-voltage insulated safety gloves should be of the appropriate safety and protection rating. Inspect the gloves before use and always wear them with the leather outer glove. Any hole in the rubber insulating glove is a potential entry point for high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death. 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the floor console. 3. NOTE: When installing the sensor cluster the electrical connector must face the passenger seat. Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. Remove the 2 sensor cluster bolts. ^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-inch). 5. Remove the stability control sensor cluster. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Brake Fluid Level Sensor/Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4254 C124 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Lateral Accelerometer > Component Information > Service and Repair Lateral Accelerometer: Service and Repair Stability Control Sensor Cluster Stability Control Sensor Cluster Removal and Installation WARNING: Wear high-voltage insulated safety gloves and a face shield when working with high-voltage batteries or cables. The high-voltage insulated safety gloves should be of the appropriate safety and protection rating. Inspect the gloves before use and always wear them with the leather outer glove. Any hole in the rubber insulating glove is a potential entry point for high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death. 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the floor console. 3. NOTE: When installing the sensor cluster the electrical connector must face the passenger seat. Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. Remove the 2 sensor cluster bolts. ^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-inch). 5. Remove the stability control sensor cluster. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-22 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4261 C2015 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4262 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the parking brake release handle bolt. ^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-inch). 2. Disconnect the warning indicator switch electrical connector. 3. Remove the bolt and warning indicator switch. ^ To install, tighten bolt to 10 Nm (89 lb-inch). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-13 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4266 C2114 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Traction Control Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4267 Traction Control Switch: Service and Repair Stability/Traction Control Switch Removal and Installation Removal and Installation 1. Remove the lower instrument cluster center finish panel. ^ Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. Depress the 4 tabs and remove the stability/traction control switch assembly. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Right Front View 151-2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Right Front > Page 4272 View 151-24 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Right Front > Page 4273 View 151-25 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Right Front > Page 4274 View 151-2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front C150 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 4277 C440 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 4278 C160 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Left Front > Page 4279 C426 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor - Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Front Wheel Speed Sensor - Front Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. NOTE: The electrical connector is located in the engine compartment. Disconnect the electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 4282 3. CAUTION: Care must be taken during the removal of the grommet to prevent damage. If the grommet is damaged, a new sensor may need to be installed, even though the sensor is functional in all other aspects. Remove the grommet from the body. ^ When removing the body grommet, rotate the grommet into a position which allows the use of a small screwdriver to release the tabs on the underside of the body grommet. These 2 tabs are located at right angles to the sensor wire. 4. Remove the front wheel speed sensor harness from the retainer. 5. Remove the front wheel speed sensor harness-to-body bolt. ^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-inch). 6. Remove the front wheel speed sensor harness-to-strut bracket bolt. ^ To install, tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). 7. Remove the front wheel speed sensor bolt from the wheel knuckle. ^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-inch). 8. NOTE: Clean off any foreign material that may have collected around the sensor before removal. Remove the front wheel speed sensor. 9. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 4283 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor - Rear Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. CAUTION: Care must be taken during the removal of the grommet to prevent damage. If the grommet is damaged, a new sensor may need to be installed, even though the sensor is functional in all other aspects. Remove the grommet from the body. ^ When removing the body grommet, rotate the grommet into a position which allows the use of a small screwdriver to release the tabs on the underside of the grommet. These 2 tabs are located at right angles to the sensor wire. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 4284 3. Disconnect the rear wheel speed sensor electrical connector. 4. Remove the rear wheel speed sensor harness from the harness retainer. 5. Remove the 3 rear wheel speed sensor harness bolts. ^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-inch). 6. NOTE: Clean off any debris that may have collected around the sensor before removal. Remove the rear wheel speed sensor bolt from the wheel knuckle. ^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-inch). 7. Remove the rear wheel speed sensor. 8. NOTE: Thoroughly clean the mounting surface. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 4285 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Front Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Front Removal and Installation 1. The front wheel speed sensor ring is integral to the front halfshaft and cannot be repaired separately. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Wheel Speed Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Speed Sensor - Front > Page 4286 Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Ring - Rear Removal and Installation Front wheel drive (FWD) vehicles 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the rear wheel hub nut. ^ To install, tighten to 290 Nm (214 lb-ft). 3. Remove the sensor ring from the wheel hub. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. All wheel drive (AWD) vehicles 5. The rear wheel speed sensor ring is integral to the rear axle halfshaft and cannot be repaired separately. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Brakes and Traction Control > Sensors and Switches - Brakes and Traction Control > Yaw Rate Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair Yaw Rate Sensor: Service and Repair Stability Control Sensor Cluster Stability Control Sensor Cluster Removal and Installation WARNING: Wear high-voltage insulated safety gloves and a face shield when working with high-voltage batteries or cables. The high-voltage insulated safety gloves should be of the appropriate safety and protection rating. Inspect the gloves before use and always wear them with the leather outer glove. Any hole in the rubber insulating glove is a potential entry point for high-voltage. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death. 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the floor console. 3. NOTE: When installing the sensor cluster the electrical connector must face the passenger seat. Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. Remove the 2 sensor cluster bolts. ^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-inch). 5. Remove the stability control sensor cluster. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch View 151-3 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 4296 View 151-3 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Clutch Cut Off Switch C2072 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 4299 C2070 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Customer Interest Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder TSB 09-19-15 10/05/09 IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift interlock is not affected. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern. a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove ignition key. b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction. c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction? (1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics (2) No - Proceed to step 2. 2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs. The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 4309 Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3511 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder TSB 09-19-15 10/05/09 IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift interlock is not affected. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern. a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove ignition key. b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction. c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction? (1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics (2) No - Proceed to step 2. 2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs. The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 4315 Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3511 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Lock Cylinder - Functional Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Ignition Lock Cylinder - Functional IGNITION LOCK CYLINDER - FUNCTIONAL Removal and Installation 1. Remove the passive anti-theft system (PATS) transceiver. 2. NOTE: The ignition lock cylinder must be in the RUN position. Using a suitable tool, press the release pin and remove the ignition lock cylinder. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Verify the ignition lock cylinder operation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Lock Cylinder - Functional > Page 4318 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Ignition Lock Cylinder - Non Functional IGNITION LOCK CYLINDER - NON FUNCTIONAL Removal and Installation 1. Remove the passive anti-theft system (PATS) transceiver. 2. Remove the ignition lock cylinder. - Use a 1/8-inch diameter drill bit to drill out the lock cylinder retaining pin. - Use a 3/8-inch diameter drill to drill down the middle of the ignition lock key slot until the ignition lock cylinder breaks loose. - Remove and discard the ignition lock cylinder and drill shavings from the steering column. 3. Remove the bearing retainer. 4. Remove the steering column lock housing bearing and steering column lock gear. 5. Thoroughly clean all drill shavings from the steering column and inspect it for damage. 6. Install a new ignition lock cylinder. - Verify the ignition lock cylinder operation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations Neutral Safety Switch: Locations View 151-10 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4322 View 151-11 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Sensors and Switches - Starting and Charging > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4323 C167 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Relays and Modules - Starting and Charging > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4328 Starter Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair Battery Cable: Service and Repair BATTERY CABLES Part 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Battery > Battery Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4333 Part 2 Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Remove the air cleaner assembly. 3. Remove the starter solenoid terminal cover. 4. Remove the starter motor positive cable nut. - To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft). 5. Remove the starter solenoid wire nut. - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 6. Position the starter motor terminals aside. 7. Remove the battery ground cable-to-transaxle bolt. - To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 8. Position the battery ground cable aside. 9. Disconnect the retainers fastening the battery cables to the battery tray. 10. Open the battery junction box (BJB) cover and remove the BJB terminal nut. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 11. Position the BJB terminal aside. 12. Disconnect the BJB electrical connector. 13. Remove the body ground terminal bolt from the left fenderwell. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 14. Release the battery cable locators and remove the battery cables from the vehicle. 15. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications Alternator: Electrical Specifications Item....................................................................................................................................................... ..............................................................Specification Battery Voltage................................................................................................................................................. ........................................................................12 volts Generator Rating..............................................................................................75/120 amp (max) @ 1,800-6,000 generator rpm, approximately 500-2,000 engine rpm Generator Load at 2,000 rpm................................................................................................................................ ....................................................................75 amps No Load at 2,000 rpm........................................ .......................................................................................................................between 13.2 and 15.5 volts Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 4339 Torque Specifications Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4340 Alternator: Diagrams C102A Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4341 C102B C1104A C1104B Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4342 Alternator: Application and ID Item....................................................................................................................................................... ..............................................................Specification Generator Rating..............................................................................................75/120 amp (max) @ 1,800-6,000 generator rpm, approximately 500-2,000 engine rpm Generator pulley ratio................... .............................................................................................................................................................. ....................2.70:1 Voltage regulator type........................................................................................... ...............................................................Electronic internal with generator Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4343 Alternator: Description and Operation GENERATOR The charging system consists of the following components: - Generator - Integral voltage regulator The generator maximum output provides 120 amps. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4344 Alternator: Service and Repair GENERATOR Removal and Installation 1. CAUTION: Do not allow any metal object to come in contact with the generator housing and internal diode cooling fins. A short circuit may result and burn out the diodes. Failure to follow this instruction may result in component damage. Disconnect the battery. 2. Remove the 6 lower splash shield bolts and the 2 pin-type retainers. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 3. NOTE: The LH lower splash shield must be removed before the RH lower splash shield. Remove the lower splash shields. 4. Rotate the front end accessory drive tensioner counterclockwise and position the accessory drive belt aside. 5. Disconnect the generator electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Charging System > Alternator > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4345 6. Position the generator B+ protective cover aside and remove the generator B+ terminal nut. - To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft). 7. Remove the 3 A/C compressor bolts. Use a tie-strap and position A/C compressor aside. - To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 8. Loosen the 2 generator nuts. - To install, tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft). 9. Remove the 2 lower generator studs. - To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 10. Remove the upper generator bolt and the generator. - To install, tighten to 47 Nm (35 lb-ft). 11. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Tighten the upper generator bolt with vehicle on the ground. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch View 151-3 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Locations > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 4351 View 151-3 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Clutch Cut Off Switch C2072 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Clutch Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Clutch Cut Off Switch > Page 4354 C2070 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Lock > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Lock: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder Ignition Lock: Customer Interest Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder TSB 09-19-15 10/05/09 IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift interlock is not affected. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern. a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove ignition key. b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction. c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction? (1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics (2) No - Proceed to step 2. 2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs. The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Lock > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Ignition Lock: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 4363 Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3511 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Lock > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Lock: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder Ignition Lock: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder TSB 09-19-15 10/05/09 IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift interlock is not affected. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern. a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove ignition key. b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction. c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction? (1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics (2) No - Proceed to step 2. 2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs. The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Lock > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Ignition Lock: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 4369 Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3511 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Customer Interest Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder TSB 09-19-15 10/05/09 IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift interlock is not affected. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern. a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove ignition key. b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction. c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction? (1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics (2) No - Proceed to step 2. 2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs. The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 4379 Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3511 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder TSB 09-19-15 10/05/09 IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift interlock is not affected. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern. a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove ignition key. b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction. c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction? (1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics (2) No - Proceed to step 2. 2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs. The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 4385 Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3511 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 10-5-1 > Mar > 10 > Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening Trunk / Liftgate Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening TSB 10-5-1 03/29/10 LIFTGATE OPENING UN-COMMANDED OR NOT OPENING WHEN COMMANDED WHEN PARKED - INTERMITTENT FORD: 2008-2009 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/31/2008 may exhibit the liftgate opening un-commanded, or not opening when commanded while vehicle is parked. This may be due to water intrusion into the switch connector causing corrosion at the liftgate rear switch. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics. 1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05. 2. Remove the four (4) liftgate trim bezel nuts and remove the bezel from the liftgate. 3. Closely inspect the liftgate release switch and harness connector pins for signs of water intrusion and/or corrosion. Is any evidence of water intrusion or corrosion present? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Refer to WSM, Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics. b. Yes - Replace the liftgate release switch per WSM, Section 501-14, and install new Pigtail Wiring Kit per Wiring Diagram, Section 5-1. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 10-5-1 > Mar > 10 > Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening > Page 4391 100S01A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Liftgate Release Switch And The Wiring Pigtail (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 13412 12 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: > 10-5-1 > Mar > 10 > Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening > Page 4397 100S01A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Liftgate Release Switch And The Wiring Pigtail (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 13412 12 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Lock Cylinder - Functional Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Ignition Lock Cylinder - Functional IGNITION LOCK CYLINDER - FUNCTIONAL Removal and Installation 1. Remove the passive anti-theft system (PATS) transceiver. 2. NOTE: The ignition lock cylinder must be in the RUN position. Using a suitable tool, press the release pin and remove the ignition lock cylinder. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Verify the ignition lock cylinder operation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Ignition Switch > Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair > Ignition Lock Cylinder - Functional > Page 4400 Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair Ignition Lock Cylinder - Non Functional IGNITION LOCK CYLINDER - NON FUNCTIONAL Removal and Installation 1. Remove the passive anti-theft system (PATS) transceiver. 2. Remove the ignition lock cylinder. - Use a 1/8-inch diameter drill bit to drill out the lock cylinder retaining pin. - Use a 3/8-inch diameter drill to drill down the middle of the ignition lock key slot until the ignition lock cylinder breaks loose. - Remove and discard the ignition lock cylinder and drill shavings from the steering column. 3. Remove the bearing retainer. 4. Remove the steering column lock housing bearing and steering column lock gear. 5. Thoroughly clean all drill shavings from the steering column and inspect it for damage. 6. Install a new ignition lock cylinder. - Verify the ignition lock cylinder operation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations Neutral Safety Switch: Locations View 151-10 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4404 View 151-11 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Neutral Safety Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 4405 C167 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Starter Motor: > 07-14-9 > Jul > 07 > Engine - Grinding Rattling Noises Starter Motor: Customer Interest Engine - Grinding Rattling Noises TSB 07-14-9 07/23/07 ENGINE NOISE - GRINDING/RATTLE MOST NOTICEABLE AT IDLE - VEHICLES BUILT FROM 4/27/2007-4/30/2007. FORD: 2008 Escape MERCURY: 2008 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine, may exhibit a grinding or rattling noise with the engine running, more noticeable at idle. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Check the vehicle build date: a. If the vehicle was built from 4/27/2007-4/30/2007, go to Step 2. b. If not, follow normal diagnostics using Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. 2. Remove the starter, Refer to WSM, Section 303-06. a. Inspect the starter drive for loose washers and/or the snap ring not seated in the shafi groove. Replace as necessary. 3. Install the starter, Refer to WSM, Section 303-06. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 071409A 2008 Escape/Mariner 3.0L 0.6 Hr. Engine: Replace Starter, Includes Time To Inspect Build Date And Starter Drive (Do Not Use With 11002A) Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Starter Motor: > 07-14-9 > Jul > 07 > Engine - Grinding Rattling Noises Starter Motor: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Grinding Rattling Noises TSB 07-14-9 07/23/07 ENGINE NOISE - GRINDING/RATTLE MOST NOTICEABLE AT IDLE - VEHICLES BUILT FROM 4/27/2007-4/30/2007. FORD: 2008 Escape MERCURY: 2008 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with a 3.0L engine, may exhibit a grinding or rattling noise with the engine running, more noticeable at idle. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Check the vehicle build date: a. If the vehicle was built from 4/27/2007-4/30/2007, go to Step 2. b. If not, follow normal diagnostics using Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. 2. Remove the starter, Refer to WSM, Section 303-06. a. Inspect the starter drive for loose washers and/or the snap ring not seated in the shafi groove. Replace as necessary. 3. Install the starter, Refer to WSM, Section 303-06. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 071409A 2008 Escape/Mariner 3.0L 0.6 Hr. Engine: Replace Starter, Includes Time To Inspect Build Date And Starter Drive (Do Not Use With 11002A) Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications Starter Motor: Electrical Specifications Item....................................................................................................................................................... ..............................................................Specification Normal engine cranking speed............................................................................................................. ................................................................200-250 rpm Starter motor maximum load current draw...... ..........................................................................................................................................................80 0 amps Starter circuit maximum voltage drop (engine at normal operating temperature).........................................................................................................0.5 volt Starter motor no load current draw................................................................................................................... ......................................................60-80 amps Starter motor normal load current draw...................... ........................................................................................................................................130-190 amps Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Specifications > Electrical Specifications > Page 4421 Torque Specifications Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4422 Starter Motor: Locations View 151-4 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4423 View 151-5 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4424 Starter Motor: Diagrams C197A C197B Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4425 Starter Motor: Service and Repair STARTER MOTOR Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Motor > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4426 Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the battery ground cable. 2. Remove the air cleaner. 3. Disconnect the transmission shift cable-to-manual lever. 4. Remove the 2 transmission cable bracket bolts and detach the wire harness retainer and position aside the transmission cable and bracket. - To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). 5. Remove the starter motor solenoid wire nut. - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 6. Remove the starter motor solenoid battery cable nut and position aside the cables. - To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft). 7. Remove the 2 bolts and the starter motor. - To install, tighten to 27 Nm (20 lb-ft). 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Starting System > Starter Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 4430 Starter Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Power Point, Console C380 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Power Point, Console > Page 4436 C2033 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4437 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair POWER POINT Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Removal NOTE: Power point cover may differ depending on location. 1. Open the power point cover. 2. Install the special tool in one of the power point socket slots. 3. Position the special tool so that it engages in the adjacent slot. 4. Using the special tool, pull the power point socket out of the retainer. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4438 5. Disconnect the electrical connector. Installation 1. Connect the electrical connector. 2. Slide the power point socket into the retainer. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Diagrams C174 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box Fuse: Locations Smart Junction Box Note: The fuse panel is located on the right-hand side of the center console, by the instrument panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuse cover. Press the tabs on the top and bottom of the fuse cover to remove. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 4446 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 4447 Fuse: Locations Battery Junction Box Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 4448 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box Fuse: Application and ID Smart Junction Box Note: The fuse panel is located on the right-hand side of the center console, by the instrument panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuse cover. Press the tabs on the top and bottom of the fuse cover to remove. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 4451 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 4452 Fuse: Application and ID Battery Junction Box Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 4453 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box Fuse Block: Locations Smart Junction Box Note: The fuse panel is located on the right-hand side of the center console, by the instrument panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuse cover. Press the tabs on the top and bottom of the fuse cover to remove. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 4458 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 4459 Fuse Block: Locations Battery Junction Box Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 4460 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuse Block: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4463 Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4 "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and relays are identified. Fuse and Relay Numbering and Naming. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Power Distribution Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4464 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information C904 Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4465 disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location Charts. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery set. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing lose clothing. Symbols Symbols (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4466 Symbols (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4467 Symbols (Part 3) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4468 Symbols (Part 4) Symbols (Part 5) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4469 Fuse Block: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4470 Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4471 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4472 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. 3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4473 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4474 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4475 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4476 Fuse Block: Connector Views C1035A C1035B Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4477 C1035C Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4478 C2280A Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4479 C2280B (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4480 C2280B (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4481 C2280C Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4482 C2280D Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4483 C2280E Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4484 C2280F Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4485 C2280G Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box Fuse Block: Application and ID Smart Junction Box Note: The fuse panel is located on the right-hand side of the center console, by the instrument panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuse cover. Press the tabs on the top and bottom of the fuse cover to remove. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 4488 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 4489 Fuse Block: Application and ID Battery Junction Box Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 4490 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Micro ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Mini ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C110 C110 (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4501 C110 (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4502 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C134 C134 (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4503 C134 (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4504 C139 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4505 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C210 C210 (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4506 C210 (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4507 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C110 (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4508 C110 (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4509 C134 (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4510 C134 (Part 2) C139 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4511 C210 (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4512 C210 (Part 2) C211 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4513 C212 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4514 C213 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4515 C214 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4516 C215 (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4517 C215 (Part 2) C237 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4518 C238 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4519 C248 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4520 C260 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4521 C311 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4522 C312 (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4523 C312 (Part 2) C313 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4524 C314 (Part 1) C314 (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4525 C315 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4526 C339 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4527 C340 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4528 C405 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4529 C408 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4530 C410 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4531 C421 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4532 C422 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4533 C922 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4534 C913 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair SMART JUNCTION BOX (SJB) Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Removal CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges, damage may result. NOTE: Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4538 - The smart junction box (SJB) is also known as the generic electronic module (GEM). - Prior to the replacement of the module, it is necessary to upload the module configuration information to the appropriate scan tool. This information must be downloaded into the new module after installation. - The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) functionality is integral to the SJB/GEM. - The steps included in the SJB/GEM removal and installation procedure are critical to restoring the vehicle security and tire pressure monitoring systems to normal operation. A new SJB/GEM is delivered in a manufacturing mode with 7 pre-set DTCs related to the TPMS. To clear the DTCs, successful configuration of the SJB/GEM must occur, followed by successful TPMS sensor training, and a successful self-test, including clearing of the DTCs. The DTCs are as follows: B106D (Tire Pressure Monitor System [TPMS] Initiators Not Configured) - B2477 (Module Configuration Failure) - B2868 (Left Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - B2869 (Right Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - B2870 (Right Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - B2871 (Left Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - C2780 (ECU in Manufacturer Sub-State) 1. NOTE: This step is necessary only if the SJB/GEM is being replaced. Upload the module configuration information from the SJB/GEM. 2. Remove the floor console SJB/GEM cover. 3. Remove the transmission selector lever bezel from the floor console finish panel. 4. Apply the parking brake. 5. Remove the parking brake lever boot from the floor console finish panel. 6. Remove the floor console finish panel. 7. Disconnect the 7 electrical connectors. 8. Remove the 2 bolts and the SJB/GEM. Installation 1. Install the SJB/GEM. - Install the 2 bolts. - Connect the 7 electrical connectors. 2. Install the floor console finish panel. 3. Install the parking brake lever boot into the floor console finish panel. 4. Release the parking brake. 5. Install the transmission selector lever bezel into the floor console finish panel. 6. NOTE: If the SJB/GEM was not replaced, this is the last step that is necessary. Install the floor console SJB/GEM cover. 7. NOTE: - When successful, this step provides the calibration necessary for the SJB/GEM operation and clears DTCs B2477 and B106D. The clearing of these DTCs indicates the calibration data has been successfully downloaded to the new SJB/GEM. - When successful, this step also programs the remote transmitter portion of the integrated keyhead transmitter (IKT) keys into the new SJB. In the event the IKTs (remote transmitter portion only) do not program to the new SJB, cycle each IKT key to the ON position for a minimum of 6 seconds. This action will program the remote transmitter portion of the IKT key into the new SJB. Download the SJB/GEM configuration information from the scan tool. 8. NOTE: When successful, this step clears DTCs B2868, B2869, B2870 and B2871. The clearing of these DTCs indicates the SJB/GEM has recognized the tire pressure sensors during the training procedure. Train the tire pressure sensors. 9. NOTE: DTC C2780 will not clear if any other DTCs are present in the SJB/GEM. When successful, this step will clear the DTC C2780. Carry out the SJB/GEM on-demand self-test by clearing DTCs, and then retrieving DTCs to confirm all DTCs have been cleared. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Micro ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Mini ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair SMART JUNCTION BOX (SJB) Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Removal CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges, damage may result. NOTE: Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4549 - The smart junction box (SJB) is also known as the generic electronic module (GEM). - Prior to the replacement of the module, it is necessary to upload the module configuration information to the appropriate scan tool. This information must be downloaded into the new module after installation. - The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) functionality is integral to the SJB/GEM. - The steps included in the SJB/GEM removal and installation procedure are critical to restoring the vehicle security and tire pressure monitoring systems to normal operation. A new SJB/GEM is delivered in a manufacturing mode with 7 pre-set DTCs related to the TPMS. To clear the DTCs, successful configuration of the SJB/GEM must occur, followed by successful TPMS sensor training, and a successful self-test, including clearing of the DTCs. The DTCs are as follows: B106D (Tire Pressure Monitor System [TPMS] Initiators Not Configured) - B2477 (Module Configuration Failure) - B2868 (Left Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - B2869 (Right Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - B2870 (Right Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - B2871 (Left Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - C2780 (ECU in Manufacturer Sub-State) 1. NOTE: This step is necessary only if the SJB/GEM is being replaced. Upload the module configuration information from the SJB/GEM. 2. Remove the floor console SJB/GEM cover. 3. Remove the transmission selector lever bezel from the floor console finish panel. 4. Apply the parking brake. 5. Remove the parking brake lever boot from the floor console finish panel. 6. Remove the floor console finish panel. 7. Disconnect the 7 electrical connectors. 8. Remove the 2 bolts and the SJB/GEM. Installation 1. Install the SJB/GEM. - Install the 2 bolts. - Connect the 7 electrical connectors. 2. Install the floor console finish panel. 3. Install the parking brake lever boot into the floor console finish panel. 4. Release the parking brake. 5. Install the transmission selector lever bezel into the floor console finish panel. 6. NOTE: If the SJB/GEM was not replaced, this is the last step that is necessary. Install the floor console SJB/GEM cover. 7. NOTE: - When successful, this step provides the calibration necessary for the SJB/GEM operation and clears DTCs B2477 and B106D. The clearing of these DTCs indicates the calibration data has been successfully downloaded to the new SJB/GEM. - When successful, this step also programs the remote transmitter portion of the integrated keyhead transmitter (IKT) keys into the new SJB. In the event the IKTs (remote transmitter portion only) do not program to the new SJB, cycle each IKT key to the ON position for a minimum of 6 seconds. This action will program the remote transmitter portion of the IKT key into the new SJB. Download the SJB/GEM configuration information from the scan tool. 8. NOTE: When successful, this step clears DTCs B2868, B2869, B2870 and B2871. The clearing of these DTCs indicates the SJB/GEM has recognized the tire pressure sensors during the training procedure. Train the tire pressure sensors. 9. NOTE: DTC C2780 will not clear if any other DTCs are present in the SJB/GEM. When successful, this step will clear the DTC C2780. Carry out the SJB/GEM on-demand self-test by clearing DTCs, and then retrieving DTCs to confirm all DTCs have been cleared. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box Relay Box: Locations Smart Junction Box Note: The fuse panel is located on the right-hand side of the center console, by the instrument panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuse cover. Press the tabs on the top and bottom of the fuse cover to remove. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 4554 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 4555 Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 4556 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box (BJB) C1035A C1035B Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4559 C1035C Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4560 Relay Box: Diagrams Smart Junction Box (SJB) C2280A Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4561 C2280B (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4562 C2280B (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4563 C2280C Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4564 C2280D Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4565 C2280E Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4566 C2280F Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4567 C2280G Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box Relay Box: Application and ID Smart Junction Box Note: The fuse panel is located on the right-hand side of the center console, by the instrument panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuse cover. Press the tabs on the top and bottom of the fuse cover to remove. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 4570 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 4571 Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 4572 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box Relay Box: Locations Smart Junction Box Note: The fuse panel is located on the right-hand side of the center console, by the instrument panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuse cover. Press the tabs on the top and bottom of the fuse cover to remove. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 4577 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 4578 Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 4579 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box (BJB) C1035A C1035B Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4582 C1035C Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4583 Relay Box: Diagrams Smart Junction Box (SJB) C2280A Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4584 C2280B (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4585 C2280B (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4586 C2280C Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4587 C2280D Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4588 C2280E Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4589 C2280F Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4590 C2280G Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box Relay Box: Application and ID Smart Junction Box Note: The fuse panel is located on the right-hand side of the center console, by the instrument panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuse cover. Press the tabs on the top and bottom of the fuse cover to remove. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 4593 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 4594 Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Starting and Charging > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 4595 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Power Point, Console C380 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Power Point, Console > Page 4601 C2033 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4602 Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair POWER POINT Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Removal NOTE: Power point cover may differ depending on location. 1. Open the power point cover. 2. Install the special tool in one of the power point socket slots. 3. Position the special tool so that it engages in the adjacent slot. 4. Using the special tool, pull the power point socket out of the retainer. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Auxiliary Power Outlet > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 4603 5. Disconnect the electrical connector. Installation 1. Connect the electrical connector. 2. Slide the power point socket into the retainer. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Electronic Noise Suppressor > Component Information > Diagrams C174 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box Fuse: Locations Smart Junction Box Note: The fuse panel is located on the right-hand side of the center console, by the instrument panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuse cover. Press the tabs on the top and bottom of the fuse cover to remove. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 4611 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 4612 Fuse: Locations Battery Junction Box Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 4613 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box Fuse: Application and ID Smart Junction Box Note: The fuse panel is located on the right-hand side of the center console, by the instrument panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuse cover. Press the tabs on the top and bottom of the fuse cover to remove. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 4616 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 4617 Fuse: Application and ID Battery Junction Box Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 4618 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box Fuse Block: Locations Smart Junction Box Note: The fuse panel is located on the right-hand side of the center console, by the instrument panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuse cover. Press the tabs on the top and bottom of the fuse cover to remove. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 4623 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 4624 Fuse Block: Locations Battery Junction Box Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 4625 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Fuse Block: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4628 Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4 "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and relays are identified. Fuse and Relay Numbering and Naming. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Power Distribution Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4629 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information C904 Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4630 disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location Charts. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery set. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing lose clothing. Symbols Symbols (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4631 Symbols (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4632 Symbols (Part 3) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4633 Symbols (Part 4) Symbols (Part 5) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4634 Fuse Block: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4635 Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4636 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4637 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. 3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4638 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4639 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4640 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4641 Fuse Block: Connector Views C1035A C1035B Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4642 C1035C Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4643 C2280A Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4644 C2280B (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4645 C2280B (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4646 C2280C Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4647 C2280D Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4648 C2280E Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4649 C2280F Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 4650 C2280G Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box Fuse Block: Application and ID Smart Junction Box Note: The fuse panel is located on the right-hand side of the center console, by the instrument panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuse cover. Press the tabs on the top and bottom of the fuse cover to remove. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 4653 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 4654 Fuse Block: Application and ID Battery Junction Box Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Fuse Block > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 4655 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Micro ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Mini ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C110 C110 (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4666 C110 (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4667 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C134 C134 (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4668 C134 (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4669 C139 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4670 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C210 C210 (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4671 C210 (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4672 Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams C110 (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4673 C110 (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4674 C134 (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4675 C134 (Part 2) C139 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4676 C210 (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4677 C210 (Part 2) C211 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4678 C212 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4679 C213 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4680 C214 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4681 C215 (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4682 C215 (Part 2) C237 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4683 C238 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4684 C248 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4685 C260 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4686 C311 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4687 C312 (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4688 C312 (Part 2) C313 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4689 C314 (Part 1) C314 (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4690 C315 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4691 C339 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4692 C340 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4693 C405 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4694 C408 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4695 C410 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4696 C421 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4697 C422 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4698 C922 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Multiple Junction Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > C110 > Page 4699 C913 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair SMART JUNCTION BOX (SJB) Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Removal CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges, damage may result. NOTE: Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4703 - The smart junction box (SJB) is also known as the generic electronic module (GEM). - Prior to the replacement of the module, it is necessary to upload the module configuration information to the appropriate scan tool. This information must be downloaded into the new module after installation. - The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) functionality is integral to the SJB/GEM. - The steps included in the SJB/GEM removal and installation procedure are critical to restoring the vehicle security and tire pressure monitoring systems to normal operation. A new SJB/GEM is delivered in a manufacturing mode with 7 pre-set DTCs related to the TPMS. To clear the DTCs, successful configuration of the SJB/GEM must occur, followed by successful TPMS sensor training, and a successful self-test, including clearing of the DTCs. The DTCs are as follows: B106D (Tire Pressure Monitor System [TPMS] Initiators Not Configured) - B2477 (Module Configuration Failure) - B2868 (Left Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - B2869 (Right Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - B2870 (Right Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - B2871 (Left Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - C2780 (ECU in Manufacturer Sub-State) 1. NOTE: This step is necessary only if the SJB/GEM is being replaced. Upload the module configuration information from the SJB/GEM. 2. Remove the floor console SJB/GEM cover. 3. Remove the transmission selector lever bezel from the floor console finish panel. 4. Apply the parking brake. 5. Remove the parking brake lever boot from the floor console finish panel. 6. Remove the floor console finish panel. 7. Disconnect the 7 electrical connectors. 8. Remove the 2 bolts and the SJB/GEM. Installation 1. Install the SJB/GEM. - Install the 2 bolts. - Connect the 7 electrical connectors. 2. Install the floor console finish panel. 3. Install the parking brake lever boot into the floor console finish panel. 4. Release the parking brake. 5. Install the transmission selector lever bezel into the floor console finish panel. 6. NOTE: If the SJB/GEM was not replaced, this is the last step that is necessary. Install the floor console SJB/GEM cover. 7. NOTE: - When successful, this step provides the calibration necessary for the SJB/GEM operation and clears DTCs B2477 and B106D. The clearing of these DTCs indicates the calibration data has been successfully downloaded to the new SJB/GEM. - When successful, this step also programs the remote transmitter portion of the integrated keyhead transmitter (IKT) keys into the new SJB. In the event the IKTs (remote transmitter portion only) do not program to the new SJB, cycle each IKT key to the ON position for a minimum of 6 seconds. This action will program the remote transmitter portion of the IKT key into the new SJB. Download the SJB/GEM configuration information from the scan tool. 8. NOTE: When successful, this step clears DTCs B2868, B2869, B2870 and B2871. The clearing of these DTCs indicates the SJB/GEM has recognized the tire pressure sensors during the training procedure. Train the tire pressure sensors. 9. NOTE: DTC C2780 will not clear if any other DTCs are present in the SJB/GEM. When successful, this step will clear the DTC C2780. Carry out the SJB/GEM on-demand self-test by clearing DTCs, and then retrieving DTCs to confirm all DTCs have been cleared. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Micro ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Micro ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Mini ISO Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Mini ISO Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair SMART JUNCTION BOX (SJB) Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Removal CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges, damage may result. NOTE: Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Power Distribution Module > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4714 - The smart junction box (SJB) is also known as the generic electronic module (GEM). - Prior to the replacement of the module, it is necessary to upload the module configuration information to the appropriate scan tool. This information must be downloaded into the new module after installation. - The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) functionality is integral to the SJB/GEM. - The steps included in the SJB/GEM removal and installation procedure are critical to restoring the vehicle security and tire pressure monitoring systems to normal operation. A new SJB/GEM is delivered in a manufacturing mode with 7 pre-set DTCs related to the TPMS. To clear the DTCs, successful configuration of the SJB/GEM must occur, followed by successful TPMS sensor training, and a successful self-test, including clearing of the DTCs. The DTCs are as follows: B106D (Tire Pressure Monitor System [TPMS] Initiators Not Configured) - B2477 (Module Configuration Failure) - B2868 (Left Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - B2869 (Right Front Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - B2870 (Right Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - B2871 (Left Rear Tire Pressure Sensor Fault) - C2780 (ECU in Manufacturer Sub-State) 1. NOTE: This step is necessary only if the SJB/GEM is being replaced. Upload the module configuration information from the SJB/GEM. 2. Remove the floor console SJB/GEM cover. 3. Remove the transmission selector lever bezel from the floor console finish panel. 4. Apply the parking brake. 5. Remove the parking brake lever boot from the floor console finish panel. 6. Remove the floor console finish panel. 7. Disconnect the 7 electrical connectors. 8. Remove the 2 bolts and the SJB/GEM. Installation 1. Install the SJB/GEM. - Install the 2 bolts. - Connect the 7 electrical connectors. 2. Install the floor console finish panel. 3. Install the parking brake lever boot into the floor console finish panel. 4. Release the parking brake. 5. Install the transmission selector lever bezel into the floor console finish panel. 6. NOTE: If the SJB/GEM was not replaced, this is the last step that is necessary. Install the floor console SJB/GEM cover. 7. NOTE: - When successful, this step provides the calibration necessary for the SJB/GEM operation and clears DTCs B2477 and B106D. The clearing of these DTCs indicates the calibration data has been successfully downloaded to the new SJB/GEM. - When successful, this step also programs the remote transmitter portion of the integrated keyhead transmitter (IKT) keys into the new SJB. In the event the IKTs (remote transmitter portion only) do not program to the new SJB, cycle each IKT key to the ON position for a minimum of 6 seconds. This action will program the remote transmitter portion of the IKT key into the new SJB. Download the SJB/GEM configuration information from the scan tool. 8. NOTE: When successful, this step clears DTCs B2868, B2869, B2870 and B2871. The clearing of these DTCs indicates the SJB/GEM has recognized the tire pressure sensors during the training procedure. Train the tire pressure sensors. 9. NOTE: DTC C2780 will not clear if any other DTCs are present in the SJB/GEM. When successful, this step will clear the DTC C2780. Carry out the SJB/GEM on-demand self-test by clearing DTCs, and then retrieving DTCs to confirm all DTCs have been cleared. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box Relay Box: Locations Smart Junction Box Note: The fuse panel is located on the right-hand side of the center console, by the instrument panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuse cover. Press the tabs on the top and bottom of the fuse cover to remove. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 4719 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 4720 Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 4721 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box (BJB) C1035A C1035B Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4724 C1035C Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4725 Relay Box: Diagrams Smart Junction Box (SJB) C2280A Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4726 C2280B (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4727 C2280B (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4728 C2280C Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4729 C2280D Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4730 C2280E Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4731 C2280F Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4732 C2280G Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box Relay Box: Application and ID Smart Junction Box Note: The fuse panel is located on the right-hand side of the center console, by the instrument panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuse cover. Press the tabs on the top and bottom of the fuse cover to remove. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 4735 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 4736 Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relays and Modules - Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 4737 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box Relay Box: Locations Smart Junction Box Note: The fuse panel is located on the right-hand side of the center console, by the instrument panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuse cover. Press the tabs on the top and bottom of the fuse cover to remove. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 4742 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 4743 Relay Box: Locations Battery Junction Box Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Locations > Smart Junction Box > Page 4744 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) Relay Box: Diagrams Battery Junction Box (BJB) C1035A C1035B Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4747 C1035C Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4748 Relay Box: Diagrams Smart Junction Box (SJB) C2280A Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4749 C2280B (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4750 C2280B (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4751 C2280C Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4752 C2280D Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4753 C2280E Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4754 C2280F Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Diagrams > Battery Junction Box (BJB) > Page 4755 C2280G Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box Relay Box: Application and ID Smart Junction Box Note: The fuse panel is located on the right-hand side of the center console, by the instrument panel. Remove the panel cover to access the fuse cover. Press the tabs on the top and bottom of the fuse cover to remove. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 4758 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 4759 Relay Box: Application and ID Battery Junction Box Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Power and Ground Distribution > Relay Box > Component Information > Application and ID > Smart Junction Box > Page 4760 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Alignment Specifications Alignment: Specifications Alignment Specifications Alignment Specifications Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Alignment Specifications > Page 4766 Alignment: Specifications General Specifications General Specifications General Specifications (Part 1) General Specifications (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Alignment Specifications > Page 4767 Alignment: Specifications Torque Specifications Torque Specifications Torque Specifications Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Page 4768 Alignment: Description and Operation Wheel Alignment Angles Camber Negative And Positive Camber Camber is the vertical tilt of the wheel when viewed from the front. Camber can be positive or negative and has a direct effect on tire wear. Caster Caster is the deviation from vertical of an imaginary line drawn through the pivot points (top of strut and lower ball joint), when viewed from the side. The caster specifications will give the vehicle the best directional stability characteristics when loaded and driven. The caster setting is not related to tire wear. The caster setting is not adjustable. A backward tilt is positive (+) and a forward tilt is negative (-). Front caster adjustment is not a separate procedure on this vehicle. Front caster should fall within specification when the front camber is adjusted. Toe Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Page 4769 Positive Toe (Toe In) Positive Toe (Toe Out) The vehicle toe setting: ^ affects tire wear and directional stability. Incorrect Thrust Angle (Dogtracking) Incorrect Thrust Angle (Dogtracking) Incorrect thrust angle (also known as dogtracking) is the condition in which the rear axle is not square to the chassis. Heavily crowned roads can give the illusion of dogtracking. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Specifications > Page 4770 Wander Wander is the tendency of the vehicle to require frequent, random left and right steering wheel corrections to maintain a straight path down a level road. Shimmy Shimmy, as experienced by the driver, is large, consistent, rotational oscillations of the steering wheel resulting from large, side-to-side (lateral) tire/wheel movements. Shimmy is usually experienced near 64 km/h (40 mph), and can begin or be amplified when the tire contacts pot holes or irregularities in the road surface. Nibble Sometimes confused with shimmy, nibble is a condition resulting from tire interaction with various road surfaces and experienced by the driver as small rotational oscillations of the steering wheel. Poor Returnability/Sticky Steering Poor returnability and sticky steering are used to describe the poor return of the steering wheel to center after a turn or steering correction. Drift/Pull Pull is a tugging sensation felt by the hands on the steering wheel that must be overcome to keep the vehicle going straight. Drift describes what a vehicle with this condition does with the hands off the steering wheel. ^ A vehicle-related drift/pull on a flat road causes a consistent deviation from the straight-ahead path and requires constant steering input in the opposite direction to counteract the effect. ^ Drift/pull may be induced by conditions external to the vehicle (wind or road crown). Poor Groove Feel Poor groove feel is characterized by little or no buildup of turning effort felt in the steering wheel as the wheel is rocked slowly left and right within very small turns around center or straight-ahead (under 20 degrees of steering wheel turn). Effort may be said to be "flat on-center." ^ Under 20 degrees of turn, most of the turning effort that builds up comes from the mesh of the gear teeth in the steering gear. In this range, the steering wheel is not yet turned enough to feel the effort from the self-aligning forces at the road wheel or tire patch. ^ In the diagnosis of a driveability problem, it is important to understand the difference between wander and poor groove feel. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment Alignment: Service and Repair Camber and Caster Adjustment Camber and Caster Adjustment Front Camber and Caster Adjustment 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the 4 front strut upper mounting bracket nuts. 3. Push the front strut mounting bracket downward and turn it to the desired position to set the camber and caster. Both camber and caster for the front suspension are adjustable. For additional information, refer to Steps 4 and 5. 4. NOTE: Notice the position of the strut rod in each position. Use the following table for LH side camber and or caster adjustment. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 4773 Difference From Standard Position (LH Side) 5. NOTE: Notice the position of the strut rod in each position. Use the following table for the RH side camber and or caster adjustment. Difference From Standard Position (RH Side) (Part 1) Difference From Standard Position (RH Side) (Part 2) 6. Install the 4 front strut upper mounting bracket nuts. ^ Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 4774 7. Recalibrate the steering wheel position sensor. For additional information, refer to Diagnosis and Testing for steering wheel position sensor calibration. See: Steering/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Steering Wheel Position Sensor Calibration Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 4775 Alignment: Service and Repair Front Toe Adjustment Front Toe Adjustment 1. Start the engine and center the steering wheel. 2. Turn the engine off. Hold the steering wheel in the straight-ahead position using a suitable holding device. 3. Check the toe settings following the equipment manufacturer's instructions. 4. NOTE: Do not allow the steering gear bellows to twist when the front wheel spindle tie rod is rotated. Remove the steering gear bellows clamp(s). 5. Loosen the tie-rod end jam nut(s). ^ Clean and lubricate the nut(s) and front wheel spindle tie-rod threads. 6. Rotate the front wheel spindle tie rods to increase or decrease the front toe. 7. CAUTION: Hold the tie-rod end stationary with a wrench while tightening the nut, or damage to the boot can occur. NOTE: Do not disturb the toe settings while tightening the nut(s). Tighten the tie-rod end jam nut(s) to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 4776 8. Install the steering gear bellows clamp(s). 9. Check the toe settings. Follow the equipment manufacturer's instructions. 10. Calibrate the steering wheel position sensor. For additional information, refer to Steering Wheel Position Sensor Calibration in Diagnosis and Testing. See: Steering/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Steering Wheel Position Sensor Calibration Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 4777 Alignment: Service and Repair Ride Height Measurement Ride Height Measurement Front Ride Height Measurement Front Ride Height Measurement NOTE: Make sure that the vehicle is positioned on a flat, level surface and the tires are inflated to the correct pressure. Vehicle should have a full tank of fuel. 1. Position a suitable surface gauge (such as Starrett 57D Surface Gauge), on a flat, level surface and adjust the gauge's arm until the scriber point is located in the center of the lower ball joint bolt. ^ Lock the surface gauge in this position. 2. With the surface gauge positioned on a flat, level surface, record the measurement of the surface gauge position (measurement A). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 4778 3. Position the surface gauge on the same flat, level surface as used in Step 1, adjust the gauge's arm until the scriber point is located in the center of the forward lower arm bolt. ^ Lock the surface gauge in this position. 4. With the surface gauge positioned on a flat, level surface, record the measurement of the surface gauge position (measurement B). 5. Subtract measurement A from measurement B to obtain the front ride height (C). ^ Refer to Specifications. Rear Ride Height Measurement Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 4779 Rear Ride Height Measurement NOTE: Make sure that the vehicle is positioned on a flat, level surface and the tires are inflated to the correct pressure. Vehicle should have a full tank of fuel. 1. Measure the distance between the flat level surface and the center of the shock absorber lower bolt (measurement A). 2. Measure the distance between the flat level surface and the center of the lower arm inner bolt (measurement B). 3. Subtract measurement B from measurement A to obtain the rear ride height (C). ^ Refer to Specifications. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 4780 Alignment: Service and Repair Rear Toe Adjustment Rear Toe Adjustment 1. CAUTION: The cam nut and cam bolt area must be free of foreign material to make sure of correct clamping. NOTE: Clean the general area of the joint to prevent foreign material from entering the joint. Clean the area using only mild liquids. NOTE: Jounce the vehicle to make sure that the suspension is in its normal, at-rest position. Check the toe setting using suitable wheel alignment equipment. 2. NOTE: Do not remove the rear knuckle cam nut and wheel knuckle bolts. If removed, clean the serrations in the bushing sleeve with a wire brush and install a new wheel knuckle bolt and cam nut. Loosen the LH and RH rear wheel knuckle bolts. 3. Turn the LH and RH adjusting cams simultaneously until the toe is within specification. 4. Tighten the LH and RH rear wheel knuckle bolts. ^ Using a suitable tool, hold the adjustment cam nut stationary while tightening the rear wheel knuckle bolt. ^ Tighten to 150 Nm (111 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Alignment > System Information > Service and Repair > Camber and Caster Adjustment > Page 4781 5. Calibrate the steering wheel position sensor. For additional information, refer to Steering Wheel Position Sensor Calibration in Diagnosis and Testing. See: Steering/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Steering Wheel Position Sensor Calibration Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations Steering Control Module: Locations View 151-1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 4787 View 151-13 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 4788 Steering Control Module: Diagrams C1463A Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering and Suspension > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 4789 C1463B Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor The PSP sensor monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP sensor voltage input to the PCM changes as the hydraulic pressure changes. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the PCM to adjust the transmission electronic pressure control (EPC) pressure during increased engine load, for example, during parking maneuvers. Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The PSP switch monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP switch is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic pressure increases. The PCM provides a low current voltage on the PSP circuit. When the PSP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low through the SIG RTN circuit. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust the transmission electronic pressure control (EPC) pressure during increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training Special Tool(s) NOTE: If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, the sensors will go into a "sleep mode" to conserve battery power. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information to the smart junction box (SJB). For additional information, refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation. NOTE: The tire pressure sensor training procedure must be done on a single vehicle, in an area without radio frequency noise and at least 1 m (3 ft) away from other vehicles equipped with tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS). Radio frequency noise is generated by electrical motors and appliance operation, cellular telephones, remote transmitters, power inverters and portable entertainment equipment. NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the activation tool, attempt to activate the same sensor with the activation tool. If the sensor still does not respond, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least 1/4 of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. NOTE: The SJB has a 2-minute time limit between sensor responses. If the SJB does not recognize any 1 of the 4 tire pressure sensors during this time limit, the horn will sound twice and the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE NOT TRAINED REPEAT and the entire procedure must be repeated. NOTE: For vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures (such as the E-Series and certain F-Series), the tire pressure sensors must be trained following a tire rotation. Failure to train the sensors will cause the TPMS indicator to illuminate. For vehicles with the same tire pressure for front and rear tires, tire rotation will not affect the system. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then press and release the brake pedal. 2. Cycle the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN position. 3. Press and release the brake pedal. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 5. Turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN position. ^ The horn will sound once and the TPMS indicator will flash if the training mode has been entered successfully. If equipped, the message center will display TRAIN LF TIRE. 6. NOTE: It may take up to 6 seconds to activate a tire pressure sensor. During this time, the activation tool must remain in place 180 degrees from the valve stem. Place the activation tool on the LF tire sidewall opposite (180 degrees) from the valve stem. Press and release the test button on the special tool. The horn will sound briefly to indicate that the tire pressure sensor has been recognized by the SJB. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page 4800 7. Within 2 minutes of the horn sounding, place the activation tool on the RF tire sidewall opposite (180 degrees) from the valve stem and press and release the test button to train the RF tire pressure sensor. 8. NOTE: Do not wait more than 2 minutes between training each sensor or the SJB will time out and the entire procedure must be repeated. Repeat Step 7 for the RR and LR tires. The procedure is completed after the last tire has been trained. When the training procedure is complete, the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE TRAINING COMPLETE. For vehicles not equipped with a message center, successful completion of the training procedure will be verified by turning the ignition switch to the OFF position without the horn sounding. If the horn sounds twice when the switch is turned to the OFF position, the training procedure was not successful. 9. Using the scan tool, locate the updated TPMS sensor IDs trained to the SJB and document them on the applicable warranty claim. 10. NOTE: This step is required to clear DTC C2780, cause the SJB to exit the manufacturing mode and to make sure there are no other concerns with a newly programmed SJB. If the sensors are being trained due to the installation of a new SJB, clear any DTCs and perform the SJB on-demand self test. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page 4801 Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation Special Tool(s) NOTE: The tire pressure sensors will go into a 14 sleep mode" after 30 minutes of inactivity to conserve battery power. The sensors do not transmit information while in sleep mode, it will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Position the tire pressure monitor activation tool against the LF tire sidewall 180 degrees from the tire valve stem. 3. NOTE: The activation tool will provide feedback in the form of a flashing green light and a beep sound for each successful response from a tire pressure sensor. Press the test button on the activation tool to activate the sensor, activate the sensor at least 2 times. 4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the remaining tires. 5. If the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) indicator remains illuminated after adjusting and activating each sensor, refer to the Symptom Chart in Diagnosis and Testing. See: Wheels and Tires/Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Disassembly WARNING: The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) sensor battery may release hazardous chemicals if exposed to extreme mechanical damage. If these chemicals contact the skin or eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention. If any part of the battery is swallowed, contact a physician immediately. When disposing of TPMS sensors, follow the correct procedures for hazardous material disposal. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTE: Tire pressure sensors are equipped with Lithium-ion batteries and must be disposed of accordingly. NOTE: Tire pressure sensors are manufactured in multiple colors based on their application. When installing a new sensor, make sure the color of the sensor being installed matches the color of the sensor that was removed. The different colored sensors are not interchangeable. NOTE: The sensor can be removed and installed without removing the strap or the cradle. 1. CAUTION: The sensor, cradle and strap may be damaged by incorrect tire mounting or dismounting. Dismount the tire only as instructed. Remove the tire from the wheel. 2. CAUTION: Do not use a large screwdriver. Apply minimum force during removal or damage to the sensor locking clip may occur. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 4804 Using a pocket screwdriver or similar tool, remove the sensor locking clip. 3. CAUTION: Do not use a large screwdriver. Apply minimum force during removal or damage to the sensor may occur. Using a pocket screwdriver or similar tool, detach the sensor from the cradle. Assembly 1. CAUTION: Damage to the sensor may occur if excessive force is applied during sensor installation. NOTE: Make sure the sensor is fully seated into the cradle. The sensor will make a "click" noise when correctly seated. Position the sensor into the cradle by inserting the fringe end of the sensor into the hook end of the cradle and pushing the opposite end of the sensor down onto the cradle. 2. NOTE: The locking clip can only be fully seated when installed in the correct orientation. If the sensor locking clip cannot be fully inserted, then the sensor may not be fully seated on the cradle or the locking clip may be inserted backward. Insert a new locking clip into the sensor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 4805 3. CAUTION: The sensor, cradle and strap may be damaged by incorrect tire mounting or dismounting. Mount the tire only as instructed. Install the tire onto the wheel. 4. NOTE: A new tire pressure sensor is shipped in an off mode (or battery saver mode) and must be turned on before it can be trained. To turn the sensor on, install it on a wheel, mount the tire and inflate the tire to the recommended inflation pressure. Wait at least 2 minutes, then continue with the sensor training procedure. Train the tire pressure sensor(s). For additional information, refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 4806 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Strap and Cradle Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Strap and Cradle Material Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 4807 Disassembly WARNING: The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) sensor battery may release hazardous chemicals if exposed to extreme mechanical damage. If these chemicals contact the skin or eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention. If any part of the battery is swallowed, contact a physician immediately. When disposing of TPMS sensors, follow the correct procedures for hazardous material disposal. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTE: Tire pressure sensors are equipped with Lithium-ion batteries and must be disposed of accordingly. NOTE: Tire pressure sensors are manufactured in multiple colors based on their application. When installing a new sensor, make sure the color of the sensor being installed matches the color of the sensor that was removed. The different colored sensors are not interchangeable. NOTE: The sensor is available separately, the cradle and strap are available as a strap kit. There are several different strap kits available based on wheel diameter but all strap kits share the same base part number. 1. Remove the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) sensor. For additional information, refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor. 2. WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Wear protective gloves when handling components or parts that have pointed or sharp edges. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. Remove a factory installed strap in the following sequence: 1 Locate the strap buckle and secure the strap to the wheel using duct tape or a similar item, on both sides of the buckle approximately 25 mm (0.98 in) from the buckle. 2 Using a large screwdriver and a twisting motion, unbuckle the strap. 3 Discard the strap. 3. To remove a dealer installed strap, turn the worm gear screw until the strap is fully released from the worm gear. ^ Discard the strap. 4. NOTE: To aid assembly, mark the location of the cradle prior to disassembly. Using a screwdriver, or similar tool, remove the cradle by inserting the screwdriver under the cradle and prying up. Assembly 1. NOTE: Make sure the sensor is fully seated into the new cradle. The sensor will make a "click" noise when fully seated. Position the sensor into the new cradle by inserting the fringe end of the sensor into the hook end of the cradle and pushing the opposite end of the sensor down onto the cradle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 4808 2. CAUTION: Metal scrapers may damage the wheel. Use only plastic or non-metallic scrapers to remove the cradle adhesive strip residue. NOTE: The sensor and cradle must be installed in the drop well of the wheel, 180 degrees from the valve stem. Clean the area where the sensor and cradle are to be installed. 3. NOTE: The sensor and cradle must be positioned with the hinge side of the sensor on the RH side when viewed from the curb side (beauty side) of the wheel. NOTE: The sensor has raised markings indicating how to position the sensor. Remove the adhesive tape liner from the cradle and position the sensor and cradle into the wheel drop well 180 degrees from the valve stem. 4. Install the tapered end of the strap through the opening of the cradle on the hinge side of the sensor. This will position the worm gear on the locking clip side of the sensor. 5. CAUTION: Steel wheels have a "high spot" along their circumference. Make sure the strap and sensor are mounted at the lowest spot possible to avoid damaging the sensor during wheel and tire disassembly and assembly. NOTE: Keep the strap parallel with the wheel flange while tightening the worm gear. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 4809 Position the worm gear 13-26 mm (0.5-1.0 in) away from the sensor and tighten the worm gear. ^ Tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 6. CAUTION: The sensor, cradle and strap may be damaged by incorrect tire mounting or dismounting. Mount the tire only as instructed. Install the tire onto the wheel. 7. NOTE: A new tire pressure sensor is shipped in an off mode (or battery saver mode) and must be turned on before it can be trained. To turn the sensor on, install it on a wheel, mount the tire and inflate the tire to the recommended inflation pressure. Wait at least 2 minutes, then continue with the sensor training procedure. Train the tire pressure sensor(s). For additional information, refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair Wheel Knuckle Removal 1. Remove the brake disc. 2. Remove and discard the wheel hub nut. 3. Using the special tool, separate the outer CV joint spindle from the wheel hub. 4. Remove the cotter pin and the tie-rod end-to-knuckle nut. 5. CAUTION: Do not use a hammer to separate the tie-rod end from the wheel knuckle or damage to the wheel knuckle can result. CAUTION: Do not damage the tie-rod end boot while installing the special tool. Using the special tool, separate the tie rod from the wheel knuckle. 6. Remove the lower ball joint pinch bolt nut and the pinch bolt. 7. Remove the anti-lock brake system (ABS) wheel speed sensor bolt and position the sensor aside. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4814 8. Separate the lower ball joint from the wheel knuckle. 9. Remove the 2 strut-to-knuckle nuts, bolts and the wheel knuckle. Installation 1. Position the wheel knuckle and install the 2 strut-to-knuckle bolts and nuts. ^ Tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). 2. Position and align the ball joint stud into the wheel knuckle. 3. Install the lower ball joint pinch bolt and nut. ^ To install, tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft). 4. Install the ABS wheel speed sensor and the bolt. ^ Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 5. Position the tie-rod end into the wheel knuckle and install the tie-rod end-to-knuckle nut and a new cotter pin. ^ Tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft). 6. Using a suitable halfshaft installer, insert the halfshaft into the wheel hub. 7. Install the brake disc. 8. CAUTION: Do not tighten the front wheel hub nut with the vehicle on the ground. The nut must be tightened to specification before the vehicle is lowered onto the wheels. Wheel bearing damage will occur if the wheel bearing is loaded with the weight of the vehicle applied. NOTE: Apply the brake to keep the halfshaft from rotating. Install the new front wheel hub nut. ^ Tighten to 300 Nm (221 lb-ft). 9. Check and, if necessary, align the front end. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Power Steering Fluid > Component Information > Specifications Power Steering Fluid: Specifications Power Steering Fluid This vehicle is equipped with an Electric Power-Assisted Steering (EPAS) System. There is no fluid reservoir to check or fill. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations Steering Control Module: Locations View 151-1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 4822 View 151-13 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 4823 Steering Control Module: Diagrams C1463A Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Power Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 4824 C1463B Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations Steering Control Module: Locations View 151-1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 4829 View 151-13 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 4830 Steering Control Module: Diagrams C1463A Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Relays and Modules - Steering > Steering Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 4831 C1463B Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Sensors and Switches - Steering > Power Steering Pressure Switch > Component Information > Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Sensor The PSP sensor monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP sensor voltage input to the PCM changes as the hydraulic pressure changes. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP sensor to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP sensor signals the PCM to adjust the transmission electronic pressure control (EPC) pressure during increased engine load, for example, during parking maneuvers. Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch Typical Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch The PSP switch monitors the hydraulic pressure within the power steering system. The PSP switch is a normally closed switch that opens as the hydraulic pressure increases. The PCM provides a low current voltage on the PSP circuit. When the PSP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low through the SIG RTN circuit. The PCM uses the input signal from the PSP switch to compensate for additional loads on the engine by adjusting the idle RPM and preventing engine stall during parking maneuvers. Also, the PSP switch signals the PCM to adjust the transmission electronic pressure control (EPC) pressure during increased engine load, for example during parking maneuvers. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) DEPOWERING AND REPOWERING Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Depowering Procedure WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. - Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the safety canopy and cause serious personal injury or death. - To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 3. At the smart power distribution junction box (SPDJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover and the restraints control module (RCM) fuse 32 (10A) from the SPDJB. 4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Air Bag Systems for location of the RCM and impact sensor(s). To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least 1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an accidental deployment. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Repowering Procedure 1. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON. 2. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SPDJB and install the cover. 3. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Connect the battery ground cable. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 4841 4. Prove out the supplemental restraint system (SRS) as follows: Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag indicator will: fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) from the restraints control module using a scan tool. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 4842 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) DEACTIVATION AND REACTIVATION Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Deactivation WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. - To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 3. At the smart power distribution junction box (SPDJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover and the RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SPDJB. 4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition OFF. 6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Air Bag Systems for location of the RCM and impact sensor(s). To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least 1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an accidental deployment. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 7. Using a 3-mm Allen wrench or a suitable tool, place it in the driver air bag module release hole on the underside of the steering wheel. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 4843 8. CAUTION: During driver air bag module removal, make sure all 3 driver air bag module hooks are released from the steering wheel wire clip. Failure to do so may cause damage to the driver air bag module and or the steering wheel. NOTE: The driver air bag module is removed for clarity. Position the 3-mm Allen wrench or suitable tool against the wire clip and push inward disengaging the wire clip from the 3 driver air bag module hooks. 9. Disconnect the horn electrical connector. Then disconnect the 2 driver air bag module electrical connectors and remove the driver air bag module. 10. Open and lower the glove compartment door. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 4844 11. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts. 12. CAUTION: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure. NOTE: Use care when removing the passenger air bag module from the instrument panel (I/P). The passenger air bag module can drop down during removal and the passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the I/P. Through the glove compartment opening, release the passenger air bag module deployment door clips while pushing the passenger air bag module out of the I/P. 13. Remove the passenger air bag module. 1 Disconnect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors. 2 Detach the wire harness routing clip and remove the passenger air bag module. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 4845 14. From under the rear of the passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector. 15. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. 1 Separate the weatherstrip. 2 Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel. 3 Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel. 16. Disconnect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector. 17. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel. 1 Separate the weatherstrip. 2 Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel. 3 Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 4846 18. Disconnect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector. 19. From under the rear of the driver seat, slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector. 20. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SPDJB. 21. Connect the battery ground cable. Reactivation 1. Remove RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SPDJB. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 3. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip. 4. Connect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 4847 5. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel. 1 Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel. 2 Install the D-pillar trim panel. 3 Install the weatherstrip. 6. Connect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector. 7. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. 1 Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel. 2 Install the D-pillar trim panel. 3 Install the weatherstrip. 8. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 4848 clip. 9. CAUTION: - During passenger air bag module installation, make sure the passenger air bag module wire harness routing clip is attached to the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness damage. - The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component and/or connector damage. Install the passenger air bag module. 1 Connect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors. 2 Attach the wire harness routing clip. 10. CAUTION: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure. NOTE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door clips are fully seated into the instrument panel. - Use care when installing the passenger air bag module in the instrument panel (I/P). The passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the I/P. Position the passenger air bag module and seat the passenger air bag module deployment door clips into the I/P. 11. Install the 2 passenger air bag module bolts. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 4849 12. Close the glove compartment door. 13. CAUTION: The driver air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the driver air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the driver air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the driver air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in component damage and/or connector damage. Install the driver air bag module electrical connectors fully into the driver air bag module. Then connect the horn electrical connector. 14. NOTE: - Make sure the driver air bag module wiring harness is routed down and away from the driver air bag module hooks during installation. - Audible clicks will be heard when the 3 wire clips are seated in the 3 driver air bag module hooks. Align the driver air bag module hooks to the steering wheel and, while pushing inward, seat the 3 driver air bag module hooks to the steering wheel wire clip. When the 3 driver air bag module hooks are seated in place, gently pull outward at the corners of the driver air bag module to make sure that the 3 hooks are fully seated. There should also be an even gap between the driver air bag module trim cover and the steering wheel. Check the driver air bag module and trim cover for correct movement when applying the horn. 15. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON. 16. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SPDJB and install the cover. 17. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Connect the battery ground cable. 18. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will: fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous DTCs from the restraints control module using a scan tool. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Adaptive Collapsible Steering Column > Component Information > Service and Repair Adaptive Collapsible Steering Column: Service and Repair DEPLOYABLE STEERING COLUMN - IN-VEHICLE DEPLOYMENT WARNING: Deploy all supplemental restraint system (SRS) devices (air bags, pretensioners, load limiters, etc.) outdoors with all personnel at least 9.14 meters (30 feet) away to make sure of personal safety. Due to the loud report which occurs when an SRS device is deployed, hearing protection is required. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. 1. Depower the SRS. 2. NOTE: It may be necessary to lower or remove the deployable steering column from the instrument panel to access the deployable steering column electrical connector. Access the deployable steering column electrical connector. 3. NOTE: If the deployable steering column does not have a hard-wired pigtail, it will be necessary to cut the wires and connector(s) from the vehicle wire harness and reconnect to the deployable steering column. Cut each of the deployable steering column wires, leaving at least 4 inches to work with. 4. Remove any sheathing (if present) and strip the insulation from the ends of the cut wires. 5. Make a jumper harness to deploy the deployable steering column. - Obtain 2 wires (20 gauge minimum) at least 9.14 m (30 ft) long and strip both ends of each wire. - At one end of the jumper harness, connect the wires together. 6. Using the end of the jumper harness that the wires are not connected together, attach each wire of the jumper harness to each wire of the deployable steering column. Use tape or other insulating material to make sure that the leads do not make contact with each other. 7. Remain at least 9.14 m (30 ft) away from the deployable steering column. 8. From the end of the jumper harness that is not connected to the deployable steering column, disconnect the 2 wires of the jumper harness from each other. 9. Deploy the deployable steering column by touching the ends of the 2 wires of the jumper harness to the terminals of a 12-volt battery. 10. To allow for cooling, wait at least 10 minutes before approaching the deployed steering column. 11. Dispose of the deployed steering column in the same manner as any other part to be scrapped. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Steering Column Lock > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Column Lock: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder Steering Column Lock: Customer Interest Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder TSB 09-19-15 10/05/09 IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift interlock is not affected. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern. a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove ignition key. b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction. c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction? (1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics (2) No - Proceed to step 2. 2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs. The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Steering Column Lock > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Column Lock: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 4861 Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3511 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Steering Column Lock > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Column Lock: > 09-2-8 > Feb > 09 > Steering Chime With Key Out/Column Won't Lock Steering Column Lock: Customer Interest Steering - Chime With Key Out/Column Won't Lock TSB 09-2-8 02/09/09 KEY-IN-IGNITION WARNING CHIME - KEY REMOVED - STEERING WHEEL NOT LOCKING FORD: 2008 Focus, Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2008 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some 2008 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid and Focus vehicles may exhibit an ignition key chime that continues to chime with the door open and key out of the ignition and/or steering wheel that will not lock. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE THE STEERING WHEEL ONLY LOCKS AT THE 12 O'CLOCK POSITION. Install a revised steering column lock module following Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 211-05 for Steering Column Lock Module replacement. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 090208A 2008 Escape, Escape 1.0 Hr. Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, Focus: Install revised Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With 11582A, 3564A, 3600A, 12650D, 12651D16, 14056D5, 14056D6, 13300D, 13300D4) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3511 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Steering Column Lock > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Column Lock: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder Steering Column Lock: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder TSB 09-19-15 10/05/09 IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift interlock is not affected. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern. a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove ignition key. b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction. c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction? (1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics (2) No - Proceed to step 2. 2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs. The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Steering Column Lock > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Column Lock: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 4871 Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3511 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Steering Column Lock > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Column Lock: > 09-2-8 > Feb > 09 > Steering - Chime With Key Out/Column Won't Lock Steering Column Lock: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Chime With Key Out/Column Won't Lock TSB 09-2-8 02/09/09 KEY-IN-IGNITION WARNING CHIME - KEY REMOVED - STEERING WHEEL NOT LOCKING FORD: 2008 Focus, Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2008 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some 2008 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid, Mariner Hybrid and Focus vehicles may exhibit an ignition key chime that continues to chime with the door open and key out of the ignition and/or steering wheel that will not lock. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE THE STEERING WHEEL ONLY LOCKS AT THE 12 O'CLOCK POSITION. Install a revised steering column lock module following Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 211-05 for Steering Column Lock Module replacement. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 090208A 2008 Escape, Escape 1.0 Hr. Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, Focus: Install revised Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With 11582A, 3564A, 3600A, 12650D, 12651D16, 14056D5, 14056D6, 13300D, 13300D4) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3511 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Steering Column Lock > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4876 Steering Column Lock: Service and Repair Steering Column Lock Module Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Column > Steering Column Lock > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4877 CAUTION: Do not remove the ignition lock cylinder and the ignition switch at the same time or damage to the column may result. All vehicles 1. Remove the clockspring. For additional information, refer to Air Bag Systems. 2. Disconnect the multi-function switch electrical connector. 3. Disconnect the ignition switch electrical connector. 4. Detach the 2 electrical harness pin-type retainers. 5. Remove the 3 multi-function switch carrier bolts. ^ Remove the multi-function switch and carrier as an assembly. Vehicles equipped with passive anti-theft system (PATS) 6. Disconnect the passive anti-theft system (PATS) transceiver electrical connector. 7. Remove the PATS transceiver. All vehicles 8. Remove the lock cylinder. For additional information, refer to Locks. 9. Position the steering column to the full downward position to access the lock module bolt. 10. NOTE: Clean all metal shavings and foreign material after cutting a slot into the steering column lock module bolt. Cut a slot into the head of the steering column lock module bolt. 11. Remove and discard the steering column lock module bolt. ^ To install, tighten the new bolt until the head of the bolt shears off. 12. Remove the steering column lock module. 13. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Align the ribs on the steering column lock module with the window of the steering column tube. ^ Align the locating pin with the slot on the locating bracket of the steering column. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Damper: > 10-18-8 > Sep > 10 > Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold Temps Steering Damper: Customer Interest Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold Temps TSB 10-18-8 09/27/10 VIBRATION/STEERING WHEEL NIBBLE - COLD TEMPERATURES FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-12-7 to update the Part List. ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit a vibration or nibble in the steering wheel while driving at 55-75 MPH (88-121 Km/h) in cold ambient temperatures of 5-25 °F (-15 to -4 °C). The vibration/nibble may be perceived as a tire or driveshaft balance issue. A steering wheel damper has been developed to correct this condition. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Check and adjust tire air pressure as required. Refer to the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-04. 2. Install the Rotunda Mastertech MTS-4000 Analyzer (257-00018) or equivalent. 3. Road test the vehicle for 15 minutes and record the vibration frequency. a. If the vibration goes away during the test drive, discontinue this procedure. The concern is due to temporary tire flat spotting which is a normal tire condition. Refer to WSM, Section 204-04. b. If the vibration remains and the vibration frequency is within the range of 27-33 Hz proceed to Step 4. c. If the vibration frequency not within the range of 27-33 Hz, do not continue with this procedure. Follow normal WSM diagnostic. Refer to WSM, Section 100-04. 4. Install a revised steering wheel damper. a. Remove steering wheel. Refer to the WSM, Section 211-04. b. Remove the trim cover from the rear of the steering wheel. c. Remove the three (3) damper bracket screws from the steering wheel and remove steering damper. (Figure 1) d. Attach revised steering wheel damper using existing screws. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Damper: > 10-18-8 > Sep > 10 > Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold Temps > Page 4886 e. Install steering wheel trim cover and steering wheel. Refer to the WSM, Section 211-04. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101808A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr. Mariner: Includes Time To Install Diagnostic Equipment And Road Test To Correct Flat Spots On Tires. (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101808B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs. Mariner: Includes Time To Install Diagnostic Equipment And Road Test To Correct Flat Spots On Tires, Condition Still Present Install The Revised Steering Wheel Damper (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 4R602 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Damper: > 10-18-8 > Sep > 10 > Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold Temps Steering Damper: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold Temps TSB 10-18-8 09/27/10 VIBRATION/STEERING WHEEL NIBBLE - COLD TEMPERATURES FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-12-7 to update the Part List. ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit a vibration or nibble in the steering wheel while driving at 55-75 MPH (88-121 Km/h) in cold ambient temperatures of 5-25 °F (-15 to -4 °C). The vibration/nibble may be perceived as a tire or driveshaft balance issue. A steering wheel damper has been developed to correct this condition. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Check and adjust tire air pressure as required. Refer to the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-04. 2. Install the Rotunda Mastertech MTS-4000 Analyzer (257-00018) or equivalent. 3. Road test the vehicle for 15 minutes and record the vibration frequency. a. If the vibration goes away during the test drive, discontinue this procedure. The concern is due to temporary tire flat spotting which is a normal tire condition. Refer to WSM, Section 204-04. b. If the vibration remains and the vibration frequency is within the range of 27-33 Hz proceed to Step 4. c. If the vibration frequency not within the range of 27-33 Hz, do not continue with this procedure. Follow normal WSM diagnostic. Refer to WSM, Section 100-04. 4. Install a revised steering wheel damper. a. Remove steering wheel. Refer to the WSM, Section 211-04. b. Remove the trim cover from the rear of the steering wheel. c. Remove the three (3) damper bracket screws from the steering wheel and remove steering damper. (Figure 1) d. Attach revised steering wheel damper using existing screws. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Damper > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Damper: > 10-18-8 > Sep > 10 > Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold Temps > Page 4892 e. Install steering wheel trim cover and steering wheel. Refer to the WSM, Section 211-04. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101808A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr. Mariner: Includes Time To Install Diagnostic Equipment And Road Test To Correct Flat Spots On Tires. (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101808B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs. Mariner: Includes Time To Install Diagnostic Equipment And Road Test To Correct Flat Spots On Tires, Condition Still Present Install The Revised Steering Wheel Damper (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 4R602 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair Steering Gear: Service and Repair Steering Gear Special Tool(s) Steering Gear - Exploded View Removal and Installation All vehicles 1. Remove the front wheels and tires. 2. Turn the ignition key to the OFF position. ^ Remove the ignition key. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4896 3. CAUTION: Do not allow the steering wheel to rotate while the intermediate shaft is disconnected or damage to the clockspring can result. If there is evidence that the shaft has rotated, the clockspring must be removed and recentered. For additional information, refer to Air Bag System. Remove and discard the steering column coupling-to-steering gear bolt and disconnect the coupling from the steering gear. ^ To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft). 4. From the engine compartment, loosen the 2 steering gear bolts. ^ To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). 5. If equipped, remove the 3 pin-type retainers and the steering gear shield. 6. Remove and discard the 2 outer tie-rod end nuts. ^ To install, tighten to 80 Nm (59 lb-ft). 7. CAUTION: Do not use a hammer to separate the tie-rod end from the wheel knuckle or damage to the wheel knuckle can result. Using the special tool, separate the tie-rod ends from the wheel knuckles. All wheel drive (AWD) vehicles 8. Remove the rear transaxle insulator through bolt. ^ To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft). Front wheel drive (FWD) vehicles with automatic transaxle - 2.3L 9. Remove the 3 transmission damper bolts and the transmission damper. ^ To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Gear > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 4897 All vehicles 10. Remove and discard the 2 steering gear bolts. 11. NOTE: For all wheel drive (AWD) vehicles, it is necessary to grasp the driveshaft by hand and apply slight downward pressure to obtain clearance for the removal of the steering gear. Remove the steering gear from the LH side of the vehicle. 12. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 13. Check and, if necessary, align the front end. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns Steering Shaft: Customer Interest Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns TSB 10-13-2 07/19/10 STEERING COLUMN POP/CLUNK NOISE ON TURNS - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 6/11/2010 FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 09-22-18 to update the production fix date and Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 6/11/2010 may exhibit a pop or clunk noise from the steering column area while turning. This noise typically occurs quarter turn before the steering wheel reaches it's end of travel stop and typically goes away with weight off the wheels. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE FAILURE TO PERFORM STEERING WHEEL POSITION SENSOR CALIBRATION PROCEDURE, AFTER STEERING COLUMN REPLACEMENT, MAY RESULT IN STEERING COLUMN NOISE ON TURNS. 1. Verify noise is coming from steering column and/or steering shaft area and occurs before steering wheel reaches it's end of travel stop. a. If noise is only present when the steering wheel contacts end of travel stop, it is a normal characteristic of the vehicle and this procedure does not apply. b. If noise is present before or between steering wheel end of travel stop, proceed to Step 2. 2. Replace both the steering shaft and steering shaft coupling u-joint per online Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 211-04. a. Torque the steering column coupling-to-steering column shaft bolt to 52 lb-ft (70 N.m). WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101302A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Shaft And Coupling U-Joint Includes Time To Diagnose Concern (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns > Page 4906 CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3B676 14 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns Steering Shaft: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns TSB 10-13-2 07/19/10 STEERING COLUMN POP/CLUNK NOISE ON TURNS - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 6/11/2010 FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 09-22-18 to update the production fix date and Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 6/11/2010 may exhibit a pop or clunk noise from the steering column area while turning. This noise typically occurs quarter turn before the steering wheel reaches it's end of travel stop and typically goes away with weight off the wheels. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE FAILURE TO PERFORM STEERING WHEEL POSITION SENSOR CALIBRATION PROCEDURE, AFTER STEERING COLUMN REPLACEMENT, MAY RESULT IN STEERING COLUMN NOISE ON TURNS. 1. Verify noise is coming from steering column and/or steering shaft area and occurs before steering wheel reaches it's end of travel stop. a. If noise is only present when the steering wheel contacts end of travel stop, it is a normal characteristic of the vehicle and this procedure does not apply. b. If noise is present before or between steering wheel end of travel stop, proceed to Step 2. 2. Replace both the steering shaft and steering shaft coupling u-joint per online Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 211-04. a. Torque the steering column coupling-to-steering column shaft bolt to 52 lb-ft (70 N.m). WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101302A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Shaft And Coupling U-Joint Includes Time To Diagnose Concern (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns > Page 4912 CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3B676 14 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Shaft: > 08-23-12 > Nov > 08 > Temperature Display - Toggles From Fahrenheit To Celsius Instrument Panel Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Temperature Display - Toggles From Fahrenheit To Celsius TSB 08-23-12 11/24/08 FRONT DISPLAY INTERFACE MODULE (FDIM) - OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY TOGGLES BETWEEN FAHRENHEIT/CELSIUS FORD: 2008-2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit an outside temperature display in the FDIM that toggles between Fahrenheit and Celsius. ACTION Reprogram the Instrument Cluster module to the latest calibration using IDS release 57.9 and higher with patch 13 or 58.2 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2008.11 DVD. Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 082312A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The Instrument Cluster, Authorization Decal Not Required.(Do Not Use With 12650D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 10849 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Shaft: > 08-19-2 > Sep > 08 > Instruments - Incorrect Autolock/Autounlock Status Instrument Panel Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Incorrect Autolock/Autounlock Status TSB 08-19-2 09/29/08 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER / MESSAGE CENTER - AUTOLOCK / AUTOUNLOCK / AUTOLAMP DISPLAY INCORRECT STATUS / MISSING FORD: 2008 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2008 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner This article supersedes TSB 08-15-5 to update the Issue Statement and Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2008 Escape, Mariner and Escape/Mariner Hybrid vehicles built, on or before 6/17/2008 and equipped with a message center instrument cluster may exhibit Autolock / Autounlock / Autolamp exit delay time features that falsely display "Off" regardless of actual feature On/Off status. Any one of these features changed individually may cause the remaining untouched features to default to actual "Off' status. In some vehicles the Autolock / Autounlock feature may not display at all in the message center. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. If the Autolock or Autounlock feature is not displayed in the message center when toggling through the setup, it will need to be enabled using the IDS. If the Autolock or Autounlock features are displayed in the message center skip to Step 2. a. Connect the Ford Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) service tool to the data link connector (DLC). b. ID the vehicle. c. Select the toolbox. d. Select Module Programming. e. Select Programmable Parameters. f. Select Power Door Locks. g. Select Enable for each Autolock / Autounlock selection. 2. Reprogram the instrument cluster to the latest calibration using IDS release B56.8 and higher or IDS release B57.1 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2008.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 081902A 2008 Escape, Escape 0.3 Hr. Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The Instrument Cluster, Authorization Decal Not Required. Includes Time To Enable Autolock Display. (Do Not Use With 12650D, 12651D, 12651D4) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Shaft: > 08-19-2 > Sep > 08 > Instruments - Incorrect Autolock/Autounlock Status > Page 4922 DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 10849 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Steering Shaft: > 08-19-2 > Sep > 08 > Instruments - Incorrect Autolock/Autounlock Status > Page 4932 DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 10849 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4933 Steering Shaft: Service and Repair Steering Column Shaft Removal and Installation Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4934 1. Remove the steering column opening trim. 2. Remove the LH instrument panel side finish panel. 3. Through the side finish panel opening, remove the ground wire eyelet bolt. ^ Position the 2 ground wire eyelets and wires aside. 4. Through the side finish panel opening, disconnect the 2 instrument panel wiring harness electrical connectors and, if equipped, the battery high-voltage jumper switch electrical connector. ^ Position the connectors and harnesses aside. 5. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and rotate the steering wheel clockwise until the steering column coupling-to- steering column bolt is accessible. 6. Through the side finish panel opening, remove and discard the steering column coupling-to-steering column bolt. ^ To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft). 7. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the key. ^ Rotate the steering wheel counter clockwise until the column locks. 8. CAUTION: Do not allow the steering column shaft to rotate while the lower shaft is disconnected or damage to the clockspring can result. If there is evidence that the shaft has rotated, the clockspring must be removed and recentered. For additional information, refer to Air Bags Systems. Separate the steering column coupling from the steering column. 9. CAUTION: Take care not to damage the steering column dash seal and clip-type retainers during removal. Do not use excessive force when compressing the retainers or the clips may be broken. NOTE: The 2-piece steering column dash seal is serviced as an assembly. From the engine compartment, using a suitable prying tool with a non-sharpened edge, compress the steering column dash seal clip-type retainers toward the center of the seal and separate the seal from the floorboard. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 4935 10. From the passenger compartment, slide the dash seal upwards on the steering column shaft. 11. Remove and discard the steering column coupling-to-steering column shaft bolt. ^ To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft). 12. Remove the steering column shaft and dash seal. 13. Remove the steering column dash seal from the shaft. ^ Inspect the dash seal and clip-type retainers for damage and, if necessary, install a new dash seal. 14. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft Coupler > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Shaft Coupler: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns Steering Shaft Coupler: Customer Interest Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns TSB 10-13-2 07/19/10 STEERING COLUMN POP/CLUNK NOISE ON TURNS - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 6/11/2010 FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 09-22-18 to update the production fix date and Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 6/11/2010 may exhibit a pop or clunk noise from the steering column area while turning. This noise typically occurs quarter turn before the steering wheel reaches it's end of travel stop and typically goes away with weight off the wheels. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE FAILURE TO PERFORM STEERING WHEEL POSITION SENSOR CALIBRATION PROCEDURE, AFTER STEERING COLUMN REPLACEMENT, MAY RESULT IN STEERING COLUMN NOISE ON TURNS. 1. Verify noise is coming from steering column and/or steering shaft area and occurs before steering wheel reaches it's end of travel stop. a. If noise is only present when the steering wheel contacts end of travel stop, it is a normal characteristic of the vehicle and this procedure does not apply. b. If noise is present before or between steering wheel end of travel stop, proceed to Step 2. 2. Replace both the steering shaft and steering shaft coupling u-joint per online Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 211-04. a. Torque the steering column coupling-to-steering column shaft bolt to 52 lb-ft (70 N.m). WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101302A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Shaft And Coupling U-Joint Includes Time To Diagnose Concern (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft Coupler > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Shaft Coupler: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns > Page 4944 CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3B676 14 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft Coupler > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Shaft Coupler: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns Steering Shaft Coupler: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns TSB 10-13-2 07/19/10 STEERING COLUMN POP/CLUNK NOISE ON TURNS - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 6/11/2010 FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 09-22-18 to update the production fix date and Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 6/11/2010 may exhibit a pop or clunk noise from the steering column area while turning. This noise typically occurs quarter turn before the steering wheel reaches it's end of travel stop and typically goes away with weight off the wheels. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE FAILURE TO PERFORM STEERING WHEEL POSITION SENSOR CALIBRATION PROCEDURE, AFTER STEERING COLUMN REPLACEMENT, MAY RESULT IN STEERING COLUMN NOISE ON TURNS. 1. Verify noise is coming from steering column and/or steering shaft area and occurs before steering wheel reaches it's end of travel stop. a. If noise is only present when the steering wheel contacts end of travel stop, it is a normal characteristic of the vehicle and this procedure does not apply. b. If noise is present before or between steering wheel end of travel stop, proceed to Step 2. 2. Replace both the steering shaft and steering shaft coupling u-joint per online Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 211-04. a. Torque the steering column coupling-to-steering column shaft bolt to 52 lb-ft (70 N.m). WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101302A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Shaft And Coupling U-Joint Includes Time To Diagnose Concern (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Shaft Coupler > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Shaft Coupler: > 10-13-2 > Jul > 10 > Steering Steering Column Pop/Clunk On Turns > Page 4950 CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3B676 14 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Wheel: > 10-18-8 > Sep > 10 > Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold Temps Steering Wheel: Customer Interest Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold Temps TSB 10-18-8 09/27/10 VIBRATION/STEERING WHEEL NIBBLE - COLD TEMPERATURES FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-12-7 to update the Part List. ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit a vibration or nibble in the steering wheel while driving at 55-75 MPH (88-121 Km/h) in cold ambient temperatures of 5-25 °F (-15 to -4 °C). The vibration/nibble may be perceived as a tire or driveshaft balance issue. A steering wheel damper has been developed to correct this condition. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Check and adjust tire air pressure as required. Refer to the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-04. 2. Install the Rotunda Mastertech MTS-4000 Analyzer (257-00018) or equivalent. 3. Road test the vehicle for 15 minutes and record the vibration frequency. a. If the vibration goes away during the test drive, discontinue this procedure. The concern is due to temporary tire flat spotting which is a normal tire condition. Refer to WSM, Section 204-04. b. If the vibration remains and the vibration frequency is within the range of 27-33 Hz proceed to Step 4. c. If the vibration frequency not within the range of 27-33 Hz, do not continue with this procedure. Follow normal WSM diagnostic. Refer to WSM, Section 100-04. 4. Install a revised steering wheel damper. a. Remove steering wheel. Refer to the WSM, Section 211-04. b. Remove the trim cover from the rear of the steering wheel. c. Remove the three (3) damper bracket screws from the steering wheel and remove steering damper. (Figure 1) d. Attach revised steering wheel damper using existing screws. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Wheel: > 10-18-8 > Sep > 10 > Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold Temps > Page 4959 e. Install steering wheel trim cover and steering wheel. Refer to the WSM, Section 211-04. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101808A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr. Mariner: Includes Time To Install Diagnostic Equipment And Road Test To Correct Flat Spots On Tires. (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101808B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs. Mariner: Includes Time To Install Diagnostic Equipment And Road Test To Correct Flat Spots On Tires, Condition Still Present Install The Revised Steering Wheel Damper (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 4R602 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Wheel: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Interior - Leather Wrapping On Steering Wheel Is Loose Steering Wheel: Customer Interest Interior - Leather Wrapping On Steering Wheel Is Loose TSB 07-4-3 03/05/07 LEATHER - WRAPPED STEERING WHEEL - LEATHER COMING LOOSE FORD: 2000-2005 Thunderbird 2000-2007 Crown Victoria, Focus, Mustang, Taurus 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1999-2003 Windstar 1999-2008 F-Super Duty 2000-2005 Excursion 2000-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, Ranger 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2008 Escape 2004-2007 F-150, Freestar 2005-2008 Escape Hybrid 2007 Edge 2004-2007 F-650, F-750 LINCOLN: 2000-2002 Continental 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2000-2007 Town Car 2006 Zephyr 2007 MKZ 2000-2007 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT 2007 MKX MERCURY: 2000-2005 Sable 2000-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007 Montego 2006-2007 Milan 2000-2007 Mountaineer 2004-2007 Monterey 2005-2008 Mariner 2006-2008 Mariner Hybrid This article supersedes TSB 04-24-3 to update the vehicle model years. ISSUE Some vehicles equipped with leather-wrapped steering wheels may exhibit the leather coming loose from the spoke area. ACTION Apply Motorcraft Instant Gel Adhesive to re-adhere the loose leather to the wheel spoke. Refer to the following Service Procedure. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE IF RE-ADHERING LEATHER TO THE FRONT SIDE OF THE STEERING WHEEL ONLY, OMIT STEPS 1 AND 6. STEERING WHEEL/AIR BAG ASSEMBLY REMOVAL IS NECESSARY ONLY WHEN REPAIRING LOOSE LEATHER ON THE BACKSIDE OF THE STEERING WHEEL. CAUTION AVOID SKIN CONTACT WITH MOTORCRAFT INSTANT GEL ADHESIVE. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Steering Wheel: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Interior - Leather Wrapping On Steering Wheel Is Loose > Page 4964 1. Remove the steering wheel (ONLY NECESSARY TO REPAIR BACKSIDE OF STEERING WHEEL). Refer to Workshop Manual Sections 211-04 and 501-20B. 2. Fold loose leather out of the way. 3. Apply Motorcraft Instant Gel Adhesive evenly over the wheel spoke. 4. Fold the leather back into its original position. 5. Smooth the leather tuck in for neat appearance, and apply pressure until the leather is bonded to the wheel spoke (apply pressure for at least 30 seconds). NOTE THE ADHESIVE SHOULD BE COMPLETELY SET AFTER 5 MINUTES. DO NOT PULL ON THE REPAIR AREA. 6. Reinstall steering wheel. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT070403 Use SLIS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time. DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3600 33 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 10-18-8 > Sep > 10 > Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold Temps Steering Wheel: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold Temps TSB 10-18-8 09/27/10 VIBRATION/STEERING WHEEL NIBBLE - COLD TEMPERATURES FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-12-7 to update the Part List. ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit a vibration or nibble in the steering wheel while driving at 55-75 MPH (88-121 Km/h) in cold ambient temperatures of 5-25 °F (-15 to -4 °C). The vibration/nibble may be perceived as a tire or driveshaft balance issue. A steering wheel damper has been developed to correct this condition. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Check and adjust tire air pressure as required. Refer to the Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-04. 2. Install the Rotunda Mastertech MTS-4000 Analyzer (257-00018) or equivalent. 3. Road test the vehicle for 15 minutes and record the vibration frequency. a. If the vibration goes away during the test drive, discontinue this procedure. The concern is due to temporary tire flat spotting which is a normal tire condition. Refer to WSM, Section 204-04. b. If the vibration remains and the vibration frequency is within the range of 27-33 Hz proceed to Step 4. c. If the vibration frequency not within the range of 27-33 Hz, do not continue with this procedure. Follow normal WSM diagnostic. Refer to WSM, Section 100-04. 4. Install a revised steering wheel damper. a. Remove steering wheel. Refer to the WSM, Section 211-04. b. Remove the trim cover from the rear of the steering wheel. c. Remove the three (3) damper bracket screws from the steering wheel and remove steering damper. (Figure 1) d. Attach revised steering wheel damper using existing screws. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 10-18-8 > Sep > 10 > Steering - Steering Wheel Nibble In Cold Temps > Page 4970 e. Install steering wheel trim cover and steering wheel. Refer to the WSM, Section 211-04. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101808A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.7 Hr. Mariner: Includes Time To Install Diagnostic Equipment And Road Test To Correct Flat Spots On Tires. (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 101808B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.3 Hrs. Mariner: Includes Time To Install Diagnostic Equipment And Road Test To Correct Flat Spots On Tires, Condition Still Present Install The Revised Steering Wheel Damper (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 4R602 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Interior - Leather Wrapping On Steering Wheel Is Loose Steering Wheel: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Leather Wrapping On Steering Wheel Is Loose TSB 07-4-3 03/05/07 LEATHER - WRAPPED STEERING WHEEL - LEATHER COMING LOOSE FORD: 2000-2005 Thunderbird 2000-2007 Crown Victoria, Focus, Mustang, Taurus 2005-2007 Five Hundred, Freestyle 2006-2007 Fusion 1999-2003 Windstar 1999-2008 F-Super Duty 2000-2005 Excursion 2000-2007 E-Series, Expedition, Explorer, Ranger 2001-2003 Explorer Sport 2001-2007 Explorer Sport Trac 2001-2008 Escape 2004-2007 F-150, Freestar 2005-2008 Escape Hybrid 2007 Edge 2004-2007 F-650, F-750 LINCOLN: 2000-2002 Continental 2000-2006 Lincoln LS 2000-2007 Town Car 2006 Zephyr 2007 MKZ 2000-2007 Navigator 2003-2005 Aviator 2006-2007 Mark LT 2007 MKX MERCURY: 2000-2005 Sable 2000-2007 Grand Marquis 2005-2007 Montego 2006-2007 Milan 2000-2007 Mountaineer 2004-2007 Monterey 2005-2008 Mariner 2006-2008 Mariner Hybrid This article supersedes TSB 04-24-3 to update the vehicle model years. ISSUE Some vehicles equipped with leather-wrapped steering wheels may exhibit the leather coming loose from the spoke area. ACTION Apply Motorcraft Instant Gel Adhesive to re-adhere the loose leather to the wheel spoke. Refer to the following Service Procedure. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE IF RE-ADHERING LEATHER TO THE FRONT SIDE OF THE STEERING WHEEL ONLY, OMIT STEPS 1 AND 6. STEERING WHEEL/AIR BAG ASSEMBLY REMOVAL IS NECESSARY ONLY WHEN REPAIRING LOOSE LEATHER ON THE BACKSIDE OF THE STEERING WHEEL. CAUTION AVOID SKIN CONTACT WITH MOTORCRAFT INSTANT GEL ADHESIVE. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Steering Wheel: > 07-4-3 > Mar > 07 > Interior - Leather Wrapping On Steering Wheel Is Loose > Page 4975 1. Remove the steering wheel (ONLY NECESSARY TO REPAIR BACKSIDE OF STEERING WHEEL). Refer to Workshop Manual Sections 211-04 and 501-20B. 2. Fold loose leather out of the way. 3. Apply Motorcraft Instant Gel Adhesive evenly over the wheel spoke. 4. Fold the leather back into its original position. 5. Smooth the leather tuck in for neat appearance, and apply pressure until the leather is bonded to the wheel spoke (apply pressure for at least 30 seconds). NOTE THE ADHESIVE SHOULD BE COMPLETELY SET AFTER 5 MINUTES. DO NOT PULL ON THE REPAIR AREA. 6. Reinstall steering wheel. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME MT070403 Use SLIS Operations If Actual Available; Claim Additional Time Diagnosis Or Labor Performed As Actual Time. DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3600 33 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Locations > Steering Wheel/Audio Control Switch View 151-28 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Locations > Steering Wheel/Audio Control Switch > Page 4978 View 151-28 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Locations > Page 4979 Steering Wheel: Service and Repair Steering Wheel Special Tool(s) 1. Remove the driver air bag module. For additional information, refer to Air Bag Systems. 2. Disconnect the steering wheel switch electrical connector from the clockspring. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Steering Wheel > Component Information > Locations > Page 4980 ^ Detach the steering wheel switch wiring from the retainers and position the wires aside. 3. Remove the steering wheel bolt. ^ To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 4. CAUTION: Do not allow the special tool to damage the steering wheel switch wires and connector while removing the steering wheel. Using the special tool, remove the steering wheel. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Steering > Tie Rod > Tie Rod Boot > Component Information > Service and Repair Tie Rod Boot: Service and Repair Steering Gear Boot Removal and Installation 1. Remove the outer tie-rod end. 2. Remove the tie-rod end jam nut. 3. Remove and discard the 2 steering gear boot clamps and the steering gear boot. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Specifications Ball Joint: Specifications Ball Joint Deflection ............................................................................................................................. .............................................. 0-0.2 mm (0-0.008 in) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Ball Joint > Component Information > Specifications > Page 4989 Ball Joint: Testing and Inspection Ball Joint Inspection 1. Prior to inspecting the ball joints for wear, inspect the wheel bearings. Install a new wheel bearing as necessary. 2. NOTE: In order to obtain accurate measurements, the suspension must be in full rebound with the weight of the vehicle supported by the frame. Raise and support the vehicle by the frame to allow the wheels to hang in the rebound position. 3. Inspect the ball joint and ball joint boot for damage. ^ If the ball joint or ball joint boot is damaged, install a new ball joint as necessary. 4. CAUTION: Do not use any tools or equipment to move the wheel and tire assembly or suspension components while checking for relative movement. Suspension damage may occur. The use of tools or equipment will also create relative movement that may not exist when using hand force. Relative movement must be measured using hand force only. Inspect the ball joint for relative movement by alternately pulling downward and pushing upward on the lower control arm by hand. Note any relative vertical movement between the wheel knuckle and lower arm at the lower ball joint. ^ If relative movement is not felt or seen, the ball joint is OK. Do not install a new ball joint. ^ If relative movement is found, continue with Step 5. 5. NOTE: In order to obtain an accurate measurement, the dial indicator should be aligned as close as possible with the vertical axis (center line) of the ball joint. To measure ball joint deflection, attach a suitable dial indicator with a flexible arm between the lower control arm and the wheel knuckle or ball joint stud. 6. Measure the ball joint deflection while an assistant pushes up and pulls down on the lower control arm, by hand. ^ If the deflection exceeds the specification, a new ball joint must be installed. ^ If the deflection meets the specification, no further action is required. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Control Arm Bushing Inspection Control Arm Bushing: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Control Arm Bushing Inspection TSB 09-5-1 03/23/09 LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING INSPECTION PROCEDURE FORD: 2001-2009 Escape 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid MERCURY: 2005-2009 Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid ISSUE Many states and Canadian provinces require annual safety inspections which include the evaluation of suspension components. The information in this procedure is intended to assist the technician performing the inspection with specific criteria for 2001-2009 Escape and Mariner lower control arm (LCA) bushings and will prevent the unnecessary replacement of good components. ACTION Inspect according to the procedure below. INSPECTION PROCEDURE The LCA bushing is located at the rear of the front suspension lower control arm. The bushing is identified as number 1 of Figure 1. The control arm is mounted in the front subframe with bolts number 2 and number 3. The bushing is part of the LCA and cannot be serviced separately from the arm. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Control Arm Bushing Inspection > Page 4995 Figure 2 - Shows a new bushing prior to assembly into the control arm. Bolt number 2 passes through the inner sleeve and the outer sleeve is pressed into the control arm. The rubber bushing is bonded to both the inner and outer sleeves. Figure 3 - Illustrates a generic bushing showing minor sur[ace cracks that do not adversely affect the performance of the bushing. Bushings exhibiting sur[ace cracks with a depth less than 3/8" (10 mm) are acceptable and will continue to function normally. These do not require replacement. Figure 4 - Illustrates a partial separation between the rubber and the outer sleeve. The bushing may show signs of movement on the rubber surface, making the surface shiny. Bushings with a separation or crack depth less than or equal to 3/8" (10 mm) are acceptable and meet all functional requirements. These do not require replacement. Bushings with a separation or crack greater than 3/8" (10 mm) in depth should be replaced. The customer may hear a bang or clunk in the front suspension if there is enough separation for the arm to contact the subframe. This does not affect the retention of the control arm to the vehicle as the bushing is sandwiched in the subframe and held in place with the bolt. The vehicle can be safely operated in this condition until the bushing is replaced. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Control Arm > Control Arm Bushing > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Steering/Suspension - Control Arm Bushing Inspection > Page 4996 WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair Wheel Knuckle Removal 1. Remove the brake disc. 2. Remove and discard the wheel hub nut. 3. Using the special tool, separate the outer CV joint spindle from the wheel hub. 4. Remove the cotter pin and the tie-rod end-to-knuckle nut. 5. CAUTION: Do not use a hammer to separate the tie-rod end from the wheel knuckle or damage to the wheel knuckle can result. CAUTION: Do not damage the tie-rod end boot while installing the special tool. Using the special tool, separate the tie rod from the wheel knuckle. 6. Remove the lower ball joint pinch bolt nut and the pinch bolt. 7. Remove the anti-lock brake system (ABS) wheel speed sensor bolt and position the sensor aside. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Front Steering Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5000 8. Separate the lower ball joint from the wheel knuckle. 9. Remove the 2 strut-to-knuckle nuts, bolts and the wheel knuckle. Installation 1. Position the wheel knuckle and install the 2 strut-to-knuckle bolts and nuts. ^ Tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). 2. Position and align the ball joint stud into the wheel knuckle. 3. Install the lower ball joint pinch bolt and nut. ^ To install, tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft). 4. Install the ABS wheel speed sensor and the bolt. ^ Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 5. Position the tie-rod end into the wheel knuckle and install the tie-rod end-to-knuckle nut and a new cotter pin. ^ Tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft). 6. Using a suitable halfshaft installer, insert the halfshaft into the wheel hub. 7. Install the brake disc. 8. CAUTION: Do not tighten the front wheel hub nut with the vehicle on the ground. The nut must be tightened to specification before the vehicle is lowered onto the wheels. Wheel bearing damage will occur if the wheel bearing is loaded with the weight of the vehicle applied. NOTE: Apply the brake to keep the halfshaft from rotating. Install the new front wheel hub nut. ^ Tighten to 300 Nm (221 lb-ft). 9. Check and, if necessary, align the front end. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Knuckle - Disc Brakes Rear Knuckle: Service and Repair Wheel Knuckle - Disc Brakes Wheel Knuckle - Disc Brakes Special Tool(s) Removal All vehicles 1. Remove the wheel and tire. All wheel drive (AWD) vehicles 2. NOTE: Apply the brake to keep the halfshaft from rotating. Remove and discard the wheel hub nut. All vehicles 3. Remove the parking brake shoes. AWD vehicles 4. CAUTION: Do not use a hammer to separate the outer constant velocity (CV) joint from the hub. Damage to the threads and internal CV joint components can result. Using the special tools, separate the outer CV joint from the wheel hub. Vehicles with anti-lock brake system (ABS) 5. Remove the ABS wheel speed sensor bolt and the 2 ABS wheel speed sensor harness bolts. 6. Remove and position the wheel speed sensor and harness aside. All vehicles 7. Remove the coil spring. 8. Remove and discard the lower ball joint nut. 9. CAUTION: The joint area must be free of foreign material to make sure of correct clamping. Index-mark the notch on the cam nut adjustment cam. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Knuckle - Disc Brakes > Page 5005 10. Remove and discard the wheel knuckle bolt. 11. Remove and discard the cam nut. 12. Remove the wheel knuckle. Installation All vehicles 1. CAUTION: The joint area must be free of foreign material to make sure of correct clamping. NOTE: The joint surfaces and the bushing sleeve serrations must be clean before assembly. Clean the joint surfaces and the bushing sleeve serrations with a wire brush. NOTE: Align the notch on the cam nut with the index marks. Position the wheel knuckle and install a new wheel knuckle bolt and cam nut. 2. Using a suitable tool, hold the cam nut stationary while tightening the wheel knuckle bolt. ^ Tighten to 150 Nm (111 lb-ft). 3. Position the lower ball joint into the wheel knuckle and install the lower ball joint nut. ^ Tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft). 4. Install the coil spring. Vehicles with ABS 5. Position the ABS wheel speed sensor harness and the sensor. 6. Install the ABS wheel speed sensor bolt and the 2 ABS wheel speed sensor harness bolts. ^ Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). All vehicles 7. Install the parking brake shoes. AWD vehicles 8. Using a suitable halfshaft installation tool, install the halfshaft. 9. CAUTION: Do not tighten the front wheel hub nut with the vehicle on the ground. The nut must be tightened to specification before the vehicle is lowered onto the wheels. Wheel bearing damage will occur if the wheel bearing is loaded with the weight of the vehicle applied. NOTE: Apply the brake to keep the halfshaft from rotating. Install the new front wheel hub nut. ^ Tighten to 290 Nm (214 lb-ft). All vehicles 10. Check and, if necessary, align the rear end. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Knuckle - Disc Brakes > Page 5006 Rear Knuckle: Service and Repair Wheel Knuckle - Drum Brakes Wheel Knuckle - Drum Brakes Special Tool(s) Removal NOTE: LH shown, RH similar. All vehicles 1. Remove the wheel and tire. 2. Remove the brake shoes. 3. Remove the parking brake cable bracket-to-control arm bolt. 4. Disconnect the parking brake cable from the brake backing plate. ^ Remove the parking brake cable from the brake backing plate. 5. Disconnect the brake tube from the wheel cylinder and remove the brake tube bracket bolt. Vehicles equipped with anti-lock brake system (ABS) 6. Remove the ABS wheel speed sensor bolt and the 2 ABS wheel speed sensor harness bolts. 7. Remove and position the wheel speed sensor and harness aside. All vehicles 8. Remove the coil spring. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Rear Knuckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wheel Knuckle - Disc Brakes > Page 5007 9. Remove the lower ball joint nut. 10. CAUTION: The joint area must be free of foreign material to make sure of correct clamping. Index-mark the notch on the cam nut adjustment cam. 11. Remove and discard the wheel knuckle bolt. 12. Remove and discard the cam nut. 13. Remove the wheel knuckle. Installation All vehicles 1. CAUTION: The joint area must be free of foreign material to make sure of correct clamping. NOTE: Align the notch on the cam nut with the index marks. Position the wheel knuckle and install a new wheel knuckle bolt and cam nut. 2. Using a suitable tool, hold the cam nut stationary while tightening the wheel knuckle bolt. ^ Tighten to 150 Nm (111 lb-ft). 3. Position the lower ball joint into the wheel knuckle and install the lower ball joint nut. ^ Tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft). 4. Install the coil spring. Vehicles with ABS 5. Position the ABS wheel speed sensor harness and the sensor. 6. Install the ABS wheel speed sensor bolt and the 2 ABS wheel speed sensor harness bolts. ^ Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). All vehicles 7. Connect the brake tube to the wheel cylinder. ^ Tighten to 17 Nm (13 lb-ft). 8. Install the brake tube bracket bolt. ^ Tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb-ft). 9. Connect the parking brake cable to the brake backing plate and install the parking brake cable bracket bolt. ^ Tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). 10. Install the brake shoes. 11. Bleed the brake system. 12. Check and, if necessary, align the rear end. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Bushing > Component Information > Service and Repair Stabilizer Bushing: Service and Repair Stabilizer Bar Bushing Removal and Installation CAUTION: When installing the stabilizer bar bushings, make sure the bushings are correctly oriented with the bushing flanges in the up position and the bushing split pointing to the front of the vehicle. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the 2 bolts and the stabilizer bar bushing bracket. ^ To install, tighten to 70 Nm (52 lb-ft). 3. NOTE: Inspect the stabilizer bar bushing for wear. If necessary, install a new part. Remove the stabilizer bar bushing. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Stabilizer Link: > 09-24-2 > Dec > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Front End Click/Pop On Bumps Stabilizer Link: Customer Interest Steering/Suspension - Front End Click/Pop On Bumps TSB 09-24-2 12/14/09 CLICK/POP NOISE FROM FRONT STABILIZER BAR END LINK AREA WHEN DRIVING OVER BUMPS - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 10/9/2009 FORD: 2005-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2005-2010 Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner and 2006-2010 Mariner Hybrid vehicles built on or before 10/9/2009 may exhibit a click/pop noise from the front end when going over bumps. This may be due to the stabilizer bar end link to strut (upper) attachment. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Using chassis ears, can the click/pop noise be isolated to the stabilizer bar end links? a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Follow normal Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-00 diagnostics. b. Yes - Proceed to Step 2. 2. Inspect the stabilizer bar end link to strut (upper) attachment nuts for signs of looseness. Is any evidence present of loose upper nuts? a. No - Replace stabilizer bar end links and install revised upper nuts per WSM, Section 204-01. NOTE THE REVISED, TALLER NUTS CANNOT BE INSTALLED ON THE STABILIZER BAR END LINK LOWER ATTACHMENT. b. Yes - Remove and replace both upper nuts with revised, taller nuts per WSM, Section 204-01. Torque to 46 lb-ft (63 N.m). It is not necessary to replace the stabilizer bar end link. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092402A 2005-2010 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. Mariner, Escape Hybrid, 2006-2010 Mariner Hybrid: Diagnose With Chassis Ears And Road Test, Inspect Stabilizer Bar End Links, Replace Four (4) Stabilizer End Link Nuts Or Stabilizer Bar End Links (Do Not Use With Any Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Stabilizer Link: > 09-24-2 > Dec > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Front End Click/Pop On Bumps > Page 5020 Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5K483 24 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Stabilizer Link: > 09-24-2 > Dec > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Front End Click/Pop On Bumps Stabilizer Link: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Front End Click/Pop On Bumps TSB 09-24-2 12/14/09 CLICK/POP NOISE FROM FRONT STABILIZER BAR END LINK AREA WHEN DRIVING OVER BUMPS - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 10/9/2009 FORD: 2005-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2005-2010 Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner and 2006-2010 Mariner Hybrid vehicles built on or before 10/9/2009 may exhibit a click/pop noise from the front end when going over bumps. This may be due to the stabilizer bar end link to strut (upper) attachment. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Using chassis ears, can the click/pop noise be isolated to the stabilizer bar end links? a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Follow normal Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-00 diagnostics. b. Yes - Proceed to Step 2. 2. Inspect the stabilizer bar end link to strut (upper) attachment nuts for signs of looseness. Is any evidence present of loose upper nuts? a. No - Replace stabilizer bar end links and install revised upper nuts per WSM, Section 204-01. NOTE THE REVISED, TALLER NUTS CANNOT BE INSTALLED ON THE STABILIZER BAR END LINK LOWER ATTACHMENT. b. Yes - Remove and replace both upper nuts with revised, taller nuts per WSM, Section 204-01. Torque to 46 lb-ft (63 N.m). It is not necessary to replace the stabilizer bar end link. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092402A 2005-2010 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. Mariner, Escape Hybrid, 2006-2010 Mariner Hybrid: Diagnose With Chassis Ears And Road Test, Inspect Stabilizer Bar End Links, Replace Four (4) Stabilizer End Link Nuts Or Stabilizer Bar End Links (Do Not Use With Any Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Stabilizer Link: > 09-24-2 > Dec > 09 > Steering/Suspension - Front End Click/Pop On Bumps > Page 5026 Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5K483 24 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Stabilizer Bar, Sway Control > Stabilizer Link > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5027 Stabilizer Link: Service and Repair Stabilizer Bar Link Removal and Installation 1. Remove the wheel and tire. 2. NOTE: Use the hex holding feature to prevent the ball stud from turning while removing or installing the stabilizer bar link nut. Remove the upper stabilizer bar link nut. ^ To install, tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft). 3. NOTE: Use the hex holding feature to prevent the ball stud from turning while removing or installing the stabilizer link nut. Remove the lower stabilizer bar link nut. ^ To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft). 4. NOTE: Inspect the stabilizer bar link ball joints and boots for wear. If necessary, install new parts. Remove the stabilizer bar link. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Front Subframe: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 5037 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 5038 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Front Subframe: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 5044 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 5045 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 08-20-11 > Oct > 08 > Brakes - Rear Brake Rotational Chirp Noise Wheel Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Rear Brake Rotational Chirp Noise TSB 08-20-11 10/13/08 REAR BRAKE NOISE - ROTATIONAL CHIRP - (EXCLUDES HYBRID) FORD: 2008 Escape MERCURY: 2008 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 08-11-2 to update the Service procedure. ISSUE Some 2008 Escape and Mariner (Excludes Hybrid) vehicles may exhibit a noise from the rear brakes while coming to a stop. This condition does not affect brake performance. The noise is typically described as a cyclic, scraping, or rotational chirp noise. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE To better determine if this procedure is applicable, be advised of the following characteristics: ^ The noise this procedure addresses is unlike a typical brake squeak. ^ It is often described as a groan noise or scraping noise which is cyclic and follows wheel speed. ^ Vehicles will usually exhibit the noise at speeds under 20 MPH (32 Km/h). ^ This noise will only be present when the brakes are very warm or hot such as experienced in stop and go traffic. Vehicles built prior to 6/15/2007 follow both procedures A and B. Vehicles built after 6/15/2007 perform only procedure B. NOTE PERFORMING PROCEDURE B IS THE MOST CRITICAL PART OF THIS REPAIR. ADDING LUBRICANT TO THE WHEEL CYLINDER PISTONS WILL REDUCE FRICTION BETWEEN THE WHEEL CYLINDER PISTON AND ALUMINUM WHEEL CYLINDER WALL ELIMINATING NOISE SOURCE. PROCEDURE A 1. Replace the rear brake shoes. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 206-02. 2. Apply Motorcraft® Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound to the contact points between the shoe and the rear backing plate. Ensure grease will not contact brake lining surface. PROCEDURE B Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 08-20-11 > Oct > 08 > Brakes - Rear Brake Rotational Chirp Noise > Page 5051 1. Remove the rear brake shoe return springs brake shoes, and wheel cylinder dust boots. Using your hands, push one piston into the wheel cylinder until the opposite side piston is exposed. Be sure the wheel cylinder piston is extending out beyond the end of the wheel cylinder sufficient to allow complete coverage of the piston surface and piston seal. It is possible and recommended to have the piston cup seal slightly exposed when performing this operation (Figure 1). 2. Apply Motorcraft(R) Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound around the wheel cylinder pistons and then repeat procedure for opposite side wheel cylinder pistons. Be sure to pack the grease into the wheel cylinder bore to ensure grease gets back to the piston seal. (Figure 2) 3. Once both wheel cylinder pistons have been lubricated, shuttle the pistons side to side three (3) or more times to distribute the lubricant and ensure smooth movement. (Figure 3) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 08-20-11 > Oct > 08 > Brakes - Rear Brake Rotational Chirp Noise > Page 5052 Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 082011A 2008 Escape/Mariner: 1.0 Hrs. Remove The Rear Brake Shoes, Apply Motorcraft Silicone Brake Caliper Grease Following Service Procedure, Replace The Rear Brake Shoes If Necessary (Do Not Use With 2001BB, 2001B1B) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 2200 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 5053 Front Subframe: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 5054 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 5055 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 5056 MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 5057 (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 5058 Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5059 Front Subframe: Description and Operation FRONT SUBFRAME The front subframe is bolted to the body and is used to: - aid in structural support. - provide mounting surfaces for the front suspension control arms. - provide a mounting point for the engine isolators. - provide the mounting surface for the steering gear. - provide the mounting surface for the sway bar. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5060 Front Subframe: Service and Repair SUBFRAME - FRONT Special Tool(s) Removal and Installation NOTE: Escape All-Wheel Drive (AWD) shown, all other vehicles similar. Escape All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Shown (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5061 Escape All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Shown (Part 2) NOTE: Escape and Mariner only. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5062 Escape And Mariner Only NOTE: Escape Hybrid only. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5063 Escape Hybrid Only All vehicles NOTICE: Suspension and subframe fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital parts and systems and their failure can result in major service expense. A new part with the same part number must be installed if installation becomes necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5064 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Turn the wheels to the straight ahead position and remove the key. Hybrid vehicles 3. Disconnect the high-voltage traction battery. For additional information, refer to Hybrid Drive Systems. 4. Remove the rear transmission insulator and retainer. All vehicles 5. Remove the front tires. 6. NOTICE: - Do not reuse the Constant Velocity (CV) joint bolts and washers. Install new bolts and washers or damage to the vehicle may occur. - Do not reuse the bolts and cap straps for the center U-joint. Install new bolts and cap straps or damage to the vehicle may occur. NOTE: Index-mark the front driveshaft to the center bearing. Remove the front driveshaft, if equipped. Remove the 6 front driveshaft-to-transfer case bolts and washers. Discard the bolts and washers. To install, tighten to 37 Nm (27 lb-ft). - Remove the 4 U-joint cap strap bolts and 2 cap straps and remove the front driveshaft. Discard the U-joint cap strap bolts and cap straps. To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). 7. Remove the 4 bolts (2 each side) and the lateral support crossmember. - To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). 8. Remove the exhaust flexible pipe (2.3L) or the dual converter Y-pipe (3.0L). 9. Remove the 6 bolts and the scrivet from the LH splash shield and remove the splash shield. 10. Remove the engine support crossmember front insulator bolt. - To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5065 11. Remove the 2 engine support crossmember bolts. - To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft). Hybrid vehicles only 12. Remove the 2 bolts from the lower transmission insulator and retainer bracket. All vehicles 13. Remove the nut and the engine support crossmember. Discard the nut. - To install, tighten to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft). All vehicles except hybrid 14. Remove the rear transaxle support isolator through bolt. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5066 - To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). All vehicles 15. Remove the power steering coupler bolt. Discard the bolt. - To install, tighten to 63Nm (46 lb-ft). 16. Remove the 2 outer tie-rod end nuts. Discard the nuts. - To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft). 17. Using the Tie-Rod End Remover, separate the tie rod from the wheel knuckle. 18. NOTE: Use the hex-holding fixture to prevent the ball stud from turning while removing and installing the stabilizer link nut. Remove the 2 lower stabilizer bar link nuts. Discard the nuts. To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft). 19. Remove the 2 lower control arm ball joint pinch bolt nuts and pinch bolts. Discard the nuts and the bolts. - To install, tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft). 20. Using a suitable lift, support the front subframe. 21. NOTE: - Do not allow the front subframe rear bolts to come out of the lower control arm bushing. - When installing the front subframe rear bolts, make sure both of the front subframe rear bolts are fully engaged in their cage nuts before tightening to specification. Loosen the 2 front subframe rear bolts. To install, tighten to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft). 22. Remove the 2 front subframe nuts. - To install, tighten to 150 Nm (111 lb-ft). 23. NOTE: The lower control arm ball joints must be disconnected from the spindles at the same time the subframe is lowered. With an assistant, remove the front subframe. 24. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Transfer the components as necessary. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Front Subframe Mount: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 5075 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 5076 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Front Subframe Mount: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 5082 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 5083 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 5084 Front Subframe Mount: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 5085 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 5086 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 5087 MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 5088 (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 5089 Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Rear Subframe: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 5098 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 5099 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Rear Subframe: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 5105 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 5106 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 5107 Rear Subframe: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 5108 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 5109 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 5110 MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 5111 (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 5112 Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5113 Rear Subframe: Description and Operation REAR SUBFRAME The rear subframe is bolted to the body and is used to: - aid in structural support. - provide mounting surfaces for the rear suspension control arms. - provide mounting surfaces for the rear differential (all-wheel drive [AWD]). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5114 Rear Subframe: Service and Repair SUBFRAME - REAR Removal All vehicles 1. NOTICE: Suspension and subframe fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital parts and systems and their failure can result in major service expense. A new part with the same part number must be installed if installation becomes necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. Vehicles with all All-Wheel Drive (AWD) 2. Remove the rear axle assembly. All vehicles Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5115 3. Remove the rear stabilizer bar link upper nuts. 4. Remove the 4 bolts and position the 4 rear control arms aside. 5. Remove and discard the exhaust hanger from the subframe. 6. With an assistant, remove the 4 bolts and the rear subframe. Installation All vehicles 1. With an assistant, position the rear subframe and install the bolts. - To install, tighten the rear bolts to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). - To install, tighten the front bolts to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). 2. Install a new exhaust hanger on the subframe. 3. NOTE: The vehicle must be at ride height before tightening the bolts. Position the 4 rear control arms into the subframe. Loosely install the bolts. 4. Install the rear stabilizer bar link upper nuts. - Tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). Vehicles with AWD 5. Install the rear axle assembly. All vehicles 6. Tighten the 4 rear control arms bolts. - Tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5116 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Rear Subframe Mount: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 5125 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 5126 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Rear Subframe Mount: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 5132 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 5133 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 5134 Rear Subframe Mount: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 5135 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 5136 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 5137 MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 5138 (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 5139 Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Removal and Replacement Front Strut and Spring Assembly Strut And Spring Assembly Removal NOTE: LH side shown, RH side similar. 1. NOTE: Verify the steering wheel is in the unlocked position before removal. Remove the wheel and tire. 2. Remove the brake jounce hose clip. 3. Pull the brake jounce hose downward slightly to remove the hose from the bracket and position the brake jounce hose aside. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 5144 4. Remove the anti-lock brake system (ABS) wheel speed sensor harness bolt. 5. NOTE: Use the hex holding feature to prevent the ball stud from turning while removing or installing the stabilizer bar link nut. Remove the upper stabilizer bar link nut. 6. Remove the 2 strut-to-knuckle nuts and bolts. 7. NOTE: Reference mark the 4 strut upper bushing plate nuts. Remove the 4 strut upper bushing nuts. 8. CAUTION: Do not allow the axle shaft to move outboard. Over-extension of the tripod CV joint can result in the separation of internal parts, causing failure of the axle shaft. Remove the strut and spring assembly. 9. For additional information on the disassembly and assembly of the strut and spring assembly, refer to Strut and Spring Assembly Disassembly and Assembly. See: Overhaul Installation 1. Position the strut and spring assembly upper mounting plate into the inner fender. 2. Align the 4 strut upper bushing nuts to the reference marks. ^ Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 3. Install the 2 strut-to-knuckle bolts and nuts. ^ Tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). 4. Install the upper stabilizer bar link nut. ^ Tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft). 5. Install the ABS wheel speed sensor harness bolt. ^ Tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). 6. Position the brake jounce hose to the bracket and install the brake jounce hose clip. 7. Check the front end alignment and adjust as necessary. Rear Spring Removal NOTE: LH shown, RH similar. All vehicles 1. Remove the wheel and tire. 2. Remove the brake hose bracket-to-wheel knuckle bolt. Vehicles with drum brakes 3. Disconnect the brake tube from the wheel cylinder and remove the brake tube bracket. Vehicles with disc brakes 4. CAUTION: Do not allow the brake caliper to hang from the brake hose or damage to the hose can occur. Remove the 2 brake caliper guide bolts and position the brake caliper aside. ^ Support the caliper using mechanic's wire. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 5145 All vehicles 5. Support the wheel knuckle and remove and discard the upper ball joint nut. 6. Remove and discard the lower shock absorber nut, washer and bolt. 7. Remove and discard the upper arm inner bolt and remove the upper arm. ^ Loosen the lower arm inner bolt. 8. NOTE: Note the position of the coil spring insulator and coil spring for installation. Carefully lower the wheel knuckle support. 9. Remove the coil spring. Installation All vehicles 1. Align the coil spring and coil spring insulator to the previously noted position. 2. Carefully raise the wheel knuckle support. 3. Position the upper control arm and install the upper arm inner bolt. ^ Tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft) with the weight of the vehicle on the wheels and tires. 4. Install the lower shock absorber bolt, washer and nut. ^ Tighten to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft). 5. Install the upper ball joint nut and remove the wheel knuckle support. ^ Tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft). Vehicles with disc brakes 6. Position the brake caliper and install the 2 brake caliper guide pin bolts. ^ Tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft). Vehicles with drum brakes 7. Connect the brake tube fitting to the wheel cylinder. ^ Tighten to 17 Nm (13 lb-ft). 8. Install the brake tube bracket bolt. ^ Tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb-ft). All vehicles 9. Install the brake hose bracket-to-wheel knuckle bolt. ^ Tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb-ft). Vehicles with drum brakes 10. Bleed the brake system. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 5146 Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ): Overhaul Strut and Spring Assembly Strut And Spring Assembly Disassembly and Assembly 1. WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. NOTE: Do not use an impact wrench on the nut. Mount the strut and spring assembly in a suitable spring compressor. 2. Compress the coil spring enough to relieve the tension on the strut assembly. 3. Remove the strut piston rod-to-bushing nut. ^ To assemble, tighten to 103 Nm (76 lb-ft). 4. Remove the strut. 5. Remove the lower coil spring insulator. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf ) > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 5147 6. Remove the coil spring. 7. Remove the upper coil spring insulator. 8. NOTE: During assembly, assemble the bearing plate to the strut so the arrow on the bearing plate points to the outboard side of the vehicle when the strut is installed. Remove the bearing plate. 9. Remove the bearing. 10. Remove the strut upper bushing. 11. Remove the dust boot and the bumper. 12. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 09-6-5 > Apr > 09 > Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Customer Interest Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises TSB 09-6-5 04/06/09 NOISE - FRONT STRUT AREA FORD: 2001-2009 Escape 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid MERCURY: 2005-2009 Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid ISSUE Some 2001-2009 Escape, 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner and 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a pop, rub, grunt, squeak, and/or creak noise from the front strut area during slow, lock-to-lock turns such as parking maneuvers. Vehicles built on or before 1/13/2009 may also exhibit a clunk, crunch, thump, and/or knocking noise from the front strut area while driving over a series of bumps and/or rough roads. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Using chassis ears on the front strut mounts is pop, rub, grunt, squeak, creak, clunk, crunch, thump, and/or knocking noise present from the front strut area during slow parking lot type maneuvers? a. No - Procedure does not apply, proceed with normal Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-00 diagnostics. b. Yes on turns - Boot may be binding, go to Step 2 Dust Boot Greasing Procedure. c. Yes over bumps (built on or before 1/13/2009) - Go to Step 3 Dust Boot Replacement Procedure and install new dust boot designed for this concern. d. Yes over bumps (built after 1/13/09) - Procedure does not apply. Proceed with normal WSM, Section 204-00 diagnostics. 2. Dust Boot Greasing Procedure. a. Raise the vehicle per WSM, Section 100-02. b. Reach through the spring and pull the strut dust boot and jounce bumper assembly straight down, out of the upper spring seat. c. Apply Motorcraft(R) Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound. (Figure 1) (1) To the entire length of the chrome strut rod above the jounce bumper and 360 degrees around the rod. (2) To the top and sides of the uppermost part of the dust cover. d. Raise dust cover so that jounce bumper is accessible and apply 360 degrees to the jounce bumper itself. e. Slide the dust cover and jounce bumper upward into its original location on the strut. f. Repeat the procedure on the other side of the vehicle. 3. Dust Boot Replacement Procedure (vehicles built on/before 1/13/2009). a. Remove front strut per WSM, Section 204-01. b. Disassemble front strut and replace dust boot with latest level part per WSM, Section 204-01. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 09-6-5 > Apr > 09 > Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises > Page 5156 C. Apply Motorcraft Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound. (Figure 1) (1) To the entire length of the chrome strut rod above the jounce bumper and 360 degrees around the rod. (2) To the top and sides of the uppermost part of the dust boot. (3) Apply 360 degrees to the jounce bumper itself. d. Assemble front strut and install per WSM, Section 204-01. e. Repeat the procedure on the other side of the vehicle. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 090605A 2001-2009 Escape, 0.7 Hr. 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Apply Grease Following Service Procedure. Includes Time To Evaluate Noise With Chassis Ears and Road Test (Do Not Use With 1007D, 18124A) 090605B 2001-2009 Escape, 1.5 Hrs. 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Strut Dust Boots, Apply Grease Following Service Procedure. Includes Time To Evaluate Noise With Chassis Ears and Road Test Can Be Claimed With Operations C And D (Do Not Use With 1007D, 18124A) 090605C 2001-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Check Caster, Camber and, Toe-In Can Be Claimed With Operation B And D (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F) 090605D 2001-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Correct Caster, Camber And Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 09-6-5 > Apr > 09 > Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises > Page 5157 Toe-In Can Be Claimed With Operation B And C (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 18A179 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 09-6-5 > Apr > 09 > Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises TSB 09-6-5 04/06/09 NOISE - FRONT STRUT AREA FORD: 2001-2009 Escape 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid MERCURY: 2005-2009 Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid ISSUE Some 2001-2009 Escape, 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner and 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid vehicles may exhibit a pop, rub, grunt, squeak, and/or creak noise from the front strut area during slow, lock-to-lock turns such as parking maneuvers. Vehicles built on or before 1/13/2009 may also exhibit a clunk, crunch, thump, and/or knocking noise from the front strut area while driving over a series of bumps and/or rough roads. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Using chassis ears on the front strut mounts is pop, rub, grunt, squeak, creak, clunk, crunch, thump, and/or knocking noise present from the front strut area during slow parking lot type maneuvers? a. No - Procedure does not apply, proceed with normal Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-00 diagnostics. b. Yes on turns - Boot may be binding, go to Step 2 Dust Boot Greasing Procedure. c. Yes over bumps (built on or before 1/13/2009) - Go to Step 3 Dust Boot Replacement Procedure and install new dust boot designed for this concern. d. Yes over bumps (built after 1/13/09) - Procedure does not apply. Proceed with normal WSM, Section 204-00 diagnostics. 2. Dust Boot Greasing Procedure. a. Raise the vehicle per WSM, Section 100-02. b. Reach through the spring and pull the strut dust boot and jounce bumper assembly straight down, out of the upper spring seat. c. Apply Motorcraft(R) Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound. (Figure 1) (1) To the entire length of the chrome strut rod above the jounce bumper and 360 degrees around the rod. (2) To the top and sides of the uppermost part of the dust cover. d. Raise dust cover so that jounce bumper is accessible and apply 360 degrees to the jounce bumper itself. e. Slide the dust cover and jounce bumper upward into its original location on the strut. f. Repeat the procedure on the other side of the vehicle. 3. Dust Boot Replacement Procedure (vehicles built on/before 1/13/2009). a. Remove front strut per WSM, Section 204-01. b. Disassemble front strut and replace dust boot with latest level part per WSM, Section 204-01. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 09-6-5 > Apr > 09 > Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises > Page 5163 C. Apply Motorcraft Silicone Brake Caliper Grease and Dielectric Compound. (Figure 1) (1) To the entire length of the chrome strut rod above the jounce bumper and 360 degrees around the rod. (2) To the top and sides of the uppermost part of the dust boot. (3) Apply 360 degrees to the jounce bumper itself. d. Assemble front strut and install per WSM, Section 204-01. e. Repeat the procedure on the other side of the vehicle. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 090605A 2001-2009 Escape, 0.7 Hr. 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Apply Grease Following Service Procedure. Includes Time To Evaluate Noise With Chassis Ears and Road Test (Do Not Use With 1007D, 18124A) 090605B 2001-2009 Escape, 1.5 Hrs. 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Replace The Strut Dust Boots, Apply Grease Following Service Procedure. Includes Time To Evaluate Noise With Chassis Ears and Road Test Can Be Claimed With Operations C And D (Do Not Use With 1007D, 18124A) 090605C 2001-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Check Caster, Camber and, Toe-In Can Be Claimed With Operation B And D (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F) 090605D 2001-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2009 Escape Hybrid, Mariner, 2006-2009 Mariner Hybrid: Correct Caster, Camber And Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: > 09-6-5 > Apr > 09 > Suspension - Front Strut Pop/Rub/Grunt/Squeak Noises > Page 5164 Toe-In Can Be Claimed With Operation B And C (Do Not Use With 2001B, 2001B1, 2001B5, 2001B8, 2219D, 2219D2, 3185B, 3001A, 3001A6F) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 18A179 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5165 Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Diagrams Shock Absorber and Spring Assembly - Exploded View Shock Absorber And Spring Assembly - (Exploded View) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Removal and Replacement Front Suspension Strut and Spring Assembly Strut And Spring Assembly Removal NOTE: LH side shown, RH side similar. 1. NOTE: Verify the steering wheel is in the unlocked position before removal. Remove the wheel and tire. 2. Remove the brake jounce hose clip. 3. Pull the brake jounce hose downward slightly to remove the hose from the bracket and position the brake jounce hose aside. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 5168 4. Remove the anti-lock brake system (ABS) wheel speed sensor harness bolt. 5. NOTE: Use the hex holding feature to prevent the ball stud from turning while removing or installing the stabilizer bar link nut. Remove the upper stabilizer bar link nut. 6. Remove the 2 strut-to-knuckle nuts and bolts. 7. NOTE: Reference mark the 4 strut upper bushing plate nuts. Remove the 4 strut upper bushing nuts. 8. CAUTION: Do not allow the axle shaft to move outboard. Over-extension of the tripod CV joint can result in the separation of internal parts, causing failure of the axle shaft. Remove the strut and spring assembly. 9. For additional information on the disassembly and assembly of the strut and spring assembly, refer to Strut and Spring Assembly Disassembly and Assembly. See: Suspension Spring ( Coil / Leaf )/Service and Repair/Overhaul Installation 1. Position the strut and spring assembly upper mounting plate into the inner fender. 2. Align the 4 strut upper bushing nuts to the reference marks. ^ Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 3. Install the 2 strut-to-knuckle bolts and nuts. ^ Tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). 4. Install the upper stabilizer bar link nut. ^ Tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft). 5. Install the ABS wheel speed sensor harness bolt. ^ Tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). 6. Position the brake jounce hose to the bracket and install the brake jounce hose clip. 7. Check the front end alignment and adjust as necessary. Rear Suspension Shock Absorber Removal and Installation 1. Remove the rear quarter trim panel. For additional information, refer to Trim Panel. 2. Remove the wheel and tire. 3. Remove and discard the upper shock absorber nuts, washer and bushing. ^ To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 4. Remove and discard the lower shock absorber nut, washer and bolt. ^ To install, tighten to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft). 5. Remove the shock absorber and the bushing. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 5169 Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Overhaul Strut and Spring Assembly Strut And Spring Assembly Disassembly and Assembly 1. WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. NOTE: Do not use an impact wrench on the nut. Mount the strut and spring assembly in a suitable spring compressor. 2. Compress the coil spring enough to relieve the tension on the strut assembly. 3. Remove the strut piston rod-to-bushing nut. ^ To assemble, tighten to 103 Nm (76 lb-ft). 4. Remove the strut. 5. Remove the lower coil spring insulator. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 5170 6. Remove the coil spring. 7. Remove the upper coil spring insulator. 8. NOTE: During assembly, assemble the bearing plate to the strut so the arrow on the bearing plate points to the outboard side of the vehicle when the strut is installed. Remove the bearing plate. 9. Remove the bearing. 10. Remove the strut upper bushing. 11. Remove the dust boot and the bumper. 12. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Diagrams Wheel Bearing: Diagrams Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub - Exploded View Wheel Bearing And Wheel Hub - Exploded View Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub Special Tool(s) (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5176 Special Tool(s) (Part 2) Removal NOTE: If removing the wheel hub, a new wheel bearing must be installed. 1. Remove the wheel knuckle. 2. Using the special tool, press the wheel hub from the wheel bearing. 3. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel knuckle after removing the wheel hub. Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub. 4. Remove the snap ring. 5. Using the special tools, press the outer wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle. Installation 1. Position the wheel knuckle in a vise. 2. NOTE: Special tool 205-278 is not seen in place. It is located behind the wheel knuckle. Using the special tools, install the wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5177 3. Install the snap ring. 4. Using the special tool, press the wheel hub into the wheel bearing. 5. Install the wheel knuckle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5178 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Wheel Bearing Special Tool(s) (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5179 Special Tool(s) (Part 1) Removal NOTE: LH shown, RH similar. All wheel drive (AWD) vehicles 1. Remove the wheel knuckle. Front wheel drive (FWD) vehicles 2. Remove and discard the wheel hub nut. 3. Remove the ABS wheel speed sensor ring. All vehicles 4. Using the special tools, remove the wheel hub. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5180 5. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel knuckle after removing the wheel hub. Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub. 6. Remove the wheel bearing snap ring from the wheel knuckle. FWD vehicles 7. Using the special tools, remove the wheel bearing from the wheel knuckle. AWD vehicles 8. Using the special tools, press the wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5181 Installation All vehicles 1. Using the special tools, install a new wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle. 2. Install the wheel bearing snap ring. 3. Using the special tools, install the wheel hub into the wheel bearing. FWD vehicles 4. Install the ABS wheel speed sensor ring. 5. Install the wheel hub nut. ^ Tighten to 290 Nm (214 lb-ft). AWD vehicles 6. Install the wheel knuckle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications > Front Axle Nut: Specifications Front Front wheel hub nut ............................................................................................................................. .................................................... 300 Nm (222 lb-ft) Install a new front wheel hub nut. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Suspension > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications > Front > Page 5187 Axle Nut: Specifications Rear Rear wheel hub nut ............................................................................................................................. ..................................................... 290 Nm (214 lb-ft) Install a new rear wheel hub nut. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Vehicle Lifting > Component Information > Description and Operation Vehicle Lifting: Description and Operation JACKING AND LIFTING WARNING: - When jacking or lifting the vehicle, block all wheels remaining on the ground. Set the parking brake if the rear wheels will remain on the ground. These actions help prevent unintended vehicle movement. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Never get underneath a vehicle that is supported only by a jack. The jack could unintentionally lower. Always support vehicle with floor stands. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Only raise the vehicle when positioned on a hard, level surface. Attempting to raise the vehicle on an uneven or soft surface may result in vehicle slipping or falling from the jack or jackstand. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. - Vehicle may have multiple drive wheels. Do not use engine to power the driveline unless all drive wheels are elevated off the ground. Drive wheels in contact with ground could cause unexpected vehicle movement. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. CAUTION: - The jack provided with the vehicle is intended to be used in an emergency for changing a deflated tire. To avoid damage to the vehicle, never use the jack to hoist the vehicle for any other purpose. - Under no circumstances should the vehicle ever be lifted by the front or rear control arms, halfshafts or front wheel constant velocity (CV) joints. Severe damage to the vehicle could result. - To prevent possible damage to the underbody, do not drive the vehicle onto the drive-on lift without first checking for possible interference. - Damage to the suspension, exhaust or steering linkage components may occur if care is not exercised when positioning the hoist adapters prior to lifting the vehicle. Front and Rear - Jacking and Lifting Points Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training Special Tool(s) NOTE: If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, the sensors will go into a "sleep mode" to conserve battery power. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information to the smart junction box (SJB). For additional information, refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation. NOTE: The tire pressure sensor training procedure must be done on a single vehicle, in an area without radio frequency noise and at least 1 m (3 ft) away from other vehicles equipped with tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS). Radio frequency noise is generated by electrical motors and appliance operation, cellular telephones, remote transmitters, power inverters and portable entertainment equipment. NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the activation tool, attempt to activate the same sensor with the activation tool. If the sensor still does not respond, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least 1/4 of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. NOTE: The SJB has a 2-minute time limit between sensor responses. If the SJB does not recognize any 1 of the 4 tire pressure sensors during this time limit, the horn will sound twice and the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE NOT TRAINED REPEAT and the entire procedure must be repeated. NOTE: For vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures (such as the E-Series and certain F-Series), the tire pressure sensors must be trained following a tire rotation. Failure to train the sensors will cause the TPMS indicator to illuminate. For vehicles with the same tire pressure for front and rear tires, tire rotation will not affect the system. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then press and release the brake pedal. 2. Cycle the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN position. 3. Press and release the brake pedal. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 5. Turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN position. ^ The horn will sound once and the TPMS indicator will flash if the training mode has been entered successfully. If equipped, the message center will display TRAIN LF TIRE. 6. NOTE: It may take up to 6 seconds to activate a tire pressure sensor. During this time, the activation tool must remain in place 180 degrees from the valve stem. Place the activation tool on the LF tire sidewall opposite (180 degrees) from the valve stem. Press and release the test button on the special tool. The horn will sound briefly to indicate that the tire pressure sensor has been recognized by the SJB. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page 5197 7. Within 2 minutes of the horn sounding, place the activation tool on the RF tire sidewall opposite (180 degrees) from the valve stem and press and release the test button to train the RF tire pressure sensor. 8. NOTE: Do not wait more than 2 minutes between training each sensor or the SJB will time out and the entire procedure must be repeated. Repeat Step 7 for the RR and LR tires. The procedure is completed after the last tire has been trained. When the training procedure is complete, the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE TRAINING COMPLETE. For vehicles not equipped with a message center, successful completion of the training procedure will be verified by turning the ignition switch to the OFF position without the horn sounding. If the horn sounds twice when the switch is turned to the OFF position, the training procedure was not successful. 9. Using the scan tool, locate the updated TPMS sensor IDs trained to the SJB and document them on the applicable warranty claim. 10. NOTE: This step is required to clear DTC C2780, cause the SJB to exit the manufacturing mode and to make sure there are no other concerns with a newly programmed SJB. If the sensors are being trained due to the installation of a new SJB, clear any DTCs and perform the SJB on-demand self test. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page 5198 Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation Special Tool(s) NOTE: The tire pressure sensors will go into a 14 sleep mode" after 30 minutes of inactivity to conserve battery power. The sensors do not transmit information while in sleep mode, it will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Position the tire pressure monitor activation tool against the LF tire sidewall 180 degrees from the tire valve stem. 3. NOTE: The activation tool will provide feedback in the form of a flashing green light and a beep sound for each successful response from a tire pressure sensor. Press the test button on the activation tool to activate the sensor, activate the sensor at least 2 times. 4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the remaining tires. 5. If the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) indicator remains illuminated after adjusting and activating each sensor, refer to the Symptom Chart in Diagnosis and Testing. See: Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Disassembly WARNING: The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) sensor battery may release hazardous chemicals if exposed to extreme mechanical damage. If these chemicals contact the skin or eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention. If any part of the battery is swallowed, contact a physician immediately. When disposing of TPMS sensors, follow the correct procedures for hazardous material disposal. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTE: Tire pressure sensors are equipped with Lithium-ion batteries and must be disposed of accordingly. NOTE: Tire pressure sensors are manufactured in multiple colors based on their application. When installing a new sensor, make sure the color of the sensor being installed matches the color of the sensor that was removed. The different colored sensors are not interchangeable. NOTE: The sensor can be removed and installed without removing the strap or the cradle. 1. CAUTION: The sensor, cradle and strap may be damaged by incorrect tire mounting or dismounting. Dismount the tire only as instructed. Remove the tire from the wheel. 2. CAUTION: Do not use a large screwdriver. Apply minimum force during removal or damage to the sensor locking clip may occur. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 5201 Using a pocket screwdriver or similar tool, remove the sensor locking clip. 3. CAUTION: Do not use a large screwdriver. Apply minimum force during removal or damage to the sensor may occur. Using a pocket screwdriver or similar tool, detach the sensor from the cradle. Assembly 1. CAUTION: Damage to the sensor may occur if excessive force is applied during sensor installation. NOTE: Make sure the sensor is fully seated into the cradle. The sensor will make a "click" noise when correctly seated. Position the sensor into the cradle by inserting the fringe end of the sensor into the hook end of the cradle and pushing the opposite end of the sensor down onto the cradle. 2. NOTE: The locking clip can only be fully seated when installed in the correct orientation. If the sensor locking clip cannot be fully inserted, then the sensor may not be fully seated on the cradle or the locking clip may be inserted backward. Insert a new locking clip into the sensor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 5202 3. CAUTION: The sensor, cradle and strap may be damaged by incorrect tire mounting or dismounting. Mount the tire only as instructed. Install the tire onto the wheel. 4. NOTE: A new tire pressure sensor is shipped in an off mode (or battery saver mode) and must be turned on before it can be trained. To turn the sensor on, install it on a wheel, mount the tire and inflate the tire to the recommended inflation pressure. Wait at least 2 minutes, then continue with the sensor training procedure. Train the tire pressure sensor(s). For additional information, refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 5203 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Strap and Cradle Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Strap and Cradle Material Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 5204 Disassembly WARNING: The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) sensor battery may release hazardous chemicals if exposed to extreme mechanical damage. If these chemicals contact the skin or eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention. If any part of the battery is swallowed, contact a physician immediately. When disposing of TPMS sensors, follow the correct procedures for hazardous material disposal. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTE: Tire pressure sensors are equipped with Lithium-ion batteries and must be disposed of accordingly. NOTE: Tire pressure sensors are manufactured in multiple colors based on their application. When installing a new sensor, make sure the color of the sensor being installed matches the color of the sensor that was removed. The different colored sensors are not interchangeable. NOTE: The sensor is available separately, the cradle and strap are available as a strap kit. There are several different strap kits available based on wheel diameter but all strap kits share the same base part number. 1. Remove the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) sensor. For additional information, refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor. 2. WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Wear protective gloves when handling components or parts that have pointed or sharp edges. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. Remove a factory installed strap in the following sequence: 1 Locate the strap buckle and secure the strap to the wheel using duct tape or a similar item, on both sides of the buckle approximately 25 mm (0.98 in) from the buckle. 2 Using a large screwdriver and a twisting motion, unbuckle the strap. 3 Discard the strap. 3. To remove a dealer installed strap, turn the worm gear screw until the strap is fully released from the worm gear. ^ Discard the strap. 4. NOTE: To aid assembly, mark the location of the cradle prior to disassembly. Using a screwdriver, or similar tool, remove the cradle by inserting the screwdriver under the cradle and prying up. Assembly 1. NOTE: Make sure the sensor is fully seated into the new cradle. The sensor will make a "click" noise when fully seated. Position the sensor into the new cradle by inserting the fringe end of the sensor into the hook end of the cradle and pushing the opposite end of the sensor down onto the cradle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 5205 2. CAUTION: Metal scrapers may damage the wheel. Use only plastic or non-metallic scrapers to remove the cradle adhesive strip residue. NOTE: The sensor and cradle must be installed in the drop well of the wheel, 180 degrees from the valve stem. Clean the area where the sensor and cradle are to be installed. 3. NOTE: The sensor and cradle must be positioned with the hinge side of the sensor on the RH side when viewed from the curb side (beauty side) of the wheel. NOTE: The sensor has raised markings indicating how to position the sensor. Remove the adhesive tape liner from the cradle and position the sensor and cradle into the wheel drop well 180 degrees from the valve stem. 4. Install the tapered end of the strap through the opening of the cradle on the hinge side of the sensor. This will position the worm gear on the locking clip side of the sensor. 5. CAUTION: Steel wheels have a "high spot" along their circumference. Make sure the strap and sensor are mounted at the lowest spot possible to avoid damaging the sensor during wheel and tire disassembly and assembly. NOTE: Keep the strap parallel with the wheel flange while tightening the worm gear. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Sensors and Switches - Wheels and Tires > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 5206 Position the worm gear 13-26 mm (0.5-1.0 in) away from the sensor and tighten the worm gear. ^ Tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 6. CAUTION: The sensor, cradle and strap may be damaged by incorrect tire mounting or dismounting. Mount the tire only as instructed. Install the tire onto the wheel. 7. NOTE: A new tire pressure sensor is shipped in an off mode (or battery saver mode) and must be turned on before it can be trained. To turn the sensor on, install it on a wheel, mount the tire and inflate the tire to the recommended inflation pressure. Wait at least 2 minutes, then continue with the sensor training procedure. Train the tire pressure sensor(s). For additional information, refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Indicator and Message Center Messages The TPMS indicator and vehicle message center (if equipped) sometimes displays faults that cannot be resolved by the customer. Treat these messages as TPMS faults that must be serviced. Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Indicator Illuminates Continuously NOTE: If the spare tire is in use, the damaged road tire must be repaired and installed on the vehicle to restore complete TPMS functionality before carrying out any diagnosis. NOTE: For vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures (such as E-Series and certain F-Series), the tire pressure sensors must be trained following a tire rotation. Failure to train the sensors will result in a false low tire pressure event, which will cause the TPMS indicator to illuminate. 1. The TPMS indicator remains on continuously for the following condition: ^ Low Tire Pressure - The TPMS indicator is illuminated solid and the message center displays LOW TIRE PRESSURE (if equipped). This is displayed when any of the tire pressures are low. When this condition exists, the tire pressure must be adjusted to the recommended cold pressure as indicated on the vehicle certification label. 2. NOTE: The TPMS sensors do not transmit when the vehicle is stationary. If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, it will be necessary to wake up the sensors so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information to the SJB. If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, carry out the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation procedure. Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Indicator Flashes The TPMS indicator flashes for 70 seconds, then remains ON solid when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, for the following conditions: 1. Tire Pressure Sensor Fault - If equipped, the message center will display TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR FAULT when a tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning. GO to Symptom Chart. See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures 2. No communication with the SJB (TPMS is integral to the SJB) - The TPMS indicator is illuminated when the instrument cluster has not received any signals from the SJB for more than 5 seconds. If equipped, the message center displays TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT. GO to Symptom Chart. See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures 3. Tire Pressure Monitor Fault - If equipped, the message center will display TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT when the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning or communication with the instrument cluster has been lost. GO to Symptom Chart. See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training Special Tool(s) NOTE: If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, the sensors will go into a "sleep mode" to conserve battery power. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information to the smart junction box (SJB). For additional information, refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation. NOTE: The tire pressure sensor training procedure must be done on a single vehicle, in an area without radio frequency noise and at least 1 m (3 ft) away from other vehicles equipped with tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS). Radio frequency noise is generated by electrical motors and appliance operation, cellular telephones, remote transmitters, power inverters and portable entertainment equipment. NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the activation tool, attempt to activate the same sensor with the activation tool. If the sensor still does not respond, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least 1/4 of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. NOTE: The SJB has a 2-minute time limit between sensor responses. If the SJB does not recognize any 1 of the 4 tire pressure sensors during this time limit, the horn will sound twice and the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE NOT TRAINED REPEAT and the entire procedure must be repeated. NOTE: For vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures (such as the E-Series and certain F-Series), the tire pressure sensors must be trained following a tire rotation. Failure to train the sensors will cause the TPMS indicator to illuminate. For vehicles with the same tire pressure for front and rear tires, tire rotation will not affect the system. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then press and release the brake pedal. 2. Cycle the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN position. 3. Press and release the brake pedal. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 5. Turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN position. ^ The horn will sound once and the TPMS indicator will flash if the training mode has been entered successfully. If equipped, the message center will display TRAIN LF TIRE. 6. NOTE: It may take up to 6 seconds to activate a tire pressure sensor. During this time, the activation tool must remain in place 180 degrees from the valve stem. Place the activation tool on the LF tire sidewall opposite (180 degrees) from the valve stem. Press and release the test button on the special tool. The horn will sound briefly to indicate that the tire pressure sensor has been recognized by the SJB. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page 5215 7. Within 2 minutes of the horn sounding, place the activation tool on the RF tire sidewall opposite (180 degrees) from the valve stem and press and release the test button to train the RF tire pressure sensor. 8. NOTE: Do not wait more than 2 minutes between training each sensor or the SJB will time out and the entire procedure must be repeated. Repeat Step 7 for the RR and LR tires. The procedure is completed after the last tire has been trained. When the training procedure is complete, the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE TRAINING COMPLETE. For vehicles not equipped with a message center, successful completion of the training procedure will be verified by turning the ignition switch to the OFF position without the horn sounding. If the horn sounds twice when the switch is turned to the OFF position, the training procedure was not successful. 9. Using the scan tool, locate the updated TPMS sensor IDs trained to the SJB and document them on the applicable warranty claim. 10. NOTE: This step is required to clear DTC C2780, cause the SJB to exit the manufacturing mode and to make sure there are no other concerns with a newly programmed SJB. If the sensors are being trained due to the installation of a new SJB, clear any DTCs and perform the SJB on-demand self test. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page 5216 Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation Special Tool(s) NOTE: The tire pressure sensors will go into a 14 sleep mode" after 30 minutes of inactivity to conserve battery power. The sensors do not transmit information while in sleep mode, it will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Position the tire pressure monitor activation tool against the LF tire sidewall 180 degrees from the tire valve stem. 3. NOTE: The activation tool will provide feedback in the form of a flashing green light and a beep sound for each successful response from a tire pressure sensor. Press the test button on the activation tool to activate the sensor, activate the sensor at least 2 times. 4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the remaining tires. 5. If the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) indicator remains illuminated after adjusting and activating each sensor, refer to the Symptom Chart in Diagnosis and Testing. See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Disassembly WARNING: The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) sensor battery may release hazardous chemicals if exposed to extreme mechanical damage. If these chemicals contact the skin or eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention. If any part of the battery is swallowed, contact a physician immediately. When disposing of TPMS sensors, follow the correct procedures for hazardous material disposal. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTE: Tire pressure sensors are equipped with Lithium-ion batteries and must be disposed of accordingly. NOTE: Tire pressure sensors are manufactured in multiple colors based on their application. When installing a new sensor, make sure the color of the sensor being installed matches the color of the sensor that was removed. The different colored sensors are not interchangeable. NOTE: The sensor can be removed and installed without removing the strap or the cradle. 1. CAUTION: The sensor, cradle and strap may be damaged by incorrect tire mounting or dismounting. Dismount the tire only as instructed. Remove the tire from the wheel. 2. CAUTION: Do not use a large screwdriver. Apply minimum force during removal or damage to the sensor locking clip may occur. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 5219 Using a pocket screwdriver or similar tool, remove the sensor locking clip. 3. CAUTION: Do not use a large screwdriver. Apply minimum force during removal or damage to the sensor may occur. Using a pocket screwdriver or similar tool, detach the sensor from the cradle. Assembly 1. CAUTION: Damage to the sensor may occur if excessive force is applied during sensor installation. NOTE: Make sure the sensor is fully seated into the cradle. The sensor will make a "click" noise when correctly seated. Position the sensor into the cradle by inserting the fringe end of the sensor into the hook end of the cradle and pushing the opposite end of the sensor down onto the cradle. 2. NOTE: The locking clip can only be fully seated when installed in the correct orientation. If the sensor locking clip cannot be fully inserted, then the sensor may not be fully seated on the cradle or the locking clip may be inserted backward. Insert a new locking clip into the sensor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 5220 3. CAUTION: The sensor, cradle and strap may be damaged by incorrect tire mounting or dismounting. Mount the tire only as instructed. Install the tire onto the wheel. 4. NOTE: A new tire pressure sensor is shipped in an off mode (or battery saver mode) and must be turned on before it can be trained. To turn the sensor on, install it on a wheel, mount the tire and inflate the tire to the recommended inflation pressure. Wait at least 2 minutes, then continue with the sensor training procedure. Train the tire pressure sensor(s). For additional information, refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 5221 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Strap and Cradle Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Strap and Cradle Material Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 5222 Disassembly WARNING: The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) sensor battery may release hazardous chemicals if exposed to extreme mechanical damage. If these chemicals contact the skin or eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention. If any part of the battery is swallowed, contact a physician immediately. When disposing of TPMS sensors, follow the correct procedures for hazardous material disposal. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTE: Tire pressure sensors are equipped with Lithium-ion batteries and must be disposed of accordingly. NOTE: Tire pressure sensors are manufactured in multiple colors based on their application. When installing a new sensor, make sure the color of the sensor being installed matches the color of the sensor that was removed. The different colored sensors are not interchangeable. NOTE: The sensor is available separately, the cradle and strap are available as a strap kit. There are several different strap kits available based on wheel diameter but all strap kits share the same base part number. 1. Remove the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) sensor. For additional information, refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor. 2. WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Wear protective gloves when handling components or parts that have pointed or sharp edges. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. Remove a factory installed strap in the following sequence: 1 Locate the strap buckle and secure the strap to the wheel using duct tape or a similar item, on both sides of the buckle approximately 25 mm (0.98 in) from the buckle. 2 Using a large screwdriver and a twisting motion, unbuckle the strap. 3 Discard the strap. 3. To remove a dealer installed strap, turn the worm gear screw until the strap is fully released from the worm gear. ^ Discard the strap. 4. NOTE: To aid assembly, mark the location of the cradle prior to disassembly. Using a screwdriver, or similar tool, remove the cradle by inserting the screwdriver under the cradle and prying up. Assembly 1. NOTE: Make sure the sensor is fully seated into the new cradle. The sensor will make a "click" noise when fully seated. Position the sensor into the new cradle by inserting the fringe end of the sensor into the hook end of the cradle and pushing the opposite end of the sensor down onto the cradle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 5223 2. CAUTION: Metal scrapers may damage the wheel. Use only plastic or non-metallic scrapers to remove the cradle adhesive strip residue. NOTE: The sensor and cradle must be installed in the drop well of the wheel, 180 degrees from the valve stem. Clean the area where the sensor and cradle are to be installed. 3. NOTE: The sensor and cradle must be positioned with the hinge side of the sensor on the RH side when viewed from the curb side (beauty side) of the wheel. NOTE: The sensor has raised markings indicating how to position the sensor. Remove the adhesive tape liner from the cradle and position the sensor and cradle into the wheel drop well 180 degrees from the valve stem. 4. Install the tapered end of the strap through the opening of the cradle on the hinge side of the sensor. This will position the worm gear on the locking clip side of the sensor. 5. CAUTION: Steel wheels have a "high spot" along their circumference. Make sure the strap and sensor are mounted at the lowest spot possible to avoid damaging the sensor during wheel and tire disassembly and assembly. NOTE: Keep the strap parallel with the wheel flange while tightening the worm gear. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 5224 Position the worm gear 13-26 mm (0.5-1.0 in) away from the sensor and tighten the worm gear. ^ Tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 6. CAUTION: The sensor, cradle and strap may be damaged by incorrect tire mounting or dismounting. Mount the tire only as instructed. Install the tire onto the wheel. 7. NOTE: A new tire pressure sensor is shipped in an off mode (or battery saver mode) and must be turned on before it can be trained. To turn the sensor on, install it on a wheel, mount the tire and inflate the tire to the recommended inflation pressure. Wait at least 2 minutes, then continue with the sensor training procedure. Train the tire pressure sensor(s). For additional information, refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheels: > 09-5-8 > Mar > 09 > Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises Wheels: Customer Interest Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises TSB 09-5-8 03/23/09 ROTATIONAL CLICKING NOISE FROM 17 INCH CHROME WHEEL CLADDING - BUILT BEFORE 211/2009 - EXCLUDES HYBRID FORD: 2008-2009 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles (excludes Hybrid), built before 2/01/2009 and equipped with 17 inch chrome clad wheels, may exhibit rotational clicking noise from the chrome cladding (attached to rim) during slow speed parking lot type maneuvers. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE FRONT WHEELS MAY EXHIBIT NOISE MORE THAN REAR WHEELS DUE TO WEIGHT OF THE POWERTRAIN. 1. Verify noise is coming from the chrome cladding on wheel(s) by driving slow parking lot type maneuvers at speeds less than 10 MPH (16 km/h). 2. Mark wheel(s) exhibiting noise, rotate rear wheels to the front, evaluate unmarked wheels for noise, and mark any additional wheel(s) exhibiting noise. 3. Replace marked wheel(s) exhibiting noise with updated service parts per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-04. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 090508A 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.0 Hr. 4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace One (1) Wheel. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer Tire Pressure Monitor Sensor (TPMS) And Balance Assembly (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D) 090508B 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.4 Hrs. 4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Two (2) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wheels: > 09-5-8 > Mar > 09 > Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises > Page 5233 Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D) 090508C 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.8 Hrs. 4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Three (3) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D) 090508D 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 2.1 Hrs. 4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Four (4) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 1007 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-5-8 > Mar > 09 > Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises Wheels: All Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises TSB 09-5-8 03/23/09 ROTATIONAL CLICKING NOISE FROM 17 INCH CHROME WHEEL CLADDING - BUILT BEFORE 211/2009 - EXCLUDES HYBRID FORD: 2008-2009 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles (excludes Hybrid), built before 2/01/2009 and equipped with 17 inch chrome clad wheels, may exhibit rotational clicking noise from the chrome cladding (attached to rim) during slow speed parking lot type maneuvers. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE NOTE FRONT WHEELS MAY EXHIBIT NOISE MORE THAN REAR WHEELS DUE TO WEIGHT OF THE POWERTRAIN. 1. Verify noise is coming from the chrome cladding on wheel(s) by driving slow parking lot type maneuvers at speeds less than 10 MPH (16 km/h). 2. Mark wheel(s) exhibiting noise, rotate rear wheels to the front, evaluate unmarked wheels for noise, and mark any additional wheel(s) exhibiting noise. 3. Replace marked wheel(s) exhibiting noise with updated service parts per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 204-04. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 090508A 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.0 Hr. 4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace One (1) Wheel. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer Tire Pressure Monitor Sensor (TPMS) And Balance Assembly (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D) 090508B 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.4 Hrs. 4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Two (2) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheels > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wheels: > 09-5-8 > Mar > 09 > Wheels - Rotational Clicking Noises > Page 5239 Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D) 090508C 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 1.8 Hrs. 4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Three (3) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D) 090508D 2008-2009 Escape 4X4, 2.1 Hrs. 4X2, Mariner AWD, FWD: Replace Four (4) Wheels. Includes Time To Rotate, Mark, Transfer TPMS And Balance Assemblies (Do Not Use With 1007A, 1007A1, 1015D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 1007 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Diagrams Wheel Bearing: Diagrams Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub - Exploded View Wheel Bearing And Wheel Hub - Exploded View Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Wheel Bearing and Wheel Hub Special Tool(s) (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5245 Special Tool(s) (Part 2) Removal NOTE: If removing the wheel hub, a new wheel bearing must be installed. 1. Remove the wheel knuckle. 2. Using the special tool, press the wheel hub from the wheel bearing. 3. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel knuckle after removing the wheel hub. Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub. 4. Remove the snap ring. 5. Using the special tools, press the outer wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle. Installation 1. Position the wheel knuckle in a vise. 2. NOTE: Special tool 205-278 is not seen in place. It is located behind the wheel knuckle. Using the special tools, install the wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5246 3. Install the snap ring. 4. Using the special tool, press the wheel hub into the wheel bearing. 5. Install the wheel knuckle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5247 Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Wheel Bearing Special Tool(s) (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5248 Special Tool(s) (Part 1) Removal NOTE: LH shown, RH similar. All wheel drive (AWD) vehicles 1. Remove the wheel knuckle. Front wheel drive (FWD) vehicles 2. Remove and discard the wheel hub nut. 3. Remove the ABS wheel speed sensor ring. All vehicles 4. Using the special tools, remove the wheel hub. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5249 5. NOTE: This step may not be necessary if the inner wheel bearing race remains in the wheel knuckle after removing the wheel hub. Using the special tool, press the inner wheel bearing race from the wheel hub. 6. Remove the wheel bearing snap ring from the wheel knuckle. FWD vehicles 7. Using the special tools, remove the wheel bearing from the wheel knuckle. AWD vehicles 8. Using the special tools, press the wheel bearing race from the wheel knuckle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Bearing > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5250 Installation All vehicles 1. Using the special tools, install a new wheel bearing into the wheel knuckle. 2. Install the wheel bearing snap ring. 3. Using the special tools, install the wheel hub into the wheel bearing. FWD vehicles 4. Install the ABS wheel speed sensor ring. 5. Install the wheel hub nut. ^ Tighten to 290 Nm (214 lb-ft). AWD vehicles 6. Install the wheel knuckle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications > Front Axle Nut: Specifications Front Front wheel hub nut ............................................................................................................................. .................................................... 300 Nm (222 lb-ft) Install a new front wheel hub nut. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Hub > Axle Nut > Component Information > Specifications > Front > Page 5256 Axle Nut: Specifications Rear Rear wheel hub nut ............................................................................................................................. ..................................................... 290 Nm (214 lb-ft) Install a new rear wheel hub nut. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Specifications Wheel Fastener: Specifications Wheel lug nuts ..................................................................................................................................... ...................................................... 133 Nm (98 lb-ft) Tighten the wheel nuts in a star pattern Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Front Wheel Studs Removal and Installation 1. Remove the wheel bearing and hub. 2. Using a suitable press, remove the wheel stud from the wheel hub. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Steering and Suspension > Wheels and Tires > Wheel Fastener > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front > Page 5262 Wheel Fastener: Service and Repair Rear Wheel Studs Removal and Installation 1. Remove the wheel bearing and hub. 2. Using a suitable press, remove the wheel studs from the wheel hub. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Door Actuator / Motor: > 10-8-6 > May > 10 > A/C Side To Side Temperature Variations Air Door Actuator / Motor: Customer Interest A/C - Side To Side Temperature Variations TSB 10-8-6 05/10/10 CLIMATE CONTROL TEMPERATURE VARIATION FROM SIDE TO SIDE-BUILT BEFORE 12/17/2008 FORD: 2008-2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner This article supersedes TSB 09-12-6 to update the Service Labor Time Standards. ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built before 12/17/2008 may exhibit intermittent or erratic side to side temperature difference and/or temp fluctuation from the climate control vents. The concern may be with the temperature blend door actuator. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove temperature blend door actuator(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 412-01. 2. Inspect the 5 digit manufacturer's date code on the temperature blend door actuator. It will be the last 5 digits on the second line of manufacturer's data. The first three digits equal day of year. The last two digits equal year. (Figure 1) a. If the part number is 8L84-19E616-EA and the date code is 30708 or lower - replace the temperature blend door actuator assembly. b. If the part number is 8L84-19E616-EA and the date code is 30808 or higher - reinstall the actuator and continue with normal diagnostics per WSM, Section 412-00. c. If the part number is something other than 8L84-19E616-EA - reinstall the actuator and continue with normal diagnostics per WSM, Section 412-00. NOTE IF THE VEHICLE IS EQUIPPED WITH DUAL AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL (DATC), AND EITHER ONE OF THE ACTUATORS EXHIBITS THIS CONCERN AND HAS SUSPECT DATE CODE, THEN REPLACE BOTH RIGHT (RH) AND LEFT HAND (LH) ACTUATORS AS A SET. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Door Actuator / Motor: > 10-8-6 > May > 10 > A/C Side To Side Temperature Variations > Page 5273 Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 100806A 2008 Escape, Mariner, 2.3 Hrs. Escape Hybrid, And Mariner Hybrid: Inspect Or Replace The Right Blend Door Actuator Electronic Manual Temperature Control (EMTC) (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 100806A 2009 Escape, Mariner, 2.7 Hrs. Escape Hybrid, And Mariner Hybrid: Inspect Or Replace The Right Blend Door Actuator Electronic Manual Temperature Control (EMTC) (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 100806B 2009 Escape, Mariner, 2.8 Hrs Escape Hybrid, And Mariner Hybrid: Inspect Or Replace The Both Right And Left Blend Door Actuator Electronic Automatic Temperature Control (EATC) (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 100806B 2008 Escape, Mariner, 2.4 Hrs. Escape Hybrid, And Mariner Hybrid: Inspect Or Replace The Both Right And Left Blend Door Actuator Electronic Automatic Temperature Control (EATC) (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19E616 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Door Actuator / Motor: > 10-8-6 > May > 10 > A/C - Side To Side Temperature Variations Air Door Actuator / Motor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Side To Side Temperature Variations TSB 10-8-6 05/10/10 CLIMATE CONTROL TEMPERATURE VARIATION FROM SIDE TO SIDE-BUILT BEFORE 12/17/2008 FORD: 2008-2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner This article supersedes TSB 09-12-6 to update the Service Labor Time Standards. ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built before 12/17/2008 may exhibit intermittent or erratic side to side temperature difference and/or temp fluctuation from the climate control vents. The concern may be with the temperature blend door actuator. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove temperature blend door actuator(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 412-01. 2. Inspect the 5 digit manufacturer's date code on the temperature blend door actuator. It will be the last 5 digits on the second line of manufacturer's data. The first three digits equal day of year. The last two digits equal year. (Figure 1) a. If the part number is 8L84-19E616-EA and the date code is 30708 or lower - replace the temperature blend door actuator assembly. b. If the part number is 8L84-19E616-EA and the date code is 30808 or higher - reinstall the actuator and continue with normal diagnostics per WSM, Section 412-00. c. If the part number is something other than 8L84-19E616-EA - reinstall the actuator and continue with normal diagnostics per WSM, Section 412-00. NOTE IF THE VEHICLE IS EQUIPPED WITH DUAL AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL (DATC), AND EITHER ONE OF THE ACTUATORS EXHIBITS THIS CONCERN AND HAS SUSPECT DATE CODE, THEN REPLACE BOTH RIGHT (RH) AND LEFT HAND (LH) ACTUATORS AS A SET. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Door Actuator / Motor: > 10-8-6 > May > 10 > A/C - Side To Side Temperature Variations > Page 5279 Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 100806A 2008 Escape, Mariner, 2.3 Hrs. Escape Hybrid, And Mariner Hybrid: Inspect Or Replace The Right Blend Door Actuator Electronic Manual Temperature Control (EMTC) (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 100806A 2009 Escape, Mariner, 2.7 Hrs. Escape Hybrid, And Mariner Hybrid: Inspect Or Replace The Right Blend Door Actuator Electronic Manual Temperature Control (EMTC) (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 100806B 2009 Escape, Mariner, 2.8 Hrs Escape Hybrid, And Mariner Hybrid: Inspect Or Replace The Both Right And Left Blend Door Actuator Electronic Automatic Temperature Control (EATC) (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 100806B 2008 Escape, Mariner, 2.4 Hrs. Escape Hybrid, And Mariner Hybrid: Inspect Or Replace The Both Right And Left Blend Door Actuator Electronic Automatic Temperature Control (EATC) (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19E616 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Recirculation Blend Door Actuator View 151-23 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Recirculation Blend Door Actuator > Page 5282 View 151-23 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Recirculation Blend Door Actuator > Page 5283 View 151-23 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Recirculation Blend Door Actuator > Page 5284 View 151-23 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Recirculation Blend Door Actuator > Page 5285 View 151-23 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Recirculation Blend Door Actuator C2261 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Recirculation Blend Door Actuator > Page 5288 C2278 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Recirculation Blend Door Actuator > Page 5289 C2091 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Recirculation Blend Door Actuator > Page 5290 C2092 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Recirculation Blend Door Actuator > Page 5291 C289 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Defrost/Panel/Floor Door Actuator Defrost/Panel/Floor Door Actuator Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Defrost/Panel/Floor Door Actuator > Page 5294 Blend Door Actuators Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Air Door Actuator / Motor: Procedures Auxiliary Mode Door Actuator Removal and Installation. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the 2 auxiliary line floorpan bracket nuts. To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5297 3. NOTE: The D-pillar bracket mill remain in place. Remove the LH D-pillar trim panel. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim 4. NOTE: When installing, tighten the screws on the High voltage Traction Battery (HVTB) first to make sure the duct is sealed correctly. Remove the 4 battery airflow duct screws, the 1 pin-type retainer and the battery airflow duct assembly To install, tighten 12 Nm (18 lb-in) 5. Remove the 2 auxiliary climate control fresh air inlet duct nuts ^ To install tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 6. Remove the 2 auxiliary climate control housing bolts. ^ To install tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 7. Remove the D-pillar bracket pin-type retainer. 8. Remove the D-pillar bracket upper pin-type retainer and bolt end remove the D-pillar bracket. 9. Disconnect the auxiliary airflow mode door actuator electrical connector 10. NOTE: The auxiliary climate control housing must be slightly repositioned to remove the screws. Remove the auxiliary airflow mode door Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5298 actuator screws. ^ Disconnect the rod. ^ To install, tighten to 2 Nm (18 lb-in). 11. Remove the auxiliary airflow mode door actuator 12. NOTE: The auxiliary climate control housing must be installed behind the lower portion of the D-pillar bracket. When installed correctly, the auxiliary climate control housing bolt will go through the D-pillar bracket first, then through the housing mounting location. NOTE: Before the D-pillar trim panel and LH quarter trim panel are installed, correct auxiliary mode door actuator operation can be verified by carrying out the Traction Battery Control Module (TBCM) self-test while visually verifying correct actuator operation. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5299 Air Door Actuator / Motor: Removal and Replacement Mode Door Actuator - Defrost/Panel/Floor Door MODE DOOR ACTUATOR - DEFROST/PANEL/FLOOR DOOR Removal and Installation NOTE: The defrost/panel/floor mode door actuator can be accessed from below the LH side of the instrument panel. 1. Disconnect the defrost/panel/floor mode door actuator electrical connector. 2. Remove the 2 defrost/panel/floor mode door actuator screws. - To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 3. Remove the defrost/panel/floor mode door actuator. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Mode Door Actuator - Air Inlet Door MODE DOOR ACTUATOR - AIR INLET DOOR Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5300 Removal and Installation 1. Remove the heater core and evaporator core housing. 2. Disconnect the air inlet mode door actuator electrical connector. 3. Remove the 2 air inlet mode door actuator screws. - To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 4. Remove the air inlet mode door actuator. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Temperature Blend Door Actuator - RH TEMPERATURE BLEND DOOR ACTUATOR - RH Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5301 Removal and Installation NOTE: On vehicles equipped with dual-zone electronic automatic temperature control (EATC), the RH temperature blend door actuator is used to control only the RH temperature blend door. On vehicles equipped with electronic manual temperature control (EMTC), the RH temperature blend door actuator is used to control the single temperature blend door for both sides of the vehicle. 1. Remove the upper center instrument panel finish panel. 2. Remove the passenger airbag module. 3. Working through the passenger airbag module opening, remove the RH panel duct screw. 4. Working through the passenger airbag module opening, remove the upper RH center panel duct screw Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5302 5. NOTE: The lower RH center panel duct screw is located just below the RH lower rear corner of the audio unit. Remove the lower RH center panel duct screw. 1 Detach the wire harness pin-type retainer. 2 Remove the lower RH center panel duct screw. 6. Working through the glove compartment opening, detach the wire harness pin-type retainer above the evaporator discharge air temperature sensor. 7. Disconnect the RH temperature blend door actuator electrical connector. 8. CAUTION: Use care to avoid dropping the RH temperature blend door actuator screws into the plenum chamber when removing the screws. If a screw is dropped into the plenum chamber, it may cause the airflow mode doors to jam, or may cause noise concerns. NOTE: The RH center instrument panel duct must be slightly repositioned to allow access to the RH temperature blend door actuator screws. Remove the 2 RH temperature blend door actuator screws. To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 9. Remove the RH temperature blend door actuator. 10. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Temperature Blend Door Actuator - LH TEMPERATURE BLEND DOOR ACTUATOR - LH Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Door, HVAC > Air Door Actuator / Motor, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 5303 Removal and Installation NOTE: The LH temperature blend door actuator is present on dual-zone electronic automatic temperature control (EATC) vehicles to control the LH temperature blend door only. Vehicles equipped with electronic manual temperature control (EMTC) are not equipped with this actuator. For EMTC vehicles, refer to Temperature Blend Door Actuator - RH. 1. Disconnect the LH temperature blend door actuator electrical connector. 2. Remove the 2 LH temperature blend door actuator screws. - To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 3. Remove the LH temperature blend door actuator. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Duct: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents Air Duct: Customer Interest A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents TSB 09-21-6 11/02/09 WHITE FLAKES COMING FROM A/C VENTS FORD: 2005-2009 Focus 2008-2010 Crown Victoria 2000-2005 Expedition, F-150 2007-2009 Edge 2008-2010 Escape Hybrid, Escape LINCOLN: 2008-2010 Town Car 2000-2005 Navigator 2007-2009 MKX MERCURY: 2008-2010 Grand Marquis, Mariner Hybrid, Mariner This article supersedes TSB 9-19-16 to update the Service Procedure. ISSUE Some vehicles may experience white flakes coming from the A/C vents when the blower motor is engaged. This may be caused by flux utilized in the manufacturing process of the evaporator core. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Hazard and Risk Warnings for White Flakes WARNING MAY CAUSE EYE AND RESPIRATORY TRACT IRRITATION. PROLONGED REPEATED EXPOSURE MAY CAUSE BONE DAMAGE (FLUOROSIS) AND HARM TO THE RESPIRATORY SYSTEM (BASED ON ANIMAL DATA). ^ Avoid inhaling dust. ^ Avoid contact with eyes. ^ Store away from acids. ^ Wash thoroughly after handling. ^ Avoid release to the environment. NOTE THE USE OF DUST PROOF GOGGLES, CHEMICAL RESISTANT GLOVES (PVC) AND DUST MASK IS RECOMMENDED. Using compressed air (maximum inlet pressure) 100 PSI (689 kPa), clean the A/C ducts through the registers and blow off the evaporator core through the blower motor opening. NOTE THE ENTIRE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE MUST BE DRY FOR BEST RESULTS. NOTE WHILE PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE AND SELECTING DIFFERENT VENT MODES SUCH AS FLOOR / PANEL AND FLOOR / DEFROST, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO TEMPORARILY START THE ENGINE TO ENABLE MODE DOOR MOVEMENT. Clean A/C Ducts: Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Duct: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents > Page 5312 1. Remove floor duct trim. 2. Using masking tape, connect one end of the vacuum cleaner hose to the floor duct on driver side. 3. Tape closed all the other floor duct openings. 4. Obtain about two feet (61 cm) of rubber vacuum line large enough to fit the end of a small shop air blowgun. Secure the hose to the end of the blowgun using a worm clamp. 5. Close all instrument panel registers. 6. Set temperature setting to full cold. 7. Place mode in floor / panel. 8. Turn on vacuum cleaner. 9. Working with one register at a time insert the vacuum line down each duct and blow shop air through each duct for 30 seconds. Be sure to close each register before moving on to the next register. 10. Change mode to floor I defrost. 11. Blow down each defroster duct for 30 seconds. 12. Alternate mode door between floor and floor / defrost three (3) times, giving the door time to move between each change. 13. Turn off vacuum cleaner. Clean Evaporator Core: 1. Change mode to full floor. 2. Ensure temperature is full cold. 3. Remove blower motor per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 412. 4. Turn on vacuum cleaner. 5. Reach into blower opening with vacuum line and proceed to blow shop air for a minimum of 5 minutes, utilizing a very slow sweeping action. 6. Blow the entire core face with an up and down motion, then repeat moving from side to side. NOTE ATTENTION TO THE BLOW-OFF OF THE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE WILL DETERMINE EFFECTIVENESS OF REPAIR. 7. Install the blower motor per WSM, Section 412. 8. Open all registers. 9. Operate the A/C system in Max mode with the blower on the lowest setting. Monitor the temperature with a thermometer until the lowest temp is achieved. Switch to vent and monitor the temperature until ambient temperature is reached. 10. Repeat Step 9 three (3) additional times. 11. Switch the blower motor to high speed with the vent mode still selected. white flakes should not come out of the vents. If no white flakes are present continue to Step 12. 12. Disconnect vacuum cleaner and remove tape from floor duct. 13. Reassemble floor duct trim. 14. Blow powder off or vacuum dash board and vehicle interior as required. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Duct: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents > Page 5313 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092106A 2004-2005 F-150, 1.2 Hrs. 2008-2010 Crown Victoria, Grand Marquis, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, 2005-2009 Focus, 2007-2009 Edge, MKX: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 092106A 2000-2005 Expedition, 1.4 Hrs. Navigator, 2008-2010 Town Car, 2000-2003 F-150: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19860 49 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Duct: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents Air Duct: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents TSB 09-21-6 11/02/09 WHITE FLAKES COMING FROM A/C VENTS FORD: 2005-2009 Focus 2008-2010 Crown Victoria 2000-2005 Expedition, F-150 2007-2009 Edge 2008-2010 Escape Hybrid, Escape LINCOLN: 2008-2010 Town Car 2000-2005 Navigator 2007-2009 MKX MERCURY: 2008-2010 Grand Marquis, Mariner Hybrid, Mariner This article supersedes TSB 9-19-16 to update the Service Procedure. ISSUE Some vehicles may experience white flakes coming from the A/C vents when the blower motor is engaged. This may be caused by flux utilized in the manufacturing process of the evaporator core. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Hazard and Risk Warnings for White Flakes WARNING MAY CAUSE EYE AND RESPIRATORY TRACT IRRITATION. PROLONGED REPEATED EXPOSURE MAY CAUSE BONE DAMAGE (FLUOROSIS) AND HARM TO THE RESPIRATORY SYSTEM (BASED ON ANIMAL DATA). ^ Avoid inhaling dust. ^ Avoid contact with eyes. ^ Store away from acids. ^ Wash thoroughly after handling. ^ Avoid release to the environment. NOTE THE USE OF DUST PROOF GOGGLES, CHEMICAL RESISTANT GLOVES (PVC) AND DUST MASK IS RECOMMENDED. Using compressed air (maximum inlet pressure) 100 PSI (689 kPa), clean the A/C ducts through the registers and blow off the evaporator core through the blower motor opening. NOTE THE ENTIRE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE MUST BE DRY FOR BEST RESULTS. NOTE WHILE PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE AND SELECTING DIFFERENT VENT MODES SUCH AS FLOOR / PANEL AND FLOOR / DEFROST, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO TEMPORARILY START THE ENGINE TO ENABLE MODE DOOR MOVEMENT. Clean A/C Ducts: Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Duct: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents > Page 5319 1. Remove floor duct trim. 2. Using masking tape, connect one end of the vacuum cleaner hose to the floor duct on driver side. 3. Tape closed all the other floor duct openings. 4. Obtain about two feet (61 cm) of rubber vacuum line large enough to fit the end of a small shop air blowgun. Secure the hose to the end of the blowgun using a worm clamp. 5. Close all instrument panel registers. 6. Set temperature setting to full cold. 7. Place mode in floor / panel. 8. Turn on vacuum cleaner. 9. Working with one register at a time insert the vacuum line down each duct and blow shop air through each duct for 30 seconds. Be sure to close each register before moving on to the next register. 10. Change mode to floor I defrost. 11. Blow down each defroster duct for 30 seconds. 12. Alternate mode door between floor and floor / defrost three (3) times, giving the door time to move between each change. 13. Turn off vacuum cleaner. Clean Evaporator Core: 1. Change mode to full floor. 2. Ensure temperature is full cold. 3. Remove blower motor per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 412. 4. Turn on vacuum cleaner. 5. Reach into blower opening with vacuum line and proceed to blow shop air for a minimum of 5 minutes, utilizing a very slow sweeping action. 6. Blow the entire core face with an up and down motion, then repeat moving from side to side. NOTE ATTENTION TO THE BLOW-OFF OF THE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE WILL DETERMINE EFFECTIVENESS OF REPAIR. 7. Install the blower motor per WSM, Section 412. 8. Open all registers. 9. Operate the A/C system in Max mode with the blower on the lowest setting. Monitor the temperature with a thermometer until the lowest temp is achieved. Switch to vent and monitor the temperature until ambient temperature is reached. 10. Repeat Step 9 three (3) additional times. 11. Switch the blower motor to high speed with the vent mode still selected. white flakes should not come out of the vents. If no white flakes are present continue to Step 12. 12. Disconnect vacuum cleaner and remove tape from floor duct. 13. Reassemble floor duct trim. 14. Blow powder off or vacuum dash board and vehicle interior as required. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Duct: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents > Page 5320 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092106A 2004-2005 F-150, 1.2 Hrs. 2008-2010 Crown Victoria, Grand Marquis, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, 2005-2009 Focus, 2007-2009 Edge, MKX: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 092106A 2000-2005 Expedition, 1.4 Hrs. Navigator, 2008-2010 Town Car, 2000-2003 F-150: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19860 49 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement Air Duct: Removal and Replacement FOOTWELL DUCT - REAR Removal and Installation All vehicles 1. Remove the driver and front passenger seats. 2. Remove the floor console. 3. Remove the front door scuff plate trim panels and the lower A-pillar trim panels. Vehicles with automatic transmission 4. Detach the selector lever cable from the gearshift assembly. 1 Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the gearshift lever. 2 Remove the selector lever cable from the bracket. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 5323 All vehicles 5. NOTE: Position the carpet to gain access to the floor ducts. Separate the wiring harness from the LH floor duct and position aside. 6. Remove the LH floor duct. 7. Remove the RH floor duct pin-type retainer. 8. Remove the RH floor duct. 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 5324 Air Duct: Overhaul INSTRUMENT PANEL AIR DISTRIBUTION DUCTS Part 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 5325 Part 2 Part 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Duct > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 5326 Part 2 Disassembly and Assembly 1. Remove the passenger airbag module. 2. Remove the audio unit. 3. Remove the instrument cluster. 4. Remove the instrument panel. 5. Remove the 4 defroster duct adapter screws and the defroster duct adapter. 6. Remove the 4 front display interface module (FDIM) screws and the FDIM. - Disconnect the FDIM electrical connector. 7. Remove the 2 instrument cluster opening instrument panel trim screws. 8. Remove the 4 instrument panel trim-to-audio unit bracket screws. 9. Remove the 2 instrument panel trim-to-audio unit bracket nuts. 10. Remove the 3 glove compartment screws and the glove compartment. 11. Remove the 2 glove compartment latch striker screws and the glove compartment latch striker. 12. Remove the lower center instrument panel trim screw. 13. Remove the 4 lower steering column opening instrument panel trim screws. 14. Disconnect the headlamp switch and the message center switch electrical connectors. 15. Remove the 2 upper corner instrument panel trim screws. 16. Remove the 2 lower corner instrument panel trim screws. 17. Remove the 2 instrument panel support-to-defroster duct screws. 18. NOTE: The instrument panel trim will need to be positioned away from the instrument panel support to access the LH duct assembly upper center screw. Remove the 4 LH duct assembly screws and remove the LH duct assembly. 19. NOTE: The instrument panel trim will need to be positioned away from the instrument panel support to access the RH duct assembly upper center screw. Remove the 4 RH duct assembly screws and remove the RH duct assembly. 20. To assemble, reverse the assembly procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Register: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents Air Register: Customer Interest A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents TSB 09-21-6 11/02/09 WHITE FLAKES COMING FROM A/C VENTS FORD: 2005-2009 Focus 2008-2010 Crown Victoria 2000-2005 Expedition, F-150 2007-2009 Edge 2008-2010 Escape Hybrid, Escape LINCOLN: 2008-2010 Town Car 2000-2005 Navigator 2007-2009 MKX MERCURY: 2008-2010 Grand Marquis, Mariner Hybrid, Mariner This article supersedes TSB 9-19-16 to update the Service Procedure. ISSUE Some vehicles may experience white flakes coming from the A/C vents when the blower motor is engaged. This may be caused by flux utilized in the manufacturing process of the evaporator core. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Hazard and Risk Warnings for White Flakes WARNING MAY CAUSE EYE AND RESPIRATORY TRACT IRRITATION. PROLONGED REPEATED EXPOSURE MAY CAUSE BONE DAMAGE (FLUOROSIS) AND HARM TO THE RESPIRATORY SYSTEM (BASED ON ANIMAL DATA). ^ Avoid inhaling dust. ^ Avoid contact with eyes. ^ Store away from acids. ^ Wash thoroughly after handling. ^ Avoid release to the environment. NOTE THE USE OF DUST PROOF GOGGLES, CHEMICAL RESISTANT GLOVES (PVC) AND DUST MASK IS RECOMMENDED. Using compressed air (maximum inlet pressure) 100 PSI (689 kPa), clean the A/C ducts through the registers and blow off the evaporator core through the blower motor opening. NOTE THE ENTIRE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE MUST BE DRY FOR BEST RESULTS. NOTE WHILE PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE AND SELECTING DIFFERENT VENT MODES SUCH AS FLOOR / PANEL AND FLOOR / DEFROST, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO TEMPORARILY START THE ENGINE TO ENABLE MODE DOOR MOVEMENT. Clean A/C Ducts: Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Register: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents > Page 5335 1. Remove floor duct trim. 2. Using masking tape, connect one end of the vacuum cleaner hose to the floor duct on driver side. 3. Tape closed all the other floor duct openings. 4. Obtain about two feet (61 cm) of rubber vacuum line large enough to fit the end of a small shop air blowgun. Secure the hose to the end of the blowgun using a worm clamp. 5. Close all instrument panel registers. 6. Set temperature setting to full cold. 7. Place mode in floor / panel. 8. Turn on vacuum cleaner. 9. Working with one register at a time insert the vacuum line down each duct and blow shop air through each duct for 30 seconds. Be sure to close each register before moving on to the next register. 10. Change mode to floor I defrost. 11. Blow down each defroster duct for 30 seconds. 12. Alternate mode door between floor and floor / defrost three (3) times, giving the door time to move between each change. 13. Turn off vacuum cleaner. Clean Evaporator Core: 1. Change mode to full floor. 2. Ensure temperature is full cold. 3. Remove blower motor per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 412. 4. Turn on vacuum cleaner. 5. Reach into blower opening with vacuum line and proceed to blow shop air for a minimum of 5 minutes, utilizing a very slow sweeping action. 6. Blow the entire core face with an up and down motion, then repeat moving from side to side. NOTE ATTENTION TO THE BLOW-OFF OF THE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE WILL DETERMINE EFFECTIVENESS OF REPAIR. 7. Install the blower motor per WSM, Section 412. 8. Open all registers. 9. Operate the A/C system in Max mode with the blower on the lowest setting. Monitor the temperature with a thermometer until the lowest temp is achieved. Switch to vent and monitor the temperature until ambient temperature is reached. 10. Repeat Step 9 three (3) additional times. 11. Switch the blower motor to high speed with the vent mode still selected. white flakes should not come out of the vents. If no white flakes are present continue to Step 12. 12. Disconnect vacuum cleaner and remove tape from floor duct. 13. Reassemble floor duct trim. 14. Blow powder off or vacuum dash board and vehicle interior as required. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Air Register: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents > Page 5336 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092106A 2004-2005 F-150, 1.2 Hrs. 2008-2010 Crown Victoria, Grand Marquis, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, 2005-2009 Focus, 2007-2009 Edge, MKX: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 092106A 2000-2005 Expedition, 1.4 Hrs. Navigator, 2008-2010 Town Car, 2000-2003 F-150: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19860 49 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Register: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents Air Register: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents TSB 09-21-6 11/02/09 WHITE FLAKES COMING FROM A/C VENTS FORD: 2005-2009 Focus 2008-2010 Crown Victoria 2000-2005 Expedition, F-150 2007-2009 Edge 2008-2010 Escape Hybrid, Escape LINCOLN: 2008-2010 Town Car 2000-2005 Navigator 2007-2009 MKX MERCURY: 2008-2010 Grand Marquis, Mariner Hybrid, Mariner This article supersedes TSB 9-19-16 to update the Service Procedure. ISSUE Some vehicles may experience white flakes coming from the A/C vents when the blower motor is engaged. This may be caused by flux utilized in the manufacturing process of the evaporator core. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Hazard and Risk Warnings for White Flakes WARNING MAY CAUSE EYE AND RESPIRATORY TRACT IRRITATION. PROLONGED REPEATED EXPOSURE MAY CAUSE BONE DAMAGE (FLUOROSIS) AND HARM TO THE RESPIRATORY SYSTEM (BASED ON ANIMAL DATA). ^ Avoid inhaling dust. ^ Avoid contact with eyes. ^ Store away from acids. ^ Wash thoroughly after handling. ^ Avoid release to the environment. NOTE THE USE OF DUST PROOF GOGGLES, CHEMICAL RESISTANT GLOVES (PVC) AND DUST MASK IS RECOMMENDED. Using compressed air (maximum inlet pressure) 100 PSI (689 kPa), clean the A/C ducts through the registers and blow off the evaporator core through the blower motor opening. NOTE THE ENTIRE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE MUST BE DRY FOR BEST RESULTS. NOTE WHILE PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE AND SELECTING DIFFERENT VENT MODES SUCH AS FLOOR / PANEL AND FLOOR / DEFROST, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO TEMPORARILY START THE ENGINE TO ENABLE MODE DOOR MOVEMENT. Clean A/C Ducts: Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Register: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents > Page 5342 1. Remove floor duct trim. 2. Using masking tape, connect one end of the vacuum cleaner hose to the floor duct on driver side. 3. Tape closed all the other floor duct openings. 4. Obtain about two feet (61 cm) of rubber vacuum line large enough to fit the end of a small shop air blowgun. Secure the hose to the end of the blowgun using a worm clamp. 5. Close all instrument panel registers. 6. Set temperature setting to full cold. 7. Place mode in floor / panel. 8. Turn on vacuum cleaner. 9. Working with one register at a time insert the vacuum line down each duct and blow shop air through each duct for 30 seconds. Be sure to close each register before moving on to the next register. 10. Change mode to floor I defrost. 11. Blow down each defroster duct for 30 seconds. 12. Alternate mode door between floor and floor / defrost three (3) times, giving the door time to move between each change. 13. Turn off vacuum cleaner. Clean Evaporator Core: 1. Change mode to full floor. 2. Ensure temperature is full cold. 3. Remove blower motor per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 412. 4. Turn on vacuum cleaner. 5. Reach into blower opening with vacuum line and proceed to blow shop air for a minimum of 5 minutes, utilizing a very slow sweeping action. 6. Blow the entire core face with an up and down motion, then repeat moving from side to side. NOTE ATTENTION TO THE BLOW-OFF OF THE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE WILL DETERMINE EFFECTIVENESS OF REPAIR. 7. Install the blower motor per WSM, Section 412. 8. Open all registers. 9. Operate the A/C system in Max mode with the blower on the lowest setting. Monitor the temperature with a thermometer until the lowest temp is achieved. Switch to vent and monitor the temperature until ambient temperature is reached. 10. Repeat Step 9 three (3) additional times. 11. Switch the blower motor to high speed with the vent mode still selected. white flakes should not come out of the vents. If no white flakes are present continue to Step 12. 12. Disconnect vacuum cleaner and remove tape from floor duct. 13. Reassemble floor duct trim. 14. Blow powder off or vacuum dash board and vehicle interior as required. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Air Register: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents > Page 5343 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092106A 2004-2005 F-150, 1.2 Hrs. 2008-2010 Crown Victoria, Grand Marquis, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, 2005-2009 Focus, 2007-2009 Edge, MKX: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 092106A 2000-2005 Expedition, 1.4 Hrs. Navigator, 2008-2010 Town Car, 2000-2003 F-150: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19860 49 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Service and Repair > Register - Passenger Side Air Register: Service and Repair Register - Passenger Side REGISTER - PASSENGER SIDE Removal and Installation 1. CAUTION: Make sure that the tool is inserted behind the register housing, not the register trim ring. Prying on the register trim ring will damage the register assembly. Using a suitable tool, gently pry to disengage the register clips from the instrument panel while working around the perimeter of the register. 2. Remove the passenger side register. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Service and Repair > Register - Passenger Side > Page 5346 Air Register: Service and Repair Register - Center REGISTER - CENTER Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: The center registers are available only as part of the upper center instrument panel finish panel assembly. For additional information, refer to Dash Board. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Air Register > Component Information > Service and Repair > Register - Passenger Side > Page 5347 Air Register: Service and Repair Register - Driver Side REGISTER - DRIVER SIDE Removal and Installation 1. CAUTION: Make sure that the tool is inserted behind the register housing, not the register trim ring. Prying on the register trim ring will damage the register assembly. Using a suitable tool, gently pry to disengage the register clips from the instrument panel while working around the perimeter of the register. 2. Remove the driver side register. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations View 151-2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 5351 C132 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 5352 Temperature Sensor - Ambient Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 5353 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Service and Repair AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Detach the ambient air temperature sensor electrical connector from the bumper. 2. Disconnect and remove the ambient air temperature sensor. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Auxiliary Water Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair Auxiliary Water Pump: Service and Repair AUXILIARY COOLANT FLOW PUMP Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Drain the engine coolant. 3. Remove the LH lower engine splash shield. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Auxiliary Water Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5357 4. Release the clamp and disconnect the auxiliary coolant pump-to-thermostat hose. 5. Release the clamp and disconnect the heater outlet hose. 6. Disconnect the auxiliary coolant flow pump electrical connector. 7. Remove the 2 auxiliary coolant flow pump bolts. - To install, tighten to 4 Nm (35 lb-in). 8. Remove the auxiliary coolant flow pump and rubber bracket assembly. 9. NOTE: Lubricate the coolant hoses with plain water only if needed. Do not use soap or other detergents. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Fill the engine cooling system. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Blower Motor: > 07-26-5 > Dec > 07 > A/C - Blower Motor Inoperative or Stuck on High Blower Motor: Customer Interest A/C - Blower Motor Inoperative or Stuck on High TSB 07-26-5 12/24/07 BLOWER MOTOR INOPERATIVE OR STUCK ON HIGH FORD: 2008 Escape Hybrid, Escape, F-Super Duty ISSUE Some 2008 F-Super Duty vehicles built before 12/14/2007, Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built before 12/17/2007 and equipped with electronic automatic temperature control (EATC) may exhibit an inoperative blower motor or a blower motor that may also shift to and remain at high, low or off speed. Cycling the ignition may return normal operation. The concern may also occur when using the electrical power point. ACTION Replace the Blower Motor Speed Control per Workshop Manual, Section 412-01. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. MERCURY: 2008 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner Parts Block OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 072605A 2008 F-Super 0.3 Hr. Duty/Escape/Escape Hybrid/Mariner/Mariner Hybrid With EATC: Replace The Blower Motor Speed Control (Do Not Use With 19700D, 19700D8) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19E624 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Blower Motor: > 07-26-5 > Dec > 07 > A/C - Blower Motor Inoperative or Stuck on High Blower Motor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Blower Motor Inoperative or Stuck on High TSB 07-26-5 12/24/07 BLOWER MOTOR INOPERATIVE OR STUCK ON HIGH FORD: 2008 Escape Hybrid, Escape, F-Super Duty ISSUE Some 2008 F-Super Duty vehicles built before 12/14/2007, Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built before 12/17/2007 and equipped with electronic automatic temperature control (EATC) may exhibit an inoperative blower motor or a blower motor that may also shift to and remain at high, low or off speed. Cycling the ignition may return normal operation. The concern may also occur when using the electrical power point. ACTION Replace the Blower Motor Speed Control per Workshop Manual, Section 412-01. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. MERCURY: 2008 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner Parts Block OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 072605A 2008 F-Super 0.3 Hr. Duty/Escape/Escape Hybrid/Mariner/Mariner Hybrid With EATC: Replace The Blower Motor Speed Control (Do Not Use With 19700D, 19700D8) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19E624 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5371 View 151-23 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Blower Motor: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5374 Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4 "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and relays are identified. Fuse and Relay Numbering and Naming. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Power Distribution Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5375 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information C904 Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5376 disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location Charts. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery set. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing lose clothing. Symbols Symbols (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5377 Symbols (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5378 Symbols (Part 3) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5379 Symbols (Part 4) Symbols (Part 5) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5380 Blower Motor: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5381 Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5382 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5383 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. 3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5384 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5385 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5386 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 5387 C2004 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5388 Blower Motor: Service and Repair BLOWER MOTOR Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the blower motor electrical connector. 2. Release the 2 blower motor vent tube clips and pull the vent tube down until it is disengaged from the heater core and evaporator core housing. 3. NOTE: The carpet below the blower motor must be slightly repositioned to remove the blower motor. Rotate the blower motor counterclockwise to disengage it from the housing and remove the blower motor. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5392 Blower Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Locations View 151-23 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5396 C293 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5397 Resistor - Blower Motor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Resistor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5398 Blower Motor Resistor: Service and Repair BLOWER MOTOR RESISTOR Removal and Installation 1. Lower the glove compartment. 2. Disconnect the blower motor resistor electrical connector. 3. Remove the 2 blower motor resistor screws. - To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 4. Remove the blower motor resistor. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Blower Motor Switch: > 07-26-5 > Dec > 07 > A/C - Blower Motor Inoperative or Stuck on High Blower Motor Switch: Customer Interest A/C - Blower Motor Inoperative or Stuck on High TSB 07-26-5 12/24/07 BLOWER MOTOR INOPERATIVE OR STUCK ON HIGH FORD: 2008 Escape Hybrid, Escape, F-Super Duty ISSUE Some 2008 F-Super Duty vehicles built before 12/14/2007, Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built before 12/17/2007 and equipped with electronic automatic temperature control (EATC) may exhibit an inoperative blower motor or a blower motor that may also shift to and remain at high, low or off speed. Cycling the ignition may return normal operation. The concern may also occur when using the electrical power point. ACTION Replace the Blower Motor Speed Control per Workshop Manual, Section 412-01. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. MERCURY: 2008 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner Parts Block OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 072605A 2008 F-Super 0.3 Hr. Duty/Escape/Escape Hybrid/Mariner/Mariner Hybrid With EATC: Replace The Blower Motor Speed Control (Do Not Use With 19700D, 19700D8) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19E624 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Blower Motor Switch: > 07-26-5 > Dec > 07 > A/C - Blower Motor Inoperative or Stuck on High Blower Motor Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Blower Motor Inoperative or Stuck on High TSB 07-26-5 12/24/07 BLOWER MOTOR INOPERATIVE OR STUCK ON HIGH FORD: 2008 Escape Hybrid, Escape, F-Super Duty ISSUE Some 2008 F-Super Duty vehicles built before 12/14/2007, Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built before 12/17/2007 and equipped with electronic automatic temperature control (EATC) may exhibit an inoperative blower motor or a blower motor that may also shift to and remain at high, low or off speed. Cycling the ignition may return normal operation. The concern may also occur when using the electrical power point. ACTION Replace the Blower Motor Speed Control per Workshop Manual, Section 412-01. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. MERCURY: 2008 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner Parts Block OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 072605A 2008 F-Super 0.3 Hr. Duty/Escape/Escape Hybrid/Mariner/Mariner Hybrid With EATC: Replace The Blower Motor Speed Control (Do Not Use With 19700D, 19700D8) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19E624 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5412 View 151-23 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5413 C297 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5414 Blower Motor Switch: Service and Repair BLOWER MOTOR SPEED CONTROL Removal and Installation 1. Lower the glove compartment. 2. Disconnect the blower motor speed control electrical connector. 3. Remove the 2 blower motor speed control screws. - To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 4. Remove the blower motor speed control. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Locations Cabin Air Filter: Locations CABIN AIR FILTER Removal and Installation 1. Remove the RH cowl panel grille. 2. Remove the 2 water shield screws and the water shield. 3. Remove the cabin air filter. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Locations > Page 5418 Cabin Air Filter: Description and Operation Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Air Filter > Component Information > Locations > Page 5419 Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair CABIN AIR FILTER Removal and Installation 1. Remove the RH cowl panel grille. 2. Remove the 2 water shield screws and the water shield. 3. Remove the cabin air filter. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-13 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5423 C233 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5424 Temperature Sensor - In-Vehicle Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5425 Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair IN-VEHICLE TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. CAUTION: Only position the instrument cluster finish panel away from the instrument panel enough to detach the in-vehicle temperature sensor without stressing the attached components. If the instrument cluster finish panel is positioned too far away from the instrument panel, damage to the wire harness or instrument cluster finish panel could result. Detach the instrument cluster finish panel and position it away from the instrument panel to allow access to the in-vehicle temperature sensor. 2. Release the 2 clips and detach the in-vehicle temperature sensor or in-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor. 3. Disconnect the in-vehicle temperature sensor or in-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor electrical connector. 4. Detach the aspirator hose from the venturi at the heater core and evaporator core housing. 5. Detach the aspirator hose from the instrument panel. 6. Remove the in-vehicle temperature sensor or in-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor. 7. NOTE: The venturi must be aligned correctly with the heater core and evaporator core housing for installation. When installing the venturi, it must be pressed into the heater core and evaporator core housing until an audible click is heard to indicated that it is correctly attached. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5426 Remove the venturi (if needed). 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Specifications Compressor Clutch: Specifications Item....................................................................................................................................................... ..............................................................Specification A/C Compressor Magnetic Clutch Air gap between pulley and hub........................................................................................................... ........................................0.3-0.6 mm (0.012-0.024 in) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch > Component Information > Specifications > Page 5431 Compressor Clutch: Adjustments AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) CLUTCH AIR GAP ADJUSTMENT 1. Check the A/C clutch air gap at 3 equally spaced places between the clutch plate and the A/C clutch pulley. 2. If the A/C clutch air gap is out of range, remove the clutch plate. Add or remove spacers between the clutch plate hub and the compressor shaft until the clearance is within specification. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component Information > Locations Compressor Clutch Coil: Locations View 151-4 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component Information > Locations > Page 5435 View 151-5 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component Information > Locations > Page 5436 C100 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component Information > Locations > Page 5437 Compressor Clutch Coil: Service and Repair CLUTCH AND CLUTCH FIELD COIL Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Part 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component Information > Locations > Page 5438 Part 2 Removal 1. Remove the A/C compressor. 2. Remove the A/C clutch disc and hub bolt. 1 Using a suitable spanner-type wrench, hold the A/C clutch disc and hub. 2 Remove the A/C clutch disc and hub bolt. 3. Remove the A/C clutch disc and hub and the A/C clutch disc and hub spacer(s). 4. Remove the A/C compressor pulley snap ring. 5. CAUTION: Do not use air tools. Damage to the A/C clutch pulley or A/C compressor may result. Remove the A/C compressor pulley. 1 Install the special tool. 2 Install a suitable 3-jaw puller on the special tool and A/C compressor pulley. 3 Remove the A/C compressor pulley. 6. Remove the 4 A/C clutch field coil screws. 7. Remove the A/C clutch field coil. Installation Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component Information > Locations > Page 5439 NOTE: The A/C clutch components should be reused unless obvious signs of damage are found. 1. Visually inspect the A/C clutch disc and hub, A/C compressor pulley and A/C clutch field coil for damage. - Inspect for physical damage, including cracked or melted components or discoloration due to excessive heat. - Inspect for excessive wear, including grooving in the A/C clutch disc and hub or A/C compressor pulley that is more than fingernail depth. - Inspect for roughness in the A/C compressor pulley bearing. 2. Clean the A/C clutch field coil and pulley mounting surfaces. 3. Install the A/C clutch field coil. 4. Install the 4 A/C clutch field coil screws. 5. CAUTION: The A/C compressor must be positioned on the press so that only the flat part of the A/C compressor housing is contacting the base with the A/C compressor shaft aligned with the center of the press shaft. If the A/C compressor is not installed correctly on the press, the A/C compressor and/or A/C compressor pulley will be damaged. Install the A/C compressor pulley. 1 Install the A/C compressor on a suitable press. 2 Position the A/C compressor pulley on the A/C compressor. 3 Install the special tool on the A/C compressor pulley. 4 Using the press, install the A/C compressor pulley. 6. Install the A/C compressor pulley snap ring with the bevel side out. 7. Place one nominal thickness A/C clutch disc and hub spacer inside the clutch hub spline opening. 8. Install the A/C clutch disc and hub. 9. Install the A/C compressor clutch disc and hub bolt. 1 Hold the A/C clutch disc and hub with a suitable spanner-type wrench. 2 Tighten the bolt to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor HVAC > Compressor Clutch Coil > Component Information > Locations > Page 5440 10. Measure and adjust the clutch air gap by removing or adding A/C clutch disc and hub spacers. 11. Install the A/C compressor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5444 Compressor Clutch Relay: Description and Operation AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) CLUTCH RELAY (A/CCR) NOTE: The PCM PIDs WAC and wide open throttle air conditioning cutoff fault (WACF) are used to monitor the A/CCR output. The A/CCR is wired normally open. There is no direct electrical connection between the A/C switch or electronic automatic temperature control (EATC) module and the A/C clutch. The PCM receives a signal indicating that A/C is requested. For some applications, this message is sent through the communications network. When A/C is requested, the PCM checks other A/C related inputs that are available, such as A/C pressure switch and A/C cycling switch. If these inputs indicate A/C operation is OK, and the engine conditions are OK (coolant temperature, engine RPM, throttle position), the PCM grounds the A/CCR output, closing the relay contacts and sending voltage to the A/CCR. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5445 Compressor Clutch Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation Condenser HVAC: Description and Operation A/C CONDENSER NOTE: Installation of a new receiver/drier is not required when repairing the air conditioning system, except when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the receiver/drier. The A/C condenser is an aluminum fin-and-micro-channel design heat exchanger located in front of the vehicle radiator. It cools compressed refrigerant gas by allowing air to pass over fins and tubes to extract heat and by condensing gas to liquid refrigerant as it is cooled. On 2.3L or 3.0L (4V) vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission, the top portion of the condenser is partitioned from the refrigerant system and is used for transmission fluid cooling. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 5449 Condenser HVAC: Service and Repair CONDENSER CORE Part 1 Part 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Condenser HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 5450 Removal and Installation NOTE: - Installation of a new receiver/drier is not required when repairing the air conditioning system, except when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the receiver/drier. - If a condenser core leak is suspected, the condenser core must be leak tested before it is removed from the vehicle. All vehicles 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Recover the refrigerant. 3. Remove the front bumper cover. 4. Remove the 4 radiator bracket bolts. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 5. Detach and remove the RH and LH radiator brackets. 6. Remove the condenser outlet and inlet fitting nuts and disconnect the fittings. - Discard the O-ring and gasket seals. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). Vehicles with automatic transmission 7. NOTE: The transmission cooler hose inlet (upper tube) attaches to the transmission outlet line (passenger side front of transmission). The transmission cooler outlet (lower tube) attaches to the transmission inlet line (driver side of transmission). Release the 2 transmission cooler line clamps and disconnect the lines from the A/C condenser. All vehicles 8. Remove the 2 condenser bolts. - To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 9. Remove the condenser core. 10. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Install new gasket seals and O-ring seals. - Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. 11. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Assembly, HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair Control Assembly: Service and Repair HEATING VENTILATION AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC) MODULE Removal and Installation 1. Remove the center instrument panel finish panel. 2. Remove the 4 HVAC module screws. 3. Remove the HVAC module. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) Module View 151-13 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) Module > Page 5458 View 151-13 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) Module Control Module HVAC: Diagrams Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) Module C2356A Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) Module > Page 5461 C2356B Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) Module > Page 5462 Control Module HVAC: Diagrams Electronic Manual Temperature Control (EMTC) Module C2357A Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) Module > Page 5463 C2357B Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation EVAPORATOR DISCHARGE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR NOTE: A second (auxiliary) evaporator discharge air temperature sensor is used for the auxiliary evaporator core on hybrid vehicles. For information concerning the auxiliary evaporator discharge air temperature sensor, refer to Heating and Air Conditioning. The evaporator discharge air temperature sensor contains a thermistor. The resistance of this thermistor varies by a specific amount based on the evaporator discharge air temperature. The dual-zone EATC or EMTC module measures a voltage ratio between the reference voltage it supplies to the sensor and the sensor return voltage to determine this resistance and the associated discharge air temperature. The evaporator discharge air temperature sensor maintains evaporator core temperature and prevents icing of the evaporator core. It does this by signaling the HVAC module to switch off the A/C request signal to the instrument cluster on 2.3L or 3.0L (4V) vehicles, or signaling the PCM to cycle the A/C compressor off when the evaporator discharge air temperature sensor reading falls below acceptable levels. The A/C request or A/C compressor will be switched back on when the evaporator temperature rises above acceptable levels. On hybrid vehicles, the A/C compressor will continue to run and the passenger zone valve will be closed by the PCM if the evaporator discharge air temperature sensor is reading a temperature below acceptable levels, but the TBCM is requesting A/C operation for HVTB cooling. This allows continued refrigerant flow to the auxiliary evaporator core while allowing the front (main) evaporator core to warm to acceptable levels. The evaporator discharge air temperature sensor is located on the heater core and evaporator core housing behind the glove compartment. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporator Core: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents Evaporator Core: Customer Interest A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents TSB 09-21-6 11/02/09 WHITE FLAKES COMING FROM A/C VENTS FORD: 2005-2009 Focus 2008-2010 Crown Victoria 2000-2005 Expedition, F-150 2007-2009 Edge 2008-2010 Escape Hybrid, Escape LINCOLN: 2008-2010 Town Car 2000-2005 Navigator 2007-2009 MKX MERCURY: 2008-2010 Grand Marquis, Mariner Hybrid, Mariner This article supersedes TSB 9-19-16 to update the Service Procedure. ISSUE Some vehicles may experience white flakes coming from the A/C vents when the blower motor is engaged. This may be caused by flux utilized in the manufacturing process of the evaporator core. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Hazard and Risk Warnings for White Flakes WARNING MAY CAUSE EYE AND RESPIRATORY TRACT IRRITATION. PROLONGED REPEATED EXPOSURE MAY CAUSE BONE DAMAGE (FLUOROSIS) AND HARM TO THE RESPIRATORY SYSTEM (BASED ON ANIMAL DATA). ^ Avoid inhaling dust. ^ Avoid contact with eyes. ^ Store away from acids. ^ Wash thoroughly after handling. ^ Avoid release to the environment. NOTE THE USE OF DUST PROOF GOGGLES, CHEMICAL RESISTANT GLOVES (PVC) AND DUST MASK IS RECOMMENDED. Using compressed air (maximum inlet pressure) 100 PSI (689 kPa), clean the A/C ducts through the registers and blow off the evaporator core through the blower motor opening. NOTE THE ENTIRE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE MUST BE DRY FOR BEST RESULTS. NOTE WHILE PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE AND SELECTING DIFFERENT VENT MODES SUCH AS FLOOR / PANEL AND FLOOR / DEFROST, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO TEMPORARILY START THE ENGINE TO ENABLE MODE DOOR MOVEMENT. Clean A/C Ducts: Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporator Core: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents > Page 5475 1. Remove floor duct trim. 2. Using masking tape, connect one end of the vacuum cleaner hose to the floor duct on driver side. 3. Tape closed all the other floor duct openings. 4. Obtain about two feet (61 cm) of rubber vacuum line large enough to fit the end of a small shop air blowgun. Secure the hose to the end of the blowgun using a worm clamp. 5. Close all instrument panel registers. 6. Set temperature setting to full cold. 7. Place mode in floor / panel. 8. Turn on vacuum cleaner. 9. Working with one register at a time insert the vacuum line down each duct and blow shop air through each duct for 30 seconds. Be sure to close each register before moving on to the next register. 10. Change mode to floor I defrost. 11. Blow down each defroster duct for 30 seconds. 12. Alternate mode door between floor and floor / defrost three (3) times, giving the door time to move between each change. 13. Turn off vacuum cleaner. Clean Evaporator Core: 1. Change mode to full floor. 2. Ensure temperature is full cold. 3. Remove blower motor per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 412. 4. Turn on vacuum cleaner. 5. Reach into blower opening with vacuum line and proceed to blow shop air for a minimum of 5 minutes, utilizing a very slow sweeping action. 6. Blow the entire core face with an up and down motion, then repeat moving from side to side. NOTE ATTENTION TO THE BLOW-OFF OF THE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE WILL DETERMINE EFFECTIVENESS OF REPAIR. 7. Install the blower motor per WSM, Section 412. 8. Open all registers. 9. Operate the A/C system in Max mode with the blower on the lowest setting. Monitor the temperature with a thermometer until the lowest temp is achieved. Switch to vent and monitor the temperature until ambient temperature is reached. 10. Repeat Step 9 three (3) additional times. 11. Switch the blower motor to high speed with the vent mode still selected. white flakes should not come out of the vents. If no white flakes are present continue to Step 12. 12. Disconnect vacuum cleaner and remove tape from floor duct. 13. Reassemble floor duct trim. 14. Blow powder off or vacuum dash board and vehicle interior as required. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Evaporator Core: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents > Page 5476 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092106A 2004-2005 F-150, 1.2 Hrs. 2008-2010 Crown Victoria, Grand Marquis, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, 2005-2009 Focus, 2007-2009 Edge, MKX: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 092106A 2000-2005 Expedition, 1.4 Hrs. Navigator, 2008-2010 Town Car, 2000-2003 F-150: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19860 49 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporator Core: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents Evaporator Core: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents TSB 09-21-6 11/02/09 WHITE FLAKES COMING FROM A/C VENTS FORD: 2005-2009 Focus 2008-2010 Crown Victoria 2000-2005 Expedition, F-150 2007-2009 Edge 2008-2010 Escape Hybrid, Escape LINCOLN: 2008-2010 Town Car 2000-2005 Navigator 2007-2009 MKX MERCURY: 2008-2010 Grand Marquis, Mariner Hybrid, Mariner This article supersedes TSB 9-19-16 to update the Service Procedure. ISSUE Some vehicles may experience white flakes coming from the A/C vents when the blower motor is engaged. This may be caused by flux utilized in the manufacturing process of the evaporator core. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Hazard and Risk Warnings for White Flakes WARNING MAY CAUSE EYE AND RESPIRATORY TRACT IRRITATION. PROLONGED REPEATED EXPOSURE MAY CAUSE BONE DAMAGE (FLUOROSIS) AND HARM TO THE RESPIRATORY SYSTEM (BASED ON ANIMAL DATA). ^ Avoid inhaling dust. ^ Avoid contact with eyes. ^ Store away from acids. ^ Wash thoroughly after handling. ^ Avoid release to the environment. NOTE THE USE OF DUST PROOF GOGGLES, CHEMICAL RESISTANT GLOVES (PVC) AND DUST MASK IS RECOMMENDED. Using compressed air (maximum inlet pressure) 100 PSI (689 kPa), clean the A/C ducts through the registers and blow off the evaporator core through the blower motor opening. NOTE THE ENTIRE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE MUST BE DRY FOR BEST RESULTS. NOTE WHILE PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE AND SELECTING DIFFERENT VENT MODES SUCH AS FLOOR / PANEL AND FLOOR / DEFROST, IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO TEMPORARILY START THE ENGINE TO ENABLE MODE DOOR MOVEMENT. Clean A/C Ducts: Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporator Core: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents > Page 5482 1. Remove floor duct trim. 2. Using masking tape, connect one end of the vacuum cleaner hose to the floor duct on driver side. 3. Tape closed all the other floor duct openings. 4. Obtain about two feet (61 cm) of rubber vacuum line large enough to fit the end of a small shop air blowgun. Secure the hose to the end of the blowgun using a worm clamp. 5. Close all instrument panel registers. 6. Set temperature setting to full cold. 7. Place mode in floor / panel. 8. Turn on vacuum cleaner. 9. Working with one register at a time insert the vacuum line down each duct and blow shop air through each duct for 30 seconds. Be sure to close each register before moving on to the next register. 10. Change mode to floor I defrost. 11. Blow down each defroster duct for 30 seconds. 12. Alternate mode door between floor and floor / defrost three (3) times, giving the door time to move between each change. 13. Turn off vacuum cleaner. Clean Evaporator Core: 1. Change mode to full floor. 2. Ensure temperature is full cold. 3. Remove blower motor per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 412. 4. Turn on vacuum cleaner. 5. Reach into blower opening with vacuum line and proceed to blow shop air for a minimum of 5 minutes, utilizing a very slow sweeping action. 6. Blow the entire core face with an up and down motion, then repeat moving from side to side. NOTE ATTENTION TO THE BLOW-OFF OF THE EVAPORATOR CORE SURFACE WILL DETERMINE EFFECTIVENESS OF REPAIR. 7. Install the blower motor per WSM, Section 412. 8. Open all registers. 9. Operate the A/C system in Max mode with the blower on the lowest setting. Monitor the temperature with a thermometer until the lowest temp is achieved. Switch to vent and monitor the temperature until ambient temperature is reached. 10. Repeat Step 9 three (3) additional times. 11. Switch the blower motor to high speed with the vent mode still selected. white flakes should not come out of the vents. If no white flakes are present continue to Step 12. 12. Disconnect vacuum cleaner and remove tape from floor duct. 13. Reassemble floor duct trim. 14. Blow powder off or vacuum dash board and vehicle interior as required. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Evaporator Core: > 09-21-6 > Nov > 09 > A/C - White Flakes Are Blowing From Dash Vents > Page 5483 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092106A 2004-2005 F-150, 1.2 Hrs. 2008-2010 Crown Victoria, Grand Marquis, Escape, Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid, 2005-2009 Focus, 2007-2009 Edge, MKX: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 092106A 2000-2005 Expedition, 1.4 Hrs. Navigator, 2008-2010 Town Car, 2000-2003 F-150: Clean A/C Ducts And Evaporator Core (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19860 49 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5484 Evaporator Core: Description and Operation EVAPORATOR CORE NOTE: - Installation of a new receiver/drier is not required when repairing the air conditioning system, except when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the receiver/drier. - A second (auxiliary) evaporator core is used for HVTB cooling on hybrid vehicles. For information concerning the auxiliary evaporator core, refer to Heating and Air Conditioning. The evaporator core is an aluminum plate/fin-type and is located in the heater core and evaporator core housing. A mixture of liquid refrigerant and oil enters the bottom of the evaporator core through the evaporator core inlet tube and continues out of the evaporator core through the evaporator core outlet tube as a vapor. During A/C compressor operation, airflow from the blower motor is cooled and dehumidified as it flows through the evaporator core fins. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Core > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5485 Evaporator Core: Testing and Inspection EVAPORATOR/CONDENSER CORE - ON-VEHICLE LEAK TEST 1. Discharge and recover the refrigerant. Refer to Air Conditioning (A/C) System Recovery, Evacuation and Charging. 2. Disconnect the suspect evaporator core (leave the TXV attached to the evaporator core) or condenser core from the A/C system. 3. Clean the fittings. 4. Connect the appropriate test fittings from the A/C Fittings Set to the condenser or evaporator core/TXV tube connections. 5. NOTE: The automatic shut-off valves on some gauge set hoses do not open when connected to the test fittings. If available, use hoses without shut-off valves. If hoses with shut-off valves are used, make sure the valve opens when attached to the test fittings or install an adapter that will activate the valve. The test is not valid if the shut-off valve does not open. Connect the red and blue hoses from the R-134a Manifold Gauge Set to the test fittings on the evaporator core/TXV or condenser core. Connect the yellow hose to a known good vacuum pump. 6. Open both gauge set valves and start the vacuum pump. Allow the vacuum pump to operate for a minimum of 45 minutes after the gauge set low pressure gauge indicates 101 kPa (30 in-Hg). The 45-minute evacuation is necessary to remove any refrigerant from oil left in the evaporator core or condenser core. If the refrigerant is not completely removed from the oil, outgassing will degrade the vacuum and appear as a refrigerant leak. 7. If the low pressure gauge reading will not drop to 101 kPa (30 in-Hg) when the valves on the gauge and manifold set are open and the vacuum pump is operating, close the gauge set valves and observe the low pressure gauge. If the pressure rises rapidly to zero, a large leak is indicated. Recheck the test fitting connections and gauge set connections before installing a new evaporator core or condenser core. 8. After evacuating for 45 minutes, close the gauge set valves and stop the vacuum pump. Observe the low pressure gauge; it should remain at the 101 kPa (30 in-Hg) mark. If the low pressure gauge reading rises 34 or more kPa (10 or more in-Hg) of vacuum from the 101 kPa (30 in-Hg) position in 10 minutes, a leak is indicated. - If a very small leak is suspected, wait 30 minutes and observe the vacuum gauge. - If a small amount of vacuum is lost, operate the vacuum pump with gauge valves open for an additional 30 minutes to remove any remaining refrigerant from the oil in the evaporator core or condenser core. Then recheck for loss of vacuum. - If a very small leak is suspected, allow the system to sit overnight with vacuum applied and check for vacuum loss. 9. If the condenser core does leak, as verified by the above procedure, install a new condenser core. If the evaporator core/TXV does leak, as verified by the above procedure, disconnect the TXV and recheck the evaporator core for a leak. If the evaporator core does leak, install a new evaporator core or condenser core. TEST the system for normal operation. If the evaporator core does not leak, install new evaporator core/TXV seals and retest the evaporator core/TXV. If the evaporator core/TXV does leak, install a new TXV. TEST the system for normal operation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-23 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5489 C296 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5490 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation AIR CONDITIONING EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE (ACET) SENSOR A/C Evaporator Temperature (ACET) Sensor Voltage And Resistance The ACET sensor measures the evaporator air discharge temperature. The ACET sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The PCM sources a low current 5 volts on the ACET circuit. With SIG RTN also connected to the ACET sensor, the varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals. As A/C evaporator air temperature changes, the varying resistance of the ACET sensor changes the voltage the PCM detects. The ACET sensor is used to more accurately control A/C clutch cycling, improve defrost/demist performance, and reduce A/C clutch cycling. NOTE: These values can vary 15% due to sensor and VREF variations. Voltage values were calculated for VREF equals 5.0 volts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5491 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) EVAPORATOR DISCHARGE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Lower the glove compartment. 2. Detach the instrument panel wire harness pin-type retainer and position the wire harness away from the evaporator discharge air temperature sensor. 3. Disconnect the A/C evaporator discharge air temperature sensor electrical connector. 4. Gently pry upward and remove the A/C evaporator discharge air temperature sensor. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Block/Orifice Tube > Component Information > Description and Operation Expansion Block/Orifice Tube: Description and Operation THERMOSTATIC EXPANSION VALVE (TXV) NOTE: - Installation of a new receiver/drier is not required when repairing the air conditioning system, except when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the receiver/drier. - A second (auxiliary) TXV is used for HVTB cooling on hybrid vehicles. For information concerning the auxiliary TXV, refer to Heating and Air Conditioning. The TXV is located at the evaporator core inlet and outlet tubes at the dash panel at the rear of the engine compartment. The TXV provides a restriction to the flow of refrigerant from the high-pressure side of the refrigerant system and separates the low-pressure and high-pressure sides of the refrigerant system. Refrigerant entering and exiting the evaporator core passes through the TXV through 2 separate flow paths. An internal temperature sensing bulb senses the temperature of the refrigerant flowing out of the evaporator core and adjusts an internal pin-type valve to meter the refrigerant flow into the evaporator core. The internal pin-type valve decreases the amount of refrigerant entering the evaporator core at lower temperatures and increases the amount of refrigerant entering the evaporator core at higher temperatures. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Expansion Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair Expansion Valve: Service and Repair THERMOSTATIC EXPANSION VALVE Removal and Installation NOTE: Installation of a new receiver/drier is not required when repairing the air conditioning system, except when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the receiver/drier. 1. Recover the refrigerant. 2. Remove the thermostatic expansion valve (TXV) fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the gasket seals. 3. Remove the 2 TXV bolts and the TXV. - Discard the O-ring seals. 4. To install, reverse the reverse the removal procedure. - If the TXV stud has become loose during removal, or has been removed for any reason, tighten the TXV stud to 6 Nm (53 lb-in) before the TXV fitting nut is reinstalled. - Install new O-ring seals and gasket seals. 5. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Heater Core: Testing and Inspection HEATER CORE 1. NOTE: Testing of returned heater cores reveals that a large percentage of heater cores are good and did not require the installation of a new heater core. If a heater core leak is suspected, the heater core must be tested by following the plugged heater core component test before the heater core pressure test. Carry out a system inspection by checking the heater system thoroughly as follows: Inspect for evidence of coolant leakage at the heater hose to heater core attachments. A coolant leak in the heater hose could follow the heater core tube to the heater core and appear as a leak in the heater core. 2. NOTE: Spring-type clamps are installed as original equipment. Installation and overtightening of non-specified clamps can cause leakage at the heater hose connection and damage the heater core. Check the integrity of the heater hose clamps. Heater Core - Plugged 1. Check to see that the engine coolant is at the correct level. 2. Start the engine and turn on the heater. 3. When the engine coolant reaches operating temperature, check the heater core inlet and outlet hoses to see if they are hot. 4. If the outlet only is not hot: - the heater core may have an air pocket. - the heater core may be plugged. 5. If the inlet only is not hot, the thermostat may not be working correctly. Heater Core - Pressure Test Use the Pressure Test Kit to carry out the pressure test. 1. NOTE: Due to space limitations, a bench test may be necessary for pressure testing. Drain the coolant from the cooling system. 2. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater core. 3. Install a short piece of heater hose, approximately 101 mm (4 in) long on each heater core tube. 4. Fill the heater core and heater hoses with water and install plug BT-7422-B and adapter BT-7422-A from the Pressure Test Kit. Secure the heater hoses, plug and adapter with hose clamps. 5. Attach the pump and gauge assembly from the Pressure Test Kit to the adapter. 6. Close the bleed valve at the base of the gauge. Pump 138 kPa (20 psi) of air pressure into the heater core. 7. Observe the pressure gauge for a minimum of 3 minutes. 8. If the pressure drops, check the heater hose connections to the core tubes for leaks. If the heater hoses do not leak, remove the heater core from the vehicle. 9. Carry out the bench test. Heater Core - Bench Test 1. Remove the heater core from the vehicle. 2. Drain all of the coolant from the heater core. 3. Connect the 101 mm (4 in) test heater hoses with plug and adapter to the core tubes. Then connect the Pressure Test Kit to the adapter. 4. Apply 138 kPa (20 psi) of air pressure to the heater core. Submerge the heater core in water. 5. If a leak is observed, install a new heater core. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5501 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Heater Core > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 5502 Heater Core: Service and Repair HEATER CORE Removal and Installation NOTE: - If a heater core leak is suspected, the heater core must be leak tested before the heater core is removed. - Use only the approved coolant for this vehicle. 1. Remove the heater core and evaporator core housing. 2. Remove the dash panel seal. 3. Remove the heater core bracket screw and the heater core bracket. - To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 4. Remove the heater core. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair High Pressure Safety Valve HVAC: Service and Repair AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Recover the refrigerant. 3. Remove the A/C pressure relief valve and O-ring seal. - To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-in). 4. NOTE: A new O-ring seal will already be installed on the new A/C pressure relief valve service part. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Add the correct amount of clean PAG refrigerant oil to the refrigerant system. 5. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line COMPRESSOR TO CONDENSER DISCHARGE LINE Removal and Installation NOTE: Installation of a new receiver/drier is not required when repairing the air conditioning system except when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the receiver/drier. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Recover refrigerant. 3. Remove the RH lower engine splash shield. 4. Remove the front bumper cover. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line > Page 5510 5. Remove the condenser inlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). 6. Remove the A/C compressor discharge fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the O-ring and gasket seals. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). 7. Remove the compressor-to-condenser discharge line. 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Install new gasket seals and O-ring seals. - Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. 9. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line > Page 5511 Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Condenser to Receiver Drier Line CONDENSER TO RECEIVER DRIER LINE Part 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line > Page 5512 Part 2 Removal and Installation NOTE: Installation of a new receiver/drier is not required when repairing the air conditioning system, except when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the receiver/drier. 1. Recover the refrigerant. 2. Remove the DC/DC converter. 3. Remove the front bumper cover. 4. Remove the compressor manifold and tube bracket nut. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 5. Remove the condenser outlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the O-ring seal. 6. Remove the evaporator outlet line fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). 7. Remove the auxiliary evaporator outlet line fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seals. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). 8. Remove the receiver/drier inlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). 9. Remove the condenser-to-receiver/drier line. 10. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Install new gasket seal and O-ring seal. - Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. 11. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line > Page 5513 Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Evaporator Inlet Line EVAPORATOR INLET LINE Removal and Installation NOTE: Installation of a new receiver/drier is not required when repairing the air conditioning system, except when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the receiver/drier. 1. Recover the refrigerant. 2. Remove the evaporator inlet line bracket nut. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 3. Remove the receiver/drier outlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). 4. Remove the thermostatic expansion valve (TXV) fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the gasket seals. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). 5. Remove the evaporator inlet line. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line > Page 5514 - Install new gasket seals and O-ring seals. - Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. 7. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line > Page 5515 Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Evaporator Outlet Line EVAPORATOR OUTLET LINE Removal and Installation NOTE: Installation of a new receiver/drier is not required when repairing the air conditioning system, except when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the receiver/drier. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Recover the refrigerant. 3. Remove the RH lower engine splash shield. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Hose/Line HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Compressor to Condenser Discharge Line > Page 5516 4. Remove the A/C compressor suction fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). 5. Detach the wire harness clip from the evaporator outlet line. 6. Remove the thermostatic expansion valve (TXV) fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the gasket seals. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). 7. Disconnect the low-charge protection switch electrical connector. 8. Detach the evaporator outlet line from the receiver/drier bracket. 9. Remove the evaporator outlet line. 10. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Install new gasket seals and a new O-ring seal. - Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. 11. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement Housing Assembly HVAC: Removal and Replacement HEATER CORE AND EVAPORATOR CORE HOUSING Part 1 Part 2 Removal and Installation Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 5521 NOTE: If a heater core leak is suspected, the heater core must be leak tested before the heater core is removed. 1. Drain the engine coolant. 2. Recover the refrigerant. 3. Remove the instrument panel. 4. Remove the thermostatic expansion valve (TXV) fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the gasket seals. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). 5. Release the clamps and disconnect the heater inlet and outlet hoses from the heater core. 6. Remove the 6 heater core and evaporator core housing nuts. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 7. Remove the heater core and evaporator core housing. 1 Detach the heater core and evaporator core housing from the dash panel studs. 2 Rotate the RH side of the heater core and evaporator core housing toward the rear of the vehicle while pulling the housing toward the RH door opening to detach it from the rear footwell duct. 3 Remove the heater core and evaporator core housing. 8. Disassemble the heater core and evaporator core housing as needed. 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Install new gasket seals. - Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. 10. Fill and bleed the engine cooling system. 11. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 5522 Housing Assembly HVAC: Overhaul HEATER CORE AND EVAPORATOR CORE HOUSING Part 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 5523 Part 2 Part 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 5524 Part 2 Disassembly and Assembly Plenum chamber 1. Remove the 2 RH temperature blend door actuator screws. - To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 2. Detach the heater core and evaporator core housing wire harness from the plenum chamber. 3. Remove the 2 defrost/panel/floor mode door actuator screws. - To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 4. Remove the defrost/panel/floor mode door actuator. 5. Remove the 6 plenum chamber screws. - To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 6. Remove the plenum chamber. Air inlet duct 7. Detach the heater core and evaporator core housing wire harness from the air inlet duct. 8. Remove the 2 air inlet mode door actuator screws. - To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 9. Remove the air inlet mode door actuator. Complete disassembly 10. Detach and remove the heater core and evaporator core housing wire harness. 11. Remove the 2 blower motor speed control or blower motor resistor screws. - To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 12. Remove the blower motor speed control or blower motor resistor. 13. Remove the heater core tube dash panel seal. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Housing Assembly HVAC > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 5525 14. Remove the heater core bracket screw and the heater core bracket. - To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 15. Remove the heater core. 16. Remove the thermostatic expansion valve (TXV) dash panel seal. 17. Remove the heater core and evaporator core housing drain dash panel seal. 18. Remove the 2 LH temperature blend door actuator screws (if equipped). - To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 19. Remove the LH temperature blend door actuator (if equipped). - To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 20. Detach the 2 blower motor vent tube clips and disengage the vent tube from the heater core and evaporator core housing. 21. Rotate counterclockwise and remove the blower motor. 22. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Receiver Dryer > Component Information > Description and Operation Receiver Dryer: Description and Operation RECEIVER/DRIER NOTE: Installation of a new receiver/drier is not required when repairing the air conditioning system, except when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the receiver/drier. The receiver/drier is mounted to the right of the radiator support for 2.3L or 3.0L (4V) vehicles, or at the RH shock tower for hybrid vehicles. It stores high-pressure liquid after it leaves the condenser core. A desiccant cartridge mounted inside the receiver/drier removes any retained moisture from the refrigerant. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Receiver Dryer > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 5529 Receiver Dryer: Service and Repair RECEIVER DRIER Removal and Installation NOTE: - The receiver/drier fitting studs can be removed and installed separately from the receiver/drier and are available as service parts. If only the fitting studs are damaged, it is not necessary to install a new receiver/drier. - Installation of a new receiver/drier is not required when repairing the air conditioning system, except when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the receiver/drier. 1. Recover the refrigerant. 2. Remove the front bumper cover. 3. Remove the condenser outlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). 4. Disconnect the dual-function pressure switch electrical connector. 5. Remove the receiver/drier outlet fitting nut and disconnect the fitting. - To install, tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). - Discard the O-ring seal and gasket seal. 6. Detach the evaporator outlet line from the receiver/drier bracket clip. 7. Remove the 2 receiver/drier nuts. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 8. Remove the receiver/drier. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Receiver Dryer > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 5530 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Install new gasket seals and O-ring seals. - Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. 10. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 5535 Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications R-134a Refrigerant YN-19 (US); CYN-16-P or CYN-16-R (Canada) WSH-M17B19-A (Specification) Non-hybrid ........................................................................................................................................... ........................................... 0.71kg (25 oz) (1.57 lb) Hybrid ................................................................ ............................................................................................................................ 1.08 kg (38 oz) (2.38 lb) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Control Solenoid Valve > Component Information > Service and Repair Refrigerant Control Solenoid Valve: Service and Repair PASSENGER ZONE VALVE Removal and Installation NOTE: Installation of a new receiver/drier is not required when repairing the air conditioning system, except when there is physical evidence of contamination from a failed A/C compressor or damage to the receiver/drier. 1. Recover the refrigerant. 2. Disconnect the passenger zone valve electrical connector. 3. Disconnect the 2 passenger zone valve fittings. - Discard the O-ring seals. - To install, tighten to 17 Nm (13 lb-ft). 4. Remove the passenger zone valve bracket nut. - To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 5. Remove the passenger zone valve. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Install new O-ring seals. - Lubricate the refrigerant system with the correct amount of clean PAG oil. 7. Evacuate, leak test and charge the refrigerant system. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems) YN-12-D WSH-M1C231-B (Specification) Non-hybrid ........................................................................................................................................... ........................................................ 148 ml (5 fl oz) Hybrid ................................................................ ........................................................................................................................................ 325 ml (11 fl oz) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Oil > Component Information > Specifications > Capacity Specifications > Page 5543 Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil (R-134a Systems) YN-12-D WSH-M1C231-B (Specification) Non-hybrid ........................................................................................................................................... ........................................................ 148 ml (5 fl oz) Hybrid ................................................................ ........................................................................................................................................ 325 ml (11 fl oz) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Dual Pressure Switch View 151-1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Dual Pressure Switch > Page 5548 View 151-1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Dual Pressure Switch C1062 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Dual Pressure Switch > Page 5551 C130 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch The A/C cycling switch may be wired to either the ACCS or ACPSW PCM input. When the A/C cycling switch opens, the PCM turns off the A/C clutch. For information on the specific function of the A/C cycling switch, refer to Heating and Air Conditioning, Climate Control System Air Conditioning System Overview. Also, refer to the applicable Vehicle/Diagrams for vehicle specific wiring. If the ACCS signal is not received by the PCM, the PCM circuit will not allow the A/C to operate. Some applications do not have a dedicated (separate) input to the PCM indicating that A/C is requested. This information is received by the PCM through the communication link. Air Conditioning (A/C) High Pressure Switch The A/C high pressure switch is used for additional A/C system pressure control. The A/C high pressure switch is either dual function for multiple speed, relay controlled electric fan applications, or single function for all others. For refrigerant containment control, the normally closed high pressure contacts open at a predetermined A/C pressure. This results in the A/C turning off, preventing the A/C pressure from rising to a level that would open the A/C high pressure relief valve. For fan control, the normally open medium pressure contacts close at a predetermined A/C pressure. This grounds the ACPSW circuit input to the PCM. The PCM then turns on the high speed fan to help reduce the pressure. For additional information, refer to Heating and Air Conditioning, Climate Control System, Air Conditioning System Overview or Vehicle/Diagrams. Air Conditioning Pressure (ACP) Transducer Sensor A/C Pressure Transducer Sensor Output Voltage Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch > Page 5554 Typical ACP Transducer Sensor The ACP transducer sensor is located in the high pressure (discharge) side of the A/C system. The ACP transducer sensor provides a voltage signal to the PCM that is proportional to the A/C pressure. The PCM uses this information for A/C clutch control, fan control and idle speed control. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch > Page 5555 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Dual-Function Pressure Switch Dual-Function Pressure Switch The dual-function pressure switch is located on the receiver drier and includes 2 separate sets of contacts that are opened at 2 different pressures. The first set of contacts in the dual-function pressure switch is used to interrupt A/C compressor operation in the event of excessively high discharge pressure in the high-pressure side of the refrigerant system. The PCM monitors the first set of contacts in the dual-function pressure switch in-series with the low-charge protection switch. When the contacts are open, the PCM will disengage the A/C compressor clutch. The second set of contacts in the dual-function pressure switch is used by the PCM to engage the high-speed cooling fan. The PCM monitors the second set of contacts through the A/C pressure (ACP) circuit. When the A/C pressure rises above a preset level, the second set of contacts will close and the high-speed cooling fan will be engaged. The dual-function pressure switch is installed on a Schrader-type valve core fitting on the receiver/drier. It is not necessary to recover the refrigerant to remove the dual-function pressure switch. Low-Charge Protection Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch > Page 5556 The low-charge protection switch is installed on the evaporator outlet line to cycle the A/C compressor off in the event of a low refrigerant charge. The PCM monitors the low-charge protection switch in-series with the dual-function pressure switch. When the low-side pressure drops below acceptable levels, the low-charge protection switch contacts open. When the low-charge protection switch contacts are open, the PCM will disengage the A/C compressor clutch. The low-charge protection switch is installed on a Schrader-type valve core fitting on the evaporator outlet line. It is not necessary to recover the refrigerant to remove the low-charge protection switch. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Blower Motor Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5561 Blower Motor Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5565 Compressor Clutch Relay: Description and Operation AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) CLUTCH RELAY (A/CCR) NOTE: The PCM PIDs WAC and wide open throttle air conditioning cutoff fault (WACF) are used to monitor the A/CCR output. The A/CCR is wired normally open. There is no direct electrical connection between the A/C switch or electronic automatic temperature control (EATC) module and the A/C clutch. The PCM receives a signal indicating that A/C is requested. For some applications, this message is sent through the communications network. When A/C is requested, the PCM checks other A/C related inputs that are available, such as A/C pressure switch and A/C cycling switch. If these inputs indicate A/C operation is OK, and the engine conditions are OK (coolant temperature, engine RPM, throttle position), the PCM grounds the A/CCR output, closing the relay contacts and sending voltage to the A/CCR. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Compressor Clutch Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5566 Compressor Clutch Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) Module View 151-13 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) Module > Page 5571 View 151-13 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) Module Control Module HVAC: Diagrams Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) Module C2356A Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) Module > Page 5574 C2356B Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) Module > Page 5575 Control Module HVAC: Diagrams Electronic Manual Temperature Control (EMTC) Module C2357A Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Relays and Modules - HVAC > Control Module HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Dual Automatic Temperature Control (DATC) Module > Page 5576 C2357B Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations View 151-2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 5581 C132 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 5582 Temperature Sensor - Ambient Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 5583 Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Service and Repair AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Detach the ambient air temperature sensor electrical connector from the bumper. 2. Disconnect and remove the ambient air temperature sensor. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 07-26-5 > Dec > 07 > A/C - Blower Motor Inoperative or Stuck on High Blower Motor Switch: Customer Interest A/C - Blower Motor Inoperative or Stuck on High TSB 07-26-5 12/24/07 BLOWER MOTOR INOPERATIVE OR STUCK ON HIGH FORD: 2008 Escape Hybrid, Escape, F-Super Duty ISSUE Some 2008 F-Super Duty vehicles built before 12/14/2007, Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built before 12/17/2007 and equipped with electronic automatic temperature control (EATC) may exhibit an inoperative blower motor or a blower motor that may also shift to and remain at high, low or off speed. Cycling the ignition may return normal operation. The concern may also occur when using the electrical power point. ACTION Replace the Blower Motor Speed Control per Workshop Manual, Section 412-01. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. MERCURY: 2008 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner Parts Block OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 072605A 2008 F-Super 0.3 Hr. Duty/Escape/Escape Hybrid/Mariner/Mariner Hybrid With EATC: Replace The Blower Motor Speed Control (Do Not Use With 19700D, 19700D8) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19E624 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 07-26-5 > Dec > 07 > A/C - Blower Motor Inoperative or Stuck on High Blower Motor Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Blower Motor Inoperative or Stuck on High TSB 07-26-5 12/24/07 BLOWER MOTOR INOPERATIVE OR STUCK ON HIGH FORD: 2008 Escape Hybrid, Escape, F-Super Duty ISSUE Some 2008 F-Super Duty vehicles built before 12/14/2007, Escape, Mariner, Escape Hybrid and Mariner Hybrid vehicles built before 12/17/2007 and equipped with electronic automatic temperature control (EATC) may exhibit an inoperative blower motor or a blower motor that may also shift to and remain at high, low or off speed. Cycling the ignition may return normal operation. The concern may also occur when using the electrical power point. ACTION Replace the Blower Motor Speed Control per Workshop Manual, Section 412-01. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. MERCURY: 2008 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner Parts Block OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 072605A 2008 F-Super 0.3 Hr. Duty/Escape/Escape Hybrid/Mariner/Mariner Hybrid With EATC: Replace The Blower Motor Speed Control (Do Not Use With 19700D, 19700D8) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19E624 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Blower Motor Switch: > 09-21-2 > Nov > 09 > Engine - FEAD Belt Whining/Bearing Type Noise Idler Pulley: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - FEAD Belt Whining/Bearing Type Noise TSB 09-21-2 11/02/09 3.0L FRONT END ACCESSORY DRIVE RIGHT HAND IDLER PULLEY BEARING NOISE FORD: 2008 Escape MERCURY: 2008 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 09-14-6 to update the Service Procedure and Part List. ISSUE Some 2008 Escape and Mariner vehicles equipped with 3.0L engine may exhibit front end accessory drive (FEAD) whining/bearing type noise. The noise may be coming from the right hand (RH) FEAD idler pulley that is in front of the right bank cylinder head. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Using a stethoscope, place end on the bolt that holds the right hand idler pulley on. a. If the noise is coming from the bolt/pulley, then go to Step 2 and replace the idler pulley. b. If the noise is not coming from the bolt/pulley, follow Work Shop Manual (WSM), Section 303-05B to diagnose. 2. Remove bolt that holds the pulley and bearing assembly on to the bracket. Refer to WSM Section 303-05B. 3. Remove pulley. 4. Install new pulley and torque pulley bolt to 18 lb-ft (25 N.m). 5. Loosen the pulley and bracket assembly. Torque bolts to 18 lb-ft (25 N.m) following the torque sequence. (Figure 1) NOTE IF BOLTS ARE NOT TORQUED IN SEQUENCE AS ILLUSTRATED, THEN PREMATURE BEARING FAILURE MAY OCCUR. Parts Block Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Blower Motor Switch: > 09-21-2 > Nov > 09 > Engine - FEAD Belt Whining/Bearing Type Noise > Page 5602 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092102A 2008 Escape, Mariner 0.6 Hr. 3.0L: Replace The Idler Pulley And Bracket Assembly Includes Time To Diagnose Concern (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19A216 69 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Blower Motor Switch: > 09-21-2 > Nov > 09 > Engine - FEAD Belt Whining/Bearing Type Noise > Page 5608 WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092102A 2008 Escape, Mariner 0.6 Hr. 3.0L: Replace The Idler Pulley And Bracket Assembly Includes Time To Diagnose Concern (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 19A216 69 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5609 View 151-23 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5610 C297 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Blower Motor Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 5611 Blower Motor Switch: Service and Repair BLOWER MOTOR SPEED CONTROL Removal and Installation 1. Lower the glove compartment. 2. Disconnect the blower motor speed control electrical connector. 3. Remove the 2 blower motor speed control screws. - To install, tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 4. Remove the blower motor speed control. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-13 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5615 C233 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5616 Temperature Sensor - In-Vehicle Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5617 Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair IN-VEHICLE TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. CAUTION: Only position the instrument cluster finish panel away from the instrument panel enough to detach the in-vehicle temperature sensor without stressing the attached components. If the instrument cluster finish panel is positioned too far away from the instrument panel, damage to the wire harness or instrument cluster finish panel could result. Detach the instrument cluster finish panel and position it away from the instrument panel to allow access to the in-vehicle temperature sensor. 2. Release the 2 clips and detach the in-vehicle temperature sensor or in-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor. 3. Disconnect the in-vehicle temperature sensor or in-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor electrical connector. 4. Detach the aspirator hose from the venturi at the heater core and evaporator core housing. 5. Detach the aspirator hose from the instrument panel. 6. Remove the in-vehicle temperature sensor or in-vehicle temperature and humidity sensor. 7. NOTE: The venturi must be aligned correctly with the heater core and evaporator core housing for installation. When installing the venturi, it must be pressed into the heater core and evaporator core housing until an audible click is heard to indicated that it is correctly attached. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5618 Remove the venturi (if needed). 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation Discharge Air Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation EVAPORATOR DISCHARGE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR NOTE: A second (auxiliary) evaporator discharge air temperature sensor is used for the auxiliary evaporator core on hybrid vehicles. For information concerning the auxiliary evaporator discharge air temperature sensor, refer to Heating and Air Conditioning. The evaporator discharge air temperature sensor contains a thermistor. The resistance of this thermistor varies by a specific amount based on the evaporator discharge air temperature. The dual-zone EATC or EMTC module measures a voltage ratio between the reference voltage it supplies to the sensor and the sensor return voltage to determine this resistance and the associated discharge air temperature. The evaporator discharge air temperature sensor maintains evaporator core temperature and prevents icing of the evaporator core. It does this by signaling the HVAC module to switch off the A/C request signal to the instrument cluster on 2.3L or 3.0L (4V) vehicles, or signaling the PCM to cycle the A/C compressor off when the evaporator discharge air temperature sensor reading falls below acceptable levels. The A/C request or A/C compressor will be switched back on when the evaporator temperature rises above acceptable levels. On hybrid vehicles, the A/C compressor will continue to run and the passenger zone valve will be closed by the PCM if the evaporator discharge air temperature sensor is reading a temperature below acceptable levels, but the TBCM is requesting A/C operation for HVTB cooling. This allows continued refrigerant flow to the auxiliary evaporator core while allowing the front (main) evaporator core to warm to acceptable levels. The evaporator discharge air temperature sensor is located on the heater core and evaporator core housing behind the glove compartment. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-23 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5625 C296 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5626 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation AIR CONDITIONING EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE (ACET) SENSOR A/C Evaporator Temperature (ACET) Sensor Voltage And Resistance The ACET sensor measures the evaporator air discharge temperature. The ACET sensor is a thermistor device in which resistance changes with temperature. The electrical resistance of a thermistor decreases as the temperature increases, and the resistance increases as the temperature decreases. The PCM sources a low current 5 volts on the ACET circuit. With SIG RTN also connected to the ACET sensor, the varying resistance changes the voltage drop across the sensor terminals. As A/C evaporator air temperature changes, the varying resistance of the ACET sensor changes the voltage the PCM detects. The ACET sensor is used to more accurately control A/C clutch cycling, improve defrost/demist performance, and reduce A/C clutch cycling. NOTE: These values can vary 15% due to sensor and VREF variations. Voltage values were calculated for VREF equals 5.0 volts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 5627 Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) EVAPORATOR DISCHARGE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Lower the glove compartment. 2. Detach the instrument panel wire harness pin-type retainer and position the wire harness away from the evaporator discharge air temperature sensor. 3. Disconnect the A/C evaporator discharge air temperature sensor electrical connector. 4. Gently pry upward and remove the A/C evaporator discharge air temperature sensor. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Dual Pressure Switch View 151-1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Dual Pressure Switch > Page 5632 View 151-1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Dual Pressure Switch C1062 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Diagrams > Dual Pressure Switch > Page 5635 C130 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch The A/C cycling switch may be wired to either the ACCS or ACPSW PCM input. When the A/C cycling switch opens, the PCM turns off the A/C clutch. For information on the specific function of the A/C cycling switch, refer to Heating and Air Conditioning, Climate Control System Air Conditioning System Overview. Also, refer to the applicable Vehicle/Diagrams for vehicle specific wiring. If the ACCS signal is not received by the PCM, the PCM circuit will not allow the A/C to operate. Some applications do not have a dedicated (separate) input to the PCM indicating that A/C is requested. This information is received by the PCM through the communication link. Air Conditioning (A/C) High Pressure Switch The A/C high pressure switch is used for additional A/C system pressure control. The A/C high pressure switch is either dual function for multiple speed, relay controlled electric fan applications, or single function for all others. For refrigerant containment control, the normally closed high pressure contacts open at a predetermined A/C pressure. This results in the A/C turning off, preventing the A/C pressure from rising to a level that would open the A/C high pressure relief valve. For fan control, the normally open medium pressure contacts close at a predetermined A/C pressure. This grounds the ACPSW circuit input to the PCM. The PCM then turns on the high speed fan to help reduce the pressure. For additional information, refer to Heating and Air Conditioning, Climate Control System, Air Conditioning System Overview or Vehicle/Diagrams. Air Conditioning Pressure (ACP) Transducer Sensor A/C Pressure Transducer Sensor Output Voltage Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch > Page 5638 Typical ACP Transducer Sensor The ACP transducer sensor is located in the high pressure (discharge) side of the A/C system. The ACP transducer sensor provides a voltage signal to the PCM that is proportional to the A/C pressure. The PCM uses this information for A/C clutch control, fan control and idle speed control. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch > Page 5639 Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Dual-Function Pressure Switch Dual-Function Pressure Switch The dual-function pressure switch is located on the receiver drier and includes 2 separate sets of contacts that are opened at 2 different pressures. The first set of contacts in the dual-function pressure switch is used to interrupt A/C compressor operation in the event of excessively high discharge pressure in the high-pressure side of the refrigerant system. The PCM monitors the first set of contacts in the dual-function pressure switch in-series with the low-charge protection switch. When the contacts are open, the PCM will disengage the A/C compressor clutch. The second set of contacts in the dual-function pressure switch is used by the PCM to engage the high-speed cooling fan. The PCM monitors the second set of contacts through the A/C pressure (ACP) circuit. When the A/C pressure rises above a preset level, the second set of contacts will close and the high-speed cooling fan will be engaged. The dual-function pressure switch is installed on a Schrader-type valve core fitting on the receiver/drier. It is not necessary to recover the refrigerant to remove the dual-function pressure switch. Low-Charge Protection Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch, HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation > Air Conditioning (A/C) Cycling Switch > Page 5640 The low-charge protection switch is installed on the evaporator outlet line to cycle the A/C compressor off in the event of a low refrigerant charge. The PCM monitors the low-charge protection switch in-series with the dual-function pressure switch. When the low-side pressure drops below acceptable levels, the low-charge protection switch contacts open. When the low-charge protection switch contacts are open, the PCM will disengage the A/C compressor clutch. The low-charge protection switch is installed on a Schrader-type valve core fitting on the evaporator outlet line. It is not necessary to recover the refrigerant to remove the low-charge protection switch. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations View 151-13 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Sensors and Switches - HVAC > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 5644 C286 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Service Port HVAC > Component Information > Description and Operation Service Port HVAC: Description and Operation SERVICE GAUGE PORT VALVES The high-pressure service gauge port valve is located on the receiver/drier inlet line. The low-pressure service gauge port valve is located on the evaporator outlet line. The fitting is an integral part of the refrigerant line or component. - Special couplings are required for both the high-side and low-side service gauge ports. - A very small amount of leakage will always be detectable around the Schrader-type valve with the service gauge port valve cap removed, and is considered normal. A new Schrader-type valve core can be installed if the seal leaks excessively. - The service gauge port valve caps are used as primary seals in the refrigerant system to prevent leakage through the Schrader-type valves from reaching the atmosphere. Always install and tighten the A/C service gauge port valve caps to the correct torque after they are removed. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations View 151-13 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Heating and Air Conditioning > Solar Sensor, HVAC > Component Information > Locations > Page 5651 C286 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System Information > Service and Repair > Inspection and Repair After A Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deployment Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair Inspection and Repair After A Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deployment INSPECTION AND REPAIR AFTER A SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) DEPLOYMENT WARNING: Remove restraint system diagnostic tools from the vehicle prior to road testing. If tools are not removed, the supplemental restraint system (SRS) device may not deploy in a crash. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death in a crash and possibly violate vehicle safety standards. NOTE: - After diagnosing or repairing a supplemental restraint system (SRS), the restraint system diagnostic tools (if required) must be removed before operating the vehicle over the road. - Deployable devices (such as air bag modules, pretensioners) may deploy alone or in various combinations depending on the impact event. - Always refer to the appropriate Vehicle System procedures prior to carrying out vehicle repairs affecting the SRS and safety belt system. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. All vehicles 1. NOTE: Refer to the correct removal and installation procedure for all SRS components being installed. When any deployable device or combination of devices are deployed and/or the restraints control module (RCM) has the DTC B1231 (Event Threshold Exceeded) in memory, the repair of the vehicle's SRS is to include the removal of all deployed devices and the installation of new deployable devices, the removal and installation of new impact sensors, and the removal and installation of a new RCM. DTCs must cleared from all required modules after repairs are carried out. Vehicles with occupant classification sensor (OCS) system 2. NOTE: After installation of new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system components carry out the OCS System Reset procedure as instructed in the Vehicle System. Refer to the appropriate Vehicle System for OCS system removal and installation procedure. When a vehicle has been involved in a collision and the occupant classification system module (OCSM) has DTC B1231 stored in memory, the repair of the OCS system is to include the following procedures for the specified system: For rail type OCS system, inspect the passenger side floorpan for damage and repair as necessary. Install new OCS rails. - For weight sensor bolt type OCS system, inspect the passenger side floorpan for damage and repair as necessary. Install a new seat track with OCS weight sensor bolts. - NOTE: Most bladder type OCSM do not store a DTC B1231 in memory after deployment. The DTC B1231 is stored only by the RCM. For bladder type OCS system, inspect for damage and repair as necessary. If installation of an OCS system component is required, an OCS system service kit must be installed. All vehicles 3. When any damage to the impact sensor mounting points or mounting hardware has occurred, repair or install new mounting points and mounting hardware as needed. 4. When the driver air bag module has deployed, a new clockspring must be installed. 5. New driver and/or front passenger safety belt systems (including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be installed if the vehicle is involved in a collision that results in deployment of the driver and/or front passenger safety belt pretensioners. 6. Inspect the entire vehicle for damage, including the following components: - Steering column (deployable column if equipped) - Instrument panel knee bolsters and mounting points - Instrument panel braces and brackets - Instrument panel and mounting points - Seats and seat mounting points - Safety belts, safety belt buckles and safety belt retractors. - SRS wiring, wiring harnesses and connectors 7. After carrying out the review and inspection of the entire vehicle for damage, repair or install new components as needed. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision > System Information > Service and Repair > Inspection and Repair After A Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deployment > Page 5657 Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair Safety Belt Procedure After A Collision SAFETY BELT PROCEDURE AFTER A COLLISION 1. WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function: Retractors - Buckles - Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped) - Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped) - Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped) - Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies - Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only) If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing portion, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTE: Safety belt assemblies should be periodically inspected to make sure they have not become damaged and that they remain in correct operating condition, particularly if they have been subjected to severe stress. Before installing the new safety belt assembly, the safety belt attaching areas must be inspected for damage and distortion. If the attaching points are damaged and distorted, the sheet metal must be reworked back to its original shape and structural integrity. Install the new safety belt(s) using the appropriate instructions. Carry out the Functional Test. See: Seat Belt Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Adaptive Collapsible Steering Column > Component Information > Service and Repair Adaptive Collapsible Steering Column: Service and Repair DEPLOYABLE STEERING COLUMN - IN-VEHICLE DEPLOYMENT WARNING: Deploy all supplemental restraint system (SRS) devices (air bags, pretensioners, load limiters, etc.) outdoors with all personnel at least 9.14 meters (30 feet) away to make sure of personal safety. Due to the loud report which occurs when an SRS device is deployed, hearing protection is required. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. 1. Depower the SRS. 2. NOTE: It may be necessary to lower or remove the deployable steering column from the instrument panel to access the deployable steering column electrical connector. Access the deployable steering column electrical connector. 3. NOTE: If the deployable steering column does not have a hard-wired pigtail, it will be necessary to cut the wires and connector(s) from the vehicle wire harness and reconnect to the deployable steering column. Cut each of the deployable steering column wires, leaving at least 4 inches to work with. 4. Remove any sheathing (if present) and strip the insulation from the ends of the cut wires. 5. Make a jumper harness to deploy the deployable steering column. - Obtain 2 wires (20 gauge minimum) at least 9.14 m (30 ft) long and strip both ends of each wire. - At one end of the jumper harness, connect the wires together. 6. Using the end of the jumper harness that the wires are not connected together, attach each wire of the jumper harness to each wire of the deployable steering column. Use tape or other insulating material to make sure that the leads do not make contact with each other. 7. Remain at least 9.14 m (30 ft) away from the deployable steering column. 8. From the end of the jumper harness that is not connected to the deployable steering column, disconnect the 2 wires of the jumper harness from each other. 9. Deploy the deployable steering column by touching the ends of the 2 wires of the jumper harness to the terminals of a 12-volt battery. 10. To allow for cooling, wait at least 10 minutes before approaching the deployed steering column. 11. Dispose of the deployed steering column in the same manner as any other part to be scrapped. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) DEPOWERING AND REPOWERING Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Depowering Procedure WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. - Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the safety canopy and cause serious personal injury or death. - To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 3. At the smart power distribution junction box (SPDJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover and the restraints control module (RCM) fuse 32 (10A) from the SPDJB. 4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Air Bag Systems for location of the RCM and impact sensor(s). To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least 1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an accidental deployment. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Repowering Procedure 1. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON. 2. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SPDJB and install the cover. 3. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Connect the battery ground cable. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 5666 4. Prove out the supplemental restraint system (SRS) as follows: Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag indicator will: fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) from the restraints control module using a scan tool. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 5667 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) DEACTIVATION AND REACTIVATION Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Deactivation WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. - To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 3. At the smart power distribution junction box (SPDJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover and the RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SPDJB. 4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition OFF. 6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Air Bag Systems for location of the RCM and impact sensor(s). To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least 1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an accidental deployment. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 7. Using a 3-mm Allen wrench or a suitable tool, place it in the driver air bag module release hole on the underside of the steering wheel. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 5668 8. CAUTION: During driver air bag module removal, make sure all 3 driver air bag module hooks are released from the steering wheel wire clip. Failure to do so may cause damage to the driver air bag module and or the steering wheel. NOTE: The driver air bag module is removed for clarity. Position the 3-mm Allen wrench or suitable tool against the wire clip and push inward disengaging the wire clip from the 3 driver air bag module hooks. 9. Disconnect the horn electrical connector. Then disconnect the 2 driver air bag module electrical connectors and remove the driver air bag module. 10. Open and lower the glove compartment door. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 5669 11. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts. 12. CAUTION: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure. NOTE: Use care when removing the passenger air bag module from the instrument panel (I/P). The passenger air bag module can drop down during removal and the passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the I/P. Through the glove compartment opening, release the passenger air bag module deployment door clips while pushing the passenger air bag module out of the I/P. 13. Remove the passenger air bag module. 1 Disconnect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors. 2 Detach the wire harness routing clip and remove the passenger air bag module. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 5670 14. From under the rear of the passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector. 15. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. 1 Separate the weatherstrip. 2 Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel. 3 Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel. 16. Disconnect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector. 17. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel. 1 Separate the weatherstrip. 2 Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel. 3 Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 5671 18. Disconnect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector. 19. From under the rear of the driver seat, slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector. 20. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SPDJB. 21. Connect the battery ground cable. Reactivation 1. Remove RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SPDJB. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 3. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip. 4. Connect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 5672 5. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel. 1 Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel. 2 Install the D-pillar trim panel. 3 Install the weatherstrip. 6. Connect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector. 7. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. 1 Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel. 2 Install the D-pillar trim panel. 3 Install the weatherstrip. 8. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 5673 clip. 9. CAUTION: - During passenger air bag module installation, make sure the passenger air bag module wire harness routing clip is attached to the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness damage. - The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component and/or connector damage. Install the passenger air bag module. 1 Connect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors. 2 Attach the wire harness routing clip. 10. CAUTION: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure. NOTE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door clips are fully seated into the instrument panel. - Use care when installing the passenger air bag module in the instrument panel (I/P). The passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the I/P. Position the passenger air bag module and seat the passenger air bag module deployment door clips into the I/P. 11. Install the 2 passenger air bag module bolts. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 5674 12. Close the glove compartment door. 13. CAUTION: The driver air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the driver air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the driver air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the driver air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in component damage and/or connector damage. Install the driver air bag module electrical connectors fully into the driver air bag module. Then connect the horn electrical connector. 14. NOTE: - Make sure the driver air bag module wiring harness is routed down and away from the driver air bag module hooks during installation. - Audible clicks will be heard when the 3 wire clips are seated in the 3 driver air bag module hooks. Align the driver air bag module hooks to the steering wheel and, while pushing inward, seat the 3 driver air bag module hooks to the steering wheel wire clip. When the 3 driver air bag module hooks are seated in place, gently pull outward at the corners of the driver air bag module to make sure that the 3 hooks are fully seated. There should also be an even gap between the driver air bag module trim cover and the steering wheel. Check the driver air bag module and trim cover for correct movement when applying the horn. 15. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON. 16. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SPDJB and install the cover. 17. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Connect the battery ground cable. 18. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will: fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous DTCs from the restraints control module using a scan tool. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Driver Air Bag Module View 151-28 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Driver Air Bag Module > Page 5679 View 151-16 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Driver Air Bag Module > Page 5680 View 151-17 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Driver Air Bag Module > Page 5681 View 151-13 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Passenger Air Bag Module Air Bag: Diagrams Passenger Air Bag Module C256A C256B Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Passenger Air Bag Module > Page 5684 Air Bag: Diagrams Side Air Bag Module C337 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Passenger Air Bag Module > Page 5685 C367 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Passenger Air Bag Module > Page 5686 Air Bag: Diagrams Safety Canopy C9006 C9007 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Air Bag Module Air Bag: Service and Repair Driver Air Bag Module DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE Removal WARNING: Always carry or place a live air bag module with the air bag and deployment door/trim cover/tear seam pointed away from the body. Do not set a live air bag module down with the deployment door/trim cover/tear seam face down. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. - To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Air Bag Module > Page 5689 1. Depower the SRS. 2. Using a 3-mm Allen wrench or a suitable tool, place it in the driver air bag module release hole on the underside of the steering wheel. 3. CAUTION: During driver air bag module removal, make sure all 3 driver air bag module hooks are released from the steering wheel wire clip. Failure to do so may cause damage to the driver air bag module and/or the steering wheel. NOTE: The driver air bag module is removed for clarity. Position the 3-mm Allen wrench or suitable tool against the wire clip and push inward disengaging the wire clip from the 3 driver air bag module hooks. 4. Disconnect the horn electrical connector. Then disconnect the 2 driver air bag module electrical connectors and remove the driver air bag module. Installation 1. CAUTION: The driver air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the driver air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the driver air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the driver air bag module. Damage to the connector or component may occur. Install the driver air bag module electrical connectors fully into the driver air bag module. Then connect the horn electrical connector. 2. NOTE: - Make sure the driver air bag module wiring harness is routed away from the driver air bag module hooks during installation. - Audible clicks will be heard when the 3 wire clips are seated in the 3 driver air bag module hooks. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Air Bag Module > Page 5690 Align the driver air bag module hooks to the steering wheel and, while pushing inward, seat the 3 driver air bag module hooks to the steering wheel wire clip. When the 3 driver air bag module hooks are seated in place, gently pull outward at the corners of the driver air bag module to make sure that the 3 hooks are fully seated. There should also be an even gap between the driver air bag module trim cover and the steering wheel. Check the driver air bag module and trim cover for correct movement when applying the horn. 3. Repower the SRS. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Air Bag Module > Page 5691 Air Bag: Service and Repair Passenger Air Bag Module PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE Removal and Installation WARNING: - Always carry or place a live air bag module with the air bag and deployment door/trim cover/tear seam pointed away from the body. Do not set a live air bag module down with the deployment door/trim cover/tear seam face down. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. - Do not repaint air bag modules with discolored or damaged trim covers or deployment doors; new air bag modules must be installed. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Air Bag Module > Page 5692 Failure to follow this instruction may result in the air bag deploying incorrectly, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. - To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. NOTE: - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. 1. Depower the SRS. 2. Open and lower the glove compartment door. 3. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 4. CAUTION: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment door. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure. NOTE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door clips are fully seated into the instrument panel. - Use care when removing the passenger air bag module from the instrument panel (I/P). The passenger air bag module can drop down during removal and the passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the I/P. Through the glove compartment opening, release the passenger air bag module deployment door clips while pushing the passenger air bag module out of the I/P. 5. CAUTION: - During passenger air bag module installation, make sure the passenger air bag module wire harness routing clip is attached to the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness damage. - The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component and/or connector damage. Remove the passenger air bag module. 1 Disconnect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors. 2 Detach the wire harness routing clip and remove the passenger air bag module. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Air Bag Module > Page 5693 7. Repower the SRS. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Air Bag Module > Page 5694 Air Bag: Service and Repair Safety Canopy Module SAFETY CANOPY MODULE Part 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Air Bag Module > Page 5695 Part 2 Removal WARNING: Always carry or place a live safety canopy, or side air curtain module, with the module and tear seam pointed away from your body. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an accidental deployment. - Anytime the safety canopy or side air curtain module has deployed, a new headliner and new A-, B- and C-pillar upper trim panels and attaching hardware must be installed. Remove any other damaged components and hardware and install new components and hardware as needed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the safety canopy or side air curtain module deploying incorrectly and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. - When installing a new headliner on a vehicle equipped with safety canopy or side air curtain modules, make sure the headliner has the word AIRBAG on the headliner where it meets each B-pillar trim panel. Otherwise, you have the wrong headliner. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the safety canopy or side air curtain module not deploying or deploying incorrectly, increasing the risk of personal injury or death in a crash. - Before installing a safety canopy or side air curtain module, inspect the roofline for any damage. If necessary, the sheet metal must be reworked to its original condition and structural integrity. Install new fasteners if damaged and remove foreign material. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the safety canopy or side air curtain deploying incorrectly, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. - Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - Do not obstruct or place objects in the deployment path of the safety canopy or side air curtain module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the safety canopy or side air curtain module deploying incorrectly and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. - Never put any type of fastener or tie strap around any part of a safety canopy module, side air curtain module or interior trim panel. This will prevent the safety canopy or side air curtain module from deploying correctly. Failure to follow this instruction may increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. - Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. - To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. - Always use new torque-prevailing type J-nuts when installing the safety canopy in the vehicle. Use of these J-nuts is mandatory to reduce the risk of loss of fastener effectiveness. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the safety canopy module deploying incorrectly and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTE: There are different safety canopy modules for vehicles equipped with a moon roof and vehicles without a moon roof. The safety canopy modules are NOT interchangeable. If installing a new safety canopy module, the correct safety canopy module MUST be installed for the vehicle application. - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. - RH side safety canopy module shown, LH side similar. 1. Depower the SRS. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Air Bag Module > Page 5696 2. Remove the headliner. 3. Detach the A-pillar tether pin-type retainer from the A-pillar. 4. NOTE: If equipped with a moonroof and/or rear window wiper assembly, note position and routing of the moonroof front drain hose and/or rear window washer solvent hose for installation purposes. Remove the A-pillar tether bolt. 5. Remove the 2 safety canopy module bolts located near the top of the A- and B-pillars. 6. Disconnect the safety canopy module electrical connector and detach the connector from the D-pillar. 7. Detach the safety canopy module wiring clip from the roof panel brace. 8. Remove the 2 safety canopy module bolts near the ignitor (between the C- and D-pillars). 9. If the vehicle is equipped with a moonroof, disconnect the moonroof rear drain hose. 10. If the vehicle is equipped with a rear window wiper assembly, detach the hose clip and position the hose aside. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Air Bag Module > Page 5697 11. Remove the 2 bolts from the safety canopy module tether bracket at the C-pillar. 12. Remove the remaining 2 safety canopy module bolts (1 near the top of the C-pillar and 1 between the Band C-pillars). 13. Lift to unhook the safety canopy module from the C-pillar. 14. Move the safety canopy module forward and release the rear hook. Installation 1. Install new safety canopy module J-nuts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Air Bag Module > Page 5698 2. NOTE: If equipped with a moonroof and/or rear window wiper assembly, make sure of correct moonroof drain hose and/or rear window solvent hose routing. Install the safety canopy rear hook. 3. Hook the safety canopy module to the C-pillar. 4. Install the 2 safety canopy module bolts located near the top of the A- and B-pillars. - Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 5. Attach the A-pillar tether pin-type retainer to the A-pillar. 6. NOTE: If equipped with a moonroof and/or rear window wiper assembly, do not pinch the front moonroof drain hose and/or rear window washer solvent hose. Install the A-pillar tether bolt. Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 7. Install the 2 safety canopy module bolts near the top of the C-pillar and between the B- and C-pillars. - Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Air Bag Module > Page 5699 8. Install the 2 bolts to the safety canopy module tether bracket at the C-pillar. - Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 9. If the vehicle is equipped with a rear window wiper assembly, position the hose and attach the hose clip. 10. If the vehicle is equipped with a moonroof, connect the moonroof rear drain hose. 11. Connect the safety canopy module electrical connector and attach the connector to the D-pillar. 12. Install the safety canopy module wiring clip to the roof panel brace. 13. Install the remaining 2 safety canopy module bolts near the ignitor (between the C- and D-pillars). - Tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Driver Air Bag Module > Page 5700 14. Install the headliner. 15. Repower the SRS. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations Air Bag Control Module: Locations View 151-13 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5704 View 151-22 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5705 Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams C2041A Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5706 C2041B (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5707 C2041B (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5708 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) Removal WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the safety canopy and cause serious personal injury or death. - If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in a crash. - To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges, damage can result. - When installing a new restraints control module (RCM), it is necessary to carry out programmable module installation (PMI). Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraint control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - When installing a new RCM, always make sure the correct RCM is being installed. If an incorrect RCM is installed, erroneous DTCs will result. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. 1. If installing a new RCM, carry out the steps necessary to prepare for programmable module installation (PMI). 2. Depower the SRS. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5709 3. Remove the center console. 4. Remove the lower LH center instrument panel finish panel. - Remove the pin-type retainer. - Release the 2 retainer hooks from the instrument panel brace. 5. Position back the carpet on the LH and RH tunnel to access the RCM. 6. Disconnect the small RCM electrical connector. 7. Disconnect the large RCM electrical connector. 1 Pinch the thumb tab and pivot the connector position assurance lever all the way back until it stops. 2 Pull out and disconnect the RCM electrical connector. 8. Remove the 3 bolts and RCM. Installation 1. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque. Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of personal injury or death in a crash. Install the RCM and 3 bolts. Tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft). 2. Make sure the connector position assurance lever is in the full release position before attempting to connect the connector. 3. CAUTION: Putting the large restraints control module (RCM) electrical connector into the RCM on an angle can cause bad electrical connections and damage components. Position the large RCM electrical connector into the RCM. - CAUTION: Do not push the connector to the point where the lever pivots and seats itself. Light pressure is needed to get the Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5710 connector into position on the restraints control module (RCM) before using the lever to fully seat the connector. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure. With the large RCM electrical connector uniformly aligned to the RCM, lightly push in until a subtle audible click is heard and slight resistance is felt. 4. Connect the RCM electrical connector. - Pivot the connector position assurance lever toward the RCM, drawing the connector in to the RCM. Make sure the thumb tab is engaged to the retainer on the RCM and locked in place. 5. Connect the small RCM electrical connector. 6. Position back the carpet on the LH and RH tunnel to its original position. 7. Install the lower LH center instrument panel finish panel. - Attach the 2 retainer hooks to the instrument panel brace. - Install the pin-type retainer. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5711 8. Install the center console. 9. Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. 10. When installing a new RCM, carry out the steps necessary to complete PMI. 11. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition switch from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition switch back to ON and visually monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn OFF. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will: fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured). The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Indicator > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Bag Deactivation Indicator: Service and Repair PASSENGER AIR BAG DEACTIVATION (PAD) INDICATOR Removal and Installation WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. NOTE: - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a SRS fault. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - The passenger air bag deactivation indicator is part of the upper I/P center finish panel. 1. Depower the SRS. 2. NOTE: The passenger air bag module is not shown for clarity. Open and lower the glove compartment door to gain access to the passenger airbag deactivation (PAD) indicator electrical connector. Disconnect the PAD indicator electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Indicator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5715 3. Pull out to release the retaining clips and detach the I/P upper center finish panel. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 5. Repower the SRS. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch > Component Information > Diagrams C2286 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams C218 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5722 Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Service and Repair CLOCKSPRING Removal WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. NOTE: - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. 1. Depower the SRS. 2. Remove the driver air bag module. 3. Tilt the steering wheel in the downward position and lock the tilt handle. 4. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the clockspring make sure the road wheels are in the straight-ahead position. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5723 Remove the steering wheel. 5. NOTE: The upper steering column shroud is a 2-piece design and must be removed as an assembly. Release the tabs and remove the 2-piece upper steering column shroud as an assembly. 6. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws. Then release the tilt column locking lever and remove the lower steering column shroud. 7. Disconnect the clockspring electrical connector. 8. Remove the 2 screws and the clockspring. Installation 1. CAUTION: If installing a new clockspring, do not remove the clockspring anti-rotation key until the steering wheel is installed. If the anti-rotation key has been removed before installing the steering wheel, the clockspring must be centered. Failure to follow this instruction may result in component damage and/or system failure. Install the clockspring and the 2 screws. 2. Connect the clockspring electrical connector. 3. Install the lower steering column shroud and the 3 screws. 4. Tilt the steering column down and lock the tilt column locking lever. 5. Attach the upper steering column shroud to the lower steering column shroud. 6. WARNING: If the clockspring is not correctly centralized, it may fail prematurely. If in doubt, repeat the centralizing procedure. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. CAUTION: To prevent component damage and/or system failure, when reusing a clockspring it must be centered. - Do not over-rotate the clockspring inner rotor. The internal ribbon wire is connected to the clockspring rotor. The internal ribbon wire acts as a stop and can be broken from its internal connection. Failure to follow this instruction may result in component damage and/or system failure. If a new clockspring was installed and the anti-rotation key has not been removed proceed to step 8. If a new clockspring was installed and the anti-rotation key has been removed before the steering wheel is installed or the same clockspring is being installed, rotate the clockspring inner rotor counterclockwise and carefully feel for the ribbon wire to run out of length with slight resistance. Stop rotating the clockspring inner rotor at this point. 7. Starting with the clockspring inner rotor, wiring and connector in the 12 o'clock position, rotate the inner rotor clockwise through 4 revolutions to center the clockspring. Verify that the clockspring is correctly centered by observing that after 4 revolutions: the clockspring rotor window is in the 4 o'clock position and the yellow indicator shows in the window. - the 2 arrows located on the inner and outer rotor of the clockspring line up in the 6 o'clock position. - the clockspring inner rotor, wiring and connector are in the 12 o'clock position. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable, Air Bag > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5724 8. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the clockspring make sure the road wheels are in the straight-ahead position. NOTE: The clockspring inner rotor, wiring and connector must be in the 12 o'clock position to install the steering wheel. Install the steering wheel. 9. If a new clockspring was installed, remove the anti-rotation key. 10. Install the driver air bag module. 11. Repower the SRS. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor View 151-2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 5729 Impact Sensor: Locations Side Impact Sensor View 151-24 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 5730 View 151-24 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 5731 View 151-25 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 5732 View 151-25 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Forward Crash Sensor C177 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 5735 Impact Sensor: Diagrams Side Impact Sensor C3209 C3210 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 5736 C3211 C3212 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5737 Impact Sensor: Testing and Inspection SENSORS WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in a crash. For this vehicle line, the supplemental restraint system (SRS) uses 5 satellite sensors in addition to the restraints control module (RCM). The RCM is mounted to the center tunnel beneath the console. All vehicles have one front impact severity sensor located in the front-center area of the vehicle, behind the grille mounted on the lower radiator support. The first row impact sensors are mounted behind the trim panel near the floor on the B-pillar, the second row sensors are located on each C-pillar. The front and side impact sensor are not interchangeable. Mounting orientation is critical for correct operation of all impact sensors. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Front Impact Severity Sensor FRONT IMPACT SEVERITY SENSOR Removal and Installation WARNING: - If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in a crash. - To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. NOTE: - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. 1. Depower the SRS. 2. Disconnect the front impact severity sensor electrical connector. 3. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque. Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of personal injury or death in a crash. NOTE: Make sure the radiator support and front impact severity sensor mating surfaces are clean and free of foreign material. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 5740 - Note the position of the locator tab on the front impact severity sensor for installation. Remove the nut and the front impact severity sensor. To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 5. Repower the SRS. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 5741 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor - First Row, B-Pillar SIDE IMPACT SENSOR - FIRST ROW, B-PILLAR Removal and Installation WARNING: - If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in a crash. - To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. NOTE: - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a SRS fault. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. - RH shown, LH similar. 1. Depower the SRS. 2. Remove the B-pillar trim panel. 3. Disconnect the side impact sensor electrical connector. 4. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque. Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of personal injury or death in a crash. NOTE: Make sure the B-pillar and side impact severity sensor mating surfaces are clean and free of foreign material. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 5742 - Note position of the locator tab on the front impact severity sensor for installation. Remove the bolt and the side impact sensor. Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 6. Repower the SRS. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 5743 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor - Second Row, C-Pillar SIDE IMPACT SENSOR - SECOND ROW, C-PILLAR Removal and Installation WARNING: - If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in a crash. - To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. NOTE: - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. - RH shown, LH similar. 1. Depower the SRS. 2. Remove the C-pillar trim panel. 3. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque. Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of personal injury or death in a crash. NOTE: Make sure the C-pillar and side impact sensor mating surfaces are clean and free of foreign material. - Note position of the locator tab on the front impact severity sensor for installation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 5744 Remove the side impact sensor bolt. Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 4. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the side impact sensor. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 6. Repower the SRS. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Locations View 151-17 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 5748 C3285 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-17 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5752 C3042 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5753 Seat Occupant Sensor: Description and Operation OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SENSOR (OCS) CAUTION: It is necessary to carry out the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system reset when a front passenger seat cushion is disassembled, a new trim cover is installed or an OCS system service kit is installed. A scan tool is used to carry out the OCS system reset command. Failure to follow this instruction may result in system failure and the incorrect operation of the OCS system. NOTE: - Occupant classification sensor (OCS) system components (seat wiring harness, seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor and occupant classification system module [OCSM]) are calibrated to each other and are serviced as an assembly. The OCS system components are not to be installed separately. If a new OCS system, OCS system component or seat cushion foam pad are needed, an OCS system service kit (seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor, seat wiring harness and OCSM) must be installed as an assembly. - To identify between a production OCS system and a OCS system service kit, inspect the OCSM electrical connector. A production OCS system allows the disconnection of the OCSM electrical connector. An OCS system service kit has the electrical connector glued to the module. It cannot and should not be disconnected or altered. The OCS system is standard equipment on all front outboard passenger seats. For information on diagnosing or servicing the OCS system, refer to Air Bag Systems. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SENSOR - ORIGINAL EQUIPMENT Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5756 Removal WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. - Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete assembly. Never install only part of the kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. CAUTION: It is necessary to carry out the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system reset when a front passenger seat backrest is separated from the seat cushion, the seat cushion is disassembled, a new trim cover is installed or an OCS service kit is installed. A scan tool is used to trigger the active command to carry out the OCS system reset. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may cause system failure. NOTE: The heated seat element on the front passenger seat cushion is not serviceable separately. If a new heated seat element is needed on the front passenger seat cushion, a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) service kit equipped with a heated seat element must be installed. - Occupant classification sensor (OCS) system components, seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor and electronic control unit (ECU), are calibrated to each other and are serviced as an assembly. The OCS system components are not to be installed separately. If a new OCS system, OCS system component or seat cushion foam pad are needed, a new OCS system service kit (seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5757 and ECU) must be installed as an assembly. - To identify between a production occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and a service OCS system (OCS service kit), inspect the electronic control unit (ECU) electrical connector. A production OCS system allows the disconnect of the ECU electrical connector. A service OCS system (OCS service kit) has the ECU electrical connector glued to the ECU. It cannot and should not be disconnected or altered. - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again. 1. Depower the SRS. 2. Remove the front passenger seat. 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors and detach the wiring clips. 1 Disconnect the occupant classification sensor (OCS) electronic control unit (ECU) electrical connector. 2 Disconnect the pressure sensor electrical connector. 3 Release the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness from the seat cushion pan. 4 If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the heated seat relay electrical connector, release the wiring clip on the wiring harness from the seat cushion pan, and disconnect the 2 seat cushion element electrical connectors. 4. Remove the 4 seat cushion bolts retaining the seat cushion to the seat track. 5. CAUTION: While positioning the seat cushion pan and occupant classification sensor (OCS) assembly, be careful not to damage any of the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may cause system failure. Remove the seat cushion and pan assembly. To aid in removal, recline the seat. 6. CAUTION: Use care when separating the seat upholstery from the hook-and-loop strip, or the hook-and-loop strip can be torn from the seat cushion foam pad. Detach the seat cushion trim cover J-clips from the seat cushion pan and remove the seat cushion trim cover. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5758 7. Remove the seat cushion foam pad. 8. Bend the retaining tab away from the pressure sensor, then slide the pressure sensor off the bracket. 9. CAUTION: Care must be taken to prevent damage to the seat cushion pan when removing the rivets. Remove the 2 rivets and the OCS ECU. 10. Remove the 2 pin-type retainers from the OCS bladder and seat cushion pan. 11. Feed the OCS hose and pressure sensor through the seat cushion pan opening and remove as an assembly with the bladder. Installation NOTE: If installing an OCS service kit, refer to Occupant Classification Sensor - Service Kit. 1. Bend the retaining tab back on the pressure sensor component bracket. 2. CAUTION: - Inspect the occupant classification sensor (OCS) bladder, seat cushion pan and support assembly for any foreign objects before installing the OCS to the seat cushion pan. If any foreign objects are found, remove them. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may cause system failure. - Route the seat occupant classification sensor (OCS) components through the correct seat cushion support opening. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure. - While positioning the seat cushion pan and occupant classification sensor (OCS) assembly, be careful not to damage any of the components. Feed the OCS components (pressure sensor and hose) through the seat cushion pan opening. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5759 3. Align the OCS bladder to the seat cushion pan. 4. Install the 2 pin-type retainers to the OCS bladder and seat cushion pan. 5. NOTE: Make sure the pressure sensor hose is not kinked during installation. Install the pressure sensor onto the seat cushion pan bracket, making sure the retaining tab is completely engaged. When installed correctly, an audible click will be heard and the pressure sensor will not be able to be removed from its bracket without disengaging the retaining tab. 6. Slide the OCS ECU into the seat cushion pan bracket and install the rivets. - The OCS ECU must be correctly positioned and securely fastened in place. Failure to do so can set a DTC in the RCM. 7. Position the foam pad to the seat cushion pan. 8. CAUTION: Inspect the seat cushion pad and seat cushion trim cover for any foreign material, before installing the seat cushion trim cover to the seat cushion pad. If any foreign material is found, remove it. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may cause system failure. Install the seat cushion trim cover to the seat cushion foam pad and attach the J-clips. 9. CAUTION: While positioning the seat cushion pan and occupant classification sensor (OCS) assembly, be careful not to damage any of the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may cause system failure. Position the seat cushion and pan assembly to the seat track. To aid in installation, recline the seat. 10. Install the 4 seat cushion bolts retaining the seat cushion to the seat track. - Tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). 11. Connect the electrical connectors and wiring clips. 1 Connect the OCS ECU electrical connector. 2 Connect the pressure sensor electrical connector. 3 Install the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness to the seat cushion pan. 4 If equipped with heated seats, connect the heated seat relay electrical connector, install the wiring clip on the wiring harness to the seat cushion pan, and connect the 2 seat cushion element electrical connectors. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5760 12. Install the front passenger seat into the vehicle. 13. Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the system at this time. 14. WARNING: Make sure the front passenger seat repair is complete, the seat and all attached components (head restraint, seat side shield, etc.) are correctly assembled, and the seat is correctly installed to the vehicle before carrying out the System Reset. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. CAUTION: Make sure the seat is completely assembled before carrying out the occupant classification sensor (OCS) System Reset active command. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may cause system failure. - The following precautions must be taken before carrying out the occupant classification sensor (OCS) System Reset. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may cause system failure. Make sure the OCS system components are connected and no faults are present. - Make sure the OCS system is not at a temperature below 0°C (32°F) or above 45°C (113°F) when initiating the OCS system reset process. If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or hot temperatures, the vehicle must be exposed and kept at a temperature within the limits, 0°C to 45°C (32°F to 113°F) for a minimum of 30 minutes. - Make sure nothing is present on the passenger seat before carrying out the OCS system reset and nothing is placed on the seat during the process. - Make sure a minimum 8-second time period has passed after cycling the ignition switch ON before the carrying out the OCS system reset process. NOTE: For best results in carrying out the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system reset process, the OCS system should be at or near room temperature, 10°C to 29°C (50°F to 85°F). - If the first attempt to carry out the OCS system reset is unsuccessful and DTC C1941 is reported, a second attempt must be made. If on the second attempt to carry out the OCS system reset is unsuccessful and DTC C1941 is reported a second time, a new OCS system service kit must be installed. Carry out the OCS system reset. With the front passenger seat empty, use a scan tool to trigger the active command. 15. NOTE: The ignition switch must be cycled after the OCS system reset is successful. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will: fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5761 The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all RCM and OCS module DTCs using a scan tool. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5762 Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Occupant Classification Sensor - Service Kit OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SENSOR - SERVICE KIT Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5763 Removal WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. - Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete assembly. Never install only part of the kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. CAUTION: It is necessary to carry out the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system reset when a front passenger seat backrest is separated from the seat cushion, the seat cushion is disassembled, a new trim cover is installed or an OCS service kit is installed. A scan tool is used to trigger the active command to carry out rezeroing of the OCS system. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may cause system failure. NOTE: The heated seat element on the front passenger seat cushion is not serviceable separately. If a new heated seat element is needed on the front passenger seat cushion, a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) service kit equipped with a heated seat element must be installed. - OCS system components (seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor and electronic control unit) are calibrated to each other and are serviced as an assembly. The OCS system components are not to be installed separately. If a new OCS system, OCS system component or seat cushion foam pad are needed, a new OCS system service kit (seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor and electronic control unit) must be installed as an assembly. - To identify between a production occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and a service OCS system (OCS service kit) inspect the electronic control unit (ECU) electrical connector. A production OCS system allows the disconnect of the ECU electrical connector. A service OCS system (OCS service kit) has the ECU electrical connector glued to the ECU. It cannot and should not be disconnected or altered. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5764 - If removing an original equipment manufacturer (OEM) occupant classification sensor (OCS), refer to the appropriate procedure. - The seat wiring harness will be reused. The OCS service kit connector connects to the seat wiring harness electronic control unit ECU connector. The pressure sensor seat wiring harness connector will be left unplugged and secured by a tie strap. - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. 1. Depower the SRS. 2. Remove the passenger seat. 3. NOTE: The seat wiring harness will be reused. Disconnect the electrical connector(s) and wiring clips. 1 Disconnect the seat wire harness OCS electrical connector from the service part OCS electrical connector. 2 Release the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness from the seat cushion pan. 3 If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the heated seat module electrical connector, release the wiring clip on the wiring harness from the seat cushion pan, and disconnect the 2 seat cushion element electrical connectors. 4. Remove the 4 seat cushion bolts retaining the seat cushion to the seat track. 5. CAUTION: While positioning the seat cushion pan and occupant classification sensor (OCS) assembly, be careful not to damage any of the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may cause system failure. Remove the seat cushion and pan assembly. To aid in removal, recline the seat. 6. CAUTION: Use care when separating the seat upholstery from the hook-and-loop strip, or the hook-and-loop strip can be torn from the seat cushion foam pad. Detach the seat cushion trim cover J-clips from the seat cushion pan and remove the seat cushion trim cover. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5765 7. Bend the retaining tab away from the pressure sensor, then slide the pressure sensor off the bracket. 8. CAUTION: Care must be taken to prevent damage to the seat cushion pan when removing the rivets. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure. Remove the 2 rivets and detach the OCS ECU from the seat cushion pan. 9. Remove the OCS. - Pull all the OCS components (hose, pressure sensor, wire harness, ECU and connectors) through the seat cushion pan opening. Installation 1. Bend the retaining tab back on the pressure sensor component bracket. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5766 2. CAUTION: - Inspect the occupant classification sensor (OCS) assembly, seat cushion pan and support assembly for any foreign material before installing the OCS assembly to the seat cushion pan. If any foreign material is found, remove it. Failure to do so may result in personal injury, in the event of an air bag deployment. - Route the seat occupant classification sensor (OCS) components through the correct seat cushion support opening. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure. - While positioning the seat cushion pan and occupant classification sensor (OCS) assembly, be careful not to damage any of the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure. Feed the OCS service kit components (hose, pressure sensor, ECU, wire harness and connectors) through the seat cushion pan opening. 3. NOTE: - When installing a service part OCS, the seat wire harness pressure sensor electrical connector is not used. - Make sure the pressure sensor hose is not kinked during installation. Install the OCS components to the seat cushion pan. 1 Install the pressure sensor onto the seat cushion pan bracket, making sure the retaining tab is completely engaged. When installed correctly, an audible click will be heard and the pressure sensor will not be able to be removed from its bracket without disengaging the retaining tab. 2 Slide the ECU into the seat cushion pan bracket. The ECU must be correctly positioned and securely fastened in place. Failure to do so can set a DTC in the restraints control module (RCM). 3 Install the rivets. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5767 4. Attach the seat cushion trim cover J-clips to the seat cushion pan. 5. CAUTION: While positioning the seat cushion pan and occupant classification sensor (OCS) assembly, be careful not to damage any of the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure. Position the seat cushion and pan assembly to the seat track. To aid in installation, recline the seat. 6. Install the 4 seat cushion bolts retaining the seat cushion to the seat track. - Tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). 7. NOTE: - Do not tie strap any wiring to the OCS bladder and pressure sensor hose. - The seat wiring harness will be reused. Connect the electrical connector(s) and wiring clips. 1 Connect the seat wire harness OCS electrical connector to the service part OCS electrical connector. 2 Install the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness to the cushion pan. 3 If equipped with heated seats, connect the heated seat module electrical connector, install the wiring clip on the wiring harness to the cushion pan, and connect the 2 cushion element electrical connectors. 4 Tie strap the unused seat wire harness pressure sensor electrical connector safely aside. 5 Tie strap all loose wire harnesses and electrical connectors safely aside. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5768 8. Install the front passenger seat into the vehicle. 9. Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the system at this time. 10. WARNING: Make sure the front passenger seat repair is complete, the seat and all attached components (head restraint, seat side shield, etc.) are correctly assembled, and the seat is correctly installed to the vehicle before carrying out the System Reset. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. CAUTION: Make sure the seat is completely assembled before carrying out the occupant classification sensor (OCS) System Reset active command. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may cause system failure. - The following precautions must be taken before carrying out the occupant classification sensor (OCS) System Reset. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may cause system failure. Make sure the OCS system components are connected and no faults are present. - Make sure the OCS system is not at a temperature below 0°C (32°F) or above 45°C (113°F) when initiating the OCS system reset process. If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or hot temperatures, the vehicle must be exposed and kept at a temperature within the limits, 0°C to 45°C (32°F to 113°F) for a minimum of 30 minutes. - Make sure nothing is present on the passenger seat before carrying out the OCS system reset and nothing is placed on the seat during the process. - Make sure a minimum 8-second time period has passed after cycling the ignition switch ON before the carrying out the OCS system reset process. NOTE: For best results in carrying out the OCS system reset process, the OCS system should be at or near room temperature, 10°C to 29°C (50°F to 85°F). - If the first attempt to carry out the OCS system reset is unsuccessful and DTC C1941 is reported, a second attempt must be made. If on the second attempt to carry out the OCS system reset is unsuccessful and DTC C1941 is reported a second time, a new OCS system service kit must be installed. Carry out the OCS system reset. With the front passenger seat empty, use a scan tool to trigger the active command. 11. NOTE: The ignition switch must be cycled after the OCS system reset. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will: fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5769 The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all RCM and OCS module DTCs using a scan tool. 12. NOTE: When installing a new OCS, a prepaid return postcard is provided with the new OCS. The serial number for the new part and the vehicle identification number (VIN) must be recorded and sent to Ford Motor Company. Fill out the necessary information on the OCS traceability card and return it along with the complete inoperative OCS to Ford Motor Company. When returning the inoperative OCS, include the following: seat cushion foam pad, bladder, electronic control unit, pressure sensor (transducer), hose, electrical connectors and wire harness (service part OCS only). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-16 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5773 C356 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5774 Seat Position Sensor: Service and Repair SEAT POSITION SENSOR Removal and Installation WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. NOTE: - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a SRS fault. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. 1. Raise the driver seat and position it in the middle of the track. 2. Depower the SRS. 3. Remove the driver seat. 4. Disconnect the seat position sensor electrical connector. 5. Push apart the 2 tabs, then push inward to release the seat position sensor locking clip. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5775 6. Slide the seat position sensor forward to release the 2 hooks from the bracket. Then remove the seat position sensor. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 8. Repower the SRS. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair Side Air Bag: Service and Repair SIDE AIR BAG MODULE Removal WARNING: Always carry or place a live air bag module with the air bag and deployment door/trim cover/tear seam pointed away from the body. Do not set a live air bag module down with the deployment door/trim cover/tear seam face down. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. - If the seat side air bag cover has been damaged or separated from its mounting, or if the air bag material has been exposed, install a new seat side air bag module. Never try to repair the seat side air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag deploying incorrectly, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. - Front seat backrest trim covers installed on seats equipped with seat side air bags cannot be repaired. A new trim cover must be installed. Cleaning is permissible. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag module deploying incorrectly and increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. - To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. NOTE: If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seat back pad, trim cover, side air bag module and nuts must be installed. The seat back frame should be replaced if necessary. - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a SRS fault. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5779 - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. All seats 1. Remove the front seat and depower the SRS. 2. NOTE: Manual seat shown, power seat similar. Remove the inboard seat cushion side shield. 1 Remove the rear screw. 2 Push the inboard seat cushion side shield forward to release. 3. CAUTION: Note the position of the wiring harness, to aid installation. An incorrectly routed wiring harness could become damaged when the seat is moved. Disconnect the side air bag module electrical connector and detach it from the seat track. Then detach the 3 wiring harness routing retainers. Seats with manual lumbar adjust 4. Turn the manual lumbar knob clockwise until it stops, releasing all tension on the manual lumbar support cable. 5. Pull and remove the manual lumbar knob. All seats 6. Release the seat backrest trim cover J-clip. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5780 7. CAUTION: Use care when separating the seat backrest trim cover from the hook-and-loop strip. The hook-and-loop strip can be torn from the seat backrest foam pad. Failure to follow this instruction may result in component damage and/or system failure. Place a hand between the seat backrest trim cover and the seat backrest foam pad and carefully separate the hook-and-loop strips. 8. Carefully roll up the seat back trim cover in an inside out fashion to the side air bag module. 9. Release the side air bag module deployment chute J-clip from around the side air bag module. 10. Feed the side air bag module deployment chute and J-clips out through the side air bag module seat backrest foam opening. 11. Continue to roll the seat backrest trim cover up to access the side air bag module. 12. Detach the 2 side air bag module wiring harness retainers from the seat backrest frame. 13. Through the back of the seat backrest, position out the seat backrest foam pad. Then remove the 2 side air bag module nuts and remove the side air bag module. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5781 Installation WARNING: Inspect the seat side air bag module and mounting surfaces for any damage or foreign material before installing the seat side air bag module. If any damage is found, install new components. If any foreign material is found, remove it. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag module deploying incorrectly and increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. - Before installing the seat side air bag module/deployment chute assembly: Inspect the side air bag module and mounting surfaces for any damage or foreign material. - Remove any foreign material from the mounting surfaces of the deployment chute, the seat backrest frame mounting bracket and the air bag module cavity in the seat backrest foam pad. - Install new parts if damaged. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag deploying incorrectly, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. - If the seat side air bag cover has been damaged or separated from its mounting, or if the air bag material has been exposed, install a new seat side air bag module. Never try to repair the seat side air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag deploying incorrectly, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. CAUTION: Make sure the side air bag module wiring harness is not pinched between the side air bag module and the mounting bracket. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness damage and may cause system failure. All seats 1. Install the side air bag module and nuts onto the seat backrest frame mounting bracket. - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 2. Attach the 2 side air bag module wiring harness retainers to the seat backrest frame. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5782 3. Roll down the seat trim cover to the side air bag module. 4. WARNING: Check the seat side air bag deployment chute for damage. The deployment chute must not be repaired. If there is any damage to the deployment chute, a new seat back trim cover and deployment chute must be installed as a unit. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag module deploying incorrectly and increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. Feed the side air bag module deployment chute and J-clips back through the side air bag module seat backrest foam opening. 5. WARNING: If the seat side air bag module deployment chute is not correctly positioned and closed, the seat side air bag module may not deploy correctly. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag module deploying incorrectly and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. Install the side air bag module deployment chute and J-clips around the side air bag module and seat backrest frame. 6. Roll the seat backrest trim cover down in position and attach the hook-and-loop strips. 7. Feed the seat backrest trim cover rear J-clip through seat between the seat backrest and seat cushion. 8. Attach the seat backrest trim cover J-clips. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Air Bag Systems > Side Air Bag > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5783 Seats with manual lumbar adjust 9. Install the manual lumbar control knob. All seats 10. Attach the 3 wiring harness routing retainers. Then connect the side air bag module electrical connector and attach it to the seat track. 11. Install the inboard seat cushion side shield and screw. 12. Install the front seat and repower the SRS. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Child Seat > Component Information > Description and Operation Child Seat: Description and Operation ATTACHING SAFETY SEATS WITH TETHER STRAPS Some manufacturers make child safety seats that include a tether strap that goes over the back of the vehicle seat and attaches to an anchoring point. Other manufacturers offer the tether strap as an accessory. Contact the manufacturer of the child safety seat for information about ordering a tether strap. Refer to Child Safety Seat Tether Anchor in the Removal and Installation portion or the Owner's Literature for usage information. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations Air Bag Control Module: Locations View 151-13 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5791 View 151-22 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5792 Air Bag Control Module: Diagrams C2041A Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5793 C2041B (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5794 C2041B (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5795 Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair RESTRAINTS CONTROL MODULE (RCM) Removal WARNING: Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the safety canopy and cause serious personal injury or death. - If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in a crash. - To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. CAUTION: Electronic modules are sensitive to static electrical charges. If exposed to these charges, damage can result. - When installing a new restraints control module (RCM), it is necessary to carry out programmable module installation (PMI). Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraint control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - When installing a new RCM, always make sure the correct RCM is being installed. If an incorrect RCM is installed, erroneous DTCs will result. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. 1. If installing a new RCM, carry out the steps necessary to prepare for programmable module installation (PMI). 2. Depower the SRS. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5796 3. Remove the center console. 4. Remove the lower LH center instrument panel finish panel. - Remove the pin-type retainer. - Release the 2 retainer hooks from the instrument panel brace. 5. Position back the carpet on the LH and RH tunnel to access the RCM. 6. Disconnect the small RCM electrical connector. 7. Disconnect the large RCM electrical connector. 1 Pinch the thumb tab and pivot the connector position assurance lever all the way back until it stops. 2 Pull out and disconnect the RCM electrical connector. 8. Remove the 3 bolts and RCM. Installation 1. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque. Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of personal injury or death in a crash. Install the RCM and 3 bolts. Tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft). 2. Make sure the connector position assurance lever is in the full release position before attempting to connect the connector. 3. CAUTION: Putting the large restraints control module (RCM) electrical connector into the RCM on an angle can cause bad electrical connections and damage components. Position the large RCM electrical connector into the RCM. - CAUTION: Do not push the connector to the point where the lever pivots and seats itself. Light pressure is needed to get the Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5797 connector into position on the restraints control module (RCM) before using the lever to fully seat the connector. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure. With the large RCM electrical connector uniformly aligned to the RCM, lightly push in until a subtle audible click is heard and slight resistance is felt. 4. Connect the RCM electrical connector. - Pivot the connector position assurance lever toward the RCM, drawing the connector in to the RCM. Make sure the thumb tab is engaged to the retainer on the RCM and locked in place. 5. Connect the small RCM electrical connector. 6. Position back the carpet on the LH and RH tunnel to its original position. 7. Install the lower LH center instrument panel finish panel. - Attach the 2 retainer hooks to the instrument panel brace. - Install the pin-type retainer. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 5798 8. Install the center console. 9. Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. 10. When installing a new RCM, carry out the steps necessary to complete PMI. 11. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition switch from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the ignition switch back to ON and visually monitor the air bag indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn OFF. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will: fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured). The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous DTCs from the RCM. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Locations View 151-17 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Relays and Modules - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag > Component Information > Locations > Page 5802 C3285 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) DEPOWERING AND REPOWERING Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Depowering Procedure WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. - Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the safety canopy and cause serious personal injury or death. - To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 3. At the smart power distribution junction box (SPDJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover and the restraints control module (RCM) fuse 32 (10A) from the SPDJB. 4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Air Bag Systems for location of the RCM and impact sensor(s). To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least 1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an accidental deployment. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Repowering Procedure 1. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON. 2. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SPDJB and install the cover. 3. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Connect the battery ground cable. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 5808 4. Prove out the supplemental restraint system (SRS) as follows: Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag indicator will: fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) from the restraints control module using a scan tool. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 5809 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) DEACTIVATION AND REACTIVATION Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Deactivation WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. - To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 3. At the smart power distribution junction box (SPDJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover and the RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SPDJB. 4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition OFF. 6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Air Bag Systems for location of the RCM and impact sensor(s). To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least 1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an accidental deployment. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 7. Using a 3-mm Allen wrench or a suitable tool, place it in the driver air bag module release hole on the underside of the steering wheel. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 5810 8. CAUTION: During driver air bag module removal, make sure all 3 driver air bag module hooks are released from the steering wheel wire clip. Failure to do so may cause damage to the driver air bag module and or the steering wheel. NOTE: The driver air bag module is removed for clarity. Position the 3-mm Allen wrench or suitable tool against the wire clip and push inward disengaging the wire clip from the 3 driver air bag module hooks. 9. Disconnect the horn electrical connector. Then disconnect the 2 driver air bag module electrical connectors and remove the driver air bag module. 10. Open and lower the glove compartment door. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 5811 11. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts. 12. CAUTION: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure. NOTE: Use care when removing the passenger air bag module from the instrument panel (I/P). The passenger air bag module can drop down during removal and the passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the I/P. Through the glove compartment opening, release the passenger air bag module deployment door clips while pushing the passenger air bag module out of the I/P. 13. Remove the passenger air bag module. 1 Disconnect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors. 2 Detach the wire harness routing clip and remove the passenger air bag module. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 5812 14. From under the rear of the passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector. 15. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. 1 Separate the weatherstrip. 2 Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel. 3 Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel. 16. Disconnect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector. 17. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel. 1 Separate the weatherstrip. 2 Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel. 3 Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 5813 18. Disconnect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector. 19. From under the rear of the driver seat, slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector. 20. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SPDJB. 21. Connect the battery ground cable. Reactivation 1. Remove RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SPDJB. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 3. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip. 4. Connect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 5814 5. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel. 1 Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel. 2 Install the D-pillar trim panel. 3 Install the weatherstrip. 6. Connect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector. 7. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. 1 Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel. 2 Install the D-pillar trim panel. 3 Install the weatherstrip. 8. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 5815 clip. 9. CAUTION: - During passenger air bag module installation, make sure the passenger air bag module wire harness routing clip is attached to the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness damage. - The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component and/or connector damage. Install the passenger air bag module. 1 Connect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors. 2 Attach the wire harness routing clip. 10. CAUTION: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure. NOTE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door clips are fully seated into the instrument panel. - Use care when installing the passenger air bag module in the instrument panel (I/P). The passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the I/P. Position the passenger air bag module and seat the passenger air bag module deployment door clips into the I/P. 11. Install the 2 passenger air bag module bolts. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 5816 12. Close the glove compartment door. 13. CAUTION: The driver air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the driver air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the driver air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the driver air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in component damage and/or connector damage. Install the driver air bag module electrical connectors fully into the driver air bag module. Then connect the horn electrical connector. 14. NOTE: - Make sure the driver air bag module wiring harness is routed down and away from the driver air bag module hooks during installation. - Audible clicks will be heard when the 3 wire clips are seated in the 3 driver air bag module hooks. Align the driver air bag module hooks to the steering wheel and, while pushing inward, seat the 3 driver air bag module hooks to the steering wheel wire clip. When the 3 driver air bag module hooks are seated in place, gently pull outward at the corners of the driver air bag module to make sure that the 3 hooks are fully seated. There should also be an even gap between the driver air bag module trim cover and the steering wheel. Check the driver air bag module and trim cover for correct movement when applying the horn. 15. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON. 16. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SPDJB and install the cover. 17. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Connect the battery ground cable. 18. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will: fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous DTCs from the restraints control module using a scan tool. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Child Restraint > Child Seat Tether Attachment > Component Information > Description and Operation Child Seat Tether Attachment: Description and Operation Child Safety Seat Tether Anchors WARNING: Always tighten the child safety seat tether anchor/bolt to specification. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the child's safety seat being incorrectly secured, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death to the child in a sudden stop or crash. The child safety seat tether anchors are attached to the roof near the rear liftgate. If the child safety seat tether anchors were in use during a collision, inspect and install new anchors as necessary. Return the vehicle structure to its original production configuration. Lower Anchors and Tethers For Children (LATCH) The lower anchors and tethers for children (LATCH) system is a standardized and uniform attachment system for installing child safety seats in passenger vehicles. LATCH-equipped child safety seats have 2 lower attachments that connect to the vehicle portion of the LATCH system. The vehicle portion of the system consists of 2 attachment points (6-mm wires) welded to the 60 percent and the 40 percent rear seat backrest frame. The attachment points protrude from the biteline between the seat cushion and seat backrest. If a child safety seat was in use during a collision, inspect the vehicle portion of the system for damage. If any of the attachment points (6-mm wires) are damaged, install a new seat backrest frame. For information on installing a new seat backrest frame, refer to Seats. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Child Restraint > Child Seat Tether Attachment > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 5821 Child Seat Tether Attachment: Service and Repair CHILD SAFETY SEAT TETHER ANCHOR Removal and Installation WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function: - Retractors - Buckles - Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped) - Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped) - Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped) - Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies - Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only) If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing portion, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. 1. Remove the child safety seat tether anchor cover by releasing the top anchor end of the cover first and rocking the cover off of the anchor bolt end. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Child Restraint > Child Seat Tether Attachment > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 5822 2. Remove the bolt and the child safety seat tether anchor. - To install, tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb-ft). 3. WARNING: Always tighten the child safety seat tether anchor/bolt to specification. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the child's safety seat being incorrectly secured, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death to the child in a sudden stop or crash. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Description and Operation Seat Belt Buckle: Description and Operation SAFETY BELT BUCKLE PRETENSIONER The safety belt buckle and pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device that removes excess webbing from the safety belt when deployed. The pretensioner works in conjunction with the front air bag system. When the front air bags deploy, the pretensioners deploy, causing the buckle to move downward, removing excess webbing from the lap and shoulder safety belts. If the vehicle is involved in a collision that results in deployment of the front air bags and safety belt pretensioners, a new driver and passenger seat belt system (including safety belt buckle and pretensioners, safety belt retractors, and height adjusters), must be installed. For safety belt buckle pretensioner diagnostic information, refer to Air Bag Systems. For safety belt buckle pretensioner disposal information, refer to Air Bag Systems. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 5826 Seat Belt Buckle: Testing and Inspection FUNCTIONAL TEST - BUCKLE AND TONGUE The safety belt buckle and tongue assembly must operate freely during the latching and unlatching function. Fasten the safety belt by inserting the tongue (male portion) into the buckle (female portion). 1. Verify the following during the latching sequence: - Tongue insertion is not hindered by excessive effort. - A "click" is heard when the buckle latches the tongue. 2. Verify the system integrity by forcefully pulling on the belt webbing. 3. Unlatch the belt by fully depressing the buckle release button, and allowing the belt to release and retract. 4. Verify the following during the unlatching process: - Push-button depression does not require excessive effort. - Tongue can be removed easily from the buckle. - Repeat the above steps 3 times. 5. If the inspection reveals an obvious concern(s) that can be readily identified, service as required. Do not attempt to carry out any repair on the buckle and tongue assembly. If a concern exists with either component, a new safety belt buckle and safety belt retractor assembly must be installed. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner Seat Belt Buckle: Service and Repair Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner SAFETY BELT BUCKLE AND PRETENSIONER Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioner, Power Seat (Driver Only) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner > Page 5829 Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioner, Manual Seat Removal and Installation WARNING: - Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. - After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function: - Retractors - Buckles - Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped) - Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped) - Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped) - Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies - Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only) If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing portion, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner > Page 5830 - Never probe the electrical connectors on safety belt buckle/retractor pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the safety belt pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. NOTE: - The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. All seats 1. Remove the affected seat. 2. Remove the inboard seat cushion side shield. - Remove the cushion side shield screw(s). 3. Disconnect the 2 safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connectors. 4. NOTE: Note the wire harness routing for installation. Detach the side air bag wiring harness pin-type retainer from the safety belt buckle pretensioner. Driver seat 5. Remove the seat position sensor wiring harness tie strap from the safety belt buckle pretensioner. All seats 6. Detach the safety belt buckle pretensioner and buckle switch electrical connectors from the seat track and detach the wiring harness pin-type retainer. 7. Remove the bolt and the safety belt buckle pretensioner. - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 9. Install the seat. 10. Check the active restraint system for correct operation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner > Page 5831 Seat Belt Buckle: Service and Repair Safety Belt Buckle - Rear SAFETY BELT BUCKLE - REAR Removal and Installation WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function: - Retractors - Buckles - Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped) - Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped) - Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped) - Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies - Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only) If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing portion, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. 1. NOTE: To access the center and passenger side rear safety belt buckles, pivot the rear seat cushion forward and the rear seat backrest rearward. Remove the bolt and the rear center and RH safety belt buckle assembly. To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle > Component Information > Service and Repair > Safety Belt Buckle and Pretensioner > Page 5832 2. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 3. Check the active restraint system for correct operation. - Make sure the safety belts and buckles are accessible to the occupants after installation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Passenger View 151-17 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Passenger > Page 5837 View 151-16 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Driver C3065 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Driver > Page 5840 C3066 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Extension > Component Information > Description and Operation Seat Belt Extension: Description and Operation SAFETY BELT EXTENSION ASSEMBLY In certain cases, the safety belt may be too short even when it is fully extended. About 20 cm (8 in) can be added to the belt length by using a safety belt extension. Safety belt extensions are available at no cost from any Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer parts department. Safety belt extensions are only available with black webbing. Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too short for you when fully extended. Do not use an extension to change the fit of the shoulder belt across the torso. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Height Adjuster > Component Information > Service and Repair Seat Belt Height Adjuster: Service and Repair SAFETY BELT SHOULDER HEIGHT ADJUSTER Removal and Installation WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function: - Retractors - Buckles - Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped) - Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped) - Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped) - Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies - Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only) If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing portion, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. 1. NOTE: Inspect the D-ring cover for damage. If the cover is damaged or does not remain closed, install new D-ring cover and bolt. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Height Adjuster > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5847 Remove the D-ring cover by squeezing the height adjuster buttons and pulling the cover out at the bottom. 2. Remove the upper B-pillar trim panel. 3. Lower the height adjuster and remove the upper bolt. - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 4. NOTE: Note the position of the lower locator tab for installation. Raise the height adjuster and remove the lower bolt and height adjuster. To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 6. Check the active restraint system for correct operation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Buzzer > Component Information > Description and Operation Seat Belt Reminder Buzzer: Description and Operation Safety Belt Warning Indicator and Chime The safety belt warning indicator and warning chime are reminders to fasten the safety belts. The system operates as follows: If the driver safety belt is not buckled before the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the safety belt warning indicator illuminates for one minute and the warning chime sounds for 6 seconds. - If the driver safety belt is buckled while the warning indicator is illuminated and the warning chime is sounding, the safety belt warning indicator and warning chime turn off. - If the driver safety belt is buckled before the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the safety belt warning indicator and warning chime remain off. Belt-Minder(R) The Belt-Minder(R) feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt warning function. This feature provides additional reminders that front safety belts are unbuckled by intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster. Both the driver and passenger safety belts are monitored and either may activate the Belt-Minder(R) feature. The warnings are the same for the driver and the front passenger. If the Belt-Minder(R) warnings have expired (warnings for approximately 5 minutes) for one occupant (driver or front passenger), the other occupant can still activate the Belt-Minder(R) feature. The Belt-Minder(R) feature uses information from the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system on the front passenger seat to determine if a front seat passenger is present and therefore potentially in need of a warning. The warning is activated if the OCS system senses weight exceeding a programmed set point. The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder(R) feature is deactivated/activated independently. When deactivating/activating the Belt-Minder(R) for a seat, do not buckle the safety belts on the other seat, or the process will be terminated. To deactivate/activate the Belt-Minder(R) feature, refer to Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation Seat Belt Reminder Lamp: Description and Operation Safety Belt Warning Indicator and Chime The safety belt warning indicator and warning chime are reminders to fasten the safety belts. The system operates as follows: If the driver safety belt is not buckled before the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the safety belt warning indicator illuminates for one minute and the warning chime sounds for 6 seconds. - If the driver safety belt is buckled while the warning indicator is illuminated and the warning chime is sounding, the safety belt warning indicator and warning chime turn off. - If the driver safety belt is buckled before the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the safety belt warning indicator and warning chime remain off. Belt-Minder(R) The Belt-Minder(R) feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt warning function. This feature provides additional reminders that front safety belts are unbuckled by intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster. Both the driver and passenger safety belts are monitored and either may activate the Belt-Minder(R) feature. The warnings are the same for the driver and the front passenger. If the Belt-Minder(R) warnings have expired (warnings for approximately 5 minutes) for one occupant (driver or front passenger), the other occupant can still activate the Belt-Minder(R) feature. The Belt-Minder(R) feature uses information from the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system on the front passenger seat to determine if a front seat passenger is present and therefore potentially in need of a warning. The warning is activated if the OCS system senses weight exceeding a programmed set point. The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder(R) feature is deactivated/activated independently. When deactivating/activating the Belt-Minder(R) for a seat, do not buckle the safety belts on the other seat, or the process will be terminated. To deactivate/activate the Belt-Minder(R) feature, refer to Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Description and Operation Seat Belt Retractor: Description and Operation Dual Locking Mode Retractors WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function: Retractors - Buckles - Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped) - Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped) - Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped) - Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies - Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only) If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing portion, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTE: When installing a new dual locking mode retractor, the retractor should be checked to make sure it is not in the automatic locking retractor (ALR) mode after installation in the stowed position. All outboard continuous-loop, 3-point retractor systems, except the driver position, are equipped with the dual locking mode system. The emergency locking retractor (ELR) mode will allow the occupant freedom of movement, locking tight only on hard braking, hard cornering, or an impact of approximately 8 km/h (5 mph). The ELR mode helps to reduce the forward movement of the driver and passengers. The ELR mode is continuously in operation at all seating positions. The ALR portion of this system does not allow the occupant freedom of movement. The ALR mode is used when locking a child seat in an outboard seating position or when a tight belt fit is desired. The ALR mode is disengaged when the webbing is free to move in or out of the retractor. The ALR mode is automatically engaged when the webbing is fully extracted from the retractor and then allowed to retract. As the webbing is retracted back onto the spool, an audible clicking sound is made, indicating that the retractor is in ALR mode. The ALR mode is automatically disengaged when most of the webbing is retracted back onto the spool. The automatic locking mode must be used when installing a child safety seat in the front or rear passenger seating positions where dual locking mode retractors are provided. Energy Management Retractor This vehicle has a safety belt system with an energy management feature at the front seating positions to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on collision. The energy management retractor feature is designed to pay out webbing in a controlled manner. This feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on an occupant's chest. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 5857 Seat Belt Retractor: Testing and Inspection Functional Test - Retractor The safety belt retractor assembly must be freely operational for extraction and retraction of the safety belt webbing between full extension and in-vehicle stowed positions. 1. Extract and retract the safety belt between the full extension and stowed positions. 2. Verify the retractor operates without excessive effort or binding. 3. Install a new safety belt retractor and buckle if no obvious concerns are noticed and the complaint has been verified. Functional Test - Automatic Locking Retractor WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function: Retractors - Buckles - Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped) - Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped) - Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped) - Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies - Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only) If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing portion, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. 1. Position the seat back into the full up position. 2. Position the height adjuster (if equipped) in the full down or up position. 3. Latch the seat belt buckle and tongue assembly. 4. Pull the shoulder belt out until the automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature is activated. 5. Release the shoulder belt and allow it to retract until it stops. 6. Pull on the shoulder belt to check that the belt has remained in the ALR mode. If the belt is not locked, install a new safety belt assembly. 7. Unlatch the safety belt tongue from the buckle and allow the safety belt to retract to its stowed position. 8. Pull the shoulder belt to verify the retractor assembly has converted automatically out of the ALR mode. If the shoulder belt remains locked in the stowed position, install a new safety belt retractor assembly. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Safety Belt Retractor and Pretensioner Seat Belt Retractor: Service and Repair Safety Belt Retractor and Pretensioner SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR AND PRETENSIONER Part 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Safety Belt Retractor and Pretensioner > Page 5860 Part 2 Removal and Installation WARNING: - Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. - After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function: Retractors - Buckles - Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped) - Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped) - Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped) - Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies - Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only) If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing portion, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. - Never probe the electrical connectors on safety belt buckle/retractor pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the safety belt pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. NOTE: - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. All safety belt retractor pretensioners 1. Depower the supplemental restraint system (SRS). 2. NOTE: Inspect the D-ring cover for damage. If the cover is damaged or does not remain closed, install a new D-ring cover and bolt. Remove the safety belt D-ring bolt cover by squeezing the height adjuster buttons and pulling the cover out at the bottom. 3. Remove the D-ring bolt and D-ring from the safety belt height adjuster, and position aside. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Safety Belt Retractor and Pretensioner > Page 5861 - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 4. Remove the lower B-pillar trim panel. Passenger safety belt retractor pretensioner 5. Disconnect the safety belt tension sensor electrical connector. All safety belt retractor pretensioners 6. Remove the safety belt anchor bolt and position aside the safety belt. - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 7. Remove the safety belt retractor pretensioner bolt. - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 8. Disconnect the safety belt retractor pretensioner electrical connector. 9. Unhook and remove the safety belt retractor pretensioner. 10. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 11. Repower the SRS. 12. Check the active restraint system for correct operation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Safety Belt Retractor and Pretensioner > Page 5862 Seat Belt Retractor: Service and Repair Safety Belt Retractor - Rear, Center SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR - REAR, CENTER Part 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Safety Belt Retractor and Pretensioner > Page 5863 Part 2 Removal and Installation WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function: - Retractors - Buckles - Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped) - Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped) - Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped) - Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies - Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only) If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing portion, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. 1. Remove the 60 percent seat backrest. 2. Remove the head restraints. 3. Remove the 2 screws and the latch cover. 4. Remove the 2 seat latch release lever screws. 5. Remove the seat latch release lever. 1 Detach the latch rod from the seat latch release lever. To aid installation, lock the latch using a flat-blade screwdriver before connecting the latch rod. 2 Remove the seat latch release lever. 6. Remove the 2 screws and the safety belt shield. 7. Release the backrest trim cover J-clip. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Safety Belt Retractor and Pretensioner > Page 5864 8. Unzip the backrest trim cover zipper. 9. NOTE: - The inboard and outboard head restraint guides are not interchangeable. - The head restraint guides incorporate an alignment tab that must be aligned correctly when installed. Squeeze together the tip of each head restraint guide and pull the 4 guides out of the frame tube. 10. CAUTION: Use care when separating the seat upholstery from the hook-and-loop strip, or the hook-and-loop strip can be torn from the seat backrest foam pad. Separate the hook-and-loop fasteners and remove the seat backrest trim cover. 11. Remove the backrest foam pad from the backrest frame. 12. Release the seat latch cable from the retractor. 13. Remove the 2 nuts and the safety belt guide. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Safety Belt Retractor and Pretensioner > Page 5865 - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 14. Remove the nut and the rear center safety belt retractor. - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 15. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 16. Check the active restraint system for correct operation. - Make sure that after the rear safety belt retractor is installed, the retractor is not in the automatic locking retractor (ALR) mode. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Safety Belt Retractor and Pretensioner > Page 5866 Seat Belt Retractor: Service and Repair Safety Belt Retractor - Rear SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR - REAR Removal and Installation WARNING: After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function: - Retractors - Buckles - Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped) - Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped) - Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped) - Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies - Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only) If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing portion, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt pretensioners, new driver and/or front Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Retractor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Safety Belt Retractor and Pretensioner > Page 5867 outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTE: RH rear safety belt retractor shown, LH side similar. 1. Remove the rear quarter trim panel. 2. NOTE: Inspect the D-ring cover for damage. If the cover is damaged or does not remain closed, install a new D-ring cover and bolt. Remove the D-ring cover. 3. Remove the D-ring bolt. - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 4. Remove the safety belt anchor bolt. - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 5. Remove the bolt and the rear safety belt retractor. - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 7. Check the active restraint system for correct operation. - Make sure that after the rear safety belt retractor is installed, the retractor is not in the automatic locking retractor (ALR) mode. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tension Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Seat Belt Tension Sensor: Description and Operation BELT TENSION SENSOR (BTS) The safety belt tension sensor (BTS) is part of the passenger front outboard safety belt and retractor assembly. The BTS is located at the safety belt anchor point and is used in conjunction with the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system. Refer to Air Bag Systems. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Safety Belt Retractor Pretensioner C323 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Safety Belt Retractor Pretensioner > Page 5875 C303 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Safety Belt Retractor Pretensioner > Page 5876 C3201 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Safety Belt Retractor Pretensioner > Page 5877 C3202 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Safety Belt Retractor Pretensioner > Page 5878 C389 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5879 Seat Belt Tensioner: Description and Operation Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioner The safety belt buckle and pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device that removes excess webbing from the safety belt when deployed. The pretensioner works in conjunction with the front air bag system. When the front air bags deploy, the pretensioners deploy, causing the buckle to move downward, removing excess webbing from the lap and shoulder safety belts. If the vehicle is involved in a collision that results in deployment of the front air bags and safety belt pretensioners, a new driver and passenger seat belt system (including safety belt buckle and pretensioners, safety belt retractors, and height adjusters), must be installed. For safety belt buckle pretensioner diagnostic information, refer to Air Bag Systems. For safety belt buckle pretensioner disposal information, refer to Air Bag Systems. Safety Belt Retractor Pretensioner The driver and passenger seat safety belt retractors use a safety belt pretensioner system. This works in conjunction with the safety belt buckle pretensioner, front air bag system and, if equipped, side air bag system. The pretensioner is a pyrotechnic device that removes excess webbing slack from the safety belt. When activated by the restraints control module (RCM), the pretensioner deploys in the retractor, removing excess slack from the lap and shoulder safety belt. The pretensioners are activated when the RCM detects an impact force exceeding a programmed limit. If the vehicle is involved in a collision that results in deployment of the safety belt pretensioners, a new driver and passenger seat belt system (including safety belt buckle and pretensioners or safety belt retractor and pretensioners, safety belt retractors, safety belts, buckles and height adjusters), must be installed. For safety belt retractor pretensioner diagnostic information, refer to Air Bag Systems. For safety belt retractor pretensioner disposal information, refer to Air Bag Systems. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5880 Seat Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair SAFETY BELT BUCKLE AND PRETENSIONER Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioner, Power Seat (Driver Only) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5881 Safety Belt Buckle Pretensioner, Manual Seat Removal and Installation WARNING: - Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. - After any crash, all of the following safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware must be inspected by an authorized dealer to verify correct function: - Retractors - Buckles - Belt tension sensor (BTS) (if equipped) - Front safety belt buckle support assemblies (slide bar) (if equipped) - Safety belt shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped) - Child safety seat tether bracket assemblies - Automatic locking retractor (ALR) feature for child safety seats (passenger seating positions only) If any safety belt assembly is damaged, does not operate correctly or does not pass all of the Functional Tests in the Diagnosis and Testing portion, a new safety belt assembly must be installed. If any safety belt assembly attaching areas are damaged or distorted, the sheet metal must be restored to its original structural integrity and new safety belt assembly and attaching hardware must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt assemblies and attaching hardware may increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. After any crash that results in deployment of the driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt pretensioners, new driver and/or front outboard passenger safety belt systems (including retractors, buckles and height adjusters) must be installed. Failure to install new safety belt systems increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Systems > Seat Belt Tensioner > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5882 - Never probe the electrical connectors on safety belt buckle/retractor pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the safety belt pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. NOTE: - The air bag warning lamp illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. All seats 1. Remove the affected seat. 2. Remove the inboard seat cushion side shield. - Remove the cushion side shield screw(s). 3. Disconnect the 2 safety belt buckle pretensioner electrical connectors. 4. NOTE: Note the wire harness routing for installation. Detach the side air bag wiring harness pin-type retainer from the safety belt buckle pretensioner. Driver seat 5. Remove the seat position sensor wiring harness tie strap from the safety belt buckle pretensioner. All seats 6. Detach the safety belt buckle pretensioner and buckle switch electrical connectors from the seat track and detach the wiring harness pin-type retainer. 7. Remove the bolt and the safety belt buckle pretensioner. - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 9. Install the seat. 10. Check the active restraint system for correct operation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Air Bag Deactivation Switch > Component Information > Diagrams C2286 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor View 151-2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 5891 Impact Sensor: Locations Side Impact Sensor View 151-24 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 5892 View 151-24 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 5893 View 151-25 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 5894 View 151-25 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Forward Crash Sensor C177 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 5897 Impact Sensor: Diagrams Side Impact Sensor C3209 C3210 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Forward Crash Sensor > Page 5898 C3211 C3212 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 5899 Impact Sensor: Testing and Inspection SENSORS WARNING: If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in a crash. For this vehicle line, the supplemental restraint system (SRS) uses 5 satellite sensors in addition to the restraints control module (RCM). The RCM is mounted to the center tunnel beneath the console. All vehicles have one front impact severity sensor located in the front-center area of the vehicle, behind the grille mounted on the lower radiator support. The first row impact sensors are mounted behind the trim panel near the floor on the B-pillar, the second row sensors are located on each C-pillar. The front and side impact sensor are not interchangeable. Mounting orientation is critical for correct operation of all impact sensors. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Front Impact Severity Sensor FRONT IMPACT SEVERITY SENSOR Removal and Installation WARNING: - If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in a crash. - To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. NOTE: - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. 1. Depower the SRS. 2. Disconnect the front impact severity sensor electrical connector. 3. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque. Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of personal injury or death in a crash. NOTE: Make sure the radiator support and front impact severity sensor mating surfaces are clean and free of foreign material. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 5902 - Note the position of the locator tab on the front impact severity sensor for installation. Remove the nut and the front impact severity sensor. To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 5. Repower the SRS. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 5903 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor - First Row, B-Pillar SIDE IMPACT SENSOR - FIRST ROW, B-PILLAR Removal and Installation WARNING: - If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in a crash. - To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. NOTE: - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a SRS fault. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. - RH shown, LH similar. 1. Depower the SRS. 2. Remove the B-pillar trim panel. 3. Disconnect the side impact sensor electrical connector. 4. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque. Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of personal injury or death in a crash. NOTE: Make sure the B-pillar and side impact severity sensor mating surfaces are clean and free of foreign material. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 5904 - Note position of the locator tab on the front impact severity sensor for installation. Remove the bolt and the side impact sensor. Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 6. Repower the SRS. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 5905 Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Impact Sensor - Second Row, C-Pillar SIDE IMPACT SENSOR - SECOND ROW, C-PILLAR Removal and Installation WARNING: - If a vehicle has been in a crash, inspect the restraints control module (RCM) and the impact sensor (if equipped) mounting areas for deformation. If damaged, restore the mounting areas to the original production configuration. A new RCM and sensors must be installed whether or not the air bags have deployed. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in a crash. - To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. NOTE: - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. - RH shown, LH similar. 1. Depower the SRS. 2. Remove the C-pillar trim panel. 3. WARNING: Always tighten the fasteners of the restraints control module (RCM) and impact sensor (if equipped) to the specified torque. Failure to do so may result in incorrect restraint system operation, which increases the risk of personal injury or death in a crash. NOTE: Make sure the C-pillar and side impact sensor mating surfaces are clean and free of foreign material. - Note position of the locator tab on the front impact severity sensor for installation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Impact Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Impact Severity Sensor > Page 5906 Remove the side impact sensor bolt. Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 4. Disconnect the electrical connector and remove the side impact sensor. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 6. Repower the SRS. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Passenger View 151-17 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Locations > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Passenger > Page 5911 View 151-16 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Driver C3065 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Buckle Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Safety Belt Buckle Switch, Driver > Page 5914 C3066 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Belt Tension Sensor > Component Information > Description and Operation Seat Belt Tension Sensor: Description and Operation BELT TENSION SENSOR (BTS) The safety belt tension sensor (BTS) is part of the passenger front outboard safety belt and retractor assembly. The BTS is located at the safety belt anchor point and is used in conjunction with the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system. Refer to Air Bag Systems. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-17 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5921 C3042 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5922 Seat Occupant Sensor: Description and Operation OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SENSOR (OCS) CAUTION: It is necessary to carry out the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system reset when a front passenger seat cushion is disassembled, a new trim cover is installed or an OCS system service kit is installed. A scan tool is used to carry out the OCS system reset command. Failure to follow this instruction may result in system failure and the incorrect operation of the OCS system. NOTE: - Occupant classification sensor (OCS) system components (seat wiring harness, seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor and occupant classification system module [OCSM]) are calibrated to each other and are serviced as an assembly. The OCS system components are not to be installed separately. If a new OCS system, OCS system component or seat cushion foam pad are needed, an OCS system service kit (seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor, seat wiring harness and OCSM) must be installed as an assembly. - To identify between a production OCS system and a OCS system service kit, inspect the OCSM electrical connector. A production OCS system allows the disconnection of the OCSM electrical connector. An OCS system service kit has the electrical connector glued to the module. It cannot and should not be disconnected or altered. The OCS system is standard equipment on all front outboard passenger seats. For information on diagnosing or servicing the OCS system, refer to Air Bag Systems. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SENSOR - ORIGINAL EQUIPMENT Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5925 Removal WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. - Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete assembly. Never install only part of the kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. CAUTION: It is necessary to carry out the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system reset when a front passenger seat backrest is separated from the seat cushion, the seat cushion is disassembled, a new trim cover is installed or an OCS service kit is installed. A scan tool is used to trigger the active command to carry out the OCS system reset. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may cause system failure. NOTE: The heated seat element on the front passenger seat cushion is not serviceable separately. If a new heated seat element is needed on the front passenger seat cushion, a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) service kit equipped with a heated seat element must be installed. - Occupant classification sensor (OCS) system components, seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor and electronic control unit (ECU), are calibrated to each other and are serviced as an assembly. The OCS system components are not to be installed separately. If a new OCS system, OCS system component or seat cushion foam pad are needed, a new OCS system service kit (seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5926 and ECU) must be installed as an assembly. - To identify between a production occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and a service OCS system (OCS service kit), inspect the electronic control unit (ECU) electrical connector. A production OCS system allows the disconnect of the ECU electrical connector. A service OCS system (OCS service kit) has the ECU electrical connector glued to the ECU. It cannot and should not be disconnected or altered. - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The supplemental restraint system (SRS) must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and perform the diagnostic procedure again. 1. Depower the SRS. 2. Remove the front passenger seat. 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors and detach the wiring clips. 1 Disconnect the occupant classification sensor (OCS) electronic control unit (ECU) electrical connector. 2 Disconnect the pressure sensor electrical connector. 3 Release the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness from the seat cushion pan. 4 If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the heated seat relay electrical connector, release the wiring clip on the wiring harness from the seat cushion pan, and disconnect the 2 seat cushion element electrical connectors. 4. Remove the 4 seat cushion bolts retaining the seat cushion to the seat track. 5. CAUTION: While positioning the seat cushion pan and occupant classification sensor (OCS) assembly, be careful not to damage any of the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may cause system failure. Remove the seat cushion and pan assembly. To aid in removal, recline the seat. 6. CAUTION: Use care when separating the seat upholstery from the hook-and-loop strip, or the hook-and-loop strip can be torn from the seat cushion foam pad. Detach the seat cushion trim cover J-clips from the seat cushion pan and remove the seat cushion trim cover. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5927 7. Remove the seat cushion foam pad. 8. Bend the retaining tab away from the pressure sensor, then slide the pressure sensor off the bracket. 9. CAUTION: Care must be taken to prevent damage to the seat cushion pan when removing the rivets. Remove the 2 rivets and the OCS ECU. 10. Remove the 2 pin-type retainers from the OCS bladder and seat cushion pan. 11. Feed the OCS hose and pressure sensor through the seat cushion pan opening and remove as an assembly with the bladder. Installation NOTE: If installing an OCS service kit, refer to Occupant Classification Sensor - Service Kit. 1. Bend the retaining tab back on the pressure sensor component bracket. 2. CAUTION: - Inspect the occupant classification sensor (OCS) bladder, seat cushion pan and support assembly for any foreign objects before installing the OCS to the seat cushion pan. If any foreign objects are found, remove them. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may cause system failure. - Route the seat occupant classification sensor (OCS) components through the correct seat cushion support opening. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure. - While positioning the seat cushion pan and occupant classification sensor (OCS) assembly, be careful not to damage any of the components. Feed the OCS components (pressure sensor and hose) through the seat cushion pan opening. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5928 3. Align the OCS bladder to the seat cushion pan. 4. Install the 2 pin-type retainers to the OCS bladder and seat cushion pan. 5. NOTE: Make sure the pressure sensor hose is not kinked during installation. Install the pressure sensor onto the seat cushion pan bracket, making sure the retaining tab is completely engaged. When installed correctly, an audible click will be heard and the pressure sensor will not be able to be removed from its bracket without disengaging the retaining tab. 6. Slide the OCS ECU into the seat cushion pan bracket and install the rivets. - The OCS ECU must be correctly positioned and securely fastened in place. Failure to do so can set a DTC in the RCM. 7. Position the foam pad to the seat cushion pan. 8. CAUTION: Inspect the seat cushion pad and seat cushion trim cover for any foreign material, before installing the seat cushion trim cover to the seat cushion pad. If any foreign material is found, remove it. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may cause system failure. Install the seat cushion trim cover to the seat cushion foam pad and attach the J-clips. 9. CAUTION: While positioning the seat cushion pan and occupant classification sensor (OCS) assembly, be careful not to damage any of the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may cause system failure. Position the seat cushion and pan assembly to the seat track. To aid in installation, recline the seat. 10. Install the 4 seat cushion bolts retaining the seat cushion to the seat track. - Tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). 11. Connect the electrical connectors and wiring clips. 1 Connect the OCS ECU electrical connector. 2 Connect the pressure sensor electrical connector. 3 Install the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness to the seat cushion pan. 4 If equipped with heated seats, connect the heated seat relay electrical connector, install the wiring clip on the wiring harness to the seat cushion pan, and connect the 2 seat cushion element electrical connectors. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5929 12. Install the front passenger seat into the vehicle. 13. Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the system at this time. 14. WARNING: Make sure the front passenger seat repair is complete, the seat and all attached components (head restraint, seat side shield, etc.) are correctly assembled, and the seat is correctly installed to the vehicle before carrying out the System Reset. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. CAUTION: Make sure the seat is completely assembled before carrying out the occupant classification sensor (OCS) System Reset active command. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may cause system failure. - The following precautions must be taken before carrying out the occupant classification sensor (OCS) System Reset. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may cause system failure. Make sure the OCS system components are connected and no faults are present. - Make sure the OCS system is not at a temperature below 0°C (32°F) or above 45°C (113°F) when initiating the OCS system reset process. If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or hot temperatures, the vehicle must be exposed and kept at a temperature within the limits, 0°C to 45°C (32°F to 113°F) for a minimum of 30 minutes. - Make sure nothing is present on the passenger seat before carrying out the OCS system reset and nothing is placed on the seat during the process. - Make sure a minimum 8-second time period has passed after cycling the ignition switch ON before the carrying out the OCS system reset process. NOTE: For best results in carrying out the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system reset process, the OCS system should be at or near room temperature, 10°C to 29°C (50°F to 85°F). - If the first attempt to carry out the OCS system reset is unsuccessful and DTC C1941 is reported, a second attempt must be made. If on the second attempt to carry out the OCS system reset is unsuccessful and DTC C1941 is reported a second time, a new OCS system service kit must be installed. Carry out the OCS system reset. With the front passenger seat empty, use a scan tool to trigger the active command. 15. NOTE: The ignition switch must be cycled after the OCS system reset is successful. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will: fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5930 The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all RCM and OCS module DTCs using a scan tool. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5931 Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair Occupant Classification Sensor - Service Kit OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SENSOR - SERVICE KIT Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5932 Removal WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. - Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete assembly. Never install only part of the kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. CAUTION: It is necessary to carry out the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system reset when a front passenger seat backrest is separated from the seat cushion, the seat cushion is disassembled, a new trim cover is installed or an OCS service kit is installed. A scan tool is used to trigger the active command to carry out rezeroing of the OCS system. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may cause system failure. NOTE: The heated seat element on the front passenger seat cushion is not serviceable separately. If a new heated seat element is needed on the front passenger seat cushion, a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) service kit equipped with a heated seat element must be installed. - OCS system components (seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor and electronic control unit) are calibrated to each other and are serviced as an assembly. The OCS system components are not to be installed separately. If a new OCS system, OCS system component or seat cushion foam pad are needed, a new OCS system service kit (seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor and electronic control unit) must be installed as an assembly. - To identify between a production occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and a service OCS system (OCS service kit) inspect the electronic control unit (ECU) electrical connector. A production OCS system allows the disconnect of the ECU electrical connector. A service OCS system (OCS service kit) has the ECU electrical connector glued to the ECU. It cannot and should not be disconnected or altered. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5933 - If removing an original equipment manufacturer (OEM) occupant classification sensor (OCS), refer to the appropriate procedure. - The seat wiring harness will be reused. The OCS service kit connector connects to the seat wiring harness electronic control unit ECU connector. The pressure sensor seat wiring harness connector will be left unplugged and secured by a tie strap. - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. 1. Depower the SRS. 2. Remove the passenger seat. 3. NOTE: The seat wiring harness will be reused. Disconnect the electrical connector(s) and wiring clips. 1 Disconnect the seat wire harness OCS electrical connector from the service part OCS electrical connector. 2 Release the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness from the seat cushion pan. 3 If equipped with heated seats, disconnect the heated seat module electrical connector, release the wiring clip on the wiring harness from the seat cushion pan, and disconnect the 2 seat cushion element electrical connectors. 4. Remove the 4 seat cushion bolts retaining the seat cushion to the seat track. 5. CAUTION: While positioning the seat cushion pan and occupant classification sensor (OCS) assembly, be careful not to damage any of the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may cause system failure. Remove the seat cushion and pan assembly. To aid in removal, recline the seat. 6. CAUTION: Use care when separating the seat upholstery from the hook-and-loop strip, or the hook-and-loop strip can be torn from the seat cushion foam pad. Detach the seat cushion trim cover J-clips from the seat cushion pan and remove the seat cushion trim cover. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5934 7. Bend the retaining tab away from the pressure sensor, then slide the pressure sensor off the bracket. 8. CAUTION: Care must be taken to prevent damage to the seat cushion pan when removing the rivets. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure. Remove the 2 rivets and detach the OCS ECU from the seat cushion pan. 9. Remove the OCS. - Pull all the OCS components (hose, pressure sensor, wire harness, ECU and connectors) through the seat cushion pan opening. Installation 1. Bend the retaining tab back on the pressure sensor component bracket. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5935 2. CAUTION: - Inspect the occupant classification sensor (OCS) assembly, seat cushion pan and support assembly for any foreign material before installing the OCS assembly to the seat cushion pan. If any foreign material is found, remove it. Failure to do so may result in personal injury, in the event of an air bag deployment. - Route the seat occupant classification sensor (OCS) components through the correct seat cushion support opening. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure. - While positioning the seat cushion pan and occupant classification sensor (OCS) assembly, be careful not to damage any of the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure. Feed the OCS service kit components (hose, pressure sensor, ECU, wire harness and connectors) through the seat cushion pan opening. 3. NOTE: - When installing a service part OCS, the seat wire harness pressure sensor electrical connector is not used. - Make sure the pressure sensor hose is not kinked during installation. Install the OCS components to the seat cushion pan. 1 Install the pressure sensor onto the seat cushion pan bracket, making sure the retaining tab is completely engaged. When installed correctly, an audible click will be heard and the pressure sensor will not be able to be removed from its bracket without disengaging the retaining tab. 2 Slide the ECU into the seat cushion pan bracket. The ECU must be correctly positioned and securely fastened in place. Failure to do so can set a DTC in the restraints control module (RCM). 3 Install the rivets. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5936 4. Attach the seat cushion trim cover J-clips to the seat cushion pan. 5. CAUTION: While positioning the seat cushion pan and occupant classification sensor (OCS) assembly, be careful not to damage any of the components. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component damage and/or system failure. Position the seat cushion and pan assembly to the seat track. To aid in installation, recline the seat. 6. Install the 4 seat cushion bolts retaining the seat cushion to the seat track. - Tighten to 15 Nm (11 lb-ft). 7. NOTE: - Do not tie strap any wiring to the OCS bladder and pressure sensor hose. - The seat wiring harness will be reused. Connect the electrical connector(s) and wiring clips. 1 Connect the seat wire harness OCS electrical connector to the service part OCS electrical connector. 2 Install the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness to the cushion pan. 3 If equipped with heated seats, connect the heated seat module electrical connector, install the wiring clip on the wiring harness to the cushion pan, and connect the 2 cushion element electrical connectors. 4 Tie strap the unused seat wire harness pressure sensor electrical connector safely aside. 5 Tie strap all loose wire harnesses and electrical connectors safely aside. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5937 8. Install the front passenger seat into the vehicle. 9. Repower the SRS. Do not prove out the system at this time. 10. WARNING: Make sure the front passenger seat repair is complete, the seat and all attached components (head restraint, seat side shield, etc.) are correctly assembled, and the seat is correctly installed to the vehicle before carrying out the System Reset. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. CAUTION: Make sure the seat is completely assembled before carrying out the occupant classification sensor (OCS) System Reset active command. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may cause system failure. - The following precautions must be taken before carrying out the occupant classification sensor (OCS) System Reset. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may cause system failure. Make sure the OCS system components are connected and no faults are present. - Make sure the OCS system is not at a temperature below 0°C (32°F) or above 45°C (113°F) when initiating the OCS system reset process. If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or hot temperatures, the vehicle must be exposed and kept at a temperature within the limits, 0°C to 45°C (32°F to 113°F) for a minimum of 30 minutes. - Make sure nothing is present on the passenger seat before carrying out the OCS system reset and nothing is placed on the seat during the process. - Make sure a minimum 8-second time period has passed after cycling the ignition switch ON before the carrying out the OCS system reset process. NOTE: For best results in carrying out the OCS system reset process, the OCS system should be at or near room temperature, 10°C to 29°C (50°F to 85°F). - If the first attempt to carry out the OCS system reset is unsuccessful and DTC C1941 is reported, a second attempt must be made. If on the second attempt to carry out the OCS system reset is unsuccessful and DTC C1941 is reported a second time, a new OCS system service kit must be installed. Carry out the OCS system reset. With the front passenger seat empty, use a scan tool to trigger the active command. 11. NOTE: The ignition switch must be cycled after the OCS system reset. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will: fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash at a 5 Hz rate (RCM not configured). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Occupant Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Occupant Classification Sensor - Original Equipment > Page 5938 The air bag warning indicator might not light until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all RCM and OCS module DTCs using a scan tool. 12. NOTE: When installing a new OCS, a prepaid return postcard is provided with the new OCS. The serial number for the new part and the vehicle identification number (VIN) must be recorded and sent to Ford Motor Company. Fill out the necessary information on the OCS traceability card and return it along with the complete inoperative OCS to Ford Motor Company. When returning the inoperative OCS, include the following: seat cushion foam pad, bladder, electronic control unit, pressure sensor (transducer), hose, electrical connectors and wire harness (service part OCS only). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-16 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5942 C356 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5943 Seat Position Sensor: Service and Repair SEAT POSITION SENSOR Removal and Installation WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. NOTE: - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a SRS fault. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. 1. Raise the driver seat and position it in the middle of the track. 2. Depower the SRS. 3. Remove the driver seat. 4. Disconnect the seat position sensor electrical connector. 5. Push apart the 2 tabs, then push inward to release the seat position sensor locking clip. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Restraint Systems > Sensors and Switches - Restraint Systems > Seat Position Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Page 5944 6. Slide the seat position sensor forward to release the 2 hooks from the bracket. Then remove the seat position sensor. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 8. Repower the SRS. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 5950 Accessory Delay Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Component Information > Service and Repair > Antenna - AM/FM Antenna: Service and Repair Antenna - AM/FM ANTENNA - AM/FM Removal and Installation 1. Remove the antenna mast. 2. Using a suitable tool, remove the stanchion. 3. NOTE: Access the antenna cable connection behind the RH cowl side trim panel. Disconnect the antenna cable from the antenna lead-in cable. 4. Release the antenna cable grommet from the vehicle body. 5. Remove the RH fender splash shield. 6. Remove the nut and the AM/FM antenna. - To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Component Information > Service and Repair > Antenna - AM/FM > Page 5955 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Component Information > Service and Repair > Antenna - AM/FM > Page 5956 Antenna: Service and Repair Antenna - Satellite Radio ANTENNA - SATELLITE RADIO Removal and Installation 1. Remove the RH A-pillar trim panel. 2. Remove the RH sun visor. 3. Lower the front of the headliner enough to gain access to the satellite radio antenna electrical connector. 4. Remove the satellite radio antenna. - Disconnect the electrical connector. - Loosen the antenna bolt. To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). - Compress the tabs and release the satellite radio antenna from the roof panel. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Component Information > Service and Repair > Antenna - AM/FM > Page 5957 Antenna: Service and Repair Antenna Cable - AM/FM ANTENNA CABLE - AM/FM Removal and Installation 1. Remove the audio unit. 2. Disconnect the AM/FM antenna cable from the AM/FM antenna. 3. NOTE: Lower the glove compartment completely to access the pin-type retainers. Release the AM/FM antenna cable pin-type retainers. 4. Remove the AM/FM antenna cable. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Component Information > Service and Repair > Antenna - AM/FM > Page 5958 Antenna: Service and Repair Antenna Cable - Satellite Radio ANTENNA CABLE - SATELLITE RADIO Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Component Information > Service and Repair > Antenna - AM/FM > Page 5959 Removal and Installation 1. Remove the RH A-pillar trim panel. 2. Remove the RH sun visor. 3. Lower the front of the headliner enough to gain access to the satellite radio antenna electrical connector. 4. Disconnect the satellite radio antenna electrical connector. 5. Remove the satellite radio antenna. - Disconnect the satellite radio antenna cable-to-satellite radio receiver electrical connector. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antenna > Component Information > Service and Repair > Antenna - AM/FM > Page 5960 Antenna: Service and Repair Global Positioning System (GPS) Antenna GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM (GPS) ANTENNA Removal and Installation 1. Remove the passenger air bag module. 2. Remove the audio unit. 3. Unclip the GPS antenna and remove it. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm System Transmitter > Component Information > Service and Repair Alarm System Transmitter: Service and Repair PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM (PATS) TRANSCEIVER Removal and Installation 1. Remove the steering column opening cover. 2. Remove the 3 screws and the lower steering column shroud. 3. Remove the PATS transceiver. - Disconnect the electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm System Transmitter > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 5965 4. NOTE: Replacement of the PATS transceiver does not require the PATS keys to be programmed into the instrument cluster again. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm System Transponder > Component Information > Locations View 151-13 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Alarm System Transponder > Component Information > Locations > Page 5969 C252 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Locations View 151-18 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Locations > Page 5974 C500 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Locations > Page 5975 Keyless Entry Key-Pad: Testing and Inspection KEYLESS ENTRY KEYPAD CODE PROGRAMMING NOTE: Up to 3 codes can be programmed. Once there are 3 programmed codes, any attempt to program additional codes will be unsuccessful. 1. Enter the permanent factory keyless entry keypad code. 2. NOTE: The locks should lock and unlock to indicate programming mode has been entered. Press the 1/2 button within 5 seconds to activate the programming mode. Holding the 1/2 button for more than 2 seconds after activation erases the stored customer codes. 3. Within 5 seconds, enter the new 5-digit keypad code. The doors lock and unlock to confirm the new code is programmed. If the locks do not lock and unlock, the new code programming has not been successful and the procedure must be started from the beginning. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Locations > Page 5976 Keyless Entry Key-Pad: Service and Repair KEYLESS ENTRY KEYPAD Removal and Installation 1. Remove the LH front door trim panel. 2. Position the watershield aside. 3. Remove the RKE keypad retaining clip. 4. Remove the RKE keypad from the door. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter Programming Keyless Entry Transmitter: Testing and Inspection Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter Programming REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER PROGRAMMING NOTE: - This procedure is for programming keyfobs only. Refer to Antitheft and Alarm Systems for integrated keyhead transmitter (IKT) programming. - All remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitters must be programmed at the same time. - Do not apply the brake pedal during this sequencing, as doing so ends the sequence and the transmitters will not be programmed. 1. Electronically unlock the door locks using the door lock control switch. 2. Cycle the ignition switch from the OFF to the RUN position 8 times in rapid succession (within 10 seconds), with the eighth turn ending in RUN. If the module successfully enters program mode, it locks and then unlocks all the doors. 3. NOTE: If no action is taken within 20 seconds after a transmitter has been programmed, the programming sequence ends (the doors lock and unlock to confirm that programming is complete). Within 20 seconds, press any button on the RKE transmitter to be programmed. The doors lock and then unlock to confirm that each RKE transmitter is programmed. Repeat this step for each RKE transmitter. 4. Exiting the programming mode is accomplished if one of the following occurs: - The key transitions to the OFF position. - 20 seconds have passed since entering programming mode or since the last RKE transmitter was programmed. - The maximum number (4) of RKE transmitters have been programmed. 5. Check the operation of the transmitter. If the door locks do not respond for the programmed RKE transmitter(s), wait several seconds and press the button again. If the door locks still fail to respond, refer to Locks, Latches and Entry Systems. (Make sure that no more than the maximum number of RKE transmitters are attempted to be programmed.) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter Programming > Page 5981 Keyless Entry Transmitter: Testing and Inspection Autolock and Horn Chirp Programming AUTOLOCK AND HORN CHIRP PROGRAMMING Autolock Programming Using the Power Door Unlock/Lock Procedure NOTE: The autolock feature can be activated/deactivated independently of the auto-unlock feature. 1. NOTE: Prior to beginning this procedure, make sure that the anti-theft system is not armed, the ignition is in the OFF position, and all the vehicle doors, liftgate and liftgate glass are closed. Close all the doors, the liftgate and the liftgate glass. 2. Confirm that the ignition is in the OFF position. 3. NOTE: Steps 3 through 7 must be carried out within 30 seconds. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON. 4. Press the door lock control switch UNLOCK button 3 times. 5. Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. 6. Press the door lock control switch UNLOCK button 3 times. 7. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON. The horn will chirp once to indicate the system is in the enable/disable mode. 8. Press the door lock control switch UNLOCK button once, then the LOCK button once to toggle the autolock feature ON/OFF. The horn will chirp once to indicate autolock is disabled. If the horn chirps twice (one short and one long chirp), the autolock feature has been enabled. 9. Turn the ignition to the OFF position to exit the enable/disable mode. The horn will chirp once to indicate the procedure is complete. Autolock Programming Using the Keyless Entry Keypad Procedure (If Equipped) 1. Turn the ignition to the OFF position. 2. Close all the doors, the liftgate and the liftgate glass. 3. Enter the 5-digit permanent entry code on the keyless entry keypad. 4. Within 5 seconds of entering the code, press and hold the 3/4 button on the keypad. While holding the 3/4 button, press the 7/8 button. 5. Release the 7/8 button, then release the 3/4 button. The horn will chirp once to indicate autolock is disabled. If the horn chirps twice (chirp followed by a honk), the autolock feature has been enabled. Autolock Programming Using the Message Center Procedure (If Equipped) 1. To disable/enable the autolock feature, select AUTOLOCK [ON] OFF from the SETUP control for the current display mode. 2. Press the RESET control to turn the autolock ON or OFF. Auto-Unlock Programming Using the Power Door Unlock/Lock Procedure NOTE: The auto-unlock feature can be activated/deactivated independently of the autolock feature. 1. NOTE: Prior to beginning this procedure, make sure that the anti-theft system is not armed, the ignition is in the OFF position, and all the vehicle doors, liftgate and liftgate glass are closed. Close all the doors, the liftgate and the liftgate glass. 2. Confirm that the ignition is in the OFF position. 3. NOTE: Steps 3 through 7 must be carried out within 30 seconds. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON. 4. Press the door lock control switch UNLOCK button 3 times. 5. Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. 6. Press the door lock control switch UNLOCK button 3 times. 7. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON. The horn will chirp once to indicate the system is in the enable/disable mode. 8. Press the door lock control switch LOCK button once, then the UNLOCK button once to toggle the auto-unlock feature ON/OFF. The horn will chirp once to indicate auto-unlock is disabled. If the horn chirps twice (one short and one long chirp), the auto-unlock feature has been enabled. 9. Turn the ignition to the OFF position to exit the enable/disable mode. The horn will chirp once to indicate the procedure is complete. Auto-Unlock Programming Using the Keyless Entry Keypad Procedure (If Equipped) 1. Turn the ignition to the OFF position. 2. Close all the doors, the liftgate and the liftgate glass. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter Programming > Page 5982 3. Enter the 5-digit permanent entry code on the keyless entry keypad. 4. Within 5 seconds of entering the code, press and hold the 3/4 button on the keypad. While holding the 3/4 button, press and release the 7/8 button two times. 5. Release the 3/4 button. The horn will chirp once to indicate auto-unlock is disabled. If the horn chirps twice (chirp followed by a honk), the auto-unlock feature has been enabled. Auto-Unlock Programming Using the Message Center Procedure (If Equipped) 1. To disable/enable the auto-unlock feature, select AUTOUNLOCK [ON] OFF from the SETUP control for the current display mode. 2. Press the RESET control to turn the auto-unlock ON or OFF. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Antitheft and Alarm Systems > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter Programming > Page 5983 Keyless Entry Transmitter: Testing and Inspection Stepped Unlock Programming STEPPED UNLOCK PROGRAMMING 1. With the ignition switch in the OFF position, press the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on the remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitter simultaneously for 4 seconds. The turn signals will flash twice to indicate the mode change. 2. Repeat STEP 1 to enable/disable the stepped unlocking feature. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Communications Control Module: > 10-2-8 > Feb > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode' Communications Control Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode' TSB 10-2-8 02/15/10 SYNC SYSTEM DEFAULTS TO OR STAYS IN PRIVACY MODE, MULTIPLE VEHICLE LINES FORD: 2008-2009 Taurus X 2008-2010 Focus, Fusion, Mustang, Taurus, Edge, Escape, Expedition, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer, F-150, F-250, F-350, F-450 2009-2010 Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2010 MKZ 2009-2010 MKS 2008 Mark LT 2008-2010 MKX, Navigator 2010 MKT MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan, Mariner, Mountaineer ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2010 SYNC-equipped vehicles may express concern with their SYNC paired device defaulting, switching or staying on privacy mode. The customer may not be able to accept the call through the SYNC system or must answer the call manually on their personal device. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Set the Privacy mode to Off on the device and recheck Sync operation. 2. If necessary, test the device on another vehicle with the same version SYNC. If the concern is still present, the device is the concern. Continue with normal WSM Diagnostics. NOTE PRIVACY MODE MEANS THAT THE PHONE IS CONTROLLING THE AUDIO. SYNC ONLY MAKES REQUESTS TO THE PHONE TO TRANSFER THIS RESPONSIBILITY OR AUDIO TO SYNC. IF THE PHONE DOES NOT ACCEPT THIS REQUEST OR THERE IS A PROBLEM IN THE COMMUNICATION TO MAKE THIS HAPPEN, YOU ARE BY DEFAULT IN PRIVACY MODE. WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Cellular Phone > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10-2-8 > Feb > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode' Communications Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode' TSB 10-2-8 02/15/10 SYNC SYSTEM DEFAULTS TO OR STAYS IN PRIVACY MODE, MULTIPLE VEHICLE LINES FORD: 2008-2009 Taurus X 2008-2010 Focus, Fusion, Mustang, Taurus, Edge, Escape, Expedition, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer, F-150, F-250, F-350, F-450 2009-2010 Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2010 MKZ 2009-2010 MKS 2008 Mark LT 2008-2010 MKX, Navigator 2010 MKT MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan, Mariner, Mountaineer ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2010 SYNC-equipped vehicles may express concern with their SYNC paired device defaulting, switching or staying on privacy mode. The customer may not be able to accept the call through the SYNC system or must answer the call manually on their personal device. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Set the Privacy mode to Off on the device and recheck Sync operation. 2. If necessary, test the device on another vehicle with the same version SYNC. If the concern is still present, the device is the concern. Continue with normal WSM Diagnostics. NOTE PRIVACY MODE MEANS THAT THE PHONE IS CONTROLLING THE AUDIO. SYNC ONLY MAKES REQUESTS TO THE PHONE TO TRANSFER THIS RESPONSIBILITY OR AUDIO TO SYNC. IF THE PHONE DOES NOT ACCEPT THIS REQUEST OR THERE IS A PROBLEM IN THE COMMUNICATION TO MAKE THIS HAPPEN, YOU ARE BY DEFAULT IN PRIVACY MODE. WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations View 151-25 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6002 C4014 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6003 Parking Assist Control Module: Service and Repair PARKING AID MODULE Removal and Installation 1. Remove the RH rear quarter trim panel. 2. Disconnect the electrical connectors. 3. Remove the 2 screws and the parking aid module. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-27 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left C4009 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 6009 C4011 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 6010 C4010 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 6011 C4012 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6012 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Service and Repair PARKING AID SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. NOTE: The rear bumper cover removal is only necessary for access to the outer parking aid sensors. The inner parking aid sensors do not require rear bumper cover removal for access. Remove the rear bumper cover. 3. Press the retaining tabs and remove the parking aid sensor. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Parking Assist Switch: Service and Repair PARKING AID SWITCH Removal and Installation 1. Remove the lower instrument panel center finish panel. 2. Press the retaining tabs and remove the parking aid switch. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Collision Avoidance and Parking Assist Systems > Parking Assist Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams C4015 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Locations View 151-13 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Locations > Page 6022 C269 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Locations > Page 6023 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Description and Operation INFORMATION AND MESSAGE CENTER The message center is a fixed format vacuum fluorescent display, integrated into the instrument cluster. The message center functions are controlled by the message center switches. The message center displays important vehicle information by constantly monitoring different vehicle systems. The message center informs the driver of vehicle operations and notifies the driver of potential vehicle problems by displaying a warning message pertaining to the system in which a fault has been detected. The message center provides the following features: - Information displays - Setup displays - System check messages - System warning messages The message center information can be selected through a set of 3 buttons: - INFO - SETUP - RESET Information Displays The information displays are non-timed modes. The selected mode remains on until the driver presses a message center button to change the mode or it is overridden by another mode. The information (INFO button) display modes are: Odometer - Trip odometer A or B - Distance to empty (DTE) - Average fuel economy - Instantaneous fuel economy - Electrical energy available (Hybrid only) - Blank display Setup Displays The setup (SETUP button) displays are timed modes and terminate after a finite interval. As part of the setup menu, the message center has the capability to configure items such as units (English or metric), autolamp delay, to enable/disable a variety of options such as autolock and auto-unlock, or to carry out calibrations/settings on items such as oil life. On configurable items such as autolock and auto-unlock, the message center indicates the appropriate selection (ON/OFF) by bracketing the selection. For example, if the driver selects the autolock feature on, the message would display as follows: AUTOLOCK [ON] OFF. If the driver selects the autolock off, the message would display as follows: AUTOLOCK AID ON [OFF]. The setup display modes are: Reset to English (if set in another language) - System check - Oil life reset/oil life starting value - Units English/metric - Autolamp delay in seconds (if equipped) - Autolock on/off (if equipped) - Auto-unlock on/off (if equipped) - Language Oil Life and Oil Life Start Value The oil life is displayed in percent and is preset to a maximum of approximately 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 180 days. The oil life start value is used to increase or decrease the starting point of the oil life. The value can be changed back to the maximum of approximately 12,000 km (7,500 miles) if the value was previously changed or to lower the value by 10% increments down to 10%. System Check The system check provides a check of all the monitored systems on the vehicle. The system check scrolls through each of the monitored systems and provides a visual indication to report out the status of each system. The message center displays OK for approximately 2 seconds if the system check does not detect a fault in the system and displays a warning message for approximately 2 seconds if the system check detects a fault in the system. Press the RESET button to scroll through the system check messages. The system check display modes are: Oil life status - Electrical drive status (Hybrid only) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Locations > Page 6024 - Brake system status - Liftgate/liftgate glass status - DTE/Fuel level status System Warning Messages The system warning messages alert the operator to possible problems or malfunctions in the vehicle operating systems. The message center displays the last selected feature if there are no additional warning messages. Once a warning message has been displayed, the message must be acknowledged to allow full functionality of the message center. Press the RESET to acknowledge and clear the warning message. The warning messages are divided into 3 basic categories: Cannot be cleared until the condition is corrected. - Reappears 10 minutes from pressing the RESET button. - Reappears if the condition clears then reoccurs within the same ignition ON-OFF cycle. The warning messages that cannot be reset are: DRIVER DOOR AJAR - PASSENGER DOOR AJAR - REAR LEFT DOOR AJAR - REAR RIGHT DOOR AJAR The warning messages that reoccur after 10 minutes are: XXX MILES (KM) TO EMPTY FUEL LEVEL LOW - STOP SAFELY NOW (Hybrid only) - HIGH ENGINE TEMPERATURE (Hybrid only) - HIGH MOTOR TEMPERATURE (Hybrid only) - PARK BRAKE ENGAGED When a condition exists, the warning messages that are displayed whenever the ignition switch is turned from the OFF position to the ON position are: LIFTGATE/GLASS AJAR - SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM - LOW BRAKE FLUID - REGEN BRAKES DISABLED (Hybrid only) - TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR FAULT - LOW TIRE PRESSURE - TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT - OIL CHANGE REQUIRED - XXX% OIL LIFE/CHANGE OIL SOON The message center displays warning messages that indicate a system state during repair procedures related to the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS). The displayed messages are as follows: TRAIN LF TIRE - TRAIN RF TIRE - TRAIN LR TIRE - TRAIN RR TIRE - TRAIN SPARE TIRE - TRAINING COMPLETE - TIRES NOT TRAINED Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Inspection and Verification INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION 1. Verify the customer concern. 2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage. Visual Inspection Chart 3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding to the next step. 4. NOTE: Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release. If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the data link connector (DLC). 5. NOTE: The vehicle communication module (VCM) LED prove-out confirms power and ground from the DLC are provided to the VCM. If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM: Check the VCM connection to the vehicle. - Check the scan tool connection to the VCM. - Refer to Information Bus (Module Communications Network), No Power To The Scan Tool, to diagnose no communication with the scan tool. 6. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle: - Verify the ignition key is in the ON position. - Verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle. - Refer to Information Bus (Module Communications Network) to diagnose no response from the PCM. 7. Carry out the network test. - If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules, refer to Information Bus (Module Communications Network). - If the network test passes, retrieve and record the continuous memory DTCs. 8. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the instrument cluster. 9. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to DTC Charts. For all other DTCs, refer to Body Control Systems (Multifunction Electronic Control Module). See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions/Information and Message Center 10. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Principles of Operation PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION The message center is an integral part of the instrument cluster that receives and acts upon much of the same information that is input and used to operate the instrument cluster gauges, informational indicators, and warning indicators. The message center, located in the center of the instrument cluster is a vacuum fluorescent 2-line display. The message center electronic functions use both hardwired, and the controller area network (CAN) circuitry to transmit and receive information. Whenever conditions are present that require a warning message, the message center replaces the last selected display with the new warning display. Once the message is reset or cleared, the message center returns to the last selected display. If multiple warnings are present, the message center displays each warning for approximately 4 seconds. Warning messages are also generally associated with other observable instrument cluster indications. For example, when the LH front door is opened, the message center displays the message DRIVER DOOR AJAR along with the door ajar warning indicator. This allows the message center to be a more informative supplement to the instrument cluster gauges and indicators. It is very important to understand: - where the input (command) originates. - all the information (messages) necessary in order for a feature to operate. - which module(s) receive(s) the input or command message. - if the module that received the input (message) controls the output of the feature, or if it outputs a message over the CAN to another module. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6027 - which module controls the output of the feature. Instrument Cluster Messages NOTE: Whenever a message is suspected as missing, confirmed by a missing message DTC, it is important to look for other symptoms that may also be present in the instrument cluster and throughout the vehicle. Once a DTC is set in the instrument cluster, it may be helpful to review the complete message list available in Information Bus (Module Communications Network) to see what other modules also rely on the same message and run the self-test for those modules. If the message is missing from other modules, the same DTC may also be set in those modules. Confirmation of missing messages common to multiple modules may indicate that the originating module is the source of the concern or the communication network may be experiencing some problems. The instrument cluster uses input messages from other modules to control the gauges, informational indicators, warning indicators and message center displays over the communication networks. If a required message is missing or invalid for less than 5 seconds, the gauge or indicator that requires the message remains at the last commanded state based upon the last known good message. For example, if the message is missing the driver door ajar off status for less than 5 seconds and the door ajar indicator was ON, the indicator remains in the ON state until the next good message is received. If the message remains missing or invalid for greater than 5 seconds, the instrument cluster sets a U-code diagnostic trouble code (DTC) and the output becomes a default action for the indicator or gauge. Each indicator or gauge utilizes a different default strategy depending on the nature of the indication. Refer to Instrument Cluster for further descriptions of the default action specific to each indicator or gauge. If the messaged input to the cluster returns at any time, the normal function of the gauge or indicator resumes. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6028 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Symptom Chart (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6029 Symptom Chart (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6030 Symptom Chart (Part 3) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6031 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Pinpoint Tests Test A: The Message Center Is Not Operating Correctly PINPOINT TEST A: THE MESSAGE CENTER IS NOT OPERATING CORRECTLY Normal Operation The message center is located in the center of the instrument cluster between the tachometer and the speedometer in the vacuum fluorescent display area. The message center is integral to the instrument cluster and uses the same voltage supply as the instrument cluster. The RUN/START voltage is supplied to the instrument cluster on circuit CBP29 (WH/VT) and the keep alive B+ voltage is received on circuit SBP26 (YE/RD). The instrument cluster logic ground is through circuit GD112 (BK/GN) and the bulb ground is through circuit GD114 (BK/BU). The message center functionality is controlled through the message center switch, which is hardwired to the instrument cluster through input circuit CMC29 (GN/VT) and return circuit VMC29 (YE). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Instrument cluster A1-A3 Test B: The Message Center Switch Does Not Operate Correctly PINPOINT TEST B: THE MESSAGE CENTER SWITCH DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY Normal Operation The message center functionality is controlled through the message center switch, which is hardwired to the instrument cluster through input circuit CMC29 (GN/VT) and return circuit VMC29 (YE). There are 3 message center switch buttons with each button operating a switch that uses different resistance values. The instrument cluster sends out a reference voltage to the message center switch on the input circuit and monitors the voltage drop when a message center switch button is pressed. The voltage drop will vary depending upon the resistance of each button, providing a specific indication to the instrument cluster which switch is pressed. DTC B1206 (EIC Switch-1 Assembly Circuit Open) - is a continuous and on-demand DTC that sets when the instrument cluster detects an open on the message center switch input, circuit CMC29 (GN/VT). DTC B1208 (EIC Switch-1 Assembly Circuit Short to Ground) - is a continuous and on-demand DTC that sets when the instrument cluster detects a short to ground on the message center switch input, circuit CMC29 (GN/VT). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6032 - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Message center switch - Instrument cluster B1-B3 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6033 B4-B7 Test C: The STOP SAFELY NOW Warning Is Inoperative/Always On PINPOINT TEST C: THE STOP SAFELY NOW WARNING IS INOPERATIVE/ALWAYS ON Normal Operation The stop safely now display informs the driver that there is a problem with the Hybrid electrical system and that an impending vehicle shut down is about to occur. The instrument cluster receives the hazard input from a message over the high speed controller area network (HS-CAN) communication bus from the powertrain control module (PCM), the transmission control module (TCM) and the traction battery control module (TBCM). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6034 NOTE: The instrument cluster turns on both the hazard warning indicator in the instrument cluster and displays the stop safely now warning simultaneously when a problem or fault has been detected in any of the 3 modules (PCM, TCM or TBCM). If the hazard status message is missing from the PCM or if the data is deemed invalid by the instrument cluster for more than 5 seconds, the instrument cluster sets DTC U0100 in continuous memory. If the hazard status message is missing from the TCM or if the data is deemed invalid by the instrument cluster for more than 5 seconds, the instrument cluster sets DTC U0101 in continuous memory. If the hazard status message is missing from the TBCM or if the data is deemed invalid by the instrument cluster for more than 5 seconds, the instrument cluster sets DTC U0111 in continuous memory. If any one of the 3 messages are missing with the other two valid, the instrument cluster defaults the STOP SAFELY NOW warning to the last observable state (on or off). If all 3 messages are missing and the instrument cluster does not see an ignition switch transition into RUN/START, the instrument cluster defaults the STOP SAFELY NOW warning to the last observable state (on or off). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - PCM concern - TCM concern - TBCM concern - Instrument cluster C1-C2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6035 C3-C7 Test D: The REGEN BREAKING DISABLED Message Is Inoperative/Always On PINPOINT TEST D: THE REGEN BRAKING DISABLED MESSAGE IS INOPERATIVE/ALWAYS ON Normal Operation The instrument cluster receives the regenerative brake disabled status from the powertrain control module (PCM) over the high speed controller area network (HS-CAN) communication bus. If the regenerative braking system is disabled, the PCM sends a command to the instrument cluster to display the regenerative braking disabled message. If the regenerative braking message is missing, the instrument cluster sets DTC U0100 in continuous memory and the regenerative braking disabled message remains in the last indication mode (on or off). If the regen braking message is deemed invalid by the instrument cluster, the instrument cluster defaults the regenerative braking disabled message off. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - PCM concern - Instrument cluster Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6036 D1-D3 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Service and Repair > Message Center Configuration Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Service and Repair Message Center Configuration MESSAGE CENTER CONFIGURATION Oil Life Reset NOTE: The oil life calculation is set at a maximum of approximately 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 180 days. - The XXX's in the steps below represent a numeric value and will display the correct number in percent. For example; OIL LIFE = XXX% may display OIL LIFE = 45%. 1. Press and release the SETUP button until the message center displays OIL LIFE = XXX% HOLD RESET = NEW. 2. Press and hold the RESET button for 2 seconds and release to reset the oil life to 100%. 3. The message center displays OIL LIFE SET TO 100%. Oil Life Start Value NOTE: The oil life start value is used to reset the oil life value back to the maximum of approximately 12,000 km (7,500 miles) if the value was previously changed or to lower the value by 10% increments down to 10%. 1. Press and release the SETUP button until the message center displays OIL LIFE = XXX% HOLD RESET = NEW. 2. Press and hold the RESET button for 2 seconds and release to adjust new oil life %. 3. NOTE: Once the percent has been lowered to 10%, the next button press starts the sequence over again beginning at 100%. Press and release the RESET button to lower the start value percent until the message center displays the newly desired percent. 4. Press and release the SETUP button to return to the setup menu. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Service and Repair > Message Center Configuration > Page 6039 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Service and Repair Message Center Switch MESSAGE CENTER SWITCH Removal and Installation All vehicles 1. Remove the LH instrument panel trim panel. Hybrid vehicles 2. Remove the jump start switch screw and position the jump start switch aside. All vehicles 3. Press the retaining tabs and remove the message center switch. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6040 Special Tool(s) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Auxiliary Input / Output Jack, Entertainment System > Component Information > Diagrams C2401 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Auxiliary Input / Output Jack, Entertainment System > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6045 Auxiliary Input / Output Jack: Service and Repair AUDIO INPUT JACK Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: Pull straight back to disengage the clips. Remove the instrument panel lower panel. Disconnect the electrical connector(s). 2. Release the tabs and remove the audio input jack. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Entertainment System Control Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) Entertainment System Control Panel: Service and Repair Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) FRONT DISPLAY INTERFACE MODULE (FDIM) Removal and Installation 1. Remove the instrument panel upper finish panel by pulling straight back. 2. Remove the 4 FDIM screws. 3. Remove the FDIM. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Entertainment Systems > Entertainment System Control Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Front Display Interface Module (FDIM) > Page 6050 Entertainment System Control Panel: Service and Repair Front Control Interface Module (FCIM) FRONT CONTROL INTERFACE MODULE (FCIM) Removal and Installation NOTE: If the front control interface module (FCIM) is being replaced, it must be replaced as an assembly with the middle center instrument panel center finish panel. However, the middle center instrument panel center finish panel can be replaced individually if the FCIM does not need to be replaced. 1. Remove the audio unit. 2. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Global Positioning System: > 10-2-8 > Feb > 10 > SYNC(R) System Defaults To 'Privacy Mode' Global Positioning System: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode' TSB 10-2-8 02/15/10 SYNC SYSTEM DEFAULTS TO OR STAYS IN PRIVACY MODE, MULTIPLE VEHICLE LINES FORD: 2008-2009 Taurus X 2008-2010 Focus, Fusion, Mustang, Taurus, Edge, Escape, Expedition, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer, F-150, F-250, F-350, F-450 2009-2010 Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2010 MKZ 2009-2010 MKS 2008 Mark LT 2008-2010 MKX, Navigator 2010 MKT MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan, Mariner, Mountaineer ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2010 SYNC-equipped vehicles may express concern with their SYNC paired device defaulting, switching or staying on privacy mode. The customer may not be able to accept the call through the SYNC system or must answer the call manually on their personal device. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Set the Privacy mode to Off on the device and recheck Sync operation. 2. If necessary, test the device on another vehicle with the same version SYNC. If the concern is still present, the device is the concern. Continue with normal WSM Diagnostics. NOTE PRIVACY MODE MEANS THAT THE PHONE IS CONTROLLING THE AUDIO. SYNC ONLY MAKES REQUESTS TO THE PHONE TO TRANSFER THIS RESPONSIBILITY OR AUDIO TO SYNC. IF THE PHONE DOES NOT ACCEPT THIS REQUEST OR THERE IS A PROBLEM IN THE COMMUNICATION TO MAKE THIS HAPPEN, YOU ARE BY DEFAULT IN PRIVACY MODE. WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Global Positioning System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Global Positioning System: > 10-2-8 > Feb > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode' Global Positioning System: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode' TSB 10-2-8 02/15/10 SYNC SYSTEM DEFAULTS TO OR STAYS IN PRIVACY MODE, MULTIPLE VEHICLE LINES FORD: 2008-2009 Taurus X 2008-2010 Focus, Fusion, Mustang, Taurus, Edge, Escape, Expedition, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer, F-150, F-250, F-350, F-450 2009-2010 Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2010 MKZ 2009-2010 MKS 2008 Mark LT 2008-2010 MKX, Navigator 2010 MKT MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan, Mariner, Mountaineer ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2010 SYNC-equipped vehicles may express concern with their SYNC paired device defaulting, switching or staying on privacy mode. The customer may not be able to accept the call through the SYNC system or must answer the call manually on their personal device. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Set the Privacy mode to Off on the device and recheck Sync operation. 2. If necessary, test the device on another vehicle with the same version SYNC. If the concern is still present, the device is the concern. Continue with normal WSM Diagnostics. NOTE PRIVACY MODE MEANS THAT THE PHONE IS CONTROLLING THE AUDIO. SYNC ONLY MAKES REQUESTS TO THE PHONE TO TRANSFER THIS RESPONSIBILITY OR AUDIO TO SYNC. IF THE PHONE DOES NOT ACCEPT THIS REQUEST OR THERE IS A PROBLEM IN THE COMMUNICATION TO MAKE THIS HAPPEN, YOU ARE BY DEFAULT IN PRIVACY MODE. WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Navigation System: > 10-2-8 > Feb > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode' Navigation System: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode' TSB 10-2-8 02/15/10 SYNC SYSTEM DEFAULTS TO OR STAYS IN PRIVACY MODE, MULTIPLE VEHICLE LINES FORD: 2008-2009 Taurus X 2008-2010 Focus, Fusion, Mustang, Taurus, Edge, Escape, Expedition, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer, F-150, F-250, F-350, F-450 2009-2010 Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2010 MKZ 2009-2010 MKS 2008 Mark LT 2008-2010 MKX, Navigator 2010 MKT MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan, Mariner, Mountaineer ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2010 SYNC-equipped vehicles may express concern with their SYNC paired device defaulting, switching or staying on privacy mode. The customer may not be able to accept the call through the SYNC system or must answer the call manually on their personal device. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Set the Privacy mode to Off on the device and recheck Sync operation. 2. If necessary, test the device on another vehicle with the same version SYNC. If the concern is still present, the device is the concern. Continue with normal WSM Diagnostics. NOTE PRIVACY MODE MEANS THAT THE PHONE IS CONTROLLING THE AUDIO. SYNC ONLY MAKES REQUESTS TO THE PHONE TO TRANSFER THIS RESPONSIBILITY OR AUDIO TO SYNC. IF THE PHONE DOES NOT ACCEPT THIS REQUEST OR THERE IS A PROBLEM IN THE COMMUNICATION TO MAKE THIS HAPPEN, YOU ARE BY DEFAULT IN PRIVACY MODE. WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Navigation System: > 10-2-8 > Feb > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode' Navigation System: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode' TSB 10-2-8 02/15/10 SYNC SYSTEM DEFAULTS TO OR STAYS IN PRIVACY MODE, MULTIPLE VEHICLE LINES FORD: 2008-2009 Taurus X 2008-2010 Focus, Fusion, Mustang, Taurus, Edge, Escape, Expedition, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer, F-150, F-250, F-350, F-450 2009-2010 Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2010 MKZ 2009-2010 MKS 2008 Mark LT 2008-2010 MKX, Navigator 2010 MKT MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan, Mariner, Mountaineer ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2010 SYNC-equipped vehicles may express concern with their SYNC paired device defaulting, switching or staying on privacy mode. The customer may not be able to accept the call through the SYNC system or must answer the call manually on their personal device. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Set the Privacy mode to Off on the device and recheck Sync operation. 2. If necessary, test the device on another vehicle with the same version SYNC. If the concern is still present, the device is the concern. Continue with normal WSM Diagnostics. NOTE PRIVACY MODE MEANS THAT THE PHONE IS CONTROLLING THE AUDIO. SYNC ONLY MAKES REQUESTS TO THE PHONE TO TRANSFER THIS RESPONSIBILITY OR AUDIO TO SYNC. IF THE PHONE DOES NOT ACCEPT THIS REQUEST OR THERE IS A PROBLEM IN THE COMMUNICATION TO MAKE THIS HAPPEN, YOU ARE BY DEFAULT IN PRIVACY MODE. WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Locations > Front Control Interface Module (FCIM) View 151-13 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Locations > Front Control Interface Module (FCIM) > Page 6079 View 151-13 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Navigation System: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6082 Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4 "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and relays are identified. Fuse and Relay Numbering and Naming. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Power Distribution Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6083 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information C904 Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6084 disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location Charts. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery set. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing lose clothing. Symbols Symbols (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6085 Symbols (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6086 Symbols (Part 3) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6087 Symbols (Part 4) Symbols (Part 5) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6088 Navigation System: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6089 Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6090 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6091 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. 3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6092 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6093 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6094 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6095 Navigation System: Connector Views C2402 C2123 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6096 Navigation System: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 130-1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6097 130-2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6098 130-3 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Navigation System > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6099 130-4 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Diagrams C466 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Amplifier, Sound System > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6104 Amplifier: Service and Repair SUBWOOFER AMPLIFIER Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the battery. 2. Remove the RH rear quarter trim panel. 3. Disconnect the subwoofer amplifier electrical connector. 4. Remove the 4 screws and the subwoofer amplifier. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Diagrams C2400 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Radio/Stereo: Procedures Audio Unit Part Number Retrieval AUDIO UNIT PART NUMBER RETRIEVAL Audio Units Without Navigation 1. Turn the audio unit on. 2. Press and hold the front control interface module (FCIM) memory preset buttons 3 and 6 for 3 seconds. The speaker walk-around test will begin. 3. Before the speaker walk-around test is complete, press preset button 6. 4. Rotate the TUNE dial until the audio unit part number is displayed. 5. Record the audio unit part number. 6. Turn the audio unit off. Audio Units With Navigation 1. Turn the audio unit on. 2. Press and hold preset buttons 3 and 6 for 3 seconds. The speaker walk-around test will begin. 3. Before the speaker walk-around test is complete, press END TEST on the display screen. 4. Select SYSTEM INFO from the menu. 5. Record the audio unit part number. 6. Turn the audio unit off. Satellite Radio Receiver Electronic Serial Number (ESN) Retrieval SATELLITE RADIO RECEIVER ELECTRONIC SERIAL NUMBER (ESN) RETRIEVAL Audio Units Without Navigation 1. Operate the audio unit in satellite radio mode. 2. Press and hold the AUX button and preset button 1, simultaneously. - The satellite radio receiver electronic serial number (ESN) will be displayed on the front display interface module (FDIM) screen. 3. Record the satellite radio receiver ESN. 4. Turn the audio unit off. Audio Units With Navigation 1. Turn the audio unit on. 2. Press the MENU button. 3. Select the SYSTEM INFO tab. 4. NOTE: The satellite radio receiver ESN is shown on the lower left corner of the screen with the text "SR ESN:". Record the satellite radio receiver ESN. 5. Turn the audio unit off. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Radio/Stereo > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6110 Radio/Stereo: Removal and Replacement SATELLITE RADIO RECEIVER Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the satellite radio receiver antenna cable and electrical connectors. 2. NOTE: Move the passenger seat all the way back to access. Remove the 2 nuts, the bolt, and the satellite radio receiver. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Remote Control, Audio - Stereo > Component Information > Service and Repair Remote Control: Service and Repair STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the driver air bag module during this procedure. Using a suitable tool, pry the steering wheel controls out of the steering wheel. 2. NOTE: Do not allow the electrical connector to fall back into the steering wheel. Remove the steering wheel controls. Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Right Rear C802 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Right Rear > Page 6118 C612 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Right Rear > Page 6119 C523 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Right Rear > Page 6120 C702 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6121 Speaker: Testing and Inspection SPEAKER WALK-AROUND TEST (EXCEPT NAVIGATION) NOTE: To enter the speaker walk-around test or audio unit self-diagnostic mode, the audio unit must be turned on and in radio tuner mode. 1. To enter the speaker walk-around test, simultaneously press the preset buttons 3 and 6. 2. The speaker walk-around test stops at each speaker and applies sound to each speaker for about 1 to 2 seconds. Each speaker is tested and displayed on the audio unit in the following sequence: RF, LF, LR, RR, SUBWOOFER. 3. To exit the speaker walk-around test, turn the key to OFF, turn the audio unit off, or press preset button 1 for diagnostics. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Speaker Speaker: Service and Repair Door Speaker DOOR SPEAKER Removal and Installation 1. Remove the door trim panel. 2. Remove the 4 screws and the door speaker. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc > Speaker > Component Information > Service and Repair > Door Speaker > Page 6124 Speaker: Service and Repair Subwoofer Speaker SUBWOOFER SPEAKER Removal and Installation NOTE: The subwoofer speaker, amplifier, and enclosure and only replaced as a complete assembly. 1. Remove the RH quarter trim panel. 2. Disconnect the subwoofer amplifier electrical connector. 3. Remove the 3 bolts and the subwoofer speaker. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Accessory Delay Module > Accessory Delay Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 6130 Accessory Delay Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Communications Control Module: > 10-2-8 > Feb > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode' Communications Control Module: Customer Interest SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode' TSB 10-2-8 02/15/10 SYNC SYSTEM DEFAULTS TO OR STAYS IN PRIVACY MODE, MULTIPLE VEHICLE LINES FORD: 2008-2009 Taurus X 2008-2010 Focus, Fusion, Mustang, Taurus, Edge, Escape, Expedition, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer, F-150, F-250, F-350, F-450 2009-2010 Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2010 MKZ 2009-2010 MKS 2008 Mark LT 2008-2010 MKX, Navigator 2010 MKT MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan, Mariner, Mountaineer ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2010 SYNC-equipped vehicles may express concern with their SYNC paired device defaulting, switching or staying on privacy mode. The customer may not be able to accept the call through the SYNC system or must answer the call manually on their personal device. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Set the Privacy mode to Off on the device and recheck Sync operation. 2. If necessary, test the device on another vehicle with the same version SYNC. If the concern is still present, the device is the concern. Continue with normal WSM Diagnostics. NOTE PRIVACY MODE MEANS THAT THE PHONE IS CONTROLLING THE AUDIO. SYNC ONLY MAKES REQUESTS TO THE PHONE TO TRANSFER THIS RESPONSIBILITY OR AUDIO TO SYNC. IF THE PHONE DOES NOT ACCEPT THIS REQUEST OR THERE IS A PROBLEM IN THE COMMUNICATION TO MAKE THIS HAPPEN, YOU ARE BY DEFAULT IN PRIVACY MODE. WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Communications Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Communications Control Module: > 10-2-8 > Feb > 10 > SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode' Communications Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins SYNC(R) System - Defaults To 'Privacy Mode' TSB 10-2-8 02/15/10 SYNC SYSTEM DEFAULTS TO OR STAYS IN PRIVACY MODE, MULTIPLE VEHICLE LINES FORD: 2008-2009 Taurus X 2008-2010 Focus, Fusion, Mustang, Taurus, Edge, Escape, Expedition, Explorer Sport Trac, Explorer, F-150, F-250, F-350, F-450 2009-2010 Flex LINCOLN: 2008-2010 MKZ 2009-2010 MKS 2008 Mark LT 2008-2010 MKX, Navigator 2010 MKT MERCURY: 2008-2009 Sable 2008-2010 Milan, Mariner, Mountaineer ISSUE Some customers of 2008-2010 SYNC-equipped vehicles may express concern with their SYNC paired device defaulting, switching or staying on privacy mode. The customer may not be able to accept the call through the SYNC system or must answer the call manually on their personal device. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Set the Privacy mode to Off on the device and recheck Sync operation. 2. If necessary, test the device on another vehicle with the same version SYNC. If the concern is still present, the device is the concern. Continue with normal WSM Diagnostics. NOTE PRIVACY MODE MEANS THAT THE PHONE IS CONTROLLING THE AUDIO. SYNC ONLY MAKES REQUESTS TO THE PHONE TO TRANSFER THIS RESPONSIBILITY OR AUDIO TO SYNC. IF THE PHONE DOES NOT ACCEPT THIS REQUEST OR THERE IS A PROBLEM IN THE COMMUNICATION TO MAKE THIS HAPPEN, YOU ARE BY DEFAULT IN PRIVACY MODE. WARRANTY STATUS: Information Only Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations View 151-25 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6147 C4014 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Relays and Modules - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Control Module > Component Information > Locations > Page 6148 Parking Assist Control Module: Service and Repair PARKING AID MODULE Removal and Installation 1. Remove the RH rear quarter trim panel. 2. Disconnect the electrical connectors. 3. Remove the 2 screws and the parking aid module. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Locations View 151-27 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left C4009 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 6155 C4011 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 6156 C4010 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Parking Aid Sensor, Outer Left > Page 6157 C4012 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Distance Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6158 Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Service and Repair PARKING AID SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. NOTE: The rear bumper cover removal is only necessary for access to the outer parking aid sensors. The inner parking aid sensors do not require rear bumper cover removal for access. Remove the rear bumper cover. 3. Press the retaining tabs and remove the parking aid sensor. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Sensors and Switches - Accessories and Optional Equipment > Parking Assist Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Parking Assist Switch: Service and Repair PARKING AID SWITCH Removal and Installation 1. Remove the lower instrument panel center finish panel. 2. Press the retaining tabs and remove the parking aid switch. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Trailer Connector: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6167 Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4 "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and relays are identified. Fuse and Relay Numbering and Naming. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Power Distribution Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6168 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information C904 Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6169 disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location Charts. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery set. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing lose clothing. Symbols Symbols (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6170 Symbols (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6171 Symbols (Part 3) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6172 Symbols (Part 4) Symbols (Part 5) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6173 Trailer Connector: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6174 Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6175 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6176 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. 3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6177 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6178 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6179 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6180 C439 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6181 Trailer Connector: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 95-1 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6182 Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Trailer Lamps: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6187 Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4 "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and relays are identified. Fuse and Relay Numbering and Naming. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Power Distribution Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6188 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information C904 Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6189 disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location Charts. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery set. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing lose clothing. Symbols Symbols (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6190 Symbols (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6191 Symbols (Part 3) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6192 Symbols (Part 4) Symbols (Part 5) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6193 Trailer Lamps: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6194 Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6195 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6196 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. 3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6197 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6198 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6199 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6200 Trailer Lamps: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 95-1 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6201 Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Trailer Lamps: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Principles of Operation PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION The trailer lamps are supplied power by the trailer tow park lamp relay, the LH trailer tow stop/turn relay and the RH trailer tow stop/turn relay and are energized to correspond with the exterior lighting functions of the vehicle. A common ground is provided to the trailer tow connector for the trailer lamps. Inspection and Verification INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION 1. Verify the customer concern. 2. Verify the exterior lighting system of the vehicle is operating correctly. If not, refer to the appropriate pinpoint test. 3. Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage. VISUAL INSPECTION CHART Electrical Battery junction box (BJB) fuse(s): 8 (20A) (trailer tow parking lamps) - 14 (15A) (trailer tow stop/turn relays) - Trailer tow stop/turn relays - Trailer tow parking lamp relay - Trailer 4. If the concern is not visually evident, verify the symptom. GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6204 Symptom Chart Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6205 Trailer Lamps: Pinpoint Tests Test X: The Trailer Lamps Are Inoperative - All PINPOINT TEST X: THE TRAILER LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE - ALL Normal Operation The trailer tow connector receives ground through circuit RAT08 (WH) for all of the trailer lamps. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Trailer X1 Test Y: The Individual Trailer Lamp Is Inoperative - Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp PINPOINT TEST Y: THE INDIVIDUAL TRAILER LAMP IS INOPERATIVE - TRAILER STOP/TURN LAMP Normal Operation The battery junction box (BJB) fuse 14 (15A) supplies voltage to the LH and RH trailer tow stop/turn relays. The trailer tow stop/turn relay coils are grounded through circuit GD120 (BK/GN). The trailer tow LH stop/turn relay coil receives voltage from circuit CLS18 (GY/BN) when the vehicle LH rear stoplamp is illuminated. When the trailer tow LH stop/turn relay is energized, voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector through circuit CAT06 (YE). The trailer tow RH stop/turn relay coil receives voltage through circuit CLS19 (VT/OG) when the vehicle RH rear stoplamp is illuminated. When the trailer tow RH stop/turn relay is energized, voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector through circuit CAT09 (GN). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Trailer tow stop/turn relay - Trailer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6206 Y1-Y2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6207 Y3-Y4 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6208 Y5 Test Z: The Trailer Lamps Are Inoperative - Trailer Parking Lamps PINPOINT TEST Z: THE TRAILER LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE - TRAILER PARKING LAMPS Normal Operation The trailer tow parking lamp relay coil receives voltage through circuit CLS30 (VT/WH) when the vehicle parking lamps are illuminated. The trailer tow parking lamp relay coil is grounded through circuit GD120 (BK/GN). The battery junction box (BJB) fuse 8 (20A) supplies voltage to the trailer tow parking lamp relay switch side. When the trailer tow parking lamp relay is energized, the voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector through circuit CAT11 (BN). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Trailer tow parking lamp relay - Trailer Z1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6209 Z1-Z4 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6210 Z4-Z5 Tests AA: The Trailer Lamps Are On Continuously PINPOINT TEST AA: THE TRAILER LAMPS ARE ON CONTINUOUSLY Normal Operation - Trailer Tow Turn/Stoplamp The trailer tow LH stop/turn relay coil receives voltage through circuit CLS18 (GY/BN) when the vehicle LH rear stoplamp is illuminated. When the trailer tow LH stop/turn relay is energized, voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector through circuit CAT06 (YE). The trailer tow RH stop/turn relay coil receives voltage through circuit CLS19 (VT/OG) when the vehicle RH rear stoplamp is illuminated. When the trailer tow RH stop/turn relay is energized, voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector through circuit CAT09 (GN). Normal Operation - Trailer Tow Parking The trailer tow parking lamp relay coil receives voltage through circuit CLS30 (VT/WH) when the vehicle parking lamps are illuminated. When the trailer tow parking lamp relay is energized, voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector through circuit CAT11 (BN). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Trailer tow relay - Trailer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6211 AA1-AA2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Towing / Trailer System > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 6212 Special Tool(s) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Trailer Connector: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6217 Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4 "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and relays are identified. Fuse and Relay Numbering and Naming. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Power Distribution Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6218 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information C904 Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6219 disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location Charts. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery set. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing lose clothing. Symbols Symbols (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6220 Symbols (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6221 Symbols (Part 3) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6222 Symbols (Part 4) Symbols (Part 5) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6223 Trailer Connector: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6224 Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6225 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6226 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. 3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6227 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6228 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6229 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6230 C439 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6231 Trailer Connector: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 95-1 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Accessories and Optional Equipment > Trailer Connector > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6232 Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > Description and Operation Body Control Systems: Description and Operation MODULE CONTROLLED FUNCTIONS NOTE: - The smart junction box (SJB) is also known as the generic electronic module (GEM). - The time out for the battery saver relay and the accessory delay relay (both are controlled by the SJB/GEM) is 1 minute if the vehicle has less than 80 km (50 miles). Once the vehicle passes the approximate mileage threshold of 80 km (50 miles), the time out for both relays will be the normal 10 minutes time out, as described by the Owner's Literature. The SJB/GEM is the only multifunction control module on this vehicle. The SJB/GEM is a combination of a multifunction control module and a central junction box (CJB). The following systems are controlled by the SJB/GEM: - Auto locks - Exterior lamps - Illuminated entry and interior lamps - Keyless entry keypad - Power door locks - Remote keyless entry (RKE) system - Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) The SJB/GEM is located under the front (passenger side floor) console. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Body Control Systems: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Inspection and Verification INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION 1. Verify the customer concern. 2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage. VISUAL INSPECTION CHART Electrical Smart junction box (SJB)/GEM fuse 5 (10A) - Wiring, terminals or connectors 3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding to the next step. 4. NOTE: Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release. If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the data link connector (DLC). 5. NOTE: The vehicle communication module (VCM) prove-out confirms power and ground from the DLC are provided to the VCM. If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM: Check the VCM connection to the vehicle. - Check the scan tool connection to the VCM. - Refer to Information Bus (Module Communications Network), No Power To The Scan Tool, to diagnose no communication with the scan tool. 6. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle: - Verify the ignition key is in the ON position. - Verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle. - Refer to Information Bus (Module Communications Network) to diagnose no response from the PCM. 7. Carry out the network test: - If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules, refer to Information Bus (Module Communications Network). - If the network test passes, retrieve and record the continuous memory DTCs. 8. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the SJB/GEM. 9. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to DTC Charts. For all other DTCs, REFER to Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart. See: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions/Smart Junction Box (SJB)/GEM DTC Chart See: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions/Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Chart 10. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, verify the symptom. GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Principles of Operation PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION NOTE: - The time out for the battery saver relay and the accessory delay relay is 1 minute if the vehicle has less than 80 km (50 miles). Once the vehicle passes the approximate mileage threshold of 80 km (50 miles), the time out for both relays will be the normal 10 minute time out, as described by the Owner's Literature. - The smart junction box (SJB) is also known as the generic electronic module (GEM). The SJB/GEM is a multifunction control module that controls many of the vehicle systems. Several SJB/GEM functions utilize hardwired inputs and/or outputs. The SJB/GEM controls the following hardwired functions, using the corresponding inputs and outputs: Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6239 In addition, the SJB/GEM is involved in other vehicle systems through communication over the controller area network (CAN). For a detailed list of SJB/GEM network inputs and outputs, refer to Information Bus (Module Communications Network). Some SJB/GEM parameters are programmable. Two types of programmable parameters are available: vehicle configuration and customer preference. The SJB/GEM utilizes a protective circuit strategy for many of its outputs (for example, the headlamp output circuit). Output loads (current level) are monitored for excessive current (typically short circuits) and are shut down (voltage or ground provided by the module is turned off) when a fault is detected. A continuous DTC is stored at that time for the fault. The circuit will then reset after an ignition cycle or customer demand of the function (which will switch the component on, causing the 30-minute battery saver timer to be energized). When an excessive circuit load occurs several times, the module shuts down the output until a service procedure is carried out. At the same time, the continuous DTC that was stored on the first failure will not clear by a command to clear the continuous DTCs. The module will not allow this code to be cleared or the normal circuit function restored, until a successful on-demand self-test proves that the fault has been repaired. After the on-demand self-test has successfully completed (no on-demand DTCs present), the continuous DTC will have been cleared and the normal circuit function will be restored. DTC B106E sets when the SJB/GEM has disabled a circuit due to a repetitive fault causing a circuit overload. A corresponding DTC for the circuit in question will also be set as follows: - DTC B1034 - Radio Start Signal Circuit Failure - DTC B1218 - Horn Relay Coil Circuit Short to Vbatt - DTC B1304 - Accessory Delay Relay Coil Circuit Short To Battery - DTC B1316 - Battery Saver Relay Coil Circuit Short To Ground - DTC B1349 - Heated Backlite Relay Short To Battery - DTC B1474 - Battery Saver Power Relay Circuit Short To Battery - DTC B1502 - Lamp Turn Signal Left Circuit Short To Ground - DTC B1506 - Lamp Turn Signal Right Circuit Short To Ground - DTC B1626 - Lamp Keypad Output Short Circuit To Ground - DTC B2070 - Trailer Tow Relay Coil(s) Circuit Failure - DTC B2501 - LF Lamp Low Beam Circuit Failure - DTC B2503 - RF Lamp Low Beam Circuit Failure - DTC B2505 - LF Lamp High Beam Circuit Failure - DTC B2507 - RF Lamp High Beam Circuit Failure - DTC B2512 - Front Fog Lamp Relay Ckt Short to Battery - DTC C1788 - Stoplamp Relay Output Circuit Short to Ground - DTC C1961 - Park Lamp Relay Coil Circuit Failure - DTC P0930 - Gear Shift Lock Solenoid Circuit Low Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6240 Body Control Systems: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions B106A-B1137 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6241 B1138-B1231 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6242 B12A0-B1299 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6243 B12AB-B12B6 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6244 B12BA-B1318 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6245 B1318-B1342 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6246 B1342 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6247 B1342-B1688 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6248 B1696-B2141 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6249 B2143-B2427 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6250 B273A-B2692 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6251 B273B-B2870 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6252 B287A-B2965 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6253 B2A2A-B298B Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6254 B2A3A-B2A39 / C1095-C1277 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6255 C1278-C1327 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6256 C1328-C1702 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6257 C1703-C1998 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6258 C2000-C2780 / P0A0A-P0812 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6259 P0ABF-P2613 / U0001-U0100 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6260 U0100-U0155 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6261 U0155-U0249 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6262 U0249-U2023 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6263 U2023-U2050 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6264 U2050-U2051 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6265 U261A-U2527 B106E-B106F / P062F Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6266 Symptom Chart Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 6267 Body Control Systems: Pinpoint Tests PINPOINT TEST A: DTCS B106E/B106F - SOLID STATE DRIVER DISABLED/MODULE DISABLED Normal Operation When a repetitive fault causing a circuit overload is detected on certain output circuits, the smart junction box (SJB)/GEM disables the circuit by removing voltage, or ground, to the affected circuit. The circuit remains disabled until the fault is corrected and an on-demand self-test is run. When the on-demand self-test has been run after all faults have been corrected, any DTCs related to the fault are cleared. DTC B106E (Solid State Driver Disabled Due to Short Circuit) - sets when the SJB/GEM has disabled a circuit due to a repetitive fault causing a circuit overload. For a complete list of corresponding DTCs, refer to Principles of Operation. See: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Principles of Operation DTC B106F (Module Disabled Due to External Fault) - sets when one or more output functions are permanently disabled due to a repetitive circuit overload fault. When DTC B106F is present, the SJB/GEM must be replaced after the fault condition has been corrected. Possible Causes - Output circuit short to ground or voltage - SJB/GEM A1-A2 A3 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Body Control Systems > System Information > System Diagnosis > Page 6268 Special Tool(s) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Auxiliary Step / Running Board > System Information > Service and Repair Auxiliary Step / Running Board: Service and Repair RUNNING BOARD Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Release the running board trim bezel push clips and remove the running board trim bezel. 3. Remove the running board push-pin retainer. 4. Remove the 4 running board bolts and remove the running board. - To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Front Bumper Cover / Fascia: Procedures TAB REPAIR - BUMPER 1. NOTE: - Inspect the bumper cover to determine if part can be repaired to an acceptable level of quality of appearance, fit and durability. Will labor and material cost of the repair meet or exceed the cost of a new replacement bumper cover? If the bumper cover is determined to be repairable, proceed to the following steps. - The following steps are to be used as a guideline. Depending on what brand of adhesives or patch materials are used, procedures may vary slightly. Remove the affected bumper. 2. Clean the broken tab(s) with a plastics wax and grease remover. 3. Hand sand the repair area with 80-grit sandpaper and remove any foreign material with compressed air. 4. Apply a plastics adhesion promoter per label directions to the repair area. 5. Measure and cut a patch of fiberglass cloth or equivalent large enough to form the front of the tab, then slope back in a wedge shape approximately 51 mm (2 in) from original tab. 6. Prepare the repair adhesive cloth patch per manufacturer's instructions and apply to the affected area. - Immediately position the plastic repair material patch to form the tab shape. 7. Allow appropriate cure time and shape the repair tab using a small angle sander. Use extreme care to not sand through the exterior surface. 8. CAUTION: Hybrid vehicles contain a high-voltage traction battery (HVTB). Before placing the vehicle in a paint booth, the HVTB must be removed to avoid heat damage. Perform any required paint repair operations to the bumper cover using Ford-approved paint systems. 9. Reassemble and install the bumper cover. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6278 Front Bumper Cover / Fascia: Removal and Replacement BUMPER COVER - FRONT Exploded View Part 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6279 Part 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6280 Removal and Installation CAUTION: Prior to removal of the front bumper cover, place tape at the corners of the bumper cover and below the headlamps to prevent damage to the paint. 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the 6 scrivets from inside the front splash shield (3 each side). 3. Remove the 4 fender splash shield-to-air deflector bolts (2 each side). - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6281 4. Remove the 3 air deflector bolts. - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 5. Remove the 2 front bumper cover center scrivets from the front bumper cover. 6. Disconnect the fog lamp electrical connectors, if equipped. 7. Remove the 2 front bumper cover upper bolts and the front bumper cover. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Position the front bumper cover. - Push inward on the sides of the bumper cover near the bottom corner of the headlamp until you feel the bumper cover snap onto the bumper slides. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Reinforcement > System Information > Service and Repair Front Bumper Reinforcement: Service and Repair BUMPER - FRONT Exploded View Part 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Reinforcement > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 6285 Part 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Reinforcement > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 6286 Removal and Installation 1. Remove the front bumper cover. 2. Remove the 2 pushpins (1 each side) from the front bumper. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Front Bumper > Front Bumper Reinforcement > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 6287 3. Remove the ambient air temperature sensor from the front bumper, if equipped. 4. Remove the 4 front bumper nuts (2 each side). - To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 5. Remove the front bumper. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: Procedures TAB REPAIR - BUMPER 1. NOTE: - Inspect the bumper cover to determine if part can be repaired to an acceptable level of quality of appearance, fit and durability. Will labor and material cost of the repair meet or exceed the cost of a new replacement bumper cover? If the bumper cover is determined to be repairable, proceed to the following steps. - The following steps are to be used as a guideline. Depending on what brand of adhesives or patch materials are used, procedures may vary slightly. Remove the affected bumper. 2. Clean the broken tab(s) with a plastics wax and grease remover. 3. Hand sand the repair area with 80-grit sandpaper and remove any foreign material with compressed air. 4. Apply a plastics adhesion promoter per label directions to the repair area. 5. Measure and cut a patch of fiberglass cloth or equivalent large enough to form the front of the tab, then slope back in a wedge shape approximately 51 mm (2 in) from original tab. 6. Prepare the repair adhesive cloth patch per manufacturer's instructions and apply to the affected area. - Immediately position the plastic repair material patch to form the tab shape. 7. Allow appropriate cure time and shape the repair tab using a small angle sander. Use extreme care to not sand through the exterior surface. 8. CAUTION: Hybrid vehicles contain a high-voltage traction battery (HVTB). Before placing the vehicle in a paint booth, the HVTB must be removed to avoid heat damage. Perform any required paint repair operations to the bumper cover using Ford-approved paint systems. 9. Reassemble and install the bumper cover. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6293 Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia: Removal and Replacement BUMPER COVER - REAR Exploded View Rear Bumper Cover Without Trailer Hitch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6294 Rear Bumper Cover With Trailer Hitch (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Cover / Fascia > System Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 6295 Rear Bumper Cover With Trailer Hitch (Part 2) Removal and Installation 1. Remove the 2 rear bumper cover lower screws (1 each side). - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 2. Remove the 4 rear bumper cover center screws. 3. Remove the 2 rear bumper cover lower pushpins. 4. Remove the 2 rear splash shield-to-rear bumper cover screws (1 each side). 5. Remove the 2 rear bumper cover upper screws (1 each side). - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 6. Remove the 2 liftgate alignment bumper bolts and the 2 liftgate alignment bumpers. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 7. Disconnect the parking aid system or trailer tow electrical connector, if equipped. 8. Remove the rear bumper cover. 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - When installing, position the rear bumper cover into the bumper slides. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Reinforcement > System Information > Service and Repair > Bumper - Rear, With Trailer Hitch Rear Bumper Reinforcement: Service and Repair Bumper - Rear, With Trailer Hitch BUMPER - REAR, WITH TRAILER HITCH Exploded View Rear Bumper Cover Without Trailer Hitch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Reinforcement > System Information > Service and Repair > Bumper - Rear, With Trailer Hitch > Page 6300 Rear Bumper Cover With Trailer Hitch (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Reinforcement > System Information > Service and Repair > Bumper - Rear, With Trailer Hitch > Page 6301 Rear Bumper Cover With Trailer Hitch (Part 2) Removal and Installation 1. Remove the rear bumper cover. 2. Remove the 2 trailer hitch-to-back panel bolts. - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 3. Remove the 4 trailer hitch-to-body bolts. - To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft). 4. Remove the trailer hitch. - Disconnect the electrical connector from the trailer hitch. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Reinforcement > System Information > Service and Repair > Bumper - Rear, With Trailer Hitch > Page 6302 Rear Bumper Reinforcement: Service and Repair Bumper - Rear, Without Trailer Hitch BUMPER - REAR, WITHOUT TRAILER HITCH Exploded View Rear Bumper Cover Without Trailer Hitch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Reinforcement > System Information > Service and Repair > Bumper - Rear, With Trailer Hitch > Page 6303 Rear Bumper Cover With Trailer Hitch (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Bumper > Rear Bumper > Rear Bumper Reinforcement > System Information > Service and Repair > Bumper - Rear, With Trailer Hitch > Page 6304 Rear Bumper Cover With Trailer Hitch (Part 2) Removal and Installation 1. Remove the rear bumper cover. 2. Remove the 4 rear bumper nuts. - To install, tighten to 25 Nm (18 lb-ft). 3. Remove the rear bumper. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair COWL PANEL GRILLE Removal and Installation 1. Remove the 2 wiper pivot arms nuts. - To install, tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft). 2. Remove the LH and RH wiper pivot arms. 3. Remove the LH and RH cowl end cap pushpin retainers. 4. Remove the cowl end caps. 5. Release the cowl panel grille from the retaining clips and remove the cowl panel grille. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Adjust the wiper pivot arms. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-24-7 > Dec > 09 > Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush Front Door Exterior Handle: Customer Interest Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush TSB 09-24-7 12/14/09 EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE DIFFICULT TO OPEN/HANDLE NOT SITTING FLUSH WHEN RELEASED/HANDLE STICKING WHEN OPENING DOOR - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 9/1/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 9/1/2009 may exhibit an exterior door handle that is difficult to open, does not sit flush when released, and/or sticks when opening door. This may be due to the exterior door handle plunger binding on the door handle bezel. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the exterior door bezel on affected door(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14. 2. Closely examine the exterior door bezel for signs of damage; inspect for a groove worn into the bezel due to contact with the door handle plunger. Is any damage present? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure and follow WSM, Section 501-14 Symptom Chart pinpoint test T. b. Yes - Replace bezel with revised exterior door bezel as necessary following WSM, Section 501-14. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 09-24-7 > Dec > 09 > Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush > Page 6321 092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Front Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Front Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Rear Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Rear Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7822404 30 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Exterior Handle: > 09-24-7 > Dec > 09 > Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush Front Door Exterior Handle: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush TSB 09-24-7 12/14/09 EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE DIFFICULT TO OPEN/HANDLE NOT SITTING FLUSH WHEN RELEASED/HANDLE STICKING WHEN OPENING DOOR - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 9/1/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 9/1/2009 may exhibit an exterior door handle that is difficult to open, does not sit flush when released, and/or sticks when opening door. This may be due to the exterior door handle plunger binding on the door handle bezel. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the exterior door bezel on affected door(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14. 2. Closely examine the exterior door bezel for signs of damage; inspect for a groove worn into the bezel due to contact with the door handle plunger. Is any damage present? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure and follow WSM, Section 501-14 Symptom Chart pinpoint test T. b. Yes - Replace bezel with revised exterior door bezel as necessary following WSM, Section 501-14. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Exterior Handle: > 09-24-7 > Dec > 09 > Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush > Page 6327 092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Front Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Front Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Rear Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Rear Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7822404 30 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Door Exterior Handle: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder TSB 09-19-15 10/05/09 IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift interlock is not affected. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern. a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove ignition key. b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction. c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction? (1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics (2) No - Proceed to step 2. 2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs. The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Door Exterior Handle: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 6333 Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3511 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Door Exterior Handle: > Page 6334 Front Door Exterior Handle: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 09-24-7 Date: 091214 Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush TSB 09-24-7 12/14/09 EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE DIFFICULT TO OPEN/HANDLE NOT SITTING FLUSH WHEN RELEASED/HANDLE STICKING WHEN OPENING DOOR - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 9/1/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 9/1/2009 may exhibit an exterior door handle that is difficult to open, does not sit flush when released, and/or sticks when opening door. This may be due to the exterior door handle plunger binding on the door handle bezel. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the exterior door bezel on affected door(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14. 2. Closely examine the exterior door bezel for signs of damage; inspect for a groove worn into the bezel due to contact with the door handle plunger. Is any damage present? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure and follow WSM, Section 501-14 Symptom Chart pinpoint test T. b. Yes - Replace bezel with revised exterior door bezel as necessary following WSM, Section 501-14. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Door Exterior Handle: > Page 6335 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Front Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Front Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Rear Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Rear Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7822404 30 Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 09-24-7 Date: 091214 Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush TSB 09-24-7 12/14/09 EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE DIFFICULT TO OPEN/HANDLE NOT SITTING FLUSH WHEN RELEASED/HANDLE STICKING WHEN OPENING DOOR - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 9/1/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Door Exterior Handle: > Page 6336 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 9/1/2009 may exhibit an exterior door handle that is difficult to open, does not sit flush when released, and/or sticks when opening door. This may be due to the exterior door handle plunger binding on the door handle bezel. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the exterior door bezel on affected door(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14. 2. Closely examine the exterior door bezel for signs of damage; inspect for a groove worn into the bezel due to contact with the door handle plunger. Is any damage present? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure and follow WSM, Section 501-14 Symptom Chart pinpoint test T. b. Yes - Replace bezel with revised exterior door bezel as necessary following WSM, Section 501-14. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Front Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Front Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Door Exterior Handle: > Page 6337 Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Rear Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Rear Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7822404 30 Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 09-24-7 Date: 091214 Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush TSB 09-24-7 12/14/09 EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE DIFFICULT TO OPEN/HANDLE NOT SITTING FLUSH WHEN RELEASED/HANDLE STICKING WHEN OPENING DOOR - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 9/1/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 9/1/2009 may exhibit an exterior door handle that is difficult to open, does not sit flush when released, and/or sticks when opening door. This may be due to the exterior door handle plunger binding on the door handle bezel. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the exterior door bezel on affected door(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Door Exterior Handle: > Page 6338 2. Closely examine the exterior door bezel for signs of damage; inspect for a groove worn into the bezel due to contact with the door handle plunger. Is any damage present? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure and follow WSM, Section 501-14 Symptom Chart pinpoint test T. b. Yes - Replace bezel with revised exterior door bezel as necessary following WSM, Section 501-14. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Front Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Front Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Rear Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Front Door Exterior Handle: > Page 6339 Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Rear Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7822404 30 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle Front Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Door Handle EXTERIOR FRONT DOOR HANDLE Exploded View Part 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle > Page 6342 Part 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle > Page 6343 Removal and Installation 1. Remove the front door trim panel. 2. Position the watershield aside. 3. Remove the exterior front door handle cover retaining screw from the door handle reinforcement. 4. Remove the exterior front door handle cover. 1 Pull the exterior front door handle open. 2 Pivot the rear of the exterior front door handle cover and remove. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle > Page 6344 5. Remove the exterior front door handle. - Open and pull the exterior front door handle rearward to release and remove. 6. If necessary, remove the exterior front door handle seals. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle > Page 6345 Front Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Door Handle Reinforcement DOOR HANDLE REINFORCEMENT - EXTERIOR, FRONT Exploded View Part 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle > Page 6346 Part 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle > Page 6347 Removal and Installation NOTE: The door glass must be completely raised. 1. Remove the exterior front door handle. 2. Disconnect the door latch carrier. 1 Release the retainer and position the door latch carrier aside. 2 Remove the exterior front door handle reinforcement screw. 3. Disconnect the actuating rods. - If necessary, disconnect the lock cylinder actuating rod from the exterior front door handle reinforcement. - Disconnect the exterior front door handle reinforcement actuating rod from the front door latch. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle > Page 6348 4. Remove the exterior front door handle reinforcement with the exterior front door handle reinforcement actuating rod. 5. If necessary, remove the exterior front door handle reinforcement actuating rod. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Interior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair Front Door Interior Handle: Service and Repair INTERIOR DOOR HANDLE - FRONT Exploded View Part 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Handle > Front Door Interior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 6352 Part 2 Removal and Installation 1. Remove the front door trim panel. 2. Release the interior front door handle retaining tabs and remove the interior front door handle. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Service and Repair Front Door Latch: Service and Repair FRONT DOOR LATCH Exploded View Part 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 6356 Part 2 Removal and Installation NOTE: The door glass must be completely raised. 1. Remove the front door trim panel. 2. Position the water shield aside. 3. Remove the exterior front door handle reinforcement. 4. Remove and discard the 3 front door latch bolts. - To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft). 5. Disconnect the front door latch electrical connector. 6. Remove the front door latch. - Slide the front door latch towards the front of the vehicle. - Remove the front door latch with the door lock actuating rod and the interior door handle actuating cable. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Latch > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 6357 7. If necessary, remove the door lock actuating rod and the interior door handle actuating cable. 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Lubricate the front door latch to striker surfaces after installation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair Front Door Panel: Service and Repair DOOR TRIM PANEL - FRONT Removal and Installation NOTE: LH side shown, RH side similar. 1. Remove the door sail panel. - If equipped, disconnect the power mirror electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 6361 2. Open and remove the door handle finish panel. - Pull the door handle outward to fully access the door handle finish panel. 3. Remove the door handle screw. 4. Remove the door inside handle screw. 5. Remove the 3 door trim panel screws. 6. Remove the door trim panel. - Pull outward and then upward on the door trim panel. - Disconnect the electrical connectors. 7. Remove the door handle from the door trim panel. - Disconnect the electrical connector. - Press the 2 retaining tabs while pushing the door handle from the door trim panel. - Remove the door handle from the door trim panel by pulling it back through the door trim panel. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 6362 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Striker > System Information > Adjustments Front Door Striker: Adjustments STRIKER ADJUSTMENT NOTE: Before adjusting the door latch striker plate, verify that the door can be closed easily and fits tightly. 1. Loosen the door latch striker bolts. 2. Reposition the door latch striker plate from side-to-side or up and down as necessary. 3. Tighten the door latch striker plate bolts to 22 Nm (16 lb-ft). 4. Check the adjustment. Repeat the procedure as necessary. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched TSB 11-2-15 02/28/11 WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/13/2010 FORD: 2008-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List. ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Fully lower the affected window glass. 2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11 (Exploded View). 3. Fully raise the window glass. 4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of the window glass. Is the distance within specification range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)? a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5. b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5. 5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present? a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 6375 With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors 110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7821453 41 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 6376 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed TSB 10-25-4 12/23/10 FRONT EXTERIOR DOOR GLASS WEATHERSTRIP DEFORMED OR LIFTING - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 517/2010 12/23/10 FORD: 008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/7/2010 may exhibit the front exterior door glass weatherstrip deformed and/or lifting up from the door flange. This may be due to a lack of retention between the door glass weatherstrip and flange. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove affected front exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11 Glass, Frames, and Mechanisms Exploded View. 2. Apply a strip of 3M(TM) Safety-Walk(TM) Slip-Resistant General Purpose Tapes, or similar (obtained locally) to the outer flange surface at the center of the door. Cut grip tape to approximately 2.5" X .5" (64 mm X 13 mm). (Figure 1) 3. Install new revised exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference WSM, Section 501-11 Glass, Frames, and Mechanisms - Exploded View. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102504A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Replace One Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed > Page 6381 Exterior Door Glass Weather Strip Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102504B 2008-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Replace Both Exterior Door Glass Weather Strips Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7821453 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched TSB 11-2-15 02/28/11 WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/13/2010 FORD: 2008-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List. ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Fully lower the affected window glass. 2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11 (Exploded View). 3. Fully raise the window glass. 4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of the window glass. Is the distance within specification range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)? a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5. b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5. 5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present? a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 6387 With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors 110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7821453 41 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 6388 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed TSB 10-25-4 12/23/10 FRONT EXTERIOR DOOR GLASS WEATHERSTRIP DEFORMED OR LIFTING - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 517/2010 12/23/10 FORD: 008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/7/2010 may exhibit the front exterior door glass weatherstrip deformed and/or lifting up from the door flange. This may be due to a lack of retention between the door glass weatherstrip and flange. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove affected front exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11 Glass, Frames, and Mechanisms Exploded View. 2. Apply a strip of 3M(TM) Safety-Walk(TM) Slip-Resistant General Purpose Tapes, or similar (obtained locally) to the outer flange surface at the center of the door. Cut grip tape to approximately 2.5" X .5" (64 mm X 13 mm). (Figure 1) 3. Install new revised exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference WSM, Section 501-11 Glass, Frames, and Mechanisms - Exploded View. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102504A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Replace One Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed > Page 6393 Exterior Door Glass Weather Strip Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102504B 2008-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Replace Both Exterior Door Glass Weather Strips Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7821453 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6394 Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair DOOR GLASS TOP RUN - FRONT Exploded View Removal and Installation 1. Remove the front door window glass. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6395 2. Remove the front door interior sail panel. - If equipped, disconnect the speaker electrical connector. 3. Remove the 2 front door glass top run bolts. - To install tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 4. Remove the front door glass top run. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair WINDOW REGULATOR - FRONT DOOR Exploded View Removal and Installation 1. Remove the front door trim panel. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 6399 2. Remove the screw and the front door trim panel bracket. 3. Remove the 3 pushpins and pad assembly. 4. Position the watershield aside. 5. Connect the window control switch electrical connector. 6. Using the window control switch, lower the front door window glass to gain access to the front door window glass screws. 7. Disconnect the window control switch electrical connector. 8. Remove the 2 front door window glass screws. - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 9. Support the front door window glass in the full up position with tape. 10. Disconnect the front door window motor electrical connector. 11. Remove the front door window regulator and motor bolt. - To install, tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Front Door > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 6400 12. Loosen the 2 front door window regulator and motor bolts. - To install, tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft). 13. Remove the 2 nuts and the front door window regulator and motor. - To install, tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft). 14. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Exterior Handle: > 09-24-7 > Dec > 09 > Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush Rear Door Exterior Handle: Customer Interest Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush TSB 09-24-7 12/14/09 EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE DIFFICULT TO OPEN/HANDLE NOT SITTING FLUSH WHEN RELEASED/HANDLE STICKING WHEN OPENING DOOR - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 9/1/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 9/1/2009 may exhibit an exterior door handle that is difficult to open, does not sit flush when released, and/or sticks when opening door. This may be due to the exterior door handle plunger binding on the door handle bezel. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the exterior door bezel on affected door(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14. 2. Closely examine the exterior door bezel for signs of damage; inspect for a groove worn into the bezel due to contact with the door handle plunger. Is any damage present? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure and follow WSM, Section 501-14 Symptom Chart pinpoint test T. b. Yes - Replace bezel with revised exterior door bezel as necessary following WSM, Section 501-14. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Exterior Handle: > 09-24-7 > Dec > 09 > Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush > Page 6411 092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Front Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Front Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Rear Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Rear Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7822404 30 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Exterior Handle: > 09-24-7 > Dec > 09 > Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush Rear Door Exterior Handle: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush TSB 09-24-7 12/14/09 EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE DIFFICULT TO OPEN/HANDLE NOT SITTING FLUSH WHEN RELEASED/HANDLE STICKING WHEN OPENING DOOR - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 9/1/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 9/1/2009 may exhibit an exterior door handle that is difficult to open, does not sit flush when released, and/or sticks when opening door. This may be due to the exterior door handle plunger binding on the door handle bezel. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the exterior door bezel on affected door(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14. 2. Closely examine the exterior door bezel for signs of damage; inspect for a groove worn into the bezel due to contact with the door handle plunger. Is any damage present? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure and follow WSM, Section 501-14 Symptom Chart pinpoint test T. b. Yes - Replace bezel with revised exterior door bezel as necessary following WSM, Section 501-14. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Exterior Handle: > 09-24-7 > Dec > 09 > Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush > Page 6417 092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Front Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Front Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Rear Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Rear Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7822404 30 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Exterior Handle: > Page 6418 Rear Door Exterior Handle: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 09-24-7 Date: 091214 Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush TSB 09-24-7 12/14/09 EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE DIFFICULT TO OPEN/HANDLE NOT SITTING FLUSH WHEN RELEASED/HANDLE STICKING WHEN OPENING DOOR - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 9/1/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 9/1/2009 may exhibit an exterior door handle that is difficult to open, does not sit flush when released, and/or sticks when opening door. This may be due to the exterior door handle plunger binding on the door handle bezel. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the exterior door bezel on affected door(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14. 2. Closely examine the exterior door bezel for signs of damage; inspect for a groove worn into the bezel due to contact with the door handle plunger. Is any damage present? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure and follow WSM, Section 501-14 Symptom Chart pinpoint test T. b. Yes - Replace bezel with revised exterior door bezel as necessary following WSM, Section 501-14. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Exterior Handle: > Page 6419 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Front Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Front Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Rear Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Rear Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7822404 30 Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 09-24-7 Date: 091214 Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush TSB 09-24-7 12/14/09 EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE DIFFICULT TO OPEN/HANDLE NOT SITTING FLUSH WHEN RELEASED/HANDLE STICKING WHEN OPENING DOOR - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 9/1/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Exterior Handle: > Page 6420 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 9/1/2009 may exhibit an exterior door handle that is difficult to open, does not sit flush when released, and/or sticks when opening door. This may be due to the exterior door handle plunger binding on the door handle bezel. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the exterior door bezel on affected door(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14. 2. Closely examine the exterior door bezel for signs of damage; inspect for a groove worn into the bezel due to contact with the door handle plunger. Is any damage present? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure and follow WSM, Section 501-14 Symptom Chart pinpoint test T. b. Yes - Replace bezel with revised exterior door bezel as necessary following WSM, Section 501-14. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Front Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Front Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Exterior Handle: > Page 6421 Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Rear Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Rear Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7822404 30 Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 09-24-7 Date: 091214 Body - Exterior Door Handle(s) Hard T0 Open/Not Flush TSB 09-24-7 12/14/09 EXTERIOR DOOR HANDLE DIFFICULT TO OPEN/HANDLE NOT SITTING FLUSH WHEN RELEASED/HANDLE STICKING WHEN OPENING DOOR - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 9/1/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 9/1/2009 may exhibit an exterior door handle that is difficult to open, does not sit flush when released, and/or sticks when opening door. This may be due to the exterior door handle plunger binding on the door handle bezel. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove the exterior door bezel on affected door(s) per Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Exterior Handle: > Page 6422 2. Closely examine the exterior door bezel for signs of damage; inspect for a groove worn into the bezel due to contact with the door handle plunger. Is any damage present? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure and follow WSM, Section 501-14 Symptom Chart pinpoint test T. b. Yes - Replace bezel with revised exterior door bezel as necessary following WSM, Section 501-14. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092407A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.6 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Front Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407B 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Front Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With C Or D (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407C 2008-2010 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Inspect And Replace One (1) Rear Bezel. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) 092407D 2008-2010 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Exterior Handle: > Page 6423 Mariner: Inspect And Replace Two (2) Rear Bezels. This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A Or B (If The New Bezel Requires Paint Use B-Time) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7822404 30 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle Rear Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Door Handle EXTERIOR REAR DOOR HANDLE Exploded View Part 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle > Page 6426 Part 2 Removal and Installation 1. Remove the rear door trim panel. 2. Position the watershield aside. 3. Remove the window channel bolt and position the window channel aside. 1 To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle > Page 6427 4. Remove the exterior rear door handle cover retaining screw from the door handle reinforcement. 5. Remove the exterior rear door handle cover. 1 Pull the exterior rear door handle open. 2 Pivot the rear of the exterior rear door handle cover and remove. 6. Remove the exterior rear door handle. - Open and pull the exterior rear door handle rearward to release and remove. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle > Page 6428 Rear Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Door Handle Reinforcement DOOR HANDLE REINFORCEMENT - EXTERIOR, REAR Exploded View Part 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle > Page 6429 Part 2 Removal and Installation NOTE: The door glass must be completely raised. 1. Remove the exterior rear door handle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Exterior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Door Handle > Page 6430 2. Disconnect the door latch carrier. 1 Release the retainer and position the door latch carrier aside. 2 Remove the exterior rear door handle reinforcement screw. 3. Disconnect the exterior rear door handle reinforcement actuating rod from the rear door latch. 4. Remove the exterior rear door handle reinforcement with the exterior rear door handle reinforcement actuating rod. 5. If necessary, remove the exterior rear door handle reinforcement actuating rod. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Interior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Interior Handle: Service and Repair INTERIOR DOOR HANDLE - REAR Exploded View Part 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Handle > Rear Door Interior Handle > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 6434 Part 2 Removal and Installation 1. Remove the rear door trim panel. 2. Release the rear interior door handle retaining tabs and remove the rear interior door handle from the door trim panel. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Latch: Service and Repair REAR DOOR LATCH Exploded View Part 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 6438 Part 2 Removal and Installation NOTE: The rear door window glass must be completely raised. 1. Remove rear door trim panel. 2. Position the water shield aside. 3. Remove the exterior rear door handle reinforcement. 4. Remove and discard the 3 rear door latch bolts. - To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft). 5. Disconnect the rear door latch electrical connector. 6. Remove the rear door latch. - Slide the rear door latch towards the front of the vehicle. - Remove the rear door latch with the door lock actuating rod and the interior door handle actuating cable. 7. If necessary, remove the door lock actuating rod and the interior door handle actuating cable. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Latch > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 6439 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Lubricate the rear door latch to striker surfaces after installation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Panel: Service and Repair DOOR TRIM PANEL - REAR Removal and Installation NOTE: LH side shown, RH side similar. 1. Open and remove the door handle finish panel. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Panel > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 6443 2. Remove the door handle screw. 3. Remove the door handle pull cup screw. 4. Remove the 3 door trim panel screws. 5. Remove the door trim panel. - Pull outward and then upward on the door trim panel. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 6. Remove the door handle from the door trim panel. - Press the 2 retaining tabs while pushing the door handle from the door trim panel. - Remove the door handle from the door trim panel by pulling it back through the door trim panel. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched TSB 11-2-15 02/28/11 WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/13/2010 FORD: 2008-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List. ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Fully lower the affected window glass. 2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11 (Exploded View). 3. Fully raise the window glass. 4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of the window glass. Is the distance within specification range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)? a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5. b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5. 5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present? a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 6453 With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors 110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7821453 41 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 6454 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched TSB 11-2-15 02/28/11 WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/13/2010 FORD: 2008-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List. ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Fully lower the affected window glass. 2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11 (Exploded View). 3. Fully raise the window glass. 4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of the window glass. Is the distance within specification range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)? a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5. b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5. 5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present? a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 6460 With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors 110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7821453 41 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 6461 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6462 Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair DOOR GLASS TOP RUN - REAR Exploded View Part 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6463 Part 2 Removal and Installation 1. Remove the rear door window regulator. 2. Position the rear door window glass to the full down position. 3. Remove the 2 screws and the rear door exterior sail panel. 4. Remove the interior door glass weatherstrip. 5. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. 6. Remove the rear door glass top run bolt. - To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 7. Position the rear door window glass down and forward. 8. Remove the rear door glass top run. 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair WINDOW REGULATOR - REAR DOOR Exploded View Part 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 6467 Part 2 Removal and Installation 1. Remove the rear door trim panel. 2. Remove the screw and the rear door trim panel bracket. 3. Position the watershield aside. 4. Connect the window control switch electrical connector. 5. Using the window control switch, lower the rear door window glass to gain access to the rear door window glass screws. 6. Disconnect the window control switch electrical connector. 7. Remove the 2 rear door window glass screws. - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 8. Support the rear door window glass in the full up position with tape. 9. Disconnect the rear door window motor electrical connector. 10. Remove the rear door window regulator and motor bolt. - To install, tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Doors > Rear Door > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 6468 11. Loosen the 2 rear door window regulator and motor bolts. - To install, tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft). 12. Remove the 2 nuts and the rear door window regulator and motor. - To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 13. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair Hood Latch: Service and Repair HOOD LATCH Exploded View Removal 1. NOTE: Do not remove the nut. Loosen the hood latch nut. 2. NOTE: Mark the hood latch position prior to removal of the hood latch bolts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6473 Remove the 2 hood latch bolts. 3. Disconnect the hood latch release cable. 1 Release the cable conduit. 2 Disconnect the cable. 4. Remove the hood latch. 5. If necessary, remove the hood latch release lever. Installation 1. Connect the hood latch release cable to the hood latch. 1 Connect the cable. 2 Engage the cable conduit. 2. Slide the hood latch down onto the mounting bracket. 3. NOTE: When the hood latch is installed, the latch adjustment must be checked to make sure the latch is installed and aligned correctly. Position the hood latch with the alignment marks and install the 2 hood latch bolts. Tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft). 4. Tighten the hood latch nut to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6474 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch Release > Component Information > Service and Repair Hood Latch Release: Service and Repair HOOD LATCH RELEASE HANDLE Exploded View Removal and Installation 1. Remove the hood latch. 2. Disconnect the 3 hood latch release handle cable guides. - Note the routing of the hood latch release cable. 3. Remove the hood latch release handle bolt. - To install, tighten to 11 Nm (89 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Hood > Hood Latch Release > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6478 4. NOTE: The hood latch release handle and cable assembly must be pulled through the cowl panel into the passenger compartment. Remove the hood latch release handle and cable assembly. Pull the hood latch release cable through the cowl panel. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Liftgate Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair Liftgate Window Glass: Service and Repair WINDOW GLASS - LIFTGATE Removal and Installation 1. Open the liftgate window glass. 2. Remove the 2 liftgate window glass nut access covers. 3. Through the RH access, disconnect the liftgate window glass electrical harness connector. 4. Disconnect the LH heated window grid wire electrical connector. 5. NOTE: An assistant may be needed to carry out this step. Disconnect the 2 liftgate window glass cylinders. 1 Slide the spring retainer to the end of the socket. 2 Disconnect the socket from the ball stud. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Liftgate Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6483 6. NOTE: An assistant may be needed to carry out this step. Remove the 2 liftgate window glass hinge nuts and the liftgate window glass. To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Transfer components as necessary. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations View 151-21 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Page 6487 C457 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams C4039 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-21 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6494 C478 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel: Service and Repair LIFTGATE TRIM PANEL Removal and Installation 1. Open the liftgate. 2. Remove the 4 liftgate trim panel screws. 3. Release the 8 liftgate trim panel retaining clips. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Interior Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6498 4. Remove the liftgate trim panel. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Latch Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Service and Repair Liftgate Latch LIFTGATE LATCH Exploded View Removal and Installation 1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. 2. Disconnect the liftgate latch electrical connectors. 3. Remove and discard the 3 liftgate latch bolts. - To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Latch > Page 6503 4. Remove the liftgate latch. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Lubricate the liftgate latch to striker surfaces after installation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Latch > Page 6504 Trunk / Liftgate Latch: Service and Repair Liftgate Window Latch LIFTGATE WINDOW LATCH Exploded View Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Latch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Latch > Page 6505 Removal and Installation NOTE: Make sure the liftgate window glass is in the raised position. 1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. 2. Disconnect the liftgate window latch ajar switch electrical connector. 3. NOTE: Mark the position of the liftgate window latch prior to removing the liftgate window latch bolts. Remove the 2 bolts and the liftgate window latch. To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft). 4. NOTE: The liftgate window latch must be checked to make sure the latch is installed and aligned correctly. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Switch: > 10-5-1 > Mar > 10 > Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Customer Interest Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening TSB 10-5-1 03/29/10 LIFTGATE OPENING UN-COMMANDED OR NOT OPENING WHEN COMMANDED WHEN PARKED - INTERMITTENT FORD: 2008-2009 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/31/2008 may exhibit the liftgate opening un-commanded, or not opening when commanded while vehicle is parked. This may be due to water intrusion into the switch connector causing corrosion at the liftgate rear switch. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics. 1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05. 2. Remove the four (4) liftgate trim bezel nuts and remove the bezel from the liftgate. 3. Closely inspect the liftgate release switch and harness connector pins for signs of water intrusion and/or corrosion. Is any evidence of water intrusion or corrosion present? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Refer to WSM, Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics. b. Yes - Replace the liftgate release switch per WSM, Section 501-14, and install new Pigtail Wiring Kit per Wiring Diagram, Section 5-1. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Switch: > 10-5-1 > Mar > 10 > Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening > Page 6514 100S01A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Liftgate Release Switch And The Wiring Pigtail (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 13412 12 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Switch: > 10-5-1 > Mar > 10 > Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening Trunk / Liftgate Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening TSB 10-5-1 03/29/10 LIFTGATE OPENING UN-COMMANDED OR NOT OPENING WHEN COMMANDED WHEN PARKED - INTERMITTENT FORD: 2008-2009 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/31/2008 may exhibit the liftgate opening un-commanded, or not opening when commanded while vehicle is parked. This may be due to water intrusion into the switch connector causing corrosion at the liftgate rear switch. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics. 1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05. 2. Remove the four (4) liftgate trim bezel nuts and remove the bezel from the liftgate. 3. Closely inspect the liftgate release switch and harness connector pins for signs of water intrusion and/or corrosion. Is any evidence of water intrusion or corrosion present? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Refer to WSM, Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics. b. Yes - Replace the liftgate release switch per WSM, Section 501-14, and install new Pigtail Wiring Kit per Wiring Diagram, Section 5-1. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Switch: > 10-5-1 > Mar > 10 > Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening > Page 6520 100S01A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Liftgate Release Switch And The Wiring Pigtail (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 13412 12 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6521 View 151-21 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6522 C456 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Release Switch Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Service and Repair Liftgate Release Switch LIFTGATE RELEASE SWITCH Removal and Installation 1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. 2. Remove the 4 liftgate trim bezel nuts and remove the bezel from the liftgate. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). - Disconnect the electrical connector. - Using the appropriate tool, press the tabs and remove the liftgate release switch. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Doors, Hood and Trunk > Trunk / Liftgate > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Release Switch > Page 6525 Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Service and Repair Liftgate Release Switch - Liftgate Window LIFTGATE RELEASE SWITCH - LIFTGATE WINDOW Removal and Installation 1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. 2. Remove the 4 liftgate trim bezel nuts and remove the bezel from the liftgate. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). - Disconnect the liftgate window release switch electrical connector. - Using the appropriate tool, press the tabs and remove the liftgate window release switch. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair COWL PANEL GRILLE Removal and Installation 1. Remove the 2 wiper pivot arms nuts. - To install, tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft). 2. Remove the LH and RH wiper pivot arms. 3. Remove the LH and RH cowl end cap pushpin retainers. 4. Remove the cowl end caps. 5. Release the cowl panel grille from the retaining clips and remove the cowl panel grille. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Adjust the wiper pivot arms. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Exterior Moulding / Trim > License Plate Frame > Component Information > Service and Repair License Plate Frame: Service and Repair LICENSE PLATE HOUSING Removal and Installation 1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. 2. Disconnect the license plate housing electrical connector. 3. Remove the license plate housing retaining nuts (4 required). 4. Release the license plate housing from the push clips and remove the license plate housing from the liftgate. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Service and Repair Front Fender Liner: Service and Repair FENDER SPLASH SHIELD Exploded View Removal and Installation 1. Remove the 3 fender splash shield bolts. - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 2. Remove the 7 fender splash shield pin-type retainers. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Fender > Front Fender > Front Fender Liner > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 6538 3. Remove the 6 fender splash shield screws. - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 4. Remove the fender splash shield. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Body / Frame Mount Bushing > Component Information > Description and Operation Body / Frame Mount Bushing: Description and Operation FRAME ASSEMBLY Front Subframe The front subframe is bolted to the body and is used to: aid in structural support. - provide mounting surfaces for the front suspension control arms. - provide a mounting point for the engine isolators. - provide the mounting surface for the steering gear. - provide the mounting surface for the sway bar. Rear Subframe The rear subframe is bolted to the body and is used to: aid in structural support. - provide mounting surfaces for the rear suspension control arms. - provide mounting surfaces for the rear differential (all-wheel drive [AWD]). Welding Precautions The correct equipment and settings must be used when welding mild or high strength steel. Metal inert gas (MIG) and resistance spot welding are the preferred methods. Surfaces must be clean and free of foreign materials. - The correct protective clothing should always be worn. - Adequate ventilation must be provided to avoid accumulation of poisonous gases. - A test weld should always be carried out on a test sample. - Follow equipment manufacturer's prescribed procedures and equipment settings for the type of weld being used. - Disconnect the battery ground cable from the battery. - On Hybrid vehicles, depower the high voltage traction battery system. Refer to Hybrid Drive Systems. - Disconnect on-vehicle modules and protect them from possible heat damage and electrical currents when welding. - Corrosion protection needs to be restored whenever it is necessary to sand or grind through painted surfaces or Ecoat, or when bare metal repairs are carried out. Refer to Restoring Corrosion Protection Following Repair. Underbody misalignment can affect front and rear wheel alignment, the operation of the suspension parts and drivetrain operation. Window glass cracks, door and window opening concerns, and air or water leaks at the doors are often caused by incorrectly tightened bolts and body misalignment. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Front Subframe: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6552 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6553 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Front Subframe: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6559 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6560 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6561 Front Subframe: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6562 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6563 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6564 MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6565 (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe: > Page 6566 Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6567 Front Subframe: Description and Operation FRONT SUBFRAME The front subframe is bolted to the body and is used to: - aid in structural support. - provide mounting surfaces for the front suspension control arms. - provide a mounting point for the engine isolators. - provide the mounting surface for the steering gear. - provide the mounting surface for the sway bar. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6568 Front Subframe: Service and Repair SUBFRAME - FRONT Special Tool(s) Removal and Installation NOTE: Escape All-Wheel Drive (AWD) shown, all other vehicles similar. Escape All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Shown (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6569 Escape All-Wheel Drive (AWD) Shown (Part 2) NOTE: Escape and Mariner only. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6570 Escape And Mariner Only NOTE: Escape Hybrid only. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6571 Escape Hybrid Only All vehicles NOTICE: Suspension and subframe fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital parts and systems and their failure can result in major service expense. A new part with the same part number must be installed if installation becomes necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6572 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Turn the wheels to the straight ahead position and remove the key. Hybrid vehicles 3. Disconnect the high-voltage traction battery. For additional information, refer to Hybrid Drive Systems. 4. Remove the rear transmission insulator and retainer. All vehicles 5. Remove the front tires. 6. NOTICE: - Do not reuse the Constant Velocity (CV) joint bolts and washers. Install new bolts and washers or damage to the vehicle may occur. - Do not reuse the bolts and cap straps for the center U-joint. Install new bolts and cap straps or damage to the vehicle may occur. NOTE: Index-mark the front driveshaft to the center bearing. Remove the front driveshaft, if equipped. Remove the 6 front driveshaft-to-transfer case bolts and washers. Discard the bolts and washers. To install, tighten to 37 Nm (27 lb-ft). - Remove the 4 U-joint cap strap bolts and 2 cap straps and remove the front driveshaft. Discard the U-joint cap strap bolts and cap straps. To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). 7. Remove the 4 bolts (2 each side) and the lateral support crossmember. - To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). 8. Remove the exhaust flexible pipe (2.3L) or the dual converter Y-pipe (3.0L). 9. Remove the 6 bolts and the scrivet from the LH splash shield and remove the splash shield. 10. Remove the engine support crossmember front insulator bolt. - To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6573 11. Remove the 2 engine support crossmember bolts. - To install, tighten to 90 Nm (66 lb-ft). Hybrid vehicles only 12. Remove the 2 bolts from the lower transmission insulator and retainer bracket. All vehicles 13. Remove the nut and the engine support crossmember. Discard the nut. - To install, tighten to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft). All vehicles except hybrid 14. Remove the rear transaxle support isolator through bolt. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6574 - To install, tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). All vehicles 15. Remove the power steering coupler bolt. Discard the bolt. - To install, tighten to 63Nm (46 lb-ft). 16. Remove the 2 outer tie-rod end nuts. Discard the nuts. - To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft). 17. Using the Tie-Rod End Remover, separate the tie rod from the wheel knuckle. 18. NOTE: Use the hex-holding fixture to prevent the ball stud from turning while removing and installing the stabilizer link nut. Remove the 2 lower stabilizer bar link nuts. Discard the nuts. To install, tighten to 55 Nm (41 lb-ft). 19. Remove the 2 lower control arm ball joint pinch bolt nuts and pinch bolts. Discard the nuts and the bolts. - To install, tighten to 63 Nm (46 lb-ft). 20. Using a suitable lift, support the front subframe. 21. NOTE: - Do not allow the front subframe rear bolts to come out of the lower control arm bushing. - When installing the front subframe rear bolts, make sure both of the front subframe rear bolts are fully engaged in their cage nuts before tightening to specification. Loosen the 2 front subframe rear bolts. To install, tighten to 175 Nm (129 lb-ft). 22. Remove the 2 front subframe nuts. - To install, tighten to 150 Nm (111 lb-ft). 23. NOTE: The lower control arm ball joints must be disconnected from the spindles at the same time the subframe is lowered. With an assistant, remove the front subframe. 24. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Transfer the components as necessary. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Front Subframe Mount: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6583 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6584 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Front Subframe Mount: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6590 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6591 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6592 Front Subframe Mount: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6593 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6594 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6595 MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6596 (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Front Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Subframe Mount: > Page 6597 Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Rear Subframe: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6606 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6607 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Rear Subframe: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6613 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6614 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6615 Rear Subframe: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6616 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6617 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6618 MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6619 (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe: > Page 6620 Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6621 Rear Subframe: Description and Operation REAR SUBFRAME The rear subframe is bolted to the body and is used to: - aid in structural support. - provide mounting surfaces for the rear suspension control arms. - provide mounting surfaces for the rear differential (all-wheel drive [AWD]). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6622 Rear Subframe: Service and Repair SUBFRAME - REAR Removal All vehicles 1. NOTICE: Suspension and subframe fasteners are critical parts because they affect performance of vital parts and systems and their failure can result in major service expense. A new part with the same part number must be installed if installation becomes necessary. Do not use a replacement part of lesser quality or substitute design. Torque values must be used as specified during reassembly to make sure of correct retention of these parts. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. Vehicles with all All-Wheel Drive (AWD) 2. Remove the rear axle assembly. All vehicles Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6623 3. Remove the rear stabilizer bar link upper nuts. 4. Remove the 4 bolts and position the 4 rear control arms aside. 5. Remove and discard the exhaust hanger from the subframe. 6. With an assistant, remove the 4 bolts and the rear subframe. Installation All vehicles 1. With an assistant, position the rear subframe and install the bolts. - To install, tighten the rear bolts to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). - To install, tighten the front bolts to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). 2. Install a new exhaust hanger on the subframe. 3. NOTE: The vehicle must be at ride height before tightening the bolts. Position the 4 rear control arms into the subframe. Loosely install the bolts. 4. Install the rear stabilizer bar link upper nuts. - Tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). Vehicles with AWD 5. Install the rear axle assembly. All vehicles 6. Tighten the 4 rear control arms bolts. - Tighten to 115 Nm (85 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6624 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Rear Subframe Mount: Customer Interest Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6633 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6634 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises Rear Subframe Mount: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6640 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > 10-22-8 > Nov > 10 > Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises > Page 6641 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 6642 Rear Subframe Mount: By Symptom Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 6643 (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 6644 Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Technical Service Bulletin # 10-22-8 Date: 101122 Body/Frame - Front/Rear Squeak/Creak Noises TSB 10-22-8 11/22/10 FRONT AND/OR REAR CREAK/SQUEAK NOISE DUE TO SUBFRAME LOCATING PINS CONTACTING VEHICLE BODY FORD: 2001-2011 Escape Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 6645 MERCURY: 2005-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-1-9 to update the Service Procedure and model years. ISSUE Some 2001-2011 Escape and 2005-2011 Mariner vehicles may exhibit an underbody creak or squeak when accelerating from a stop or when braking to a stop. Depending on model year, the noise may appear to come from the front or rear underbody or suspension area. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 2001-2007 Only - Front - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the two (2) front subframe nuts and the two (2) front subframe attachment bolts. NOTE DO NOT ALLOW THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS TO COME OUT OF THE LOWER CONTROL ARM BUSHING. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 2) NOTE THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 6646 (3) Tighten the front subframe front nuts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. NOTE WHEN INSTALLING THE FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS, ENSURE BOTH FRONT SUBFRAME REAR BOLTS ARE FULLY ENGAGED IN THEIR CAGE NUTS BEFORE TIGHTENING TO SPECIFICATION. (4) Tighten the front subframe rear attachment bolts. Refer to WSM Section 502-00. (5) Adjust front caster, camber, and toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. 2001-2011 - Rear - Creak/Squeak Noise: 1. Attach chassis ears to the areas indicated. Can the noise be isolated to one or both of these specific locations? (Figure 3) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Proceed to WSM, Section 100-04. b. Yes - Suspect the subframe locating pins are contacting the locating holes of the vehicle body. (1) Loosen the four (4) rear subframe bolts. (2) Reposition the subframe to center the locating pins so there is no longer contact with any edge of the locating hole. (Figure 4) NOTE NOTE: THE PINS ARE MORE LIKELY TO CONTACT THE REARWARD SIDE OF THE HOLES. THEREFORE, THE SUBFRAME ASSEMBLY WILL MOST LIKELY NEED TO BE MOVED FORWARD IN VEHICLE. (3) Tighten the four (4) subframe bolts. Refer to WSM, Section 502-00. (4) Adjust rear toe. Refer to WSM, Section 204-00. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102208A 2001-2011 Escape, 0.6 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Diagnose Using Chassis Ears, And Road Test. Can Be Claimed With B, C And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208B 2001-20007 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2007 Mariner, 2005-2007 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2007 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Front Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Can Be Claimed With Operation A, C, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208C 2001-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Adjust Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Frame > Subframe > Rear Subframe Mount > System Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Subframe Mount: > Page 6647 Rear Sub Frame Following Service Procedure. Must Be Claimed With Operation A, B, And D (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) 102208D 2001-2011 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. 2005-2011 Mariner, 2005-2011 Escape Hybrid, 2006-2011 Mariner Hybrid: Includes Time To Check And Adjust Camber, Caster, And Toe Can Be Claimed With A, B, And C (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 5035 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Grille: > 09-26-12 > Jan > 10 > Body - Front Grille Chrome Peeling Grille: Customer Interest Body - Front Grille Chrome Peeling TSB 09-26-12 01/04/10 FRONT GRILLE - CHROME PEEL FORD: 2008-2009 Escape ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Escape Hybrid vehicles may exhibit chrome peel appearance at the base of the front grille stanchion. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE If vehicle exhibits front grille chrome peel at the base of the stanchions, as specified in photo, with no evidence of impact damage, then replace the affected front grille(s). (Figure 1) Replace Only The Radiator Grille: 1. Remove the two (2) upper grille bolts. (Figure 2-A) 2. Slightly tip the grille outward and remove the two (2) lower inside grille bolts. (Figure 2-B) 3. Slightly tip the grille outward and remove the two (2) lower grille speed nuts that attach the grille to the front bumper cover. (Figure 2-C) 4. Release the three (3) lower grille retainers from the upper bumper cover. (Figure 2-D) 5. Remove the radiator grille. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Grille: > 09-26-12 > Jan > 10 > Body - Front Grille Chrome Peeling > Page 6656 6. Install the new radiator grille and attach the three (3) lower grille retainers to the upper bumper cover by pushing the grille into the upper bumper cover. Make sure that all three (3) grille retainers make an audible click when attaching to the upper bumper cover. 7. Hand-tighten the two (2) lower grille speed nuts until the speed nuts are snug. 8. Hand-tighten the two (2) lower inside grille bolts until the bolts are snug. 9. Tighten the two (2) upper grille bolts to 71 lb-in (8 N.m). Replace Both Grilles Or Bumper Grille Only: 1. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-19 to remove the bumper cover. 2. Refer to WSM, Section 501-08 to remove radiator grille from bumper cover. 3. Place the bumper cover assembly on a clean work bench on top of a fender cover to prevent scratching of the paint. 4. Push out the six top retainer snap tabs. (Figure 3-A) 5. Remove the passenger side push pin using a flat screwdriver. (Figure 3-B) 6. Position aside the wiring harness. 7. Push out the three (3) lower valance panel retainer tabs. (Figure 3-C) 8. Using end cutting pliers or equivalent, cut off the four (4) retainer snap tabs while being careful not to damage the outer bumper cover. (Figures 3-D and 4) NOTE DO NOT ATTEMPT TO PRY BUMPER SLOTS OPEN TO RELEASE THE TABS AS THIS WILL RESULT IN VISIBLE DAMAGE TO THE OUTER BUMPER COVER. 9. Remove and discard old bumper grille from bumper cover. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Grille: > 09-26-12 > Jan > 10 > Body - Front Grille Chrome Peeling > Page 6657 10. Position the new bumper grille on the bumper cover slots and push in to engage the snap tabs. 11. Install the lower push pin. 12. Re-position wiring harness. 13. Install radiator grille to bumper cover, refer to WSM, Section 501-08. 14. Install the bumper cover assembly, refer to WSM section 501-19. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092612A 2008-2009 Escape: 0.3 Hr. Replace The Radiator Grille Following The Service Procedure (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 092612B 2008-2009 Escape: 0.8 Hr. Replace The Bumper Grille And The Radiator Grille If Necessary Following The Service Procedure Includes Time To Remove And Install The Bumper Cover (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 8150 34 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Grille: > 07-8-5 > Apr > 07 > Body - Wind Noise/Whistle at 45-65 MPH Grille: Customer Interest Body - Wind Noise/Whistle at 45-65 MPH TSB 07-8-5 04/30/07 WIND NOISE/WHISTLE - GRILLE FORD: 2008 Escape Hybrid, Escape ISSUE Some 2008 Escape vehicles may exhibit a wind noise or whistle sound at highway speeds. This noise is noticeable at speeds from 45-65 MPH (72-105 Km/h). ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE To diagnose, use tape to seal the gap between the hood and the top of the grille. If the noise is eliminated, use the following service procedure to correct the issue. 1. Acquire two (2) service bolts. These bolts do not have a shoulder like the ones being removed. 2. Open the hood, and remove the two (2) top grille attachment bolts. 3. Use a small round file to remove 3/32" (2 mm) from the front portion of the grille attachment holes, to allow grille to be pushed further rearwards. 4. After enlarging the holes, insert the new bolts and while pushing backwards on grille, torque the bolts in a two step sequence. Failure to use a torque wrench may result in damage to the grill. a. Torque bolts to 53 lb-in (6 N.m). b. Afler bolts are torqued to 53 lb-in (6 N.m), reset the torque wrench to 62 lb-in (7 N.m), and continue tightening the bolt until torque wrench clicks. 5. Ensure the grille corners are not touching the headlamps. If grille is touching the headlamp, move grille forward by a slight amount so that there is approximately 1/32" (1 mm) clearance between the grille and headlamp. Tighten using steps 4a and b. 6. Test drive the vehicle to verify the whistle has been eliminated. If the whistle is still present, repeat steps 3-7. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 070805A 2008 Escape/Escape 0.6 Hr. Hybrid: Follow Service Procedure To Adjust Grille Includes Time For Road Test To Diagnose (Do Not Use With 8200A) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Grille: > 07-8-5 > Apr > 07 > Body - Wind Noise/Whistle at 45-65 MPH > Page 6662 8200 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Grille: > 09-26-12 > Jan > 10 > Body - Front Grille Chrome Peeling Grille: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front Grille Chrome Peeling TSB 09-26-12 01/04/10 FRONT GRILLE - CHROME PEEL FORD: 2008-2009 Escape ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Escape Hybrid vehicles may exhibit chrome peel appearance at the base of the front grille stanchion. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE If vehicle exhibits front grille chrome peel at the base of the stanchions, as specified in photo, with no evidence of impact damage, then replace the affected front grille(s). (Figure 1) Replace Only The Radiator Grille: 1. Remove the two (2) upper grille bolts. (Figure 2-A) 2. Slightly tip the grille outward and remove the two (2) lower inside grille bolts. (Figure 2-B) 3. Slightly tip the grille outward and remove the two (2) lower grille speed nuts that attach the grille to the front bumper cover. (Figure 2-C) 4. Release the three (3) lower grille retainers from the upper bumper cover. (Figure 2-D) 5. Remove the radiator grille. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Grille: > 09-26-12 > Jan > 10 > Body - Front Grille Chrome Peeling > Page 6668 6. Install the new radiator grille and attach the three (3) lower grille retainers to the upper bumper cover by pushing the grille into the upper bumper cover. Make sure that all three (3) grille retainers make an audible click when attaching to the upper bumper cover. 7. Hand-tighten the two (2) lower grille speed nuts until the speed nuts are snug. 8. Hand-tighten the two (2) lower inside grille bolts until the bolts are snug. 9. Tighten the two (2) upper grille bolts to 71 lb-in (8 N.m). Replace Both Grilles Or Bumper Grille Only: 1. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-19 to remove the bumper cover. 2. Refer to WSM, Section 501-08 to remove radiator grille from bumper cover. 3. Place the bumper cover assembly on a clean work bench on top of a fender cover to prevent scratching of the paint. 4. Push out the six top retainer snap tabs. (Figure 3-A) 5. Remove the passenger side push pin using a flat screwdriver. (Figure 3-B) 6. Position aside the wiring harness. 7. Push out the three (3) lower valance panel retainer tabs. (Figure 3-C) 8. Using end cutting pliers or equivalent, cut off the four (4) retainer snap tabs while being careful not to damage the outer bumper cover. (Figures 3-D and 4) NOTE DO NOT ATTEMPT TO PRY BUMPER SLOTS OPEN TO RELEASE THE TABS AS THIS WILL RESULT IN VISIBLE DAMAGE TO THE OUTER BUMPER COVER. 9. Remove and discard old bumper grille from bumper cover. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Grille: > 09-26-12 > Jan > 10 > Body - Front Grille Chrome Peeling > Page 6669 10. Position the new bumper grille on the bumper cover slots and push in to engage the snap tabs. 11. Install the lower push pin. 12. Re-position wiring harness. 13. Install radiator grille to bumper cover, refer to WSM, Section 501-08. 14. Install the bumper cover assembly, refer to WSM section 501-19. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 092612A 2008-2009 Escape: 0.3 Hr. Replace The Radiator Grille Following The Service Procedure (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 092612B 2008-2009 Escape: 0.8 Hr. Replace The Bumper Grille And The Radiator Grille If Necessary Following The Service Procedure Includes Time To Remove And Install The Bumper Cover (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 8150 34 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Grille: > 07-8-5 > Apr > 07 > Body - Wind Noise/Whistle at 45-65 MPH Grille: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Wind Noise/Whistle at 45-65 MPH TSB 07-8-5 04/30/07 WIND NOISE/WHISTLE - GRILLE FORD: 2008 Escape Hybrid, Escape ISSUE Some 2008 Escape vehicles may exhibit a wind noise or whistle sound at highway speeds. This noise is noticeable at speeds from 45-65 MPH (72-105 Km/h). ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE To diagnose, use tape to seal the gap between the hood and the top of the grille. If the noise is eliminated, use the following service procedure to correct the issue. 1. Acquire two (2) service bolts. These bolts do not have a shoulder like the ones being removed. 2. Open the hood, and remove the two (2) top grille attachment bolts. 3. Use a small round file to remove 3/32" (2 mm) from the front portion of the grille attachment holes, to allow grille to be pushed further rearwards. 4. After enlarging the holes, insert the new bolts and while pushing backwards on grille, torque the bolts in a two step sequence. Failure to use a torque wrench may result in damage to the grill. a. Torque bolts to 53 lb-in (6 N.m). b. Afler bolts are torqued to 53 lb-in (6 N.m), reset the torque wrench to 62 lb-in (7 N.m), and continue tightening the bolt until torque wrench clicks. 5. Ensure the grille corners are not touching the headlamps. If grille is touching the headlamp, move grille forward by a slight amount so that there is approximately 1/32" (1 mm) clearance between the grille and headlamp. Tighten using steps 4a and b. 6. Test drive the vehicle to verify the whistle has been eliminated. If the whistle is still present, repeat steps 3-7. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 070805A 2008 Escape/Escape 0.6 Hr. Hybrid: Follow Service Procedure To Adjust Grille Includes Time For Road Test To Diagnose (Do Not Use With 8200A) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Grille: > 07-8-5 > Apr > 07 > Body - Wind Noise/Whistle at 45-65 MPH > Page 6674 8200 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6675 Grille: Service and Repair RADIATOR GRILLE Removal and Installation 1. Remove the front bumper cover. 2. Remove the 2 radiator grille-to-fascia screws. 3. Remove the 2 radiator grille pinch nuts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Grille > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 6676 4. Release the 3 radiator grille retaining clips and remove the radiator grille from the fascia. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair Console: Service and Repair CONSOLE - FLOOR Exploded View Instrument Panel (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6681 Instrument Panel (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6682 Removal and Installation Vehicles with a manual transmission 1. Depress the parking brake pedal. 2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL. All vehicles 3. Position the seats forward and remove the 2 floor console rear bolts. - To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 4. Position the seats rearward. Vehicles with an automatic transmission 5. Remove the transmission selector lever trim ring. Vehicles with a manual transmission Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Console > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6683 6. Disengage the shifter boot trim ring. All vehicles 7. Remove the floor console storage bin. 8. Remove the floor console finish panel. - If equipped, disconnect the electrical connectors. 9. Remove the 8 floor console bolts and remove the floor console. 10. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) DEPOWERING AND REPOWERING Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Depowering Procedure WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. - Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the safety canopy and cause serious personal injury or death. - To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 3. At the smart power distribution junction box (SPDJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover and the restraints control module (RCM) fuse 32 (10A) from the SPDJB. 4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Air Bag Systems for location of the RCM and impact sensor(s). To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least 1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an accidental deployment. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Repowering Procedure 1. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON. 2. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SPDJB and install the cover. 3. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Connect the battery ground cable. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6689 4. Prove out the supplemental restraint system (SRS) as follows: Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag indicator will: fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) from the restraints control module using a scan tool. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6690 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) DEACTIVATION AND REACTIVATION Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Deactivation WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. - To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 3. At the smart power distribution junction box (SPDJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover and the RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SPDJB. 4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition OFF. 6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Air Bag Systems for location of the RCM and impact sensor(s). To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least 1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an accidental deployment. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 7. Using a 3-mm Allen wrench or a suitable tool, place it in the driver air bag module release hole on the underside of the steering wheel. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6691 8. CAUTION: During driver air bag module removal, make sure all 3 driver air bag module hooks are released from the steering wheel wire clip. Failure to do so may cause damage to the driver air bag module and or the steering wheel. NOTE: The driver air bag module is removed for clarity. Position the 3-mm Allen wrench or suitable tool against the wire clip and push inward disengaging the wire clip from the 3 driver air bag module hooks. 9. Disconnect the horn electrical connector. Then disconnect the 2 driver air bag module electrical connectors and remove the driver air bag module. 10. Open and lower the glove compartment door. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6692 11. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts. 12. CAUTION: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure. NOTE: Use care when removing the passenger air bag module from the instrument panel (I/P). The passenger air bag module can drop down during removal and the passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the I/P. Through the glove compartment opening, release the passenger air bag module deployment door clips while pushing the passenger air bag module out of the I/P. 13. Remove the passenger air bag module. 1 Disconnect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors. 2 Detach the wire harness routing clip and remove the passenger air bag module. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6693 14. From under the rear of the passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector. 15. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. 1 Separate the weatherstrip. 2 Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel. 3 Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel. 16. Disconnect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector. 17. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel. 1 Separate the weatherstrip. 2 Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel. 3 Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6694 18. Disconnect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector. 19. From under the rear of the driver seat, slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector. 20. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SPDJB. 21. Connect the battery ground cable. Reactivation 1. Remove RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SPDJB. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 3. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip. 4. Connect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6695 5. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel. 1 Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel. 2 Install the D-pillar trim panel. 3 Install the weatherstrip. 6. Connect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector. 7. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. 1 Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel. 2 Install the D-pillar trim panel. 3 Install the weatherstrip. 8. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6696 clip. 9. CAUTION: - During passenger air bag module installation, make sure the passenger air bag module wire harness routing clip is attached to the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness damage. - The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component and/or connector damage. Install the passenger air bag module. 1 Connect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors. 2 Attach the wire harness routing clip. 10. CAUTION: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure. NOTE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door clips are fully seated into the instrument panel. - Use care when installing the passenger air bag module in the instrument panel (I/P). The passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the I/P. Position the passenger air bag module and seat the passenger air bag module deployment door clips into the I/P. 11. Install the 2 passenger air bag module bolts. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 6697 12. Close the glove compartment door. 13. CAUTION: The driver air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the driver air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the driver air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the driver air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in component damage and/or connector damage. Install the driver air bag module electrical connectors fully into the driver air bag module. Then connect the horn electrical connector. 14. NOTE: - Make sure the driver air bag module wiring harness is routed down and away from the driver air bag module hooks during installation. - Audible clicks will be heard when the 3 wire clips are seated in the 3 driver air bag module hooks. Align the driver air bag module hooks to the steering wheel and, while pushing inward, seat the 3 driver air bag module hooks to the steering wheel wire clip. When the 3 driver air bag module hooks are seated in place, gently pull outward at the corners of the driver air bag module to make sure that the 3 hooks are fully seated. There should also be an even gap between the driver air bag module trim cover and the steering wheel. Check the driver air bag module and trim cover for correct movement when applying the horn. 15. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON. 16. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SPDJB and install the cover. 17. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Connect the battery ground cable. 18. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will: fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous DTCs from the restraints control module using a scan tool. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair Headliner: Service and Repair HEADLINER Removal and Installation 1. Remove the RH and LH A-pillar trim panels. 2. Remove the RH and LH B-pillar trim panels. 3. Remove the RH and LH C-pillar trim panels. 4. Remove the RH and LH D-pillar trim panels. 5. Open the overhead console door. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6701 6. Remove the 2 screws and the overhead console. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 7. Remove the LH and RH sun visors. - If equipped, disconnect the electrical connectors. 8. NOTE: Do not fully remove the retaining screws from the sun visor clips. Remove the LH and RH sun visor clips. Partially remove the retaining screws from the sun visor clips. - Pull downward on the sun visor clips to remove them from the headliner. 9. Remove the interior lamp. - Gently pull downwards on the outboard ends of the interior lamp assembly. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 10. Remove the cargo lamp. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 11. Remove the 3 child seat tether anchor covers. 12. Remove the 3 bolts and the child seat tether anchors. - To install, tighten to 22 Nm (16 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Headliner > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6702 13. If equipped, remove the screw and the garment hook. - Open the garment hook screw cover. - Remove the garment hook screw. To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 14. NOTE: When installing the headliner trim ring, it should meet at the rear of the roof opening and have no gaps or overlaps. If equipped, remove the headliner trim ring. 15. Remove the 5 headliner pin-type retainers. 16. Remove the headliner. 17. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Transfer parts as necessary. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pillar Trim Trim Panel: Service and Repair Pillar Trim A-Pillar Trim Panel A-PILLAR TRIM PANEL Exploded View Part 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pillar Trim > Page 6707 Part 2 Removal 1. Position the RH or LH front door weatherstrips aside. 2. Pull inward on the upper A-pillar trim panel to release the A-pillar trim panel retaining clips. 3. NOTE: Remove the A-pillar tether clip from the A-pillar trim panel. Do not remove the A-pillar tether clip from the A-pillar unless a new tether is being installed. Remove the A-pillar tether clip from the A-pillar trim panel. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the base of the A-pillar tether clip. - Apply downward pressure on the screwdriver, sliding the A-pillar tether clip base downwards. 4. Remove the A-pillar trim panel. Installation 1. Install the lower A-pillar trim panel into the instrument panel. 2. WARNING: A new A-pillar trim panel tether must be installed if the tether is damaged or does not fasten correctly. During a side air curtain deployment the A-pillar trim panel tether helps prevent the trim from striking the occupant. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious injury to vehicle occupant(s). Install the A-pillar tether clip base onto the A-pillar trim panel. Position the A-pillar tether clip base into the A-pillar tether holder located on the A-pillar trim panel. - Slide the A-pillar tether clip base upwards into the A-pillar tether holder until the tether is fully seated. 3. CAUTION: The A-pillar trim panel tether must be aligned correctly or damage to the tether will occur. NOTE: The A-pillar trim panel tether clip, located on the A-pillar, installs into the A-pillar trim panel tether base, located on the A-pillar trim panel. Install the A-pillar trim panel onto the A-pillar. 4. Install the RH or LH front door weatherstrips. C-Pillar Trim Panel C-PILLAR TRIM PANEL Exploded View Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pillar Trim > Page 6708 Part 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pillar Trim > Page 6709 Part 2 Removal and Installation 1. NOTE: Inspect the safety belt D-ring cover for damage. If the safety belt D-ring cover does not remain in place, install a new cover. Remove the safety belt guide cover by squeezing the height adjuster buttons and pulling the cover out at the bottom. 2. Remove the safety belt bolt. - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 3. Remove the quarter trim panel. 4. Position the rear door weatherstrip aside. 5. Remove the cover, the bolt and the C-pillar trim panel. - To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pillar Trim > Page 6710 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. B-Pillar Trim Panel B-PILLAR TRIM PANEL Exploded View Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pillar Trim > Page 6711 Part 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pillar Trim > Page 6712 Part 2 Removal and Installation Upper 1. NOTE: Inspect the safety belt D-ring cover for damage. If the safety belt D-ring cover does not remain in place, install a new cover. Remove the safety belt guide cover by squeezing the height adjuster buttons and pulling the cover out at the bottom. 2. Remove the safety belt bolt. - To install, tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). 3. Position the front and rear door weatherstrips aside. 4. NOTE: Lower the adjustable safety belt to access the B-pillar trim panel bolt. Remove the cover, bolt and the upper B-pillar trim panel. To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pillar Trim > Page 6713 Lower 5. Remove the 2 pin-type retainers and the front door scuff plate trim panel. 6. Remove the pin-type retainer and the rear door scuff plate trim panel. 7. Remove the lower B-pillar trim panel. All vehicles 8. To install, reverse the removal procedure. D-Pillar Trim Panel D-PILLAR TRIM PANEL Exploded View Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pillar Trim > Page 6714 Part 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pillar Trim > Page 6715 Part 2 Removal and Installation 1. Remove the quarter trim panel. 2. Remove the D-pillar trim panel. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pillar Trim > Page 6716 Trim Panel: Service and Repair Quarter Trim Panel QUARTER TRIM PANEL Exploded View Part 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Interior Moulding / Trim > Trim Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Pillar Trim > Page 6717 Part 2 Removal and Installation 1. Open the rear door scuff plate trim panel access cover and remove the rear door scuff plate trim panel pin-type retainer. 2. Remove the rear door scuff plate trim panel. 3. Remove the liftgate scuff plate. 4. Position the liftgate weatherstrip aside. 5. If equipped, remove the cargo net hold-down. 6. NOTE: Insert a non-marring tool between the D-pillar trim panel and rear quarter trim panel to release the trim panel. Remove the rear quarter trim panel. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Door Locks > Door Lock Cylinder > Component Information > Service and Repair Door Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair DOOR LOCK CYLINDER Removal and Installation NOTE: Individual door lock cylinders are repaired by discarding the inoperative door lock cylinder and building a new door lock cylinder using the appropriate lock repair package. The lock repair package includes a detailed instruction sheet to build the new door lock cylinder to the current key code of the vehicle. 1. Remove the exterior front door handle reinforcement. 2. Remove the door lock cylinder. 1 Release the clips. 2 Remove the door lock cylinder. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Locations View 151-18 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Locations > Page 6727 C500 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Locations > Page 6728 Keyless Entry Key-Pad: Testing and Inspection KEYLESS ENTRY KEYPAD CODE PROGRAMMING NOTE: Up to 3 codes can be programmed. Once there are 3 programmed codes, any attempt to program additional codes will be unsuccessful. 1. Enter the permanent factory keyless entry keypad code. 2. NOTE: The locks should lock and unlock to indicate programming mode has been entered. Press the 1/2 button within 5 seconds to activate the programming mode. Holding the 1/2 button for more than 2 seconds after activation erases the stored customer codes. 3. Within 5 seconds, enter the new 5-digit keypad code. The doors lock and unlock to confirm the new code is programmed. If the locks do not lock and unlock, the new code programming has not been successful and the procedure must be started from the beginning. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Key-Pad > Component Information > Locations > Page 6729 Keyless Entry Key-Pad: Service and Repair KEYLESS ENTRY KEYPAD Removal and Installation 1. Remove the LH front door trim panel. 2. Position the watershield aside. 3. Remove the RKE keypad retaining clip. 4. Remove the RKE keypad from the door. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter Programming Keyless Entry Transmitter: Testing and Inspection Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter Programming REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER PROGRAMMING NOTE: - This procedure is for programming keyfobs only. Refer to Antitheft and Alarm Systems for integrated keyhead transmitter (IKT) programming. - All remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitters must be programmed at the same time. - Do not apply the brake pedal during this sequencing, as doing so ends the sequence and the transmitters will not be programmed. 1. Electronically unlock the door locks using the door lock control switch. 2. Cycle the ignition switch from the OFF to the RUN position 8 times in rapid succession (within 10 seconds), with the eighth turn ending in RUN. If the module successfully enters program mode, it locks and then unlocks all the doors. 3. NOTE: If no action is taken within 20 seconds after a transmitter has been programmed, the programming sequence ends (the doors lock and unlock to confirm that programming is complete). Within 20 seconds, press any button on the RKE transmitter to be programmed. The doors lock and then unlock to confirm that each RKE transmitter is programmed. Repeat this step for each RKE transmitter. 4. Exiting the programming mode is accomplished if one of the following occurs: - The key transitions to the OFF position. - 20 seconds have passed since entering programming mode or since the last RKE transmitter was programmed. - The maximum number (4) of RKE transmitters have been programmed. 5. Check the operation of the transmitter. If the door locks do not respond for the programmed RKE transmitter(s), wait several seconds and press the button again. If the door locks still fail to respond, refer to Locks, Latches and Entry Systems. (Make sure that no more than the maximum number of RKE transmitters are attempted to be programmed.) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter Programming > Page 6734 Keyless Entry Transmitter: Testing and Inspection Autolock and Horn Chirp Programming AUTOLOCK AND HORN CHIRP PROGRAMMING Autolock Programming Using the Power Door Unlock/Lock Procedure NOTE: The autolock feature can be activated/deactivated independently of the auto-unlock feature. 1. NOTE: Prior to beginning this procedure, make sure that the anti-theft system is not armed, the ignition is in the OFF position, and all the vehicle doors, liftgate and liftgate glass are closed. Close all the doors, the liftgate and the liftgate glass. 2. Confirm that the ignition is in the OFF position. 3. NOTE: Steps 3 through 7 must be carried out within 30 seconds. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON. 4. Press the door lock control switch UNLOCK button 3 times. 5. Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. 6. Press the door lock control switch UNLOCK button 3 times. 7. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON. The horn will chirp once to indicate the system is in the enable/disable mode. 8. Press the door lock control switch UNLOCK button once, then the LOCK button once to toggle the autolock feature ON/OFF. The horn will chirp once to indicate autolock is disabled. If the horn chirps twice (one short and one long chirp), the autolock feature has been enabled. 9. Turn the ignition to the OFF position to exit the enable/disable mode. The horn will chirp once to indicate the procedure is complete. Autolock Programming Using the Keyless Entry Keypad Procedure (If Equipped) 1. Turn the ignition to the OFF position. 2. Close all the doors, the liftgate and the liftgate glass. 3. Enter the 5-digit permanent entry code on the keyless entry keypad. 4. Within 5 seconds of entering the code, press and hold the 3/4 button on the keypad. While holding the 3/4 button, press the 7/8 button. 5. Release the 7/8 button, then release the 3/4 button. The horn will chirp once to indicate autolock is disabled. If the horn chirps twice (chirp followed by a honk), the autolock feature has been enabled. Autolock Programming Using the Message Center Procedure (If Equipped) 1. To disable/enable the autolock feature, select AUTOLOCK [ON] OFF from the SETUP control for the current display mode. 2. Press the RESET control to turn the autolock ON or OFF. Auto-Unlock Programming Using the Power Door Unlock/Lock Procedure NOTE: The auto-unlock feature can be activated/deactivated independently of the autolock feature. 1. NOTE: Prior to beginning this procedure, make sure that the anti-theft system is not armed, the ignition is in the OFF position, and all the vehicle doors, liftgate and liftgate glass are closed. Close all the doors, the liftgate and the liftgate glass. 2. Confirm that the ignition is in the OFF position. 3. NOTE: Steps 3 through 7 must be carried out within 30 seconds. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON. 4. Press the door lock control switch UNLOCK button 3 times. 5. Turn the ignition from ON to OFF. 6. Press the door lock control switch UNLOCK button 3 times. 7. Turn the ignition from OFF to ON. The horn will chirp once to indicate the system is in the enable/disable mode. 8. Press the door lock control switch LOCK button once, then the UNLOCK button once to toggle the auto-unlock feature ON/OFF. The horn will chirp once to indicate auto-unlock is disabled. If the horn chirps twice (one short and one long chirp), the auto-unlock feature has been enabled. 9. Turn the ignition to the OFF position to exit the enable/disable mode. The horn will chirp once to indicate the procedure is complete. Auto-Unlock Programming Using the Keyless Entry Keypad Procedure (If Equipped) 1. Turn the ignition to the OFF position. 2. Close all the doors, the liftgate and the liftgate glass. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter Programming > Page 6735 3. Enter the 5-digit permanent entry code on the keyless entry keypad. 4. Within 5 seconds of entering the code, press and hold the 3/4 button on the keypad. While holding the 3/4 button, press and release the 7/8 button two times. 5. Release the 3/4 button. The horn will chirp once to indicate auto-unlock is disabled. If the horn chirps twice (chirp followed by a honk), the auto-unlock feature has been enabled. Auto-Unlock Programming Using the Message Center Procedure (If Equipped) 1. To disable/enable the auto-unlock feature, select AUTOUNLOCK [ON] OFF from the SETUP control for the current display mode. 2. Press the RESET control to turn the auto-unlock ON or OFF. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Keyless Entry > Keyless Entry Transmitter > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter Programming > Page 6736 Keyless Entry Transmitter: Testing and Inspection Stepped Unlock Programming STEPPED UNLOCK PROGRAMMING 1. With the ignition switch in the OFF position, press the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on the remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitter simultaneously for 4 seconds. The turn signals will flash twice to indicate the mode change. 2. Repeat STEP 1 to enable/disable the stepped unlocking feature. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Right Rear View 151-20 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Locations > Right Rear > Page 6742 View 151-20 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Door Lock Unit Power Door Lock Actuator: Diagrams Door Lock Unit C525 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Door Lock Unit > Page 6745 C609 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Door Lock Unit > Page 6746 Power Door Lock Actuator: Diagrams Door Lock Actuator C704 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Actuator > Component Information > Diagrams > Door Lock Unit > Page 6747 C804 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Driver Side View 151-18 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Driver Side > Page 6752 View 151-19 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Side C505 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Side > Page 6755 C605 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6756 Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Locks > Power Locks > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 6757 Power Door Lock Switch: Service and Repair DOOR LOCK CONTROL SWITCH Removal and Installation 1. Remove the front door trim panel. 2. Release the tabs and remove the door lock control switch. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Element, Mirror > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heated Element: > 10-5-3 > Mar > 10 > Body/Instruments - Exterior Heated Mirror Glass Cracking Heated Element: Customer Interest Body/Instruments - Exterior Heated Mirror Glass Cracking TSB 10-5-3 03/29/10 EXTERIOR HEATED REAR VIEW MIRROR GLASS CRACK WHEN MIRROR DEFROST IS POWERED ON-BUILT ON OR BEFORE 03/31/2009 FORD: 2008-2009 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 03/31/2009 and equipped with heated exterior rear view mirrors may exhibit a glass thermal stress crack when mirror defrost is powered on. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Replace the exterior mirror glass only if there's no evidence of impact damage. (Figure 1) Refer to Workshop Manual, Section 501-09 for removal and installation. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 100503A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Exterior Mirror Glass On One Side (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 100503B 2008-2009 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Exterior Mirror Glass On Both Sides (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Element, Mirror > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Heated Element: > 10-5-3 > Mar > 10 > Body/Instruments - Exterior Heated Mirror Glass Cracking > Page 6767 BASIC PART NO. CODE 17K707 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Element, Mirror > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heated Element: > 10-5-3 > Mar > 10 > Body/Instruments - Exterior Heated Mirror Glass Cracking Heated Element: All Technical Service Bulletins Body/Instruments - Exterior Heated Mirror Glass Cracking TSB 10-5-3 03/29/10 EXTERIOR HEATED REAR VIEW MIRROR GLASS CRACK WHEN MIRROR DEFROST IS POWERED ON-BUILT ON OR BEFORE 03/31/2009 FORD: 2008-2009 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 03/31/2009 and equipped with heated exterior rear view mirrors may exhibit a glass thermal stress crack when mirror defrost is powered on. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Replace the exterior mirror glass only if there's no evidence of impact damage. (Figure 1) Refer to Workshop Manual, Section 501-09 for removal and installation. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 100503A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Exterior Mirror Glass On One Side (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 100503B 2008-2009 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Exterior Mirror Glass On Both Sides (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Heated Element, Mirror > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Heated Element: > 10-5-3 > Mar > 10 > Body/Instruments - Exterior Heated Mirror Glass Cracking > Page 6773 BASIC PART NO. CODE 17K707 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair Power Mirror Motor: Service and Repair EXTERIOR MIRROR MOTOR Removal and Installation 1. Remove the exterior mirror glass. 2. Remove the exterior mirror motor screw. 3. With a flat-blade tool, release the 3 exterior mirror motor tabs. 4. Remove the exterior mirror motor. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-18 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6780 C527 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6781 Power Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6782 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Mirrors > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6783 Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair EXTERIOR MIRROR CONTROL SWITCH Removal and Installation 1. Remove the LH sail panel. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. Remove the exterior mirror control switch. - Press the 2 retaining tabs. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Paint Codes Paint: Application and ID Paint Codes VEHICLE CERTIFICATION (VC) CODES Vehicle Certification (VC) Label Locator The upper portion of the vehicle certification (VC) label contains the manufacturer's name, the month and year of manufacture, the certification statement and the VIN. It also includes gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR). The VC label is located on the left-hand door jamb. The serial number can also be found on the engine block, transmission and frame. If a vehicle requires replacement of the VC label and is 4 years old or less, an authorized dealer must submit the VIN to their respective regional office. The regional office will submit a web form to the assembly plant for the replacement label. Once the label has been printed, a representative from the regional office will deliver the label to the dealer and witness installation on the vehicle. If a vehicle is more than 4 years old and requires a replacement label, the dealer must submit a request to the Department of Motor Vehicles. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Paint Codes > Page 6789 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Paint Codes > Page 6790 Exterior Paint Exterior paint codes may be listed as a 2-part code. The first set of characters identify the primary body color. The second set of characters (if applicable) identify the vehicle accent or 2-tone body color. All colors are base coat/clear coat Exterior Color Codes G2 - Redfire - G9 - Vista Blue - LS - Light Ice Blue Metallic - NH - Light Sage - NZ - Kiwi Green - T8 - Tungsten Silver - T9 - Monterrey/Black Pearl Slate - UA - Ebony - YN - Silver Metallic - YZ - Oxford White Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Paint Codes > Page 6791 Interior Trim Interior trim codes are listed as a 2-part code. The first character identifies the interior trim type. The second character identifies the interior trim color. Interior Trim Type 1 - Base cloth seats - Escape - 2 - High series cloth seats - Escape - 4 - High series cloth seats - Mariner - 5 - Leather seats - Escape - 7 - Leather with suede inserts - Mariner - 8 - Leather seats - Mariner Interior Trim Color 9 - Charcoal - C - Camel - S - Stone Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Paint Codes > Page 6792 Tape/Paint Stripe Tape and paint stripe codes do not apply. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Paint Codes > Page 6793 Paint: Application and ID Paint Code Sticker Location VEHICLE CERTIFICATION (VC) CODES Vehicle Certification (VC) Label Locator The upper portion of the vehicle certification (VC) label contains the manufacturer's name, the month and year of manufacture, the certification statement and the VIN. It also includes gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR). The VC label is located on the left-hand door jamb. The serial number can also be found on the engine block, transmission and frame. If a vehicle requires replacement of the VC label and is 4 years old or less, an authorized dealer must submit the VIN to their respective regional office. The regional office will submit a web form to the assembly plant for the replacement label. Once the label has been printed, a representative from the regional office will deliver the label to the dealer and witness installation on the vehicle. If a vehicle is more than 4 years old and requires a replacement label, the dealer must submit a request to the Department of Motor Vehicles. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Paint, Striping and Decals > Paint > System Information > Application and ID > Paint Codes > Page 6794 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Radiator Support > Component Information > Locations Radiator Support: Locations Front Structure Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Locations > Heated Seats Relay View 151-16 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Locations > Heated Seats Relay > Page 6803 View 151-17 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Relay, Driver C3250 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Relay, Driver > Page 6806 C3251 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heated Seat Relay, Driver Seat Heater Relay: Testing and Inspection Heated Seat Relay, Driver Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Relays and Modules - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heated Seat Relay, Driver > Page 6809 Seat Heater Relay: Testing and Inspection Heated Seat Relay, Passenger Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Service and Repair ROOF OPENING PANEL MOTOR Exploded View Part 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6815 Part 2 Removal and Installation 1. Close the roof opening panel glass. 2. Remove the headliner. 3. Disconnect the electrical connectors. 4. NOTE: Anytime a roof opening panel motor is removed, the cables/mechanisms can experience free-play movement. It is important that the cables do not move. They are timed to be parallel with each other. Remove the roof opening panel motor. 1 Remove the 3 roof opening panel motor screws. 2 Remove the roof opening panel motor. To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-26 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6819 C912 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6820 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard > Component Information > Service and Repair Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard: Service and Repair AIR DEFLECTOR Removal and Installation 1. Position the roof opening panel glass to the full OPEN position. 2. CAUTION: Do not damage the air deflector retaining tabs when releasing the air deflector from the roof opening panel frame. Release the 2 air deflector retaining tabs from the roof opening panel frame. Push the deflector down and towards the RH side to release the LH tab. - Shift the air deflector to the LH side to release the RH side. 3. Lift the front of the air deflector upwards to release the air deflector wire retainer. 4. Remove the air deflector. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Front Drain Hose Sunroof / Moonroof Drain: Service and Repair Roof Opening Panel Front Drain Hose ROOF OPENING PANEL FRONT DRAIN HOSE Exploded View Part 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Front Drain Hose > Page 6828 Part 2 Removal and Installation 1. Remove the headliner. 2. Disconnect the roof opening panel front drain hose at the front body pillar. 3. NOTE: The drain hose body attachment can be accessed from under the instrument panel. Remove the roof opening panel front drain hose. 1 Disconnect the hose from the roof opening panel frame. 2 Remove the roof opening panel front drain hose. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Front Drain Hose > Page 6829 Sunroof / Moonroof Drain: Service and Repair Roof Opening Panel Rear Drain Hose ROOF OPENING PANEL REAR DRAIN HOSE Exploded View Part 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Drain > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Front Drain Hose > Page 6830 Part 2 Removal and Installation 1. Remove the headliner. 2. Disconnect the roof opening panel rear drain hose. 3. Remove the roof opening panel rear drain hose. 1 Disconnect the roof opening panel rear drain hose from the roof opening panel frame. 2 Remove the roof opening panel rear drain hose. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Frame > Component Information > Service and Repair Sunroof / Moonroof Frame: Service and Repair ROOF OPENING PANEL FRAME Exploded View Part 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Frame > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6834 Part 2 Removal and Installation 1. Remove the headliner. 2. Disconnect the 4 roof opening panel drain hoses. 3. Release the wire harness locators. 4. Remove the 8 roof opening panel frame bolts and remove the roof opening panel frame. - To install tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Glass Sunroof / Moonroof Panel: Service and Repair Roof Opening Panel Glass ROOF OPENING PANEL GLASS Exploded View Part 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Glass > Page 6839 Part 2 Removal and Installation 1. Open the roof opening panel to the VENT position. 2. Remove the 4 roof opening panel glass screws and the roof opening panel glass. - To install tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Verify that the roof opening panel is centered and aligned before tightening the bolts. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Glass > Page 6840 Sunroof / Moonroof Panel: Service and Repair Roof Opening Panel Shield ROOF OPENING PANEL SHIELD Exploded View Part 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Roof and Associated Components > Sunroof / Moonroof > Sunroof / Moonroof Panel > Component Information > Service and Repair > Roof Opening Panel Glass > Page 6841 Part 2 Removal and Installation 1. Remove the roof opening panel glass. 2. Remove the 2 roof opening panel drain channel screws and the drain channel. 3. Remove the roof opening panel shield. 1 Disengage the 4 spring-loaded slide locks. 2 Slide the panel up and forward. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Child Seat > Component Information > Description and Operation Child Seat: Description and Operation ATTACHING SAFETY SEATS WITH TETHER STRAPS Some manufacturers make child safety seats that include a tether strap that goes over the back of the vehicle seat and attaches to an anchoring point. Other manufacturers offer the tether strap as an accessory. Contact the manufacturer of the child safety seat for information about ordering a tether strap. Refer to Child Safety Seat Tether Anchor in the Removal and Installation portion or the Owner's Literature for usage information. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations View 151-16 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 6849 C353 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-16 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6853 C352 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 6854 Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement Seat Back: Removal and Replacement Seat Backrest - Front SEAT BACKREST - FRONT Exploded View Seat Backrest - Front (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6859 Seat Backrest - Front (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6860 Seat Cushion - Driver (Part 1) Seat Cushion - Driver (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6861 Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6862 Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger (Part 2) Removal and Installation WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. NOTE: - If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seat back pad, trim cover and side air bag module and nuts must be installed. The seat back frame should be replaced if necessary. - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Remove the front seat. 2. Remove the recliner handle cover by pulling it forward. 3. Remove the outboard front seat side cushion shield. - If removing the outboard passenger seat cushion side shield, remove the screw and slide the shield forward. - Release the rear clip and push forward to release the front clip. - If removing the outboard driver seat side cushion shield, remove the 3 screws. If equipped, disconnect the seat control switch electrical connector. 4. Remove the inboard front seat cushion side shield. - If driver seat, remove the 2 inboard side shield screws. - If passenger seat, remove the screw and slide the side shield forward to release the front hook. 5. Remove the wiring harness tie strap and detach the side air bag wiring harness pin-type retainer from the safety belt buckle pretensioner. 6. Disconnect the side air bag module electrical connector and detach it from the seat track. - Detach the pin-type retainers and wiring harness from the seat cushion. 7. Remove the bolt and position aside the safety belt buckle pretensioner. - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 8. If equipped, disconnect the backrest heater mat electrical connector. - Access the electrical connector by slightly pulling the wiring harness out from the backrest trim cover. 9. CAUTION: Make sure the side air bag module wiring harness is not pinched between the side air bag module and the mounting bracket. Damage to the wire harness may occur. Disconnect the side air bag electrical connector. Route the side air bag wiring harness from between the seat track and cushion frame. 10. Remove the 4 backrest-to-seat track bolts (power seat) or 3 remaining backrest-to-seat track bolts (manual seat) and backrest. - To install, tighten to 45 Nm (33 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6863 11. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Seat Backrest - Rear SEAT BACKREST - REAR Exploded View 60/40 Split Bench (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6864 60/40 Split Bench (Part 2) Seat Backrest - Rear (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6865 Seat Backrest - Rear (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6866 Seat Cushion - Rear Removal NOTE: The RH rear seat backrest (40 percent) must be removed prior to the LH rear seat backrest (60 percent). Both rear seat backrests 1. Position both rear seat cushions forward. 2. Route the safety belt buckles from the elastic straps. 3. Remove the RH outboard backrest-to-floor bolt. LH rear seat backrest Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6867 4. Remove the center safety belt anchor bolt. 5. Remove the LH outboard backrest-to-floor bolt. Both rear seat backrests 6. Release and position both rear backrests downward. 7. Remove the 2 pin-type retainers and position the carpet aside. 8. Remove the bolt cover. 9. Remove the RH outboard backrest-to-floor nut, inboard backrest-to-floor nut and inboard backrest-to-floor bolt. 10. Lift and remove the RH rear seat backrest. LH rear seat backrest 11. Remove the LH outboard backrest-to-floor nut. 12. Lift and remove the LH rear seat backrest. Installation NOTE: The LH rear seat backrest (60 percent) must be installed prior to the RH rear seat backrest (40 percent). - The seat-to-floor fasteners must be tightened in the sequence described in this procedure. LH rear seat backrest 1. Position the LH rear seat backrest in the vehicle. 2. Install the LH outboard backrest-to-floor nut. Do not tighten at this time. RH rear seat backrest 3. Position the RH rear seat backrest in the vehicle. 4. Install the inboard backrest-to-floor nut and inboard backrest-to-floor bolt. - Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 5. Install the bolt cover. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6868 6. Install the RH outboard backrest-to-floor nut. - Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). Both rear seat backrests 7. Tighten the LH outboard backrest-to-floor nut. - Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 8. Position the carpet and install the 2 pin-type retainers. 9. Position upward and latch both rear backrests. 10. Install the LH outboard backrest-to-floor bolt. - Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 11. Install the center safety belt anchor bolt. - Tighten to 48 Nm (35 lb-ft). RH rear seat backrest 12. Install the RH outboard backrest-to-floor bolt. - Tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 13. Route the safety belt buckles through the elastic straps. 14. Position both rear seat cushions in place. - Make sure the safety belts and buckles are accessible to the occupants after installation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6869 Seat Back: Overhaul Seat Backrest - Front SEAT BACKREST - FRONT Part 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6870 Part 2 Disassembly WARNING: Always carry or place a live air bag module with the air bag and deployment door/trim cover/tear seam pointed away from the body. Do not set a live air bag module down with the deployment door/trim cover/tear seam face down. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. - Never probe the electrical connectors on safety belt buckle/retractor pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the safety belt pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. - If the seat side air bag cover has been damaged or separated from its mounting, or if the air bag material has been exposed, install a new seat side air bag module. Never try to repair the seat side air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag deploying incorrectly, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. - Front seat backrest trim covers installed on seats equipped with seat side air bags cannot be repaired. A new trim cover must be installed. Cleaning is permissible. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag module deploying incorrectly and increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTE: If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seat back pad, trim cover and side air bag module and nuts must be installed. The seat back frame should be replaced if necessary. - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - Driver seat shown, passenger similar. All seats 1. Remove the front seat. 2. Remove the seat backrest. 3. Remove the head restraint. - Release the 2 guide locks. 4. Pull outward and remove the 2 head restraint guides. Seats with lumbar adjust 5. Remove the lumbar knob. All seats 6. Release the backrest trim cover J-clip. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6871 7. CAUTION: Use care when separating the seat backrest trim cover from the hook-and-loop strips or the hook-and-loop strips may be torn from the seat backrest foam. Partially invert the backrest trim cover up to the side air bag. Place a hand between the seat backrest trim cover and the seat backrest foam pad and carefully separate the hook-and-loop strips. 8. Release the side air bag module deployment chute J-clip from around the side air bag module. 9. Pull the side air bag module deployment chute and J-clips through opening in the backrest foam pad. 10. Detach the 2 side air bag module wiring harness retainers. 11. Remove the 2 side air bag module nuts and side air bag module. 12. Invert and remove the backrest trim cover. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6872 13. Remove the backrest foam pad. Seats with lumbar adjust 14. Remove the 2 screws and position aside the lumbar adjust control. 15. Release the lumbar support from the backrest frame wires and remove. Assembly WARNING: Before installing the seat side air bag module/deployment chute assembly: Inspect the side air bag module and mounting surfaces for any damage or foreign material. - Remove any foreign material from the mounting surfaces of the deployment chute, the seat backrest frame mounting bracket and the air bag module cavity in the seat backrest foam pad. - Install new parts if damaged. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag deploying incorrectly, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. - Inspect the seat side air bag module and mounting surfaces for any damage or foreign material before installing the seat side air bag module. If any damage is found, install new components. If any foreign material is found, remove it. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag module deploying incorrectly and increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. - If the seat side air bag cover has been damaged or separated from its mounting, or if the air bag material has been exposed, install a new seat side air bag module. Never try to repair the seat side air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag deploying incorrectly, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. CAUTION: Make sure the side air bag module wiring harness is not pinched between the side air bag module and the mounting bracket. Damage to the wire harness may occur. Seats with lumbar adjust 1. Install the lumbar support assembly to the backrest frame wires. 2. Install the lumbar adjust control and 2 screws. All seats 3. Install the side air bag module and 2 nuts to the backrest frame mounting bracket. - Tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 4. Position the side air bag module wiring harness to the backrest frame and attach the retainers. 5. Install the backrest foam pad to the backrest frame. 6. Position and roll the backrest trim cover down the backrest to the side air bag module. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6873 7. WARNING: Check the seat side air bag deployment chute for damage. The deployment chute must not be repaired. If there is any damage to the deployment chute, a new seat back trim cover and deployment chute must be installed as a unit. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag module deploying incorrectly and increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. Feed the side air bag deployment chute and clips back through the opening in the backrest foam pad. 8. WARNING: If the seat side air bag module deployment chute is not correctly positioned and closed, the seat side air bag module may not deploy correctly. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag module deploying incorrectly and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. Install the side air bag module deployment chute and J-clips around the side air bag module and seat backrest frame. 9. Roll the trim cover down the backrest and fasten the hook-and-loop strips. 10. Fasten the backrest J-clip. Seats with lumbar adjust 11. Install the lumbar control knob. All seats 12. Install the seat backrest. 13. Install the seat. Seat Backrest - Rear SEAT BACKREST - REAR Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6874 Part 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6875 Part 2 Disassembly and Assembly Both rear seat backrests 1. Remove the rear seat backrest. 2. Remove the head restraint(s). 3. Remove the 2 screws and the latch cover. 4. Remove the 2 seat latch release cover screws. 5. Remove the seat latch release lever. 1 Detach the latch rod from the seat latch release lever. To aid installation, lock the latch using a flat-blade screwdriver before connecting the latch rod. 2 Remove the seat latch release lever. 6. Release the backrest trim cover J-clip. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6876 7. Unzip the backrest trim cover zipper. 8. NOTE: - The inboard and outboard head restraint guides are not interchangeable. - The head restraint guides incorporate an alignment tab that must be aligned correctly when installed. Squeeze together the tip of each head restraint guide and remove from the backrest frame. Sixty percent seat backrest 9. Remove the 2 screws and the safety belt shield. Both rear seat backrests 10. CAUTION: Use care when separating the seat backrest trim cover from the hook-and-loop strip or the hook-and-loop strip can be torn from the seat backrest foam pad. Separate the hook-and-loop strips and remove the seat backrest trim cover. 11. Remove the backrest foam pad from the backrest frame. Sixty percent seat backrest 12. Release the seat latch cable from the safety belt retractor. - For installation, make sure the rear safety belt retractor is not in the automatic locking retractor (ALR) mode after installation. 13. Remove the 2 nuts and the safety belt guide. - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 14. Remove the rear center safety belt retractor lower nut and the rear center safety belt retractor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Back > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6877 - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). Both rear seat backrests 15. Remove the 2 backrest latch bolts and backrest latch. - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 16. Remove the RH backrest pivot bracket-to-backrest frame bolt and rear seat backrest bracket. - To install, tighten to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft). 17. Remove the LH backrest pivot bracket-to-backrest frame bolt and rear seat backrest bracket. - To install, tighten to 50 Nm (37 lb-ft). 18. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure. - Make sure the safety belts and buckles are accessible to the occupants after installation. - If 60 percent seat, verify the safety belt retractor operates without excessive effort or binding. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Cover: > 09-23-3 > Nov > 09 > Interior - White Stains On Cloth Seat Covers Seat Cover: Customer Interest Interior - White Stains On Cloth Seat Covers TSB 09-23-3 11/30/09 CLOTH SEAT STAINS WITH WHITE RING OUTLINE - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 5/14/2009 (EXCLUDES XLS) FORD: 2008-2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Escape Hybrid vehicles (excludes Mariner) equipped with Cloth seats (excludes XLS) and built on or before 5/14/2009, may exhibit stains with a white ring outline around them. An updated seat cover is now available to reduce this specific type of staining. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Inspect the seat cover stain for a white ring outline. (Figure 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Cover: > 09-23-3 > Nov > 09 > Interior - White Stains On Cloth Seat Covers > Page 6886 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Cover: > 09-23-3 > Nov > 09 > Interior - White Stains On Cloth Seat Covers > Page 6887 2. If the white ring stain is present, then replace the seat cover with latest level part. (Figures 2-3) Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-10 Seating Disassembly and Assembly. NOTE ONLY APPLIES TO STAINS WITH WHITE RING OUTLINE. REFER TO WARRANTY AND POLICY MANUAL FOR ANY OTHER TYPE OF SEAT COVER STAINS. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Cover: > 09-23-3 > Nov > 09 > Interior - White Stains On Cloth Seat Covers > Page 6888 092303A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.9 Hr. Escape Hybrid: Replace The Left Front Seat Cushion Cover (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With D, E, F, G, H, J, Or K) 092303 2008-2009 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. Escape Hybrid: Replace The Right Front Seat Cushion Cover Includes Time To Reset The Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With D, E, F, G, H, J, Or K) 092303C 2008-2009 Escape, 1.6 Hrs. Escape Hybrid: Replace Both Front Seat Cushion Covers Includes Time To Reset The Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With D, E, F, G, H, J, Or K) 092303D 2008-2009 Escape, 0.7 Hr. Escape Hybrid: Replace One Front Seat Back Cover (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A, B, C, F, G, H, J, Or K) 092303E 2008-2009 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Escape Hybrid: Replace Both Front Seat Back Covers (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A, B, C, F, G, H, J, Or K) 092303F 2008-2009 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Escape Hybrid: Replace One Rear Seat Cushion Cover (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With D, E, H, J, Or K) 092303G 2008-2009 Escape, 0.4 Hr. Escape Hybrid: Replace Both Rear Seat Cushion Covers (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With D, E, H, J, Or K) 092303H 2008-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr. Escape Hybrid: Replace The Right Rear Seat Back Cover (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Seat Cover: > 09-23-3 > Nov > 09 > Interior - White Stains On Cloth Seat Covers > Page 6889 With A, B, C, E, F, G) 092303J 2008-2009 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Escape Hybrid: Replace The Left Rear Seat Back Covers (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A, B, C, D, E, F, And G) 092303K 2008-2009 Escape, 1.2 Hrs. Escape Hybrid: Replace Both Rear Seat Back Covers (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A, B, C, D, F, And G) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7862901 D4 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Cover: > 09-23-3 > Nov > 09 > Interior - White Stains On Cloth Seat Covers Seat Cover: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - White Stains On Cloth Seat Covers TSB 09-23-3 11/30/09 CLOTH SEAT STAINS WITH WHITE RING OUTLINE - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 5/14/2009 (EXCLUDES XLS) FORD: 2008-2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Escape Hybrid vehicles (excludes Mariner) equipped with Cloth seats (excludes XLS) and built on or before 5/14/2009, may exhibit stains with a white ring outline around them. An updated seat cover is now available to reduce this specific type of staining. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Inspect the seat cover stain for a white ring outline. (Figure 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Cover: > 09-23-3 > Nov > 09 > Interior - White Stains On Cloth Seat Covers > Page 6895 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Cover: > 09-23-3 > Nov > 09 > Interior - White Stains On Cloth Seat Covers > Page 6896 2. If the white ring stain is present, then replace the seat cover with latest level part. (Figures 2-3) Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-10 Seating Disassembly and Assembly. NOTE ONLY APPLIES TO STAINS WITH WHITE RING OUTLINE. REFER TO WARRANTY AND POLICY MANUAL FOR ANY OTHER TYPE OF SEAT COVER STAINS. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Cover: > 09-23-3 > Nov > 09 > Interior - White Stains On Cloth Seat Covers > Page 6897 092303A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.9 Hr. Escape Hybrid: Replace The Left Front Seat Cushion Cover (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With D, E, F, G, H, J, Or K) 092303 2008-2009 Escape, 1.1 Hrs. Escape Hybrid: Replace The Right Front Seat Cushion Cover Includes Time To Reset The Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With D, E, F, G, H, J, Or K) 092303C 2008-2009 Escape, 1.6 Hrs. Escape Hybrid: Replace Both Front Seat Cushion Covers Includes Time To Reset The Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With D, E, F, G, H, J, Or K) 092303D 2008-2009 Escape, 0.7 Hr. Escape Hybrid: Replace One Front Seat Back Cover (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A, B, C, F, G, H, J, Or K) 092303E 2008-2009 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Escape Hybrid: Replace Both Front Seat Back Covers (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A, B, C, F, G, H, J, Or K) 092303F 2008-2009 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Escape Hybrid: Replace One Rear Seat Cushion Cover (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With D, E, H, J, Or K) 092303G 2008-2009 Escape, 0.4 Hr. Escape Hybrid: Replace Both Rear Seat Cushion Covers (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With D, E, H, J, Or K) 092303H 2008-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr. Escape Hybrid: Replace The Right Rear Seat Back Cover (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Seat Cover: > 09-23-3 > Nov > 09 > Interior - White Stains On Cloth Seat Covers > Page 6898 With A, B, C, E, F, G) 092303J 2008-2009 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Escape Hybrid: Replace The Left Rear Seat Back Covers (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A, B, C, D, E, F, And G) 092303K 2008-2009 Escape, 1.2 Hrs. Escape Hybrid: Replace Both Rear Seat Back Covers (This Labor Operation Can Be Claimed With A, B, C, D, F, And G) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7862901 D4 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Backrest Cover - Front Seat Cover: Service and Repair Seat Backrest Cover - Front SEAT BACKREST COVER - FRONT Exploded View Seat Backrest - Front (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Backrest Cover - Front > Page 6901 Seat Backrest - Front (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Backrest Cover - Front > Page 6902 Seat Cushion - Driver (Part 1) Seat Cushion - Driver (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Backrest Cover - Front > Page 6903 Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Backrest Cover - Front > Page 6904 Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger (Part 2) Removal and Installation WARNING: - Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. - Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. - If the seat side air bag cover has been damaged or separated from its mounting, or if the air bag material has been exposed, install a new seat side air bag module. Never try to repair the seat side air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag deploying incorrectly, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. - Front seat backrest trim covers installed on seats equipped with seat side air bags cannot be repaired. A new trim cover must be installed. Cleaning is permissible. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag module deploying incorrectly and increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTE: - If a side air bag deployment took place, a new seat back pad, trim cover and side air bag module and nuts must be installed. The seat back frame should be replaced if necessary. - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - Driver seat shown, passenger seat similar. 1. Depower the SRS. 2. Release the 2 locking tabs and remove the head restraint. 3. NOTE: The head restraint guides are not interchangeable. Pull and remove the 2 head restraint guides. 4. If equipped, remove the manual lumbar adjust knob. 5. Release the J-clip at the bottom of the front seat backrest trim cover. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Backrest Cover - Front > Page 6905 6. If equipped, disconnect the backrest heater mat electrical connector and route through the elastic loop in the backrest trim cover. 7. CAUTION: Use care when separating the seat backrest trim cover from the hook-and-loop strip or the hook-and-loop strip can be torn from the seat backrest foam. Partially invert the backrest trim cover up to the side air bag. Place a hand between the seat backrest trim cover and the seat backrest foam pad and carefully separate the hook-and-loop strips. 8. Release the side air bag module deployment chute J-clip from around the side air bag module. 9. WARNING: Check the seat side air bag deployment chute for damage. The deployment chute must not be repaired. If there is any damage to the deployment chute, a new seat back trim cover and deployment chute must be installed as a unit. Failure to follow these instructions may result in the seat side air bag module deploying incorrectly and increase the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. Pull the side air bag module deployment chute and J-clips through the opening in the backrest foam pad. 10. Invert and remove the backrest trim cover. 11. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 12. Repower the SRS. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Backrest Cover - Front > Page 6906 Seat Cover: Service and Repair Seat Cushion Cover - Front SEAT CUSHION COVER - FRONT Exploded View Seat Backrest - Front (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Backrest Cover - Front > Page 6907 Seat Backrest - Front (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Backrest Cover - Front > Page 6908 Seat Cushion - Driver (Part 1) Seat Cushion - Driver (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Backrest Cover - Front > Page 6909 Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Backrest Cover - Front > Page 6910 Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger (Part 2) Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Removal and Installation WARNING: - Never probe the electrical connectors on safety belt buckle/retractor pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the safety belt pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. - Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. CAUTION: - It is necessary to carry out the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system reset when a front passenger seat cushion is disassembled, a new trim cover is installed or an OCS system service kit is installed. A scan tool is used to carry out the OCS system reset command. Failure to follow this instruction may result in system failure and the incorrect operation of the OCS system. - Do not install a new heater mat on a front passenger seat cushion, it is not serviceable separately. If a new cushion heater mat is needed on the front passenger seat, an occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit equipped with a heater mat must be installed. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system. Refer to Air Bag Systems for the OCS removal and installation procedure. NOTE: - Occupant classification sensor (OCS) system components (seat wiring harness, seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor and occupant classification system module [OCSM]) are calibrated to each other and are serviced as an assembly. The OCS system components are not to be installed separately. If a new OCS system, OCS system component or seat cushion foam pad are needed, an OCS system service kit (seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor, seat wiring harness and OCSM) must be installed as an assembly. - To identify between a production OCS system and a OCS system service kit, inspect the OCSM electrical connector. A production OCS system allows the disconnection of the OCSM electrical connector. An OCS system service kit has the electrical connector glued to the module, it cannot and should not be disconnected or altered. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Backrest Cover - Front > Page 6911 - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. All seats 1. Remove the front seat. 2. Remove the front seat cushion. 3. CAUTION: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strips or the hook-and-loop strips may be torn from the seat cushion foam pad. NOTE: If equipped, note heater mat wire harness routing for installation. Release the J-clips and remove the cushion trim cover. Separate the hook-and-loop strips. 4. CAUTION: Inspect the seat cushion pad and seat cushion trim cover for any foreign objects, before installing the seat cushion trim cover to the seat cushion pad. If any foreign objects are found, remove them. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and may cause system failure. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 5. Install the front seat cushion. 6. Install the front seat. If a passenger seat has been serviced, do not prove out the SRS at this time. Passenger seat 7. WARNING: Make sure the front passenger seat repair is complete, the seat and all attached components (head restraint, seat side shield, etc.) are correctly assembled, and the seat is correctly installed to the vehicle before carrying out the System Reset. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. CAUTION: To prevent system failure, the following precautions must be taken before carrying out the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system reset: Make sure the voltage to the occupant classification system module (OCSM) is above 8.0 volts and less than 18.0 volts. - Make sure the OCS system is not at a temperature below 6°C (42°F) or above 36°C (97°F) when initiating the OCS system reset process. If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or hot temperatures, the vehicle must be exposed and kept at a temperature within the limits, 6°C to 36°C (42°F to 97°F) for a minimum of 30 minutes. - Make sure nothing is present on the passenger seat before carrying out the OCS system reset and nothing is placed on the seat during the process. - Make sure a minimum 8-second time period has passed after cycling the ignition switch ON before the carrying out the OCS system reset process. NOTE: If the first attempt to carry out the OCS system reset is unsuccessful, a second attempt must be made. If the second attempt is unsuccessful, a new OCS system service kit must be installed. Carry out the OCS system reset active command. 8. NOTE: The ignition switch must be cycled after the OCS system reset. Cycle the ignition switch from ON to OFF. All seats 9. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an SRS fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will: fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash at a 5Hz rate (RCM not configured). The air bag warning indicator may not illuminate until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Backrest Cover - Front > Page 6912 diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous RCM and OCSM DTCs using a scan tool. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Backrest Cover - Front > Page 6913 Seat Cover: Service and Repair Seat Backrest Cover - Rear SEAT BACKREST COVER - REAR Exploded View 60/40 Split Bench (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Backrest Cover - Front > Page 6914 60/40 Split Bench (Part 2) Seat Backrest - Rear (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Backrest Cover - Front > Page 6915 Seat Backrest - Rear (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Backrest Cover - Front > Page 6916 Seat Cushion - Rear Removal and Installation 1. Remove the rear seat backrest. 2. Remove the head restraint(s). 3. Remove the 2 screws and the latch cover. 4. Remove the 2 seat latch release cover screws. 5. Remove the seat latch release lever. 1 Detach the latch rod from the seat latch release lever. To aid installation, lock the latch using a flat-blade screwdriver before connecting the latch rod. 2 Remove the seat latch release lever. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Backrest Cover - Front > Page 6917 6. Release the backrest trim cover J-clip. 7. Unzip the backrest trim cover zipper. 8. NOTE: - The inboard and outboard head restraint guides are not interchangeable. - The head restraint guides incorporate an alignment tab that must be aligned correctly when installed. Squeeze together the tip of each head restraint guide and remove from the backrest frame. 9. If 60 percent backrest, remove the 2 screws and the safety belt shield. 10. CAUTION: Use care when separating the seat backrest trim cover from the hook-and-loop strip or the hook-and-loop strip can be torn from the seat backrest foam pad. Separate the hook-and-loop strips and remove the seat backrest trim cover. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Backrest Cover - Front > Page 6918 11. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Make sure the safety belts and buckles are accessible to the occupants after installation. - If 60 percent seat, verify the safety belt retractor operates without excessive effort or binding. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Backrest Cover - Front > Page 6919 Seat Cover: Service and Repair Seat Cushion Cover - Rear SEAT CUSHION COVER - REAR Exploded View 60/40 Split Bench (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Backrest Cover - Front > Page 6920 60/40 Split Bench (Part 2) Seat Backrest - Rear (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Backrest Cover - Front > Page 6921 Seat Backrest - Rear (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Backrest Cover - Front > Page 6922 Seat Cushion - Rear Removal and Installation 1. Remove the rear seat cushion. - Position the seat cushion forward. - Release the locking tab and slide the rear seat cushion outward. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cover > Component Information > Service and Repair > Seat Backrest Cover - Front > Page 6923 2. CAUTION: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strips or the hook-and-loop strips may be torn from the seat cushion foam pad. Unzip the cushion trim cover zipper. 3. Invert and remove the cushion trim cover. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Make sure the safety belts and buckles are accessible to the occupants after installation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement Seat Cushion: Removal and Replacement SEAT CUSHION - FRONT Exploded View Seat Backrest - Front (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6928 Seat Backrest - Front (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6929 Seat Cushion - Driver (Part 1) Seat Cushion - Driver (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6930 Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6931 Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger (Part 2) Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Removal and Installation WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. CAUTION: - It is necessary to carry out the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system reset when a front passenger seat cushion is disassembled, a new trim cover is installed or an OCS system service kit is installed. A scan tool is used to carry out the OCS system reset command. Failure to follow this instruction may result in system failure and the incorrect operation of the OCS system. - Do not install a new heater mat on a front passenger seat cushion, it is not serviceable separately. If a new cushion heater mat is needed on the front passenger seat, an occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit equipped with a heater mat must be installed. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system. Refer to Air Bag Systems for the OCS removal and installation procedure. NOTE: - Occupant classification sensor (OCS) system components (seat wiring harness, seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor and occupant classification system module [OCSM]) are calibrated to each other and are serviced as an assembly. The OCS system components are not to be installed separately. If a new OCS system, OCS system component or seat cushion foam pad are needed, an OCS system service kit (seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor, seat wiring harness and OCSM) must be installed as an assembly. - To identify between a production OCS system and a OCS system service kit, inspect the OCSM electrical connector. A production OCS system allows the disconnection of the OCSM electrical connector. An OCS system service kit has the electrical connector glued to the module, it cannot and should not be disconnected or altered. - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - The passenger seat is equipped with an OCS system and is replaced as an assembly. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6932 All seats 1. Remove the front seat. Passenger seat 2. WARNING: Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete assembly. Never install only part of the kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTE: To identify between a production OCS system and a OCS system service kit, inspect the OCSM electrical connector. A production OCS system allows the disconnection of the OCSM electrical connector. An OCS system service kit has the electrical connector glued to the module, it cannot and should not be disconnected or altered. - If removing a production occupant classification sensor (OCS) system or an OCS system service kit, refer to the appropriate procedure in Air Bag Systems. Disconnect the OCS wiring harness. For an original equipment OCS system, disconnect the OCSM and pressure sensor electrical connectors. - For an OCS system service kit, disconnect the seat wire harness OCS electrical connector from the service part OCS electrical connector. Heated seat 3. If equipped, disconnect the backrest heater mat electrical connector. - Access the electrical connector by slightly pulling the wiring harness out from the backrest trim cover. 4. Disconnect and detach the cushion heater mat electrical connector. 5. Release the locking tab and remove the heated seat relay from the bracket on the cushion frame. All seats 6. NOTE: Note wiring harness routing for installation. Detach all wiring harness pin-type retainers from the seat cushion frame. 7. Remove the 4 front seat track bolts. - To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). 8. Remove the front seat cushion. 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 10. Install the front seat. If a passenger seat has been serviced, do not prove out the SRS at this time. Passenger Seat 11. WARNING: Make sure the front passenger seat repair is complete, the seat and all attached components (head restraint, seat side shield, etc.) are correctly assembled, and the seat is correctly installed to the vehicle before carrying out the System Reset. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. CAUTION: To prevent system failure, the following precautions must be taken before carrying out the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system reset: Make sure the voltage to the occupant classification system module (OCSM) is above 8.0 volts and less than 18.0 volts. - Make sure the OCS system is not at a temperature below 6°C (42°F) or above 36°C (97°F) when initiating the OCS system reset process. If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or hot temperatures, the vehicle must be exposed and kept at a temperature within the limits, 6°C to 36°C (42°F to 97°F) for a minimum of 30 minutes. - Make sure nothing is present on the passenger seat before carrying out the OCS system reset and nothing is placed on the seat during the process. - Make sure a minimum 8-second time period has passed after cycling the ignition switch ON before the carrying out the OCS system reset process. NOTE: If the first attempt to carry out the OCS system reset is unsuccessful, a second attempt must be made. If the second attempt is unsuccessful, a new OCS system service kit must be installed. Carry out the OCS system reset active command. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6933 12. NOTE: The ignition switch must be cycled after the OCS system reset. Cycle the ignition switch from ON to OFF. All seats 13. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an SRS fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will: fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash at a 5Hz rate (RCM not configured). The air bag warning indicator may not illuminate until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous RCM and OCSM DTCs using a scan tool. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6934 Seat Cushion: Overhaul Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger Side SEAT CUSHION - FRONT, PASSENGER SIDE Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6935 Part 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6936 Part 2 Disassembly WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on safety belt buckle/retractor pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the safety belt pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. - Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. CAUTION: It is necessary to carry out the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system reset when a front passenger seat cushion is disassembled, a new trim cover is installed or an OCS system service kit is installed. A scan tool is used to carry out the OCS system reset command. Failure to follow this instruction may result in system failure and the incorrect operation of the OCS system. - Do not install a new heater mat on a front passenger seat cushion, it is not serviceable separately. If a new cushion heater mat is needed on the front passenger seat, an occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit equipped with a heater mat must be installed. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system. Refer to Air Bag Systems for the OCS removal and installation procedure. NOTE: Occupant classification sensor (OCS) system components (seat wiring harness, seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor and occupant classification system module [OCSM]) are calibrated to each other and are serviced as an assembly. The OCS system components are not to be installed separately. If a new OCS system, OCS system component or seat cushion foam pad are needed, an OCS system service kit (seat cushion foam pad, bladder with pressure sensor, seat wiring harness and OCSM) must be installed as an assembly. - To identify between a production OCS system and a OCS system service kit, inspect the OCSM electrical connector. A production OCS system allows the disconnection of the OCSM electrical connector. An OCS system service kit has the electrical connector glued to the module, it cannot and should not be disconnected or altered. - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. All seats 1. Remove the passenger front seat. 2. Remove the seat backrest. 3. Remove the safety belt buckle pretensioner. - Disconnect and detach the safety belt buckle pretensioner and buckle switch electrical connectors from the seat track. - Detach the wiring harness pin-type retainer. - Route the wiring harness from between the seat track and cushion frame. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6937 4. NOTE: Note wiring harness routing for installation. Detach the seat harness electrical connector and wiring harness from the seat track. 5. Remove the 4 front seat track bolts. - To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). Heated seat 6. Disconnect and detach the cushion heater mat electrical connector. 7. Release the locking tab and remove the heated seat relay from the bracket on the cushion frame. 8. Disconnect the heated seat relay electrical connector. Seat with an original equipment OCS system 9. WARNING: Install a new occupant classification sensor (OCS) system service kit as a complete assembly. Never install only part of the kit components. Failure to follow this instruction may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. NOTE: To identify between a production OCS system and a OCS system service kit, inspect the OCSM electrical connector. A production OCS system allows the disconnection of the OCSM electrical connector. An OCS system service kit has the electrical connector glued to the module. It cannot and should not be disconnected or altered. Disconnect the electrical connectors and wiring clips. 1 Disconnect the OCSM electrical connector. 2 Disconnect the pressure sensor electrical connector. Release the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness from the cushion frame. 10. CAUTION: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strips or the hook-and-loop strips may be torn from the seat cushion foam pad. Release the cushion trim cover retainers and remove the cushion trim cover. Separate the hook-and-loop strips. 11. Remove the cushion foam pad. 12. Bend the retaining tab away from the pressure sensor, then slide the pressure off the bracket. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6938 13. CAUTION: Care must be taken to prevent damage to the seat cushion frame when removing the rivets. Remove the 2 rivets and the OCSM. 14. Remove the 2 pin-type retainers from the OCS bladder and seat cushion frame. 15. Feed the OCS hose and pressure sensor through the seat cushion frame opening and remove as an assembly with the bladder. Seat with an OCS system service kit 16. Disconnect the electrical connector and wiring clips. 1 Disconnect the seat wire harness OCSM electrical connector from the service part OCS electrical connector. 2 Release the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness from the cushion frame. 17. CAUTION: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strips or the hook-and-loop strips may be torn from the seat cushion foam pad. Release the cushion trim cover retainers and remove the cushion trim cover. Separate the hook-and-loop strips. 18. Bend the retaining tab away from the pressure sensor, then slide the pressure off the bracket. 19. CAUTION: Care must be taken to prevent damage to the seat cushion frame when removing the rivets. Remove the 2 rivets and detach the OCSM from the seat cushion frame. 20. Remove the OCS. - Pull all the OCS components (hose, pressure sensor, wire harness, OCSM and connectors) through the seat cushion frame opening. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6939 Assembly All seats 1. Bend the retaining tab back on the pressure sensor component bracket. Seat with an original equipment OCS system 2. CAUTION: - Failure to route the seat occupant classification sensor (OCS) components through the correct seat cushion support opening can cause component failure. - While positioning the seat cushion frame and occupant classification sensor (OCS), be careful not to damage any of the components. Failure to do so can result in component failure. Feed the OCS system components (pressure sensor and hose) through the opening in the seat cushion frame. 3. Align the OCS bladder to the seat cushion frame. 4. Install the 2 pin-type retainers to the OCS bladder and seat cushion frame. 5. NOTE: Make sure the pressure sensor hose is not kinked during installation. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6940 Install the pressure sensor onto the seat cushion frame bracket, making sure the retaining tab is completely engaged. When installed correctly, an audible click will be heard and the pressure sensor will not be able to be removed from its bracket without disengaging the retaining tab. 6. Slide the OCSM into the seat cushion frame bracket and install the rivets. - The OCSM must be correctly positioned and securely fastened in place. Failure to do so can set a DTC in the restraints control module (RCM). 7. Position the foam pad to the seat cushion frame. 8. CAUTION: Inspect the seat cushion pad and seat cushion trim cover for any foreign objects, before installing the seat cushion trim cover to the seat cushion pad. If any foreign objects are found, remove them. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and may cause system failure. Install the cushion trim cover and attach the cushion trim cover retainers to the cushion frame. 9. CAUTION: While positioning the seat cushion frame and occupant classification sensor (OCS), be careful not to damage any of the components. Failure to do so can result in component failure. Position the seat cushion to the seat track. 10. Install the 4 seat track bolts. - To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). 11. Connect the electrical connectors and wiring clips. 1 Connect the OCSM electrical connector. 2 Connect the pressure sensor electrical connector. Install the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness to the cushion frame. Seat with OCS service kit 12. CAUTION: - Inspect the occupant classification sensor (OCS) bladder, seat cushion frame and support assembly for any foreign objects, before installing the OCS to the seat cushion frame. If any foreign objects are found, remove them. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the OCS system and may cause system failure. - Failure to route the seat occupant classification sensor (OCS) components through the correct seat cushion support opening can cause component failure. - While positioning the seat cushion frame and occupant classification sensor (OCS), be careful not to damage any of the components. Failure to do so can result in component failure. Feed the OCS system service kit components (hose, pressure sensor, OCSM, wire harness and connectors) through the opening in the seat cushion Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6941 frame. 13. NOTE: - When installing a service part OCS, the seat wire harness pressure sensor electrical connector is not used. - Make sure the pressure sensor hose is not kinked during installation. Install the OCS system components to the seat cushion pan. 1 Install the pressure sensor onto the seat cushion pan bracket, making sure the retaining tab is completely engaged. When installed correctly, an audible click will be heard and the pressure sensor will not be able to be removed from its bracket without disengaging the retaining tab. 2 Slide the OCSM into the seat cushion frame bracket. The OCSM must be correctly positioned and securely fastened in place. Failure to do so can set a DTC in the RCM. 3 Install the rivets. 14. Attach the seat cushion trim cover retainers to the seat cushion frame. 15. CAUTION: While positioning the seat cushion frame and occupant classification sensor (OCS), be careful not to damage any of the components. Failure to do so can result in component failure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6942 Position the seat track to the seat cushion to the seat track. 16. Install the 4 seat track bolts. - To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). 17. NOTE: Do not tie strap any wiring to the OCS bladder and pressure sensor hose. - Connect the seat wire harness OCS system electrical connector to the service part OCS system electrical connector. - Install the 2 wiring clips on the wiring harness to the cushion frame. - Tie strap the unused seat wire harness pressure sensor electrical connector safely aside. - Tie strap all loose wire harnesses and electrical connectors safety aside. Heated seat 18. Install the heated seat relay to the bracket on the cushion frame. 19. Connect the heated seat relay electrical connector. 20. Connect the cushion heater mat electrical connector and attach to the cushion frame. All seats 21. Attach the seat electrical connector and wiring harness to the seat track. 22. Connect the safety belt buckle pretensioner and buckle switch electrical connectors. - Route the wiring harness between the seat track and cushion frame. - Attach the wiring harness pin-type retainer. 23. Install the seat backrest. 24. Install the seat. Do not prove out the SRS at this time. 25. WARNING: Make sure the front passenger seat repair is complete, the seat and all attached components (head restraint, seat side shield, etc.) are correctly assembled, and the seat is correctly installed to the vehicle before carrying out the System Reset. Failure to follow these instructions may result in incorrect operation of the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system and increases the risk of serious personal injury or death in a crash. CAUTION: To prevent system failure, the following precautions must be taken before carrying out the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system reset: Make sure the voltage to the occupant classification system module (OCSM) is above 8.0 volts and less than 18.0 volts. - Make sure the OCS system is not at a temperature below 6°C (42°F) or above 36°C (97°F) when initiating the OCS system reset process. If the vehicle has been exposed to extreme cold or hot temperatures, the vehicle must be exposed and kept at a temperature within the limits, 6°C to 36°C (42°F to 97°F) for a minimum of 30 minutes. - Make sure nothing is present on the passenger seat before carrying out the OCS system reset and nothing is placed on the seat during the process. - Make sure a minimum 8-second time period has passed after cycling the ignition switch ON before the carrying out the OCS system reset process. NOTE: If the first attempt to carry out the OCS system reset is unsuccessful, a second attempt must be made. If the second attempt is unsuccessful, a new OCS system service kit must be installed. Carry out the OCS system reset active command. 26. NOTE: The ignition switch must be cycled after the OCS system reset. Cycle the ignition switch from ON to OFF. 27. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an SRS fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will: fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash at a 5Hz rate (RCM not configured). The air bag warning indicator may not illuminate until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6943 Clear all continuous RCM and OCSM DTCs using a scan tool. Seat Cushion - Rear SEAT CUSHION - REAR Disassembly and Assembly 1. Remove the rear seat cushion. - Position the seat cushion forward. - Release the locking tab and slide the rear seat cushion outward. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6944 2. CAUTION: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strips or the hook-and-loop strips may be torn from the seat cushion foam pad. Unzip the cushion trim cover zipper. 3. Invert and remove the cushion trim cover. 4. Remove the 2 bolts and the cushion pivot upper link. - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 5. Remove the 2 cushion hinge floor bracket bolts and cushion support-to-floor bracket. - To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 6. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure. Seat Cushion - Driver SEAT CUSHION - DRIVER Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6945 Part 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Cushion > Component Information > Service and Repair > Removal and Replacement > Page 6946 Part 2 Disassembly and Assembly WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on safety belt buckle/retractor pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the safety belt pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. - Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Remove the front seat. 2. Remove the seat backrest. 3. Remove the safety belt buckle pretensioner. - Disconnect and detach the safety belt buckle pretensioner and buckle switch electrical connectors from the seat track. - Detach the wiring harness pin-type retainer. - Route the wiring harness from between the seat track and cushion frame. 4. Disconnect the electrical connector(s). - Disconnect the seat position sensor electrical connector. - If equipped, disconnect the power seat track electrical connector and detach the wiring harness. 5. Remove the 4 bolts and seat track. - To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). 6. If equipped, disconnect the cushion heater mat electrical connector. 7. CAUTION: Use care when separating the seat cushion trim cover from the hook-and-loop strips or the hook-and-loop strips may be torn from the seat cushion foam pad. NOTE: If equipped, note heater mat wire harness routing for installation. Release the trim cover retainers and remove the cushion trim cover. Separate the hook-and-loop strips. 8. Remove the cushion foam pad. 9. Release the locking tab and remove the heated seat relay from the bracket on the cushion frame. - Disconnect the relay electrical connector. 10. To assemble, reverse the disassembly procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Seat Heater: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6951 Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4 "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and relays are identified. Fuse and Relay Numbering and Naming. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Power Distribution Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6952 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information C904 Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6953 disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location Charts. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery set. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing lose clothing. Symbols Symbols (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6954 Symbols (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6955 Symbols (Part 3) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6956 Symbols (Part 4) Symbols (Part 5) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6957 Seat Heater: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6958 Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6959 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6960 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. 3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6961 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6962 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6963 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6964 Seat Heater: Connector Views C3283 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6965 C3284 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6966 Seat Heater: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 119-1 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 6967 Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Locations > Heated Seats Relay View 151-16 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Locations > Heated Seats Relay > Page 6972 View 151-17 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Relay, Driver C3250 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Diagrams > Heated Seat Relay, Driver > Page 6975 C3251 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heated Seat Relay, Driver Seat Heater Relay: Testing and Inspection Heated Seat Relay, Driver Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Heated Seat Relay, Driver > Page 6978 Seat Heater Relay: Testing and Inspection Heated Seat Relay, Passenger Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair SEAT CONTROL SWITCH Exploded View Seat Backrest - Front (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6982 Seat Backrest - Front (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6983 Seat Cushion - Driver (Part 1) Seat Cushion - Driver (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6984 Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6985 Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger (Part 2) Removal and Installation 1. Remove the recliner handle cover. 2. Remove the seat control switch knob. 3. Remove the 3 screws and the outboard front seat side cushion shield. - Disconnect the seat control switch electrical connector. 4. Remove the seat control switch. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair Seat Track: Service and Repair SEAT TRACK Exploded View Seat Backrest - Front (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6989 Seat Backrest - Front (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6990 Seat Cushion - Driver (Part 1) Seat Cushion - Driver (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6991 Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Seats > Seat Track > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 6992 Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger (Part 2) Removal and Installation WARNING: - Never probe the electrical connectors on safety belt buckle/retractor pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the safety belt pretensioners or adaptive load limiting retractors, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. - Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. NOTE: - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Remove the front seat. 2. Remove the front seat backrest. 3. Remove the safety belt buckle pretensioner. - Disconnect and detach the safety belt buckle pretensioner and buckle switch electrical connectors from the seat track. - Detach the wiring harness pin-type retainer. - Route the wiring harness from between the seat track and cushion frame. 4. NOTE: Note wiring harness routing for installation. Disconnect the electrical connectors, detach the wiring harness from the seat track. If driver seat, disconnect the seat position sensor electrical connector. - If equipped, disconnect the power seat motor electrical connector. - Detach the seat harness electrical connector from the seat track. 5. Remove the 4 front seat track bolts. - To install, tighten to 23 Nm (17 lb-ft). 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Transfer components as necessary. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Driver Side View 151-18 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Locations > Driver Side > Page 6998 View 151-19 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Side C505 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Side > Page 7001 C605 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7002 Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Door Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7003 Power Door Lock Switch: Service and Repair DOOR LOCK CONTROL SWITCH Removal and Installation 1. Remove the front door trim panel. 2. Release the tabs and remove the door lock control switch. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-18 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7007 C527 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7008 Power Mirror Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7009 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Mirror Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7010 Power Mirror Switch: Service and Repair EXTERIOR MIRROR CONTROL SWITCH Removal and Installation 1. Remove the LH sail panel. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. Remove the exterior mirror control switch. - Press the 2 retaining tabs. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-16 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7014 C352 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Seat Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7015 Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Power Trunk / Liftgate Lock Switch > Component Information > Diagrams C4039 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair Seat Heater Switch: Service and Repair SEAT CONTROL SWITCH Exploded View Seat Backrest - Front (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7022 Seat Backrest - Front (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7023 Seat Cushion - Driver (Part 1) Seat Cushion - Driver (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7024 Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Seat Heater Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7025 Seat Cushion - Front, Passenger (Part 2) Removal and Installation 1. Remove the recliner handle cover. 2. Remove the seat control switch knob. 3. Remove the 3 screws and the outboard front seat side cushion shield. - Disconnect the seat control switch electrical connector. 4. Remove the seat control switch. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-26 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7029 C912 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Sunroof / Moonroof Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7030 Sunroof / Moonroof Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-21 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Ajar Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7034 C478 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Switch: > 10-5-1 > Mar > 10 > Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Customer Interest Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening TSB 10-5-1 03/29/10 LIFTGATE OPENING UN-COMMANDED OR NOT OPENING WHEN COMMANDED WHEN PARKED - INTERMITTENT FORD: 2008-2009 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/31/2008 may exhibit the liftgate opening un-commanded, or not opening when commanded while vehicle is parked. This may be due to water intrusion into the switch connector causing corrosion at the liftgate rear switch. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics. 1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05. 2. Remove the four (4) liftgate trim bezel nuts and remove the bezel from the liftgate. 3. Closely inspect the liftgate release switch and harness connector pins for signs of water intrusion and/or corrosion. Is any evidence of water intrusion or corrosion present? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Refer to WSM, Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics. b. Yes - Replace the liftgate release switch per WSM, Section 501-14, and install new Pigtail Wiring Kit per Wiring Diagram, Section 5-1. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Trunk / Liftgate Switch: > 10-5-1 > Mar > 10 > Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening > Page 7043 100S01A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Liftgate Release Switch And The Wiring Pigtail (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 13412 12 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Switch: > 10-5-1 > Mar > 10 > Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening Trunk / Liftgate Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening TSB 10-5-1 03/29/10 LIFTGATE OPENING UN-COMMANDED OR NOT OPENING WHEN COMMANDED WHEN PARKED - INTERMITTENT FORD: 2008-2009 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/31/2008 may exhibit the liftgate opening un-commanded, or not opening when commanded while vehicle is parked. This may be due to water intrusion into the switch connector causing corrosion at the liftgate rear switch. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics. 1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. Refer to WSM, Section 501-05. 2. Remove the four (4) liftgate trim bezel nuts and remove the bezel from the liftgate. 3. Closely inspect the liftgate release switch and harness connector pins for signs of water intrusion and/or corrosion. Is any evidence of water intrusion or corrosion present? (Figure 1) a. No - Do not continue with this procedure. Refer to WSM, Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics. b. Yes - Replace the liftgate release switch per WSM, Section 501-14, and install new Pigtail Wiring Kit per Wiring Diagram, Section 5-1. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Trunk / Liftgate Switch: > 10-5-1 > Mar > 10 > Body - Uncommanded Liftgate Opening > Page 7049 100S01A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.6 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Liftgate Release Switch And The Wiring Pigtail (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 13412 12 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7050 View 151-21 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7051 C456 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Release Switch Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Service and Repair Liftgate Release Switch LIFTGATE RELEASE SWITCH Removal and Installation 1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. 2. Remove the 4 liftgate trim bezel nuts and remove the bezel from the liftgate. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). - Disconnect the electrical connector. - Using the appropriate tool, press the tabs and remove the liftgate release switch. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sensors and Switches - Body and Frame > Trunk / Liftgate Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Liftgate Release Switch > Page 7054 Trunk / Liftgate Switch: Service and Repair Liftgate Release Switch - Liftgate Window LIFTGATE RELEASE SWITCH - LIFTGATE WINDOW Removal and Installation 1. Remove the liftgate trim panel. 2. Remove the 4 liftgate trim bezel nuts and remove the bezel from the liftgate. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). - Disconnect the liftgate window release switch electrical connector. - Using the appropriate tool, press the tabs and remove the liftgate window release switch. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sound Proofing / Insulation > Component Information > Description and Operation Sound Proofing / Insulation: Description and Operation SOUND DEADENERS AND INSULATORS WARNING: Always refer to Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) when handling chemicals and wear protective equipment as directed. Examples may include but are not limited to respirators and chemically resistant gloves. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTICE: - Mastic is made of a combustible material and should be removed prior to carrying out welding procedures to the area. Heat zones from welding near the mastic can cause the mastic material to burn. - Corrosion protection must be restored to the area AFTER the mastic material is applied. Corrosion protection products may be wax based and loss of adhesion may occur. NOTE: - To restore the vehicle to design intent, missing or damaged sound deadeners and insulators should be installed with the correct service replacement component. - The following illustrations serve as a reference to indicate mastic patch (butyl pad) locations. Additional insulators and sound deadeners are used beyond those indicated in the illustration. Sound Deadeners and Insulators Floor Pan Sound Deadeners NOTE: To restore the vehicle to design intent, missing or damaged sound deadeners and insulators should be installed with the correct service replacement component. Sound deadeners in this illustration all use base part number 99P30A3. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Sound Proofing / Insulation > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7058 Floor Pan Sound Deadeners Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Spare Tire Carrier > Component Information > Service and Repair Spare Tire Carrier: Service and Repair Spare Tire Carrier Spare Tire Carrier Removal 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. For additional information, refer to Maintenance/Service and Repair. 2. NOTE: Do not use air tools to lower the spare wheel and tire assembly. Using a suitable tool, lower and remove the spare wheel and tire assembly. 3. Remove the shaft retaining pin on the lift assembly. 4. Remove the shaft. ^ Push the shaft rearward from under the vehicle. 5. Remove the 3 lift retaining bolts. 6. Remove the lift assembly from the vehicle underbody. Installation 1. Install the lift assembly to the vehicle underbody. ^ Align the hook on the back of the lift assembly with the notch in the vehicle underbody. 2. NOTE: Do not tighten the bolts. Loosely install the 3 lift retaining bolts. 3. Install the shaft. ^ Insert the shaft through the rear bumper cover. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Spare Tire Carrier > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7062 4. Install the shaft retaining pin on the lift assembly. 5. Tighten the 3 lift retaining bolts. ^ Tighten to 20 Nm (15 lb-ft). 6. Position the spare wheel and tire assembly on the lift. 7. NOTE: Do not use air tools to raise the spare wheel and tire assembly into position. Using a suitable tool, raise the spare wheel and tire assembly. 8. After raising the spare wheel and tire assembly into position, continue to rotate the shaft using a suitable tool until the internal clutch in the lift assembly is overridden at least one time. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Unibody > Cowl > Cowl Moulding / Trim > System Information > Service and Repair Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair COWL PANEL GRILLE Removal and Installation 1. Remove the 2 wiper pivot arms nuts. - To install, tighten to 35 Nm (26 lb-ft). 2. Remove the LH and RH wiper pivot arms. 3. Remove the LH and RH cowl end cap pushpin retainers. 4. Remove the cowl end caps. 5. Release the cowl panel grille from the retaining clips and remove the cowl panel grille. 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Adjust the wiper pivot arms. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched TSB 11-2-15 02/28/11 WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/13/2010 FORD: 2008-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List. ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Fully lower the affected window glass. 2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11 (Exploded View). 3. Fully raise the window glass. 4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of the window glass. Is the distance within specification range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)? a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5. b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5. 5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present? a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 7077 With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors 110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7821453 41 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 7078 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed TSB 10-25-4 12/23/10 FRONT EXTERIOR DOOR GLASS WEATHERSTRIP DEFORMED OR LIFTING - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 517/2010 12/23/10 FORD: 008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/7/2010 may exhibit the front exterior door glass weatherstrip deformed and/or lifting up from the door flange. This may be due to a lack of retention between the door glass weatherstrip and flange. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove affected front exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11 Glass, Frames, and Mechanisms Exploded View. 2. Apply a strip of 3M(TM) Safety-Walk(TM) Slip-Resistant General Purpose Tapes, or similar (obtained locally) to the outer flange surface at the center of the door. Cut grip tape to approximately 2.5" X .5" (64 mm X 13 mm). (Figure 1) 3. Install new revised exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference WSM, Section 501-11 Glass, Frames, and Mechanisms - Exploded View. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102504A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Replace One Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed > Page 7083 Exterior Door Glass Weather Strip Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102504B 2008-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Replace Both Exterior Door Glass Weather Strips Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7821453 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched TSB 11-2-15 02/28/11 WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/13/2010 FORD: 2008-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List. ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Fully lower the affected window glass. 2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11 (Exploded View). 3. Fully raise the window glass. 4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of the window glass. Is the distance within specification range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)? a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5. b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5. 5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present? a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 7089 With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors 110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7821453 41 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 7090 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed TSB 10-25-4 12/23/10 FRONT EXTERIOR DOOR GLASS WEATHERSTRIP DEFORMED OR LIFTING - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 517/2010 12/23/10 FORD: 008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/7/2010 may exhibit the front exterior door glass weatherstrip deformed and/or lifting up from the door flange. This may be due to a lack of retention between the door glass weatherstrip and flange. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove affected front exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11 Glass, Frames, and Mechanisms Exploded View. 2. Apply a strip of 3M(TM) Safety-Walk(TM) Slip-Resistant General Purpose Tapes, or similar (obtained locally) to the outer flange surface at the center of the door. Cut grip tape to approximately 2.5" X .5" (64 mm X 13 mm). (Figure 1) 3. Install new revised exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference WSM, Section 501-11 Glass, Frames, and Mechanisms - Exploded View. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102504A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Replace One Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed > Page 7095 Exterior Door Glass Weather Strip Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102504B 2008-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Replace Both Exterior Door Glass Weather Strips Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7821453 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7096 Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair DOOR GLASS TOP RUN - FRONT Exploded View Removal and Installation 1. Remove the front door window glass. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7097 2. Remove the front door interior sail panel. - If equipped, disconnect the speaker electrical connector. 3. Remove the 2 front door glass top run bolts. - To install tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 4. Remove the front door glass top run. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched TSB 11-2-15 02/28/11 WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/13/2010 FORD: 2008-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List. ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Fully lower the affected window glass. 2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11 (Exploded View). 3. Fully raise the window glass. 4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of the window glass. Is the distance within specification range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)? a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5. b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5. 5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present? a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 7106 With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors 110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7821453 41 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 7107 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched TSB 11-2-15 02/28/11 WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/13/2010 FORD: 2008-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List. ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Fully lower the affected window glass. 2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11 (Exploded View). 3. Fully raise the window glass. 4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of the window glass. Is the distance within specification range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)? a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5. b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5. 5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present? a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 7113 With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors 110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7821453 41 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 7114 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7115 Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair DOOR GLASS TOP RUN - REAR Exploded View Part 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Body and Frame > Weatherstrip > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7116 Part 2 Removal and Installation 1. Remove the rear door window regulator. 2. Position the rear door window glass to the full down position. 3. Remove the 2 screws and the rear door exterior sail panel. 4. Remove the interior door glass weatherstrip. 5. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. 6. Remove the rear door glass top run bolt. - To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 7. Position the rear door window glass down and forward. 8. Remove the rear door glass top run. 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations > Deactivator Switch View 151-22 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations > Deactivator Switch > Page 7122 View 151-22 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Diagrams > Deactivator Switch C277 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Diagrams > Deactivator Switch > Page 7125 C278 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7126 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch Typical BPP Switch The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal to the PCM indicating that the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and is mounted on the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as follows: to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake pedal is applied. - to the antilock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM. - to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ABS module interprets the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Brake Pedal Switch (BPS)/Brake Deactivator Switch The BPS, also called the brake deactivator switch, is for vehicle speed control deactivation. A normally closed switch supplies battery positive voltage (B+) to the PCM when the brake pedal is not applied. When the brake pedal is applied, the normally closed switch opens and power is removed from the PCM. On some applications the normally closed BPS, along with the normally open BPP switch, are used for a brake rationality test within the PCM. The PCM misfire monitor profile learn function may be disabled if a brake switch concern occurs. If one or both brake pedal inputs to the PCM is not changing states when they were expected to, a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is set by the PCM strategy. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7127 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Service and Repair SPEED CONTROL DEACTIVATOR SWITCH Removal and Installation CAUTION: Do not service the brake pedal, brake booster, or master cylinder without first removing the speed control deactivator switch. Do not press or pull on the brake pedal when installing or removing the speed control deactivator switch otherwise misadjustment or damage to the switch may occur. Do not install the speed control deactivator switch without the brake pedal arm secured to the brake booster push rod. 1. Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. Rotate the speed control deactivator switch 45 degrees counterclockwise to disengage it from the bracket. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Description and Operation Clutch Switch: Description and Operation CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION (CPP) SWITCH Typical Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch The CPP switch is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch pedal position. The PCM provides a low current voltage on the CPP circuit. When the CPP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low through the SIG RTN circuit. The CPP input to the PCM is used to detect a reduction in engine load. The PCM uses the load information for mass air flow and fuel calculations. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo > Component Information > Locations View 151-2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo > Component Information > Locations > Page 7134 C122 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair Cruise Control Servo Cable: Service and Repair SPEED CONTROL CABLE 2.3L Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7138 3.0L Removal 1. Remove the accelerator cable snow shield. 2. Disconnect the speed control cable from the throttle lever and accelerator cable bracket. 3. Press the locking tab and rotate the speed control cable cap to remove. 4. Disconnect the speed control cable from the speed control actuator pulley. 1 Gently push the retaining spring. 2 Disconnect the speed control cable slug from the speed control actuator pulley. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7139 Installation 1. Insert the speed control cable slug into the speed control actuator pulley slot. 1 Gently push the retaining spring. 2 Insert the speed control cable slug completely into the speed control actuator pulley slot. 2. CAUTION: - It is necessary to squarely seat the speed control cable cap and seal around the speed control actuator pulley. - Incorrect wrapping of the speed control cable around the speed control actuator pulley may result in high idle conditions. NOTE: Make sure the rubber seal is fully seated onto the speed control cable cap. Align the speed control cable cap tabs with the slots in the speed control actuator housing. 3. Rotate the speed control cable cap until the locking tab engages. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Servo Cable > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7140 4. Connect the speed control cable to the throttle lever and accelerator cable bracket. 5. Install the accelerator cable snow shield. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Speed Control Actuator Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Speed Control Actuator SPEED CONTROL ACTUATOR Removal 1. Press the locking tab and rotate the speed control cable cap to remove. 2. Disconnect the speed control cable from the speed control actuator pulley. 1 Gently push the retaining spring. 2 Disconnect the speed control cable slug from the speed control actuator pulley. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Speed Control Actuator > Page 7145 3. Remove the 3 speed control actuator screws and the speed control actuator. - Disconnect the electrical connector. Installation CAUTION: A new speed control cable must be installed. 1. Install the speed control actuator and the 3 speed control actuator screws. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). - Connect the electrical connector. 2. Insert the speed control cable slug into the speed control actuator pulley slot. 1 Gently push the retaining spring. 2 Insert the speed control cable slug completely into the speed control actuator pulley slot. 3. CAUTION: - It is necessary to squarely seat the speed control cable cap and seal around the speed control actuator pulley. - Incorrect wrapping of the speed control cable around the speed control actuator pulley may result in high idle conditions. NOTE: Make sure the rubber seal is fully seated onto the speed control cable cap. Align the speed control cable cap tabs with the slots in the speed control actuator housing. 4. Rotate the speed control cable cap until the locking tab engages. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Speed Control Actuator > Page 7146 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Speed Control Actuator > Page 7147 Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Speed Control Switch SPEED CONTROL SWITCH Escape and Mariner Shown, Hybrid Similar Removal and Installation 1. Remove the speed control switch by pulling the switch toward the rear of the vehicle. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations > Deactivator Switch View 151-22 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Locations > Deactivator Switch > Page 7153 View 151-22 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Diagrams > Deactivator Switch C277 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Diagrams > Deactivator Switch > Page 7156 C278 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7157 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation Brake Pedal Position (BPP) Switch Typical BPP Switch The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal to the PCM indicating that the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and is mounted on the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as follows: to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake pedal is applied. - to the antilock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM. - to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ABS module interprets the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Brake Pedal Switch (BPS)/Brake Deactivator Switch The BPS, also called the brake deactivator switch, is for vehicle speed control deactivation. A normally closed switch supplies battery positive voltage (B+) to the PCM when the brake pedal is not applied. When the brake pedal is applied, the normally closed switch opens and power is removed from the PCM. On some applications the normally closed BPS, along with the normally open BPP switch, are used for a brake rationality test within the PCM. The PCM misfire monitor profile learn function may be disabled if a brake switch concern occurs. If one or both brake pedal inputs to the PCM is not changing states when they were expected to, a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is set by the PCM strategy. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Brake Switch (Cruise Control) > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7158 Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Service and Repair SPEED CONTROL DEACTIVATOR SWITCH Removal and Installation CAUTION: Do not service the brake pedal, brake booster, or master cylinder without first removing the speed control deactivator switch. Do not press or pull on the brake pedal when installing or removing the speed control deactivator switch otherwise misadjustment or damage to the switch may occur. Do not install the speed control deactivator switch without the brake pedal arm secured to the brake booster push rod. 1. Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. Rotate the speed control deactivator switch 45 degrees counterclockwise to disengage it from the bracket. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Clutch Switch, Cruise Control > Component Information > Description and Operation Clutch Switch: Description and Operation CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION (CPP) SWITCH Typical Clutch Pedal Position (CPP) Switch The CPP switch is an input to the PCM indicating the clutch pedal position. The PCM provides a low current voltage on the CPP circuit. When the CPP switch is closed, this voltage is pulled low through the SIG RTN circuit. The CPP input to the PCM is used to detect a reduction in engine load. The PCM uses the load information for mass air flow and fuel calculations. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Speed Control Actuator Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Speed Control Actuator SPEED CONTROL ACTUATOR Removal 1. Press the locking tab and rotate the speed control cable cap to remove. 2. Disconnect the speed control cable from the speed control actuator pulley. 1 Gently push the retaining spring. 2 Disconnect the speed control cable slug from the speed control actuator pulley. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Speed Control Actuator > Page 7166 3. Remove the 3 speed control actuator screws and the speed control actuator. - Disconnect the electrical connector. Installation CAUTION: A new speed control cable must be installed. 1. Install the speed control actuator and the 3 speed control actuator screws. - Tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). - Connect the electrical connector. 2. Insert the speed control cable slug into the speed control actuator pulley slot. 1 Gently push the retaining spring. 2 Insert the speed control cable slug completely into the speed control actuator pulley slot. 3. CAUTION: - It is necessary to squarely seat the speed control cable cap and seal around the speed control actuator pulley. - Incorrect wrapping of the speed control cable around the speed control actuator pulley may result in high idle conditions. NOTE: Make sure the rubber seal is fully seated onto the speed control cable cap. Align the speed control cable cap tabs with the slots in the speed control actuator housing. 4. Rotate the speed control cable cap until the locking tab engages. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Speed Control Actuator > Page 7167 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Cruise Control > Sensors and Switches - Cruise Control > Cruise Control Switch > Component Information > Service and Repair > Speed Control Actuator > Page 7168 Cruise Control Switch: Service and Repair Speed Control Switch SPEED CONTROL SWITCH Escape and Mariner Shown, Hybrid Similar Removal and Installation 1. Remove the speed control switch by pulling the switch toward the rear of the vehicle. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Air Bag Deactivation Indicator > Component Information > Service and Repair Air Bag Deactivation Indicator: Service and Repair PASSENGER AIR BAG DEACTIVATION (PAD) INDICATOR Removal and Installation WARNING: To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. NOTE: - The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a SRS fault. - Repair is made by installing a new part only. If the new part does not correct the condition, install the original part and carry out the diagnostic procedure again. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. - The passenger air bag deactivation indicator is part of the upper I/P center finish panel. 1. Depower the SRS. 2. NOTE: The passenger air bag module is not shown for clarity. Open and lower the glove compartment door to gain access to the passenger airbag deactivation (PAD) indicator electrical connector. Disconnect the PAD indicator electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Air Bag Deactivation Indicator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7173 3. Pull out to release the retaining clips and detach the I/P upper center finish panel. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. 5. Repower the SRS. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Cigarette Lighter: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7178 Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4 "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and relays are identified. Fuse and Relay Numbering and Naming. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Power Distribution Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7179 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information C904 Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7180 disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location Charts. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery set. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing lose clothing. Symbols Symbols (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7181 Symbols (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7182 Symbols (Part 3) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7183 Symbols (Part 4) Symbols (Part 5) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7184 Cigarette Lighter: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7185 Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7186 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7187 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. 3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7188 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7189 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7190 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7191 Cigarette Lighter: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 44-1 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Cigarette Lighter > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7192 Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Diagrams C909 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7196 Compass: Description and Operation ELECTRONIC COMPASS The compass display is contained in the front display interface module (FDIM). For removal and installation information for the FDIM, refer to Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc. The compass module is attached to the interior rearview mirror and is replaced separately from the mirror. The MODE button that allows the driver to operate the calibration and zone setting procedures is located on the top left of the compass module. The vehicle heading is displayed as a 1 or 2 character display located in the lower left hand side of the FDIM and indicates the current direction of the vehicle (N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W, or NW). The compass continuously recalibrates due to changes in the magnetic field and remains accurate during most driving conditions. The compass display is on with the key in the ON or START positions. When the key is first turned to the ON or START position, there is a momentary delay of approximately 6 seconds before the compass display illuminates. If the battery saver has been activated and the key is turned to ON or START, the momentary delay before the compass display illuminates is approximately 3 seconds. The compass display will turn off as soon as the key is turned to the OFF or ACC positions. Compass Accuracy Driving near power lines, or driving in the area of large iron or steel structures can temporarily change the compass heading. If the compass remains inaccurate after driving near such objects, calibrate the compass. Most geographic areas (zones) have a magnetic north compass point that varies slightly from the northerly direction on maps. This variation is 4 degrees between the adjacent zones and becomes noticeable as the vehicle crosses multiple zones. A correct zone setting eliminates the error. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Compass: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION 1. Verify the customer concern. 2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage. Visual Inspection Chart 3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding to the next step. 4. NOTE: Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release. If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the data link connector (DLC). 5. NOTE: The vehicle communication module (VCM) prove-out confirms power and ground from the DLC are provided to the VCM. If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM: Check the VCM connection to the vehicle. - Check the scan tool connection to the VCM. - Refer to Information Bus (Module Communications Network), No Power To The Scan Tool, to diagnose no communication with the scan tool. 6. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle: - Verify the ignition key is in the ON position. - Verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle. - Refer to Information Bus (Module Communications Network) to diagnose no response from the PCM. 7. Carry out the network test. - If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules, refer to Information Bus (Module Communications Network). - If the network test passes, retrieve and record the continuous memory DTCs. 8. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the front display interface module (FDIM) and the instrument cluster. 9. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to DTC Charts. For all other DTCs, refer to Body Control Systems (Multifunction Electronic Control Module). See: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions 10. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7199 Compass: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions B1318-B2477 / U0155 U2050-U2051 B1317-B2477 / U2013 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7200 Symptom Chart Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7201 Compass: Pinpoint Tests Test A: The Compass Is Inoperative PINPOINT TEST A: THE COMPASS IS INOPERATIVE Normal Operation The compass display (located in the front display interface module [FDIM]) receives battery voltage from the smart junction box (SJB) fuse 14 (10A) through circuit SBP14 (BN/RD). Ground for the compass display (FDIM) is supplied through circuit GD114 (BK/BU). The compass module (located on the interior rear view mirror) provides vehicle directional inputs to the instrument cluster, which sends the compass information to the FDIM over the medium speed controller area network (MS-CAN). The FDIM will display the compass direction according to the information that has been provided by the compass module to the instrument cluster. B2097 (Compass Module Failure) - sets when the instrument cluster attempts a self-test of the compass module and its associated circuits and a failure results. U0155 (Lost Communication With Instrument Panel Cluster [IC] Control Module) - sets when the FDIM does not receive any network communication messages over the MS-CAN network between the instrument cluster and the FDIM. U2013 (Compass Module is Not Responding) - sets when the instrument cluster does not receive any communications from the compass module. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuses - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Compass module - FDIM (compass display) - Instrument cluster A1-A3 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7202 A3-A6 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7203 A6-A8 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7204 A9 Test B: The Compass Is Inaccurate PINPOINT TEST B: THE COMPASS IS INACCURATE Normal Operation The compass display (located in the front display interface module [FDIM]) receives battery voltage from the smart junction box (SJB) fuse 14 (10A) through circuit SBP14 (BN/RD). Ground for the compass display (FDIM) is supplied through circuit GD114 (BK/BU). The compass module (located on the interior rear view mirror) provides vehicle directional inputs to the instrument cluster, which sends the compass information to the FDIM over the medium speed controller area network (MS-CAN). The FDIM will display the compass direction according to the information that has been provided by the compass module to the instrument cluster. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Magnetized vehicle - Compass zone setting - Compass calibration - Compass module B1-B2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7205 B2 Continued Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Adjustments > Compass Zone Adjustment Compass: Adjustments Compass Zone Adjustment COMPASS ZONE ADJUSTMENT 1. Refer to the compass calibration zone map to select the correct compass zone setting for the geographic location of the vehicle. See: Compass Calibration 2. With the key in the ON position, press and hold the MODE button (for approximately 5 seconds) until the display shows the current zone setting. Release the MODE button. 3. NOTE: After approximately 5 seconds, the compass display will exit the zone setting mode after the button has been released. Before the zone setting mode turns off (within 5 seconds), momentarily press and release the MODE button to increase the zone increment by one. Set the zone display number to match the vehicle geographical location on the compass calibration zone map. 4. Release the switch for 5 seconds to exit the zone setting mode. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Adjustments > Compass Zone Adjustment > Page 7208 Compass: Adjustments Vehicle Demagnetizing VEHICLE DEMAGNETIZING CAUTION: During demagnetizing, the demagnetizer coil pulls toward the vehicle. Place a cloth over the vehicle roof to protect the vehicle surface if contact occurs. Make sure the cloth covers the front third and the entire width of the roof. NOTE: - The demagnetizing process requires the use of a demagnetizing coil commonly used by television repair technicians to demagnetize television tubes. - To demagnetize, use a constant circular motion over the vehicle roof. Do not turn off the demagnetizer while sweeping the vehicle roof to prevent remagnetizing ferrous materials contained in the vehicle. - During the demagnetizing process, make sure the phenolic surface of the tool (the side opposite the handle) is closest to the vehicle surface. 1. Demagnetize the front third of the vehicle roof. 1 Turn on the demagnetizer at least 1 m (3 ft) away from the vehicle. 2 Holding the demagnetizer no more than 2.5 cm (1 in) from the vehicle roof and starting on the passenger side, demagnetize the front third of the vehicle roof closest to the windshield using a constant circular motion. Keep the circle radius within 30 cm (12 in) while sweeping across the entire surface of the vehicle roof closest to the windshield. Continue the circular motion 4 times. 3 After the fourth pass and without stopping, move the demagnetizer at least 1 m (3 ft) away from the vehicle. 4 Turn the demagnetizer off. 2. Carry out the compass zone adjustment procedure. See: Compass Zone Adjustment 3. Carry out the compass calibration adjustment procedure. See: Compass Calibration Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Adjustments > Compass Zone Adjustment > Page 7209 Compass: Adjustments Compass Calibration COMPASS CALIBRATION 1. NOTE: For optimum calibration, drive to an open, level location away from large metallic objects or structures. Switch off all non-essential electrical accessories (heated rear window, heater fan, A/C, map lamps, and wipers) and make sure all doors are closed. Start the vehicle. 2. NOTE: - It is not possible to exit the CAL mode unless the vehicle is driven in circles. - While holding the MODE button down, the compass display will first enter the ZONE setting mode (after 5 seconds) and then after another 5 seconds (10 seconds total), the compass display will enter the CAL mode. Press and hold (for approximately 10 seconds) the MODE button until CAL appears in the display, then release the MODE button. 3. NOTE: If the CAL indicator does not turn off after the vehicle is driven in a circle at least 5 times, repeat the procedure. Drive the vehicle slowly at less than 5 km/h (3 mph) in a continuous circle until CAL disappears from the display and the compass heading is shown. 4. If the CAL message does not turn off within 5 circles (and the procedure has been repeated at least once), install a new compass module (attached to the interior rearview mirror). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Compass > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 7210 Special Tool(s) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) DEPOWERING AND REPOWERING Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Depowering Procedure WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. - Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the safety canopy and cause serious personal injury or death. - To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 3. At the smart power distribution junction box (SPDJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover and the restraints control module (RCM) fuse 32 (10A) from the SPDJB. 4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Air Bag Systems for location of the RCM and impact sensor(s). To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least 1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an accidental deployment. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Repowering Procedure 1. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON. 2. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SPDJB and install the cover. 3. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Connect the battery ground cable. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7216 4. Prove out the supplemental restraint system (SRS) as follows: Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag indicator will: fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) from the restraints control module using a scan tool. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7217 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) DEACTIVATION AND REACTIVATION Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Deactivation WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. - To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 3. At the smart power distribution junction box (SPDJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover and the RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SPDJB. 4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition OFF. 6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Air Bag Systems for location of the RCM and impact sensor(s). To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least 1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an accidental deployment. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 7. Using a 3-mm Allen wrench or a suitable tool, place it in the driver air bag module release hole on the underside of the steering wheel. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7218 8. CAUTION: During driver air bag module removal, make sure all 3 driver air bag module hooks are released from the steering wheel wire clip. Failure to do so may cause damage to the driver air bag module and or the steering wheel. NOTE: The driver air bag module is removed for clarity. Position the 3-mm Allen wrench or suitable tool against the wire clip and push inward disengaging the wire clip from the 3 driver air bag module hooks. 9. Disconnect the horn electrical connector. Then disconnect the 2 driver air bag module electrical connectors and remove the driver air bag module. 10. Open and lower the glove compartment door. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7219 11. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts. 12. CAUTION: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure. NOTE: Use care when removing the passenger air bag module from the instrument panel (I/P). The passenger air bag module can drop down during removal and the passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the I/P. Through the glove compartment opening, release the passenger air bag module deployment door clips while pushing the passenger air bag module out of the I/P. 13. Remove the passenger air bag module. 1 Disconnect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors. 2 Detach the wire harness routing clip and remove the passenger air bag module. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7220 14. From under the rear of the passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector. 15. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. 1 Separate the weatherstrip. 2 Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel. 3 Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel. 16. Disconnect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector. 17. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel. 1 Separate the weatherstrip. 2 Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel. 3 Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7221 18. Disconnect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector. 19. From under the rear of the driver seat, slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector. 20. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SPDJB. 21. Connect the battery ground cable. Reactivation 1. Remove RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SPDJB. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 3. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip. 4. Connect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7222 5. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel. 1 Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel. 2 Install the D-pillar trim panel. 3 Install the weatherstrip. 6. Connect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector. 7. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. 1 Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel. 2 Install the D-pillar trim panel. 3 Install the weatherstrip. 8. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7223 clip. 9. CAUTION: - During passenger air bag module installation, make sure the passenger air bag module wire harness routing clip is attached to the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness damage. - The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component and/or connector damage. Install the passenger air bag module. 1 Connect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors. 2 Attach the wire harness routing clip. 10. CAUTION: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure. NOTE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door clips are fully seated into the instrument panel. - Use care when installing the passenger air bag module in the instrument panel (I/P). The passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the I/P. Position the passenger air bag module and seat the passenger air bag module deployment door clips into the I/P. 11. Install the 2 passenger air bag module bolts. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Dashboard / Instrument Panel > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7224 12. Close the glove compartment door. 13. CAUTION: The driver air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the driver air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the driver air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the driver air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in component damage and/or connector damage. Install the driver air bag module electrical connectors fully into the driver air bag module. Then connect the horn electrical connector. 14. NOTE: - Make sure the driver air bag module wiring harness is routed down and away from the driver air bag module hooks during installation. - Audible clicks will be heard when the 3 wire clips are seated in the 3 driver air bag module hooks. Align the driver air bag module hooks to the steering wheel and, while pushing inward, seat the 3 driver air bag module hooks to the steering wheel wire clip. When the 3 driver air bag module hooks are seated in place, gently pull outward at the corners of the driver air bag module to make sure that the 3 hooks are fully seated. There should also be an even gap between the driver air bag module trim cover and the steering wheel. Check the driver air bag module and trim cover for correct movement when applying the horn. 15. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON. 16. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SPDJB and install the cover. 17. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Connect the battery ground cable. 18. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will: fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous DTCs from the restraints control module using a scan tool. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-21 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7228 C479 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Locations View 151-13 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Locations > Page 7232 C269 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Locations > Page 7233 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Description and Operation INFORMATION AND MESSAGE CENTER The message center is a fixed format vacuum fluorescent display, integrated into the instrument cluster. The message center functions are controlled by the message center switches. The message center displays important vehicle information by constantly monitoring different vehicle systems. The message center informs the driver of vehicle operations and notifies the driver of potential vehicle problems by displaying a warning message pertaining to the system in which a fault has been detected. The message center provides the following features: - Information displays - Setup displays - System check messages - System warning messages The message center information can be selected through a set of 3 buttons: - INFO - SETUP - RESET Information Displays The information displays are non-timed modes. The selected mode remains on until the driver presses a message center button to change the mode or it is overridden by another mode. The information (INFO button) display modes are: Odometer - Trip odometer A or B - Distance to empty (DTE) - Average fuel economy - Instantaneous fuel economy - Electrical energy available (Hybrid only) - Blank display Setup Displays The setup (SETUP button) displays are timed modes and terminate after a finite interval. As part of the setup menu, the message center has the capability to configure items such as units (English or metric), autolamp delay, to enable/disable a variety of options such as autolock and auto-unlock, or to carry out calibrations/settings on items such as oil life. On configurable items such as autolock and auto-unlock, the message center indicates the appropriate selection (ON/OFF) by bracketing the selection. For example, if the driver selects the autolock feature on, the message would display as follows: AUTOLOCK [ON] OFF. If the driver selects the autolock off, the message would display as follows: AUTOLOCK AID ON [OFF]. The setup display modes are: Reset to English (if set in another language) - System check - Oil life reset/oil life starting value - Units English/metric - Autolamp delay in seconds (if equipped) - Autolock on/off (if equipped) - Auto-unlock on/off (if equipped) - Language Oil Life and Oil Life Start Value The oil life is displayed in percent and is preset to a maximum of approximately 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 180 days. The oil life start value is used to increase or decrease the starting point of the oil life. The value can be changed back to the maximum of approximately 12,000 km (7,500 miles) if the value was previously changed or to lower the value by 10% increments down to 10%. System Check The system check provides a check of all the monitored systems on the vehicle. The system check scrolls through each of the monitored systems and provides a visual indication to report out the status of each system. The message center displays OK for approximately 2 seconds if the system check does not detect a fault in the system and displays a warning message for approximately 2 seconds if the system check detects a fault in the system. Press the RESET button to scroll through the system check messages. The system check display modes are: Oil life status - Electrical drive status (Hybrid only) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Locations > Page 7234 - Brake system status - Liftgate/liftgate glass status - DTE/Fuel level status System Warning Messages The system warning messages alert the operator to possible problems or malfunctions in the vehicle operating systems. The message center displays the last selected feature if there are no additional warning messages. Once a warning message has been displayed, the message must be acknowledged to allow full functionality of the message center. Press the RESET to acknowledge and clear the warning message. The warning messages are divided into 3 basic categories: Cannot be cleared until the condition is corrected. - Reappears 10 minutes from pressing the RESET button. - Reappears if the condition clears then reoccurs within the same ignition ON-OFF cycle. The warning messages that cannot be reset are: DRIVER DOOR AJAR - PASSENGER DOOR AJAR - REAR LEFT DOOR AJAR - REAR RIGHT DOOR AJAR The warning messages that reoccur after 10 minutes are: XXX MILES (KM) TO EMPTY FUEL LEVEL LOW - STOP SAFELY NOW (Hybrid only) - HIGH ENGINE TEMPERATURE (Hybrid only) - HIGH MOTOR TEMPERATURE (Hybrid only) - PARK BRAKE ENGAGED When a condition exists, the warning messages that are displayed whenever the ignition switch is turned from the OFF position to the ON position are: LIFTGATE/GLASS AJAR - SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM - LOW BRAKE FLUID - REGEN BRAKES DISABLED (Hybrid only) - TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR FAULT - LOW TIRE PRESSURE - TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT - OIL CHANGE REQUIRED - XXX% OIL LIFE/CHANGE OIL SOON The message center displays warning messages that indicate a system state during repair procedures related to the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS). The displayed messages are as follows: TRAIN LF TIRE - TRAIN RF TIRE - TRAIN LR TIRE - TRAIN RR TIRE - TRAIN SPARE TIRE - TRAINING COMPLETE - TIRES NOT TRAINED Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Inspection and Verification INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION 1. Verify the customer concern. 2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage. Visual Inspection Chart 3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding to the next step. 4. NOTE: Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release. If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the data link connector (DLC). 5. NOTE: The vehicle communication module (VCM) LED prove-out confirms power and ground from the DLC are provided to the VCM. If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM: Check the VCM connection to the vehicle. - Check the scan tool connection to the VCM. - Refer to Information Bus (Module Communications Network), No Power To The Scan Tool, to diagnose no communication with the scan tool. 6. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle: - Verify the ignition key is in the ON position. - Verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle. - Refer to Information Bus (Module Communications Network) to diagnose no response from the PCM. 7. Carry out the network test. - If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules, refer to Information Bus (Module Communications Network). - If the network test passes, retrieve and record the continuous memory DTCs. 8. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the instrument cluster. 9. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to DTC Charts. For all other DTCs, refer to Body Control Systems (Multifunction Electronic Control Module). See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions/Information and Message Center 10. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Principles of Operation PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION The message center is an integral part of the instrument cluster that receives and acts upon much of the same information that is input and used to operate the instrument cluster gauges, informational indicators, and warning indicators. The message center, located in the center of the instrument cluster is a vacuum fluorescent 2-line display. The message center electronic functions use both hardwired, and the controller area network (CAN) circuitry to transmit and receive information. Whenever conditions are present that require a warning message, the message center replaces the last selected display with the new warning display. Once the message is reset or cleared, the message center returns to the last selected display. If multiple warnings are present, the message center displays each warning for approximately 4 seconds. Warning messages are also generally associated with other observable instrument cluster indications. For example, when the LH front door is opened, the message center displays the message DRIVER DOOR AJAR along with the door ajar warning indicator. This allows the message center to be a more informative supplement to the instrument cluster gauges and indicators. It is very important to understand: - where the input (command) originates. - all the information (messages) necessary in order for a feature to operate. - which module(s) receive(s) the input or command message. - if the module that received the input (message) controls the output of the feature, or if it outputs a message over the CAN to another module. - which module controls the output of the feature. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7237 Instrument Cluster Messages NOTE: Whenever a message is suspected as missing, confirmed by a missing message DTC, it is important to look for other symptoms that may also be present in the instrument cluster and throughout the vehicle. Once a DTC is set in the instrument cluster, it may be helpful to review the complete message list available in Information Bus (Module Communications Network) to see what other modules also rely on the same message and run the self-test for those modules. If the message is missing from other modules, the same DTC may also be set in those modules. Confirmation of missing messages common to multiple modules may indicate that the originating module is the source of the concern or the communication network may be experiencing some problems. The instrument cluster uses input messages from other modules to control the gauges, informational indicators, warning indicators and message center displays over the communication networks. If a required message is missing or invalid for less than 5 seconds, the gauge or indicator that requires the message remains at the last commanded state based upon the last known good message. For example, if the message is missing the driver door ajar off status for less than 5 seconds and the door ajar indicator was ON, the indicator remains in the ON state until the next good message is received. If the message remains missing or invalid for greater than 5 seconds, the instrument cluster sets a U-code diagnostic trouble code (DTC) and the output becomes a default action for the indicator or gauge. Each indicator or gauge utilizes a different default strategy depending on the nature of the indication. Refer to Instrument Cluster for further descriptions of the default action specific to each indicator or gauge. If the messaged input to the cluster returns at any time, the normal function of the gauge or indicator resumes. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7238 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Symptom Chart (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7239 Symptom Chart (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7240 Symptom Chart (Part 3) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7241 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Pinpoint Tests Test A: The Message Center Is Not Operating Correctly PINPOINT TEST A: THE MESSAGE CENTER IS NOT OPERATING CORRECTLY Normal Operation The message center is located in the center of the instrument cluster between the tachometer and the speedometer in the vacuum fluorescent display area. The message center is integral to the instrument cluster and uses the same voltage supply as the instrument cluster. The RUN/START voltage is supplied to the instrument cluster on circuit CBP29 (WH/VT) and the keep alive B+ voltage is received on circuit SBP26 (YE/RD). The instrument cluster logic ground is through circuit GD112 (BK/GN) and the bulb ground is through circuit GD114 (BK/BU). The message center functionality is controlled through the message center switch, which is hardwired to the instrument cluster through input circuit CMC29 (GN/VT) and return circuit VMC29 (YE). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Instrument cluster A1-A3 Test B: The Message Center Switch Does Not Operate Correctly PINPOINT TEST B: THE MESSAGE CENTER SWITCH DOES NOT OPERATE CORRECTLY Normal Operation The message center functionality is controlled through the message center switch, which is hardwired to the instrument cluster through input circuit CMC29 (GN/VT) and return circuit VMC29 (YE). There are 3 message center switch buttons with each button operating a switch that uses different resistance values. The instrument cluster sends out a reference voltage to the message center switch on the input circuit and monitors the voltage drop when a message center switch button is pressed. The voltage drop will vary depending upon the resistance of each button, providing a specific indication to the instrument cluster which switch is pressed. DTC B1206 (EIC Switch-1 Assembly Circuit Open) - is a continuous and on-demand DTC that sets when the instrument cluster detects an open on the message center switch input, circuit CMC29 (GN/VT). DTC B1208 (EIC Switch-1 Assembly Circuit Short to Ground) - is a continuous and on-demand DTC that sets when the instrument cluster detects a short to ground on the message center switch input, circuit CMC29 (GN/VT). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7242 - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Message center switch - Instrument cluster B1-B3 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7243 B4-B7 Test C: The STOP SAFELY NOW Warning Is Inoperative/Always On PINPOINT TEST C: THE STOP SAFELY NOW WARNING IS INOPERATIVE/ALWAYS ON Normal Operation The stop safely now display informs the driver that there is a problem with the Hybrid electrical system and that an impending vehicle shut down is about to occur. The instrument cluster receives the hazard input from a message over the high speed controller area network (HS-CAN) communication bus from the powertrain control module (PCM), the transmission control module (TCM) and the traction battery control module (TBCM). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7244 NOTE: The instrument cluster turns on both the hazard warning indicator in the instrument cluster and displays the stop safely now warning simultaneously when a problem or fault has been detected in any of the 3 modules (PCM, TCM or TBCM). If the hazard status message is missing from the PCM or if the data is deemed invalid by the instrument cluster for more than 5 seconds, the instrument cluster sets DTC U0100 in continuous memory. If the hazard status message is missing from the TCM or if the data is deemed invalid by the instrument cluster for more than 5 seconds, the instrument cluster sets DTC U0101 in continuous memory. If the hazard status message is missing from the TBCM or if the data is deemed invalid by the instrument cluster for more than 5 seconds, the instrument cluster sets DTC U0111 in continuous memory. If any one of the 3 messages are missing with the other two valid, the instrument cluster defaults the STOP SAFELY NOW warning to the last observable state (on or off). If all 3 messages are missing and the instrument cluster does not see an ignition switch transition into RUN/START, the instrument cluster defaults the STOP SAFELY NOW warning to the last observable state (on or off). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - PCM concern - TCM concern - TBCM concern - Instrument cluster C1-C2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7245 C3-C7 Test D: The REGEN BREAKING DISABLED Message Is Inoperative/Always On PINPOINT TEST D: THE REGEN BRAKING DISABLED MESSAGE IS INOPERATIVE/ALWAYS ON Normal Operation The instrument cluster receives the regenerative brake disabled status from the powertrain control module (PCM) over the high speed controller area network (HS-CAN) communication bus. If the regenerative braking system is disabled, the PCM sends a command to the instrument cluster to display the regenerative braking disabled message. If the regenerative braking message is missing, the instrument cluster sets DTC U0100 in continuous memory and the regenerative braking disabled message remains in the last indication mode (on or off). If the regen braking message is deemed invalid by the instrument cluster, the instrument cluster defaults the regenerative braking disabled message off. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - PCM concern - Instrument cluster Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7246 D1-D3 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Service and Repair > Message Center Configuration Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Service and Repair Message Center Configuration MESSAGE CENTER CONFIGURATION Oil Life Reset NOTE: The oil life calculation is set at a maximum of approximately 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 180 days. - The XXX's in the steps below represent a numeric value and will display the correct number in percent. For example; OIL LIFE = XXX% may display OIL LIFE = 45%. 1. Press and release the SETUP button until the message center displays OIL LIFE = XXX% HOLD RESET = NEW. 2. Press and hold the RESET button for 2 seconds and release to reset the oil life to 100%. 3. The message center displays OIL LIFE SET TO 100%. Oil Life Start Value NOTE: The oil life start value is used to reset the oil life value back to the maximum of approximately 12,000 km (7,500 miles) if the value was previously changed or to lower the value by 10% increments down to 10%. 1. Press and release the SETUP button until the message center displays OIL LIFE = XXX% HOLD RESET = NEW. 2. Press and hold the RESET button for 2 seconds and release to adjust new oil life %. 3. NOTE: Once the percent has been lowered to 10%, the next button press starts the sequence over again beginning at 100%. Press and release the RESET button to lower the start value percent until the message center displays the newly desired percent. 4. Press and release the SETUP button to return to the setup menu. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Service and Repair > Message Center Configuration > Page 7249 Driver/Vehicle Information Display: Service and Repair Message Center Switch MESSAGE CENTER SWITCH Removal and Installation All vehicles 1. Remove the LH instrument panel trim panel. Hybrid vehicles 2. Remove the jump start switch screw and position the jump start switch aside. All vehicles 3. Press the retaining tabs and remove the message center switch. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Driver/Vehicle Information Display > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7250 Special Tool(s) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Filler Cap Warning Indicator > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Filler Cap Warning Indicator: Description and Operation CHECK FUEL CAP INDICATOR The check fuel cap indicator is a communications network message sent by the PCM. The PCM sends the message to illuminate the lamp when the strategy determines there is a concern in the EVAP system due to the fuel filler cap or capless fuel tank filler pipe not being sealed correctly. This would be detected by the inability to pull vacuum in the fuel tank, after a fueling event. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation Fuel Pump (FP) Module Typical Electronic Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module Typical Mechanical Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7257 The FP module is a device that contains the fuel pump and sender assembly. The fuel pump is located inside the FP module reservoir and supplies fuel through the FP module manifold to the engine and FP module jet pump. The jet pump continuously refills the reservoir with fuel, and a check valve located in the manifold outlet maintains system pressure when the fuel pump is not energized. A flapper valve located in the bottom of the reservoir allows fuel to enter the reservoir and prime the fuel pump during the initial fill. Fuel Pump (FP) Module and Reservoir The FP module is mounted inside the fuel tank in a reservoir. The pump has a discharge check valve that maintains the system pressure after the key has been turned off to minimize starting concerns. The reservoir prevents fuel flow interruptions during extreme vehicle maneuvers with low tank fill levels. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7258 Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair FUEL PUMP MODULE Exploded View Part 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7259 Part 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7260 Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7261 Removal and Installation WARNING: - Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. - Remove the fuel filler cap slowly. The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7262 sound, wait until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may spray out. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. 1. Release the fuel system pressure. 2. Release the fuel tank filler cap and position aside. 3. Insert the special tool into the fuel tank filler pipe until it opens the fuel tank level shutoff valve located at the inlet of the fuel tank. 4. NOTE: Due to the internal design of the fuel tank components, slow fuel drainage may occur. Using the special tools, drain as much fuel as possible from the fuel tank and filler pipe, lowering the fuel level below the fuel pump (FP) mounting flange. 5. Remove the 4 screws and the FP module access cover. 6. NOTE: Clean the FP module connection, couplings, mounting flange and the immediate surrounding area of any dirt or foreign material. Disconnect the FP module electrical connector. 7. NOTE: Place absorbent toweling in the immediate surrounding area in case of fuel spills. Disconnect the fuel supply tube and fuel vapor recirculation tube-to-FP module quick connect couplings. 8. CAUTION: The fuel pump (FP) module must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the float arm and the filter. NOTE: Carefully remove the FP module lock ring and verify that enough fuel has been drained to avoid spillage. - Drain any residual in the FP module into a suitable container. Using a suitable FP module lock ring remover, rotate the lock ring counterclockwise and remove the FP module. 9. NOTE: Inspect the surfaces of the FP module flange and fuel tank seal contact surfaces. Do not polish or adjust the seal contact area of the FP module flange or fuel tank. Install a new FP module or fuel tank if the seal contact area is bent, scratched or corroded. Remove and discard the FP module O-ring seal. 10. NOTE: Apply clean engine oil to the FP module O-ring seal. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) DEPOWERING AND REPOWERING Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Depowering Procedure WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. - Do not handle, move or change the original horizontal mounting position of the restraints control module (RCM) while the RCM is connected and the ignition switch is ON. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of the safety canopy and cause serious personal injury or death. - To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 3. At the smart power distribution junction box (SPDJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover and the restraints control module (RCM) fuse 32 (10A) from the SPDJB. 4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Air Bag Systems for location of the RCM and impact sensor(s). To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least 1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an accidental deployment. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. Repowering Procedure 1. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON. 2. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SPDJB and install the cover. 3. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Connect the battery ground cable. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7268 4. Prove out the supplemental restraint system (SRS) as follows: Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag indicator will: fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) from the restraints control module using a scan tool. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7269 Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Deactivation and Reactivation SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) DEACTIVATION AND REACTIVATION Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Deactivation WARNING: Never probe the electrical connectors on air bag, safety canopy or side air curtain modules. Failure to follow this instruction may result in the accidental deployment of these modules, which increases the risk of serious personal injury or death. - To reduce the risk of accidental deployment, do not use any memory saver devices. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury or death. NOTE: The air bag warning indicator illuminates when the restraints control module (RCM) fuse is removed and the ignition switch is ON. This is normal operation and does not indicate a supplemental restraint system (SRS) fault. - The SRS must be fully operational and free of faults before releasing the vehicle to the customer. 1. Turn all vehicle accessories OFF. 2. Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 3. At the smart power distribution junction box (SPDJB), located at the RH side of the center console, remove the cover and the RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SPDJB. 4. Turn the ignition ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator for at least 30 seconds. The air bag warning indicator will remain lit continuously (no flashing) if the correct RCM fuse has been removed. If the air bag warning indicator does not remain lit continuously, remove the correct RCM fuse before proceeding. 5. Turn the ignition OFF. 6. WARNING: Always deplete the backup power supply before repairing or installing any new front or side air bag supplemental restraint system (SRS) component and before servicing, removing, installing, adjusting or striking components near the front or side impact sensors or the restraints control module (RCM). Nearby components include doors, instrument panel, console, door latches, strikers, seats and hood latches. Refer to the Description and Operation portion of Air Bag Systems for location of the RCM and impact sensor(s). To deplete the backup power supply energy, disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least 1 minute. Be sure to disconnect auxiliary batteries and power supplies (if equipped). Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury or death in the event of an accidental deployment. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 7. Using a 3-mm Allen wrench or a suitable tool, place it in the driver air bag module release hole on the underside of the steering wheel. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7270 8. CAUTION: During driver air bag module removal, make sure all 3 driver air bag module hooks are released from the steering wheel wire clip. Failure to do so may cause damage to the driver air bag module and or the steering wheel. NOTE: The driver air bag module is removed for clarity. Position the 3-mm Allen wrench or suitable tool against the wire clip and push inward disengaging the wire clip from the 3 driver air bag module hooks. 9. Disconnect the horn electrical connector. Then disconnect the 2 driver air bag module electrical connectors and remove the driver air bag module. 10. Open and lower the glove compartment door. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7271 11. Remove the 2 passenger air bag module bolts. 12. CAUTION: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure. NOTE: Use care when removing the passenger air bag module from the instrument panel (I/P). The passenger air bag module can drop down during removal and the passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the I/P. Through the glove compartment opening, release the passenger air bag module deployment door clips while pushing the passenger air bag module out of the I/P. 13. Remove the passenger air bag module. 1 Disconnect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors. 2 Detach the wire harness routing clip and remove the passenger air bag module. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7272 14. From under the rear of the passenger seat, slide and disengage the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector. 15. Remove the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. 1 Separate the weatherstrip. 2 Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel. 3 Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel. 16. Disconnect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector. 17. Remove the driver side D-pillar trim panel. 1 Separate the weatherstrip. 2 Pull out and separate the quarter trim panel at the D-pillar trim panel. 3 Pull out to release the retainers and remove the D-pillar trim panel. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7273 18. Disconnect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector. 19. From under the rear of the driver seat, slide and disengage the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector locking clip, and then release the tab and disconnect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector. 20. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SPDJB. 21. Connect the battery ground cable. Reactivation 1. Remove RCM fuse 32 (10A) from the SPDJB. 2. Disconnect the battery ground cable and wait at least one minute. 3. Connect the driver seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking clip. 4. Connect the driver side safety canopy module electrical connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7274 5. Install the driver side D-pillar trim panel. 1 Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel. 2 Install the D-pillar trim panel. 3 Install the weatherstrip. 6. Connect the passenger side safety canopy module electrical connector. 7. Install the passenger side D-pillar trim panel. 1 Engage the D-pillar trim panel to the quarter trim panel. 2 Install the D-pillar trim panel. 3 Install the weatherstrip. 8. Connect the passenger seat side air bag module electrical connector and then slide and engage the seat side air bag electrical connector locking Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7275 clip. 9. CAUTION: - During passenger air bag module installation, make sure the passenger air bag module wire harness routing clip is attached to the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in wiring harness damage. - The passenger air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the passenger air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the passenger air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the passenger air bag module. Failure to follow these instructions may result in component and/or connector damage. Install the passenger air bag module. 1 Connect the 2 passenger air bag module electrical connectors. 2 Attach the wire harness routing clip. 10. CAUTION: Do not handle the passenger air bag module by grabbing the edges of the deployment door. Failure to follow this instruction may result in vehicle damage, equipment damage, component damage and/or system failure. NOTE: During passenger air bag module installation, make sure all the deployment door clips are fully seated into the instrument panel. - Use care when installing the passenger air bag module in the instrument panel (I/P). The passenger air bag module rear bracket can scratch the front of the I/P. Position the passenger air bag module and seat the passenger air bag module deployment door clips into the I/P. 11. Install the 2 passenger air bag module bolts. - To install, tighten to 8 Nm (71 lb-in). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming > System Information > Service and Repair > Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Depowering and Repowering > Page 7276 12. Close the glove compartment door. 13. CAUTION: The driver air bag module electrical connectors are unique and cannot be reversed when connected to the driver air bag module. Match the electrical connector key to the keyway in the driver air bag module. Do not force the electrical connectors into the driver air bag module. Failure to follow this instruction may result in component damage and/or connector damage. Install the driver air bag module electrical connectors fully into the driver air bag module. Then connect the horn electrical connector. 14. NOTE: - Make sure the driver air bag module wiring harness is routed down and away from the driver air bag module hooks during installation. - Audible clicks will be heard when the 3 wire clips are seated in the 3 driver air bag module hooks. Align the driver air bag module hooks to the steering wheel and, while pushing inward, seat the 3 driver air bag module hooks to the steering wheel wire clip. When the 3 driver air bag module hooks are seated in place, gently pull outward at the corners of the driver air bag module to make sure that the 3 hooks are fully seated. There should also be an even gap between the driver air bag module trim cover and the steering wheel. Check the driver air bag module and trim cover for correct movement when applying the horn. 15. Turn the ignition switch from OFF to ON. 16. Install RCM fuse 32 (10A) to the SPDJB and install the cover. 17. WARNING: Make sure no one is in the vehicle and there is nothing blocking or placed in front of any air bag module when the battery is connected. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury in the event of an accidental deployment. Connect the battery ground cable. 18. Prove out the SRS as follows: Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF. Wait 10 seconds, then turn the key back to ON and visually monitor the air bag warning indicator with the air bag modules installed. The air bag warning indicator will light continuously for approximately 6 seconds and then turn off. If an air bag SRS fault is present, the air bag warning indicator will: fail to light. - remain lit continuously. - flash. The flashing might not occur until approximately 30 seconds after the ignition switch has been turned from the OFF to the ON position. This is the time required for the RCM to complete the testing of the SRS. If the air bag warning indicator is inoperative and a SRS fault exists, a chime will sound in a pattern of 5 sets of 5 beeps. If this occurs, the air bag warning indicator and any SRS fault discovered must be diagnosed and repaired. Clear all continuous DTCs from the restraints control module using a scan tool. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 08-23-12 > Nov > 08 > Temperature Display - Toggles From Fahrenheit To Celsius Instrument Panel Control Module: Customer Interest Temperature Display - Toggles From Fahrenheit To Celsius TSB 08-23-12 11/24/08 FRONT DISPLAY INTERFACE MODULE (FDIM) - OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY TOGGLES BETWEEN FAHRENHEIT/CELSIUS FORD: 2008-2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit an outside temperature display in the FDIM that toggles between Fahrenheit and Celsius. ACTION Reprogram the Instrument Cluster module to the latest calibration using IDS release 57.9 and higher with patch 13 or 58.2 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2008.11 DVD. Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 082312A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The Instrument Cluster, Authorization Decal Not Required.(Do Not Use With 12650D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 10849 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 08-19-2 > Sep > 08 > Instruments - Incorrect Autolock/Autounlock Status Instrument Panel Control Module: Customer Interest Instruments - Incorrect Autolock/Autounlock Status TSB 08-19-2 09/29/08 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER / MESSAGE CENTER - AUTOLOCK / AUTOUNLOCK / AUTOLAMP DISPLAY INCORRECT STATUS / MISSING FORD: 2008 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2008 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner This article supersedes TSB 08-15-5 to update the Issue Statement and Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2008 Escape, Mariner and Escape/Mariner Hybrid vehicles built, on or before 6/17/2008 and equipped with a message center instrument cluster may exhibit Autolock / Autounlock / Autolamp exit delay time features that falsely display "Off" regardless of actual feature On/Off status. Any one of these features changed individually may cause the remaining untouched features to default to actual "Off' status. In some vehicles the Autolock / Autounlock feature may not display at all in the message center. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. If the Autolock or Autounlock feature is not displayed in the message center when toggling through the setup, it will need to be enabled using the IDS. If the Autolock or Autounlock features are displayed in the message center skip to Step 2. a. Connect the Ford Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) service tool to the data link connector (DLC). b. ID the vehicle. c. Select the toolbox. d. Select Module Programming. e. Select Programmable Parameters. f. Select Power Door Locks. g. Select Enable for each Autolock / Autounlock selection. 2. Reprogram the instrument cluster to the latest calibration using IDS release B56.8 and higher or IDS release B57.1 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2008.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 081902A 2008 Escape, Escape 0.3 Hr. Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The Instrument Cluster, Authorization Decal Not Required. Includes Time To Enable Autolock Display. (Do Not Use With 12650D, 12651D, 12651D4) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 08-19-2 > Sep > 08 > Instruments - Incorrect Autolock/Autounlock Status > Page 7289 DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 10849 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 08-23-12 > Nov > 08 > Temperature Display - Toggles From Fahrenheit To Celsius Instrument Panel Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Temperature Display - Toggles From Fahrenheit To Celsius TSB 08-23-12 11/24/08 FRONT DISPLAY INTERFACE MODULE (FDIM) - OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY TOGGLES BETWEEN FAHRENHEIT/CELSIUS FORD: 2008-2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit an outside temperature display in the FDIM that toggles between Fahrenheit and Celsius. ACTION Reprogram the Instrument Cluster module to the latest calibration using IDS release 57.9 and higher with patch 13 or 58.2 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2008.11 DVD. Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 082312A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The Instrument Cluster, Authorization Decal Not Required.(Do Not Use With 12650D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 10849 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 08-19-2 > Sep > 08 > Instruments - Incorrect Autolock/Autounlock Status Instrument Panel Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Incorrect Autolock/Autounlock Status TSB 08-19-2 09/29/08 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER / MESSAGE CENTER - AUTOLOCK / AUTOUNLOCK / AUTOLAMP DISPLAY INCORRECT STATUS / MISSING FORD: 2008 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2008 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner This article supersedes TSB 08-15-5 to update the Issue Statement and Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2008 Escape, Mariner and Escape/Mariner Hybrid vehicles built, on or before 6/17/2008 and equipped with a message center instrument cluster may exhibit Autolock / Autounlock / Autolamp exit delay time features that falsely display "Off" regardless of actual feature On/Off status. Any one of these features changed individually may cause the remaining untouched features to default to actual "Off' status. In some vehicles the Autolock / Autounlock feature may not display at all in the message center. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. If the Autolock or Autounlock feature is not displayed in the message center when toggling through the setup, it will need to be enabled using the IDS. If the Autolock or Autounlock features are displayed in the message center skip to Step 2. a. Connect the Ford Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) service tool to the data link connector (DLC). b. ID the vehicle. c. Select the toolbox. d. Select Module Programming. e. Select Programmable Parameters. f. Select Power Door Locks. g. Select Enable for each Autolock / Autounlock selection. 2. Reprogram the instrument cluster to the latest calibration using IDS release B56.8 and higher or IDS release B57.1 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2008.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 081902A 2008 Escape, Escape 0.3 Hr. Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The Instrument Cluster, Authorization Decal Not Required. Includes Time To Enable Autolock Display. (Do Not Use With 12650D, 12651D, 12651D4) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Instrument Cluster / Carrier > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 08-19-2 > Sep > 08 > Instruments - Incorrect Autolock/Autounlock Status > Page 7299 DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 10849 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Indicator and Message Center Messages The TPMS indicator and vehicle message center (if equipped) sometimes displays faults that cannot be resolved by the customer. Treat these messages as TPMS faults that must be serviced. Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Indicator Illuminates Continuously NOTE: If the spare tire is in use, the damaged road tire must be repaired and installed on the vehicle to restore complete TPMS functionality before carrying out any diagnosis. NOTE: For vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures (such as E-Series and certain F-Series), the tire pressure sensors must be trained following a tire rotation. Failure to train the sensors will result in a false low tire pressure event, which will cause the TPMS indicator to illuminate. 1. The TPMS indicator remains on continuously for the following condition: ^ Low Tire Pressure - The TPMS indicator is illuminated solid and the message center displays LOW TIRE PRESSURE (if equipped). This is displayed when any of the tire pressures are low. When this condition exists, the tire pressure must be adjusted to the recommended cold pressure as indicated on the vehicle certification label. 2. NOTE: The TPMS sensors do not transmit when the vehicle is stationary. If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, it will be necessary to wake up the sensors so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information to the SJB. If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, carry out the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation procedure. Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Indicator Flashes The TPMS indicator flashes for 70 seconds, then remains ON solid when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, for the following conditions: 1. Tire Pressure Sensor Fault - If equipped, the message center will display TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR FAULT when a tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning. GO to Symptom Chart. See: Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures 2. No communication with the SJB (TPMS is integral to the SJB) - The TPMS indicator is illuminated when the instrument cluster has not received any signals from the SJB for more than 5 seconds. If equipped, the message center displays TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT. GO to Symptom Chart. See: Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures 3. Tire Pressure Monitor Fault - If equipped, the message center will display TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT when the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning or communication with the instrument cluster has been lost. GO to Symptom Chart. See: Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator > Component Information > Service and Repair > Message Center Configuration Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Service and Repair Message Center Configuration MESSAGE CENTER CONFIGURATION Oil Life Reset NOTE: The oil life calculation is set at a maximum of approximately 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or 180 days. - The XXX's in the steps below represent a numeric value and will display the correct number in percent. For example; OIL LIFE = XXX% may display OIL LIFE = 45%. 1. Press and release the SETUP button until the message center displays OIL LIFE = XXX% HOLD RESET = NEW. 2. Press and hold the RESET button for 2 seconds and release to reset the oil life to 100%. 3. The message center displays OIL LIFE SET TO 100%. Oil Life Start Value NOTE: The oil life start value is used to reset the oil life value back to the maximum of approximately 12,000 km (7,500 miles) if the value was previously changed or to lower the value by 10% increments down to 10%. 1. Press and release the SETUP button until the message center displays OIL LIFE = XXX% HOLD RESET = NEW. 2. Press and hold the RESET button for 2 seconds and release to adjust new oil life %. 3. NOTE: Once the percent has been lowered to 10%, the next button press starts the sequence over again beginning at 100%. Press and release the RESET button to lower the start value percent until the message center displays the newly desired percent. 4. Press and release the SETUP button to return to the setup menu. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Malfunction Indicator Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP (MIL) Check Engine, Service Engine Soon, Or ISO Standard Engine Symbol The MIL notifies the driver that the powertrain control module (PCM) has detected an on board diagnostic (OBD) emission-related component or system concern. When this occurs, an OBD diagnostic trouble code (DTC) sets. - The MIL is located in the instrument cluster and is labeled CHECK ENGINE, SERVICE ENGINE SOON or the international standards organization (ISO) standard engine symbol. - The MIL is illuminated during the instrument cluster prove out for approximately 4 seconds. - The MIL remains illuminated after instrument cluster prove out if: an emission-related concern and DTC exists. - the PCM does not send a control message to the instrument cluster (applications with the MIL controlled through the communication link). - the PCM is operating in the hardware limited operation strategy (HLOS). - The MIL remains off during the instrument cluster prove out if an indicator or instrument cluster concern is present. - To turn off the MIL after a repair, a reset command from the scan tool must be sent, or 3 consecutive drive cycles must be completed without a concern. - For all MIL concerns, go to Symptom Charts. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures - If the MIL flashes at a steady rate, a severe misfire condition may exist. - If the MIL flashes erratically, the PCM can reset while cranking if the battery voltage is low. - The MIL flashes after a period of time with the key in the RUN position (engine not running) if DTC P1000 is set. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Change Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Service and Repair Oil Change Reminder Lamp: Service and Repair Oil Life An oil change is required whenever indicated by the message center. USE ONLY RECOMMENDED ENGINE OILS. To reset the oil monitoring system to 100% after each oil change ( approximately 7,500 miles ( 12,000 km ) or 12 months ) perform the following: 1. Press and release the SETUP control to display "OIL LIFE = XXX% HOLD RESET = NEW". 2. Press and hold the RESET control for 2 seconds and release. Oil life is set to 100% and "OIL LIFE SET TO 100%" is displayed. 3. While "OIL LIFE SET TO 100%" is displayed, if a lower oil life is start value is desired , press and release the RESET control to reduce the start value. Each press of the RESET control reduces the value by 10 percent. Note: Oil life start value of 100% equals 7,500 miles ( 12,000 km ) or 12 months. For example, setting oil life start value to 60% sets the oil life start value to 4,500 miles ( 7,200 km ) and 108 days. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations Oil Pressure Sender: Locations View 151-6 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 7316 View 151-8 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 7317 C103 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 7318 Oil Pressure Sender: Service and Repair Engine Oil Pressure (EOP) Switch Material Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Oil Pressure Sender > Component Information > Locations > Page 7319 Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the pin-type retainer, 5 bolts and the RH lower splash shield. ^ To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 3. NOTE: Lubricate the engine oil filter gasket with clean engine oil prior to installing. Remove the engine oil filter. ^ To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in) and then rotate an additional 180 degrees. 4. Disconnect the engine oil pressure (EOP) switch electrical connector. 5. Remove the EOP switch. ^ To install, tighten to 14 Nm (10 lb-ft). 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. ^ Apply Thread Sealant with PTFE to the EOP switch threads. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Outside Temperature Display > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest: > 08-23-12 > Nov > 08 > Temperature Display - Toggles From Fahrenheit To Celsius Outside Temperature Display: Customer Interest Temperature Display - Toggles From Fahrenheit To Celsius TSB 08-23-12 11/24/08 FRONT DISPLAY INTERFACE MODULE (FDIM) - OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY TOGGLES BETWEEN FAHRENHEIT/CELSIUS FORD: 2008-2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit an outside temperature display in the FDIM that toggles between Fahrenheit and Celsius. ACTION Reprogram the Instrument Cluster module to the latest calibration using IDS release 57.9 and higher with patch 13 or 58.2 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2008.11 DVD. Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 082312A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The Instrument Cluster, Authorization Decal Not Required.(Do Not Use With 12650D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 10849 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Outside Temperature Display > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins: > 08-23-12 > Nov > 08 > Temperature Display Toggles From Fahrenheit To Celsius Outside Temperature Display: All Technical Service Bulletins Temperature Display - Toggles From Fahrenheit To Celsius TSB 08-23-12 11/24/08 FRONT DISPLAY INTERFACE MODULE (FDIM) - OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY TOGGLES BETWEEN FAHRENHEIT/CELSIUS FORD: 2008-2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit an outside temperature display in the FDIM that toggles between Fahrenheit and Celsius. ACTION Reprogram the Instrument Cluster module to the latest calibration using IDS release 57.9 and higher with patch 13 or 58.2 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2008.11 DVD. Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 082312A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The Instrument Cluster, Authorization Decal Not Required.(Do Not Use With 12650D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 10849 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Outside Temperature Display > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Outside Temperature Display: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder Ignition Switch Lock Cylinder: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder TSB 09-19-15 10/05/09 IGNITION KEY BINDING IN IGNITION CYLINDER WHEN TURNING TO START POSITION ONLY - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/3/2009 FORD: 2008-2010 Focus, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Focus, Escape, and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/3/2009 may exhibit an ignition key that is binding in the ignition cylinder when attempting to turn to the Start position only. This may be due to a damaged steering column lock module. The brake shift interlock is not affected. ACTION Follow the service procedure to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Verify steering column lock module is the source of concern. a. While on level ground, position the steering wheel in the straight ahead position and remove ignition key. b. Turn the steering wheel clockwise and counterclockwise to verify the steering column lock restricts rotation. The steering lock should engage before +/- 15 degrees of rotation, and will be a hard metal stop in each direction. c. Does the steering column lock engage in each direction? (1) Yes - Do not continue with this procedure. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-14 for additional diagnostics (2) No - Proceed to step 2. 2. Replace the steering column lock module per WSM Section 211-05. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 091915A 2008-2010 Focus: Replace 1.1 Hrs. The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 091915A 2008-2010 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Replace The Steering Column Lock Module (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Outside Temperature Display > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Outside Temperature Display: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 7338 Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3511 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Outside Temperature Display > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Other Service Bulletins for Outside Temperature Display: > 09-19-15 > Oct > 09 > Steering/Ignition - Ign. Key Binds In Ign. Cylinder > Page 7344 Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 3511 01 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Outside Temperature Display > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7345 Outside Temperature Display: Description and Operation EXTERNAL TEMPERATURE DISPLAY The external temperature is displayed when the EXT button is pressed. The external temperature display will update at various rates depending on whether or not the vehicle is at normal operating temperature and if the vehicle has been driven above 40 km/h (25 mph) for greater than 90 seconds. The display update rate can be as low as 0.5°C (1°F) every 20 minutes. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Assist Warning Indicator > Component Information > Diagrams C4015 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-22 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7352 C2015 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7353 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the parking brake release handle bolt. ^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-inch). 2. Disconnect the warning indicator switch electrical connector. 3. Remove the bolt and warning indicator switch. ^ To install, tighten bolt to 10 Nm (89 lb-inch). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 08-23-12 > Nov > 08 > Temperature Display - Toggles From Fahrenheit To Celsius Instrument Panel Control Module: Customer Interest Temperature Display - Toggles From Fahrenheit To Celsius TSB 08-23-12 11/24/08 FRONT DISPLAY INTERFACE MODULE (FDIM) - OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY TOGGLES BETWEEN FAHRENHEIT/CELSIUS FORD: 2008-2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit an outside temperature display in the FDIM that toggles between Fahrenheit and Celsius. ACTION Reprogram the Instrument Cluster module to the latest calibration using IDS release 57.9 and higher with patch 13 or 58.2 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2008.11 DVD. Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 082312A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The Instrument Cluster, Authorization Decal Not Required.(Do Not Use With 12650D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 10849 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 08-19-2 > Sep > 08 > Instruments - Incorrect Autolock/Autounlock Status Instrument Panel Control Module: Customer Interest Instruments - Incorrect Autolock/Autounlock Status TSB 08-19-2 09/29/08 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER / MESSAGE CENTER - AUTOLOCK / AUTOUNLOCK / AUTOLAMP DISPLAY INCORRECT STATUS / MISSING FORD: 2008 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2008 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner This article supersedes TSB 08-15-5 to update the Issue Statement and Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2008 Escape, Mariner and Escape/Mariner Hybrid vehicles built, on or before 6/17/2008 and equipped with a message center instrument cluster may exhibit Autolock / Autounlock / Autolamp exit delay time features that falsely display "Off" regardless of actual feature On/Off status. Any one of these features changed individually may cause the remaining untouched features to default to actual "Off' status. In some vehicles the Autolock / Autounlock feature may not display at all in the message center. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. If the Autolock or Autounlock feature is not displayed in the message center when toggling through the setup, it will need to be enabled using the IDS. If the Autolock or Autounlock features are displayed in the message center skip to Step 2. a. Connect the Ford Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) service tool to the data link connector (DLC). b. ID the vehicle. c. Select the toolbox. d. Select Module Programming. e. Select Programmable Parameters. f. Select Power Door Locks. g. Select Enable for each Autolock / Autounlock selection. 2. Reprogram the instrument cluster to the latest calibration using IDS release B56.8 and higher or IDS release B57.1 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2008.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 081902A 2008 Escape, Escape 0.3 Hr. Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The Instrument Cluster, Authorization Decal Not Required. Includes Time To Enable Autolock Display. (Do Not Use With 12650D, 12651D, 12651D4) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 08-19-2 > Sep > 08 > Instruments - Incorrect Autolock/Autounlock Status > Page 7367 DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 10849 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 08-23-12 > Nov > 08 > Temperature Display - Toggles From Fahrenheit To Celsius Instrument Panel Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Temperature Display - Toggles From Fahrenheit To Celsius TSB 08-23-12 11/24/08 FRONT DISPLAY INTERFACE MODULE (FDIM) - OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY TOGGLES BETWEEN FAHRENHEIT/CELSIUS FORD: 2008-2009 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2008-2009 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2009 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit an outside temperature display in the FDIM that toggles between Fahrenheit and Celsius. ACTION Reprogram the Instrument Cluster module to the latest calibration using IDS release 57.9 and higher with patch 13 or 58.2 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2008.11 DVD. Calibration and IDS patch files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage And Emissions Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 082312A 2008-2009 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Escape Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The Instrument Cluster, Authorization Decal Not Required.(Do Not Use With 12650D) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 10849 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 08-19-2 > Sep > 08 > Instruments - Incorrect Autolock/Autounlock Status Instrument Panel Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Instruments - Incorrect Autolock/Autounlock Status TSB 08-19-2 09/29/08 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER / MESSAGE CENTER - AUTOLOCK / AUTOUNLOCK / AUTOLAMP DISPLAY INCORRECT STATUS / MISSING FORD: 2008 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2008 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner This article supersedes TSB 08-15-5 to update the Issue Statement and Service Procedure. ISSUE Some 2008 Escape, Mariner and Escape/Mariner Hybrid vehicles built, on or before 6/17/2008 and equipped with a message center instrument cluster may exhibit Autolock / Autounlock / Autolamp exit delay time features that falsely display "Off" regardless of actual feature On/Off status. Any one of these features changed individually may cause the remaining untouched features to default to actual "Off' status. In some vehicles the Autolock / Autounlock feature may not display at all in the message center. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. If the Autolock or Autounlock feature is not displayed in the message center when toggling through the setup, it will need to be enabled using the IDS. If the Autolock or Autounlock features are displayed in the message center skip to Step 2. a. Connect the Ford Integrated Diagnostic System (IDS) service tool to the data link connector (DLC). b. ID the vehicle. c. Select the toolbox. d. Select Module Programming. e. Select Programmable Parameters. f. Select Power Door Locks. g. Select Enable for each Autolock / Autounlock selection. 2. Reprogram the instrument cluster to the latest calibration using IDS release B56.8 and higher or IDS release B57.1 and higher. This new calibration is not included in the VCM 2008.7 DVD. Calibration files may also be obtained at the website. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 081902A 2008 Escape, Escape 0.3 Hr. Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Reprogram The Instrument Cluster, Authorization Decal Not Required. Includes Time To Enable Autolock Display. (Do Not Use With 12650D, 12651D, 12651D4) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Relays and Modules - Instrument Panel > Instrument Panel Control Module > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Instrument Panel Control Module: > 08-19-2 > Sep > 08 > Instruments - Incorrect Autolock/Autounlock Status > Page 7377 DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 10849 04 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Buzzer > Component Information > Description and Operation Seat Belt Reminder Buzzer: Description and Operation Safety Belt Warning Indicator and Chime The safety belt warning indicator and warning chime are reminders to fasten the safety belts. The system operates as follows: If the driver safety belt is not buckled before the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the safety belt warning indicator illuminates for one minute and the warning chime sounds for 6 seconds. - If the driver safety belt is buckled while the warning indicator is illuminated and the warning chime is sounding, the safety belt warning indicator and warning chime turn off. - If the driver safety belt is buckled before the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the safety belt warning indicator and warning chime remain off. Belt-Minder(R) The Belt-Minder(R) feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt warning function. This feature provides additional reminders that front safety belts are unbuckled by intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster. Both the driver and passenger safety belts are monitored and either may activate the Belt-Minder(R) feature. The warnings are the same for the driver and the front passenger. If the Belt-Minder(R) warnings have expired (warnings for approximately 5 minutes) for one occupant (driver or front passenger), the other occupant can still activate the Belt-Minder(R) feature. The Belt-Minder(R) feature uses information from the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system on the front passenger seat to determine if a front seat passenger is present and therefore potentially in need of a warning. The warning is activated if the OCS system senses weight exceeding a programmed set point. The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder(R) feature is deactivated/activated independently. When deactivating/activating the Belt-Minder(R) for a seat, do not buckle the safety belts on the other seat, or the process will be terminated. To deactivate/activate the Belt-Minder(R) feature, refer to Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Seat Belt Reminder Lamp > Component Information > Description and Operation Seat Belt Reminder Lamp: Description and Operation Safety Belt Warning Indicator and Chime The safety belt warning indicator and warning chime are reminders to fasten the safety belts. The system operates as follows: If the driver safety belt is not buckled before the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the safety belt warning indicator illuminates for one minute and the warning chime sounds for 6 seconds. - If the driver safety belt is buckled while the warning indicator is illuminated and the warning chime is sounding, the safety belt warning indicator and warning chime turn off. - If the driver safety belt is buckled before the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, the safety belt warning indicator and warning chime remain off. Belt-Minder(R) The Belt-Minder(R) feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt warning function. This feature provides additional reminders that front safety belts are unbuckled by intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning lamp in the instrument cluster. Both the driver and passenger safety belts are monitored and either may activate the Belt-Minder(R) feature. The warnings are the same for the driver and the front passenger. If the Belt-Minder(R) warnings have expired (warnings for approximately 5 minutes) for one occupant (driver or front passenger), the other occupant can still activate the Belt-Minder(R) feature. The Belt-Minder(R) feature uses information from the occupant classification sensor (OCS) system on the front passenger seat to determine if a front seat passenger is present and therefore potentially in need of a warning. The warning is activated if the OCS system senses weight exceeding a programmed set point. The driver and front passenger Belt-Minder(R) feature is deactivated/activated independently. When deactivating/activating the Belt-Minder(R) for a seat, do not buckle the safety belts on the other seat, or the process will be terminated. To deactivate/activate the Belt-Minder(R) feature, refer to Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-21 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7388 C479 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation Fuel Gauge Sender: Description and Operation Fuel Pump (FP) Module Typical Electronic Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module Typical Mechanical Returnless Fuel Pump (FP) Module Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7392 The FP module is a device that contains the fuel pump and sender assembly. The fuel pump is located inside the FP module reservoir and supplies fuel through the FP module manifold to the engine and FP module jet pump. The jet pump continuously refills the reservoir with fuel, and a check valve located in the manifold outlet maintains system pressure when the fuel pump is not energized. A flapper valve located in the bottom of the reservoir allows fuel to enter the reservoir and prime the fuel pump during the initial fill. Fuel Pump (FP) Module and Reservoir The FP module is mounted inside the fuel tank in a reservoir. The pump has a discharge check valve that maintains the system pressure after the key has been turned off to minimize starting concerns. The reservoir prevents fuel flow interruptions during extreme vehicle maneuvers with low tank fill levels. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7393 Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair FUEL PUMP MODULE Exploded View Part 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7394 Part 2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7395 Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7396 Removal and Installation WARNING: - Do not smoke, carry lighted tobacco or have an open flame of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Do not carry personal electronic devices such as cell phones, pagers or audio equipment of any type when working on or near any fuel-related component. Highly flammable mixtures are always present and may be ignited. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. - Before working on or disconnecting any of the fuel tubes or fuel system components, relieve the fuel system pressure to prevent accidental spraying of fuel. Fuel in the fuel system remains under high pressure, even when the engine is not running. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. - Remove the fuel filler cap slowly. The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is venting vapor or if you hear a hissing Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Fuel Gauge Sender > Component Information > Description and Operation > Page 7397 sound, wait until it stops before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may spray out. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. 1. Release the fuel system pressure. 2. Release the fuel tank filler cap and position aside. 3. Insert the special tool into the fuel tank filler pipe until it opens the fuel tank level shutoff valve located at the inlet of the fuel tank. 4. NOTE: Due to the internal design of the fuel tank components, slow fuel drainage may occur. Using the special tools, drain as much fuel as possible from the fuel tank and filler pipe, lowering the fuel level below the fuel pump (FP) mounting flange. 5. Remove the 4 screws and the FP module access cover. 6. NOTE: Clean the FP module connection, couplings, mounting flange and the immediate surrounding area of any dirt or foreign material. Disconnect the FP module electrical connector. 7. NOTE: Place absorbent toweling in the immediate surrounding area in case of fuel spills. Disconnect the fuel supply tube and fuel vapor recirculation tube-to-FP module quick connect couplings. 8. CAUTION: The fuel pump (FP) module must be handled carefully to avoid damage to the float arm and the filter. NOTE: Carefully remove the FP module lock ring and verify that enough fuel has been drained to avoid spillage. - Drain any residual in the FP module into a suitable container. Using a suitable FP module lock ring remover, rotate the lock ring counterclockwise and remove the FP module. 9. NOTE: Inspect the surfaces of the FP module flange and fuel tank seal contact surfaces. Do not polish or adjust the seal contact area of the FP module flange or fuel tank. Install a new FP module or fuel tank if the seal contact area is bent, scratched or corroded. Remove and discard the FP module O-ring seal. 10. NOTE: Apply clean engine oil to the FP module O-ring seal. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-22 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7401 C2015 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Sensors and Switches - Instrument Panel > Parking Brake Warning Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7402 Parking Brake Warning Switch: Service and Repair Parking Brake Warning Indicator Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the parking brake release handle bolt. ^ To install, tighten to 10 Nm (89 lb-inch). 2. Disconnect the warning indicator switch electrical connector. 3. Remove the bolt and warning indicator switch. ^ To install, tighten bolt to 10 Nm (89 lb-inch). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Adjustments Shift Indicator: Adjustments Selector Lever Cable Adjustment 1. Place the floor shift selector lever in the (D) position. 2. Disconnect the selector lever cable end from the manual lever. 3. Place the manual lever in the (D) position. 1 Rotate the manual lever counterclockwise to the PARK position. 2 Rotate the manual lever clockwise 3 detents to the (D) position. 4. Release the selector lever cable adjuster lock. 1 Pull out on the adjuster lock tabs. 2 Slide the lock over to unlock the selector lever cable. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Shift Indicator > Component Information > Adjustments > Page 7406 5. Align the selector lever cable end to the manual lever ball stud and install it with the adjuster unlocked. 6. Slide the adjuster tab in place to lock the selector lever cable. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Low Tire Pressure Indicator > Component Information > Testing and Inspection Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Indicator and Message Center Messages The TPMS indicator and vehicle message center (if equipped) sometimes displays faults that cannot be resolved by the customer. Treat these messages as TPMS faults that must be serviced. Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Indicator Illuminates Continuously NOTE: If the spare tire is in use, the damaged road tire must be repaired and installed on the vehicle to restore complete TPMS functionality before carrying out any diagnosis. NOTE: For vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures (such as E-Series and certain F-Series), the tire pressure sensors must be trained following a tire rotation. Failure to train the sensors will result in a false low tire pressure event, which will cause the TPMS indicator to illuminate. 1. The TPMS indicator remains on continuously for the following condition: ^ Low Tire Pressure - The TPMS indicator is illuminated solid and the message center displays LOW TIRE PRESSURE (if equipped). This is displayed when any of the tire pressures are low. When this condition exists, the tire pressure must be adjusted to the recommended cold pressure as indicated on the vehicle certification label. 2. NOTE: The TPMS sensors do not transmit when the vehicle is stationary. If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, it will be necessary to wake up the sensors so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information to the SJB. If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, carry out the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation procedure. Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Indicator Flashes The TPMS indicator flashes for 70 seconds, then remains ON solid when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position, for the following conditions: 1. Tire Pressure Sensor Fault - If equipped, the message center will display TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR FAULT when a tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning. GO to Symptom Chart. See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures 2. No communication with the SJB (TPMS is integral to the SJB) - The TPMS indicator is illuminated when the instrument cluster has not received any signals from the SJB for more than 5 seconds. If equipped, the message center displays TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT. GO to Symptom Chart. See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures 3. Tire Pressure Monitor Fault - If equipped, the message center will display TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT when the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning or communication with the instrument cluster has been lost. GO to Symptom Chart. See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training Special Tool(s) NOTE: If the vehicle has been stationary for more than 30 minutes, the sensors will go into a "sleep mode" to conserve battery power. It will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information to the smart junction box (SJB). For additional information, refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation. NOTE: The tire pressure sensor training procedure must be done on a single vehicle, in an area without radio frequency noise and at least 1 m (3 ft) away from other vehicles equipped with tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS). Radio frequency noise is generated by electrical motors and appliance operation, cellular telephones, remote transmitters, power inverters and portable entertainment equipment. NOTE: If a sensor does not respond to the activation tool, attempt to activate the same sensor with the activation tool. If the sensor still does not respond, move the vehicle to rotate the wheels at least 1/4 of a turn and attempt to activate the same sensor again. NOTE: The SJB has a 2-minute time limit between sensor responses. If the SJB does not recognize any 1 of the 4 tire pressure sensors during this time limit, the horn will sound twice and the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE NOT TRAINED REPEAT and the entire procedure must be repeated. NOTE: For vehicles with different front and rear tire pressures (such as the E-Series and certain F-Series), the tire pressure sensors must be trained following a tire rotation. Failure to train the sensors will cause the TPMS indicator to illuminate. For vehicles with the same tire pressure for front and rear tires, tire rotation will not affect the system. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then press and release the brake pedal. 2. Cycle the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN position. 3. Press and release the brake pedal. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. 5. Turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the RUN position 3 times, ending in the RUN position. ^ The horn will sound once and the TPMS indicator will flash if the training mode has been entered successfully. If equipped, the message center will display TRAIN LF TIRE. 6. NOTE: It may take up to 6 seconds to activate a tire pressure sensor. During this time, the activation tool must remain in place 180 degrees from the valve stem. Place the activation tool on the LF tire sidewall opposite (180 degrees) from the valve stem. Press and release the test button on the special tool. The horn will sound briefly to indicate that the tire pressure sensor has been recognized by the SJB. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page 7415 7. Within 2 minutes of the horn sounding, place the activation tool on the RF tire sidewall opposite (180 degrees) from the valve stem and press and release the test button to train the RF tire pressure sensor. 8. NOTE: Do not wait more than 2 minutes between training each sensor or the SJB will time out and the entire procedure must be repeated. Repeat Step 7 for the RR and LR tires. The procedure is completed after the last tire has been trained. When the training procedure is complete, the message center (if equipped) will display TIRE TRAINING COMPLETE. For vehicles not equipped with a message center, successful completion of the training procedure will be verified by turning the ignition switch to the OFF position without the horn sounding. If the horn sounds twice when the switch is turned to the OFF position, the training procedure was not successful. 9. Using the scan tool, locate the updated TPMS sensor IDs trained to the SJB and document them on the applicable warranty claim. 10. NOTE: This step is required to clear DTC C2780, cause the SJB to exit the manufacturing mode and to make sure there are no other concerns with a newly programmed SJB. If the sensors are being trained due to the installation of a new SJB, clear any DTCs and perform the SJB on-demand self test. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training > Page 7416 Tire Pressure Sensor: Testing and Inspection Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Activation Special Tool(s) NOTE: The tire pressure sensors will go into a 14 sleep mode" after 30 minutes of inactivity to conserve battery power. The sensors do not transmit information while in sleep mode, it will be necessary to wake them up so they will transmit the latest tire pressure information. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Position the tire pressure monitor activation tool against the LF tire sidewall 180 degrees from the tire valve stem. 3. NOTE: The activation tool will provide feedback in the form of a flashing green light and a beep sound for each successful response from a tire pressure sensor. Press the test button on the activation tool to activate the sensor, activate the sensor at least 2 times. 4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the remaining tires. 5. If the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) indicator remains illuminated after adjusting and activating each sensor, refer to the Symptom Chart in Diagnosis and Testing. See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Disassembly WARNING: The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) sensor battery may release hazardous chemicals if exposed to extreme mechanical damage. If these chemicals contact the skin or eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention. If any part of the battery is swallowed, contact a physician immediately. When disposing of TPMS sensors, follow the correct procedures for hazardous material disposal. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTE: Tire pressure sensors are equipped with Lithium-ion batteries and must be disposed of accordingly. NOTE: Tire pressure sensors are manufactured in multiple colors based on their application. When installing a new sensor, make sure the color of the sensor being installed matches the color of the sensor that was removed. The different colored sensors are not interchangeable. NOTE: The sensor can be removed and installed without removing the strap or the cradle. 1. CAUTION: The sensor, cradle and strap may be damaged by incorrect tire mounting or dismounting. Dismount the tire only as instructed. Remove the tire from the wheel. 2. CAUTION: Do not use a large screwdriver. Apply minimum force during removal or damage to the sensor locking clip may occur. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 7419 Using a pocket screwdriver or similar tool, remove the sensor locking clip. 3. CAUTION: Do not use a large screwdriver. Apply minimum force during removal or damage to the sensor may occur. Using a pocket screwdriver or similar tool, detach the sensor from the cradle. Assembly 1. CAUTION: Damage to the sensor may occur if excessive force is applied during sensor installation. NOTE: Make sure the sensor is fully seated into the cradle. The sensor will make a "click" noise when correctly seated. Position the sensor into the cradle by inserting the fringe end of the sensor into the hook end of the cradle and pushing the opposite end of the sensor down onto the cradle. 2. NOTE: The locking clip can only be fully seated when installed in the correct orientation. If the sensor locking clip cannot be fully inserted, then the sensor may not be fully seated on the cradle or the locking clip may be inserted backward. Insert a new locking clip into the sensor. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 7420 3. CAUTION: The sensor, cradle and strap may be damaged by incorrect tire mounting or dismounting. Mount the tire only as instructed. Install the tire onto the wheel. 4. NOTE: A new tire pressure sensor is shipped in an off mode (or battery saver mode) and must be turned on before it can be trained. To turn the sensor on, install it on a wheel, mount the tire and inflate the tire to the recommended inflation pressure. Wait at least 2 minutes, then continue with the sensor training procedure. Train the tire pressure sensor(s). For additional information, refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 7421 Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Strap and Cradle Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Strap and Cradle Material Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 7422 Disassembly WARNING: The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) sensor battery may release hazardous chemicals if exposed to extreme mechanical damage. If these chemicals contact the skin or eyes, flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention. If any part of the battery is swallowed, contact a physician immediately. When disposing of TPMS sensors, follow the correct procedures for hazardous material disposal. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. NOTE: Tire pressure sensors are equipped with Lithium-ion batteries and must be disposed of accordingly. NOTE: Tire pressure sensors are manufactured in multiple colors based on their application. When installing a new sensor, make sure the color of the sensor being installed matches the color of the sensor that was removed. The different colored sensors are not interchangeable. NOTE: The sensor is available separately, the cradle and strap are available as a strap kit. There are several different strap kits available based on wheel diameter but all strap kits share the same base part number. 1. Remove the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) sensor. For additional information, refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor. 2. WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. WARNING: Wear protective gloves when handling components or parts that have pointed or sharp edges. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. Remove a factory installed strap in the following sequence: 1 Locate the strap buckle and secure the strap to the wheel using duct tape or a similar item, on both sides of the buckle approximately 25 mm (0.98 in) from the buckle. 2 Using a large screwdriver and a twisting motion, unbuckle the strap. 3 Discard the strap. 3. To remove a dealer installed strap, turn the worm gear screw until the strap is fully released from the worm gear. ^ Discard the strap. 4. NOTE: To aid assembly, mark the location of the cradle prior to disassembly. Using a screwdriver, or similar tool, remove the cradle by inserting the screwdriver under the cradle and prying up. Assembly 1. NOTE: Make sure the sensor is fully seated into the new cradle. The sensor will make a "click" noise when fully seated. Position the sensor into the new cradle by inserting the fringe end of the sensor into the hook end of the cradle and pushing the opposite end of the sensor down onto the cradle. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 7423 2. CAUTION: Metal scrapers may damage the wheel. Use only plastic or non-metallic scrapers to remove the cradle adhesive strip residue. NOTE: The sensor and cradle must be installed in the drop well of the wheel, 180 degrees from the valve stem. Clean the area where the sensor and cradle are to be installed. 3. NOTE: The sensor and cradle must be positioned with the hinge side of the sensor on the RH side when viewed from the curb side (beauty side) of the wheel. NOTE: The sensor has raised markings indicating how to position the sensor. Remove the adhesive tape liner from the cradle and position the sensor and cradle into the wheel drop well 180 degrees from the valve stem. 4. Install the tapered end of the strap through the opening of the cradle on the hinge side of the sensor. This will position the worm gear on the locking clip side of the sensor. 5. CAUTION: Steel wheels have a "high spot" along their circumference. Make sure the strap and sensor are mounted at the lowest spot possible to avoid damaging the sensor during wheel and tire disassembly and assembly. NOTE: Keep the strap parallel with the wheel flange while tightening the worm gear. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Tire Monitoring System > Tire Pressure Sensor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor > Page 7424 Position the worm gear 13-26 mm (0.5-1.0 in) away from the sensor and tighten the worm gear. ^ Tighten to 3 Nm (27 lb-in). 6. CAUTION: The sensor, cradle and strap may be damaged by incorrect tire mounting or dismounting. Mount the tire only as instructed. Install the tire onto the wheel. 7. NOTE: A new tire pressure sensor is shipped in an off mode (or battery saver mode) and must be turned on before it can be trained. To turn the sensor on, install it on a wheel, mount the tire and inflate the tire to the recommended inflation pressure. Wait at least 2 minutes, then continue with the sensor training procedure. Train the tire pressure sensor(s). For additional information, refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Sensor Training. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators > Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T > Component Information > Description and Operation Transmission Mode Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation TRANSMISSION CONTROL INDICATOR LAMP (TCIL) The TCIL is an output signal from the PCM that controls the lamp on/off function depending on the engagement or disengagement of overdrive. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Autolamp Sensor View 151-13 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Autolamp Sensor > Page 7433 View 151-13 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Autolamp Sensor C287 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Autolamp Sensor > Page 7436 C286 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7437 Ambient Light Sensor: Service and Repair LIGHT SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Remove the sensor from the instrument panel. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7442 Backup Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Backup Lamp Switch: Locations Transmission Range (TR) Sensor View 151-10 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Transmission Range (TR) Sensor > Page 7447 View 151-11 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Transmission Range (TR) Sensor > Page 7448 View 151-12 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Transmission Range (TR) Sensor C167 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Transmission Range (TR) Sensor > Page 7451 C169 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7452 Backup Lamp Switch: Service and Repair REVERSING LAMP SWITCH Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the reversing lamp switch electrical connector. 2. Remove the reversing lamp switch. - To install, tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Brake Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7457 Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4 "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and relays are identified. Fuse and Relay Numbering and Naming. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Power Distribution Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7458 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information C904 Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7459 disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location Charts. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery set. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing lose clothing. Symbols Symbols (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7460 Symbols (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7461 Symbols (Part 3) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7462 Symbols (Part 4) Symbols (Part 5) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7463 Brake Lamp: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7464 Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7465 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7466 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. 3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7467 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7468 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7469 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7470 Brake Lamp: Connector Views C4032 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7471 C4035 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7472 Brake Lamp: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 90-1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7473 90-2 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Brake Lamp: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Inspection and Verification INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION 1. Verify the customer concern. 2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage. Visual Inspection Chart 3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding to the next step. NOTE: Make sure the headlamp switch is in the OFF position. - Make sure the multifunction switch is in the LOW BEAM position. 4. NOTE: Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release. If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the data link connector (DLC). 5. NOTE: The vehicle communication module (VCM) LED prove-out confirms power and ground from the DLC are provided to the VCM. If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM: Check the VCM connection to the vehicle. - Check the scan tool connection to the VCM. - Refer to Information Bus (Module Communications Network), No Power To The Scan Tool, to diagnose no communication with the scan tool. 6. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle: - Verify the ignition key is in the ON position. - Verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle. - Refer to Information Bus (Module Communications Network) to diagnose no response from the powertrain control module (PCM). 7. Carry out the network test. - If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules, refer to Information Bus (Module Communications Network). - If the network test passes, retrieve and record the continuous memory DTCs. 8. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the smart junction box (SJB). 9. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to DTC Charts. For all other DTCs, refer to Body Control Systems (Multifunction Electronic Control Module). See: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions 10. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Principles of Operation PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION The smart junction box (SJB) monitors the input from the stoplamp switch. When the brake pedal is applied, voltage is routed to the SJB and the high mounted stoplamp. The SJB then supplies voltage to the stoplamps. Field-Effect Transistor (FET) Protection The SJB utilizes a FET protective circuit strategy for many of its outputs (for example, the headlamp output circuit). Output loads (current level) are monitored for excessive current (typically short circuits) and are shut down (turns off the voltage or ground provided by the module) when a fault is Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7476 detected. A continuous DTC is stored at that time for the fault. The circuit will then reset after a customer demand of the function (switching the component on, battery saver being energized). When an excessive circuit load occurs several times, the module shuts down the output until a repair procedure is carried out. At the same time, the continuous DTC that was stored on the first failure will not clear by a command to clear the continuous DTCs. The module will not allow this code to be cleared or the circuit restored to normal operation until a successful on-demand self-test proves that the fault has been repaired. After the on-demand self-test has successfully completed (no on-demand DTCs present), the continuous DTC will have been cleared and the circuit function will return. Each circuit has three predefined levels of short circuit tolerance established in the module based on each circuits' capability. When the first or second level is reached, the continuous DTC associated with the circuit sets along with DTC B106E. These DTCs may be cleared using the Clear DTC operation on the scan tool as long as the fault itself has been corrected. If any of the circuits are shorted past the third level, then B106F and B1342 set along with the associated continuous DTC. This DTC cannot be cleared and the module must be replaced. The SJB FET protected output circuits for the stoplamp system are for the LH rear stop/turn lamp output and the RH rear stop/turn lamp output circuits. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7477 B1485-B2047 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7478 Symptom Chart Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7479 Brake Lamp: Pinpoint Tests Test H: All The Stoplamps Are Inoperative PINPOINT TEST H: ALL THE STOPLAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE Normal Operation The stoplamp switch is supplied voltage through circuit SBP02 (YE/RD) from the smart junction box (SJB). When the brake pedal is applied, the stoplamp switch routes voltage back to the smart junction box (SJB) and the high mounted stoplamp through circuit CCB08 (VT/WH). The SJB provides voltage to the rear lamps when it receives input from the stoplamp switch indicating that the brake pedal is applied. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Stoplamp switch - SJB H1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7480 H1-H3 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7481 H4 Test I: One Or More Stoplamps Are Inoperative PINPOINT TEST I: ONE OR MORE STOPLAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE Normal Operation When the brake pedal is applied, the stoplamp switch routes voltage to the smart junction box (SJB) and the high mounted stoplamp through circuit CCB08 (VT/WH). When the SJB detects the brake pedal is applied, the SJB provides voltage to the LH and RH rear stoplamps through circuits CLS18 (GY/BN) and CLS19 (VT/OG), respectively. If equipped with trailer tow, voltage is also routed to the LH and RH trailer tow stop/turn relays. Ground for the LH and RH rear stoplamps is provided through circuit GD149 (BK/GY). Ground for the high mounted stoplamp is provided through circuit GD183 (BK/WH). DTC B2044 (Left Rear Stop Lamp Circuit Short to Ground) - is a continuous and on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects a short to ground on the LH rear stop/turn lamp voltage supply circuit. DTC B2045 (Left Rear Stop Lamp Circuit Open) - is an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects an open on the LH rear stop/turn lamp voltage supply circuit. DTC B2046 (Right Rear Stop Lamp Circuit Short to Ground) - is a continuous and on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects a short to ground on the RH rear stop/turn lamp voltage supply circuit. DTC B2047 (Right Rear Stop Lamp Circuit Open) - is an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects an open on the RH rear stop/turn lamp voltage supply circuit. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Wiring, terminals or connectors - High mounted stoplamp - Bulb holder - Trailer tow stop/turn relay - SJB I1-I2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7482 I2-I5 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7483 I5-I8 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7484 I8-I10 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7485 I10-I11 Test J: The Stoplamps Are On Continuously PINPOINT TEST J: THE STOPLAMPS ARE ON CONTINUOUSLY Normal Operation When the brake pedal is applied, the stoplamp switch routes voltage to the smart junction box (SJB), the high mounted stoplamp, the PCM and the speed control actuator through circuit CCB08 (VT/WH). When the SJB detects the brake pedal applied, the SJB provides voltage to the LH and RH rear stoplamps through circuits CLS18 (GY/BN) and CLS19 (VT/OG), respectively. If equipped with trailer tow, voltage is also supplied to the respective trailer tow stop/turn relay. DTC B1485 (Brake Pedal Input Short to Battery) - is an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects a short to voltage from the stoplamp switch input circuit. DTC B2045 (Left Rear Stop Lamp Circuit Open) - is an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects a short to voltage on the LH rear stop/turn lamp voltage supply circuit. DTC B2047 (Right Rear Stoplamp Circuit Open) - is an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects a short to voltage on the RH rear stop/turn lamp voltage supply circuit. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Stoplamp switch - Speed control actuator - PCM - SJB Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7486 J1-J7 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7487 J8-J9 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 7488 Special Tool(s) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-22 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7492 C278 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7493 Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation BRAKE PEDAL POSITION (BPP) SWITCH Typical BPP Switch The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal to the PCM indicating that the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and is mounted on the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as follows: - to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake pedal is applied. - to the antilock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM. - to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ABS module interprets the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7494 Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair STOPLAMP SWITCH Removal and Installation CAUTION: Do not service the brake pedal, brake booster, or master cylinder without first removing the stoplamp switch. Do not install the stoplamp switch without the brake pedal arm secured to the brake booster push rod. Do not press or pull on brake pedal when installing or removing the stoplamp switch otherwise misadjustment or damage to the stoplamp switch could occur. 1. NOTE: Rotate the stoplamp switch clockwise approximately 1/8 turn to remove. Remove the stoplamp switch. Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Cargo Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams Cargo Lamp: Diagrams C926A C926B Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Center Mounted Brake Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams C475 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Courtesy Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7505 Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4 "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and relays are identified. Fuse and Relay Numbering and Naming. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Power Distribution Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7506 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information C904 Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7507 disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location Charts. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery set. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing lose clothing. Symbols Symbols (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7508 Symbols (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7509 Symbols (Part 3) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7510 Symbols (Part 4) Symbols (Part 5) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7511 Courtesy Lamp: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7512 Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7513 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7514 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. 3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7515 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7516 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7517 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7518 Courtesy Lamp: Connector Views C918 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7519 C931 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7520 Courtesy Lamp: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 89-1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7521 89-2 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Courtesy Lamp: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Inspection and Verification INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION 1. Verify the customer concern. 2. Visually inspect for obvious signs of mechanical or electrical damage. Visual Inspection Chart 3. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding to the next step. NOTE: Make sure the interior lamp switches are in the DOOR position. 4. NOTE: Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release. If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the data link connector (DLC). 5. NOTE: The vehicle communication module (VCM) LED prove-out confirms power and ground from the DLC are provided to the VCM. If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM: Check the VCM connection to the vehicle. - Check the scan tool connection to the VCM. - Refer to Information Bus (Module Communications Network), No Power to the Scan Tool, to diagnose no communication with the scan tool. 6. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle: - Verify the ignition key is in the ON position. - Verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle. - Refer to Information Bus (Module Communications Network) to diagnose no response from the PCM. 7. Carry out the network test: - If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules, refer to Information Bus (Module Communications Network). - If the network test passes, retrieve and record the continuous memory DTCs. 8. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the SJB. 9. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, go to DTC Charts. For all other DTCs, refer to Body Control Systems (Multifunction Electronic Control Module). See: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions 10. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Principles of Operation PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION The smart junction box (SJB) supplies voltage to the interior lighting system. The interior lighting system illuminates the courtesy lamps while a vehicle door is ajar, and the vehicle speed is less than 5 km/h (3 mph). The SJB controls all interior lighting functions and timing by monitoring inputs from the door ajar switches, the dimmer switch, and the vehicle speed. Interior Mode The interior mode feature allows the user to manually control the interior lamps independent of the ignition position. The interior lights turn on when Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7524 the dimmer switch is rotated to the top (dome) detent. The interior lights are activated by other interior lighting features when the dimmer switch is positioned in the dimming control range. The courtesy lights are kept off when the dimmer switch is rotated to the bottom (dome) detent. Interior Lighting Delay The interior lighting delay feature provides temporary illumination of the courtesy lamps after the doors are opened and then closed. The interior lighting delay feature keeps the courtesy lamps on for a period of 25 seconds. If during the 25-second delay time the SJB detects that the ignition has been turned to RUN, ACC, START, or if the vehicle is locked using the remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitter, the courtesy lamp illumination is discontinued. Illuminated Entry The illuminated entry requests the courtesy lamps to illuminate when the ignition is OFF and the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button is pressed. The illuminated entry requests the courtesy lamps off after 25 seconds have elapsed, the ignition is switched to ON, or when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed. Illuminated Exit The illuminated exit requests the courtesy lamps illuminate for 25 seconds when all doors are closed and the ignition key is removed from the ignition lock cylinder. The illuminated exit deactivates when any door becomes ajar, the ignition key is inserted into the ignition lock cylinder, or 25 seconds have elapsed. Theater Lighting The theater lighting feature ramps-up the courtesy lamps over 0.7 second when courtesy lamp activation is requested. The theater lighting feature ramps-down the courtesy lamps over 1.7 seconds when interior lighting deactivation is requested by any feature other than the panic alarm or the battery saver. Interior Lamp Arbitrator The interior lamp arbitrator (located in the SJB) chooses between the interior lighting, the interior mode, the interior lighting delay, the illuminated entry, the illuminated exit, the battery saver, and the alarm flash processing to determine which feature has precedence of activating and deactivating the interior lamps. The features are prioritized as follows: Alarm flash processing - Battery saver - Interior mode - Interior lighting - Interior light delay - Illuminated entry - Illuminated exit Battery Saver The battery saver is internal to the SJB and provides automatic shut-off of the demand lamps (cargo lamp, vanity lamps, map lamps) and courtesy lamps after a time-out period in order to save battery voltage. A timer in the SJB is started when the ignition is turned to the OFF position. When the time-out period for the lamps has elapsed, the voltage is automatically shut off to the lamps by the battery saver. While the battery saver has voltage disabled, if the ignition is turned to any position other than OFF, the key is removed from the ignition cylinder, the dome lamp switch is turned to the ON position, any door becomes ajar, any button, except the LOCK button, of the RKE transmitter is pressed, or a valid entry code is entered on the keypad, the battery saver restores voltage and starts the timer again. NOTE: Time out is 1 minute if the vehicle has less than 80 km (50 miles). The battery saver time-outs are as follows: Courtesy lamps = 10 minutes - Demand lamps = 10 minutes Field-Effect Transistor (FET) Protection The SJB utilizes a FET protective circuit strategy for many of its outputs (for example, the headlamp output circuit). Output loads (current level) are monitored for excessive current (typically short circuits) and are shut down (turns off the voltage or ground provided by the module) when a fault is detected. A continuous DTC is stored at that time for the fault. The circuit then resets after a customer demand of the function (switching the component on, battery saver being energized). When an excessive circuit load occurs several times, the module shuts down the output until a repair procedure is carried out. At the same time, the continuous DTC that was stored on the first failure will not clear by a command to clear the continuous DTCs. The module will not allow this code to be cleared or the circuit restored to normal until a successful on-demand self-test proves that the fault has been repaired. After the on-demand self-test has successfully completed (no on-demand DTCs present), the continuous DTC will have been cleared and the circuit function returns. Each circuit has three predefined levels of short circuit tolerance established in the module based on each circuits' capability. When the first or second level is reached, the continuous DTC associated with the circuit sets along with DTC B106E. These DTCs may be cleared using the Clear DTC operation on the scan tool as long as the fault itself has been corrected. If any of the circuits are shorted past the third level, then B106F sets along with the associated continuous DTC. This DTC cannot be cleared and the module must be replaced. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7525 The SJB FET protected output circuit for the interior lighting system is the interior lamp output circuit. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7526 Courtesy Lamp: Diagnostic Trouble Code Descriptions B2A35-B2077 B2A36 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7527 Symptom Chart Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7528 Courtesy Lamp: Pinpoint Tests Test A: The Courtesy Lamps Are Inoperative PINPOINT TEST A: THE COURTESY LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE Normal Operation Power is supplied to the courtesy lamps through the smart junction box (SJB) fuse 9 (15A), which supplies voltage to the courtesy lamps solid-state relay in the SJB. When any door is opened, the ajar switch opens, signaling the SJB. The SJB monitors the ajar circuits, and based on the ajar status, the SJB energizes the solid-state relay supplying voltage to the courtesy lamps on circuit VLN33 (GY/VT). The SJB also monitors the dome defeat output through circuit CLN27 (WH/BN). A short to ground on circuit CLN27 (WH/BN) will cause the courtesy lamps to be inoperative. Ground for the courtesy lamps is supplied through circuit GD182 (BK/GY). DTC B2A35 (Courtesy Lighting Output Circuit Open) - is an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects an open from the courtesy lighting circuit. DTC B2A36 (Courtesy Lighting Output Circuit Short to Ground) - is a continuous and on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects a short to ground from the courtesy lighting circuit. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Dimmer switch - SJB A1-A3 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7529 A3-A5 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7530 A6-A7 Test B: An Individual Courtesy Lamp Is Inoperative PINPOINT TEST B: AN INDIVIDUAL COURTESY LAMP IS INOPERATIVE Normal Operation Circuit VLN33 (GY/VT) provides voltage to each demand lamp when activated. The demand lamps are grounded through circuit GD182 (BK/GY). The battery saver function of the smart junction box (SJB) deactivates the voltage to the demand lamps after time-out. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Lamp assembly B1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7531 B1-B2 Test C: The Courtesy Lamps Stay On Continuously PINPOINT TEST C: THE COURTESY LAMPS STAY ON CONTINUOUSLY Normal Operation When any door, liftgate, or liftgate glass is opened, the ajar switch opens the circuit to the smart junction box (SJB). The smart junction box (SJB) monitors the dimmer switch status on circuit CLN17 (BN) to determine if the courtesy lamps are requested. The SJB monitors the door ajar and dimmer switch input circuits, and based on the status, the SJB supplies voltage to the courtesy lamps on circuit VLN33 (GY/VT). DTC B1320 (Driver Door Ajar Circuit Open) - is an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects an open from the LH front door ajar circuit. DTC B1328 (Passenger Door Ajar Circuit Open) - is an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects an open from the RH front door ajar circuit. DTC B1336 (Door Ajar RR Circuit Open) - is an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects an open from the RH rear door ajar circuit. DTC B1572 (Door Ajar LR Circuit Open) - is an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects an open from the LH rear door ajar circuit. DTC B1688 (Lamp Dome Input Circuit Short to Ground) - is an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects a short to ground from the dimmer switch circuit. DTC B2077 (Liftgate Ajar Switch Circuit Failure) - is an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects an open from the liftgate glass or the liftgate ajar circuit. DTC B2A35 (Courtesy Lighting Output Circuit Open) - is an on-demand DTC that sets when the SJB detects a short to voltage from the courtesy lamp circuit. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Dimmer switch - Door ajar switch (part of door latch) - Liftgate ajar switch (part of liftgate latch) - Liftgate glass ajar switch (part of liftgate window latch) - SJB Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7532 C1-C4 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7533 C4-C8 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7534 C8-C10 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7535 C10-C12 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7536 C12-C13 Test D: The Courtesy Lamps Do Not Turn On With One Door Open PINPOINT TEST D: THE COURTESY LAMPS DO NOT TURN ON WITH ONE DOOR OPEN Normal Operation When any door is opened, the ajar switch opens the circuit to the smart junction box (SJB). The SJB monitors the ajar circuits, and based on the ajar status, the SJB supplies voltage to the courtesy lamps on circuit VLN33 (GY/VT). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Door ajar switch (part of door latch) - SJB Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7537 D1-D5 Test E: The Courtesy Lamps Do Not Turn On With The Liftgate Or The Liftgate Glass Open PINPOINT TEST E: THE COURTESY LAMPS DO NOT TURN ON WITH THE LIFTGATE OR THE LIFTGATE GLASS OPEN Normal Operation When the liftgate or the liftgate glass is opened, the ajar switch opens the circuit to the smart junction box (SJB). The SJB monitors the ajar circuits, and based on the ajar status, the SJB supplies voltage to the courtesy lamps on circuit VLN33 (GY/VT). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Liftgate ajar switch (part of the liftgate latch) - Liftgate glass ajar switch (part of the liftgate glass latch) - SJB Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7538 E1 E2-E3 Test F: The Courtesy Lamps Are Inoperative - From The Dimmer Switch PINPOINT TEST F: THE COURTESY LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE - FROM THE DIMMER SWITCH Normal Operation Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7539 The smart junction box (SJB) monitors the dimmer switch status on circuit CLN17 (BN) to determine if the courtesy lamps are requested. Based on the dimmer switch status, the SJB supplies voltage to the courtesy lamps through circuit VLN33 (GY/VT). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Dimmer switch - SJB F1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7540 F2-F4 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7541 F4-F5 Test G: The Demand Lamps Are Inoperative PINPOINT TEST G: THE DEMAND LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE Normal Operation The smart junction box (SJB) supplies voltage to the demand lamps on circuit CLN09 (YE/GN). The demand lamps are grounded through circuit GD182 (BK/GY). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - SJB G1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7542 G1-G3 Test H: An Individual Demand Lamp Is Inoperative PINPOINT TEST H: AN INDIVIDUAL DEMAND LAMP IS INOPERATIVE Normal Operation Circuit CLN09 (YE/GN) provides voltage to each demand lamp when the battery saver relay is activated. The demand lamps are grounded through circuit GD182 (BK/GY). The battery saver function of the smart junction box (SJB) deactivates the voltage to the demand lamps after time-out. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Lamp assembly Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7543 H1-H2 Test I: The Battery Saver Does Not Deactivate After Time-Out PINPOINT TEST I: THE BATTERY SAVER DOES NOT DEACTIVATE AFTER TIME-OUT Normal Operation The smart junction box (SJB) provides a battery saver function. The battery saver function provides automatic shutoff of the interior lamps (demand lamps and glove compartment lamp) after a predetermined time has elapsed in order to save battery power. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Wiring, terminals or connectors - SJB Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7544 I1-I2 Test J: The Illuminated Entry Is Inoperative When Using The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter/Keypad PINPOINT TEST J: THE ILLUMINATED ENTRY IS INOPERATIVE WHEN USING THE REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) TRANSMITTER/KEYPAD Normal Operation The illuminated entry provides courtesy lighting whenever the smart junction box (SJB) receives a lamps on/doors unlock request from the remote keyless entry (RKE) transmitter. The SJB provides the voltage and ground circuits for the courtesy/map lamps. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - RKE transmitter - SJB J1-J2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Courtesy Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 7545 Special Tool(s) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Daytime Running Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7550 Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4 "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and relays are identified. Fuse and Relay Numbering and Naming. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Power Distribution Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7551 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information C904 Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7552 disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location Charts. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery set. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing lose clothing. Symbols Symbols (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7553 Symbols (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7554 Symbols (Part 3) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7555 Symbols (Part 4) Symbols (Part 5) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7556 Daytime Running Lamp: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7557 Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7558 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7559 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. 3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7560 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7561 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7562 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7563 Daytime Running Lamp: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 97-1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7564 97-2 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Daytime Running Lamp: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Inspection and Verification INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION 1. Verify the customer concern. 2. If an obvious cause for an observed or reported concern is found, correct the cause (if possible) before proceeding to the next step. NOTE: Make sure the headlamp switch is in the OFF position. - Make sure the multifunction switch is in the LOW BEAM position. 3. NOTE: Make sure to use the latest scan tool software release. If the cause is not visually evident, connect the scan tool to the data link connector (DLC). 4. NOTE: The vehicle communication module (VCM) LED prove-out confirms power and ground from the DLC are provided to the VCM. If the scan tool does not communicate with the VCM: Check the VCM connection to the vehicle. - Check the scan tool connection to the VCM. - Refer to Information Bus (Module Communications Network), No Power To The Scan Tool, to diagnose no communication with the scan tool. 5. If the scan tool does not communicate with the vehicle: - Verify the ignition key is in the ON position. - Verify the scan tool operation with a known good vehicle. - Refer to Information Bus (Module Communications Network) to diagnose no response from the powertrain control module (PCM). 6. Carry out the network test. - If the scan tool responds with no communication for one or more modules, refer to Information Bus (Module Communications Network). - If the network test passes, retrieve and record the continuous memory DTCs. 7. Clear the continuous DTCs and carry out the self-test diagnostics for the powertrain control module (PCM), the smart junction box (SJB), and the instrument cluster. 8. If the DTCs retrieved are related to the concern, refer to Computers and Control Systems or Body Control Systems (Multifunction Electronic Control Module). 9. If no DTCs related to the concern are retrieved, GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Principles of Operation PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION NOTE: When installing a new smart junction box (SJB), it must be configured for this feature, if originally equipped. Refer to Information Bus (Module Communications Network). The SJB controls the DRL by using various inputs to determine whether or not the DRL should be illuminated. These inputs include: - Ignition switch position - Headlamp switch position - Headlamps on or off - Transmission gear selection (automatic transmission) - Parking brake applied or released (manual transmission) When the DRL is active, the SJB provides a pulse-width modulated (PWM) voltage to the low beam headlamps. This illuminates the headlamps at a reduced intensity. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7567 Symptom Chart Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7568 Daytime Running Lamp: Pinpoint Tests PINPOINT TEST AB: THE DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (DRL) ARE INOPERATIVE Normal Operation When the ignition switch is in the RUN position, the headlamps are not on (from the autolamp system or manual control from the headlamp switch), the transaxle is not in PARK (P) (automatic transaxle) or the parking brake is not applied (manual transaxle), the smart junction switch (SJB) provides a pulse-width modulated (PWM) voltage to the low beam headlamps. This illuminates the headlamps at a reduced intensity. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Exterior lighting system input/output - Ignition switch input - Transaxle gear input (automatic transaxle) - Parking brake switch input (manual transaxle) - SJB AB1-AB3 AB4-AB6 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 7569 Daytime Running Lamp: Adjustments AUTOLAMPS TIME DELAY ADJUSTMENT NOTE: - The time delay can be programmed through the instrument cluster message center using the message center buttons (if equipped) or using the following steps. - Steps 2 through 5 must be carried out within a 10-second period. 1. Start with the ignition switch off and the headlamp switch in the AUTOLAMPS ON position. 2. Place the headlamp switch in the OFF position. 3. Place the ignition switch in the RUN position. 4. Place the ignition switch in the OFF position. 5. Place the headlamp switch in the AUTOLAMPS ON position. The exterior lamps turn on at this point. 6. Wait the desired amount of time and place the headlamp switch in the OFF position (maximum of 3 minutes). The exterior lamps turn off and the autolamp time delay is now set. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Daytime Running Lamp > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 7570 Special Tool(s) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-21 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7574 C479 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair FOG LAMP BULB Mariner Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7579 Escape Removal and Installation WARNING: The bulb contains gas under pressure. The bulb may shatter if the glass envelope is scratched or if the bulb is dropped. Handle the bulb only by its base. Avoid touching the glass envelope. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: The fog lamp bulb should not be removed from the fog lamp until just before a new bulb is installed. Removing the bulb for an extended period of time may affect fog lamp bulb performance. Contaminants may enter the fog lamp where they can settle on the lens and reflector. Never turn on the fog lamps with the bulb removed. NOTE: Make sure the headlamp switch and the ignition switch are in the OFF position. All vehicles 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. Escape 2. Remove the 4 fender splash shield bolts. - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 3. Remove the 4 fender splash shield pin-type retainers. - Position the fender splash shield aside. 4. Disconnect the fog lamp electrical connector. 5. Squeeze both tabs on the fog lamp bulb simultaneously and remove it from the fog lamp. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Fog/Driving Lamp > Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7580 Mariner 6. Rotate the fog lamp bulb approximately one-eighth turn counterclockwise and remove. - Disconnect the electrical connector. All vehicles 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Hazard Warning Lamps > Hazard Warning Flasher > Component Information > Application and ID Hazard Warning Flasher: Application and ID The flasher function for this vehicle is provided by the Smart Junction Box (SJB). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair Headlamp Bulb: Service and Repair HEADLAMP BULB Removal and Installation WARNING: The bulb contains gas under pressure. The bulb may shatter if the glass envelope is scratched or if the bulb is dropped. Handle the bulb only by its base. Avoid touching the glass envelope. Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury. CAUTION: The headlamp bulb should not be removed from the headlamp until just before a new bulb is installed. Removing the bulb for an extended period of time may affect headlamp bulb performance. Contaminants may enter the headlamp where they can settle on the lens and reflector. Never turn on the headlamps with the bulb removed. NOTE: Make sure the headlamp switch and the ignition switch are in the OFF position. 1. Disconnect the headlamp bulb electrical connector. 2. Rotate the headlamp bulb one-eighth turn counterclockwise and remove the headlamp bulb. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Locations View 151-13 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7592 View 151-28 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Multifunction Switch C202 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Multifunction Switch > Page 7595 C2065 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7596 Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7597 Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair Steering column Multifunction Switch Steering Column Multifunctional Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the steering column opening trim. 2. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws. 3. Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds. 4. Remove the 2 multi-function switch screws. 5. Disconnect the multi-function switch electrical connector and remove the switch. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7598 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-13 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7602 C205 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7603 Headlamp Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Headlamp > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7604 Headlamp Switch: Service and Repair HEADLAMP SWITCH Removal and Installation 1. Remove the instrument panel side finish panel. 2. NOTE: The headlamp switch is removed by pushing from behind. Release the tabs and remove the headlamp switch. Disconnect the electrical connectors. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Horn > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-28 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions License Plate Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7613 Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4 "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and relays are identified. Fuse and Relay Numbering and Naming. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Power Distribution Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7614 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information C904 Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7615 disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location Charts. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery set. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing lose clothing. Symbols Symbols (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7616 Symbols (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7617 Symbols (Part 3) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7618 Symbols (Part 4) Symbols (Part 5) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7619 License Plate Lamp: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7620 Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7621 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7622 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. 3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7623 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7624 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7625 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7626 License Plate Lamp: Connector Views C452 C462 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7627 License Plate Lamp: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 92-1 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > License Plate Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7628 Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Marker Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7633 Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4 "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and relays are identified. Fuse and Relay Numbering and Naming. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Power Distribution Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7634 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information C904 Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7635 disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location Charts. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery set. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing lose clothing. Symbols Symbols (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7636 Symbols (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7637 Symbols (Part 3) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7638 Symbols (Part 4) Symbols (Part 5) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7639 Marker Lamp: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7640 Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7641 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7642 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. 3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7643 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7644 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7645 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7646 Marker Lamp: Connector Views C151 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7647 C161 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7648 Marker Lamp: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 92-1 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7649 Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7650 Marker Lamp: Service and Repair SIDE LAMP/FRONT TURN SIGNAL LAMP BULB Side Lamp (Escape) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7651 Front Turn Signal Lamp Bulb (Escape) Removal and Installation Front turn signal lamp 1. Disconnect the front turn signal lamp electrical connector. 2. Rotate the front turn signal lamp bulb holder approximately one-eighth turn counterclockwise and remove from the headlamp assembly. - Separate the bulb from the bulb holder. Side lamp 3. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 4. Remove the 4 fender splash shield bolts. - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 5. Remove the 4 fender splash shield pin-type retainers. 6. Remove the screw and position the fender splash shield aside. 7. Rotate the side lamp bulb holder approximately one-eighth turn counterclockwise and remove from the headlamp assembly. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Marker Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7652 8. Remove the side lamp bulb from the bulb holder. Front turn signal lamp or side lamp 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7657 Parking Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7662 Backup Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Parking Lamp Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7666 Parking Lamp Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations > Left Turn Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations > Left Turn Relay > Page 7671 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Left Turn Relay Turn Signal Relay: Testing and Inspection Left Turn Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Relays and Modules - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Left Turn Relay > Page 7674 Turn Signal Relay: Testing and Inspection Right Turn Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Autolamp Sensor View 151-13 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Locations > Autolamp Sensor > Page 7680 View 151-13 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Autolamp Sensor C287 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Autolamp Sensor > Page 7683 C286 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Ambient Light Sensor > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7684 Ambient Light Sensor: Service and Repair LIGHT SENSOR Removal and Installation 1. Remove the sensor from the instrument panel. - Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Transmission Range (TR) Sensor Backup Lamp Switch: Locations Transmission Range (TR) Sensor View 151-10 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Transmission Range (TR) Sensor > Page 7689 View 151-11 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Transmission Range (TR) Sensor > Page 7690 View 151-12 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Transmission Range (TR) Sensor C167 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Transmission Range (TR) Sensor > Page 7693 C169 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Backup Lamp Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7694 Backup Lamp Switch: Service and Repair REVERSING LAMP SWITCH Removal and Installation 1. Disconnect the reversing lamp switch electrical connector. 2. Remove the reversing lamp switch. - To install, tighten to 24 Nm (18 lb-ft). 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-22 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7698 C278 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7699 Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation BRAKE PEDAL POSITION (BPP) SWITCH Typical BPP Switch The BPP switch is sometimes referred to as the stoplamp switch. The BPP switch provides a signal to the PCM indicating that the brakes are applied. The BPP switch is normally open and is mounted on the brake pedal support. Depending on the vehicle application the BPP switch can be hardwired as follows: - to the PCM supplying battery positive voltage (B+) when the vehicle brake pedal is applied. - to the antilock brake system (ABS) module, or lighting control module (LCM), the BPP signal is then broadcast over the network to be received by the PCM. - to the ABS traction control/stability assist module. The ABS module interprets the BPP switch input along with other ABS inputs and generates an output called the driver brake application (DBA) signal. The DBA signal is then sent to the PCM and to other BPP signal users. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Brake Light Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7700 Brake Light Switch: Service and Repair STOPLAMP SWITCH Removal and Installation CAUTION: Do not service the brake pedal, brake booster, or master cylinder without first removing the stoplamp switch. Do not install the stoplamp switch without the brake pedal arm secured to the brake booster push rod. Do not press or pull on brake pedal when installing or removing the stoplamp switch otherwise misadjustment or damage to the stoplamp switch could occur. 1. NOTE: Rotate the stoplamp switch clockwise approximately 1/8 turn to remove. Remove the stoplamp switch. Disconnect the electrical connector. 2. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-21 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Door Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7704 C479 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Locations View 151-13 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7708 View 151-28 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Multifunction Switch C202 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Multifunction Switch > Page 7711 C2065 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7712 Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7713 Headlamp Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair Steering column Multifunction Switch Steering Column Multifunctional Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the steering column opening trim. 2. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws. 3. Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds. 4. Remove the 2 multi-function switch screws. 5. Disconnect the multi-function switch electrical connector and remove the switch. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Dimmer Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Page 7714 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-13 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7718 C205 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7719 Headlamp Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Headlamp Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7720 Headlamp Switch: Service and Repair HEADLAMP SWITCH Removal and Installation 1. Remove the instrument panel side finish panel. 2. NOTE: The headlamp switch is removed by pushing from behind. Release the tabs and remove the headlamp switch. Disconnect the electrical connectors. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Horn Switch > Component Information > Locations View 151-28 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations Turn Signal Switch: Locations View 151-13 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7727 View 151-28 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7728 C202 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7729 Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair Steering column Multifunction Switch Steering Column Multifunctional Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the steering column opening trim. 2. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws. 3. Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds. 4. Remove the 2 multi-function switch screws. 5. Disconnect the multi-function switch electrical connector and remove the switch. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Sensors and Switches - Lighting and Horns > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7730 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Tail Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7735 Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4 "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and relays are identified. Fuse and Relay Numbering and Naming. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Power Distribution Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7736 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information C904 Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7737 disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location Charts. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery set. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing lose clothing. Symbols Symbols (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7738 Symbols (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7739 Symbols (Part 3) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7740 Symbols (Part 4) Symbols (Part 5) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7741 Tail Lamp: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7742 Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7743 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7744 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. 3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7745 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7746 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7747 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7748 Tail Lamp: Connector Views C1023 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7749 C1043 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7750 C4032 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7751 C4035 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7752 Tail Lamp: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 92-1 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Tail Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7753 Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions Trailer Lamps: Diagram Information and Instructions Introduction Note All wiring connections between components are shown exactly as they exist in the vehicles. It is important to realize, however, that no attempt has been made on the diagrams to represent components and wiring as they physically appear on the vehicle. For example, a 4-foot length of wire is treated no differency in a diagram from one that is only a few inches long. Furthermore, to aid in understanding electrical (electronic) operation, wiring inside complicated components has been simplified. Complete Circuit Operation Each circuit is shown completely and independently in one set. Other components that are connected to the circuits may not be shown unless they influence the circuit operation. Current Flow (1) Each set normally starts with the component that powers the circuit, such as a fuse or the ignition switch. Current flow is shown from the power source at the top of the diagram to ground at the bottom of the diagram. A full representation of the power supply of a fuse or the power distribution from a fuse to various components is given in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Full representation of the ground connections are shown in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Switch Positions (2) Within a diagram, all switches, sensors and relays are shown "at rest" (ignition switch OFF). Splices (3) Splices directly connecting to the power distribution are best represented on the power distribution diagram in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. Splices connected to grounds can be seen completely in the Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams. For all other splices, a reference is given to each off diagram where that particular splice can be best viewed. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7758 Component Referencing (4) Components on a diagram have a reference to a component location view or the diagram where it is shown completely. The reference is located to the right of each component. Component Names (5) Component names are placed on the right hand side of each component when possible. Descriptions of the internals of the component are also included when available. The diagram where the component appears in full is listed in the Index. The base part number for a component is listed in parentheses next to or under a component. Internal Name and Function Identification Numbers (6) Some components on each diagram have internal symbols with an identification number located within it. You can identify the internal symbol or function by finding the corresponding number under the component name. Circuit Numbering and Wire Identification (7) Ford Motor Company uses three different circuit numbering conventions: Standard Circuit Numbering System, Global Circuit Numbering System, and New Global Circuit Numbering System (NGCNS). With each, the circuit number (which identifies a specific circuit function) is followed by the wire color. The wire identification consists of a basic color and possibly a stripe, and is determined directly from the wire's circuit number. In the diagrams, the wire colors are indicated next to the wires. The colors are abbreviated using the international norm IEC 757. The abbreviations are listed in set 4 "Symbols". Fuse and Relay Information Fuse/Locations and Relay/Locations contains a view of the fuse/relay box, in which all fuses and relays are identified. Fuse and Relay Numbering and Naming. Fuse and relay numbering and naming follow the indication of the fuse panel cover. In addition, for all removable relays, pin positions are added to illustrate proper orientation. Power Distribution Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7759 Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams shows the current feed circuits. The current path is shown from the battery to the ignition switch and to all fuses. It also shows the circuits protected by each fuse. The circuit is traced from the fuse to the component. All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the fuse and the first component are shown. Ground Distribution Power and Ground Distribution Diagrams contains the diagram that shows the complete details for each ground connection or main ground splice. This is useful in diagnosing a problem affecting several components at once (poor ground connection or ground splice). All details (wires, splices, connectors) between the ground point and the component are shown. These ground connection details are shown here in order to keep the individual set diagrams as uncluttered as possible. Component and Connector Information C904 Connector Views show the views of the pins and/or cavities of all connectors. The pin and cavity sides are shown separately as if the connector were Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7760 disconnected. The color of the connector housing is indicated next to the connector number when available. The harness causal number is located above the connector view and below the connector number. The circuit function charts are located below each connector. The wiring harness designations are listed in Component Location Charts. Component Location Views show the components and their connecting wires as they can be found on the vehicle. Locations information that can be found at the vehicle level will help the user find where the various items depicted on the diagram can physically be found on the vehicle. A brief written description of the location is given, along with a reference to the component location views. WARNINGS - Always wear safety glasses for eye protection. - Use safety stands whenever a procedure requires being under a vehicle. - Be sure that the IGNITION SWITCH is always in the OFF position, unless otherwise required by the procedure. - Set the parking brake when working on any vehicle. An automatic transmission should be in PARK. A manual transmission should be in NEUTRAL. - Operate the engine only in a well-ventilated area to avoid danger of carbon monoxide. - Keep away from moving parts, especially the fan and belts, when the engine is running. - To prevent serious burns, avoid contact with hot metal parts such as the radiator, exhaust manifold, tail pipe, catalytic converter and muffler. - Do not allow flame or sparks near the battery. Gases are always present in and around the battery set. An explosion could occur. - Do not smoke when working on a vehicle. - To avoid injury, always remove rings, watches, loose hanging jewelry and avoid wearing lose clothing. Symbols Symbols (Part 1) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7761 Symbols (Part 2) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7762 Symbols (Part 3) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7763 Symbols (Part 4) Symbols (Part 5) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7764 Trailer Lamps: Diagnostic Aids Troubleshooting wiring harness and connector hidden concerns The illustrations are known examples of wiring harness, splices and connectors that will create intermittent electrical concerns. The concerns are hidden and can only be discovered by a physical evaluation as shown in each illustration. NOTE: Several components, such as the PCM, utilize gold plated terminals in their connections to the wiring harness. If those terminals need to be replaced, they must be replaced with a gold plated terminal. Terminal not properly seated 1 = Locked terminal 2 = Male half 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Unlocked terminal (Hidden by wire seal) 7 = Seal Check for unlocked terminal by pulling each wire at the end of the connector. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7765 Defective insulation stripping 1 = Proper crimp 2 = Insulation not removed 3 = Wire strands missing 4 = Intermittent signals through pierced insulation Partially mated connectors 1 = Seal 2 = Displaced tab 3 = Female half 4 = Seal 5 = Intermittent contact 6 = Male half 7 = Intermittent contact Lock may be displaced into an unlocked position; pull on the connector to verify the lock. Deformed (enlarged) female terminals 1 = Enlarged 2 = Normal Any probe entering the terminal may enlarge the contact spring opening creating an intermittent signal. Insert the correct mating terminal (Location A) from the service kit and feel for a loose fit. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7766 Electrical short inside the harness 1 = Solder coated wire to ground 2 = Harness protective tape 3 = Intermittent short Solder coated wire pierced through the insulation of another circuit 4 = Grounding foil Electrical short within the harness Splice tape removed 1 = Intermittent short Splice covered 2 = Wire strand 3 = Splice tape 4 = Harness tape Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7767 Broken wire strands in harness 1 = Wiring harness tape 2 = Wiring strand 3 = Broken strands intermittent signal 4 = Circuit insulation Remove the tape and flex/feel each circuit for a reduction in diameter at break. Recommended splicing method - Solder (For 16 AWG and Smaller Diameter Wire Only) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip wires to appropriate length. 3. lnstall heat shrink tubing. 4. Twist wires together. 5. Solder wires together. NOTE: Use rosin core mildly-activated (RMA) solder. Do not use acid core solder. - Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seat wire splice. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7768 6. Bend wire 1 back in a straight line. NOTE: Wait for solder to cool before moving wires. 7. Evenly position heat shrink tubing over wire repair. NOTE: Overlap tubing on both wires. 8. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows Out of both ends of heat shrink tubing. 9. Reconnect battery ground cable. Recommended splicing method - Crimp (For 10-22 AWG Diameter Wire to Like Wire Diameter) 1. Disconnect battery ground cable. 2. Strip 6.35mm (1/4 in) of insulation from each wire end, taking care not to nick or cut wire strands. 3. Install heat shrink tubing. NOTE: Use heat shrinkable tubes marked with ES-1 (16-22 GA) or ES-2 (10-18 GA) to seal wire splice. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7769 4. Select appropriate wire splice for the wires to be spliced. 5. Identify the appropriate crimping chamber on the Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper by matching the wire size on the dies with the wire size stamped on the butt splice. NOTE: Rotunda 164-R5901 Pro-Crimper is the only tool that can be used with these splices. 6. Center one end of the wire splice in the appropriate crimping chamber. 7. If visible, be sure to place the brazed seam toward the indenter. 8. Insert stripped wire into the barrel. 9. Holding the wire in place, barrel squeeze tool handles appropriate ratchet releases. 10. Repeating steps 5-7, crimp the other half of the splice. 11. Check for acceptable crimp. a. Crimp should be centered on each end of the butt splice b. Wire insulation does not enter butt splice. c. Wire is visible through inspection hole of splices. 12. Evenly position supplied heat shrink tubing over wire repair. 13. Use shielded heat gun to heat the repaired area until adhesive flows out of both ends of the heat shrink tubing. 14. Reconnect battery ground cable. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7770 The given chart is to be used when pigtails or terminals are different wire gauge than the vehicle harness. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7771 Trailer Lamps: Electrical Diagrams PLEASE NOTE: Some diagrams may appear to be missing because of gaps in the number sequences. These "gaps" are actually for diagrams that do not apply to the vehicle model selected. 95-1 Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by number (i.e. 13-2, 24-6, 10-2, etc.) within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By Number. See: Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Diagrams > Diagram Information and Instructions > Page 7772 Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Number Locations: Location Views (reference numbers starting with 151-) referred to within these diagrams can be found at Location Views. See: Locations/Component Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Trailer Lamps: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview Principles of Operation PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION The trailer lamps are supplied power by the trailer tow park lamp relay, the LH trailer tow stop/turn relay and the RH trailer tow stop/turn relay and are energized to correspond with the exterior lighting functions of the vehicle. A common ground is provided to the trailer tow connector for the trailer lamps. Inspection and Verification INSPECTION AND VERIFICATION 1. Verify the customer concern. 2. Verify the exterior lighting system of the vehicle is operating correctly. If not, refer to the appropriate pinpoint test. 3. Visually inspect for obvious signs of electrical damage. VISUAL INSPECTION CHART Electrical Battery junction box (BJB) fuse(s): 8 (20A) (trailer tow parking lamps) - 14 (15A) (trailer tow stop/turn relays) - Trailer tow stop/turn relays - Trailer tow parking lamp relay - Trailer 4. If the concern is not visually evident, verify the symptom. GO to Symptom Chart. See: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7775 Symptom Chart Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7776 Trailer Lamps: Pinpoint Tests Test X: The Trailer Lamps Are Inoperative - All PINPOINT TEST X: THE TRAILER LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE - ALL Normal Operation The trailer tow connector receives ground through circuit RAT08 (WH) for all of the trailer lamps. This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Trailer X1 Test Y: The Individual Trailer Lamp Is Inoperative - Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp PINPOINT TEST Y: THE INDIVIDUAL TRAILER LAMP IS INOPERATIVE - TRAILER STOP/TURN LAMP Normal Operation The battery junction box (BJB) fuse 14 (15A) supplies voltage to the LH and RH trailer tow stop/turn relays. The trailer tow stop/turn relay coils are grounded through circuit GD120 (BK/GN). The trailer tow LH stop/turn relay coil receives voltage from circuit CLS18 (GY/BN) when the vehicle LH rear stoplamp is illuminated. When the trailer tow LH stop/turn relay is energized, voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector through circuit CAT06 (YE). The trailer tow RH stop/turn relay coil receives voltage through circuit CLS19 (VT/OG) when the vehicle RH rear stoplamp is illuminated. When the trailer tow RH stop/turn relay is energized, voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector through circuit CAT09 (GN). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Trailer tow stop/turn relay - Trailer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7777 Y1-Y2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7778 Y3-Y4 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7779 Y5 Test Z: The Trailer Lamps Are Inoperative - Trailer Parking Lamps PINPOINT TEST Z: THE TRAILER LAMPS ARE INOPERATIVE - TRAILER PARKING LAMPS Normal Operation The trailer tow parking lamp relay coil receives voltage through circuit CLS30 (VT/WH) when the vehicle parking lamps are illuminated. The trailer tow parking lamp relay coil is grounded through circuit GD120 (BK/GN). The battery junction box (BJB) fuse 8 (20A) supplies voltage to the trailer tow parking lamp relay switch side. When the trailer tow parking lamp relay is energized, the voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector through circuit CAT11 (BN). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Fuse - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Trailer tow parking lamp relay - Trailer Z1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7780 Z1-Z4 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7781 Z4-Z5 Tests AA: The Trailer Lamps Are On Continuously PINPOINT TEST AA: THE TRAILER LAMPS ARE ON CONTINUOUSLY Normal Operation - Trailer Tow Turn/Stoplamp The trailer tow LH stop/turn relay coil receives voltage through circuit CLS18 (GY/BN) when the vehicle LH rear stoplamp is illuminated. When the trailer tow LH stop/turn relay is energized, voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector through circuit CAT06 (YE). The trailer tow RH stop/turn relay coil receives voltage through circuit CLS19 (VT/OG) when the vehicle RH rear stoplamp is illuminated. When the trailer tow RH stop/turn relay is energized, voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector through circuit CAT09 (GN). Normal Operation - Trailer Tow Parking The trailer tow parking lamp relay coil receives voltage through circuit CLS30 (VT/WH) when the vehicle parking lamps are illuminated. When the trailer tow parking lamp relay is energized, voltage is routed to the trailer tow connector through circuit CAT11 (BN). This pinpoint test is intended to diagnose the following: - Wiring, terminals or connectors - Trailer tow relay - Trailer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview > Page 7782 AA1-AA2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Trailer Lamps > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 7783 Special Tool(s) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Flasher > Component Information > Application and ID Turn Signal Flasher: Application and ID The flasher function for this vehicle is provided by the Smart Junction Box (SJB). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Turn Signal Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair Turn Signal Bulb: Service and Repair SIDE LAMP/FRONT TURN SIGNAL LAMP BULB Side Lamp (Escape) Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Turn Signal Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7792 Front Turn Signal Lamp Bulb (Escape) Removal and Installation Front turn signal lamp 1. Disconnect the front turn signal lamp electrical connector. 2. Rotate the front turn signal lamp bulb holder approximately one-eighth turn counterclockwise and remove from the headlamp assembly. - Separate the bulb from the bulb holder. Side lamp 3. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 4. Remove the 4 fender splash shield bolts. - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 5. Remove the 4 fender splash shield pin-type retainers. 6. Remove the screw and position the fender splash shield aside. 7. Rotate the side lamp bulb holder approximately one-eighth turn counterclockwise and remove from the headlamp assembly. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Lamp > Turn Signal Bulb > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7793 8. Remove the side lamp bulb from the bulb holder. Front turn signal lamp or side lamp 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations > Left Turn Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Locations > Left Turn Relay > Page 7798 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Left Turn Relay Turn Signal Relay: Testing and Inspection Left Turn Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Relay > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Left Turn Relay > Page 7801 Turn Signal Relay: Testing and Inspection Right Turn Relay Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations Turn Signal Switch: Locations View 151-13 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7805 View 151-28 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7806 C202 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7807 Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair Steering column Multifunction Switch Steering Column Multifunctional Switch Removal and Installation 1. Remove the steering column opening trim. 2. Remove the 3 lower steering column shroud screws. 3. Remove the upper and lower steering column shrouds. 4. Remove the 2 multi-function switch screws. 5. Disconnect the multi-function switch electrical connector and remove the switch. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Turn Signals > Turn Signal Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7808 6. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Vanity Mirror Lamp, Left C907 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Lighting and Horns > Vanity Lamp > Component Information > Diagrams > Vanity Mirror Lamp, Left > Page 7813 C906 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7819 Heated Glass Element Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Relays and Modules - Windows and Glass > Heated Glass Element Relay > Component Information > Locations > Page 7824 Heated Glass Element Relay: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Window Adjust Switch Power Window Switch: Locations Window Adjust Switch View 151-20 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Window Adjust Switch > Page 7830 View 151-20 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Window Adjust Switch > Page 7831 View 151-19 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Window Adjust Switch > Page 7832 View 151-18 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Adjust Switch Power Window Switch: Diagrams Master Window Adjust Switch C504A Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Adjust Switch > Page 7835 C504B Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Adjust Switch > Page 7836 Power Window Switch: Diagrams Window Adjust Switch C604 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Adjust Switch > Page 7837 C701 C801 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Adjust Switch Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Window Adjust Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Adjust Switch > Page 7840 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Adjust Switch > Page 7841 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Window Adjust Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Adjust Switch > Page 7842 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Sensors and Switches - Windows and Glass > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 7843 Power Window Switch: Service and Repair WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH Removal and Installation NOTE: - LH front window control switch shown, all others similar. - The removal and installation procedures for all window control switches are similar. 1. Remove the front door trim panel or the rear door trim panel. 2. Release the window control switch bezel from the door trim panel. 3. Release the locking tabs and remove the window control switch from the bezel. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Driver Side Front View 151-18 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Driver Side Front > Page 7849 View 151-19 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Driver Side Front > Page 7850 View 151-20 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Locations > Driver Side Front > Page 7851 View 151-20 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Side Front C524 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Side Front > Page 7854 C608 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Side Front > Page 7855 C703 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Driver Side Front > Page 7856 C803 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Window Adjust Switch Power Window Switch: Locations Window Adjust Switch View 151-20 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Window Adjust Switch > Page 7861 View 151-20 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Window Adjust Switch > Page 7862 View 151-19 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Locations > Window Adjust Switch > Page 7863 View 151-18 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Adjust Switch Power Window Switch: Diagrams Master Window Adjust Switch C504A Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Adjust Switch > Page 7866 C504B Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Adjust Switch > Page 7867 Power Window Switch: Diagrams Window Adjust Switch C604 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Diagrams > Master Window Adjust Switch > Page 7868 C701 C801 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Adjust Switch Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Master Window Adjust Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Adjust Switch > Page 7871 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Adjust Switch > Page 7872 Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Window Adjust Switch Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Master Window Adjust Switch > Page 7873 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Power Window Switch > Component Information > Testing and Inspection > Page 7874 Power Window Switch: Service and Repair WINDOW CONTROL SWITCH Removal and Installation NOTE: - LH front window control switch shown, all others similar. - The removal and installation procedures for all window control switches are similar. 1. Remove the front door trim panel or the rear door trim panel. 2. Release the window control switch bezel from the door trim panel. 3. Release the locking tabs and remove the window control switch from the bezel. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched TSB 11-2-15 02/28/11 WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/13/2010 FORD: 2008-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List. ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Fully lower the affected window glass. 2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11 (Exploded View). 3. Fully raise the window glass. 4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of the window glass. Is the distance within specification range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)? a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5. b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5. 5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present? a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 7885 With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors 110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7821453 41 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 7886 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed TSB 10-25-4 12/23/10 FRONT EXTERIOR DOOR GLASS WEATHERSTRIP DEFORMED OR LIFTING - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 517/2010 12/23/10 FORD: 008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/7/2010 may exhibit the front exterior door glass weatherstrip deformed and/or lifting up from the door flange. This may be due to a lack of retention between the door glass weatherstrip and flange. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove affected front exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11 Glass, Frames, and Mechanisms Exploded View. 2. Apply a strip of 3M(TM) Safety-Walk(TM) Slip-Resistant General Purpose Tapes, or similar (obtained locally) to the outer flange surface at the center of the door. Cut grip tape to approximately 2.5" X .5" (64 mm X 13 mm). (Figure 1) 3. Install new revised exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference WSM, Section 501-11 Glass, Frames, and Mechanisms - Exploded View. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102504A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Replace One Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed > Page 7891 Exterior Door Glass Weather Strip Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102504B 2008-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Replace Both Exterior Door Glass Weather Strips Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7821453 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched TSB 11-2-15 02/28/11 WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/13/2010 FORD: 2008-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List. ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Fully lower the affected window glass. 2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11 (Exploded View). 3. Fully raise the window glass. 4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of the window glass. Is the distance within specification range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)? a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5. b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5. 5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present? a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 7897 With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors 110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7821453 41 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 7898 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed TSB 10-25-4 12/23/10 FRONT EXTERIOR DOOR GLASS WEATHERSTRIP DEFORMED OR LIFTING - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 517/2010 12/23/10 FORD: 008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 5/7/2010 may exhibit the front exterior door glass weatherstrip deformed and/or lifting up from the door flange. This may be due to a lack of retention between the door glass weatherstrip and flange. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Remove affected front exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11 Glass, Frames, and Mechanisms Exploded View. 2. Apply a strip of 3M(TM) Safety-Walk(TM) Slip-Resistant General Purpose Tapes, or similar (obtained locally) to the outer flange surface at the center of the door. Cut grip tape to approximately 2.5" X .5" (64 mm X 13 mm). (Figure 1) 3. Install new revised exterior door glass weatherstrip. Reference WSM, Section 501-11 Glass, Frames, and Mechanisms - Exploded View. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 102504A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Replace One Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 10-25-4 > Dec > 10 > Body - Front Door Window Exterior Weatherstrip Deformed > Page 7903 Exterior Door Glass Weather Strip Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) 102504B 2008-2010 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Replace Both Exterior Door Glass Weather Strips Includes Time To Install Grip Tape (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7821453 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7904 Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair DOOR GLASS TOP RUN - FRONT Exploded View Removal and Installation 1. Remove the front door window glass. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass > Front Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7905 2. Remove the front door interior sail panel. - If equipped, disconnect the speaker electrical connector. 3. Remove the 2 front door glass top run bolts. - To install tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 4. Remove the front door glass top run. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Liftgate Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair Liftgate Window Glass: Service and Repair WINDOW GLASS - LIFTGATE Removal and Installation 1. Open the liftgate window glass. 2. Remove the 2 liftgate window glass nut access covers. 3. Through the RH access, disconnect the liftgate window glass electrical harness connector. 4. Disconnect the LH heated window grid wire electrical connector. 5. NOTE: An assistant may be needed to carry out this step. Disconnect the 2 liftgate window glass cylinders. 1 Slide the spring retainer to the end of the socket. 2 Disconnect the socket from the ball stud. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Liftgate Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7909 6. NOTE: An assistant may be needed to carry out this step. Remove the 2 liftgate window glass hinge nuts and the liftgate window glass. To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Transfer components as necessary. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair Quarter Window Glass: Service and Repair WINDOW GLASS - REAR QUARTER Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Material Material Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7913 Removal WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. - Wear protective gloves when handling components or parts that have pointed or sharp edges. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. LH rear quarter window glass 1. If equipped, remove the auxiliary climate control housing. 2. If equipped, remove the bolt and the auxiliary climate control upper housing bracket. All rear quarter window glass 3. Remove the headliner. 4. NOTE: - Lubricate the urethane adhesive with water to aid the special tool when cutting. - Locating pins need to be cut through in order to remove the rear quarter window glass. The new quarter window glass will be equipped with new locating pins. Using the special tool, cut the urethane adhesive from the quarter window glass starting at the top center and working toward the bottom corners and remove the rear quarter window glass. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7914 5. Using a soft brush or vacuum, remove any foreign material or dirt from the pinch weld. Installation All rear quarter window glass WARNING: Do not drive vehicle until the urethane seal has cured. Follow urethane manufacturer's curing directions. Inadequate or incorrect curing of the urethane seal will adversely affect glass retention. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious injury to vehicle occupant(s). 1. Dry fit the rear quarter window glass, making alignment marks with tape or non-staining grease pencil. 2. WARNING: Repair any corrosion found on the pinch weld. The pinch weld is a structural component of the vehicle. Corrosion left unrepaired may reduce the structural integrity of the vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious injury to vehicle occupant(s). NOTE: Do not scratch the pinch weld area. For minor scratches or exposed metal on the pinch weld, see manufacturer's recommendations. Trim the remaining urethane adhesive on the pinch weld to the specification. The existing urethane adhesive surface should be smooth and free of cuts and contamination. 3. Clean the inside of the rear quarter window glass surface with glass cleaner, making sure the ceramic coated area is clean. 4. CAUTION: If installing a LH rear quarter window on the Escape Hybrid, do not apply urethane glass prep to the polycarbonate vent of the window assembly. NOTE: Be sure to use the same brand and cure-rate products for the adhesive and primer. Do not mix different brands of urethane and primer. Refer to the Material Chart. - Sika uses the same black primer for the glass and pinch weld area. If installing a new rear window glass, apply urethane glass primer according to manufacturer's instructions. Allow at least 6 minutes to dry. 5. Cut the urethane adhesive applicator tip to specification. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Quarter Window Glass > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 7915 6. NOTE: - Use caution when applying urethane adhesive. Apply to the outside edges of locating pins on the glass surface. - Use either a high-ratio electric or battery-operated caulk gun that will apply the urethane with less effort and a continuous bead. Apply a bead of urethane adhesive starting at the bottom and work around to the sides of the rear quarter window glass to specification. 7. Install the rear quarter window glass, aligning it to the marks previously made. 8. NOTE: The urethane adhesive must cure for a minimum of one hour before testing for air or water leaks. After the urethane has cured, check for water leaks and add urethane adhesive where needed. 9. If necessary, remove excess urethane adhesive from the exterior surface of the quarter window glass. 10. Install the headliner. LH quarter window glass 11. If equipped, install the auxiliary climate control upper housing bracket and the bolt. 12. If equipped, install the auxiliary climate control housing. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Customer Interest Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched TSB 11-2-15 02/28/11 WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/13/2010 FORD: 2008-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List. ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Fully lower the affected window glass. 2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11 (Exploded View). 3. Fully raise the window glass. 4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of the window glass. Is the distance within specification range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)? a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5. b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5. 5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present? a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 7925 With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors 110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7821453 41 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 7926 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched TSB 11-2-15 02/28/11 WINDOW SQUEAK NOISE AND/OR VERTICAL WINDOW GLASS SCRATCH - BUILT ON OR BEFORE 8/13/2010 FORD: 2008-2011 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2011 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-25-5 to update the Part List. ISSUE Some 2008-2011 Escape and Mariner vehicles built on or before 8/13/2010 may exhibit a front and/or rear window glass squeak noise with or without side window vertical window glass scratch. This may be due to a tolerance stack up condition and/or incorrect door flange adjustment. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Fully lower the affected window glass. 2. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-11 (Exploded View). 3. Fully raise the window glass. 4. Measure the distance from the inside edge of the weatherstrip flange to the outside sur[ace of the window glass. Is the distance within specification range of 1/4" (6 mm) to 3/8" (10 mm)? a. Yes - Proceed to Step 5. b. No - Using a suitable tool, evenly adjust the flange into specification. Proceed to Step 5. 5. Inspect the side window glass for evidence of vertical scratches. Are scratches present? a. Yes - Replace the affected side window glass and exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. b. No - Replace the affected exterior door glass weatherstrip. Refer to WSM, Section 501-11. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 110215A 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 110215B 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 7932 With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215C 2008-2011 Escape, 0.2 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215D 2008-2011 Escape, 0.3 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors 110215E 2008-2011 Escape, 0.5 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Front Door 11021SF 2008-2011 Escape, 1.0 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Front Doors 110215G 2008-2011 Escape, 0.8 Hr. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) One (1) Rear Door 110215H 2008-2011 Escape, 1.5 Hrs. Mariner: Measure And Adjust Flange, Install New Door Glass, And Exterior Door Glass Weatherstrip (Do Not Use With Any Labor Operations Outside Of This Article) Both (2) Rear Doors DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 7821453 41 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: > 11-2-15 > Feb > 11 > Body - Front/Rear Door Window Noise/Glass Scratched > Page 7933 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7934 Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip: Service and Repair DOOR GLASS TOP RUN - REAR Exploded View Part 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass > Rear Door Window Glass Weatherstrip > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Page 7935 Part 2 Removal and Installation 1. Remove the rear door window regulator. 2. Position the rear door window glass to the full down position. 3. Remove the 2 screws and the rear door exterior sail panel. 4. Remove the interior door glass weatherstrip. 5. Remove the exterior door glass weatherstrip. 6. Remove the rear door glass top run bolt. - To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 7. Position the rear door window glass down and forward. 8. Remove the rear door glass top run. 9. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair WINDOW REGULATOR - FRONT DOOR Exploded View Removal and Installation 1. Remove the front door trim panel. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 7940 2. Remove the screw and the front door trim panel bracket. 3. Remove the 3 pushpins and pad assembly. 4. Position the watershield aside. 5. Connect the window control switch electrical connector. 6. Using the window control switch, lower the front door window glass to gain access to the front door window glass screws. 7. Disconnect the window control switch electrical connector. 8. Remove the 2 front door window glass screws. - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 9. Support the front door window glass in the full up position with tape. 10. Disconnect the front door window motor electrical connector. 11. Remove the front door window regulator and motor bolt. - To install, tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Front Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 7941 12. Loosen the 2 front door window regulator and motor bolts. - To install, tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft). 13. Remove the 2 nuts and the front door window regulator and motor. - To install, tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft). 14. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair WINDOW REGULATOR - REAR DOOR Exploded View Part 1 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 7945 Part 2 Removal and Installation 1. Remove the rear door trim panel. 2. Remove the screw and the rear door trim panel bracket. 3. Position the watershield aside. 4. Connect the window control switch electrical connector. 5. Using the window control switch, lower the rear door window glass to gain access to the rear door window glass screws. 6. Disconnect the window control switch electrical connector. 7. Remove the 2 rear door window glass screws. - To install, tighten to 5 Nm (44 lb-in). 8. Support the rear door window glass in the full up position with tape. 9. Disconnect the rear door window motor electrical connector. 10. Remove the rear door window regulator and motor bolt. - To install, tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windows > Window Regulator > Rear Door Window Regulator > System Information > Service and Repair > Page 7946 11. Loosen the 2 rear door window regulator and motor bolts. - To install, tighten to 11 Nm (8 lb-ft). 12. Remove the 2 nuts and the rear door window regulator and motor. - To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 13. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures Windshield: Procedures GLASS RESEAL - WINDSHIELD Material Material 1. Remove the LH and RH A-pillar trim panels. 2. Remove the 2 windshield side garnish mouldings. 3. Open the front overhead console door, remove the 2 screws and the overhead console. - If equipped, disconnect the electrical connector. 4. Remove the LH and RH sun visors and visor clips. - If equipped, disconnect the electrical connectors. 5. Partially lower the front portion of the headliner and block with a suitable material. 6. Remove the cowl panel grille. 7. Clean the interior and exterior of the windshield glass surface with glass cleaner. 8. Cut the urethane adhesive applicator tip to specification. 9. NOTE: - Use either a high-ratio electric or battery-operated caulk gun that will apply the urethane with less effort and a continuous bead. - Make sure all gaps in the urethane adhesive are smoothed into one continuous bead. Apply urethane adhesive over the top of the existing urethane adhesive. Apply the urethane adhesive to the top and sides of the windshield from the interior of the vehicle. - Apply the urethane adhesive to the bottom of the windshield from the exterior of the vehicle. 10. NOTE: The urethane adhesive must cure for a minimum of one hour before testing for air or water leaks. After the urethane has cured, check the windshield seal for air or water leaks through the urethane adhesive bead and add urethane adhesive as necessary. 11. Install the cowl panel grille. 12. Position the front portion of the headliner. 13. Install the LH and RH sun visors and visor clips. - If equipped, connect the electrical connectors. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7951 14. Position the overhead console and install the 2 overhead console screws. - If equipped, connect the electrical connector. 15. Install the 2 windshield side garnish mouldings. 16. Install the LH and RH A-pillar trim panels. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7952 Windshield: Removal and Replacement WINDSHIELD GLASS Special Tool(s) Special Tool(s) Material Material Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7953 Removal WARNING: Always wear eye protection when servicing a vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. - Wear protective gloves when handling components or parts that have pointed or sharp edges. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious personal injury. 1. Remove the LH and RH A-pillar trim panels. 2. Remove the 2 windshield side garnish mouldings. 3. Open the front overhead console door, remove the 2 screws and the overhead console. - If equipped, disconnect the electrical connector. 4. Remove the interior rear view mirror. 5. Remove the LH and RH sun visors and visor clips. - If equipped, disconnect the electrical connectors. 6. Partially lower the front portion of the headliner and block with a suitable material. 7. Remove the cowl panel grille. 8. Using a soft brush or vacuum, remove any dirt or foreign material from the pinch weld. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7954 9. NOTE: Lubricate the urethane adhesive with water to aid the special tool when cutting. Using the special tool, cut the urethane adhesive from the windshield glass starting at the top center and working toward the bottom corners. 10. Using the special tool, distance the windshield glass from the body. 11. Using the special tool, cut the remaining urethane adhesive and remove the windshield glass. 12. Using a soft brush or vacuum, remove any foreign material or dirt from the pinch weld. Installation WARNING: Do not drive vehicle until the urethane seal has cured. Follow urethane manufacturer's curing directions. Inadequate or incorrect curing of the urethane seal will adversely affect glass retention. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious injury to vehicle occupant(s). CAUTION: Open the windows to prevent the windshield glass from being pushed out by air pressure if the doors are closed. 1. Dry fit the windshield glass, making alignment marks with tape or a non-staining grease pencil. 2. WARNING: Repair any corrosion found on the pinch weld. The pinch weld is a structural component of the vehicle. Corrosion left unrepaired may reduce the structural integrity of the vehicle. Failure to follow this instruction may result in serious injury to vehicle occupant(s). NOTE: Do not scratch the pinch weld area. For minor scratches or exposed metal on the pinch weld, see manufacturer's recommendations. Trim the remaining urethane adhesive on the pinch weld to within the specification. The existing urethane adhesive surface should be smooth and free of cuts and contamination. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Windows and Glass > Windshield > Component Information > Service and Repair > Procedures > Page 7955 3. If reinstalling the original windshield glass, remove the excess urethane adhesive and the windshield moulding. 4. Clean the inside of the windshield glass surface with glass cleaner making sure the ceramic-coated area is clean. 5. NOTE: - Be sure to use the same brand and cure-rate products for the adhesive and primer. Do not mix different brands of urethane and primer. Refer to the Material Chart. - Sika uses the same black primer for the glass and pinch weld area. If installing a new windshield glass, apply urethane glass primer according to manufacturer's instructions. Allow at least 6 minutes to dry. 6. Cut the urethane adhesive applicator tip to specification. 7. NOTE: Use either a high-ratio electric or battery-operated caulk gun that will apply the urethane with less effort and a continuous bead. Apply urethane adhesive on top of the existing trimmed urethane adhesive bead on the pinch weld. Make sure that all gaps in the urethane adhesive are smoothed into one continuous bead starting and ending at the bottom of the windshield near the center. 8. Install the windshield glass, aligning it to the marks previously made. 9. NOTE: The urethane adhesive must cure for a minimum of one hour before testing for air and water leaks. After the urethane adhesive has cured, check for water leaks and add urethane adhesive where needed. 10. If necessary, remove excess urethane adhesive from the exterior surface of the windshield glass. 11. Install the cowl panel grille. 12. Reposition the front portion of the headliner. 13. Install the LH and RH sun visors and visor clips. - If equipped, connect the electrical connectors. 14. Install the interior rear view mirror. 15. Position the overhead console and install the 2 overhead console screws. - If equipped, connect the electrical connector. 16. Install the 2 windshield side garnish mouldings. 17. Install the LH and RH A-pillar trim panels. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Check Valve, Washer > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Check Valve: > 10-13-1 > Jul > 10 > Wipers/Washers - Washer Nozzles Leak Fluid Onto Hood Check Valve: Customer Interest Wipers/Washers - Washer Nozzles Leak Fluid Onto Hood TSB 10-13-1 07/19/10 WASHER NOZZLES LEAKING FLUID ONTO HOOD WHILE DRIVING FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-12-5 to update the Part List ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit the washer nozzles leaking washer fluid onto the hood while driving. A service kit is now available for this condition. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Install check valves and elbows to the hood hose. Add check valve to liftgate hose. Reverse washer pump motor polarity and swap hoses at the pump. Refer to the instruction sheets included in the kit. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101301A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr. Mariner: Install Service Kit Includes Time To Remove And Install The High Mount Stop Lamp (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 17K605 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Check Valve, Washer > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Check Valve: > 10-13-1 > Jul > 10 > Wipers/Washers - Washer Nozzles Leak Fluid Onto Hood Check Valve: All Technical Service Bulletins Wipers/Washers - Washer Nozzles Leak Fluid Onto Hood TSB 10-13-1 07/19/10 WASHER NOZZLES LEAKING FLUID ONTO HOOD WHILE DRIVING FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-12-5 to update the Part List ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit the washer nozzles leaking washer fluid onto the hood while driving. A service kit is now available for this condition. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Install check valves and elbows to the hood hose. Add check valve to liftgate hose. Reverse washer pump motor polarity and swap hoses at the pump. Refer to the instruction sheets included in the kit. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101301A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr. Mariner: Install Service Kit Includes Time To Remove And Install The High Mount Stop Lamp (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 17K605 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations Windshield Washer Switch: Locations View 151-13 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7974 View 151-28 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7975 C202 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7976 Windshield Washer Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations Wiper Switch: Locations View 151-13 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7980 View 151-28 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7981 C202 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Sensors and Switches - Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 7982 Wiper Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Hose > Component Information > Service and Repair Windshield Washer Hose: Service and Repair WASHER HOSE REPAIR NOTE: This procedure may be carried out on rubber hoses only. If a plastic washer hose is leaking, a new washer hose must be installed. 1. Locate and verify the leaking washer hose. 2. Cut the hose cleanly and remove the damaged portion of the washer hose. 3. Install a windshield washer hose adapter between the cut ends of the hose. 4. NOTE: In difficult cases, clamping may be required. Install a segment of 6.4 mm (0.25 in) ID black rubber hose over the ends of the washer hose and clamp both ends of the rubber hose using spring clamps. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Motor > Component Information > Locations View 151-2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Motor > Component Information > Locations > Page 7989 C1397 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Washer Pump Windshield Washer Pump: Service and Repair Washer Pump WASHER PUMP Exploded View Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the RH front fender splash shield. 3. Disconnect the washer pump electrical connector. 4. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the connector, do not use hand tools to remove/install the washer pump hose. NOTE: To prevent spilling windshield washer fluid, drain the windshield washer reservoir before washer pump removal. Disconnect the washer pump hoses. Gently twist the lock ring until the ring has rotated approximately 90 degrees. - The hose should slide easily out of the connection. - To install, make sure the hoses are fully seated and locked into place. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Washer Pump > Page 7994 5. CAUTION: Do not leave the lock ring in the disassembled position. This will weaken the ring and may prevent it from correctly locking in place when reassembled, resulting in a leak. Rotate the lock ring back to the original location. 6. CAUTION: When installing a new washer pump, be careful not to damage the rubber grommet. Remove the washer pump. 7. CAUTION: Do not operate the washer pump prior to filling the windshield washer reservoir. Failure to follow these instructions may result in premature pump failure. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Fill the windshield washer reservoir with windshield washer fluid. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Washer Pump > Page 7995 Windshield Washer Pump: Service and Repair Washer Pump and Reservoir WASHER PUMP AND RESERVOIR Exploded View Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the RH front fender splash shield. 3. Disconnect the washer pump electrical connector. 4. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the connector, do not use hand tools to remove/install the washer pump hose. NOTE: To prevent spilling windshield washer fluid, drain the windshield washer reservoir before removal. Disconnect the washer pump hoses. Gently twist the lock ring until the ring has rotated approximately 90 degrees. - The hose should slide easily out of the connection. - To install, make sure the hoses are fully seated and locked into place. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Pump > Component Information > Service and Repair > Washer Pump > Page 7996 5. CAUTION: Do not leave the lock ring in the disassembled position. This will weaken the ring and may prevent it from correctly locking in place when reassembled, resulting in a leak. Rotate the lock ring back to the original location. 6. Remove the 2 windshield washer reservoir bolts and the windshield washer reservoir. - To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 7. CAUTION: Do not operate the washer pump prior to filling the windshield washer reservoir. Failure to follow these instructions may result in premature pump failure. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Fill the windshield washer reservoir with windshield washer fluid. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair Windshield Washer Reservoir: Service and Repair WASHER PUMP AND RESERVOIR Exploded View Removal and Installation 1. With the vehicle in NEUTRAL, position it on a hoist. 2. Remove the RH front fender splash shield. 3. Disconnect the washer pump electrical connector. 4. WARNING: Carefully read cautionary information on product label. For EMERGENCY MEDICAL INFORMATION seek medical advice. Failure to follow these instructions may result in serious personal injury. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the connector, do not use hand tools to remove/install the washer pump hose. NOTE: To prevent spilling windshield washer fluid, drain the windshield washer reservoir before removal. Disconnect the washer pump hoses. Gently twist the lock ring until the ring has rotated approximately 90 degrees. - The hose should slide easily out of the connection. - To install, make sure the hoses are fully seated and locked into place. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Reservoir > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8000 5. CAUTION: Do not leave the lock ring in the disassembled position. This will weaken the ring and may prevent it from correctly locking in place when reassembled, resulting in a leak. Rotate the lock ring back to the original location. 6. Remove the 2 windshield washer reservoir bolts and the windshield washer reservoir. - To install, tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 7. CAUTION: Do not operate the washer pump prior to filling the windshield washer reservoir. Failure to follow these instructions may result in premature pump failure. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Fill the windshield washer reservoir with windshield washer fluid. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: > 10-13-1 > Jul > 10 > Wipers/Washers - Washer Nozzles Leak Fluid Onto Hood Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: Customer Interest Wipers/Washers - Washer Nozzles Leak Fluid Onto Hood TSB 10-13-1 07/19/10 WASHER NOZZLES LEAKING FLUID ONTO HOOD WHILE DRIVING FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-12-5 to update the Part List ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit the washer nozzles leaking washer fluid onto the hood while driving. A service kit is now available for this condition. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Install check valves and elbows to the hood hose. Add check valve to liftgate hose. Reverse washer pump motor polarity and swap hoses at the pump. Refer to the instruction sheets included in the kit. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101301A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr. Mariner: Install Service Kit Includes Time To Remove And Install The High Mount Stop Lamp (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 17K605 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: > 10-13-1 > Jul > 10 > Wipers/Washers - Washer Nozzles Leak Fluid Onto Hood Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: All Technical Service Bulletins Wipers/Washers - Washer Nozzles Leak Fluid Onto Hood TSB 10-13-1 07/19/10 WASHER NOZZLES LEAKING FLUID ONTO HOOD WHILE DRIVING FORD: 2008-2010 Escape MERCURY: 2008-2010 Mariner This article supersedes TSB 10-12-5 to update the Part List ISSUE Some 2008-2010 Escape and Mariner vehicles may exhibit the washer nozzles leaking washer fluid onto the hood while driving. A service kit is now available for this condition. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Install check valves and elbows to the hood hose. Add check valve to liftgate hose. Reverse washer pump motor polarity and swap hoses at the pump. Refer to the instruction sheets included in the kit. Parts Block WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 101301A 2008-2010 Escape, 0.9 Hr. Mariner: Install Service Kit Includes Time To Remove And Install The High Mount Stop Lamp (Do Not Use With Any Other Labor Operations) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 17K605 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations Windshield Washer Switch: Locations View 151-13 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8017 View 151-28 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8018 C202 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Windshield Washer Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8019 Windshield Washer Switch: Testing and Inspection Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wiper Arm: > 09-8-8 > May > 09 > Wipers/Washers - Wipers Streak/Smear Windshield Wiper Arm: Customer Interest Wipers/Washers - Wipers Streak/Smear Windshield TSB 09-8-8 05/04/09 WINDSHIELD WIPER PERFORMANCE - BUILT BEFORE 4/1/2008 FORD: 2008 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2008 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some 2008 Escape and Mariner vehicles, built before 4/1/2008, may exhibit windshield wiper performance issues, such as smearing/streaking, near the middle of the blade during 2nd half of travel. A new wiper arm has been released to improve wiper performance. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Inspect part number on vehicle wiper arm(s). (Figure 1) 2. If part number starts with 8L84-, then replace both windshield wiper arm(s) and blade(s) per Workshop Manual, Section 501-16. If the part number starts with 9L84-, then this procedure does not apply and the vehicle is already equipped with the latest parts. NOTE WIPER BLADES ARE NOT COVERED UNDER WARRANTY BEYOND THE FIRST 12 MONTHS IN SERVICE. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wiper Arm: > 09-8-8 > May > 09 > Wipers/Washers - Wipers Streak/Smear Windshield > Page 8028 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 090808A 2008 Escape, Escape 0.3 Hr. Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Replace Both Wiper Arms And Blades (Do Not Use With 17526A, 17528A) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 17527 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > Customer Interest for Wiper Arm: > 07-23-16 > Nov > 07 > Wipers/Washers - Wiper Chatter or Noise Wiper Arm: Customer Interest Wipers/Washers - Wiper Chatter or Noise TSB 07-23-16 11/26/07 WINDSHIELD WIPER CHATTER/NOISE - BUILT ONLY ON 4/14/2007 FORD: 2008 Escape MERCURY: 2008 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008 Escape and Mariner vehicles built only on 4/14/2007 may exhibit a windshield wiper chatter or noise when the blades reverse at the top of their travel. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Replace the wiper arm, refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-16. NOTE IT SHOULD NOT BE NECESSARY TO REPLACE BOTH OF THE WIPER ARMS. THE CONCERN IS TYPICALLY EXHIBITED ON ONLY ONE. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 072316A 2008 Escape, Mariner Built 0.3 Hr. On 4/14/2007: Replace One Or Both Windshield Wiper Arm(s) (Do Not Use With 17526A) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 17526 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Arm: > 09-8-8 > May > 09 > Wipers/Washers - Wipers Streak/Smear Windshield Wiper Arm: All Technical Service Bulletins Wipers/Washers - Wipers Streak/Smear Windshield TSB 09-8-8 05/04/09 WINDSHIELD WIPER PERFORMANCE - BUILT BEFORE 4/1/2008 FORD: 2008 Escape Hybrid, Escape MERCURY: 2008 Mariner Hybrid, Mariner ISSUE Some 2008 Escape and Mariner vehicles, built before 4/1/2008, may exhibit windshield wiper performance issues, such as smearing/streaking, near the middle of the blade during 2nd half of travel. A new wiper arm has been released to improve wiper performance. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE 1. Inspect part number on vehicle wiper arm(s). (Figure 1) 2. If part number starts with 8L84-, then replace both windshield wiper arm(s) and blade(s) per Workshop Manual, Section 501-16. If the part number starts with 9L84-, then this procedure does not apply and the vehicle is already equipped with the latest parts. NOTE WIPER BLADES ARE NOT COVERED UNDER WARRANTY BEYOND THE FIRST 12 MONTHS IN SERVICE. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Arm: > 09-8-8 > May > 09 > Wipers/Washers - Wipers Streak/Smear Windshield > Page 8038 OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 090808A 2008 Escape, Escape 0.3 Hr. Hybrid, Mariner, Mariner Hybrid: Replace Both Wiper Arms And Blades (Do Not Use With 17526A, 17528A) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 17527 07 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Technical Service Bulletins > All Technical Service Bulletins for Wiper Arm: > 07-23-16 > Nov > 07 > Wipers/Washers - Wiper Chatter or Noise Wiper Arm: All Technical Service Bulletins Wipers/Washers - Wiper Chatter or Noise TSB 07-23-16 11/26/07 WINDSHIELD WIPER CHATTER/NOISE - BUILT ONLY ON 4/14/2007 FORD: 2008 Escape MERCURY: 2008 Mariner ISSUE Some 2008 Escape and Mariner vehicles built only on 4/14/2007 may exhibit a windshield wiper chatter or noise when the blades reverse at the top of their travel. ACTION Follow the Service Procedure steps to correct the condition. SERVICE PROCEDURE Replace the wiper arm, refer to Workshop Manual (WSM), Section 501-16. NOTE IT SHOULD NOT BE NECESSARY TO REPLACE BOTH OF THE WIPER ARMS. THE CONCERN IS TYPICALLY EXHIBITED ON ONLY ONE. WARRANTY STATUS: Eligible Under Provisions Of New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage IMPORTANT: Warranty coverage limits/policies are not altered by a TSB. Warranty coverage limits are determined by the identified causal part. OPERATION DESCRIPTION TIME 072316A 2008 Escape, Mariner Built 0.3 Hr. On 4/14/2007: Replace One Or Both Windshield Wiper Arm(s) (Do Not Use With 17526A) DEALER CODING CONDITION BASIC PART NO. CODE 17526 42 Disclaimer Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Adjustments > Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment - Windshield Wiper Arm: Adjustments Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment - Windshield WIPER BLADE AND PIVOT ARM ADJUSTMENT - WINDSHIELD 1. Cycle and park the windshield wipers. 2. Verify that the RH and LH wiper blades are located at the specified position. 3. NOTE: Make sure there is no mechanical binding in the linkage preventing the wiper arms from returning to the fully parked position. If not within specification, remove the nuts and the windshield wiper pivot arms and reposition them to the correct locations. To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Adjustments > Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment - Windshield > Page 8045 Wiper Arm: Adjustments Wiper Blade and Pivot Arm Adjustment - Rear WIPER BLADE AND PIVOT ARM ADJUSTMENT - REAR 1. Cycle and park the rear window wiper. 2. Verify that the rear window wiper blade is located at the specified position. 3. If not within specification, remove the rear window wiper pivot arm and reposition it to the correct location. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Pivot Arm - Windshield Wiper Wiper Arm: Service and Repair Wiper Pivot Arm - Windshield Wiper WIPER PIVOT ARM - WINDSHIELD WIPER Exploded View Removal and Installation Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Pivot Arm - Windshield Wiper > Page 8048 1. NOTE: LH shown, RH similar. Remove the 2 wiper pivot arm nuts. To install, tighten to 40 Nm (30 lb-ft). 2. Remove the LH and RH wiper pivot arms. 3. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Adjust the wiper pivot arms. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Pivot Arm - Windshield Wiper > Page 8049 Wiper Arm: Service and Repair Wiper Mounting Arm and Pivot Shaft WIPER MOUNTING ARM AND PIVOT SHAFT Exploded View Removal and Installation 1. Remove the cowl panel grille. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Pivot Arm - Windshield Wiper > Page 8050 2. Remove the 3 windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly bolts and the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. - To install, tighten to 9 Nm (80 lb-in). 3. Disconnect the windshield wiper motor electrical connector. 4. Remove the wiper motor assembly. 5. To install, reverse the removal procedure Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Pivot Arm - Windshield Wiper > Page 8051 Wiper Arm: Service and Repair Wiper Pivot Arm - Rear WIPER PIVOT ARM - REAR Exploded View Removal and Installation 1. Open the wiper pivot arm cover. 2. Remove the pivot arm nut. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Arm > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Pivot Arm - Windshield Wiper > Page 8052 - To install, tighten to 12 Nm (9 lb-ft). 3. Remove the wiper pivot arm. 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. - Adjust the wiper pivot arms. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Service and Repair Wiper Blade: Service and Repair WIPER BLADE - REAR Exploded View Removal CAUTION: Lifting the wiper arm beyond its maximum angle may result in damage to the wiper arm or the wiper arm heel. - Allowing the wiper arm to contact the glass may result in damage to the glass. 1. Hold the wiper arm with one hand close to the wiper arm and wiper blade pivot joint and lift the arm to its maximum angle. 2. Hold the primary structure of the wiper blade with the other hand close to the wiper arm and wiper blade pivot joint. 3. Tightly grip and push on the wiper arm and wiper blade joint from beneath and separate the blade from the arm. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Blade > Component Information > Service and Repair > Page 8056 Installation 1. Attach the new wiper blade on the wiper arm and press it into place until a snap is heard. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Locations > Windshield Wiper Motor View 151-2 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Locations > Windshield Wiper Motor > Page 8061 View 151-21 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Windshield Wiper Motor C125 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Diagrams > Windshield Wiper Motor > Page 8064 C476 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Motor - Windshield Wiper Motor: Service and Repair Wiper Motor - Windshield WIPER MOTOR - WINDSHIELD Exploded View Removal and Installation Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Motor - Windshield > Page 8067 NOTE: A new wiper motor assembly comes with the linkage arm installed. 1. Remove the windshield wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft. 2. CAUTION: Do not remove the wiper motor linkage arm from the wiper motor assembly. If the arm is removed, the wiper arms may not park in the correct location. Separate the wiper motor linkage arm from the wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. Use a suitable tool at the location shown to separate the wiper linkage arm from the wiper mounting arm and pivot shaft assembly. 3. Remove the 3 bolts and the wiper motor. - To install, tighten to 13 Nm (10 lb-ft). 4. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Motor - Windshield > Page 8068 Wiper Motor: Service and Repair Wiper Motor - Rear Window WIPER MOTOR - REAR WINDOW Exploded View Removal and Installation 1. Remove the rear pivot arm. 2. Remove the rear wiper motor shaft nut cover. 3. Remove the rear wiper motor shaft nut. - To install, manually finger-tighten the nut, then tighten to 6 Nm (53 lb-in). 4. Open the liftgate window. 5. Remove the rear wiper motor cover trim panel. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Motor > Component Information > Service and Repair > Wiper Motor - Windshield > Page 8069 6. Remove the rear wiper motor. 1 Disconnect the electrical connector. 2 Remove the 2 rear window wiper motor nuts. To install, tighten to 7 Nm (62 lb-in). 3 Remove the rear window wiper motor. 7. To install, reverse the removal procedure. Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations Wiper Switch: Locations View 151-13 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8073 View 151-28 Ford Escape 4wd Workshop Manual (V6-3.0L (2008)) Ford Workshop Manuals > Wiper and Washer Systems > Wiper Switch > Component Information > Locations > Page 8074 C202